LIGHTHOUSE 4

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY OPERATING SYSTEM v4.6.74

OPERATION
INSTRUCTIONS
English (en-US)
Date: 02-2024
Document number: 81406 (Rev 11)
© 2024 Raymarine UK Limited
Legal notices

Trademark and patents notice

Raymarine, Tacktick, Pathfinder, ClearPulse, Truzoom, SeaTalk , SeaTalk hs, SeaTalkng , and Micronet, are registered or claimed trademarks of Raymarine
Belgium.
FLIR, Fishidy, Fishing Hot Spots, YachtSense , DockSense, LightHouse, RangeFusion, DownVision, SideVision, RealVision, HyperVision, Dragonfly,
Element, Quantum, Axiom, Instalert, Infrared Everywhere, The World’s Sixth Sense and ClearCruise are registered or claimed trademarks of FLIR
Systems, Inc.
All other trademarks, trade names, or company names referenced herein are used for identification only and are the property of their respective owners.
This product is protected by patents, design patents, patents pending, or design patents pending.

Fair Use Statement

You may print no more than three copies of this manual for your own use. You may not make any further copies or distribute or use the manual in any other
way including without limitation exploiting the manual commercially or giving or selling copies to third parties.

Content notice
Please ensure that you have obtained this document only from Raymarine®, and that it is the latest available version.
There are numerous third-party Internet websites (such as www.manualslib.com ) hosting Raymarine product manuals. These websites are not authorized by
Raymarine® to do so, and are often hosting illegitimate or older versions of Raymarine product manuals, which may contain inaccurate or misleading information.
To obtain the latest official documentation for a Raymarine® product, please visit the official Raymarine® website: www.raymarine.com/manuals

English (en-US)
Document number: 81406 (Rev 11)
AM;55398;2024-02-23T14:52:04
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 IMPORTANT INFORMATION.................. 23 3.5 Compatible peripheral product software .............. 33
Safety warnings ............................................................... 23 3.6 YachtSense Link network connection ................... 34
Product warnings ............................................................. 24 3.7 Legacy eS and gS Series compatibility with
Axiom displays ................................................................. 34
Electronic chart data ................................................ 24
3.8 Software updates ....................................................... 35
Regulatory notices........................................................... 25
Checking current software ..................................... 35
Disclaimer................................................................... 25
Updating software from a memory card.............. 36
End-User License Agreements (EULAs) ............ 25
Updating software over the internet ..................... 36
Open source license agreements......................... 25
Regulatory approvals .............................................. 25 CHAPTER 4 GENERAL INFORMATION ..................... 38
Warranty registration ............................................... 25 4.1 Memory card compatibility....................................... 39

IMO and SOLAS ....................................................... 26 Removing MicroSD card from its adaptor .......... 39
Technical accuracy ................................................... 26 Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom® and
Publication copyright ............................................... 26 Axiom®+ displays..................................................... 40
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom® 2 Pro
CHAPTER 2 DOCUMENT INFORMATION.................. 27
displays ....................................................................... 40
2.1 Product documentation ............................................ 28
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom® Pro
User manuals Print Shop ....................................... 28
2.2 Document conventions ............................................. 28
displays ....................................................................... 41
2.3 Document illustrations and screenshots .............. 29 Inserting memory card into external storage
2.4 Glossary ....................................................................... 29 devices ........................................................................ 41
4.2 Applications and integrations .................................. 42
CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DETAILS ............................ 30
4.3 Menu types .................................................................. 43
3.1 Applicable software version .................................... 31
4.4 Setting controls .......................................................... 44
3.2 LightHouse MFD software compatibility............... 31
4.5 Alarm and information notifications ....................... 45
3.3 Compatible displays .................................................. 31
4.6 Sidebar ......................................................................... 46
3.4 New software features.............................................. 32
Sidebar selector ........................................................ 46
Spotify app removal ................................................. 33
5
 Customizing data sidebars ..................................... 48 Load cell data ............................................................ 56
4.7 Alpha Series sidebar operations 4.10 Sonar depth data recording/logging .................... 56
(LightHouse™ 4 MFD) ................................................... 48
CHAPTER 5 GETTING STARTED............................... 57
Alpha Series network operations
5.1 Switch on / off ............................................................. 58
(LightHouse™ 4 MFD) ............................................ 49
4.8 Data overlays .............................................................. 49
Axiom® and Axiom® 2 displays with a power
swipe ........................................................................... 58
Adding a data overlay.............................................. 50
4.9 Display data ................................................................ 50
Axiom® and Axiom® 2 displays with a power
button .......................................................................... 58
Battery data ............................................................... 50
5.2 Controls ........................................................................ 59
Boat data .................................................................... 51
Axiom®, Axiom® +, Axiom® XL and Axiom®
Depth data.................................................................. 51
2 XL controls.............................................................. 59
Display data ............................................................... 51
Axiom® 2 Pro controls ............................................ 59
Distance data ............................................................ 51
Axiom® Pro controls ................................................ 60
Engine data ................................................................ 51
RMK controls ............................................................. 61
Fuel data..................................................................... 52
iKey Bluetooth keyboard controls ......................... 62
Environment data ..................................................... 52
5.3 Initial setup .................................................................. 63
Inside environment data ......................................... 53
First power up............................................................ 63
GPS data .................................................................... 53
First power up datamaster selection .................... 63
Heading data ............................................................. 53
Startup wizard ........................................................... 64
Navigation data ......................................................... 53
Axiom® 2 Pro keypad type selection ................... 65
Pilot data..................................................................... 54
Safety clearances ..................................................... 65
Speed data ................................................................. 54
First power up limitation on use
Time data.................................................................... 54
acknowledgement .................................................... 68
Wind data ................................................................... 54
Engine manufacturer selection ............................. 68
Tank level data .......................................................... 55
Multiple data sources (MDS) ................................. 68
Generator data .......................................................... 55
Battery configuration................................................ 69
6
 Assigning a function to the User Configurable Pairing a Bluetooth speaker................................... 82
key................................................................................ 70 5.7 Networking constraints ............................................. 82
Performing a settings reset .................................... 70 5.8 Internet connection .................................................... 83

Performing a factory reset ...................................... 70 YachtSense Link network connection.................. 84

Importing user data .................................................. 70 Connecting to the internet using Wi-Fi ................ 84
5.4 Calibration ................................................................... 71 Wi-Fi settings — Axiom displays .......................... 84
Calibration sources .................................................. 71 Wi-Fi settings — Axiom 2 displays ....................... 85
Sonar transducer calibration .................................. 71 CHAPTER 6 HOMESCREEN....................................... 86
RealVision™ AHRS calibration ............................. 72 6.1 Accepting the Limitations on Use .......................... 87
Transducer calibration (iTC-5)............................... 73 6.2 Homescreen overview .............................................. 87
STW calibration (DST810) ..................................... 75 6.3 Homescreen app page icons .................................. 88
6.4 MFD Apps ................................................................... 88
RSW series wind transducer configuration.......... 77
5.5 Shortcuts menu .......................................................... 78 Chart app .................................................................... 89
Taking a screenshot ................................................. 79 Radar app................................................................... 89
Activating touchlock ................................................. 79 Fishfinder app............................................................ 90
Radar standby ........................................................... 79 Dashboard and Engine apps ................................. 91
Eject SD card ............................................................ 79 Entertainment apps .................................................. 92
Enabling/Disabling sonar modules ....................... 80 YachtSense and DockSense apps ....................... 93
Autopilot shortcuts.................................................... 80 Other apps ................................................................. 93
6.5 Creating an app page ............................................... 94
Audio volume control ............................................... 80
Adjusting brightness ................................................ 81 Additional mode icon steps .................................... 94
Auto brightness ......................................................... 81 Customizing an existing app page ....................... 94
Display mode ............................................................. 81 Editing the splitscreen ratio .................................... 95
5.6 Device pairing ............................................................. 82 6.6 Homescreen Dynamic tile........................................ 95

Pairing a RMK remote keypad .............................. 82 Enabling and configuring the Dynamic tile.......... 96
6.7 Global positioning ...................................................... 96
Pairing with a Quantum Radar scanner .............. 82
7
 Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Import calibration .....................................................116
constellations ............................................................. 96 7.8 Setting fuel tanks as not for propulsion ...............116
Satellite based augmentation systems 7.9 Units settings menu .................................................117
7.10 Splashscreen and background images .............118
(SBAS) ........................................................................ 97
GNSS (GPS) Status ................................................ 98 Screen resolutions ..................................................118
GNSS settings........................................................... 98 Customizing the splashscreen .............................119
GNSS constellation selection compatible Customizing the homescreen back-
receivers ................................................................... 100 ground ........................................................................119
6.8 Status area ................................................................ 101 7.11 Shared Brightness ................................................. 120

Status area icons .................................................... 102 Setting up shared brightness ............................... 120
6.9 My data ...................................................................... 103 7.12 Datamaster .............................................................. 121

Fuel/trip manager ................................................... 103 Switching datamaster ............................................ 121

7.13 Performing a factory reset of a SeaTalk NG
Files ........................................................................... 105 device ............................................................................... 122
Import/export ........................................................... 105 7.14 Switching off sensor LEDs .................................. 122
6.10 My profiles ............................................................... 107 7.15 Find me .................................................................... 122
Demo profiles .......................................................... 108 7.16 IP device user interface access ......................... 123
7.17 Connecting to a wireless display ....................... 123
CHAPTER 7 SETTINGS ............................................ 109
Disconnecting a wireless display ........................ 124
7.1 Homescreen settings menus .................................110
7.2 Selecting display language ....................................111 Unpairing a wireless display ................................ 124
7.18 NMEA 0183 settings ............................................. 124
Languages ................................................................111
7.3 Boat details ................................................................111 NMEA 0183 settings .............................................. 125
7.4 Battery configuration ................................................113 CHAPTER 8 ALARMS MANAGER ............................ 126
7.5 Generator configuration ..........................................113 8.1 Alarms manager....................................................... 127
7.6 Tanks ...........................................................................114 8.2 Active alarm indication ........................................... 128
7.7 Calibrating tanks .......................................................115 8.3 Alarm settings ........................................................... 128
Run wizard calibration ............................................115 8.4 External alarm speaker / buzzer .......................... 130

8
 8.5 Acknowledging alarms ........................................... 130 9.5 Pilot pop-up ............................................................... 143
8.6 YachtSense Link router alarms ............................ 130 9.6 Autopilot Control — Pilot set-up menu ............... 143
8.7 Digital switching alarms ......................................... 131 9.7 Rudder damping levels and deadband
8.8 Man Overboard (MOB) ........................................... 131 angles ............................................................................... 146
MOB mode ............................................................... 132 Adjusting the Rudder Damping level ................. 146
8.9 DSC distress notification........................................ 132 CHAPTER 10 TROLLING MOTOR CONTROL ......... 147
8.10 High Speed Alarm ................................................. 132 10.1 Trolling motor integration ..................................... 148
CHAPTER 9 AUTOPILOT INTEGRATION................. 134 10.2 Trolling motor control overview .......................... 148
9.1 Commissioning - Evolution autopilot 10.3 Manual control ........................................................ 150
system .............................................................................. 135 10.4 Anchor mode .......................................................... 150
Commissioning pre-requisites ............................. 135 10.5 Hold heading........................................................... 151
10.6 Navigation mode .................................................... 152
Commissioning steps ............................................ 135
10.7 Alarms and limits ................................................... 153
Vessel hull type selection ..................................... 135
Using the Dockside wizard ................................... 135 CHAPTER 11 WAYPOINTS, ROUTES AND
TRACKS ..................................................................... 154
Compass linearization — Evolution
11.1 Waypoints ................................................................ 155
autopilots .................................................................. 138
Placing a waypoint using chart context
Compass lock .......................................................... 140
9.2 Autopilot control ....................................................... 140 menu.......................................................................... 155
Placing a waypoint at a specific latitude and
Engaging the autopilot — Locked
longitude ................................................................... 155
heading ..................................................................... 141
Placing a waypoint at your vessel's
Engaging the autopilot — Navigation ................ 141
location ...................................................................... 156
Engaging and disengaging the autopilot -
Waypoint management ......................................... 156
physical buttons ...................................................... 141
Waypoint symbols .................................................. 158
Disengaging the autopilot ..................................... 141
11.2 Routes ...................................................................... 159
9.3 Pilot sidebar .............................................................. 142
9.4 Pilot Version keypad LED status (Axiom® 2 Creating a Route .................................................... 159
Pro only)........................................................................... 143 Route waypoint spacing........................................ 159
9
 Route highlighting................................................... 160 Creating a trackline search (return)
Autoroute .................................................................. 161 pattern ....................................................................... 176
Importing a route .................................................... 162 12.6 Trackline search (non-return) pattern ............... 176
Route management ............................................... 163 Creating a trackline search (non-return)
11.3 Tracks ....................................................................... 164 pattern ....................................................................... 177
Creating a track ...................................................... 164 12.7 Polygon search pattern ........................................ 178
Converting a track to a route ............................... 165 Creating a polygon search pattern ..................... 178
Track management ................................................ 165 12.8 SAR pattern broadcast and receipt ................... 179
11.4 Sharing Waypoints, Routes and Tracks ........... 165 Hiding original SAR pattern ................................. 180
11.5 Waypoint, routes and tracks capacity ............... 166 12.9 Un-managed searches ......................................... 180
CHAPTER 12 SAR (SEARCH AND RESCUE) Broadcasting an un-managed SAR
PATTERNS................................................................. 167 pattern ....................................................................... 180
12.1 SAR (Search and Rescue) patterns.................. 168 SAR pattern receipt (un-managed / not
12.2 Sector search pattern ........................................... 168
assigned as SRU) .................................................. 181
Creating a sector search pattern ........................ 169 12.10 Managed searches .............................................. 182
Drift effects on sector search patterns .............. 170 SMC action — Broadcasting a SAR
12.3 Expanding square search pattern ..................... 171
pattern ....................................................................... 182
Creating an expanding square search SMC action — Instructing SRU to divert .......... 182
pattern ....................................................................... 171 SMC action — Instructing SRU to
Drift effects on expanding square search resume ...................................................................... 183
patterns ..................................................................... 173 SRU SAR pattern receipt notification
12.4 Creeping line / Parallel line search
pattern .............................................................................. 173 overview.................................................................... 184
SRU action — Accepting a SAR pattern .......... 185
Creating a Creeping line / Parallel line search
SRU search controls .............................................. 185
pattern ....................................................................... 174
12.5 Trackline search (return) pattern........................ 175 SRU action — Diverting from a SAR
pattern ....................................................................... 186
10
 SRU divert as instructed — overview ................ 186 Chart layers ............................................................. 201
SRU action — Diverting as instructed by Camera tracking ..................................................... 202
SMC ........................................................................... 187 13.3 Cartography overview .......................................... 202
SRU action — Resuming from SMC Supported cartography vendors ......................... 203
instructed point ........................................................ 188 End-User License Agreements (EULAs) .......... 203
12.11 Searches lists ....................................................... 188 13.4 LightHouse charts ................................................. 203
SMC searches list .................................................. 189 LightHouse Chart Store ........................................ 204
Search history ......................................................... 189 Pre-loaded LightHouse Chart Cards ................. 204
CHAPTER 13 CHART APP - GENERAL ................... 190 Hybrid LightHouse charts ..................................... 205
13.1 Chart app chapters ................................................ 191 Redeeming chart voucher .................................... 205
13.2 Chart app overview ............................................... 191 Downloading charts from My Charts ................. 205
13.5 S-63 Encrypted Charts ......................................... 206
Chart app onscreen controls ............................... 192
Chart app simulator ............................................... 192 S-63 Encrypted Charts installation
Chart ranging and panning ................................. 193 process ..................................................................... 206
Quick adjust menu ................................................. 193 Obtaining an S-63 MFD activation file............... 207
Context menu .......................................................... 194 Copying user permit file(s) to memory
AIS target context menu ....................................... 194 card ............................................................................ 208
Radar target context menu .................................. 195 Purchasing S-63 Encrypted Charts.................... 208
Selecting cartography............................................ 195 Installing base cells and cell permits ................. 208
Chart modes ............................................................ 196 Installing cumulative updates .............................. 209
Vessel icon ............................................................... 197 S-63 Encrypted Chart settings ............................ 210
13.6 Navigation ............................................................... 210
Chart motion mode ................................................ 197
Chart orientation ..................................................... 198 Cross Track Error (XTE) ........................................211
Vessel details .......................................................... 199 Navigating to a waypoint or point of interest
Fuel range ................................................................ 200 (manual steering) ....................................................211
Charted objects ....................................................... 201
11
 Navigating to a waypoint or point of interest Measuring vessel to point..................................... 241
(autopilot) ................................................................. 212 Measuring point to point ....................................... 241
Following a Route (manual steering) ................. 212 Deleting rulers ......................................................... 242
Following a Route (autopilot) ............................... 214 13.15 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality .................. 242
Automatic turning ................................................... 215 Field of View ............................................................ 242
Following a Route using automatic 13.16 Chart settings menu ............................................ 243
turning ....................................................................... 216 Cartography settings menu .................................. 243
13.7 Rudder bar indicator ............................................. 218 Layers settings menu ............................................ 244
13.8 Depths and contours............................................. 218 Depth settings menu.............................................. 247
Depth soundings..................................................... 218 View & motion settings menu .............................. 249
Depth contours ........................................................ 219 Advanced settings menu ...................................... 250
RealBathy™ depth contours ................................ 221 Page settings menu ............................................... 251
SonarChart™ Live.................................................. 222
CHAPTER 14 CHART APP - NAVIGATE MODE ........ 252
13.9 Target tracking ........................................................ 223
14.1 Navigate mode ....................................................... 253
AIS target tracking.................................................. 223 14.2 Navigate mode main menu ................................. 253
Radar target tracking ............................................. 228 14.3 Navigate mode settings menus .......................... 253
13.10 Collision avoidance ............................................. 230
CHAPTER 15 CHART APP - FISHING CHART
Dangerous targets alarm ...................................... 231 MODE......................................................................... 254
Predicted areas of danger .................................... 231 15.1 Fishing chart mode ................................................ 255
Obstruction alarm (legacy LightHouse 15.2 Fishing chart mode main menu .......................... 255
charts) ....................................................................... 236 15.3 Fishing intel menu ................................................. 255
LightHouse charts dangerous objects ............... 238 Sea surface temperature menu .......................... 256
13.11 Target intercept ..................................................... 238 15.4 SiriusXM layer options.......................................... 256
13.12 Reeds almanac .................................................... 239 15.5 Fishing chart mode settings menus .................. 256
13.13 Find nearest .......................................................... 239
CHAPTER 16 CHART APP - FISH MAPPING
13.14 Measure ................................................................. 241 MODE......................................................................... 257
12
 16.1 Fish mapping mode .............................................. 258 17.14 Weather settings menu ...................................... 272
Activating your SiriusXM receiver....................... 258 17.15 Weather subscription .......................................... 272
16.2 Fish mapping mode main menu......................... 259 17.16 Glossary of weather terms ................................ 273
16.3 Fishing recommendations ................................... 259 CHAPTER 18 CHART APP - TIDES MODE .............. 275
16.4 Fish mapping layers .............................................. 260 18.1 Tides mode.............................................................. 276
16.5 Layer / fish type identification ............................ 260 18.2 Tides mode main menu ........................................ 276
16.6 Limiting data display limits................................... 261 18.3 Using animation controls ..................................... 277
16.7 Fish mapping subscription................................... 261 18.4 Setting a specific date for animations ............... 277
16.8 Fish mapping mode settings menus ................. 261 18.5 Tide station information ........................................ 277
CHAPTER 17 CHART APP - WEATHER MODE ........ 262 18.6 LightHouse charts dynamic tide graphic .......... 278
17.1 Weather mode ........................................................ 263 18.7 Navionics dynamic tide graphic ......................... 278
18.8 Current station information .................................. 278
Weather mode context menu .............................. 263
18.9 LightHouse Charts dynamic current
17.2 Weather mode main menu .................................. 263 graphic.............................................................................. 279
17.3 Activating your SiriusXM receiver ...................... 264 18.10 C-Map dynamic current graphic ....................... 279
SR200 diagnostics mode ..................................... 264 18.11 Navionics dynamic current graphic ................. 279
17.4 Weather layers ....................................................... 264 18.12 Displaying tide or current graphs ..................... 280
17.5 Animated weather ................................................. 265 18.13 Tides mode settings menus .............................. 280
17.6 Weather radar layer .............................................. 266
CHAPTER 19 CHART APP - ANCHOR MODE ......... 281
17.7 Cities and Surface observation stations
layers ................................................................................ 267 19.1 Anchor mode .......................................................... 282
17.8 Cloud top and Lightning layers ........................... 267 19.2 Anchor mode main menu .................................... 283
17.9 Sea surface temperature and Surface 19.3 Setting up the anchor drag alarm ...................... 283
pressure layers............................................................... 268 19.4 Anchor mode settings menus ............................. 284
Surface pressure patterns .................................... 268 CHAPTER 20 SAILING FEATURES .......................... 285
17.10 Storm cast and Storm tracks layers ................ 269 20.1 Chart app - Racing mode .................................... 286
17.11 Wind and Watchbox layers ................................ 270
Racing mode ........................................................... 286
17.12 Wave direction, wave height and wave
period layers ................................................................... 271 Racing mode main menu ..................................... 286
17.13 Weather mode settings menus ........................ 272 Racing mode settings menus .............................. 286
13
 20.2 Laylines .................................................................... 286 CHIRP Sonar overview ......................................... 305
Layline data requirements .................................... 287 DownVision™ overview ......................................... 306
Displaying and interpreting laylines ................... 287 SideVision™ overview .......................................... 307
Fixed angles laylines ............................................. 288 RealVision™ 3D overview .................................... 308
Polar laylines ........................................................... 289 21.2 Sonar module range ............................................. 309

Wind shift data ........................................................ 292 Sonar minimum depths ......................................... 309
20.3 Wind shift bar .......................................................... 293 21.3 Fishfinder app overview ....................................... 309
20.4 Sail plan recommendations ................................. 294 Fishfinder app controls .......................................... 310
Sail plan csv file layout .......................................... 294 3D Vision channel controls....................................311
Importing a sail plan............................................... 295 21.4 Opening the Fishfinder app ..................................311
20.5 Sailing data page ................................................... 296 21.5 Sonar transducer calibration ............................... 313
20.6 Autopilot wind vane mode ................................... 296 Depth offset.............................................................. 313
Operating hints for wind vane mode .................. 298 Setting a depth offset............................................. 313
Tacking in wind vane mode .................................. 298 Setting a temperature offset ................................ 313
Steering to wind (autopilot) .................................. 299 Ping depth limit ....................................................... 314
20.7 Race start line (SmartStart™) and Race 21.6 Sonar channels ...................................................... 314
timer .................................................................................. 299
Selecting a Sonar channel ................................... 315
Creating the Race start line ................................. 300 21.7 Placing a Waypoint (Sonar, DownVision and
Starting the Race timer ......................................... 301 SideVision) ...................................................................... 315
Race laylines ........................................................... 302 Placing a waypoint in the 3D Vision
Race start page ...................................................... 302 channel ..................................................................... 316
Race start sidebar .................................................. 303 21.8 Zoom mode ............................................................. 316

CHAPTER 21 FISHFINDER APP............................... 304 Zoom mode view .................................................... 317

21.9 Fish detection ......................................................... 317
21.1 Sonar technologies ............................................... 305
21.10 Sonar scroll back (history) ................................. 318
Traditional sonar technology................................ 305 21.11 Sonar sensitivity controls ................................... 319
CHIRP technology.................................................. 305 21.12 Frequency tuning ................................................. 319
14
 21.13 Fishfinder settings menu.................................... 320 Check and adjust bearing alignment ................. 338
21.14 Sonar display settings menu............................. 320 22.6 Radar modes .......................................................... 338
3D Vision sonar display settings ......................... 320 22.7 Range rings ............................................................. 339
22.8 Range and bearing ................................................ 340
SideVision™ sonar display settings ................... 321
DownVision™ sonar display settings ................ 322 VRM (Variable Range Marker) / EBL
CHIRP and traditional sonar display (Electronic Bearing Line) ...................................... 340
22.9 AIS targets............................................................... 341
settings ...................................................................... 323
21.15 Transducer settings menu ................................. 324 AIS target capacity ................................................. 341
21.16 Sounder settings menu ...................................... 324 AIS target list ........................................................... 341
21.17 Fish detection settings menu ............................ 325 AIS targets ............................................................... 342
21.18 Page settings menu ............................................ 326 AIS settings menu .................................................. 343
CHAPTER 22 RADAR APP........................................ 327 22.10 Radar targets ........................................................ 344
22.1 Radar app overview .............................................. 328 Radar target acquisition data source
Radar app controls ................................................. 328 requirements............................................................ 344
Radar app context menu ...................................... 329 Radar targets ........................................................... 344
Camera tracking ..................................................... 331 Acquiring a target manually ................................. 345
22.2 Compatible Radar scanners ............................... 331 Automatic target acquisition................................. 345
22.3 Radar feature comparison ................................... 332 Radar target list ...................................................... 346
22.4 Opening the Radar app ........................................ 335 Target settings ......................................................... 347
Putting the radar into standby ............................. 336 Onscreen target settings ...................................... 348
Powering down your radar scanner ................... 336 Clearing / resetting trails ....................................... 348
22.5 Set up and configuration ...................................... 336
Target context menu .............................................. 348
Selecting a Radar scanner ................................... 336 22.11 Target data reference mode .............................. 349
Dual range................................................................ 337 22.12 Dangerous targets alarm ................................... 349
Timed Radar transmission ................................... 337 22.13 Guard zone alarms .............................................. 350
Setting open array antenna size ......................... 337 22.14 Doppler Radar overview .................................... 350
Doppler mode .......................................................... 351
15
 Doppler data source requirements ..................... 351 Broadcasting a route ............................................. 366
22.15 Blank sectors ........................................................ 352 Sending a route using direct message .............. 366
22.16 Radar sensitivity controls ................................... 353 Adjusting Start time and Expiry time for
22.17 Radar settings menus ........................................ 353
routes ........................................................................ 367
Transmission settings menu ................................ 354 Receiving a route ................................................... 368
View & Motion settings menu .............................. 354 Following a received route ................................... 368
Presentation settings menu ................................. 355 Cancelling a sent route ......................................... 368
Preferences settings menu .................................. 356 23.8 Intel targets ............................................................. 369
Installation settings menu ..................................... 356 Creating an Intel target ......................................... 370
Advanced settings menu ...................................... 357 Accessing target options ...................................... 370
Page settings menu ............................................... 358 Intel target options.................................................. 370
CHAPTER 23 FIRST RESPONDER .......................... 359 Intel target list .......................................................... 370
23.1 First responder features ....................................... 360 23.9 DSC targets ............................................................ 371
LightHouse software updates for STEDs Accessing target options ...................................... 371
enabled systems..................................................... 361 DSC target options ................................................. 371
Responder settings ................................................ 361 DSC target list ......................................................... 371
Act in secondary mode ......................................... 362 23.10 Target Of Interest (TOI) ...................................... 372
STEDS messaging transmission FIDs and OneShot TOI decay times .................................... 373
checksums ............................................................... 362 TOI OneShot settings ............................................ 373
NMEA 2000 messages ......................................... 362 TOI transmission rates .......................................... 373
23.2 Lost depth alarm .................................................... 363 TOI position updates ............................................. 374
23.3 Heading and SOG Homescreen status ............ 363 Accessing target options ...................................... 374
23.4 Settings password protection ............................. 363 TOI options .............................................................. 374
23.5 Data logging ............................................................ 364
TOI list ....................................................................... 375
23.6 Waypoint at Range and Bearing from
location ............................................................................. 365 23.11 First responder AIS modes ................................ 375
23.7 Route sending and receiving .............................. 365 AIS mode status icons .......................................... 375
16
 Blue Force Tracking ............................................... 376 Dashboard app onscreen controls ..................... 390
23.12 AIS high target alarm .......................................... 376 Switching data page .............................................. 390
23.13 SITREP (Situation report) .................................. 376 Selecting data pages to display .......................... 390
23.14 First responder target context menus ............. 377 25.2 Default data pages ................................................ 391
23.15 Depth markers ...................................................... 378 25.3 Customizing a data item ...................................... 391
Placing a depth marker ......................................... 378 Display data ............................................................. 392
23.16 Import and export Waypoints and Routes 25.4 Engine page ............................................................ 398
over NMEA networks .................................................... 378
25.5 Sailing page ............................................................ 399
Importing Waypoints or Routes over NMEA
Sailing dials .............................................................. 400
2000 ........................................................................... 379 25.6 Race start page ...................................................... 400
Importing waypoints or routes over NMEA 25.7 Navigation page ..................................................... 401
0183 ........................................................................... 379 Close hauled angle indicators ............................. 402
Exporting waypoints or routes over NMEA 25.8 Rolling road page .................................................. 402
0183 ........................................................................... 381 25.9 Fuel page ................................................................. 403
Waypoint, routes and tracks capacity ................ 383 25.10 Tanks page ............................................................ 403
25.11 Bidata and single data pages ........................... 404
CHAPTER 24 MESSAGING APP .............................. 384
25.12 Generators page .................................................. 404
24.1 Messaging app ....................................................... 385
Generator start/stop ............................................... 406
Transmission type .................................................. 385 25.13 CZone plug and play........................................... 406
Message inbox ........................................................ 385
Creating CZone digital switching pages
Broadcasting a new message ............................. 386
automatically............................................................ 406
Sending a new direct message ........................... 387 25.14 App menu .............................................................. 407
Replying to a message ......................................... 387
Settings menu ......................................................... 407
Onscreen keyboard ............................................... 387
Pages settings menu ............................................. 408
Message symbols................................................... 388
Circuits settings menu ........................................... 409
CHAPTER 25 DASHBOARD APP ............................. 389 Units settings menu ............................................... 409
25.1 Dashboard app overview ..................................... 390 Engine RPM settings ..............................................411
17
 Data response settings ..........................................411 Cancelling troll control ........................................... 425
Page settings menu ............................................... 412 26.7 Cruise control ......................................................... 425

CHAPTER 26 MERCURY APP .................................. 413 Enabling cruise control .......................................... 425
26.1 Mercury app overview .......................................... 414 Cancelling cruise control ...................................... 426
26.8 Sport exhaust ......................................................... 426
Mercury features ..................................................... 415
26.9 Steering angle indicator ....................................... 426
Splitscreen app pages........................................... 415 26.10 Engine data page ................................................ 426
Changing alternator voltage to steering angle 26.11 Faults ...................................................................... 427
indicator .................................................................... 416 Fault code history ................................................... 427
System status .......................................................... 416 On Board Diagnostics (OBD) .............................. 428
Engine warning messages ................................... 416
CHAPTER 27 YAMAHA APP ..................................... 429
Mercury SmartCraft helm grouping .................... 417
27.1 Yamaha engine gateway selection .................... 430
Information messages ........................................... 418
26.2 Mercury sidebar overview.................................... 418
Compatible Yamaha gateways............................ 430
27.2 Yamaha HDMI overview ...................................... 430
26.3 SkyHook mode ....................................................... 419
27.3 Yamaha app overview .......................................... 430
BowHook mode ...................................................... 420
Requirements .......................................................... 431
DriftHook mode ....................................................... 420
26.4 Autopilot control ..................................................... 420
Yamaha app controls ............................................. 431
Switching data page .............................................. 431
Enabling and disabling Mercury® autopilot
27.4 Customizing Data pages...................................... 431
integration................................................................. 421
Available data items ............................................... 431
Engaging Autoheading .......................................... 422
27.5 Engine page ............................................................ 435
Engaging Route mode .......................................... 422
Engines ..................................................................... 435
Disengage the autopilot (Standby) ..................... 423
26.5 Active Trim .............................................................. 423
Transmission ........................................................... 436
Status and warning indicators ............................. 436
Setting up Active Trim ........................................... 424
26.6 Troll control.............................................................. 424
Tanks ......................................................................... 437
Engine trim ............................................................... 437
Enabling troll control .............................................. 425
18
 Troll mode ................................................................ 438 ClearCruise settings (Object Detection /
27.6 Settings .................................................................... 438 Video Analytics) ...................................................... 462
Fault codes .............................................................. 438 29.5 Augmented Reality (AR) overview .................... 463
Maintenance ............................................................ 438 29.6 Augmented Reality flags ...................................... 463

Advanced ................................................................. 438 Selected flags .......................................................... 464

Goto flag ................................................................... 465
CHAPTER 28 VIDEO APP ......................................... 440
29.7 ClearCruise settings (Augmented
28.1 Video app overview ............................................... 441 Reality) ............................................................................. 466
Video app pages ..................................................... 441 Range limit ............................................................... 466
Renaming video feeds .......................................... 442 29.8 Roll correction ........................................................ 467
Video app controls ................................................. 442 29.9 AR200 Calibration (Linearization)...................... 468
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (PTZ) camera controls ............. 442 Magnetic deviation ................................................. 469
Image flip and mirroring ........................................ 443 AR200 calibration settings ................................... 469
28.2 Thermal camera screen overview ..................... 444 Continual monitoring and adaptation ................ 469
28.3 Opening the Video app ........................................ 444
Compass lock .......................................................... 470
Selecting a video feed ........................................... 446
CHAPTER 30 YOUTUBE & YOUTUBE TV................ 471
Dual streaming ........................................................ 446
30.1 YouTube TV ............................................................ 472
28.4 Video app settings ................................................. 447
30.2 YouTube ................................................................... 472
28.5 Maritime (M-Series) camera compatibil-
ity ....................................................................................... 450 30.3 MFD controls .......................................................... 472

CHAPTER 29 CLEARCRUISE................................... 456 CHAPTER 31 AUDIO APP......................................... 474

29.1 ClearCruise™ features ......................................... 457 31.1 Audio app overview ............................................... 475
29.2 Camera setup ......................................................... 458 Compatible entertainment systems.................... 475
Fixed camera calibration ...................................... 458 Audio app controls ................................................. 476
Pan and Tilt camera calibration .......................... 459 Audio sidebar .......................................................... 478
29.3 AR200 setup for Augmented Reality ................ 461 31.2 Opening the Audio app ........................................ 479
29.4 ClearCruise™ Object Detection (Video 31.3 Getting started ........................................................ 480
Analytics) overview ....................................................... 461
19
 Selecting an audio zone ....................................... 480 Enable sync ............................................................. 495
Selecting an audio source .................................... 480 Disable sync ............................................................ 496
Muting and unmuting ............................................. 480 33.6 Navionics plotter sync .......................................... 496
Browsing for tracks ................................................ 481 33.7 Controlling your display using
RayControl ...................................................................... 496
Browsing for stations / channels ......................... 481 33.8 Controlling your display using
Saving presets ........................................................ 481 RayRemote ..................................................................... 497
Powering off entertainment systems ................. 481 33.9 Viewing your MFD screen using
RayView ........................................................................... 497
31.4 Audio app menu options ...................................... 482
Audio app settings menu ...................................... 482 CHAPTER 34 PARTNER INTEGRATION AND
THIRD-PARTY APPS ................................................. 498
Adjusting balance and fade controls .................. 483
34.1 Partner integration ................................................. 499
Adjusting multi-zone controls .............................. 484 34.2 LightHouse third-party apps ................................ 499
SR200 diagnostics mode ..................................... 484 34.3 App launcher........................................................... 499
CHAPTER 32 PDF VIEWER APP.............................. 486 Installing Lighthouse third-party apps................ 500
32.1 PDF Viewer app overview ................................... 487 Removing an apk app ........................................... 500
32.2 Opening PDF files ................................................. 487 34.4 Interface shortcuts on the homescreen ............ 501
32.3 PDF Viewer controls ............................................. 488 34.5 Bluetooth speaker set up ..................................... 501
32.4 Searching a PDF ................................................... 488
Enabling and disabling Bluetooth ....................... 501
CHAPTER 33 MOBILE APP SUPPORT .................... 489 Bluetooth Settings .................................................. 501
33.1 Raymarine mobile apps ....................................... 490 Pairing a Bluetooth speaker................................. 502
33.2 Connecting an Android device to the Bluetooth volume control ...................................... 502
display .............................................................................. 490
33.3 Connecting an iOS device to the display.......... 491 CHAPTER 35 YACHTSENSE ECOSYSTEM............. 503
33.4 Raymarine app ....................................................... 491 35.1 YachtSense ecosystem ........................................ 504
How to obtain the Raymarine app ...................... 491 On-boat features..................................................... 504
LightHouse charts .................................................. 492 Off-boat premium features ................................... 506
Account settings ..................................................... 494 35.2 How to obtain the Raymarine app ..................... 506
33.5 Fishidy sync ............................................................ 495
20
 How to connect guide ............................................ 507 Performing a power on reset on an Axiom®
Connect to a chartplotter (MFD) directly ........... 507 Pro display ............................................................... 520
Display mirroring (view and control) .................. 507 Performing a power on reset on an Axiom® 2
Transferring LightHouse charts ........................... 507 Pro display ............................................................... 520
Chartplotter file transfer ........................................ 507 36.7 Radar troubleshooting .......................................... 521
Connect to your YachtSense Link router .......... 508 Changing Quantum radar channel ..................... 522
Geofencing ............................................................... 508 36.8 GNSS (GPS) troubleshooting ............................. 522
Data view and channel control ............................ 509 36.9 Sonar troubleshooting .......................................... 523

User access management ................................... 509 Sonar depth data recording/logging................... 525
Boat alerts ................................................................ 509 Diagnostics sonar recording ................................ 525
36.10 Camera troubleshooting..................................... 527
Boat systems ........................................................... 510
36.11 Augmented Reality (AR) Troubleshoot-
35.3 Deleting a boat system ......................................... 510
ing ...................................................................................... 529
35.4 Unlinking (Removing) a router.............................511
36.12 Wi-Fi troubleshooting .......................................... 530
35.5 YachtSense Link router account transfer /
36.13 IP address conflict troubleshooting ................. 532
ownership transfer ......................................................... 513
36.14 Wireless display troubleshooting ..................... 533
CHAPTER 36 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................ 514 36.15 Data troubleshooting........................................... 533
36.1 Troubleshooting ..................................................... 515 36.16 Touchscreen troubleshooting ............................ 534
36.2 Diagnostic product information ........................... 515
CHAPTER 37 TECHNICAL SUPPORT...................... 535
Saving product information .................................. 515 37.1 Raymarine product support and
Saving crash and system logs ............................ 515 servicing ........................................................................... 536
Saving YachtSense Link logs .............................. 516 Viewing product information ................................ 537
36.3 RNS-8 Diagnostic information ............................ 516 Remote Support via AnyDesk ............................. 537
36.4 NMEA 0183 diagnostics....................................... 517 37.2 Learning resources ............................................... 537
36.5 NMEA 2000 diagnostics....................................... 518
36.6 Power up troubleshooting .................................... 519 APPENDIX A NMEA 0183 SENTENCE
SUPPORT .................................................................. 539
Performing a power on reset on touch only
displays ..................................................................... 520 APPENDIX B NMEA 2000 PGN SUPPORT .............. 540
21
APPENDIX C LIGHTHOUSE 4 SOFTWARE
RELEASE HISTORY .................................................. 543

APPENDIX D PERIPHERAL PRODUCT SOFTWARE

COMPATIBILITY......................................................... 546

APPENDIX E HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

COMPATIBILITY......................................................... 548

APPENDIX F ETHERNET (IPV4) NETWORKING

OF RAYMARINE DEVICES WITH THIRD-PARTY
PRODUCTS ............................................................... 550

APPENDIX G ANDROID APK COMPATIBILITY ........ 553

APPENDIX H GLOSSARY ......................................... 554

APPENDIX I DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY ........ 558

22
CHAPTER 1: IMPORTANT Warning: Distraction disclaimer
INFORMATION • The MFD/Chartplotter includes various entertainment apps.
Whilst navigating do NOT let these apps distract your
attention from safe navigation.
• Any distraction while navigating causes a lapse in
Safety warnings concentration which increases the risk of collision. To avoid
hazards you must give navigation your full attention at all
Warning: Ensure safe navigation times.
This product is intended only as an aid to navigation and
must never be used in preference to sound navigational
judgment. Only official government charts and notices to
Warning: Autopilot usage
mariners contain all the current information needed for safe Autopilots navigate a preset course and do NOT respond
navigation, and the captain is responsible for their prudent to hazards automatically. The operator must remain at the
use. It is the user’s responsibility to use official government helm at all times and be ready to avoid hazards and warn
charts, notices to mariners, caution and proper navigational passengers of course changes.
skill when operating this or any other Raymarine product.
Warning: Position holding/trolling features
Warning: Minimum Safe Depth, Width and A rotating propeller, moving vessel, or a device attached to a
Height moving vessel can cause serious injury or death to people
Depending on cartography vendor, the [Minimum safe depth], in the water. The MFD includes features which can control
[Minimum safe width], and [Minimum safe height] settings that vessel engines and/or devices which can move the vessel.
you specify for your vessel will be used during automatic route Stop the engines immediately whenever anyone is in the
generation. These settings will ensure that automatic routes water near the vessel.
are not generated in areas that are unsuitable for your vessel.
Minimum safe settings are user-defined calculations. As these Warning: Automatic route generation
calculations are outside of Raymarine’s control, Raymarine • Do NOT rely on automatically generated routes to guarantee
will not be held liable for any damage, physical or otherwise, that the route is safe to navigate. You MUST review the
resulting from the use of the automatic route generation suggested route carefully and where necessary edit the
feature or the [Minimum safe depth], [Minimum safe width] or route before following it.
[Minimum safe height] settings.
• If a waypoint within any automatically generated route is
added or moved the Automatic route generation algorithm
Warning: Maintain a permanent watch will NOT be used, extra care should be taken to ensure that
Always maintain a permanent watch, this will allow you to the route leg and any moved waypoints are safe to navigate.
respond to situations as they develop. Failure to maintain a
permanent watch puts yourself, your vessel and others at
serious risk of harm.

Important information 23
 Warning: Traffic separation Product warnings
Automatic route generation features do not adhere to the
Traffic Separation Schemes identified in Rule 10 of the
Warning: Anti virus protection
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea 1972 The system does not include protection against computer
as amended. viruses. Before inserting any memory device ensure it is free
from computer viruses by scanning the device with a suitable
Raymarine® therefore recommends that you do NOT use
anti virus application with up to date virus definitions.
Automatic route generation to create any part of a route
which will cross traffic lanes or pass near to traffic separation
lines. In these situations Automatic route generation MUST Electronic chart data
be switched Off and the route or route leg MUST be built
manually, ensuring compliance to the rules laid out in the Raymarine does not warrant the accuracy of such information, and is
above regulations. not responsible for damages or injuries caused by errors in chart data
or information utilized by the product and supplied by third parties. Use
of electronic charts provided by third parties is subject to the supplier's
Warning: Minimum Sonar Depth End-User License Agreement (EULA).
Accurate bottom tracking can be unreliable in depths
shallower than 0.8 m/2.62 ft When operating at or below this Caution: Care of chart and memory cards
depth be cautious of misleading sonar returns or false bottom
To avoid irreparable damage to and / or loss of data from
tracking.
chart and memory cards:
• Ensure that chart and memory cards are fitted the correct
Warning: Radar transmission safety way around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.
The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure
• DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or
all personnel are clear of the scanner when the radar is
pliers to insert or remove a chart or memory card.
transmitting.
• Ensure correct memory card ejection procedure is carried
out before removing the chart or memory card from the
Warning: Sonar operation card reader.
• NEVER touch the transducer face when the sonar is
powered on.
Caution: Ensure card reader cover or door is
• SWITCH OFF the sonar if divers are likely to be within 7.6 m securely closed
(25 ft) of the transducer.
To prevent water ingress and consequent damage to the
product, ensure that the card reader door or cover is firmly
Warning: Day mode brightness warning closed.
Switching from Night mode to Day mode instantly increases
the display brightness to maximum. This will impact the
operator’s night vision, due to the relative brightness of Day
mode in night time conditions.

24
 Caution: Sun covers • (b) the privacy or other practices of such third-party hardware.

• If your product is supplied with a sun cover, to protect The fact that Raymarine’s documentation may make reference to such
against the damaging effects of ultraviolet (UV) light, always third-party hardware does not indicate any approval or endorsement of
fit the sun cover when the product is not in use. any such third-party hardware. Raymarine may reference such third-party
hardware only as a convenience.
• To avoid potential loss, sun covers must be removed when
travelling at high speed, whether in water or when the THIS INFORMATION IS MADE AVAILABLE BY RAYMARINE UK LIMITED
vessel is being towed. ON THE BASIS THAT YOU EXCLUDE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED ALL LIABILITY WHATSOEVER FOR ANY LOSS
OR DAMAGE HOWSOEVER ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
Caution: Product cleaning INFORMATION OR RELIANCE UPON THIS INFORMATION.
When cleaning products: Raymarine UK Limited does not exclude Raymarine UK Limited’s liability
• Switch off power supply. (if any) to you for personal injury or death resulting from Raymarine UK
Limited’s negligence, for fraud or for any matter which it would be illegal
• Use a clean damp cloth to wipe clean. to exclude or to attempt to exclude.
• Do NOT use: abrasive, acidic, ammonia, solvent or other
chemical based cleaning products. End-User License Agreements (EULAs)
• Do NOT use a jet wash. The EULAs for third-party electronic charts are available via the following
links:
• LightHouse charts: — LightHouse Navigation Charts EULA 84231-3-EN.pdf
• Navionics charts: https://www.navionics.com/usa/la
Regulatory notices
• CMAP charts: https://www.c-map.com/legal/terms-and-conditions-eula
Disclaimer
Raymarine does not warrant that this product is error-free or that it is Open source license agreements
compatible with products manufactured by any person or entity other than This product is subject to certain open source license agreements. Copies
Raymarine. of the license agreements can be found on the Raymarine website:
Raymarine is not responsible for damages or injuries caused by your use or www.raymarine.com/manuals.
inability to use the product, by the interaction of the product with products
manufactured by others, or by errors in information utilized by the product Regulatory approvals
supplied by third parties.
Third-party hardware, such as converters, adapters, routers, switches, Access Regulatory approvals are available to view on your display from the settings
Points etc., provided by third parties, may be made available directly to you menu, [Homescreen > Settings > Regulatory approvals]
by other companies or individuals under separate terms and conditions,
including separate fees and charges. Raymarine UK Limited or its affiliates Warranty registration
have not tested or screened the third-party hardware.
To register your Raymarine product ownership, please visit
Raymarine has no control over, and is not responsible for: www.raymarine.com and register online.
• (a) the content and operation of such third-party hardware; or:
Important information 25
It is important that you register your product to receive full warranty benefits.
Your unit package includes a bar code label indicating the serial number of
the unit. You will need this serial number when registering your product
online. You should retain the label for future reference.

IMO and SOLAS

The equipment described within this document is intended for use on
leisure marine boats and workboats NOT covered by International Maritime
Organization (IMO) and Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) Carriage Regulations.

Technical accuracy
To the best of our knowledge, the information in this document was correct
at the time it was produced. However, Raymarine cannot accept liability
for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. In addition, our policy of
continuous product improvement may change specifications without notice.
As a result, Raymarine cannot accept liability for any differences between
the product and this document. Please check the Raymarine website
(www.raymarine.com) to ensure you have the most up-to-date version(s) of
the documentation for your product.

Publication copyright
Copyright ©2024 Raymarine UK Ltd. All rights reserved. No parts of this
material may be copied, translated, or transmitted (in any medium) without
the prior written permission of Raymarine UK Ltd.

26
CHAPTER 2: DOCUMENT INFORMATION
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 2.1 Product documentation — page 28

• 2.2 Document conventions — page 28
• 2.3 Document illustrations and screenshots — page 29
• 2.4 Glossary — page 29

Document information 27
2.1 Product documentation Note:

The following documentation is applicable to your product: • Accepted methods of payment for printed manuals are credit cards and
PayPal.
Applicable documents • Printed manuals can be shipped worldwide.
• 81406 — LightHouse™ 4 Advanced Operation instructions (This document) • Further manuals will be added to the Print Shop over the coming months
• 81393 — DockSense™ Alert operation instructions. for both new and legacy products.
• 81398 — DockSense™ Control operation instructions. • Raymarine user manuals are also available to download free-of-charge
from the Raymarine® website, in the popular PDF format. These PDF files
• 81418 — Avikus NeuBoat Dock operation instructions.
can be viewed on a PC / laptop, tablet, smartphone, or on the latest
This and other Raymarine product documents are available to download in generation of Raymarine® multifunction displays.
PDF format from www.raymarine.com.

Related documents 2.2 Document conventions

• 87298 — Axiom® display Installation instructions
The following conventions are used throughout this document.
• 87414 — Axiom®+ display Installation instructions
• 87219 — Axiom® Pro display Installation instructions Formatting of user interface menus and settings.
• 87344 — Axiom® XL display Installation instructions References to menus, setting options and physical buttons are formatted
• 87443 — Axiom® 2 Pro display Installation instructions using square brackets [].
• 87445 — Axiom® 2 XL display Installation instructions Examples:
• 81367 — RMK-10 Remote Keypad Installation and operation instructions • “You can select your desired cartography from the [Cartography selection]
menu.”
• 81351 — RMK-9 Remote Keypad Installation and operation instructions
• “MFD apps are accessed from the [Homescreen].”
• 81370 — LightHouse™ 3 Advanced Operation instructions
• “Press the [Home] button to return to the Homescreen.”
• 81405 — First responder LightHouse™ 3 operation instructions
Procedures for performing specific tasks using the product’s
User manuals Print Shop user interface.
Raymarine® provides a Print Shop service, enabling you to purchase a The term “Select” is used to refer to the action of:
high-quality, professionally-printed manual for your Raymarine® product, • Touchscreen control — using your finger to select a menu option or item
delivered directly to your door. on the screen.
Printed manuals are ideal for keeping onboard your vessel, as a useful source • Physical buttons — Highlighting an item using the navigational controls and
of reference whenever you need assistance with your Raymarine product. confirming the selection by pressing the [OK] button.
The printed manuals are provided by a third-party (lulu.com).
Examples:
To order a printed manual, visit: https://www.lulu.com/search?q=raymarine
and then enter the document number you require into the Search box (e.g. • “Select [Ok] to confirm your selection.”
81406). • “Select [Set-up].”
28
Procedures for navigating menu hierarchies.
Menu hierarchies are used in this document to provide a quick summary on
how to access a particular function or menu option.
Examples:
• “The internal sonar module is turned off from the Fishfinder app menu:
[Menu > Set-up > Sounder Set-up > Internal Sounder].”
• “The internal GPS can be switched off from the GPS settings menu:
[Homescreen > Status area > Satellites > Settings > Internal GPS].”

2.3 Document illustrations and screenshots

Note:
• Whilst care is taken to ensure that the illustrations and screenshots
provided in this document portray the latest hardware and software
versions available, where differences are purely aesthetic, some
illustrations and screenshots may depict an older version of hardware
or software.
• The navigation and/or sensor data shown in screenshots may be
simulated data and therefore may not reflect real world conditions.

2.4 Glossary
A glossary of common terms and abbreviations used in this document can be
found in the appendix.
Refer to: p.554 — Glossary

Document information 29
CHAPTER 3: SOFTWARE DETAILS
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 3.1 Applicable software version — page 31

• 3.2 LightHouse MFD software compatibility — page 31
• 3.3 Compatible displays — page 31
• 3.4 New software features — page 32
• 3.5 Compatible peripheral product software — page 33
• 3.6 YachtSense Link network connection — page 34
• 3.7 Legacy eS and gS Series compatibility with Axiom displays — page 34
• 3.8 Software updates — page 35

30
3.1 Applicable software version 3.3 Compatible displays
This handbook is applicable to Multifunction display operating system The LightHouse™ 4 operating system is compatible with the following displays:
LightHouse 4 v4.6.74.
Axiom® displays

Product software is updated regularly to add new features and improve

existing functionality. Check the website to obtain the latest software:
LightHouse 4 software download link
https://www.raymarine.com/en-us/download/lighthouse-4-update-for-
axiom-chartplotters

3.2 LightHouse MFD software compatibility 1. Axiom® XL

2. Axiom® Pro
The software version installed on Raymarine products must be compatible
with the version of the LightHouse™ operating system installed on your 3. Axiom®
MFD(s). 4. Axiom® +

Note:
Where possible you should always update you peripheral product and MFD
software to the latest available versions.

If you cannot upgrade your MFD to the latest available version then you must
ensure that the version of software installed on your Raymarine products is
compatible with the version of LightHouse™ installed on your MFDs.

Software details 31
Axiom® 2 displays LightHouse 4 software download link
https://www.raymarine.com/en-us/download/lighthouse-4-update-for-
axiom-chartplotters

LightHouse 4 v4.6.42 / v4.6.74 New features:

General features:
• Added YouTube and YouTube TV MFD apps. For details refer to:
p.471 — YouTube & YouTube TV
• New [High speed alarm] (SOG). For details refer to:
p.132 — High speed alarm
• Maximum AIS targets that can be displayed simultaneously has been
increased to 200. For details refer to: AIS target capacity
• Added [Always Off] LED option for Raymarine SeaTalk NG position
sensors. For details refer to: p.122 — Switching off sensor LEDs
• Added [Find me] option for Raymarine SeaTalk NG position sensors. For
details refer to: p.122 — Find me
1. Axiom® 2 XL
• Added the ability to perform a factory reset of Raymarine SeaTalk
2. Axiom® 2 Pro NG products from the [Network] settings menu. For details refer to:
p.122 — Performing a factory reset of a SeaTalk NG device
First Responder new features:
3.4 New software features • Added the ability to send and receive routes Over-The-Air (OTA). For
details refer to: p.365 — Route broadcast and receipt
The following new features have been added to v4.6.42 / v4.6.74 of the
LightHouse 4 operating system. • Added [Intercept distance] and [Time to target] data in target context
menus: p.377 — First responder target context menus
This list includes new features only. It does NOT include software
maintenance items, such as bug fixes or performance improvements. • Creeping line SAR pattern parameter name changed from [Creep direction]
to [Search orientation]. Parallel line SAR pattern parameter name
To download the software, and view the complete list of all software updates, changed from [Initial direction] to [1st leg direction]. For details refer to:
including new features, bug fixes, and performance improvements, visit: p.174 — Creating a Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern
• Added ability to receive and transmit NMEA 0183 sentence THS. For details
Note: refer to: p.539 — NMEA 0183 sentence support
When upgrading your display’s software, it is important to ensure that Radar app features:
you also upgrade any networked Raymarine products to their latest
• Added [True/Relative] reference data toggle to Quick adjust menu and
available software versions. The LightHouse 4 software package available
[Individual target] toggle to target context menus in Radar app. For details
on the website also includes the latest software for networked products.
refer to: p.349 — Target data reference mode
Chart app new features:
32
• Added [Steer to polar] to Autopilot wind vane mode. For details refer to: with the LightHouse™ 4 operating system for those displays. The latest
p.296 — Autopilot wind vane mode compatible version of the app can be downloaded from the LightHouse
• Expanded available AIS target data. For details refer to: Full AIS data apps page of the website: https://www.raymarine.eu/multifunction-
displays/lighthouse3/lighthouse-apps/ If you have upgraded from previous
• Added [Quick adjust] menu to Chart app. For details refer to: versions of LightHouse™ then the old version of the app may still be on your
p.193 — Quick adjust menu system.
• Added new [Nav marks] selection of waypoint symbols. For details refer to:
p.158 — Waypoint symbols Note:
• New [Fuel range] ring in Chart app. For details refer to: p.200 — Fuel range
The LightHouse operating system for Axiom® 2 Pro displays includes a
Dashboard app new features: compatible version of the Spotify app.
• Added ability to [Start] and [Stop] compatible generators. For details refer
to: p.406 — Generator start/stop
Before installing the new Spotify app, the old version must first be removed
• Added support for Jack Plate Position data using PGN 128780 and moved from your display.
[Exhaust gas temperature] data item from [Environment] category to
[Engine] category. For details refer to: p.51 — Engine data For details on removing the app, refer to: p.500 — Removing an apk app
• Added new GPS data items for Opposite Tack COG and Maximum all time For details on installing a downloaded app, refer to:
SOG. For details refer to: p.53 — GPS data p.500 — Installing Lighthouse third-party apps
• Added new [Next leg TWA] , [Target apparent wind angle] and [Target true
wind angle] in [Wind] data category. For details refer to: p.54 — Wind data
• Added new [Opp. tack COG] data item, Included [Course over ground] and 3.5 Compatible peripheral product software
renamed [Tack heading] to [Opp. tack heading] in [Heading] data category.
For details refer to: p.53 — Heading data Below is a list of products which have software updates required to remain
compatible with the features and improvements introduced in the LightHouse
• Added new [Next track leg bearing] data item, included [Course to steer] 4 v4.6.42 / v4.6.74 software update:
and [Distance to go] data items, improved naming of other data items in the
[Navigation] data category. For details refer to: p.53 — Navigation data Product New software version
Mercury app new features: • Alpha 7 (E70649) Performance v2.0.27
• Added integration of Mercury Skyhook, BowHook and DriftHook. For display.
details refer to: p.419 — Skyhook • Alpha 9 (E70650) Performance
display.
Feature removal
• AR200 (E70537) Augmented v1.33 (Required for LED [Off] and
The following feature has been removed: reality GNSS (GPS) and heading [Find me] settings.)
• UAV integration and the UAV MFD app have been removed. sensor.
• RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.6.74
Spotify app removal • RVM1600 (E70665) sonar module
The version of the Spotify app pre-installed on the LightHouse operating
system for Axiom®, Axiom® +, Axiom® Proand Axiom® XL displays is no • RS150 (E70310) GNSS (GPS) v1.29 (Required for LED [Off] and
longer fully functional. Therefore, the Spotify app is no longer included Receiver [Find me] settings.)
Software details 33
 Product New software version 3.7 Legacy eS and gS Series compatibility
• p70 (E22166) / p70s (E70328) v3.13 (Required to support MFD with Axiom displays
pilot controllers Wind vane mode.)
• p70R (E22167) / p70Rs (E70329) As Raymarine® continues to develop new features and capabilities for the
pilot controllers LightHouse™ 4 operating system, the ability to downgrade some Axiom®
models to LightHouse™ software version v3.11.42 (for the purposes of allowing
• RMK9 (A80217) keypad v20.0.17 mixed networks of Axiom and legacy eS/gS Series displays) has ended.
• RMK10 (T70293) keypad
Note:
The new software will be included when downloading the latest LightHouse
4 option, which includes networked products. Axiom® Pro displays manufactured after August 2022 can no longer be
downgraded to a version of LightHouse which is compatible with mixed
systems which include legacy eS and gS Series displays.
3.6 YachtSense Link network connection The following table lists Axiom® displays and their compatibility status with
legacy eS/gS Series displays:
For optimum internet performance, Raymarine displays should be connected
to the router via a wired RayNet Ethernet connection.
For YachtSense ™ Link router software versions from v4.20 onwards, it is no Display Compatibility in mixed systems featuring eS/gS
longer possible for a display to connect to the router’s Wi-Fi Access Point. Series displays
Software Description Axiom® Yes — Software must be downgraded to LightHouse
version v3.11.42
Earlier than Display may be connected to the YachtSense ™ Link Axiom® + No — NOT compatible with eS/gS systems. The
v4.20 router’s Wi-Fi Access Point. However, functionality LightHouse OS cannot be downgraded
will be limited to providing an internet connection for
Axiom® XL Yes — Software must be downgraded to LightHouse
third-party apps which require internet access, such as
v3.11.42
Netflix.
Axiom® 2 XL No — NOT compatible with eS/gS systems. The
v4.20 or later Display cannot connect to the YachtSense ™ Link
LightHouse 4 OS cannot be downgraded
router’s Wi-Fi Access Point.
Axiom® 2 Pro No — NOT compatible with eS/gS systems. The
LightHouse 4 OS cannot be downgraded
Note:
For YachtSense ™ Link routers which previously
had a Wi-Fi connection to a display and have
since been upgraded to v4.20 from an earlier
software version, the display will receive an
IP address conflict notification. To correct the
conflict, select [Forget network] in the displayed
notification popup.

34
 Display Compatibility in mixed systems featuring eS/gS • Ethernet (RayNet) products can be updated from any MFD/Chartplotter on
Series displays the same network as the product to be updated.
Axiom® Pro Yes — Software must be downgraded to LightHouse • In order to perform a software update, any connected Autopilot or Radar
(pre-September v3.11.42 must be switched to Standby.
2022) • The MFD’s/Chartplotter’s “Check online” feature is only available when
Axiom® Pro No — Axiom® Pro displays manufactured after the MFD has an Internet connection.
(post-September August 2022, and beginning with the following
2022) serial numbers, are NOT compatible with mixed Note:
systems featuring eS/gS Series displays:
If in doubt as to the correct procedure for updating your product software,
• Axiom® Pro 9 RVX — E70371-1027106 refer to your dealer or Raymarine technical support.
• Axiom® Pro 12 RVX — E70372-0923640
• Axiom® Pro 16 RVX — E70373-1127908 Checking current software
• Axiom® Pro 9 S — E70481-1026853
The network settings menu provides details of the MFDs and connected
• Axiom® Pro 12 S — E70482-0924052 devices software version.
• Axiom® Pro 16 S — E70483-1026473

If you wish to continue using a mixed system of newer Axiom displays

and legacy eS/gS displays, you must ensure that these displays are NOT
connected on the same RayNet or SeaTalkng networks.

3.8 Software updates

Raymarine regularly issues software updates for its products, which provide
new and enhanced features and improved performance and usability. It’s
important to ensure that you have the latest software for your products by
regularly checking the Raymarine website for new software releases.
To check for the latest software updates and the software update procedure
for your specific product(s) refer to: https://www.raymarine.com/software
Unless otherwise stated, software updates for Raymarine products are
performed using a Raymarine MFD/chartplotter.
• Where applicable, you should always backup your user data and settings 1. Open the [Network] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network].
before performing a software update. A list of connected devices is displayed. The version column identifies
• To update SeaTalk NG products you must use the datamaster the devices current software version.
MFD/Chartplotter which is physically connected to the SeaTalk NG 2. Select a product from the list and then select [Product Info] from the
backbone. pop-over menu to view more details about a product.
Software details 35
 Caution: Installing software updates Note:
• The software update process is carried out at your own • Zipped/compressed files must be unzipped/decompressed before
risk. Before initiating the update process ensure you have copying to memory card.
backed up any important files. • Axiom® 2 displays require a different download file from Axiom® displays.
• Ensure that the product(s) has a reliable power supply and
that the update process is not interrupted.
1. Check the software version of your product(s).
• Damage caused by an incomplete update is not covered by 2. Compare your product(s) current software version to the latest version
Raymarine warranty. available on the Raymarine website www.raymarine.com/software
• By downloading the software update package, you agree to 3. Download any newer software versions for your product(s).
these terms. 4. Copy the files to a MicroSD card.
5. With your display powered on, insert the MicroSD card into the card
Updating software from a memory card reader slot.
Your display will automatically detect software files.
The display’s and connected Raymarine device’s software can be updated
6. Select [Yes] on the new software found notification.
from a memory card containing the software update files. Follow the steps
below to install software using a memory card. If the update is not automatically detect you can select Check SD card
from the Update software pop-over menu available on the Getting started
settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Getting started > Update
software > Check SD card].
7. The display will check your MicroSD card for available software updates
and display a list of devices for which software updates are available.
8. Ensure that the relevant products in the list are selected.

You can select and deselect product(s) by selecting them in the list.

9. Select [Update selected] to commence the update process.

Networked displays will all show the software update in progress screen
until all software updates are complete. During this time you will not be
able to interact with your displays.

Updating software over the internet

The display’s and connected Raymarine device’s software can be updated
by connecting the MFD to the internet and checking online for available
software updates. Follow the steps below to install software available online.
1. Select [Update software] from the [Getting started] settings menu:
([Homescreen > Settings > Getting started > Update software]).
2. Select [Check online] from the pop-over menu.
36
3. If the display has an existing wired or Wi-Fi connection to the internet the
display will check the internet for available software updates and display
a list of devices for which software updates are available.
4. If the display does not currently have internet access, select [Wi-Fi
settings], connect the display to a Wi-Fi access point/hotspot that has an
internet connection, and then select the [Back] triangle at the bottom of
the screen.
5. Ensure that the relevant products in the list are selected.

Products for which software updates are available will automatically be

selected. You can deselect product(s) by removing the tick next to the
relevant item in the list.

6. Select [Update selected] to commence the update process.

Any networked displays will show a ‘software update in progress’

message until all software updates are complete. During this time you
will not be able to interact with your displays.

For further details regarding internet connections on the display, refer to:
p.83 — Internet connection

Software details 37
CHAPTER 4: GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 4.1 Memory card compatibility — page 39

• 4.2 Applications and integrations — page 42
• 4.3 Menu types — page 43
• 4.4 Setting controls — page 44
• 4.5 Alarm and information notifications — page 45
• 4.6 Sidebar — page 46
• 4.7 Alpha Series sidebar operations (LightHouse™ 4 MFD) — page 48
• 4.8 Data overlays — page 49
• 4.9 Display data — page 50
• 4.10 Sonar depth data recording/logging — page 56

38
4.1 Memory card compatibility Caution: Care of chart and memory cards
MicroSD memory cards can be used to backup / archive data (e.g. Waypoints, To avoid irreparable damage to and / or loss of data from
Routes and Tracks). Once data is backed up to a memory card, old data chart and memory cards:
can be deleted from the system. The archived data can be retrieved at any • Ensure that chart and memory cards are fitted the correct
time. It is recommended that your data is backed up to a memory card on way around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.
a regular basis.
• DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or
Compatible cards pliers to insert or remove a chart or memory card.
• Ensure correct memory card ejection procedure is carried
The following types of MicroSD cards are compatible with your display. If
out before removing the chart or memory card from the
the card’s native format does not match one of the display’s supported
card reader.
formats, the card will not be recognized by the display. In this situation, it
will be necessary to re-format the card using a separate device, such as a
laptop or PC for example. Removing MicroSD card from its adaptor
Display MicroSD memory and cartography chart cards are usually supplied inserted
Native card supported into an SD card adaptor. The card will need to be removed from the adaptor
Type Size format Format before inserting into your display.
MicroSDSC (Micro Up to 4GB FAT12, FAT16 NTFS,
Secure Digital or FAT16B FAT32,
Standard Capacity) exFAT
MicroSDHC (Micro 4GB to 32GB FAT32 NTFS,
Secure Digital High FAT32,
Capacity) exFAT
MicroSDXC (Micro 32GB to 2TB exFAT NTFS,
Secure Digital FAT32,
eXtended Capacity) exFAT

• Speed class rating — For best performance it is recommended that you

use Class 10 or UHS (Ultra High Speed) class memory cards, or better.
• Use branded memory cards — When archiving data it is recommended
that you use good quality branded memory cards.

General information 39
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom® and Axiom®+ Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom® 2 Pro displays
displays
Axiom® and Axiom®+ displays have a single slot MicroSD card reader located
on the rear of the display.

1. Pull back the microSD card reader cover as shown above.

2. Insert your microSD card with the contacts facing down. 1. Open the card reader door.
3. Close the cover and ensure it is seated correctly. 2. Pull down the card slot cover.
3. Insert the card(s) into a card slot and push until they clicks into place.
Removing a MicroSD card
1. Select [Eject SD card] from the [Import/export] page: [Homescreen > My Important:
data > Import/export > Eject SD card.]
The upper card slot requires the memory cards contacts to be pointing
2. Open the card reader cover. downwards. The lower card slot requires the memory card contacts to
3. Remove the MicroSD card from the Rear of the display. be pointing upwards.
4. Ensure you close the card reader’s cover.
4. Close the card slot cover, ensuring it is seated correctly.
5. Close the card reader door.
Removing a MicroSD card
1. Open the card reader door.
2. Pull down the card slot cover.
3. Hold the [Power] button to access the [Shortcuts] menu, and then select
the [Eject SD Card] option.
4. Push the card in until it clicks.
5. Pull the card free from the card slot.
6. Close the card slot cover, ensuring it is seated correctly.
7. Close the card reader door.
40
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom® Pro displays Inserting memory card into external storage devices

1. Open the card reader door.

2. Pull down the card slot cover.
1. Open the card reader door.
3. Insert the card(s) into a card slot and push until they clicks into place.
2. Insert the storage device into a card slots as follows:
Important: • RCR-SDUSB slot 1 — With the contacts facing down, insert an SD card
(or an SD card adaptor containing a MicroSD card) into the upper slot
The upper card slot requires the memory cards contacts to be pointing and push until it clicks into place.
downwards. The lower card slot requires the memory card contacts to
• RCR-SDUSB slot 2 — With the contacts facing down, insert a USB drive
be pointing upwards.
directly into the lower slot.
• RCR-2 slot 1 — With the contacts facing down, insert a MicroSD card
4. Close the card slot cover, ensuring it is seated correctly. into the upper slot and push until it clicks into place.
5. Close the card reader door. • RCR-2 slot 2 — With the contacts facing up, insert a MicroSD card into
the lower slot and push until it clicks into place.
Removing a MicroSD card
1. Open the card reader door.
Important:
2. Pull down the card slot cover.
3. Hold the [Power] button to access the [Shortcuts] menu, and then select RCR-2 external card readers are not compatible with Axiom® 2 displays.
the [Eject SD Card] option.
4. Push the card in until it clicks. Removing external storage (SD and MicroSD)
5. Pull the card free from the card slot. With the card reader door open:
6. Close the card slot cover, ensuring it is seated correctly. 1. Use the display’s Power button to access the [Shortcuts] menu, and then
7. Close the card reader door. select the [Eject SD Card] option.
General information 41
2. Push the card in until it clicks. LightHouse MFD apps are an integral part of the operating system and
3. Pull the card free from the card slot. are accessed using app page icons available on the Homescreen. App
page icons can contain one fullscreen app, or multiple apps in a splitscreen
Removing external storage USB drive arrangement.
With the card reader door open and cover pulled down: For more details about LightHouse MFD apps, refer to: p.88 — MFD Apps
1. Pull the drive free from the card slot.
LightHouse™ third-party apps
Caution: Ensure card reader cover or door is
securely closed
To prevent water ingress and consequent damage to the
product, ensure that the card reader door or cover is firmly
closed.

4.2 Applications and integrations LightHouse™ third-party apps are apps that are developed entirely by third
parties, and are approved for use on the MFD by Raymarine. These apps are
LightHouse™ 4 displays support native LightHouse display apps, approved accessed from the LightHouse app launcher found on the Homescreen.
third-party apps, and also integrations with select partner hardware interfaces.
For more details about third-party apps, refer to:
p.499 — LightHouse third-party apps
MFD apps
Partner integrations
The LightHouse™ operating system also enables partner organizations to
integrate the user interface of their hardware so it can be accessed using the
MFD. When compatible partner hardware is detected, icons can be displayed
on the Homescreen and in the App launcher.
For more details about partner integration, refer to:
p.499 — Partner integration

42
4.3 Menu types Settings pages

The LightHouse™ operating system uses several types of menus which

contain settings and options for your MFD.

MFD app main menu

Settings pages are fullscreen pages containing settings and menu options.
Settings pages are usually laid out using tabs to group similar setting
together.
Settings pages are accessed by selecting the [Settings] icon located on the
bottom right of the homescreen or the bottom of each MFD app main menu.
Other settings pages are also available by selecting menu items that have a
[>] (right arrow) located on the right side of the menu option.
Selecting tab titles in settings pages will display the contents for that tab.
Each MFD app includes a main menu that provides access to the app’s Selecting the [<] (Back) or [X] (Close) icons will close the menu.
settings and functions.
The MFD app main menu is accessed by selecting the menu icon located in
the top right of the screen.
Selecting the [<] (Back), [X] (Close) icons or selecting an area of the screen
away from the menu, will close the menu.
Selecting a menu item with a [>] (right arrow) will open a settings page or
other menu options related to that item.

General information 43
Context menus

Pop-over menus are available on the homescreen, in MFD apps and from
settings pages. Pop-over menus provide access to further menu options
and settings.
Selecting an area of the screen away from the menu will close the menu.

4.4 Setting controls

Context menus are available in MFD apps. Context menus are accessed by
pressing and holding (highlighting with cursor and pressing [OK] button) on Various controls are available to aid settings adjustments.
an onscreen object or location within an MFD app.
Context menus provide context-sensitive information and options.
Selecting [more options] will display further menu options.
Selecting [X] (Close) or selecting an area of the screen away from the menu
will close the menu.

Pop-over menus

44
1. Toggle switch in off state (i.e.: disabled). Select to enable option. Red — A red notification is used to signify a dangerous condition. Dangerous
2. Toggle switch in on state (i.e.: enabled). Select to disable option. alarms are used to signify that immediate action is required due to the
potential of danger to life or vessel.
3. Page down button — selecting the page down button will scroll the
current menu or settings page (when the page down button is visible you Warning alarms
can also swipe to scroll up/down).
4. Setting field numeric value — selecting will display the numeric
adjustment control you can then use the up and down arrows to adjust
the value.
5. Tick boxes — when a tick is displayed in the box the option is enabled.
Select the box to enabled and disable the option. Alarms are accompanied by an audible tone. The alarm notification and
6. Setting button — selecting the button will perform the related procedure audible tone will continue to be displayed until acknowledged, or until the
or acknowledge a notification. condition that triggered the alarm is no longer present. Acknowledged
alarms may remain active whilst the alarm condition persists, but will not
7. Setting field options — selecting will display a pop-over menu with the trigger further onscreen or audible notifications. Active and historical alarms
available options, selecting an option will change selection to that option. can be viewed in the Alarms Manager, accessible from the homescreen:
8. Radio buttons — selecting an option will change selection to that option. [Homescreen > Alarms].
9. Slider control — usually used for setting percentages, select and slide Amber — An amber notification is used to signify a warning condition.
circle to adjust value. Warning alarms are used to signify that there has been a change in situation
that you need to be aware of, and that action may be required.
10. Setting field text value — selecting will display the onscreen keyboard
you can then enter the desired text. For further details about alarms, refer to: p.127 — Alarms manager

Information notifications
4.5 Alarm and information notifications
Alarms, warnings and information notifications are used to notify you to a
situation or hazard that requires your attention. Notifications are triggered by
system functions and external devices connected to the MFD (Multifunction
Displays). Alarm and warning notifications are displayed on all networked
MFDs.
Standard colors are used to signify the notification type. Blue — A Blue notification is used to signify information requiring user
acknowledgement, and may also provide options. Unless they require
Alarm notifications user interaction, information notifications may self-dismiss after 3 seconds.
Information notifications are not accompanied by an audible tone, and are
Dangerous alarms not listed in the Alarms Manager.

General information 45
4.6 Sidebar Sidebar selector
Selecting an icon from the sidebar selector will display that sidebar.
The Sidebar is available in all app pages that are accessed from the
Homescreen. The sidebar provides quick access to system data. The following sidebars are available:
The sidebar is accessed using the touchscreen.
Data 1 — The Data 1 sidebar is a default sidebar that is
always available. The default data items are:
• Vessel position (Lat/Lon)
• COG (Course Over ground)
• SOG (Speed Over ground)
• BTW (Bearing To Waypoint)
• DTW (Distance To Waypoint)
• Rudder bar (rudder position)
The data items can be customized.
Data 2 — The Data 2 sidebar is a default sidebar that is
always available. The default data items are:
• Active waypoint (Waypoint name)
• Wpt TTG (Waypoint Time To Go)
1. A short left-to-right swipe when touching the sidebar control (“handle”) • Wpt ETA (Waypoint Estimated Time of Arrival)
on the left edge of the screen displays the sidebar. A long swipe displays • BTW (Bearing To Waypoint)
the sidebar and sidebar menu.
• DTW (Distance To Waypoint)
2. With the sidebar open, a left-to-right swipe on the sidebar opens the
sidebar menu. A right-to-left swipe closes the sidebar. • Rudder bar (rudder position)
3. With the sidebar menu displayed, you can select a sidebar icon to display The data items can be customized.
that sidebar. A right-to-left swipe closes the sidebar menu. The sidebar
menu automatically closes after approximately 10 seconds of inactivity.
4. To permanently display the sidebar,, select and hold on a sidebar icon,
and then select the pin icon. When pinned, the sidebar cannot be closed
by swiping and must be unpinned before you can close the sidebar.
Selecting the ‘X’ located on the top right of the sidebar closes the sidebar
and sidebar menu.
The Sidebar is opened automatically in the Chart app when a [Goto] or
[Follow] action is initiated.
46
 Search — The Search sidebar is a default sidebar that is Alpha display — The Alpha display sidebar is available
always available. The sidebar provides data and options when 1 or more Alpha series performance displays are on
relevant for following SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns. the network. The sidebar enables control of Alpha series
The available data items are: performance displays. The following controls are available:
• Brg to CSP (Bearing to Commence Search Point) • [Display] — When more than 1 Alpha display is connected
you can select which display to control.
• Leg 1
• [Page] — Use the arrow buttons to cycle though the
• Leg 2
selected display’s pages.
• Target SOG
• [Brightness] — Use the buttons to adjust the selected
• TTP (Time To Perpendicular) — This is the time (based display’s brightness level.
on current speed) for the vessel to either reach the
Pilot — The Pilot sidebar is available when the MFD has
waypoint's arrival circle or if aiming outside the arrival
[Pilot control] enabled. Refer to: p.140 — Autopilot control
circle, for the vessel to pass perpendicular to the
The data and options displayed on the sidebar
waypoint, with respect to the current track leg.
are dependent on autopilot mode. Refer to:
• COG (Course Over ground) p.142 — Pilot sidebar
The displayed data and options cannot be customized.
• Advance wpt
Race start — The Race start sidebar is available when a
• XTE (Cross track error)
sailing activity is chosen during the MFD’s initial startup
• SOG (Speed Over ground) wizard.
For details of the controls available refer to:
• Stop Route
p.303 — Race sidebar
• Rudder bar (rudder position) The displayed data and options cannot be customized.
The data items cannot be customized Trolling — The Trolling sidebar is available when a
compatible Trolling motor is detected.
For details of the options available refer to:
Note: p.147 — Trolling motor control
Brg to CSP, Leg 1 and leg 2 will update as your route The controls cannot be customized.
progresses to show current leg and subsequent 2 legs.

General information 47
 Audio — The Audio sidebar is available when compatible
audio equipment is connected.
For details of the options available refer to:
p.478 — Audio sidebar
The displayed options cannot be customized.

Mercury — The Mercury sidebar is available when

compatible Mercury SmartCraft engines are detected.
For further details refer to: p.418 — VesselView Sidebar
The displayed data cannot be customized.

Customizing data sidebars

The data displayed in sidebars Data 1 and Data 2 can be customized by
following the steps below.
With the Data 1 or Data 2 sidebar displayed:
1. Press and hold on the data item you want to customize.
2. Select [Edit] from the pop-over menu. Note:
3. Select the data item that you want to be displayed. The [Display] option and its available sub-options are only available if more
than one Alpha Series display is networked to the same system as your
multifunction display / chartplotter.
4.7 Alpha Series sidebar operations
(LightHouse™ 4 MFD) • [Display] — Indicates the current performance display that is being
operated via the [Sidebar] menu. A different performance display can be
Some Alpha display functions can be invoked remotely when using a operated by selecting the [Display] option and choosing a different display
Raymarine® LightHouse™ 4 (version 4.5 or later) multifunction display / from the list shown. Each Alpha Series display is sorted according to the
chartplotter connected to the same network as your Alpha display(s). These display group that it has been assigned to.
functions are split between either the multifunction display / chartplotter’s – [...] — Opens a menu with additional options:
[Network] page (for configuration-based options) and [Sidebar] menu (for ♦ [Rename] — Displays an onscreen keyboard which can be used to edit
features often required whilst sailing). the selected Alpha display’s name.
When viewing an application on your multifunction display / chartplotter, you ♦ [Move up] —Moves the selected Alpha display up within the list by
can swipe from the left edge of the screen to display the [Sidebar] menu. one position, if multiple Alpha displays are available. This option is
From there, select [Alpha display] in order to invoke the following functions disabled if your Alpha display has reached the top of the display group
remotely: that it has been assigned to.
♦ [Move down] — Moves the selected Alpha display down within the list
by one position, if multiple Alpha displays are available. This option is
48
 disabled if your Alpha display has reached the bottom of the display • [Rename] — Renames the selected performance display. If no [Name] has
group that it has been assigned to. been set, the unit model and serial number will appear instead if the unit is
selected on your multifunction display / chartplotter’s [Network] tab.
• [Page] — Switches between the selected Alpha display’s data pages. Data
pages can be cycled through either using the [<] left option or [>] right • [Product information] — Displays a series of product information related to
option. the selected performance display.
• [Brightness] — Increases or decreases the selected Alpha display’s screen
brightness. Brightness can be changed using the [+] increase option or
[–] decrease option. The current screen brightness is indicated by the 4.8 Data overlays
[Brightness bar] below the [+] and [–] options.
Data overlays can be used to display system data on homescreen app pages.
Alpha Series network operations (LightHouse™ 4 MFD) Up to 4 data overlays can be added to each app page. Data overlays are not
Some functions can be invoked remotely when using a Raymarine® available for the Mercury VesselView app or for fullscreen partner integration
LightHouse™ 4 (version 4.5 or later) multifunction display / chartplotter interface pages.
which is connected to the same network as your Alpha performance Data overlays can be added, customized or deleted by selecting [Edit data
display(s). These functions are split between either the multifunction display / overlays] from the app’s [Page settings] menu: [Menu > Settings > Page
chartplotter’s [Network] page (for configuration-based options) and [Sidebar] settings > Edit data overlays].
menu (for features often required whilst sailing).
In edit mode you can customize existing data overlays by selecting it to
The following configuration related functions can be invoked from display the pop-over menu.
theLightHouse™ 4 [Network] page: [Homescreen > Settings > Network]
From the pop-over menu the following options are available:
• Change the data item in a data overlay by selecting [Edit] and choosing a
new data item from the list.
• Change the location of a data overlay by selecting [Move] and then moving
it to a new location.
• Change the size of a data overlay by selecting [Resize] and choosing either
[Small], [Medium], [Large] or [Extra large].
• Remove a data overlay by selecting [Delete]

General information 49
Adding a data overlay 4.9 Display data
New data overlays can be added following the steps below. Data transmitted by compatible devices connected to the same network as
the display, as well as data generated by the display, can be shown as data
items in the Dashboard app, the sidebar and as a data overlay.
Data items are organized into categories.

Note:
• Standard NMEA 2000 PGNs are listed next to the relevant data items.
• Supported Raymarine and third-party proprietary messages are not
listed.
• NMEA 0183 sentences are not shown.

To view a list of all supported NMEA 2000 PGNs, refer to:

p.540 — NMEA 2000 PGN support
To view a list of all supported NMEA 0183 sentences, refer to:
p.539 — NMEA 0183 sentence support
To change or add a data item in the Dashboard app or sidebar, select and
hold on the data cell and select [Edit] from the pop-over options to display
the list of data categories.
To change or add a data item to a data overlay, use the [Page settings] menu
from the relevant MFD app. For details, refer to: p.49 — Data overlays

Battery data
Batteries are detected automatically by the display.
1. Select [Edit data overlays] from the [Page settings] menu: [Menu > If no compatible batteries are detected the [Battery] category will be hidden.
Settings > Page settings.]. The following data items are available in the [Battery] category:
2. Select [Add] or select and hold on a location and select [Add new]. • Battery voltage (PGN 127508)
3. Select a data category from the list. • Battery current (PGN 127508)
4. Select a data item from the list. • Time till zero charge (PGN 127506)
5. If required select and hold on the new data overlay and drag it to a new • Battery temperature (PGN 127508)
location.
• State of charge (PGN 127506)
6. Select [Done] to confirm the new data overlay(s).
The data items will be available for each detected battery.
Detected batteries are shown in the battery configuration page: [Homescreen
> Settings > Boat details > Num of batteries > Configure batteries].
50
Boat data Note:
Boat data requires supported sensors to be connected. • The display category and data items are not available in the Dashboard
The following data items are available in the [Boat] category: app.
• (1)Sail recommendation (Main) • (1) Data item is only available in the sidebar.
• (1)Sail recommendation (Headsail)
• Rudder angle (PGN 127245)
Distance data
• Rate of turn (PGN 127251) Distance data requires a compatible speed transducer and or GNSS receiver.
• (2)Roll (PGN 127257) The following data items are available in the [Distance] category:
• (3)Steering angle • Distance to line
• Mast rotation • Distance to tack
• Pitch (PGN 127257) • Trip (manual)
• (1)(2)Sail recommendation • Trip (month)
• Trim tabs(1) (PGN 130576) • Trip (day)
Note: • Trip (season)
• Ground log (PGN 128275)
• (1) Requires Sailing activity and imported Sail plan.
• Trip (PGN 128275)
• (2) Data item can only be displayed in the Dashboard app.
• Log (PGN 128275)
• (3) Requires Mercury engine integration.
• Log Trip (1) (PGN 128275)
• Line bias
Depth data
Depth data requires a compatible instruments or sonar transducer connected Note:
to the display. (1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app
The following data items are available in the [Depth] category:
• Maximum depth Engine data
• Minimum depth Engine data requires the display to be connected to a supported engine
• Depth (PGN 128267) management system. Depending on manufacturer a compatible engine
interface or gateway may be required.
Display data The following data items are available in the [Engine] category:
The display data category is used for voltage detected by the display. • Exhaust Gas Temperature (PGN 130316)
The following data items are available in the [Display] category: • Engine
• Supply voltage The following items will be available for each engine.
• Supply voltage level(1) • Jack plate position (PGN 128780)
General information 51
• RPM (PGN 127488) • Fuel used (trip) (PGN 127497)
• Engine trip (PGN 127497) • Est. fuel remaining (PGN 127496)
• Trans oil temp (PGN 127493) • Engine economy total (PGN 127497)
• Fuel flow (avg) (PGN 127497) • Time to empty (PGN 127496)
• Trans oil pressure (PGN 127493) • Distance to empty (PGN 127496)
• Gear (PGN 127493) • Fuel flow total (PGN 127497 / PGN 127489)
• Oil temperature (PGN 127489) • Fuel used (season) (PGN 127497)
• Alternator (PGN 127489) The data items above will be available for each configured fuel tank. When
• Boost pressure (PGN 127488) more than 1 fuel tank is configured then the data items will be provided in the
[All Tanks] category and will combine the fuel data items for all tanks.
• Oil pressure status (PGN 127489)
• Oil pressure (PGN 127489) Note:
• Engine hours (PGN 127489) (1) For systems with multiple fuel tanks these data items will remain
• Coolant temperature (PGN 127489) available for each individual tank.
• Coolant pressure (PGN 127489)
• Fuel pressure (PGN 127489) Environment data
• Fuel flow (inst) (PGN 127489) Environmental data items require connection of compatible sensors and
• Tilt position (PGN 127488) transducers.
• Engine load (PGN 127489) The following data items are available in the [Environment] category:
• Fuel flow (PGN 127489) • True wind chill
Engine configuration settings are available in the [Boat details] settings menu: • App wind chill (PGN 130312 / 130316)
[Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Num of engines]. • Max water temp
• Min water temp
Fuel data • Water temp (PGN 130310 / 130311 / 130312 / 130316)
The fuel data category include items related to fuel management. Fuel • Max air temp
management is dependent on engine data being available on the SeaTalk
NG® backbone. • Min air temp
The following data items are available in the [Fuel] category: • Drift (PGN 129291)
• Total propulsive fuel (vol) • Dew point (PGN 130312 / 130316)
• Total fuel (vol) (PGN 127505) • Barometric pressure (PGN 130310)
• Total fuel (%) • Air temp (PGN 130310)
• Fuel (vol)(1) • Set (PGN 129291)
• Fuel (%)(1) • Humidity (PGN 130310 / 130311 / 130313)
52
• Sunset Sunrise(1) Note:
• Set Drift(1) (PGN 129291) (1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app
• Water & Supply(1)

Note:
Heading data
Heading data requires a connected sensor providing vessel heading.
• (1) Data items are only available in the Dashboard app
The following data items are available in the [Heading] category:
• Steer to layline(1)
Inside environment data
• Heading error
Inside environmental data items require connection of compatible sensors.
• Locked heading
The following data items are available in the [Inside environment] category:
• Heading (PGN 127250)
• Inside humidity (PGN 130313)
• Opp. tack COG
• Inside temperature (PGN 130316)
• Course over ground
The data items above will be available for the number of interior
environmental sensors specified in the [Boat details] settings menu: • Opp. tack heading
[Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Num of interior environment sensors]. • Locked heading & Error((2))
• Heading & Speed((2))
GPS data
The GPS data category contains data items related to the GNSS receiver in Note:
use by your display.
• (1) [Steer to layline] data will only be populated when the boating activity
The following data items are available in the [GPS] category: has been set to sailing in the initial MFD start up wizard.
• Cursor position • (2) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app.
• Loran cursor position
• Loran position Navigation data
• Course over ground (PGN 129026)
Navigation data requires a compatible sensor providing position related data.
• Average SOG Active navigation is required for waypoint and route related data items.
• Maximum SOG The following data items are available in the [Navigation] category:
• Speed over ground SOG (PGN 129026) • Sailing time to waypoint
• Vessel position (PGN 129025 / PGN 129029) • Sailing distance to waypoint
• COG SOG (Course Over Ground) (Speed Over ground)(1) (PGN 129026) • Next waypoint
• Opp. tack COG (PGN 129026) • Loran target position
• Maximum SOG (all time) (PGN 129026) • Cross tack error (PGN 129283)
General information 53
• Time to waypoint Speed data
• Time to destination Speed data includes data items related to vessel speed.
• Target position The following data items are available in the [Speed] category:
• ETA at waypoint (time & date) (Estimated Time of Arrival) (PGN 129284) • VMG to waypoint (Velocity Made Good)
• ETA at destination (time & date) (Estimated Time of Arrival) (PGN 129284) • Speed thru water (PGN 128259)
• Course to steer • VMG to windward (Velocity Made Good)
• Avg speed
• Next track leg bearing
• Max speed
• Distance to waypoint
• Maximum SOG (all time)
• Distance made good
• Target speed
• Course made good
• Polar performance(1)
• Bearing origin to waypoint
• Bearing to waypoint Note:
• Active waypoint (1) [Polar performance] data will only be populated when the boating activity
is set to Sailing in the initial MFD start up wizard.
• ETA at destination (Estimated Time of Arrival)
• ETA at waypoint (Estimated Time of Arrival) (PGN 129284)
• Distance to go Time data
• CTS & DTW(1) (Course To Steer & Distance To Waypoint) Time data requires a compatible device to be connected providing time data.
The display the following data items are available in the [Time] category:
• CMG & VMG(1) (Course Made Good & Velocity Made Good)
• Sunset time
• BTW & DTW(1) (Bearing To Waypoint & Distance To Waypoint)
• Sunrise time
• Waypoint info(1)
• UTC date (Universal Time Coordinated) (PGN 129033)
• CMG & DMG(1) (Course Made Good & Distance Made Good)
• UTC time (Universal Time Coordinated) (PGN 129033)
Note: • Race timer
(1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app • Date (PGN 126992)
• Time (PGN 126992)
• Time to tack
Pilot data
• Time to burn
A rudder reference transducer is required for pilot data items.
The following data items are available in the [Pilot] category: Wind data
• Rudder angle (PGN 127245) Wind data requires a compatible wind transducer to be connected.
• Steering angle (Requires Mercury engine integration.) The following data items are available in the [Wind] category:
54
• Next leg TWA (PGN 128259 & 130306) Tank level data
• Target Apparent Wind Angle (PGN 128259 & 130306) Tank level data shows the percentage fill for each detected tank.
• Target True Wind Angle (PGN 128259 & 130306) The following data categories are available for tanks:
• Wind shift • Fuel (Gasoline)
• True wind angle (PGN 128259 & 130306) • Fresh water (PGN 127505)
• Cardinal • Live well (PGN 127505)
• Beaufort • Grey water (PGN 127505)
• Ground wind direction (Ground Wind Direction) (PGN 130306 / 129026) • Black water (PGN 127505)
• Ground wind speed (Ground Wind Direction) (PGN 130306 / 129026) Each tank type has its own data category and if more than 1 tank of each type
is detected there will be subcategory for each tank.
• True wind direction (PGN 128259 & 130306 & 127250)
• Minimum true wind angle
Generator data
• Maximum true wind angle
The generator data category is only available when a generator transmitting
• Minimum true wind speed supported NMEA 2000 PGNs is detected by the display.
• True wind speed (PGN 128259 & 130306) The following data items are available in the [Generator] category:
• Maximum app wind speed • Engine load (PGN 127489)
• App wind speed (PGN 130306) • Engine RPM (PGN 127488)
• Minimum app wind angle • Fuel flow (PGN 127489)
• App wind angle (PGN 130306) • Coolant temperature (PGN 127489)
• Maximum app wind angle • Oil temperature (PGN 127489)
• Minimum app wind speed • Oil pressure (PGN 127489)
• Minimum true wind speed • Oil pressure (status) (PGN 127489)
• GWD & Beaufort(1) (Ground Wind Direction) (PGN 130306 / 129026) • Generator battery voltage (PGN 127508)
• GWS & GWD(1) (Ground Wind Speed & Ground Wind Direction) • Engine hours (PGN 127489)
• AWA & VMG(1) (Apparent Wind Angle & Velocity Made Good) • Exhaust gas temperature (PGN 130316)
• AWA & AWS (1) (Apparent Wind Angle & Apparent Wind Speed) • Generator state (PGN 127514)
• TWA & VMG wind(1) (True Wind Angle & Velocity Made Good) • Generator voltage (PGN 127751)
• TWA & TWS(1) (True Wind Angle & True Wind Speed) • Generator current (PGN 127751)
The data items above will be available for each detected generator.
Note:
• Generator line 1 power (PGN 127744)
(1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app • Generator line 1 current (PGN 127744)
General information 55
• Generator line 1 to neutral voltage (PGN 127747) 4.10 Sonar depth data recording/logging
• Generator line 1 to line 2 voltage (PGN 127747)
The MFD includes features that will record or log your vessel’s depth and
• Generator line 1 frequency (PGN 127747) position data.
• Generator line 2 power (PGN 127745) Vessel depth and position logging features:
• Generator line 2 current (PGN 127745) • RealBathy™ — In the chart app when using LightHouse™ charts, the
• Generator line 2 to neutral voltage (PGN 127748) RealBathy™ feature logs vessel depth and position to enable creation of
personalized depth contours that can be displayed in realtime. For details
• Generator line 2 to line 3 voltage (PGN 127748) refer to: p.221 — RealBathy™ depth contours
• Generator line 2 frequency (PGN 127748) • SonarChart™ Live — In the chart app, when using compatible Navionics
• Generator line 3 power (PGN 127746) charts, the SonarChart™ Live feature logs vessel depth and position to
enable creation of personalized depth contours that can be displayed in
• Generator line 3 current (PGN 127746) realtime. For details refer to: p.222 — SonarChart™ Live
• Generator line 3 to neutral voltage (PGN 127749) • Data logging — When the MFD is configured using the First Responder
• Generator line 3 to line 1 voltage (PGN 127749) profile, vessel depth, vessel position, active MoB, and details of nearby AIS
targets are logged to a CSV file and saved to a memory card. For details
• Generator line 3 frequency (PGN 127749) refer to: p.364 — Data logging
The additional data items above will be available for each detected 3 phase • Sonar recording — The sonar recording feature is for troubleshooting
generator. purposes only, and records the fishfinder app’s scrolling image to a video
file for analysis by Raymarine technical support. For details refer to:
Load cell data p.525 — Diagnostics sonar recording
Load cells are sensors used to measure the load bearings on key rigging All of the recording/logging features can be enabled and disabled as desired;
components, such as forestay, sidestay, backstay, or any sheet, halyard, for instructions, refer to the links provided above.
control line, vang, tack line, or runner.
A predefined list of [Load cells] is available.
For load cell data to be populated a supported load cell gateway is required.

Cyclops Marine load cells

Cyclops Marine is a third party company providing wireless load-sensing
devices for use in sailing, and especially race sailing.
The Cyclops Marine sensors connect wirelessly to the below-deck Cyclops
Marine Gateway, which interfaces with compatible Raymarine MFDs and
displays key load bearings at identified stress points on a yacht's rigging.
In the MFD's Dashboard app, you can see at a glance the live, static and
dynamic load data transmitted by the Cyclops Marine sensors, at up to 50
sensor placements.
56
CHAPTER 5: GETTING STARTED
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 5.1 Switch on / off — page 58

• 5.2 Controls — page 59
• 5.3 Initial setup — page 63
• 5.4 Calibration — page 71
• 5.5 Shortcuts menu — page 78
• 5.6 Device pairing — page 82
• 5.7 Networking constraints — page 82
• 5.8 Internet connection — page 83

Getting started 57
5.1 Switch on / off
Axiom® and Axiom® 2 displays with a power swipe
Switching on the display
When the display is powered but in standby, the [Power swipe] touch control
will be illuminated.
To switch on the display:

1. Swipe your finger from left to right across the power swipe touch control
The Shortcuts menu is displayed.
2. Press and hold the [Power symbol] until the screen switches off.

Note:
When in standby, the display may still draw a small amount of power from
the battery. If this is a concern, unplug the power supply or switch off at
the breaker.
1. Swipe your finger from left to right across the [Power swipe] touch control.
The display will boot up. Removing power
Switching the display to standby If you wish to ensure that the display is not consuming any power, then it
must be switched off at the breaker or the power cable must be unplugged.
When the display is switched on follow the steps below to put the display
into standby (switch off). When the breaker is switched back on or the cable is reconnected, the display
will resume in the same power state that it was in when it was switched off.
Display standby

Axiom® and Axiom® 2 displays with a power button

Switching on the display
1. Press the power button to switch on the display.
The display will boot up.

58
Switching the display to standby 5.2 Controls
When the display is switched on follow the steps below to put the display
into standby (switch off). Axiom®, Axiom® +, Axiom® XL and Axiom® 2 XL
controls
Axiom®, Axiom® +, Axiom® XL and Axiom® 2 XL displays have a touchscreen
and a touch control power swipe area.

1. Press the [Power] button.

The Shortcuts menu is displayed. 1. [Power swipe area] — Swipe your finger from left to right across the
2. Press and hold the [Power symbol] until the screen switches off. power swipe area to switch on the display. When switched on swipe
Alternatively, you can press and hold the [Power] button for approximately 6 again to open the shortcuts page.
seconds to put the display in standby.
Axiom® 2 Pro controls
Note: Axiom® 2 Pro displays are controlled using both a touchscreen and physical
When in standby, the display may still draw a small amount of power from buttons. The details below describe the buttons and their functions.
the battery. If this is a concern, unplug the power supply or switch off at The display is supplied with the Pilot lower keypad fitted. The optional
the breaker. user-programmable lower keypad is also supplied in the box.

Removing power
If you wish to ensure that the display is not consuming any power, then it
must be switched off at the breaker or the power cable must be unplugged.
When the breaker is switched back on or the cable is reconnected, the display
will resume in the same power state that it was in when it was switched off.

Getting started 59
 Axiom® Pro controls
Axiom® Pro includes both a touchscreen and physical buttons that can be
used to control the display. The details below describe the buttons and their
functions.

1. [Waypoint / MOB] — Press momentarily to place a waypoint at your

vessel’s location. A long press activates the Man overboard (MOB) alarm.
2. [Home] — Press to show the Homescreen.
3. [Menu] — Press to open or close menus.
1. [Home] — Press to show the Homescreen.
4. [Uni-controller] — The Uni-controller consists of a center [OK] button,
[Directional] controls and a [Rotary] knob. 2. [Menu] — Press to open or close menus.
5. [Back] — Press to return to the previous menu or dialog. 3. [Uni-controller] — The Uni-controller consists of a center [OK] button,
[Directional] controls and a [Rotary] knob.
6. [Standby] — Press to disengage active autopilot.
4. [Back] — Press to return to the previous menu or dialog.
7. [Pilot] — Press momentarily to show or hide the Pilot sidebar. A long
press engages the autopilot in locked heading mode. 5. [User configurable keys] — Press and hold the button to assign a function.
Press the button to perform the assigned function.
8. [User configurable keys] — Press and hold each button to assign a
function. Press the button to perform the assigned function. 6. [Switch active] — Press momentarily to switch the active pane in a
splitscreen page. A long press expands the selected pane.
Note: The default Pilot lower keypad has one user-configurable key. 7. [Waypoint / MOB] — Press momentarily to place a waypoint at your
The user-configurable lower keypad has 3 configurable keys. vessel’s location. A long press activates the Man overboard (MOB) alarm.
8. [Pilot] — Press momentarily to show or hide the Pilot sidebar. A long
press engages the autopilot in locked heading mode, or disengages
9. [Power] — Press to switch on the display. When the display is switched an active autopilot.
on, pressing this button opens the Shortcuts page.
9. [Power] — Press to switch on the display. When the display is switched
10. [Pilot status] — LED providing pilot status. For details, refer to: on, pressing this button opens the Shortcuts page.
p.143 — Pilot keypad LED status (Axiom® 2 Pro only)

60
Uni-controller 2. [Menu] — press to access menus. Press again to close menus.
The Uni-controller functions as detailed below. 3. [UniController] — provides a rotary control and a joystick that includes an
[OK] push button for using menus and applications.
4. [Back] — press to return to a previous menu or dialog level.
5. [-] (Minus/Negative symbol) — press to range out.
6. [+] (Plus/Positive symbol) — press to range in.
7. [Active] — press to switch the active pane, or to switch the active display
(in multiple display systems).
8. [Waypoint / MOB] — press and release to access the waypoint options.
Press again to place a waypoint. Press and hold to place a Man
Overboard (MOB) marker at your current position.
9. [Standby (Auto)] — press to disengage integrated autopilot, press and
hold to activate Auto mode on integrated autopilot.
10. [Power] — see table below:
1. [Directional] — Use the 8-way directional controls to reposition the cursor
onscreen.
Momentary
2. [OK] — Push the button to confirm a selection. Configuration Display State press Press and hold
3. [Rotary] — Turn clockwise to Range or Zoom In and counterclockwise to Single display Off Not applicable Not applicable
Range or Zoom out.
On Open Shortcuts Power off / put
page into Standby
RMK controls
Multiple displays All displays Off Not applicable Not applicable
Displays can be controlled remotely using an RMK-9 or RMK-10.
All displays On Open Shortcuts Power down all
page on active displays
display
1 display on and Open Shortcuts Power down
1 display off page on active active display
display

Note: Displays that are switched off must be switched back on using
the display’s [Power] button.

11. Direction of Joystick Up.

1. [Home] — press to return to the Homescreen.
Getting started 61
iKey Bluetooth keyboard controls • [Left arrow] — UniControl Left
The display is compatible with the iKey Bluetooth keyboard. When • [Right arrow] — UniControl Right
connected, the Bluetooth keyboard can be used to control the display.
• [Trackpad] — Touchscreen / UniControl directions
• [Trackpad] + [Left trackpad button] — Pan chart area (Chart app)
• [Trackpad] + [Right trackpad button] — Pan chart area (Chart app)
• [Left trackpad button] — Select / OK
– Press and hold — long press (touchscreen)
• [Right trackpad button] — OK
– Press and hold — long press (touchscreen)
• [>] — Increase display brightness (when Shortcuts page is displayed) / back
sonar scroll-back bar in Fishfinder app
• [<] — Decrease display brightness (when Shortcuts page is displayed)
/forward sonar scroll-back bar in Fishfinder app
• [+] — Range / Zoom In
• [-] — Range / Zoom Out
In addition to typical alphanumeric keyboard functions, the keyboard • [Pg Up] ([Fn] + [Up arrow]) — Range / Zoom In
provides a mapping of the display’s physical buttons, as follows:
• [Pg Dn] ([Fn] + [Down arrow]) — Range / Zoom Out
• [F4] — User Configurable Key (available on Axiom® Pro displays)
– Press and hold — Choose action for button Connecting a Bluetooth keyboard
• [F6] — Power/Shortcuts Follow the steps below to connect a Bluetooth keyboard to your display.
– Press and hold — shut down
• [F7] — Home Note:

• [F8] — Event marker / Waypoint The steps below describe connecting the ikey Bluetooth keyboard. Other
Bluetooth keyboards may be connected in a similar way, but Raymarine
• [F9] — Menu (App specific menu) does not guarantee compatibility.
• [F11] — Switch Active
• [F12] — Pilot
• [Esc] — Back
• [Enter] — OK
• [Up arrow] — UniControl Up
• [Down arrow] — UniControl Down
62
 5.3 Initial setup
First power up
When you power up your new display for the first time a number of actions
are required.
The list below shows the actions that should be performed on your new
display:
1. [Power] on the display.
2. Select your datamaster (only required on networks with more than 1
display).
3. Complete the [Startup wizard] (the wizard will not be shown if you are
connecting to an existing system that has already been set up).
4. Select keypad type (Axiom® 2 Pro displays only).
5. Read and agree to the [Limitations on Use] disclaimer.
6. Select/check your preferred [Data sources], if required.
7. Perform [Engine identification], if required.
8. Select/check [Transducer settings], if required
1. Press and hold the [Power] button for approximately 4 seconds, until the
power button LED flashes red. First power up datamaster selection
2. Press and release the [Bluetooth] button.
Ethernet networks that contain more than 1 display must have a designated
3. From the display, select the status area (top right of homescreen). datamaster. The datamaster is the primary display on the network and
4. Select [Bluetooth Settings]. should be the display that is also connected to the SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000
5. Enable Bluetooth using the toggle switch. network and any other sources of data in your system. The datamaster
6. Select the Bluetooth keyboard. bridges the data over the ethernet network to any compatible networked
‘repeater’ displays.
7. Using the keyboard, enter the Bluetooth pairing code displayed on the
screen, and press [Enter]. By default your display will be set as a datamaster. If you connect a new
8. Once connected, press the [Esc] button on the keyboard to return to display to the network then on first power up the ‘Multiple datamasters found’
the homescreen. notification will be displayed.

Getting started 63
 The wizard will guide you through:
• Language selection
• Boating activity selection
• Boat details configuration
Languages
The following user interface languages are available:
Arabic (ar-AE) Bulgarian Chinese Chinese
(bg-BG) (Simplified) (Traditional)
(zh-CN) (zh-TW)
Croatian (hr-HR) Czech (cs-CZ) Danish (da-DK) Dutch (nl-NL)
English (en-GB) English (en-US) Estonian (et-EE) Finnish (fi-FI)
French (fr-FR) German (de-DE) Greek (el-GR) Hebrew (he-IL)
Hungarian (he-IL) Icelandic (is-IS) Indonesian Italian (it-IT)
(Bahasa) (id-ID)
Select the button from the notification and choose your desired datamaster Japanese (ja-JP) Korean (ko-KR) Latvian (lv-LV) Lithuanian (lt-LT)
from the list.
Malay (Bahasa) Norwegian Polish (pl-PL) Portuguese
(ms-MY ZSM) (nb-NO) (Brazilian) (pt-BR)
Note:
Russian (ru-RU) Slovenian (sl-SI) Spanish (es-ES) Swedish (sv-SE)
If you are selecting a new datamaster then all networked displays’ settings
and any saved waypoints, routes and tracks will be overwritten with those Thai (th-TH) Turkish (tr-TR) Vietnamese
of the new datamaster display. To prevent loss of data and settings (vi-VN)
perform a back up of data and settings on the current datamaster before
assigning a new datamaster. The selected language also determines the display’s default units of measure.
Boating activities
You can change your datamaster at anytime by selecting [Assign as During the start up wizard the boating activity must be selected. The selected
datamaster] from the pop-over menu for the displays listed in the [Network] boating activity will pre-configure the display using applicable settings. Some
settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network]. of these settings may not be available to other boating activities.
One of the following boating activities can be selected:
Startup wizard • [Fishing (freshwater)]
The first time the display is switched on the Startup wizard will be displayed. • [Fishing (saltwater)]
If an existing display is chosen as the datamaster then the start up wizard will
• [Motor cruising]
be skipped. The Startup wizard will help you configure important settings
on your display. • [First responder]
Follow the onscreen instructions and configure the relevant settings. • [Sailing]
The Startup wizard will also be displayed after a [Factory reset] is performed. • [Other]
64
• [Retail/demonstration] Axiom® 2 Pro keypad type selection
After the startup wizard is completed on Axiom® 2 Pro displays, or following
Boat details
the selection of a different display as datamaster, the keypad type selection
During the start up wizard you will be requested to enter the details listed screen is displayed.
below for your boat. You can also add or changes these details at anytime
from the [Boat details] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].

Safety clearances
• Minimum safe depth
• Minimum safe height
• Minimum safe width
For details and guidance on how to set safety clearances refer to:
p.65 — Safety clearances

Engines
• Number of engines
• Engine manufacturer

Tanks
• Number of fuel tanks
By default Axiom® 2 Pro displays are fitted with the Pilot Version lower
• Number of fuel (gasoline) tanks
keypad. If you intend to keep the Pilot Version lower keypad, select the [Pilot
• Number of fresh water tanks version] button and then select [OK].
• Number of live well tanks If you have installed or intend to install the 3 User Keys lower keypad, select
the [3 user keys] button and then select [OK].
• Number of gray water tanks
The keypad selection can be changed at any time from the [This display]
• Number of black water tanks settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > This display > Keypad type:].

Safety clearances
Minimum safe depth
During the start up wizard you can set a minimum safe depth for your vessel.
The minimum safe depth can also be added or changed at anytime from the
[Boat details] setting menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].
A suitable value for minimum safe depth can be established by identifying
your vessel’s maximum draft and adding a safety margin.
Getting started 65
• Maximum vessel draft — the distance from the waterline to the lowest • Chart accuracy — The electronic chart depth may not be accurate or the
point of your vessel’s hull/keel. true depth may have changed since the last survey.
• Safety margin — an adequate clearance below the hull/keel to allow for • Weather conditions — High air pressure, and prevailing wind strength
draft variation and changes in water or bottom conditions. and direction can affect wave height.
Minimum safe height
During the start up wizard you can set a minimum safe height for your vessel.
The minimum safe height can also be added or changed at anytime from the
[Boat details] setting menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].
A suitable value for minimum safe height can be established by identifying
your vessel’s maximum height from the waterline and adding a safety margin.
• Maximum vessel height — the distance from the waterline to the highest
point of your vessel e.g.: top of the mast.
• Safety margin — an adequate clearance above your mast to allow for
height variation.

1. Waterline
2. Maximum vessel draft
3. Safety margin
4. [Minimum safe depth]
Minimum safe depth calculation guidance
The information below is provided for guidance only and is not exhaustive.
Some influencing factors can be unique to certain vessels and/or areas of
water and may not be listed below. You should ensure you account for ALL
factors that apply to your current situation when making calculations.
Some of the factors that can influence how much a vessel draws are shown
below:
• Vessel displacement (weight) — A vessel’s draft will increase when it is
fully laden when compared with its unladen displacement.
• Water type — A vessel’s draft will increase by approximately 2% to 3% in
fresh water compared to seawater.
Some of the factors that should be taken into account when calculating
a safety margin are:
• Vessel maneuvering characteristics — A vessel’s draft increases due
to squat, trim, roll, pitch and heave. 1. Safety margin
66
2. Maximum height from waterline
3. Waterline
4. [Minimum safe height]
Minimum safe height calculation guidance
The information below is provided for guidance only and is not exhaustive.
Some influencing factors can be unique to certain vessels and / or areas of
water and may not be listed below. You should ensure you account for ALL
factors that apply to your current situation when making calculations.
Some of the factors that can influence vessel height are shown below:
• Vessel displacement (weight) — A vessel’s height (from the waterline) will
decrease when it is fully laden compared with its unladen displacement. 1. Port safety margin

• Water type — A vessel’s height will decrease by approximately 2% to 3% in 2. Maximum vessel width (beam)
fresh water compared to seawater. 3. Starboard safety margin
Some of the factors that should be taken into account when calculating 4. [Minimum safe width]
a safety margin are:
Minimum safe width calculation guidance
• Vessel maneuvering characteristics — A vessel’s height changes due
to squat, trim, roll, pitch and heave. The information below is provided for guidance only and is not exhaustive.
Some influencing factors can be unique to certain vessels and / or areas of
• Chart accuracy — The electronic chart data may not be accurate or may
water and may not be listed below. You should ensure you account for ALL
have changed since the last survey.
factors that apply to your current situation when making calculations.
• Weather conditions — Low air pressure, and prevailing wind strength Some of the factors that should be taken into account when calculating
and direction can affect water level. a Safety Margin are:
• Vessel maneuvering characteristics — A vessel’s required clearance will
increase due to roll.
Minimum safe width
• Chart accuracy — The electronic chart data may not be accurate or may
During the start up wizard you can set a minimum safe width for your vessel.
have changed since last surveyed.
The minimum safe width can also be added or changed at anytime from the
[Boat details] setting menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].
A suitable value for minimum safe width can be established by identifying
your vessel’s maximum width and adding a safety margin to each side.
• Maximum width — Taken from the widest point.
• Safety margin — An adequate clearance to either side of the vessel.)

Getting started 67
First power up limitation on use acknowledgement Identifying engines
After you have completed the startup wizard the Limitation on Use (LoU) If your MFD has mislabelled your engines this can be corrected by running
disclaimer is displayed. the engine identification wizard.
When the engine manufacturer is set to [Other] the engine identification
wizard will be enabled in the [Boat details] menu: [Homescreen > Settings >
Boat details > Identify engines].
1. Ensure the correct number of engines is selected in the [Num of Engines:]
box.
2. Select [Identify engines].
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the engine identification wizard.

Multiple data sources (MDS)

MDS is a Raymarine scheme for managing multiple sources of identical data
types on the same network (e.g.: in an MFD network you may have more
You must read and agree to the disclaimer in order to use your MFD. than one source of GNSS (GPS) position data).
Selecting [OK] means you have agreed to the terms of the disclaimer. The MFD will automatically select a preferred data source (device) to use
for that data type.
Engine manufacturer selection MDS can be used for the following data types:
Engine data from engine management systems that transmit compatible data • Depth
or that are connected via a compatible engine gateway can be displayed on
the MFD. During the start up wizard you can select your engine manufacturer. • Speed through water
Engine manufacturer can also be selected or changed at anytime from the • Heading
[Boat details] setting menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].
• GPS
You can select one of the following engine manufacturers:
• GPS Datum
• [Mercury] — Selecting Mercury will make the Mercury VesselView MFD
app available on the MFD. • Wind
• [Yamaha] — Selecting Yamaha will make the Yamaha MFD app available • Time & Date
on the MFD. If you do not want to use the automatically selected data source you can
• [Yamaha HDMI] — Selecting Yamaha HDMI will make the Yamaha HDMI manually select your preferred data source.
MFD app available on the MFD.
• [Other] — Selecting other will enable engine data from compatible engines
that are either directly connected or connected via the ECI-100 available
on the MFD.

68
 Note: Each menu tab enables you to view the available data sources and, if
required, manually select your preferred data source. The currently active
For MDS to be available on your system, all products in the system data source will be ticked and display its current value in use.
that report data must be MDS-compliant. The system will report any
products that are NOT MDS-compliant. It may be possible to upgrade the To manually select a data source, enable the [Manual selection] toggle switch
software for these non-compliant products, to make them compliant. Visit and then select your preferred data source from the list.
the Raymarine website to obtain the latest software for your products: Networked MFDs will automatically be updated to use the Data sources
https://www.raymarine.com/software selected on your datamaster MFD.
If MDS-compliant software is not available for the product and you do NOT Select the [Refresh] button at the bottom of the screen to refresh the list.
want to use the system’s preferred data source, you must remove any
non-compliant products from the system. You should then be able to select Battery configuration
your preferred data source.
The MFD will automatically detect the number of batteries in your system
Once you have completed setting up your preferred data sources, you may when the information is transmitted using standard NMEA 2000 PGNs
be able to add non-compliant products back into the system. 127506 & 127508, or via other supported systems. Detected batteries can be
viewed and customized from the battery configuration table.
Data sources menu The battery configuration table can be accessed from the [Boat details]
settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Configure batteries].
When a system includes multiple sources of an MDS compatible data type
the system will automatically choose the most appropriate source for the
data. If you prefer, you can manually select your own data source.
The [Data sources] menu can be accessed on your datamaster MFD, from the
[Settings] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network > Data sources].

The battery configuration table lists all detected batteries and provide details
and status for each. Default battery names are based on device name plus
battery number (instance).
Selecting a battery from the table displays a pop-over menu where you can
rename or set up a low and high voltage alarm for the selected battery.
Changed battery names will appear in battery data items for sidebars,
Dashboard app and app data overlays.
The battery configuration table can also be accessed from the alarms
settings: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Configure batteries].
Getting started 69
Assigning a function to the User Configurable key 4. Select [Settings reset].
You can assign a function to the User Configurable keys on Axiom® Pro and 5. Select [Yes] .
Axiom® 2 Pro displays. The display will reboot and any settings that have been changed will be
• Axiom® Pro displays have one User Configurable key. reset to their original default values.

• Axiom® 2 Pro displays configured using the Pilot Version lower keypad
also have one User Configurable key. Performing a factory reset
• Axiom® 2 Pro displays configured using the 3 User Keys lower keypad Performing a factory reset will reset your display to its original factory
have 3 User Configurable keys. condition.

1. Press and hold the physical [User Configurable key].

Important:
You can choose one of the following options for each key: Performing a factory reset will erase all user data (i.e.: waypoint, route
• Show/hide Sidebar and tracks) and reset any changes to the display’s settings. If you want to
backup your user data and settings refer to: p.105 — Import/export
• Start/stop track
• Restart XTE
From the Homescreen:
• Touchlock On/Off 1. Select [Settings].
• Take screenshot 2. Select [This display].
• Show/hide AIS vectors 3. Scroll to the bottom of the [This display] menu.
• Switch active pane 4. Select [Factory reset].
5. Select [Yes] .
2. Select the required function from the list. The display will reboot and the start up wizard will be displayed.
You can also assign a function to the [User configurable key] from the Settings
menu: [Homescreen > Settings > This Display > User configurable key]. Importing user data
On Axiom® 2 Pro displays with the 3 User Keys lower keypad fitted, you must
You can import user data (i.e.: Waypoints, Routes and Tracks) to your MFD.
select [3 user keys] instead of [Pilot version] as the [Keypad type].
1. Insert the MicroSD card that contains your user data files into a card
reader slot on your MFD or connected card reader.
Performing a settings reset 2. Select [Import from card] from the Import/export page: ([Homescreen >
Performing a settings reset will reset your display’s settings to their original My data > Import/export > Import from card]).
configuration no data (e.g.: waypoint, routes etc.) will be lost when 3. Select the relevant SD card slot from the file browser and then navigate to
performing a settings reset. your User data file (.gpx).
From the Homescreen: 4. Select the relevant GPX file.
1. Select [Settings]. Your user data has now been imported.
2. Select [This display]. 5. Select [OK].
3. Scroll to the bottom of the [This display] menu.
70
5.4 Calibration 1. [Below waterline] — The depth reading will be increased from the
transducer’s default reading.
Calibration sources 2. [Below transducer] — This is the default reading from the transducer
(zero offset applied).
Compatible transducers and sensors can be calibrated from the display:
The following transducers and sensors can be calibrated: 3. [Below keel] — The depth reading will be decreased from the transducer’s
default reading.
• Sonar (fishfinder) transducers can be calibrated via the Fishfinder app.
• ITC–5 (speed, water temp, wind, compass, rudder, depth) Setting a depth offset
• DST810 (Speed) You can set the point depth readings are taken from.
• Smart wind vane (configuration)
• AR-200 (heading) via the Video app.

Sonar transducer calibration

Sonar transducers should be calibrated to ensure accurate readings are
displayed on the MFD.
Depth offset
Depths are measured from the transducer face to the bottom (e.g.: seabed).
An offset value can be applied to the depth data so that the displayed depth
reading represents the depth reading taken from either the keel (negative
offset) or the waterline (positive offset).
Before setting a waterline or keel offset, establish the vertical distance
between the transducer and waterline or the bottom of your vessel’s keel, as
appropriate. Then set this distance as the depth offset value. 1. Open the [Fishfinder app].
2. Open the [Transducer] settings menu: [Menu > Settings Transducer].
3. If you have more than 1 sonar transducer installed, then you will need
to select the relevant transducer.
4. Select either [Below keel], [Below waterline], or [Below transducer] as
required.
i. If you have selected [Below keel] enter your transducer’s distance
above the lowest point of your keel in the offset field.
ii. If you have selected [Below waterline] enter your transducer’s distance
below the waterline in the offset field.

Getting started 71
Setting a temperature offset
If your sonar transducer includes a temperature sensor then you can check
and calibrate your temperature reading.

Uncalibrated Calibrated

1. Open the [Fishfinder app]. Calibration is an automatic process and starts after your vessel has turned
2. Open the [Transducer] settings menu: [Menu > Settings Transducer]. approximately 100° at a speed of between 3 –15 knots. Calibration requires
3. If you have more than 1 sonar transducer installed, then you will need no user input, however at least a 270° turn is required before the calibration
to select the relevant transducer. process can determine the local deviation and apply a relevant offset.
4. If required, select the [Enable temperature sensor] toggle switch to enable The time it takes to complete the calibration process will vary according to the
the sensor.. characteristics of the vessel, the installation environment of the transducer,
5. Measure the actual water temperature using a thermometer. and the levels of magnetic interference at the time of conducting the
process. Sources of significant magnetic interference may increase the time
6. Check your reading against the displayed [Current temperature ].
required to complete the calibration process. Certain areas with substantial
7. If the readings are not the same, select [Calibrate temp] and enter the magnetic deviation may require extra circles or “figure of 8” manoeuvres to
difference between your 2 readings. be performed. Examples of such sources of magnetic interference include:
• Vessel engines
RealVision™ AHRS calibration
• Vessel alternators
RealVision™ 3D and RealVision™ 3D Max transducers include a built-in AHRS
(Attitude and Heading Reference Sensor), which measures the motion of • Marine pontoons
your vessel to assist in the rendering of sonar images. After installation all • Metal-hulled vessels
RealVision™ transducers require calibration.
• Underwater cables
An uncalibrated transducer can produce an offset to the front edge of the
render of the bottom in the sonar image, as illustrated below.
Note:
In some circumstances, it is beneficial to disable RealVision AHRS if
local sources of magnetic interference are distorting the sonar image.
RealVision AHRS can be disabled from [Settings].
[Menu > Settings > Sounder > AHRS stabilization]

72
 Note: 3. Select [Calibrate] from the pop-over menu..
The Calibration process will require repeating after a [Sonar reset] or
[Factory reset].

Transducer calibration (iTC-5)

You can calibrate depth, speed and wind instrument transducers connected
to your Lighthouse MFD via an iTC-5 (Instrument Transducer Converter).

Note:
Transducer calibration requirements:
• An iTC-5 Instrument Transducer Converter.
• An MFD designated as the datamaster.
• LightHouse version 3.11 or later or LightHouse version 4.0 or later.
4. Select the transducer type (either [Depth], [Wind] or [Speed]).

Note:
You can only calibrate transducers that are directly connected to the
iTC-5 you select for calibration. In systems with more than one iTC-5, it is
important to remember which transducer(s) are connected to each iTC-5.

Selecting a transducer iTC-5

To calibrate instrument transducers, find the relevant iTC-5 from the list of
devices connected to your MFD’s network.
1. Select the [Network] settings tab

[Homescreen > Settings > Network]

2. Find and select the iTC-5 that the transducer you want to calibrate is
connected to.

Getting started 73
Instrument depth calibration Wind calibration
Calibrate your instrument depth transducer as follows. Calibrate your wind transducer as follows:

Select either:
• [Below keel] — The depth reading will be decreased from the transducer’s
default reading by the offset value you specify. The offset should be the
distance between the transducer and the bottom of the keel. • [Linearise transducer] — Turn your boat in circles until all sectors have
been calibrated (the ring turns green as sectors complete).
• [Below waterline] — The depth reading will be increased from the
transducer’s default reading by the offset value you specify. The offset • [Align wind transducer] — Head your boat directly into observed wind and
should be the distance between the waterline and the transducer. select [Align].
• [Below transducer] — This is the transducer’s default reading no offset • [Angle adjustment] — You can apply a specified offset to wind angle
is required. readings.
• [Speed adjustment] — You add a scaling factor to apparent wind speed.

Speed calibration
Calibrate your speed transducer as follows:.
For best results, ensure that there is minimal or no tide/current effect when
calibrating speed through water.

74
• [Set STW to SOG] — Select to apply a scaling factor to all STW readings,
based on the present difference between STW and SOG.
The following options are available for the DST810 transducer:
• [Adjust STW] — Apply a scaling factor to all speed through water values.
• [Automatic calibration] — Perform an on-water calibration sea trial.
STW calibration (DST810) • [Reset to default] — Remove automatic calibration data and return to
default response.
STW (Speed Through Water) can be calibrated on DST810 transducers, by
performing a sea trial calibration. • [Export calibration data] — Save the current calibration data to a memory
card.
• [Import calibration data] — Restore calibration data previously saved to
Note:
a memory card.
Before calibration can be performed you must use the Airmar app to
enable the Attitude PGN 127257.

The calibration settings can be accessed by selecting the DST810 transducer

from the Network list [Homescreen > Settings > Network > DST810] and
selecting [Calibrate] from the pop-over options; then select the [Speed]
button to display the calibration options.

Getting started 75
Performing STW calibration — Power boats Performing STW calibration — Sailing boats
Calibration of STW on a DST810 transducer requires an on water sea trial. Calibration of STW on a DST810 transducer requires an on water sea trial.

For best results avoid strong or variable currents. For best results avoid strong or variable currents.
From the Speed calibration options menu: From the Speed calibration options menu:
1. Select [Automatic calibration] from the speed calibration menu. 1. Select [Automatic calibration] from the speed calibration menu.
2. Select [Start calibration]. 2. Select [Start calibration].
The Recording calibration notification is displayed. If calibration has The Recording calibration notification is displayed. If calibration has
already been performed you will be prompted to overwrite the calibration already been performed you will be prompted to overwrite the calibration
data. data.
3. Drive the boat in a square shaped route for 2 minutes on each side. 3. Sail the boat close hauled upwind for 2 minutes.
4. Repeat the square for each speed point you want to calibrate. 4. Tack and Sail upwind for 2 minutes.
5. Select the [Finished] button. 5. Bear away and sail downwind for 2 minutes.
You can [Pause]/[Resume] the calibration using the relevant buttons. 6. Gybe and sail for 2 minutes.
You can cancel the calibration at anytime by selecting the [Cancel] button. 7. Select the [Finished] button.
You can [Pause]/[Resume] the calibration using the relevant buttons.
You can cancel the calibration at anytime by selecting the [Cancel] button.

76
RSW series wind transducer configuration Note:
The RSW series of wind transducers requires configuration to ensure Offset only needs to be entered if there is no heading sensor.
accurate readings are presented.
It is recommended that wind transducers are installed facing directly
forwards, inline with the mast centreline. If this is not possible then an angle Rotating mast example
of the offset from the mast centreline must be configured as follows:
• On a non-rotating mast where a heading sensor is present, the wind
transducer will automatically compensate for any offset between
installation angle and vessel centerline (heading).
• On a non-rotating mast where no heading sensor is present and the
transducer has not been installed facing directly forwards, it is important
that an offset is applied to account for the difference between the mast’s
centerline and the transducer’s installation angle.
• On a non-rotating mast, if poor heading sensor readings are affecting wind
readings, vessel heading can be ignored. However, an offset must be
applied to account for the difference between the vessel’s centerline and
the transducer’s installation angle.
• On a rotating mast a heading sensor is required so that wind readings
1. Vessel centerline.
compensate for mast angle. It is important that an offset is applied
to account for the difference between the mast’s centerline and the 2. Mast centerline.
transducer’s installation angle. The transducer will automatically
3. Mast rotation.
compensate for the difference between heading and mast angle.
4. Offset angle.
Non-rotating mast example
Note:
A heading sensor and, where applicable, offset angle is required.

Configuring RSW wind using LightHouse 4 display

The RSW wind transducer can be configured using an Axiom display, running
LightHouse™ 4, version 4.5 or later.
The RSW wind transducer configuration is initiated from the [Network]
settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network]
1. Select the RSW Wired Gateway from the network list.
2. Select [Configure settings] from the Pop-over options.
1. Vessel/mast centerline. 3. If your vessel has a rotating mast:
2. Offset angle. i. Enable the [Rotating mast] toggle switch.
Getting started 77
 ii. If applicable, enter the offset value for your transducer.

• A vessel heading sensor is required for rotating masts.

• The offset should be measured from the mast’s centerline to the
transducer. This may be different from the vessel centerline.

5.5 Shortcuts menu

The Shortcuts menu can be accessed by swiping left to right across the
[Power swipe] area on touchscreen displays or by pressing the physical
4. If your vessel does not have a rotating mast and does not have a heading [Power] button.
sensor; if applicable, enter the offset value for your transducer.

• The offset should be measured from the vessel/mast’s centerline to

the transducer.

5. If your vessel does not have a rotating mast but does have a heading
sensor, no offset value is required. However, if poor heading data is
affecting wind data readings you can enable the [Ignore sensor heading
data] toggle switch and if applicable, enter an offset value for your
transducer.
78
 Note: Note:
Some of the displayed options are dependent on connected hardware, e.g. • Ensure that the memory card is ejected safely using the [Eject SD card]
the [Engage pilot]/[Disengage pilot] option is only available if you have a option from the Shortcuts menu.
compatible autopilot system connected and integrated with your display.
• Due to protected content restrictions, you cannot take a screenshot of a
feed that could contain copyrighted materials, such as the HDMI input.
The following shortcuts are available.
• Take Screenshot Activating touchlock
• Activate Touchlock
In rough weather conditions precipitation may lead to erroneous touches
• Stop Radar transmitting being detected by the touchscreen. In these conditions you can use
touchlock to prevent this.
• Disable all Sounders
1. Select [Activate touchlock] from the [Shortcuts] menu.
• Adjust Locked heading
• Engage / Disengage autopilot With touchlock activated the touchscreen will be disabled. To re-enable
the touchscreen, swipe from left to right across the [Power swipe] area,
• Eject SD card or press the power button.
• Power off
• Adjust audio speaker volume Radar standby
• Adjust Brightness You can place a transmitting Radar in Standby from the Shortcuts menu.
• Toggle auto brightness on and off (Axiom® 2 displays only). 1. Select [Stop Radar tx] from the [Shortcuts] menu.
• Display mode You can start your radar transmitting again from the Radar app.

Taking a screenshot Eject SD card

You can take a screenshot and save an image of what is currently displayed Safely eject your SD card from your MFD.
on the screen to an external memory card.
The memory card that screenshots will be saved to can be selected from Important:
the [This display] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > This display > Failure to eject cards safely may result in corrupted data or memory cards.
Screenshot file:].
Screenshots are saved in .png format in the following location on your
memory card ‘\Raymarine\Image files\’. 1. Select [Eject SD card] from the [Shortcut] menu.
1. Use the [Power swipe] or [Power] button to open the Shortcuts menu. 2. Select the card reader slot you want to eject from the pop-over menu.
2. Select [Take screenshot]. 3. Physically eject the card from the reader.
3. Select [OK] on the screenshot notification. 4. Select [I have removed SD cards] to complete the process.
Displays that have physical buttons can also have a user-configurable key
assigned as a [Take screenshot] button.
Getting started 79
Enabling/Disabling sonar modules Shortcuts menu
Your sonar module can be enabled and disabled from the shortcuts menu. In
systems with multiple sonar modules the control will enable and disable all
connected sonar modules.
1. Select [Enable all sounders] or [Disable all sounders].

Autopilot shortcuts
When Autopilot control is enabled, the shortcuts menu provides an autopilot
icon which can be used to engage and disengage your autopilot
When the autopilot is engaged in locked heading mode you can also adjust
the locked heading from the Shortcuts menu.

Audio volume control

When your display has audio speakers connected via Bluetooth, or via RCA From the Shortcuts menu, select the speaker symbol to display the volume
connections on Axiom® 2 displays, volume controls will be available in the controls.
Homescreen status area. Additionally, on the Shortcuts menu, separate Use your finger to move the volume control along the relevant slider bar
controls are available for the audio volume and alarms volume for Apps. to adjust the volume.

Homescreen status area

Note:
A Bluetooth speaker will take priority over RCA audio and HDMI out (i.e.: if
all are connected, audio will only be output from the Bluetooth speaker; if
only RCA and HDMI out are connected, the audio will play from both. In
this scenario, to output from RCA audio / HDMI out instead, switch the
Bluetooth speaker off).

From the Homescreen, select the status area located on the top right of the
screen, and then select the Speaker symbol to display the volume controls.

80
Adjusting brightness Display mode
Screen brightness can be adjusted from the Shortcuts menu. In addition to the default [Day] display mode the MFD can also be configured
for night time use using the [Night] or [Extra dark] display modes.
The display mode can be changed by selecting the [Display mode] icon from
the shortcuts menu.

Press the [Power] button / swipe the [Power swipe] touch control to display
the [Shortcuts] menu and then select the [Display mode] icon. You can then
switch between [Day], [Night], and[ Extra dark] display modes.
With the Shortcuts menu displayed:
1. Use your finger to move the [Display brightness] control along the slider
bar to adjust the brightness level.

On Axiom® Pro and Axiom® 2 Pro displays you can twist the uni–controller
to adjust the brightness level.

When the Shortcuts menu is displayed you can also use the [Power] button or
the [Power swipe] area to increase the brightness level in increments.

Auto brightness
Axiom® 2 displays include an Ambient Light Sensor, which automatically
adjusts the screen brightness to reflect the level of ambient lighting in the
surrounding environment.
1. [Day] — This is the default mode and uses standard colors using either
the [Light] or [Dark] color theme that is selected in the [This display]
To allow the display to adjust brightness automatically, enable the [AUTO] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > This display].
toggle switch in the Shortcuts menu.
2. [Night] — Uses red text and icons and dark background colors.
3. [Extra dark] — Uses red text and icons and very dark background colors.
Note: Extra dark mode is only available when dark mode is active.
Auto brightness works in conjunction with the Shared Brightness feature,
so that when an Axiom® 2 display’s brightness automatically changes, Note:
compatible display products in the same Shared Brightness group will also When using the [Night] or [Extra dark] mode at night, be careful if changing
be automatically adjusted to match the brightness level of the Axiom 2 back to [Day] mode or accessing an MFD screen that does not support the
Pro display. mode, as the higher display brightness may compromise your night vision.
Getting started 81
5.6 Device pairing Pairing a Bluetooth speaker
Before attempting to pair with a Bluetooth speaker, ensure that the speaker
Pairing a RMK remote keypad is switched on and discoverable.
With your MFD’s Bluetooth function enabled:
You can control your MFD with an RMK keypad.
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, select the relevant device from the
From the [This display] tab of the [Settings] menu: [Homescreen > Settings [Available devices] list.
> This display ].
2. If requested, confirm the Bluetooth pairing code.
1. Select [Pair keypad].
If pairing is successful, the speaker will appear in the [Paired devices] list and
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to pair your keypad. display the [Connected] message.
Ensure you select the correct orientation for the keypad during the
pairing process.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 on each MFD you want to control from your keypad.
5.7 Networking constraints
On systems that include more than 1 MFD/Chartplotter, the MFDs/Chartplotter
Note: must be networked together using an ethernet network. The ethernet
network can be either a direct RayNet cable connection or connection via a
Please refer to the controls section of your keypad’s documentation for
network switch such as the RNS-5. There are constraints which apply when
details on controlling MFDs using a keypad.
networking MFDs/Chartplotters.
Ethernet networks
Clear pairing (RMK) • Any network including more than 1 MFD/Chartplotter must have a
1. Select [Clear pairings] to unpair ALL RMK keypads currently paired with designated Datamaster.
the MFD. • The Datamaster MFD/Chartplotter is the primary display in the system
and will receive data from NMEA 2000/SeaTalk NG® and if applicable
Pairing with a Quantum Radar scanner NMEA 0183 devices. The data received by the Datamaster will be bridged
You can connect a Quantum Radar scanner to your MFD using Wi-Fi. over the ethernet network to other networked MFDs/Chartplotters.
Pre-requisites: • Up to 10 MFDs/Chartplotters can be connected to the same network. It
is recommended that all networked MFDs/Chartplotters have the same
• Ensure you have connected your Quantum Radar scanner in accordance software version.
with the instructions provided with the Radar scanner.
• Other ethernet devices connected directly to an MFD/Chartplotter will be
• Ensure you know your Radar scanner’s SSID and passcode. shared with networked MFDs/Chartplotters.
1. Select [Pair with Quantum] from the [This display] tab: [Homescreen > • Networked MFDs/Chartplotters will share the Datamaster’s Homescreen.
Settings > This display > Pair with Quantum]. Changes made to the Homescreen on any MFD/Chartplotter will be
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to pair with your Quantum Radar. reflected on all networked MFDs/Chartplotters.
The pairing process may take several minutes to complete. • Electronic cartography stored on internal or external memory on any
MFD/Chartplotter can be shared by all MFDs/Chartplotters on the same
For more information on the Quantum Radar pairing process (including network.
troubleshooting information), refer to the Quantum Radar Installation • Up to 2 Radar scanners can be connected to the same network and used
instructions documents. simultaneously.
82
• Multiple Sonar modules can be connected to the same network and used details on networking legacy MFDs/Chartplotters refer to:
simultaneously. p.34 — Legacy eS and gS Series compatibility with Axiom displays
• MFDs/Chartplotters with an internal sonar module can share sonar data • Alpha Performance displays cannot be networked to Legacy displays
with networked MFDs/Chartplotters. running LightHouse™ 2.
For details regarding internet connections refer to:
p.83 — Internet connection
For details regarding networking third party ethernet products refer to: 5.8 Internet connection
p.550 — Ethernet (IPv4) networking of Raymarine devices with third-
party products Some features require the display to have a connection to the internet.
Wi-Fi networks
• MFD/Chartplotter Wi-Fi connection can be used to provide internet Note:
connection via an access point.
In versions of the YachtSense ™ Link router software later than v4.20, the
• MFDs/Chartplotters that have an internet connection using Wi-Fi will share display cannot connect to the router’s Wi-Fi access point.
the internet connection with ethernet networked MFDs/Chartplotters.
• An internet connection over ethernet will take precedence over an internet
connection over Wi-Fi. The display can be connected to the internet using the following methods:
• Data from ethernet networked devices is not bridged over a Wi-Fi • Connecting the display’s Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi access point which
connection. has an internet connection, such as marina Wi-Fi or mobile device. For
connection details, refer to: p.84 — Connecting to the internet using Wi-Fi
• Data from NMEA 2000/SeaTalk NG® devices is not bridged over a Wi-Fi
connection. • Connecting the display’s RayNet Ethernet connection to a YachtSense ™
NMEA 2000/SeaTalk NG® networks Link router which has internet access. Requires YachtSense ™ Link router
software v4.20 or above
• Only the Datamaster MFD/Chartplotter needs to be connected to the
NMEA 2000/SeaTalk NG® backbone. • Connecting the display’s Wi-Fi connection to a YachtSense ™ Link router
which has internet access. Requires YachtSense ™ Link router software
• If more than 1 MFD/Chartplotter is connected to the backbone only the v4.17 or earlier.
Datamaster MFD/Chartplotter will receive data from other devices on the
backbone. • Connecting the display’s Wi-Fi or RayNet Ethernet connection to a
third-party router which has internet access
• The Datamaster MFD/Chartplotter will bridge NMEA 2000/SeaTalk NG®
data over the ethernet network to other MFDs/Chartplotters.
• More than 1 MFD/Chartplotter can be connected to the same backbone for Note:
data redundancy purposes. If the Datamaster MFD/Chartplotter goes down • When connecting to a YachtSense ™ Link router, follow the instructions
another networked MFD/Chartplotter can take its place as the Datamaster. provided with the router to set up an internet connection.
Networking with legacy MFDs/Chartplotters • When using a third-party router, follow the instructions provided with
• Axiom® 2 MFDs/Chartplotters cannot be networked to Legacy it to set up an internet connection and then follow the guidance in
MFDs/Chartplotters running LightHouse™ 2. the appendix of this document to help you configure internet access:
• Axiom® MFDs/Chartplotters running earlier versions of LightHouse™ p.550 — IP Networking of Raymarine devices with Third-party products
3 can be networked to legacy MFDs/Chartplotters. For further
Getting started 83
YachtSense Link network connection Note:
For optimum internet performance, Raymarine displays should be connected If there is a YachtSense ™ Link router connected to your system selecting
to the router via a wired RayNet Ethernet connection. this button will display the router’s web interface.
For YachtSense ™ Link router software versions from v4.20 onwards, it is no
longer possible for a display to connect to the router’s Wi-Fi Access Point. 3. Select the relevant Wi-Fi access point.
Software Description 4. Enter the password for the network and select [Connect].
version Your display will now connect to the access point.
Earlier than Display may be connected to the YachtSense ™ Link 5. Select the [Back] triangle symbol or the [Home] circle symbol at the
v4.20 router’s Wi-Fi Access Point. However, functionality bottom of the screen.
will be limited to providing an internet connection for Your display should now have an internet connection.
third-party apps which require internet access, such as
Netflix.
Wi-Fi settings — Axiom displays
v4.20 or later Display cannot connect to the YachtSense ™ Link
router’s Wi-Fi Access Point. The Wi-Fi settings menu provides settings to connect the display to a Wi-Fi
access point or hotspot.

Note:
For YachtSense ™ Link routers which previously
had a Wi-Fi connection to a display and have
since been upgraded to v4.20 from an earlier
software version, the display will receive an
IP address conflict notification. To correct the
conflict, select [Forget network] in the displayed
notification popup.

Connecting to the internet using Wi-Fi

The display can be connected directly to an access point that has an internet
connection.
From the Homescreen:
1. Select the [Apps] icon from the Homescreen.
The app launcher is displayed.
1. Wi-Fi options — Provides the following options:
2. Select the connection status button, located on the top right of the app
launcher page. • Add network — Manually add a network.
The Wi-Fi settings page is displayed and will scan for available networks. • Saved networks — View a list of all saved networks.
• Refresh — Rescan available networks.
• Advanced — View advanced network settings.
84
2. Enable/Disable Wi-Fi. 8. View open apps — Go back to an open LightHouse apk app.
3. Connected access point.
4. Available access points.
5. Back button — Go back to the previous menu.
6. Home button — Go back to the previous menu.

Wi-Fi settings — Axiom 2 displays

The Wi-Fi settings menu provides settings to connect the display to a Wi-Fi
access point or hotspot.

1. Enable/Disable Wi-Fi.
2. Connected Access Point (AP).
3. Available Access Points (AP).
4. Add network — Manually add a network.
5. Wi-Fi preferences — Provides Wi-Fi connection options.
6. Back button — Go back to the previous menu.
7. Home button — Go back to the previous menu.
Getting started 85
CHAPTER 6: HOMESCREEN
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 6.1 Accepting the Limitations on Use — page 87

• 6.2 Homescreen overview — page 87
• 6.3 Homescreen app page icons — page 88
• 6.4 MFD Apps — page 88
• 6.5 Creating an app page — page 94
• 6.6 Homescreen Dynamic tile — page 95
• 6.7 Global positioning — page 96
• 6.8 Status area — page 101
• 6.9 My data — page 103
• 6.10 My profiles — page 107

86
6.1 Accepting the Limitations on Use 6.2 Homescreen overview
After your MFD has powered up the Homescreen is displayed with the All settings and apps are accessed from the Homescreen. The homescreen
limitations on use disclaimer. is split into 3 pages. The center page is shown by default.

1. Before using the MFD you must accept the Limitations on Use (LoU)
disclaimer. To view the full LoU Disclaimer, select the [Select for more
details] link.

The LoU acknowledgment is displayed each time the display is powered

on and for each new user profile. The full LoU text can be accessed at
any time from the [Getting started] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings
> Getting started > View terms of use].

Note:
By selecting the OK button you are agreeing to the full terms of use.

1. GNSS position/fix details — Select the text or icon to view GNSS settings
and fix accuracy details. For details refer to: p.98 — GNSS (GPS) Status
2. MOB (Man Over Board) — Select and hold to activate the MOB alarm.
For details refer to: p.131 — Man Overboard (MOB)
3. Profiles — Select the text or icon to access user and demo profiles. For
details refer to: p.107 — My profiles
4. Premium logo — The premium logo identifies that you have a
LightHouse™ chart card inserted that has a valid premium subscription.
The logo is not displayed if your subscription has expired. For details
refer to: p.203 — LightHouse charts
5. External device connections and system time — Icons are displayed to
signify external device connections. Select this area to access Bluetooth
and YachtSense ™ Link settings, disengage your autopilot or to adjust the
UTC time offset. For details refer to: p.101 — Status area
Homescreen 87
6. Homescreen background image — The default image is determined 6.3 Homescreen app page icons
by the boating activity selected during the start up wizard. The
background image can be customized from the [This display] settings Two sets of Homescreen app page icons are available [Classic icons] and
menu: [Homescreen > Settings > This display]. For details refer to: [Mode icons]. By default the [Classic icons] are used.
p.118 — Splashscreen and background images
Example Homescreen using Mode icons
7. Fullscreen app page icon — Select an icon to open the relevant MFD
app page. For available MFD apps refer to: p.88 — MFD Apps
8. Homescreen page navigation — Select the [<] (left) arrow, or swipe
your finger from left to right across the homescreen to cycle though
homescreen pages on the left.
9. Homescreen page navigation — Select the [>] (right) arrow, or swipe
your finger from right to left across the homescreen to cycle though
homescreen pages on the right.
10. Splitscreen app page icon — Select an icon to open the relevant
MFD app page. App pages can contain more than 1 MFD app.
For details on creating new homescreen app pages refer to:
p.94 — Creating an app page
11. My data — Select to access my data (Waypoints, Routes and Tracks),
the fuel manager and to view files on external storage. For details refer
to: p.103 — My data
12. App launcher — Select to access installed Android apk apps and
shortcuts to user interfaces for integrated partner hardware. For details
refer to: p.499 — App launcher
The mode icon style provide a clearer indication of the appearance of the
13. Homescreen page navigation — Identifies the current homescreen page. app when in use.
14. Alarm manager — Select to access the alarm manager and view alarm Chart app and Fishfinder app icons will change dynamically to indicate which
history. For details refer to: p.126 — Alarms manager Chart mode or Fishfinder channel is in use.
15. Settings menus — Select to access the MFD’s settings menu. For details The style of Homescreen icons can be selected from the [Getting started]
refer to: p.109 — Settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Homescreen]

Note:
When more than one display is connected to the same network, the
6.4 MFD Apps
Homescreen of the MFD designated as datamaster will be mirrored on MFD apps are displayed in app pages. App pages are accessed from the
all MFDs. Homescreen. App pages can be fullscreen, containing only one app, or they
can be splitscreen, containing up to 4 apps.
The apps that appear on the Homescreen by default are determined by the
boating activity chosen during the initial start up wizard.
88
Some apps are only available with specific MFD configurations, or when 2. Navigate mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode
required hardware is connected. icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is set to
Not all apps appear on the Homescreen by default. If an app is not present [Navigate] mode. The vessel icon will be updated dynamically to show
on the Homescreen, you can create a new app page that includes the app. your chosen vessel type.
3. Fishing mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode
Chart app icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is set
to [Fishing] mode. The vessel icon will be updated dynamically to show
The Chart app displays electronic cartographic information from your Chart your chosen vessel type.
cards and when used in conjunction with a GNSS receiver, plots your
vessel’s position. The Chart app can be used to mark specific locations using 4. Fish mapping mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to
Waypoints, build and navigate Routes, or keep a record of where you have Mode icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is
been by recording a Track. set to [Fish mapping] mode. When compatible hardware (e.g.: SR200) is
To use the chart app for navigation, as a minimum navigational electronic detected, fish mapping mode will be available. Fish mapping mode also
charts and a GNSS receiver are required. requires a valid SiriusXM subscription.
For more information refer to p.190 — Chart app - General 5. Racing mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode
icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is set
Chart app icons
to [Racing] mode. Racing mode is available when the boating activity
The following icons can be used on the Homescreen for Chart app pages: selected during the initial start up wizard was set to Sailing.
6. Anchor mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode
icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is set to
[Anchor] mode.
7. Weather mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode
icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is set to
[Weather] mode. When compatible hardware (e.g.: SR200) is detected,
Weather mode will be available. Weather mode also requires a valid
SiriusXM subscription.
8. MOB mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode icons,
this icon is used for charts app pages where the MOB alarm is currently
active.
9. Tides mode icon — When the Homescreen icons are set to Mode
icons, this icon is used for charts app pages where the chart app is set
to [Tides] mode.

Radar app
The Radar app is a situational awareness aid that displays a graphical
representation of your surroundings in relation to your vessel, using the
echo/target returns from a connected Radar scanner. The Radar app allows
1. Classic chart icon — This is the icon used for all chart app pages when you to track targets and measure distances and bearings.
the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons. To use the Radar app, a compatible radar scanner is required.
Homescreen 89
For more information, refer to: p.327 — Radar app
Radar app icons
The following icons can be used on the Homescreen for Radar app pages:

1. Classic radar icon — This is the icon used for all radar app pages when
the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
2. Radar mode icon — This is the icon used for all radar app pages when
the Homescreen icons are set to Mode icons.

Fishfinder app
The Fishfinder app uses a connected sonar module and transducer to help
you to find fish by building up an underwater view of bottom structure and 1. Conical channel classic icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder app
targets in the water column covered by your transducer. pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons
To use the Fishfinder app, a compatible sonar module and transducer is and the selected fishfinder channel has been set to a conical beam
required. traditional or CHIRP sonar channel. The icon will look slightly differently
depending on the chosen channel frequency. The icon will also change
For more information, refer to: p.304 — Fishfinder app
if [Zoom] mode is enabled.
Fishfinder app icons
2. DownVision channel classic icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder
The following icons can be used on the Homescreen for Fishfinder app app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic
pages: icons and the selected fishfinder channel has been set to DownVision.
The icon will also change if [Zoom] mode is enabled.
3. SideVision channel classic icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder app
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons
and the selected fishfinder channel has been set to SideVision.
4. 3D Vision channel classic icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder app
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons
and the selected fishfinder channel has been set to 3D Vision.
5. Conical channel mode icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder app
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons
90
 and the selected fishfinder channel has been set to a conical beam Dashboard app page icons
traditional or CHIRP sonar channel. The icon will look slightly differently
depending on the chosen channel frequency. The icon will also change
if [Zoom] mode is enabled.
6. DownVision channel mode icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder
app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode
icons and the selected fishfinder channel has been set to DownVision.
The icon will also change if [Zoom] mode is enabled.
7. SideVision mode icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder app pages
when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons and the 1. Classic Dashboard icon — This is the icon used for all Dashboard app
selected fishfinder channel has been set to SideVision. pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
8. 3D Vision channel mode icon — This is the icon used for fishfinder app 2. Dynamic tile — The Dynamic tile is available in both Homescreen icon
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons and modes and shows live data directly on the Homescreen. For more
the selected fishfinder channel has been set to 3D Vision. information about Dynamic tile, refer to: p.95 — Dynamic tile.
3. Dashboard mode icon — This is the icon used for all Dashboard app
Dashboard and Engine apps pages when the Homescreen icons are set to Mode icons.
The Dashboard app and Engine apps enable you to view data transmitted by
compatible sensors and engines or engine gateways. Engine app page icons

The Dashboard app is always available and can be used to view data
transmitted by compatible sensors and engines or engine gateways.
The Dashboard app is also used for controlling, configured, compatible,
third-party Digital Switching hardware. For more information about the
Dashboard app, refer to: p.389 — Dashboard app
The following engine-specific apps are available:
• Mercury app. For more information about the Mercury app, refer to:
p.413 — Mercury app
• Yamaha app. For more information about the Yamaha app, refer to:
p.429 — Yamaha app
• Yamaha HDMI app. For more information about the Yamaha HDMI app,
refer to: p.429 — Yamaha app

1. Mercury app icon — This icon is used in both classic icon and mode icon
Homescreen modes. The Mercury app is only available when Mercury
has been selected as the engine manufacturer from the [Boat details]
settings menu. The app requires a compatible Mercury SmartCraft
system.

Homescreen 91
2. Classic Yamaha app icon — This is the icon used for all Yamaha app Entertainment app page icons
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
The Yamaha app is only available when Yamaha has been selected as
the engine manufacturer from the [Boat details] settings menu. The app
requires a compatible Yamaha gateway.
3. Classic Yamaha HDMI — This is the icon used for all Yamaha HDMI app
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
The Yamaha HDMI app is only available when Yamaha HDMI has been
selected as the engine manufacturer from the [Boat details] settings
menu. The app requires a compatible Yamaha HDMI interface.
4. Yamaha mode icon — This is the icon used for both the Yamaha or
Yamaha HDMI app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the
Mode icons. The app is only available when Yamaha or Yamaha HDMI
has been selected as the engine manufacturer from the [Boat details]
settings menu. The app requires a compatible Yamaha gateway or
Yamaha HDMI interface.

Entertainment apps
Entertainment apps are apps that can be used to view or listen to audio and
visual sources on the display screen.
The following entertainment apps are available:
• Audio app — The Audio app allows you to control audio from a connected 1. Classic Video icon — This is the icon used for all Video app pages when
compatible entertainment system. For more information, refer to: the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
p.474 — Audio app 2. Classic Audio icon — This is the icon used for all Audio app pages when
• Video app — The Video app allows you to view and record feeds from the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
connected compatible video equipment, such as an IP camera or Thermal 3. Classic PDF viewer icon — This is the icon used for all PDF viewer app
camera. For more information, refer to: p.440 — Video app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
• PDF viewer — The PDF Viewer app allows you to open PDF files 4. Video mode icon — This is the icon used for all Video app pages when
located on external storage devices. For more information, refer to: the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
p.486 — PDF Viewer app 5. Audio mode icon — This is the icon used for all Audio app pages when
• YouTube TV — The YouTube TV app allows you to watch live sports, the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
shows and news directly on your MFD. For more information refer to: 6. PDF viewer mode icon — This is the icon used for all PDF viewer app
p.471 — YouTube & YouTube TV pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
• YouTube — The YouTube app allows you to watch YouTube 7. YouTube TV — This icon is used for all YouTube TV app pages
content directly on your MFD. For more information refer to: regardless of Homescreen icon setting.
p.471 — YouTube & YouTube TV 8. YouTube — This icon is used for all YouTube app pages regardless of
Homescreen icon setting.
92
YachtSense and DockSense apps 4. DockSense mode icon — This is the icon used for all DockSense app
The YachtSense app is used for monitor and control of Raymarine’s pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
YachtSense ™ Digital Control Systems. The DockSense™ app is used to control
Raymarine’s DockSense™ Alert or DockSense™ Control systems. Other apps
DockSense app • Messages app — The First responder boating activity profile includes
Requires a fully-commissioned DockSense system. a Messages app. For details, refer to: p.384 — Messaging app The
• For DockSense™ Alert, refer to separate operation instructions — document Messages app also requires STEDS-compatible AIS hardware.
number 81393. • NeuBoat Dock app — The NeuBoat dock app requires a fully
• For DockSense™ Control, refer to separate operation instructions — commissioned Avikus NeuBoat system. The [NeuBoat Dock app] combines
document number: 81398. a top down, bow up surround view around your vessel with up to 6
additional splitscreen camera views to provide assistance when performing
YachtSense app docking maneuvers. For NeuBoat Dock operation, refer to separate
Requires a fully-commissioned YachtSense Digital Control System. operation instructions — document number 81418.
The YachtSense app will be bespoke for each installation.
DockSense and YachtSense app page icons

1. Classic Messages icon — This is the icon used for all Messages app
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
1. Classic YachtSense app icon — This is the icon used for all YachtSense 2. Messages mode icon — This is the icon used for all Messages app pages
app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
icons. 3. Classic NeuBoat Dock icon — This is the icon used for all NeuBoat Dock
2. Classic DockSense app icon — This is the icon used for all DockSense app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic
app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Classic icons.
icons. 4. NeuBoat Dock mode icon — This is the icon used for all NeuBoat Dock
3. YachtSense mode icon — This is the icon used for all YachtSense app app pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
pages when the Homescreen icons are set to the default Mode icons.
Homescreen 93
6.5 Creating an app page Additional mode icon steps
When the Homescreen is set to use Mode icons there are additional steps
New app pages can be created in the empty slots available on the required when creating an app page which includes the Chart app or
homescreen. Fishfinder app.
App pages can include MFD apps (e.g.: Chart app, Radar app etc.) and also
shortcuts to the user interface of 3rd party integration partner’s hardware, if
connected.

1. When creating a Chart app page you will need to also select the chart
app mode that you want to use.
2. When creating a Fishfinder app page you will need to also select the
channel and if applicable the transducer that you want to use.
1. Press and hold on an empty slot on the homescreen.
2. Select the [Layout:] option and choose the desired page layout. Customizing an existing app page
You can rename, change the apps or delete existing app pages.
Some apps are restricted to certain layouts.
1. Select and hold on an existing app page icon on the homescreen.
3. Select the icons for the Apps that you want to be displayed on the page. 2. Select from the following options:
4. Select [Next] . • [Customize] — Selecting Customize will open the page creation page
5. Enter a name for your new app page. where you can select the layout and which apps you want on the app
page.
A default name will be suggested.
• [Delete] — Selecting delete will delete the page from the homescreen.
The delete action cannot be undone.
6. Select [Save].
The app page is saved and the new app page icon will be shown on the • [Rename] — Selecting Rename will open the onscreen keyboard so that
homescreen. you can change the name of the app page.

94
Editing the splitscreen ratio 6.6 Homescreen Dynamic tile
The size of the apps in a splitscreen app page can be changed.
The app page icon used for the fullscreen Dashboard app on the homescreen
can be changed to a [Dynamic tile].

The [Dynamic tile] can display up to 4 live data items.

The [Dynamic tile] can be selected to open the Dashboard app.
To enable or customize a Dynamic tile, press and hold on a fullscreen
Dashboard app page icon and use the pop-over options.
With a Splitscreen app page displayed:
1. Select [Edit split ratio] from the [Page settings] menu: [Menu > Settings
> Page settings > Edit split ratio.]
2. Drag the Resize icon to create the desired split ratio.
3. Select [Save].

Homescreen 95
Enabling and configuring the Dynamic tile 8. Select the [<] (Back) or [X] (Close).
You can enable and configure [Dynamic tile] by following the steps below. 9. Follow steps 4 to 8 for each of the data items.
10. Select the [<] (Back) or [X] (Close) to return to the Homescreen.

6.7 Global positioning

Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
constellations
A GNSS constellation is a system of satellites that provides autonomous
geospatial positioning that allows electronic devices with compatible
receivers to determine their location (longitude, latitude and altitude).
Available GNSS constellations

From the Homescreen:

1. Press and hold on the fullscreen Dashboard app page icon.
2. Enable the [Dynamic tile] toggle switch.
1. GPS — (NAVSTAR) Global Positioning System is the US owned
3. Select [Edit dynamic data].
constellation of satellites that became fully operational in 1995. GPS is
4. Select a data item. the most widely used GNSS constellation and the term GPS has become
5. Select [Edit] from the pop-over menu. synonymous with GNSS.
6. Select the type of data item you want to display. 2. Galileo — EU owned satellite constellation that became fully operational
The data items are sorted by number data items and graphical bar data in 2019.
items. 3. BeiDou — Chinese Regional Navigation Satellite System, currently in its
third generation, became fully operational in 2020.
7. Select the relevant data item category and then select the data item.
96
4. GLONASS — (GLObalnaya NAavigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema" or
“Global Navigation Satellite System”) is the Russian owned constellation
of satellites that has offered global coverage since 2010.
GNSS Constellations:
The GPS constellation (USA) is always enabled and cannot be disabled. The
Galileo constellation can be enabled along with one other constellation.
BeiDou and GLONASS cannot be enabled at the same time.
The GNSSs available are:
• BeiDou (China)
• Galileo (EU)
• GLONASS (Russia)

Note: 1. ALCOMSAT (Algeria)

GNSS constellation selection is only available when using a compatible 2. AUS-NZ (Australia / New Zealand)
GNSS (GPS) receiver. Not all MFD and GNSS receiver variants support
the same range of constellations: 3. BDSBAS (China)
• For a list of compatible GNSS receivers refer to: 4. EGNOS (Europe)
p.100 — GNSS constellation selection compatible receivers 5. GAGAN (India)
• For the settings available on incompatible receivers refer to: 6. KAAS (Korea)
GNSS settings for incompatible GNSS receivers
7. MSAS (Japan)
8. NSAS (Nigeria)
Satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS)
9. SDCM (Russia)
Satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS) are systems that are used to
complement existing GNSS by providing differential corrections that improve 10. WAAS (USA)
GNSS performance, including accuracy, availability and reliability. 11. QZSS (JAPAN)
The image below shows approximate coverage of the SBASs available on
the MFD:

Homescreen 97
GNSS (GPS) Status Note: When using a compatible GNSS receiver, ticks are shown
Your vessel’s GNSS (GPS) position is displayed in the top left corner of next to the symbols to indicate which constellations are currently
the Homescreen. The status of the position fix and the satellites in use is selected for positioning.For a list of compatible GNSS receivers refer
displayed in the Fix menu. to: p.100 — GNSS constellation selection compatible receivers

6. The sky view on the left side of the page shows the position of navigation
satellites. The color of the satellite identifies its status:
• Green = satellite in use
• Orange = tracking satellite (not currently used for position fix)
• Gray = searching for satellites
7. The signal strength indicator for the satellites can be enabled and
disabled using the [Show Signal (dB)] toggle switch.

GNSS settings
The settings for your GNSS (GPS) receiver (internal or external) can be
accessed from the [Satellites] menu: [Homescreen > GNSS pop-over >
Satellites > Settings].
Settings displayed are for the GNSS (GPS) receiver currently in use. The
name of the GNSS (GPS) receiver currently being used by the system is
1. If latitude and longitude is displayed on the Homescreen, you have a displayed in the [Fix] menu.
valid position fix. If the text turns red, your fix accuracy is low.To access
the [Fix] menu, select the Position details area on the Homescreen and
then select [Satellites] from the Pop-over menu.
2. Select to access settings related to the GNSS (GPS) receiver.
3. The name of the GNSS (GPS) receiver currently being used to provide
position data to the system is displayed centered at the top of the screen.
4. Position fix and fix accuracy data is displayed.

Note: When using a display’s internal GNSS (GPS) receiver, only the
Axiom®+, Axiom® Pro, Axiom® 2 Pro, Axiom® XL and Axiom® 2 XL show
Accuracy information.

5. The shape of the satellite symbols identify which GNSS constellation

they belong to.

98
GNSS Constellations:
The GPS constellation (USA) is always enabled and cannot be disabled. The
Galileo constellation can be enabled along with one other constellation.
BeiDou and GLONASS cannot be enabled at the same time.
The GNSSs available are:
• BeiDou (China)
• Galileo (EU)
• GLONASS (Russia)
COG / SOG filter
Note: Setting the COG / SOG filter according to the amount of your vessel’s
GNSS constellation selection options will be disabled ‘grayed out’ when oscillation (e.g.: roll, pitch and yaw) provides more stable COG and SOG
using an incompatible GNSS (GPS) receiver. values.
• For a list of compatible GNSS receivers, refer to: The data reported by your GNSS receiver provides an instantaneous
p.100 — GNSS constellation selection compatible receivers measure of the receiver’s speed and direction. Under certain conditions the
data can become erratic. (e.g.: a slow moving sailing vessel in rough seas will
• For the settings available on incompatible receivers, refer to: have a high oscillations and will benefit from a High setting, whereas a power
GNSS settings for incompatible GNSS receivers boat that can quickly change speed and direction will have a low oscillation
and will benefit from a low settings.)
Differential positioning: The available options are:
• Enable and disable the use of [Differential positioning] (SBAS) using the • High
toggle switch. Enabling differential positioning provides more accurate • Medium (default)
positioning in regions covered by Satellite Based Augmentations Systems
(SBAS). • Low
• Select [Select SBAS] to view a list of supported SBASs used for differential
positioning. The SBASs being used can be enabled and disabled using the Note:
relevant check boxes The filter does not affect your GNSS receiver’s reported position.

Note:
Internal GPS
SBAS selection options will be disabled ‘grayed out’ when using an
incompatible GNSS receiver. If applicable, you can enable and disable the MFD’s internal receiver using
the toggle switch.
• For a list of compatible GNSS receivers, refer to:
p.100 — GNSS constellation selection compatible receivers Disable if you do not want to use the MFD’s internal GNSS receiver as a
source for positioning data.
• For the settings available on incompatible receivers, refer to:
GNSS settings for incompatible GNSS receivers For troubleshooting purposes you can also [Restart] the active GNSS receiver.

Homescreen 99
GNSS constellation selection compatible receivers GNSS settings for incompatible GNSS receivers
GNSS constellation selection and SBAS selection is only available on Available settings when using a GNSS receiver that does NOT support GNSS
supported Raymarine GNSS receivers. constellation selection and SBAS selection.

Compatible receivers
The following GNSS receivers support GNSS constellation selection and
SBAS selection:
• Axiom®+ display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version 4.0
or later or LightHouse™ version 3.14 or later.
• Axiom® Pro display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version
4.0 or later or LightHouse™ version 3.14 or later.
• Axiom® XL display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version
4.0 or later or LightHouse™ version 3.14 or later.
• Axiom® 2 Pro display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™
version 4.3 or later.
• Axiom® 2 XL display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version
4.4 or later.
• RS150 external GNSS receiver running software version 1.28 or above.
• YachtSense Link router’s internal GNSS receiver. Note:
GNSS constellation selection is not supported and the options will be
Incompatible receivers disabled when using an incompatible GNSS receiver.
The following GNSS receivers do NOT support GNSS constellation selection
and SBAS selection:
Differential positioning:
• Axiom™ display’s internal GNSS receiver.
• Enable and disable the use of [Differential positioning] (SBAS) using the
• Axiom®+ display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version toggle switch. Enabling differential positioning provides more accurate
3.13 or below. positioning in regions covered by Satellite Based Augmentations Systems
• Axiom® Pro display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version (SBAS).
3.13 or below.
• Axiom® XL display’s internal GNSS receiver running LightHouse™ version Note:
3.13 or below. Differential positioning can be enabled and disabled, but individual SBAS
• RS150 external GNSS receiver running software below version 1.28. selection is not supported. The option will be disabled when using an
incompatible GNSS receiver.
• AR200 Augmented reality sensor.

100
 6.8 Status area
You can view the status of certain connected devices using the MFD’s Status
area, located at the top right of the Homescreen. The status area also
includes the [Time] received from an internal or external GNSS receiver, and
identifies when an Axiom™ Pro MFD is in [Touchlock] mode.

COG / SOG filter

Setting the COG / SOG filter according to the amount of your vessel’s
oscillation (e.g.: roll, pitch and yaw) provides more stable COG and SOG
values.
Device status
The data reported by your GNSS receiver provides an instantaneous
measure of the receiver’s speed and direction. Under certain conditions, The status of the following devices is shown in the status area: Autopilot, AIS,
the data can become erratic. For example, a slow moving sailing vessel in Radar, Sonar transducer, YachtSense Link router, and Bluetooth connection.
rough seas will have a high oscillation, and will benefit from a [High] setting,
whereas a power boat that can quickly change speed and direction will have Pop-over menu options
a low oscillation and will benefit from a [Low] setting.
From the pop-over menu the following options are available:
The available options are:
• [YachtSense Link] — Select to access the YachtSense Link router’s user
• High interface.
• Medium (default) • [Disengage pilot] — Select to disengage your autopilot.
• Low • [Bluetooth Settings] — Select to access Bluetooth connection settings.
Select the speaker icon to access Bluetooth volume controls.
Note: • [Time offset from UTC] — Select to adjust the Time offset from UTC.
The filter does not affect your GNSS receiver’s reported position. MFDs that are configured using the First Responder boating activity include
additional [AIS mode] and [SITREP] options, and also provide Data logging
status. For details, refer to: p.359 — First Responder
Internal GPS
If applicable, you can enable and disable the MFD’s internal GNSS receiver
using the toggle switch.
Disable if you do not want to use the MFD’s internal GNSS receiver as a
source for positioning data.
For troubleshooting purposes you can also [Restart] the active GNSS receiver.

Homescreen 101
Status area icons Bluetooth
The icons displayed in the Status area signify the current status of certain
connected devices. Icon Status Icon Status
Bluetooth on / not Bluetooth connected /
YachtSense™ Link connected paired
Icon Status Icon Status
YachtSense ™ Link YachtSense ™ Link
connected connected and internet
available.
Radar

Icon Status Icon Status

AIS
Radar transmitting Radar standby
Icon Status Icon Status
AIS transmitting and AIS receive only (e.g.
receiving Silent Mode)

Radar error

AIS Error

Sonar / Transducer

Note: Icon Status Icon Status

The First responder boating activity profile includes an additional AIS icon. Sonar pinging Sonar not pinging
For details refer to: p.359 — First responder

Autopilot
Sonar error
Icon Status Icon Status
Autopilot engaged

102
Touchlock 2. [Routes] — Select to access the routes list to manage your routes.

Icon Status Icon Status

3. [Tracks] — Select to access the tracks list to manage your tracks.
Touchlock active 4. [Fuel/Trip] — Select to access and set up the fuel manager and view
trip data.
5. [Files] — Select to access the file browser.
6. [Mobile sync] — Select to cancel synchronisation with the Raymarine app.
7. [Import/export] — Select to access back up and restore settings.
8. [Eject SD card] — Select before ejecting a memory card to ensure it is
removed safely.

Note:
Note:
The First responder boating activity profile also includes Data logging
status icons. For details refer to: p.359 — First responder MFDs configured with the First responder boating activity profile include a
Messages icon on the My data page which allows access to the Messages
app. For details refer to: p.384 — Messaging app
6.9 My data The Messages app also requires STEDS compatible AIS hardware.

Selecting [My data] from the homescreen provides access to user data such
as waypoints, routes and tracks. You can also access the fuel manager, file
browser and the data import and exports settings. Related topics:
• p.253 — Navigate mode main menu
• p.255 — Fishing chart mode main menu
• p.286 — Racing mode main menu
• p.259 — Fish mapping mode main menu

Fuel/trip manager
The fuel/trip manager collects trip data automatically based on distance
travelled and provides an estimate of how much fuel you have remaining
based on user inputted fuel refill data.
The Fuel/trip manager can be accessed by selecting [Fuel/Trip] from the [My
Data] page: [Homescreen > My Data > Fuel/Trip].

1. [Waypoints] — Select to access the waypoints list to manage your

waypoints.
Homescreen 103
 Note:
• The Fuel manager estimates the amount of fuel remaining onboard
based on logging each time you fill up, your vessel’s total fuel capacity,
and how much fuel is burned by your engine(s). Incorrect entries will
affect the fuel calculations which could result in a shortage of fuel.
• The Fuel remaining calculation is an estimate and will be inaccurate if
fuel fills are not entered, entered incorrectly, or if fuel is used by other
sources (e.g.: generators).
• Distance to Empty and Time to Empty values are based on estimated
fuel remaining calculations which do not take into account the effects of
weather and tide on fuel usage.
• This system is not a substitute for other fuel calculations. You should not
rely on the Fuel manager calculations for accurate voyage planning or in
emergency and safety critical situations.

1. Estimated fuel remaining Fuel set up

2. [Set all tanks full] — Select when you have filled up all tanks. The fuel manager can be enabled and configured from the [Fuel set up] menu.
3. [Add partial fuel fill] — Select to enter a specific volume of fuel during a
partial tank fill.

Note: If you enter the wrong amount of fuel this can be corrected by
entering a minus value as a partial fuel fill, this will reduce the total
amount of fuel remaining by the amount entered.

4. Trip (Manual) — accumulates data until reset.

5. Trip (Day) — resets automatically when local time passes midnight.
6. Trip (Month) — resets automatically on the 1st day of the month.
7. Trip (Season) — accumulates data until reset.
8. [Reset trip] — The [Trip (Manual)] and [Trip (Season)] logs can be reset by
selecting the relevant [Reset Trip] button. 1. [Fuel Manager] — Select to enable or disable the fuel manager.
2. [Total fuel capacity] — Sum of total capacity of all your fuel tanks.
3. [Economy units] — Economy units used in data overlays, Side bars or
the Dashboard app.
104
4. [Fuel used (PGN 127497)] — Use this option if your engine(s) supply Fuel Selecting a storage device expands its contents, allowing you to browse
used data. When Fuel used is selected the Fuel manager will continue the contents.
to operate when the MFD is switched off. This option usually provides The following file type can be viewed:
more accurate readings.
5. [Fuel flow rate (PGN 127489)] — this option estimates fuel calculations • PDF files — Selecting a PDF document will open a pop-over menu where
based on fuel flow rate data sent by your engine(s). Your MFD must you can choose to [Open] or [Delete] the file.
remain switched on, whilst engines are running. • Image files — Selecting an image file will open a pop-over menu where
6. [Detect fuel messages] — If you are unsure which engine messages your you can choose to [Open] or [Delete] the file.
engine provides, select this option to determine the correct message. • Video files — Selecting an MPEG4 video file will open a pop-over menu
where you can choose to [Open] or [Delete] the file.
Setting up the fuel manager
To start using the fuel manager you must first specify the total capacity of your • gpx — Selecting a gpx file (user data file which can contain waypoint,
fuel tanks, and then fill the tanks to set a reference level for the fuel manager. routes and tracks) will open a pop-over menu where you can choose to
[Import] or [Delete] the file.
From the [Fuel set-up] page: [Homescreen > My Data > Fuel/Trip > Fuel
set-up]: • lh3 — Selecting a lh3 (MFD settings backup) file will open a pop-over menu
1. Select the box next to [Total fuel capacity:] and enter the total capacity of where you can choose to [Restore] or [Delete] the file.
all of your fuel tanks. • Lighthouse_id.txt — Selecting the Lighthouse_id.txt file will open a
2. Select the [Fuel manager] toggle switch to enable the fuel manager. pop-over where you can [Open] the file so that you can scan the QR code
3. Select the box next to [Economy units:] and select either: Distance per when installing LightHouse Charts via the Raymarine app.
volume, Volume per distance, or Litres per 100km. • apk — Android apk apps downloaded from the Raymarine website can
4. Select either [Fuel used (PGN 127497)] or [Fuel flow rate (PGN 127489)]. If be installed from the file browser.
you are unsure, select [Detect fuel messages] to detect which messages
are available to your MFD.
Note:
5. Fill up your fuel tanks.
6. Once the tanks are full, select [Set all tanks full] from the [Fuel Trip] menu. Only file types that are supported by your MFD will be visible in the browser.
7. Log each subsequent fuel fill whether partial or full.
Import/export
Files
User data and MFD settings can be imported and exported from your MFD.
The file browser can be used to [Open] and [Delete] photos / images and PDF
User data (Waypoint, Routes and Tracks) is saved in the common .gpx file
documents, saved to external storage, and can also be used to [Import] or
format. MFD settings will be saved in .lh3 format.
[Delete] user data and MFD settings files) saved to external storage.
The Import/export page can be accessed from the My data page:
[Homescreen > My data > Import/export].

Homescreen 105
 4. Select the relevant card slot from the Info dialog, or for display’s with
only 1 card reader slot select [Save].
5. Select [Save] to accept the default filename, or use the onscreen
keyboard to enter your own filename and then select [Save].
6. Select [OK] to return to the Import/export page, or select [Eject card] to
safely remove the memory card.
The user data file is saved to the ‘\Raymarine\My Data\’ directory of your
memory card in gpx format.

Saving display settings

You can backup your display’s settings to memory card.

Saving user data Important:

You can backup your user data (waypoints, routes and tracks) to a MicroSD
card. • Saving your display settings will also save any new or customized
dashboard pages.
Note: • Digital switching dashboard pages will not be saved when saving your
display’s settings.
The LightHouse 3 and LightHouse 4 operating systems allow multiple
waypoints to be created with the same waypoint name. If you intend to
import the saved waypoints to a different system ensure that all waypoint 1. Insert a memory card into your display’s card reader.
names are unique or that the system you are importing them onto supports 2. Select [Save settings] from the [Import/export] page: [Homescreen > My
non-unique waypoint names. data > Import/export].
Example: If more than 1 waypoint with the same waypoint name is imported 3. Select the relevant card slot from the Info dialog, or for display’s with
into a LightHouse 2 MFD only 1 waypoint with that waypoint name will be only 1 card reader slot select [Save].
imported as the LightHouse 2 operating system requires waypoint names
4. Select [Save] to accept the default filename, or use the onscreen
to be unique.
keyboard to enter your own filename and then select [Save].
5. Select [OK] to return to the Import/export page, or select [Eject card] to
1. Insert a memory card into your display’s card reader. safely remove the memory card.
2. Select [Save my data] from the [Import/export] page: [Homescreen > My The settings file is saved to the ‘\Raymarine\My Data\’ directory of your
data > Import/export]. memory card with a .lh3 file extension.
A pop-over menu is displayed.
3. Select the desired option:
• [Save all data] to save (export) all waypoints, routes and tracks.
• [Save waypoints] to save (export) all waypoints.
• [Save routes] to save (export) all routes.
• [Save tracks] to save (export) all tracks.
106
Importing user data or settings from a memory card 6.10 My profiles
You can restore user data (waypoints, routes and tracks) and settings that
have been exported to a memory card. You can share your MFD with other users by creating user profiles on your
MFD. Profiles enable you to retain your own personal settings whilst letting
other users personalize the MFD’s settings to their preference.
Important:
• Restoring your settings will also restore any new or customized Note:
Dashboard app pages.
User data such as waypoints, routes, tracks, images and video recordings
• Digital switching Dashboard app pages will not be restored when etc. will be available to all users, and are shared by all users. This means
importing your settings. The original configuration will need to be that, for example, if you add or delete a waypoint while using one user
re-installed.. profile, the change will also be reflected in all other profiles on the MFD,
including demo profiles.

You can access the profiles page by selecting the profile Icon on the
homescreen.

1. Insert the memory card containing your saved data into a card reader slot.
2. Select [Import from card] from the Import/export page: [Homescreen >
My data > Import/export].
The file browser is displayed
3. Navigate to the gpx or lh3 file that you want to import.

User data and settings files will be located in the \Raymarine\My Data\
folder on your memory card.

4. Select the file.

The import process will start.
5. If importing a gpx file, select [OK] when complete. Selecting the [+] (plus) icon will create a new profile based on the profile
that is currently in use.
6. If importing settings, select [Yes] to confirm the settings restore.
MFD settings changes are unique to the profile in use and are retained the
Your MFD will reboot to complete the process. next time the profile is used.
The distance and time that a profile has been active is displayed for each
profile.
Homescreen 107
Profile names and icons can be customized. You can also reset the distance Important:
and time for each profile.
• It is recommended that demo profiles are NOT activated whilst
A Guest profile is available for temporary users. Setting changes to the Guest navigating.
profile are not retained. Each time the guest profile is activated the settings
are based on the last used profile. • User data such as waypoints, routes, and tracks is shared with all the
other user profiles on the MFD. This means that, for example, if you add
When the MFD is rebooted the last used profile will be active. or delete a waypoint while using a demo profile, the change will also be
Demo profiles are also available to help you practice operating your MFD reflected in all other user profiles on the MFD.
with simulated data. • Demo profiles will NOT display any real data, including safety warnings
and messages.
Demo profiles • Any settings changes made will not affect User profiles.
Profiles are available for simulation and demonstration purposes. A demo
movie, stored on external storage, can also be set to play when a demo
profile is activated and inactivity has been detected for 60 seconds. Demo movie requirements
A demo movie file can be set to play when a demo profile is active and the
MFD has not been used for 60 seconds.
Demo movie files must be in the .mov file format and encoded using the
H.264 video codec standard. The Demo movie files must be saved to an
external storage device connected to the MFD. Demo movies are not shared
across networked MFDs.
When the Demo movie feature is activated the system will search for a demo
movie file associated with the active demo profile. If an associated file cannot
be found then the generic demo.mov is played. See below for filename
details.
Demo profile Associated filename
[General] demo_general.mov
[Sailing] demo_sailing.mov
[Cruising] demo_cruising.mov
[Saltwater fishing] demo_salt.mov
Selecting a demo profile will provide your MFD with simulated data to help [Freshwater fishing] demo_fresh.mov
you practice operating your display. Plays in all demo profiles if an demo.mov
associated demo file is not found.
If an MFD is powered off with the demo movie active then the next time the
MFD is powered on the demo movie will play immediately after boot up.
Any interaction with the Touchscreen or physical buttons will stop the movie
playing and return you to the active demo profile.
108
CHAPTER 7: SETTINGS
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 7.1 Homescreen settings menus — page 110

• 7.2 Selecting display language — page 111
• 7.3 Boat details — page 111
• 7.4 Battery configuration — page 113
• 7.5 Generator configuration — page 113
• 7.6 Tanks — page 114
• 7.7 Calibrating tanks — page 115
• 7.8 Setting fuel tanks as not for propulsion — page 116
• 7.9 Units settings menu — page 117
• 7.10 Splashscreen and background images — page 118
• 7.11 Shared Brightness — page 120
• 7.12 Datamaster — page 121
• 7.13 Performing a factory reset of a SeaTalk NG device — page 122
• 7.14 Switching off sensor LEDs — page 122
• 7.15 Find me — page 122
• 7.16 IP device user interface access — page 123
• 7.17 Connecting to a wireless display — page 123
• 7.18 NMEA 0183 settings — page 124

Settings 109
7.1 Homescreen settings menus Menu Settings
[Units] • Configure preferred units of measurement.
The display’s settings are accessed by selecting the [Settings] icon located
at the bottom of the Homescreen. • Configure Bearing mode.
• Configure variation.
• Configure GNSS (GPS) system datum.
• Set time differentials for Loran-C.
[This display] • Color theme (day mode).
• Assign a Homescreen page or app to start on power up.
• Select save location for screenshots.
The [Settings] are divided into different menus which can be accessed by
selecting the tabs at the top of the screen. The following menus are available: • User Configurable key(s) (Axiom® Pro and Axiom® 2 Pro
displays only).
Menu Settings • Keypad type selection (Axiom® 2 Pro displays only).
[Getting • View hardware and software information about your • Configure Shared Brightness.
started] MFD.
• Configure helm grouping for Mercury® VesselView
• Update MFD software integration.
• View the terms of use disclaimer. • Change or reset splashscreen graphic.
• View the Regulatory approvals. • Change or reset homescreen background image.
• Change the user interface language. • Pair / unpair connected RMK external keypads.
• Select Homescreen icon types. • Enable / disable external alarm output. (Axiom® XL and
[Boat details] • Set boat icon and name. Axiom® 2 XL displays only).

• Configure Sailing features (Sailing vessels only). • Connect to a wireless display.

• Configure Minimum safe depth, height and width. • Configure Wi-Fi Sharing, pair with a wireless Quantum
Radar scanner, configure Wi-Fi settings and set up
• Add distances for anchoring mode. mobile app access.
• Configure engines. • Connect to a Bluetooth device.
• Configure batteries. • Perform a Settings or Factory reset.
• Configure generators.
• Configure fuel tanks.
• Configure environment sensors.

110
 Menu Settings 2. Select your desired language.
[Autopilot] • Enable / Disable Autopilot control.
Languages
• Set autopilot response.
The following user interface languages are available:
• Access advanced autopilot settings.
• Configure route automatic turn. Arabic (ar-AE) Bulgarian Chinese Chinese
[Network] • View list of networked MFDs. (bg-BG) (Simplified) (Traditional)
(zh-CN) (zh-TW)
• Assign the MFD datamaster.
Croatian (hr-HR) Czech (cs-CZ) Danish (da-DK) Dutch (nl-NL)
• View software and network details for the MFD you are
English (en-GB) English (en-US) Estonian (et-EE) Finnish (fi-FI)
using.
French (fr-FR) German (de-DE) Greek (el-GR) Hebrew (he-IL)
• Rename connected network devices.
Hungarian (he-IL) Icelandic (is-IS) Indonesian Italian (it-IT)
• Save or Erase diagnostics logs to external storage. (Bahasa) (id-ID)
• View and Save Diagnostic information about products Japanese (ja-JP) Korean (ko-KR) Latvian (lv-LV) Lithuanian (lt-LT)
connected to your MFD.
Malay (Bahasa) Norwegian Polish (pl-PL) Portuguese
• Enable Sonar recording for troubleshooting purposes. (ms-MY ZSM) (nb-NO) (Brazilian) (pt-BR)
• Set up NMEA 0183 options on an Axiom Pro. Russian (ru-RU) Slovenian (sl-SI) Spanish (es-ES) Swedish (sv-SE)
• Assign your preferred data sources (datamaster only). Thai (th-TH) Turkish (tr-TR) Vietnamese
• Refresh network list. (vi-VN)
• Enable and disable the MFD’s DHCP server.
The selected language also determines the display’s default units of measure.
• Keep the display’s network connections active when the
display is in standby (Axiom® 2 displays only).
[Responder] The Responder menu tab is only available when [First
responder] is selected as the ‘Boating activity’ during 7.3 Boat details
step 2 of the MFD’s initial startup wizard. The Responder
menu includes settings for STEDS-specific features, which LightHouse 4 can be configured with the specific characteristics of your
require an AIS5000 to be connected to the system. .For vessel. To ensure correct operation and display of vessel data, you should
details, refer to: p.360 — First responder features provide your relevant vessel details, as described below.
Boat details can be accessed from the [Settings] menu: [Homescreen >
Settings > Boat Details]
7.2 Selecting display language
You can choose which language you want the display’s user interface to use.
1. Select the [Language] button from the [Getting started] menu:
[Homescreen > Settings > Getting started > Language:].
Settings 111
 Option Description Option Description
[Boat type:] Selection determines the icon used to represent your [Sail plan:] This setting allows you to import and manage sail plans.
vessel’s position in the Chart app. For details, refer to: p.294 — Sail plan recommendations

Note: Note:
When the MFD is using the Sailing boating activity, The [Sail plan] option is only available when the Sailing
selecting one of the sailing vessels can also improve activity has been selected during the display’s initial
accuracy of leeway calculations. startup wizard.

[Boat Name:] Configures your system with your vessel’s name. [Min safe Enter your vessel’s maximum unladen height from
[Sail The following options are available: height:] the waterline. To ensure adequate clearance, it is
performance:] recommended that you add a safety margin to this figure
• Mirrored TWA (default) to allow for variation caused by vessel movements.
• Fixed Angles [Min safe width:] Enter your vessel’s maximum width at its widest point.
To ensure adequate clearance on both sides, it is
• Polar recommended that you add a safety margin for port and
starboard to this figure to allow for variation caused by
Note: vessel movements.
The [Sail performance] option is only available when [Min safe Enter your vessel’s maximum depth when fully laden.
the Sailing activity has been selected during the depth:] This is the depth from the waterline to the lowest point
display’s initial startup wizard. on the vessel’s keel. To ensure adequate clearance, it is
recommended that you add a safety margin to this figure
to allow for variation caused by vessel movements.
For further details refer to: p.286 — Laylines [Boat length:] Enter your vessel’s length from bow to stern. Boat length
[Upwind angle:] This setting is available when the Fixed Angles Sail is used for Anchor mode and the Anchor drag alarm in
performance setting has been selected, and allows you the Chart app.
to specify the fixed angle for upwind layline calculations. [Bow to GPS:] Enter the distance that your GNSS (GPS) receiver is from
[Downwind This setting is available when the Fixed Angles Sail your vessel’s bow. This measurements is used in Anchor
angle:] performance setting has been selected, and allows mode and the Anchor drag alarm in the Chart app.
you to specify the fixed angle for downwind layline [Num of Select the number of engines on your vessel. When
calculations. engines:] connected to a compatible system, your MFD can
[Polar:] This setting is available when the Polar Sail performance monitor engine data.
setting has been selected, and allows you to select a [Identify Once you have selected the number of engines, select
polar table, or import your own polar table. For more engines:] [Identify engines] and follow the onscreen instructions to
information on Polars, refer to: p.289 — Polar laylines configure your engines. May require an extra hardware
interface to enable engine data to be displayed.

112
 Option Description
[Engine To interface with [Yamaha] , [Yamaha HDMI] and [Mercury]
manufacturer:] gateways, select the relevant manufacturer from the list.
Otherwise, select [Other].
[[Num of Select whether your MFD is displaying engine data for
engines 2 only]] a twin engine system, or for the port or starboard side
[Configure of a quad engine system.
Yamaha Quad
display:]
[Num of Configures detected batteries.
batteries:]
[Num of Configures detected generators.
generators:] The battery configuration table lists all detected batteries and provide details
[Tanks:] Calibrate your vessel’s tanks. and status for each. Default battery names are based on device name plus
battery number (instance).
[Num of interior Allows the display of interior temperature and humidity
environment data from multiple sensors. Up to 10 sensors can be Selecting a battery from the table displays a pop-over menu where you can
sensors:] used. rename or set up a low and high voltage alarm for the selected battery.
Changed battery names will appear in battery data items for sidebars,
Dashboard app and app data overlays.
7.4 Battery configuration The battery configuration table can also be accessed from the alarms
settings: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Configure batteries].
The MFD will automatically detect the number of batteries in your system
when the information is transmitted using standard NMEA 2000 PGNs
127506 & 127508, or via other supported systems. Detected batteries can be
viewed and customized from the battery configuration table. 7.5 Generator configuration
The battery configuration table can be accessed from the [Boat details] The display will automatically detect compatible generators.
settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Configure batteries].
Before a generator can transmit data to a Raymarine multifunction display, it
must be:
• connected to the same SeaTalkng ®/NMEA 2000 network as the display
(typically, via the generator manufacturer’s NMEA 2000 interface/gateway,
which must be running an appropriate software version — refer to the
generator manufacturer), and:
• transmit the supported NMEA 2000 PGNs onto the same
SeaTalkng ®/NMEA 2000 network.
For information on compatible interfaces, refer to your generator’s
manufacturer.
Settings 113
 Note: 7.6 Tanks
Each generator/generator’s NMEA 2000 interface must be configured The MFD can monitor the status of vessel tanks that use a compatible tank
with an instance number that is unique to the boat system to which it is sender or have a compatible tank sender adaptor fitted.
connected. For example, if an interface uses the same instance number
as a propulsion engine, there will be a data conflict. In this case, refer to The following types of tank can be monitored:
the generator manufacturer for advice on configuring instance numbers, • Fuel tanks — up to 5 tanks
if necessary. • Fuel (gasoline) tanks — up to 2 tanks
• Fresh water tanks — up to 2 tanks
Detected generators can be viewed by selecting [Configure generators] from • Live well tanks — up to 2 tanks
the [Boat details] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details >
Configure Generators]. • Gray water tanks — up to 2 tanks
• Black water tanks — up to 2 tanks

Important:
The number of each tank should be selected during step 3 of the MFD’s
initial start up wizard.

The number of each type of tank can be viewed from the Boat details settings
menu. Selecting [Configure Tanks] will display a list of all detected tanks.

The generator name is derived automatically by the generator interface.

You can rename each generator to give it a more appropriate name by
selecting a generator from the list and then selecting the [Name:] option from
the pop-over menu.
Generators that are no longer detected can be removed from the list by
selecting the Not found generator and selecting [Remove] from the pop-over
menu.
Detailed data for generators can be viewed on pre-configured pages in the
Dashboard app. For details, refer to: p.404 — Generators page

114
The details shown in the list of tanks are automatically detected. 3. If required, adjust the tank’s capacity
4. Select [Calibrate] and then select either [Run wizard], or [Import
Note: calibration].
If the number of tanks shown in the Boat details settings menu does not
match the number of tanks listed when Configure tanks is selected then
either:
• The number of tanks selected during the MFD’s initial start up wizard
may have been incorrect.
• The tank may not have a compatible sender or sender adaptor.
• There is a problem with the data connection or the tank’s sender /
sender adaptor.

7.7 Calibrating tanks

When displaying tank levels on your MFD it’s important to ensure the levels
are correctly calibrated. Failure to do so may result in inaccurate level
readings.
Tanks can be calibrated and edited on the Boat details settings menu:
[Homescreen > Settings > Boat details ].
Tanks can be calibrated with the following Oceanic Systems tank senders: Run wizard calibration
• 3271 Volumetric Fuel Sender You can calibrate your tank by setting a series of [calibration points] and
filling your tank in intervals.
• 3281 Water Level Senders
The shape of your tank determines how many calibration points you should
• 3125 Tank Sender Adapter
enter for calibration. 2 calibration points are required as a minimum, but up to
• 4291 Tank Level Adapter 101 points can be entered. Generally, the more calibration points entered the
more precise tank readings will be.
Note: Additional calibration points are used to account for changes in tank volume
• Ensure tanks are empty before calibration. at different parts of an irregularly shaped tank. Depending on the size and
shape of your tank it is recommended that you enter calibration points to
• Completing calibration will overwrite any existing calibration already mark each change in the shape of the fuel tank; for example, straight corners
recorded. require an additional point, and slopes require 2 points.

From the [Boat details] menu:

1. Select [Configure tanks].
2. Select the tank you want to calibrate.
The Pop-over menu is displayed.
Settings 115
 7.8 Setting fuel tanks as not for propulsion
By default all fuel tanks will be used for fuel economy calculations. If
required, you can configure specific fuel tanks so that they are not used in
fuel economy calculations.

The illustration above shows the minimum number of calibration points

recommended for some typical tank shapes:
1. The tank shown on the left is rectangular and symmetrical; it only requires
2 calibration points to define the bottom and top of the tank.
2. The tank shown in the center has a greater volume at the bottom; 3
points are required to define the bottom, top and corner of the fuel tank.
3. The tank shown on the right has a greater volume at the bottom and is
sloped. 4 points are required to define the bottom of the tank, the top,
and a further 2 points to define the slope.
[Wizard Calibration]
1. Select the number of calibration points (minimum of 2) and press [next] .
2. Fill the tank to the units displayed on screen and press [Ok]. Note:
3. To complete the calibration process, repeat step 2 until the tank has • Fuel tanks currently being included in fuel economy calculations will be
been filled. listed as Fuel (propulsive).
• Fuels tanks listed as Fuel will not be included in fuel economy
Import calibration calculations.
You can calibrate your tanks by importing CSV files that contain specific tank • Fuel tanks listed as Gasoline will never be included in fuel economy
calibration data. These files are typically supplied by tank manufacturers or calculations.
dealers.

Note: CSV files used for import calibration must start with: ‘0,0’ and end From the [Boat details] settings menu ([Homescreen > Settings > Boat details]):
in: ‘100,100’ 1. Select [Configure tanks].
2. Select the relevant fuel tank from the list.
To [Import calibration] via CSV file: 3. Select the [Used for propulsion] tick box so that the tick is removed.
1. Select the appropriate CSV file from the file explorer. With the tick removed the selected fuel tank will no longer be used for fuel
2. Press [Yes] . economy calculations.
116
7.9 Units settings menu Measurement Units
[Lat/Long format] • DD°MM’.MMM
The Units []menu is used to specify your preferred units of measure for
data readings. The Units menu can be accessed from the Homescreen: • DD:MM:SS
[Homescreen > Settings > Units] or from the Dashboard app: [Menu > Settings • DD:MM:SS.S
> Units].
• DD:MM.MMM
Units • DD°MM’SS
Measurement Units • DD°MM.MMM’
[Distance units] • [NM & ft] — Nautical miles & Feet [Volume units] • [US Gallons] — Gsl
• [NM & m] — Nautical miles & • [Imperial Gallons] — Gal
Meters
• [Liters] — Ltr
• [mi & ft] — Miles & Feet
[Economy units] • Distance per Volume
• [km & m] — Kilometers and Meters
• Volume per Distance
• [NM & yd] — Nautical miles &
• Liters per 100 km
Yards
[Speed units] • [Kts] — Knots
[Wind speed units] • [Knots] — kts
• [Meters per Second] — m/s
• [MPH] — Mile per hour
[Pressure units] • [Bar]
• [KPH] — Kilometers per hour
• [PSI]
[Depth units] • [Meters] — m
• [Kilopascals] — KPa
• [Feet] — ft
[Time format] • 12hr
• [Fathoms] — Fm
• 24hr
[Temperature units] • [Celsius] — C
• [Fahrenheit] — F
[Date format] • MM : DD : YYYY
• DD : MM : YYYY
• MM : DD : YY
• DD : MM : YY

Settings 117
Bearing and variation 7.10 Splashscreen and background images
Menu item/description Options
During boot up the display will show the splashscreen logo. Once booted
[Bearing mode] • True the Homescreen will use a preset background image, based on the Boating
Determines how bearing and • Magnetic activity chosen during the start up wizard. You can configure your display to
heading data is displayed. use custom images for the splashscreen and the Homescreen background.
[System Datum] List of available datums. Your custom images must meet the following requirements:
Determines the datum used by your
display. This should be set to the Note:
same datum used by your paper • Custom images must be in .png, .bmp or .jpg format.
charts.
• You cannot use copyrighted images without permission from the
[Variation] • Auto copyright owner.
When set to [Auto] the display will • Manual • Custom images cannot exceed the maximum resolution supported by
automatically compensate for the your display.
naturally-occurring offset of the
Earth’s magnetic field. • For optimum image quality, the resolution of the image should match the
resolution of your display.
[Manual variation] 30° W to 30° E
When [Variation] is set to [Manual],
you can specify an offset. Your display’s resolution can be found in the Splashscreen and Homescreen
background image settings: [Homescreen > Settings > This display]. Refer to
Time differentials the following table for a full list of screen resolutions: Screen resolutions.
Time differentials are used for Loran positioning. Custom images are unique to each display and are not shared across the
network. You can reset the Splashscreen and Homescreen images to use
Measurement Units default images.
[Chain] List of available Loran ‘master’ Performing a factory reset will also remove any custom images.
chains.
[Slave 1] Filtered list of slave stations based Screen resolutions
Cannot be set to the same as Slave on selected chain..
The screen resolutions for Axiom and Axiom 2 displays are shown below.
2
MFD variant (W x H) DPI
[Slave 2] Filtered list of slave stations based
on selected chain.. Axiom+ 7 1024 x 600 170.77 (Pixels not
Cannot be set to the same as Slave 1 square)
[ASF 1] -9.9 to +9.9 Axiom+ 9 1280 x 720 163.45
Additional Secondary Factors Axiom+ 12 1280 x 800 124.5
[ASF 2] -9.9 to +9.9 800 x 480 134.31 (Pixels not
Axiom 7
Additional Secondary Factors square)
118
 MFD variant (W x H) DPI 3. Select the [Splashscreen] field containing the image name (default image
is Axiom.jpg or Axiom.png).
Axiom 9 800 x 480 104.24 (Pixels not
square) The file browser is displayed.
4. Browse to your custom image and select it.
Axiom 12 1280 x 800 124.5
5. Select [Yes] on the notification popup.
Axiom Pro 9 / Axiom 2 Pro 9 1280 x 720 163.45 The image is imported to your display.
Axiom Pro 12 / Axiom 2 Pro 12 1280 x 800 124.5 The next time your display switches on, your custom image will be displayed.
Axiom Pro 16 / Axiom 2 Pro 16 1920 x 1080 141.7 You can reset the image at anytime by selecting [Reset].
Axiom XL 16 / Axiom 2 XL 16 1920 x 1080 141.7
Axiom XL 19 / Axiom 2 XL 19 1920 x 1080 119.25 Customizing the homescreen background
Axiom XL 22 / Axiom 2 XL 22 1920 x 1080 102.44 The homescreen background can be configured to display a custom image.
Axiom XL 24 / Axiom 2 XL 24 1920 x 1200 94.07

Customizing the splashscreen

The standard Axiom® logo splashscreen that is displayed during boot up can
be customized.

Note:
Images that are not the correct resolution are automatically stretched to fill
the screen.

1. Save your custom image to a MicroSD card and insert the card into a card
reader slot on your MFD.
2. Select [This display] from the [Settings] menu: [Homescreen > Settings
> This display].
3. Ensure [Homescreen background image] toggle switch is enabled.
4. Select [Upload custom image].
The file browser is displayed.
5. Browse to your custom image and select it.
1. Save your custom image to a MicroSD card and insert the card into a
card reader slot on your display. 6. Select [Use as background] from the pop-over menu.
2. Select [This display] from the [Settings] menu: [Homescreen > Settings The Homescreen will be displayed using your custom image as the
> This display]. background

Settings 119
If the images is not the same resolution as your MFD then you can stretch VHF DSC Radio Instrument display / Pilot controller
the image by selecting [Fill screen] from the [Fit to this display] menu option:
[Homescreen > Settings > This display > Fit to this display]. By default this
setting will be set to [Fill screen].
You can reset the image at anytime by selecting [Reset to default image].

7.11 Shared Brightness

Shared brightness enables simultaneous brightness adjustment of all
products that are part of the same group.
The following products are compatible with shared brightness:
• Alpha Performance Displays Multiple brightness groups can be configured. For example, these groups
could be used to reflect the physical location of products on your vessel
• LightHouse 4 MFDs. e.g.: helm and flybridge.
• LightHouse 3 MFDs using software v3.4.102 or later. Shared brightness requires:
• SeaTalk NG Instrument displays and Pilot controllers. • All products to be compatible with the shared brightness function (see
list of compatible products above).
• SeaTalk NG VHF DSC Radios.
• The [Shared brightness] setting set to On for all products in the brightness
• RMK-9 and RMK-10 remote keypads. group.
Any adjustments to the shared brightness level will be applied to all products • Products to be assigned to network groups.
assigned to the same group. • All the products in each group to be synchronized.
LightHouse 4/LightHouse 3 Alpha Performance Displays
Note:
If any display in the system has automatic brightness enabled then all
displays in the group will automatically adjusted their brightness.

Setting up shared brightness

To set up shared brightness follow the steps below.
Before setting up shared brightness on your MFD, ensure that all displays
that you want to use shared brightness are switched on and set to the same
[Display group] as your MFD.
1. Select [This display] from the [Settings] menu: [Homescreen > Settings
> This display].
2. Select [Display group].
A list of available display groups is displayed.
120
3. Select the display group that you want the MFD to be part of (Displays Switching datamaster
that have been installed next to each other should be in the same group).
You can switch the MFD you want to be the datamaster at any time.
4. Enable [Shared brightness] using the toggle switch.
5. Select [Sync].
‘Shared brightness active’ is displayed when complete.

Note:
Display group selection may impact Mercury SmartCraft integration. Refer
to: p.417 — Mercury SmartCraft helm grouping

7.12 Datamaster
Systems containing more than one display must have a designated
datamaster display. The datamaster is the primary display in the network,
and should be the display that is physically connected to the SeaTalkng ® /
NMEA 2000 CAN bus network, and any other devices and sources of data in
your system. The datamaster bridges the data over the ethernet network to
any compatible ‘repeater’ displays.
Information shared by the datamaster includes: From the [Network] tab ([Homescreen > Settings > Network]):
• Cartography 1. Select the desired MFD from the list.
• Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 2. Select [Assign as datamaster] from the pop-over options.
• Radar
• Sonar
• Data received from the autopilot, GNSS (GPS) receiver, instruments,
transducers, the engine and any other compatible external sources.

Note:
Your system may be wired for redundancy with data connections made to
repeat displays. However these connections will only become active in the
event of a fault and / or reassignment of the datamaster.

Note:
In an autopilot system which does not contain a dedicated pilot control
head the datamaster also acts as the autopilot controller.
Settings 121
7.13 Performing a factory reset of a SeaTalk
NG device
Raymarine SeaTalk NG devices can be factory reset from the [Network]
settings menu.

1. Open the [Network] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network].
2. Select the relevant sensor from the network list.
3. Select [LEDs:].
4. Select [Always Off].
The status LED on the selected device will now be switched off, and will
remain off until this setting is reverted to [Normal], or the [Find Me] feature is
1. Open the [Network] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network]. enabled.
2. Select the relevant SeaTalk NG from the network list.
3. Select [Factory reset].
The product will perform a factory reset and may reboot, no confirmation 7.15 Find me
will be given.
The [Find me] feature assists you in finding the physical installation location
of a specific Raymarine SeaTalk NG position sensor (i.e.: RS150, EV-1,
EV-2, or AR200).
7.14 Switching off sensor LEDs The [Find me] feature works by making the selected device’s status LED flash
To assist users who wish their vessel to “go dark” (i.e. not emit any visible continuously for 5 minutes, giving you time to search the vessel to determine
light), the LED indicators present on SeaTalk NG position sensors can be the device’s physical location. The feature works even if the device’s LEDs
switched off. Supported devices: RS150, EV-1, EV-2 and AR200). have been switched to [Always off].
The [Find Me] flash sequence will be visibly different than normal LED status
sequences in that both the red and green LEDs will flash on and off at the
Note: same time, twice every second for 5 minutes.
The [Always Off] feature may not be available for devices running older
software versions. Ensure that you obtain the latest available software for Note:
your position sensors. The [Find me] feature may not be available on devices running older
software versions. Ensure that you obtain the latest available software for
your position sensors.
122
 Select the device from the list to display the pop-over menu, and then select
[Calibrate].

To initiate the [Find Me] feature for a specific SeaTalk NG device, locate
the device name in the [Network] settings menu, and then select [Find Me]
from the device’s pop-over menu. 7.17 Connecting to a wireless display
Once [Find Me] has been activated, its menu option will change to [Cancel Axiom® and Axiom® 2 display screens can be mirrored to an external display
Find Me] until 5 minutes has elapsed. that has built-in wireless mirroring feature or using an external dongle
Selecting [Cancel Find Me] at any time within the 5 minute timeframe will stop 1. Follow the instructions provided with your external display or dongle to
the LED flashing and return the device to its previous LED state. set up that specific device.
2. On your Axiom® or Axiom® 2 display, select the display icon found
under [Wireless display:] on the [This Display] tab of the [Settings] menu:
7.16 IP device user interface access ([Homescreen > This Display > Wireless Display:]).
Your Axiom® or Axiom® 2 display will search for available external
The user interface of connected, supported IP (Internet Protocol) devices displays.
(such as IP cameras) can be accessed from the MFD.
The IP device’s user interface is accessed from the Network settings menu:
[Homescreen > Settings > Network].

3. Select the external display you want to use.

Settings 123
4. If your Axiom® or Axiom® 2 display has Wi-Fi Sharing enabled then a PIN 1. Select Disconnect from the [This Display] tab: ([Homescreen > Settings >
number is displayed on the external display, input this pin number when This Display > Wireless Display: > Disconnect]).
requested by your Axiom® or Axiom® 2 display.
5. You may also be requested to allow the external display to connect Unpairing a wireless display
automatically in future, select [Yes] or [No] as appropriate on your external
display. With the wireless display connection active:
Your Axiom® or Axiom® 2 display screen will now be displayed on the 1. Select the connected display from the Wireless display menu:
external display. ([Homescreen > Settings > This Display > Wireless Display:]).
6. To allow the external display to connect each time your Axiom® or Axiom® 2. Select the connected display from the list of available displays.
2 display is switched on, enable [Connect on power up] from the pop-over 3. Select [Unpair] from the pop-over menu.
options.

7.18 NMEA 0183 settings

NMEA 0183 devices can be connected directly to Axiom® Pro and Axiom® XL
displays using the NMEA 0183 wires on the Power/Video/NMEA 0183 cable.

Note:
NMEA 0183 settings are not available on Axiom® 2 displays.

2 NMEA 0183 ports are available:

Note: • Port 1: Input and output, 4,800 or 38,400 baud rate.
1. Don’t forget to check your external display for any required • Port 2: Input only, 4,800 or 38,400 baud rate.
confirmations / acknowledgements during the connection process.
The baud rate for each input port must be specified in the [NMEA set-up ]
2. Some non Miracast-certified devices may not be able to connect with menu ([Homescreen > Settings > Network > NMEA set-up ]).
Wi-Fi Sharing enabled, in this case disable Wi-Fi Sharing and try again.
3. If you experience connection issues, try disabling and enabling the Note:
wireless display feature on the external display and on your Axiom® or
Axiom® 2 display, or power cycle both devices. • For Port 1, both the input and output communicate at the same baud rate.
For example, if you have one NMEA 0183 device connected to Port 1
4. Once connected/paired to an external display do not change your INPUT, and another NMEA 0183 device connected to Port 1 OUTPUT,
Axiom® or Axiom® 2 display’s Wi-Fi Passphrase, as on certain devices a both NMEA devices must use the same baud rate.
factory reset maybe required to re-establish a connection.

Disconnecting a wireless display

With a wireless display connection active:
124
NMEA 0183 settings
The following options are available from the [NMEA Set-up] menu.

Menu item Description Options

[NMEA Port 1] Baud rate selection. • 4,800
• 38,400
[NMEA input port Baud rate selection. • 4,800
2]
• 38,400
[Bridge heading] Bridge heading data from NMEA • Yes
0183 to NMEA 2000 / SeaTalkng ®
• No
[Transmission Switches between Single-ended • Single-ended
mode] and Differential transmission
• Differential
modes.
The Differential transmission
mode supports higher speeds,
longer cable runs, and better data
integrity. Differential mode works
when connected to opto-isolated
inputs, as specified by the NMEA
0183 standard.
The Single-ended mode is required
when sending a signal to a
single-ended receiver device, such
as a PC for example.
Refer to the NMEA 0400 Installation
Standard for wiring guidelines for
the different transmission modes.

Note: Only available on Axiom™

Pro and Axiom™ XL displays.

[Individual outputs] List of NMEA 0183 sentences for • Enabled

which the output can be disabled.
• Disabled

Settings 125
CHAPTER 8: ALARMS MANAGER
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 8.1 Alarms manager — page 127

• 8.2 Active alarm indication — page 128
• 8.3 Alarm settings — page 128
• 8.4 External alarm speaker / buzzer — page 130
• 8.5 Acknowledging alarms — page 130
• 8.6 YachtSense Link router alarms — page 130
• 8.7 Digital switching alarms — page 131
• 8.8 Man Overboard (MOB) — page 131
• 8.9 DSC distress notification — page 132
• 8.10 High Speed Alarm — page 132

126
8.1 Alarms manager Alarm history

The alarms manager is used to configure available alarm’s settings, view Example: Alarm history tab
details of currently active alarms and provides an alarms history.

Active alarms
The alarms manager can be accessed by selecting the [Alarms] icon on the
Homescreen.

Example: Active alarms list

All Dangerous (Red) and Warning (Orange) alarms will appear in the alarms
history list. The history list will include an entry for the alarm being triggered
(raised) and also for when the alarm is acknowledged (cleared). The alarm
field contains the name of the alarm and the events field contains details of
the alarm condition and its time and date.
Alarm events will remain in the alarms history list until cleared. The list is
cleared by selecting [Clear history].
The Active alarms tab lists all alarms that are currently active. Alarms will
remain active until the conditions that triggered the alarm is no longer Alarms settings
present, e.g.: a Shallow depth alarm will automatically dismiss when the
depth becomes deeper.

Alarms settings can be configured from the alarms settings tab.

Alarms manager 127

8.2 Active alarm indication they have the potential to cross your path within a specified distance and
time. For alarm parameters refer to: p.349 — Dangerous targets alarm
When alarms are active the homescreen [Alarms] icon will identify the number • [Lost Radar targets] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when dangerous
of active alarms in the top right corner. The [Home] icon in app pages can Radar targets become lost (i.e.: no Radar return from the target has been
also be configured to provide an active alarm indicator. received for 20 seconds).
The app pages home icon indicator can be enabled and disabled from the • [Dangerous AIS targets] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when AIS
alarms manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Home button active targets become dangerous. AIS targets are deemed dangerous when they
alarm indicator]. have the potential to cross your path within a specified distance and time.
For alarm parameters refer to: p.231 — Dangerous targets alarm
• [Do not alarm for static AIS targets] — Enables ability to ignore AIS targets
that are considered static (travelling under 2 Knots). Static targets that
become dangerous will still be identified onscreen but will not trigger the
dangerous targets alarm.
• [Guard zone 1] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when Radar returns
are detected within guard zone 1.
• [Guard zone 2] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when Radar returns
are detected within guard zone 2.
• [Waypoint arrival] — If enabled, when you arrive at a waypoint, an alarm
is triggered. This setting allows you to specify a radius size for three
types of arrival alarm. When your vessel crosses the specified radius, the
Waypoint Arrival alarm is triggered. The following Waypoint arrival alarms
When enabled the [Home] icon will turn red and have an exclamation mark are available:
placed inside it.
– [Arrival radius] — Used when the MFD is NOT in pilot integration mode
The homescreen [Alarms] icon will identify the number of active alarms. and the Autopilot is in Track mode.
– [Pilot track mode radius] — Used when the MFD is integrated with an
Autopilot and the Autopilot is in Track mode.
8.3 Alarm settings – [Search route arrival radius] — Used when the MFD is following a SAR
pattern. Also helpful when race sailing and using Laylines, or when
The alarms listed below can be enabled and disabled and where applicable fishing, as this alarm setting provides a smaller radius to ensure you
alarm threshold values can be adjusted. Certain alarms may require specific don't get alerted too far away from the target waypoint.
connected peripheral devices or configurations.
• [Interception arrival] — If enabled, during target interception an alarm
is triggered when your vessel reaches the distance specified in [Arrival
Note:
radius].
Hardware dependent alarms are only triggered when relevant hardware • [Off track] — If enabled, during active navigation an alarm is triggered
(e.g.: sensors) is connected and reporting the data required for the alarm. when your vessel steers off track by more than the specified [Cross track
error] value.
• [Dangerous Radar targets]— If enabled; an alarm is triggered when Radar • [Sail recommendation] — MFD’s configured using the Sailing activity will
targets become dangerous. Radar targets are deemed dangerous when have the [Sail recommendation] alarm available. If enabled, when wind
128
 conditions change a sail recommendation notifications will be triggered. • [Digital switching alarms] — When your system includes digital switching
Sail recommendations are based on user imported values. a list of all configured digital switching alarms will be displayed. If your
• [Shallow depth] — If enabled, when the depth detected by your depth system includes a YachtSense ™ Link router then the router’s alarms will
transducer passes the specified value the Shallow depth alarm is triggered. be displayed.
– For details of digital switching alarms refer to:
Note: The MFD shallow depth alarm is independent of the Shallow p.131 — Digital switching alarms
depth alarm available on instrument displays. If you have Instrument – For details of YachtSense ™ Link router alarms refer to:
displays connected to your system it is recommended that their shallow p.130 — YachtSense Link router alarms
depth alarms are disabled.
• [AX8 camera messages] — If enabled, messages from a connected AX8
camera will be presented as alarms on your MFD.
• [Position drift] — If enabled, an Alarm is triggered when your vessel drifts
from its current GNSS (GPS) position by more than the specified [Drift • [Engine alarms] — If enabled, alarms will be triggered when engine warning
range]. alarms are received from connected, compatible engine management
systems or interfaces.
• [Anchor drag] — When the Anchor drag alarm has been configured and
activated in the Chart app the Anchor drag alarms can be turned off by • [Generator alarms] — If enabled, Alarms raised by compatible generators
selecting [Raise anchor] will be displayed on the MFD.
• [Low fuel remaining] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when the fuel • [Apps and connected devices] — Select [Configure] — Select
remaining in your fuel tanks reaches the specified [Fuel level]. to enable and disable alerts received from partner integration
hardware or apps. For details on partner integrations refer to:
Note: The Fuel manager must be enabled for alarms to be triggered. p.498 — Partner Integration and third-party apps
• [Battery alarms] — Select [Configure] to view the battery configuration page
where you can set alarms for each detected battery. For details refer to:
• [LightHouse chart obstructions], If enabled, an alarm in p.113 — Battery configuration
triggered when an obstruction is detected. For details refer to:
p.236 — Obstruction alarm (legacy LightHouse charts) • [Minimum sonar depth] — When your sonar transducer detects depths of
0.8 m/2.62 ft the alarm is triggered.
• [DSC alarms] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when DSC distress calls
are received.
• [AIS safety messages] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when AIS safety Important: Accurate bottom tracking can be unreliable in depths
messages are received. shallower than 0.8 m/2.62 ft. When operating at or below this depth be
cautious of misleading sonar returns or false bottom tracking.
• [MOB data type] — Determines whether the MOB waypoint is fixed at the
[Position] the alarm was triggered, or advances its position based on tide
and wind effects ([Dead reckoning]). • [Home button active alarm indicator] — If enabled, when an alarm is active
• [Fishing range] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when your Depth the onscreen home icon is colored red and contains a warning triangle.
reading reaches the depth specified in [Shallow water arrival] or [Deep • [High/maximum AIS targets] — When the MFD is configured as First
water arrival]. responder the High/maximum AIS targets alarm is available. The
• [Water temperature alarm] — If enabled, an alarm is triggered when the alarm is triggered when the MFD is reaching or met its maximum limit
water temperature reading reaches the temperature specified in [Lower of 100 AIS targets being displayed onscreen. For details refer to:
temp limit] or [Upper temp limit]. p.376 — AIS High target alarm
Alarms manager 129
• [High speed alarm] — If, enabled an alarm is triggered when
vessel SOG goes above a specified threshold. For details refer to:
p.132 — High Speed Alarm

8.4 External alarm speaker / buzzer

If your MFD has a built-in buzzer or is connected to a wired external buzzer,
MFD alarms will trigger an audible tone. If you connect your MFD to a
Bluetooth speaker then the alarm tone can also be heard from the speaker.
When connected to a Bluetooth speaker, a separate volume control is
available to control the volume of MFD Alarms sounded through the speaker.
For more information, refer to: p.82 — Bluetooth speaker pairing
• [Low Battery Voltage – YachtSense Link] — An alarm will be triggered
when the supply voltage to the router drops below a specified level.
8.5 Acknowledging alarms • [YachtSense Link alert 1 – Channel 1] — An alarm will be triggered when the
router’s input channel 1 is above or below a specified value.
Follow the steps below to acknowledge an active alarm.
• [YachtSense Link alert 2 – Channel 2] — An alarm will be triggered when
With an alarms notification displayed onscreen: the router’s input channel 2 is above or below a specified value.
1. Select [OK].
• [YachtSense Link alert 3 – Channel 3] — An alarm will be triggered when
The notification is dismissed and the audible tone is stopped. the router’s input channel 3 is above or below a specified value.
An acknowledged alarm remains active until the conditions that triggered the • [YachtSense Link alert 4 – Channel 4] — An alarm will be triggered when
alarm are no longer present. the router’s input channel 4 is above or below a specified value.
The YachtSense ™ Link alarms values are configured from the router’s
Note: Alert notifications web interface page which can be accessed by selecting
If an alarm notification includes an [Edit] button, selecting it will display the YachtSense Link from the Homescreen status area and then selecting
relevant setting in the Alarms menu so that, if required, you can change [ADVANCED SETTINGS > Alert notifications].
the alarm threshold.

8.6 YachtSense Link router alarms

If your system includes a YachtSense ™ Link router then you can enable and
disable the router’s alarms (alert notifications) from the alarms manager.
The following alarms are available:

130
8.7 Digital switching alarms 1. The MOB alarm can be activated by pressing and holding on the MOB
icon on the Homescreen.
When your MFD is connected and configured with a supported digital 2. The MOB alarm can also be activated by pressing and holding on the
switching system, digital switching specific alarms can be enabled and waypoint / MOB icon located at the top of all MFD apps.
disabled using the alarms manager.

Example: Digital switching alarms

Each digital switching system will be unique as alarms are defined when the
system is configured.

The MOB feature requires your vessel to have a valid position fix from a GNSS
8.8 Man Overboard (MOB) (GPS) receiver. Dead reckoning mode also requires Heading and Speed data.
When you activate the MOB alarm:
If a person or object falls overboard, you can use the Man Overboard (MOB)
alarm to mark the position that your vessel was at when the MOB alarm was • an audible alarm is sounded which is repeated every 30 seconds until
activated. the alarm is cancelled.
The MOB alarm is activated using the MOB icons. • a MOB Databar providing Bearing and range to the MOB, and elapsed
time since MOB was initiated, is displayed along the top of the screen.
The Databar persists across apps and the Homescreen, and remains until
the MOB alarm is cancelled.
• a MOB warning is displayed in the bottom of the screen, which requires
acknowledgement.
• the Chart app is placed in a special MOB mode to help you navigate back
to the point your vessel was at when the MOB was initiated.

Alarms manager 131

MOB mode vessel MMSI then, after selecting [Place waypoint], there will be 2 options
MOB can be set to Dead Reckoning or Position mode. Dead Reckoning to choose from:
mode will take into consideration the effects of wind and tides. This usually • [Replace waypoint] — Selecting this option replaces the existing
provides a more accurate course. Position mode does not take these factors waypoint with a new waypoint using the updated notification details.
into account. You can change the MOB mode at anytime from the Alarms • [Place new waypoint] — Selecting this option creates a new waypoint
menu: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > MOB data type:]. and adds a suffix (A.B.C etc.) to each new waypoint’s name.
2. [Goto waypoint] — Selecting this option sets a Goto to the latitude and
longitude specified in the notification.
8.9 DSC distress notification 3. [Clear message] — Selecting this option clears the alert from the screen.
The MFD can display DSC distress alert information received by a connected Note:
DSC VHF radio.
If position data is not included in the DSC notification, [Place waypoint] and
When DSC alarms are enabled ([Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > DSC
[Goto waypoint] options will not be available.
alarms]), a notification is displayed on the MFD when a DSC distress call
is received by your DSC VHF radio.
8.10 High Speed Alarm
A [High speed alarm] is available which will trigger a warning alarm when the
reported SOG (Speed Over Ground) exceeds the specified threshold. The
[High speed alarm] uses SOG reported by a connected GNSS (GPS) receiver.

1. [Place waypoint] — Selecting [Place waypoint] places a waypoint at the

latitude and longitude specified in the notification. The special DSC
waypoint symbol is used for waypoints created from DSC notifications. 1. Use the [High speed alarm] toggle switch located in the [Alarms] settings
DSC waypoints use the MMSI of the originating vessel as the waypoint menu to enable or disable the [High speed alarm]. The alarm is disabled
name. If subsequent DSC distress calls are received from the same by default.
132
2. Set a [SOG] threshold. When SOG exceeds this value the [High speed
alarm] is triggered.
3. [High speed alarm] warning notification. The notification and audible
beep will persist until acknowledged or until SOG drops below the
specified threshold.

Alarms manager 133

CHAPTER 9: AUTOPILOT INTEGRATION
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 9.1 Commissioning - Evolution autopilot system — page 135

• 9.2 Autopilot control — page 140
• 9.3 Pilot sidebar — page 142
• 9.4 Pilot Version keypad LED status (Axiom® 2 Pro only) — page 143
• 9.5 Pilot pop-up — page 143
• 9.6 Autopilot Control — Pilot set-up menu — page 143
• 9.7 Rudder damping levels and deadband angles — page 146

134
9.1 Commissioning - Evolution autopilot Vessel hull type selection
system The vessel hull type options are designed to provide optimum steering
performance for typical vessel s.
Commissioning pre-requisites It is important to complete the vessel hull type selection, prior to performing
dockside calibration, as it forms a key part of the commissioning process.
Before commissioning your autopilot system for the first time, ensure The vessel hull type options can be accessed at any time, when the autopilot
that you have read through and understood the entire commissioning is in Standby from the [Pilot set-up] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot
instructions for your autopilot system. > Pilot set-up > Vessel Hull Type].
Before commissioning, you should also ensure the following: The option that most closely matches your vessel’s hull type and steering
• All autopilot system components have been installed in accordance with characteristics should be selected from the available hull types:
the installation instructions supplied with the system components. • [Power]
• All autopilot system components have been updated to the latest available • [Power (slow turn)]
software versions, available on the Raymarine website.
• [Power (fast turn)]
• A system schematic is available which includes all system components
and required connections. • [Sail]
• The commissioning engineer is familiar with the vessel’s hull type, drive • [Sail (Slow turn)]
type and steering system. • [Sail Catamaran]

Commissioning steps Note:

The required commissioning steps should be carried out in the correct order It is important to be aware that steering forces (and therefore rate-of-turn)
using the pilot controller display. vary significantly depending on the combination of vessel hull type,
steering system, and drive type. The available vessel hull type options are
Note: provided for guidance only. You may wish to experiment with the different
vessel hull type options, as it might be possible to improve the steering
Commissioning must be performed using the datamaster MFD. performance of your vessel by selecting a different vessel hull type. When
choosing a suitable vessel hull type, the emphasis should be on a safe
and dependable steering response.
1. Power-up all of the components that make up your autopilot system.
2. Select the relevant vessel hull type for your vessel.
3. Complete the dockside calibration process., using the [Dockside wizard]: Using the Dockside wizard
4. If the system does NOT include a rudder reference transducer then, The dockside calibration process must be completed before the autopilot
specify the hard-over time. system can be used for the first time. The Dockside wizard guides you
5. Complete compass linearization. through the steps required for dockside calibration.
6. If required, lock the compass. The Dockside wizard contains different steps depending on whether the
system includes rudder reference transducer:

Autopilot integration 135

 The following Dockside wizard procedures apply to vessels • Tiller
that do not have a rudder reference transducer: • Sport Drive
1. Drive Type selection. • Verado
2. Rudder Limit setting. • Rotary Drive Type 1
3. Hard-over time setting (Raymarine recommends that • Rotary Drive Type 2
this information is specified once the dockside wizard
and Rudder Drive check is complete, using the Hard • Hydraulic Pump Type 1
Over Time menu option). • Hydraulic Pump Type 2
4. Rudder Drive check. • Hydraulic Pump Type 3
The following Dockside wizard procedures only apply to
vessels that include a rudder reference transducer: Important:
1. Drive Type selection If your drive type is not listed, contact your Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Rudder alignment (Align Rudder)
3. Rudder Limit 2. Select [Continue].
4. Rudder Drive check. Drive type selection is also available when the autopilot is in standby, from
the [Advanced settings ] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot
To access the wizard, ensure the autopilot is in standby and then: set-up > Drive type].
1. Select [Dockside Wizard] from the [Advanced settings ] menu
[Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot set-up > Dockside wizard]. Aligning the rudder
2. Select [Continue] to initiate the dockside wizard and follow the onscreen For systems that have a rudder reference transducer fitted, Rudder alignment
instructions. is included in the dockside wizard and comes after drive type selection.
For systems without a rudder reference transducer fitted rudder alignment
Selecting a drive type is not required.
Drive type selection is included in the dockside wizard.
With the [Drive Type] menu displayed: • The following procedure only applies to vessels with a
rudder reference transducer.
1. Select your drive type.
The drive types available are:
• Type 1 Linear 1. Select [Continue].
• Type 2 Linear 2. Center the rudder and select [OK].
3. Put the rudder all the way to port and press [OK].
• Type 2 Hydraulic Linear
4. Put the rudder all the way to starboard and press [OK].
• Type 3 Hydraulic Linear
5. Center the rudder and select [OK].
• I/O Stern 6. Select [Continue] when the task complete message is displayed to
• Wheel Drive progress to the rudder limit page.
136
Setting the rudder limit • If you already know the hard-over time for your vessel’s steering system:
Rudder limit setting is included in the dockside wizard and comes after rudder enter this time in the Hard over time value box and select Continue.
alignment or drive selection depending on whether a rudder reference • If you do NOT know the hard-over time for your vessel’s steering system,
transducer is fitted. select [Continue], proceed with the Checking the rudder drive procedure
• For vessels without a rudder reference transducer and complete the Dockside wizard. Once the wizard is complete, proceed
to the Setting the hard-over time instructions for information on how to
• Rudder limit are set to 30 degrees and can be adjusted calculate and set the hard-over time.
as required.
• For vessels with a rudder reference transducer Setting the hard-over time

• The rudder alignment process establishes the rudder On vessels without a rudder reference transducer, it is important to set a
limit. The rudder limit will be displayed with a message Hard Over Time.
confirming that the rudder limit has been updated. Before attempting to follow this procedure ensure you have read and
understood the Rudder Check warning provided in this document.
• If required, the limit can be adjusted.
To estimate your hard over time follow the steps below:
1. Ensure that the rudder limit is sufficient to prevent the steering 1. With the autopilot in [Standby], manually turn the rudder / engine full to
mechanism impacting the end stops and placing the steering system port. (For vessels with power steering the engine should be running when
under unnecessary load. If required adjust the limit by selecting the turning the rudder.)
rudder limit value box.
2. Open the sidebar by swiping right from the left side of the screen.
3. Switch to the Pilot sidebar.
Important:
4. Engage [Auto] mode.
It is recommended that the limit is set to approximately 5 degrees less then 5. Press the [+10] button on the Pilot bar 9 times to ensure that the rudder
the maximum rudder angle. moves hard over to starboard.
6. Count how many seconds it takes for the rudder to move from hard over
2. Select [Continue] to move to the next step. port to hard over starboard. This is your hard over time.
7. Enter your hard over time in the. The hard over time setting can be
Note: accessed from the [Pilot set-up ] menu: [Homescreen > Settings >
Autopilot > Pilot set-up > Hard over time].
The rudder limit can be adjusted when the autopilot is in standby, from
the [Pilot set-up ] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot set-up 8. After setting the hard over time, observe the autopilot’s behavior and
> Rudder Limit]. if required, make small adjustments to the Hard over time value until a
satisfactory result it achieved.

Hard over time Warning: Rudder check

The hard over time setting can be specified as part of the Dockside wizard If no rudder reference has been fitted you MUST ensure
and comes after setting the rudder limit. that adequate provision is made to prevent the steering
• The following information only applies to vessels without mechanism from impacting the end stops.
a rudder reference transducer.

Autopilot integration 137

Checking the rudder drive (rudder reference fitted) 5. You will be asked to confirm that the rudder has turned to port by
As part of the dockside wizard, the system will check the drive connection. selecting [YES ] or [NO].
Once it has completed the check successfully, a message will appear asking 6. Select [OK] if it is safe to engage the rudder in the opposite direction.
if it is safe for the system to take the helm. 7. You will be asked to confirm the rudder turned to starboard by selecting
During this procedure the autopilot will move the rudder. Ensure it is safe to [YES] or [NO].
proceed before proceeding. 8. Dockside calibration is now complete, select [Continue].

• The following procedure only applies to vessels with a

rudder reference transducer. Note:
If you confirmed a “NO” response for the rudder movement to both port
and starboard, the wizard will exit. It is possible that the steering system did
1. Center and let go of the rudder. not move the rudder in any direction, and it will be necessary to check the
steering system before completing the Dockside wizard procedure again.
2. Disengage any rudder drive clutch.
3. Select [Continue].
4. Check it is safe to proceed and then select [OK].
The autopilot will now automatically move the rudder. Important:
5. Select [OK] when the rudder has moved to port. If you have not already done so, now set your Hard-over time using the
6. Select [OK] when the rudder has moved to starboard. following instructions: Setting the hard-over time
7. Select [Continue] when the rudder has centered.
8. Dockside calibration is now complete, select [Continue].
Compass linearization — Evolution autopilots
Checking the rudder drive (no rudder reference fitted)
The EV sensor’s internal compass needs to compensate for local and the
As part of the dockside wizard, the system will check the drive connection. Earth’s magnetic fields. This is achieved using an automatic process known
Once it has completed the check successfully, a message will appear asking as linearization.
if it is safe for the system to take the helm.
During this procedure the autopilot will move the rudder. Ensure it is safe to Initial linearization
proceed before proceeding. When the EV sensor is first installed and powered-up (or after a factory
reset or compass restart) linearization is required. When linearization is in
• The following information only applies to vessels without progress bar is displayed in the Autopilot settings page: [Homescreen >
a rudder reference transducer. Settings > Autopilot].

1. Center and let go of the rudder.

2. Disengage any rudder drive clutch.
3. Select [Continue].
4. Check it is safe to proceed and then select [OK].
The autopilot will now automatically move the rudder.
138
 Compass deviation
If the reported deviation is 45° or higher, it is highly recommended that the
EV sensor is moved and re-installed in a location which is subject to less
magnetic interference.

Note:
If “- -” is displayed as the Deviation value, it means that linearization has not
been successfully completed yet.

Check the compass heading data

As part of the autopilot system commissioning process, it is recommended
that you check the compass heading value displayed, against a good known
heading source on various headings.

Note:
Once the linearization process has completed, it is possible that the
heading value may have a slight offset of 2 to 3 degrees. This is common
The linearization process will start automatically after your vessel has turned where installation space is limited, and the EV sensor cannot be properly
approximately 100° at a speed of between 3 –15 knots. Linearization requires aligned to the vessel's longitudinal axis. In this case, it is possible to
no user input, however at least a 270° turn is required before linearization manually adjust the [Compass offset] value.
can complete. The progress bar will fill to indicate progress, the progress
bar will turn Red if the process is paused or otherwise interrupted. Time it
takes to complete the linearization will vary according to the characteristics The compass offset can be adjusted from the Pilot set-up menu: [Homescreen
of the vessel, the installation environment of the EV unit, and the levels of > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot set-up > Compass offset].
magnetic interference at the time of conducting the process. Sources of
significant magnetic interference may increase the time required to complete Important:
the linearization process. Examples of such sources include: Do NOT rely on the reported heading until compass linearization and
• Marine pontoons alignment is complete.
• Metal-hulled vessels
• Underwater cables System monitoring and adaptation
You can speed-up the linearization process by completing a full 360° turn To ensure optimum performance, after the initial linearization process is
(at a speed of 3 – 15 knots). You can also restart the linearization process complete the EV continues to monitor and adapt the compass linearization to
at any time by selecting the [Restart Compass] from the Pilot set-up menu: suit current conditions.
[Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot set-up]. If the conditions for linearization are less than ideal, the automatic
Once the initial linearization is completed the Maximum compass deviation linearization process temporarily pauses until conditions improve again. The
value is displayed under the [Pilot set-up] button on the Autopilot settings following conditions can cause the linearization process to temporarily pause:
page. • Boat speed < 3 knots.
Autopilot integration 139
• Boat speed > 15 knots. 9.2 Autopilot control
• Rate-of-turn is too slow.
Your MFD can be integrated with an Evolution autopilot system and act as the
• Significant magnetic interference is present. autopilot’s controller. Please refer to the documentation supplied with your
autopilot for details on installing and connecting your autopilot to your MFD.
Compass lock Autopilot control from your MFD can be enabled and disabled from the
Once you are satisfied with the compass accuracy, you can lock the setting [Autopilot] tab in the [Settings] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot >
to prevent the system from completing a further automatic linearization in Pilot control].
the future.
This feature is particularly useful for vessels in environments that are exposed
to strong magnetic disturbances on a regular basis (such as offshore wind
farms or very busy rivers, for example). In these situations it may be desirable
to use the Compass lock feature to disable the continuous linearization
process, as the magnetic interference may build a heading error over time.

Note:
The compass lock may be released at any time, to allow the compass
continual monitoring and adaptation to re-commence. This is particularly
useful if planning a long voyage. The earth’s magnetic field will change
significantly from one geographical location to another, and the compass
can continually compensate for the changes, ensuring you maintain
accurate heading data throughout the voyage.

Locking the compass

Follow the steps below to lock the compass linearization. 1. [Pilot icon] — With [Autopilot control] enabled, the Pilot icon is displayed
onscreen; selecting the icon displays the Pilot sidebar. When the
From the Pilot set-up menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot
Autopilot is engaged the Pilot icon is replaced with the Disengage pilot
set-up].
icon.
1. Select the [Compass Lock] toggle option so that it is enabled (Green)..
2. [Pilot sidebar] — The Pilot sidebar provides controls and information
The compass linearization is now locked and automatic linearization will no relating to your autopilot system. With the Autopilot engaged the Pilot
longer be performed. sidebar’s content is expanded to provide further controls and information.
The Pilot sidebar can be hidden by swiping the sidebar to the left. The
sidebar can be displayed again by swiping from the left of the screen
towards the center of the screen.

140
 Warning: Maintain a permanent watch Selecting [DIRECT from here] will plot a new track from your current
position to the destination.
Always maintain a permanent watch, this will allow you to
respond to situations as they develop. Failure to maintain a
permanent watch puts yourself, your vessel and others at
serious risk of harm. Engaging and disengaging the autopilot - physical
buttons
Warning: Autopilot usage The process for engaging your autopilot using the physical buttons available
Autopilots navigate a preset course and do NOT respond on a RMK remote keypad, Axiom® Pro or Axiom® 2 Pro is shown below.
to hazards automatically. The operator must remain at the 1. Press and hold the [Pilot] button to engage the autopilot in Locked
helm at all times and be ready to avoid hazards and warn heading mode.
passengers of course changes. 2. Press the [Pilot] button again to disengage the autopilot.

Engaging the autopilot — Locked heading Disengaging the autopilot

With Autopilot control enabled:
1. For Wheel and Tiller pilots, engage the mechanical drive by either
engaging the wheel drive’s clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller
pin.
2. Select the [Autopilot icon].
The Pilot sidebar is displayed.
3. Select [Steer to Hdg].
4. Select [Engage pilot].

Engaging the autopilot — Navigation

With Autopilot control enabled:
1. For Wheel and Tiller pilots, engage the mechanical drive by either
engaging the wheel drive’s clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller
You can disengage your autopilot at any time by selecting the [Disengage
pin.
pilot icon].
2. Initiate a Goto or Follow from the chart app.
The [Disengage pilot icon] is available in all apps. It is also available on the
3. Select the [Autopilot icon]. Pilot sidebar, in Pilot pop up messages, on the Homescreen and on the
The Pilot sidebar is displayed. Shortcuts page.
4. Select [Steer to Nav].
5. Select either [Engage pilot] or if a cross track error exists then select
[ALONG route leg] or [DIRECT from here].

Selecting [ALONG route leg] will steer along the original track.
Autopilot integration 141
9.3 Pilot sidebar 8 [–1°]
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by minus 1 degree.
Depending on the state of your autopilot the following information and
9 [+1°]
controls are available on the Pilot sidebar.
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by plus 1 degree.
10 [–10°]
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by minus 10 degrees.
11 [+10°]
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by plus 10 degrees.
12 [Disengage]
Selecting will disengage your autopilot.
13 [Steer to Nav]
Selecting will engage your autopilot in Navigation mode.
14 [Pilot state]
Displays the current state / mode of your autopilot.
Note: The Pilot sidebar is controlled using the Touchscreen. 15 [Destination]
Displays your current destination.
16 [User customizable data]
Displays user customizable data.
Pilot sidebar — Standby Select to customize data.
1 [Sidebar selection] 17 [Advance wpt]
Enables you to switch between Pilot and Data sidebars. Selecting will advance your destination to the next waypoint in
2 [Close] the current route.
Closes the Pilot sidebar. 18 [Stop Route] / [Stop Goto]
3 [Steer to Hdg] Selecting will stop current navigation.
Enables you to engage the autopilot in locked heading (Auto) 19 [Restart here]
mode. Selecting will restart the cross track error (XTE) at your current
4 [Steer to Nav] location.
Enables you to engage the autopilot in Navigation (Track) mode. 20 [Disengage]
5 [Pilot status] Selecting will disengage your autopilot.
Provides the status of the autopilot. 21 [Steer to Hdg]
6 [Rudder bar] Selecting will switch your autopilot to Locked heading mode.
Provides visual indication of rudder position. 22 [Pilot state]
7 [Heading] Displays the current state / mode of your autopilot.
Displays your autopilot’s current locked heading.
Selecting displays the Locked Heading adjustment pop-over.
142
9.4 Pilot Version keypad LED status (Axiom® When following a Route the Pilot pop-up provides options to make the
required turn to the next waypoint, disengage the autopilot or to maintain the
2 Pro only) current course in Locked heading mode.
The Pilot Version lower keypad on an Axiom® 2 Pro display includes an
Autopilot status LED.
LED indication Status and required action 9.6 Autopilot Control — Pilot set-up menu
Solid green = Autopilot active/on. Menu item and description Options
[Vessel hull type] • Sail
Off = Autopilot in standby. Selecting the hull type that is the closest match for your
• Sail (slow turn)
vessel provides optimum steering performance.
• Sail
Catamaran
Flashing red = Autopilot calibrating,
Autopilot error. • Power
• Power (slow
turn)
9.5 Pilot pop-up • Power (fast
During active navigation, when you reach your current destination the Pilot turn)
pop-up is displayed. [Drive type] List of drives
Goto Selecting the drive type that matches your vessel’s compatible with
drive will provide optimum drive performance. your ACU.
[Compass offset] • -10° to +10°
Adjust the Compass offset so that your autopilot’s
• 0° (default)
heading matches the ship’s compass.
The display of autopilot heading data requires a second
networked MFD or pilot controller.
Compass offset will be adjusted automatically during
the Align compass to GPS procedure.
When performing a Goto the Pilot pop-up provides options to disengage the [Speed input] (1) • Auto (default)
autopilot or to maintain the current course in Locked heading mode. Selects the source for speed data.
• Water speed
Follow (STW)
• SOG
• Default cruise
speed

Autopilot integration 143

 Menu item and description Options Menu item and description Options
[Cruise speed] (1) • 4.0kts to [Align compass to GPS] (1) • Start
Set the Cruise speed value to your vessel’s typical 60.0kts Follow the onscreen instructions to align your compass
• Cancel
cruising speed. with your GPS heading.
[Calibration lock] If your system has a GPS connected to your data • Disengage
• On (default)
The calibration lock is used to lock out specific network (SeaTalk, SeaTalkng or NMEA), the autopilot pilot
• Off is tuned to the GPS heading while you steer to a
calibration settings which if changed may require
recommissioning of the autopilot system. If your system known magnetic heading. This step provides a rough
has been dealer installed then the lock may be turned alignment and minimizes the amount of compass fine
on. tuning required. As part of the align to GPS process, the
autopilot system will compare the average heading with
[Dockside wizard] • Drive type the average COG (Course Over Ground) value reported
Dockside calibration must be carried out before using by the source of GPS data, and set an offset value so
• Rudder limit
your autopilot for the first time. that the heading matches the COG value provided by
The Dockside wizard guides you through the dockside • Align rudder the GPS.
calibration process.
• Hard over time [Pilot factory reset] • Yes
The steps included in the dockside wizard are
dependent on whether you have a rudder reference • Rudder drive Resets your autopilot’s settings to factory default values.
• No
transducer fitted to your vessel. check
[CCU debug level] (1) • 0 to 63
[Restart compass] • Start Sets a debug value for troubleshooting purposes.
Select to restart the compass linearization procedure. The debug level should only be set when requested by
• Cancel
Technical Support as part of a troubleshooting process.
• Disengage
[ACU debug level] (1) • 0 to 63
pilot
Sets a debug value for troubleshooting purposes.
[Compass lock] • On The debug level should only be set when requested by
Locks the compass linearization so that further Technical Support as part of a troubleshooting process.
• Off (default)
automatic linearization is not performed.
[Rudder damping] (1) • 1 to 9
Rudder damping is used to prevent the autopilot
• 3 (default)
from “hunting” maneuvers. Always use the lowest
acceptable value. For more information, refer to:
p.146 — Rudder damping levels and deadband angles
[Auto turn angle] (1) • 10° to 125°
Determines the amount of course change when
• 90° (default)
performing an auto turn.
[Power steering] (3) • Off (default)
Determines the behavior of the Rotary or Joystick.
• Proportional
• Bang Bang

144
 Menu item and description Options
[Reverse rudder ref] (3) • On
Inverts the rudder reference display graphic.
• Off
[Motor phasing] (1) • A
Switches the polarity of your drive motor.
• B
Use if your drive polarity is inverted.
[Rudder offset] (3) • -10° to +10°
Adjust to specify the rudder offset from amidships.
• 30° (default)
[Rudder limit] • 10° to 50°
Specifies how far the rudder can move before hitting
• 30° (default)
its end stops.
The value should be set to approximately 5° less than
your maximum rudder angle.
[Hard over time] • 1 to 100.0
Specifies the time it takes for the rudder to move from seconds
hard port to hard starboard or vice versa.
The default value is determined by your [Drive type]
selection.
[Gybe inhibit] (2) • Allow Gybe
When set to [Prevent Gybe] the autopilot will prevent
• Prevent Gybe
you from performing an Auto tack away from the wind.
[Wind data type] (2) • Apparent
Selects whether wind data is True or Apparent.
• True
[Wind shift alarm] (2) • On
Enables and disables the Wind shift alarm.
• Off

Note:
• (1) Option not available when [Calibration lock] is [On].
• (2) Only available when Vessel hull type is set to a Sailing vessel.
• (3) Only available when a rudder reference transducer is connected.

Autopilot integration 145

9.7 Rudder damping levels and deadband Rudder damping Existing Existing New Deadband
level Deadband angle Deadband angle angle (ACU
angles (ACU-100, -150, (ACU-300) software version
-200, -400) v3.11 or later)
For autopilot systems which include a rudder angle reference sensor /
transducer, rudder damping is used to prevent Evolution autopilot system 8 0.8° 1.20° 1.6°
over-activity, characterized by “hunting” maneuvers. A number of rudder 9 0.9° 1.35° 2.2°
damping levels are available to address this behavior. Rudder damping levels
relate to “deadband angles”, and can be configured using your autopilot It’s important to check the rudder damping level currently configured on your
control head (e.g. p70s/p70Rs or MFD). A higher damping level is intended to autopilot control head, to ensure it matches your needs. The rudder damping
eliminate pilot and helm over-activity. value should be increased one level at a time until the autopilot stops hunting.
Typically, the appropriate rudder damping level is the lowest acceptable
value. However, it is important to be aware that the rudder damping scaling Adjusting the Rudder Damping level
has been changed in recent versions of ACU units, which include newer
processor and software versions (these units can be identified with an “A” Use the following menu path to adjust the Rudder Damping level:
appended to their SKU). 1. [Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Advanced settings > Rudder
Damping].
Important:
The rudder damping levels can have a significant impact on your autopilot
performance. If you are unsure as to how to adjust these settings to
best suit your autopilot system, please refer to your dealer or Raymarine
product support.

The following table lists the rudder damping levels and deadband angles that
are available with both old and new versions of the ACU software:
Rudder damping Existing Existing New Deadband
level Deadband angle Deadband angle angle (ACU
(ACU-100, -150, (ACU-300) software version
-200, -400) v3.11 or later)
1 0.1° 0.15° 0.1°
2 0.2° 0.30° 0.2°
3 0.3° 0.45° 0.3°
4 0.4° 0.60° 0.4°
5 0.5° 0.75° 0.7°
6 0.6° 0.9° 0.9°
7 0.7° 1.05° 1.1°
146
CHAPTER 10: TROLLING MOTOR CONTROL
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 10.1 Trolling motor integration — page 148

• 10.2 Trolling motor control overview — page 148
• 10.3 Manual control — page 150
• 10.4 Anchor mode — page 150
• 10.5 Hold heading — page 151
• 10.6 Navigation mode — page 152
• 10.7 Alarms and limits — page 153

Trolling motor control 147

10.1 Trolling motor integration 4. SeaTalkng to DeviceNet adaptor cables
5. Axiom/Axiom 2 display running LightHouse™ 4, version 4.5 or later.
The trolling motor requires an NMEA 2000 gateway which is connected to
the same network as the display(s).
Currently integration is available for Rhodan trolling motors manufactured Note:
after January 2017 that are connected to the NMEA 2000 network using The diagram depicts connection using a Raymarine SeaTalkng ® network. A
the Rhodan gateway module. DeviceNet network could be used in a similar way.
A firmware update may be required for the Rhodan trolling motor and a
software update may be required for gateways manufactured before October
2023. Autopilot integration
The Trolling sidebar will report if incompatible software is detected. If this The Trolling motor can be integrated on a system that includes an autopilot,
occurs, contact Rhodan to obtain a software/firmware update dongle. such as the Evolution™ autopilot.
Axiom/Axiom 2 display(s) must be running LightHouse™ 4, version 4.5 or later. If the autopilot is engaged whilst the Trolling motor is in use, the Trolling
motor will automatically drop to standby mode.
SeaTalkng® connection diagram
The autopilot must be disengaged/in standby to enable selection of Trolling
motor modes.
Wireless fob integration
When using the trolling motor’s wireless fob, the display’s Trolling sidebar will
automatically update to show the selected mode.
When using a mode that is not available on the display, e.g.: when using the
Trolling motor’s Route mode to follow a route stored on the trolling motor,
the Sidebar will be placed in Standby and the Motor Status will be [DIRECT
CONTROL].
When under direct control, the sidebar can be used to take control and
change the mode of the Trolling motor.

10.2 Trolling motor control overview

A compatible Trolling motor can be integrated with the display so that the
Trolling motor can be controlled using the dedicated Trolling sidebar. The
Trolling sidebar provides controls which enable you to manoeuvre your boat
over short distances, or hold position without using an anchor.
The Trolling sidebar will be available on all networked displays when a
1. Rhodan gateway module.
compatible Trolling motor is detected on the network. The controls will be
2. DeviceNet connection to Trolling motor. disabled when the Trolling motor is in the ‘Stowed’ position. The controls will
3. SeaTalkng network. be enabled when the Trolling motor is ‘Deployed’.
148
 Anchor mode, Hold heading and Navigation modes require the Trolling
motor to have its own GPS position fix. These modes will be disabled if the
Trolling motor has no position fix.
Selecting a mode will initiate that mode on the Trolling motor and open the
relevant mode sidebar.
The Trolling mode sidebars provide controls similar to the controls available
on the trolling motor wireless fob.
Steering controls
Steering controls adjust the Trolling motor’s heading.
Thrust/Speed controls
• Thrust provides direct control of motor thrust. Negative thrust is only
available in Manual control mode.
• Speed sets a desired Speed Over Ground (SOG).

Note:

The Trolling sidebar provides controls for the following modes: • When using your boat’s engine(s), the Trolling motor should be correctly
‘stowed’ to prevent damage to the Trolling motor.
• Manual control mode
• If the Trolling motor reports an over temperature or over current fault,
• Anchor mode Anchor mode and Navigation mode will be disabled.
• Hold heading mode
• Navigation mode

Note:
Trolling motors usually use built-in sensors for position and heading; the
sensor data is not shared with the display. On larger boats where the
boat’s GNSS (GPS) receiver is several meters from the Trolling motor, there
may be an offset when performing a “Goto” or following a route.

The system will remember the last networked display that the Trolling motor
was controlled from, and will automatically open the Trolling sidebar on
that display the next time the Trolling motor is ‘Deployed’. However, if the
autopilot is engaged when the Trolling motor is deployed, the sidebar will
not open automatically.

Trolling motor control 149

10.3 Manual control Note:
Increments of speed and steering are commanded by the Trolling motor
Manual control enables you to control the direction and thrust level of the and as such the stated increments could be different or change.
Trolling motor.

10.4 Anchor mode

Anchor mode acts as a virtual anchor and automatically controls steering and
thruster speed to maintain the boat’s position. In anchor mode, the bow
should maintain position, however the boat may swing around depending
on conditions.

The Manual control sidebar includes the following controls:

1. Menu — Select the three dots to access the available Trolling motor
modes.
2. Motor direction indicator — Shows the angle of the Trolling motor
referenced to boat heading.
3. Steer port. The Anchor mode sidebar includes the following controls:
4. Steer starboard. 1. Menu — Select the three dots to access the available Trolling motor
5. Current thrust percentage. modes.
6. Decrease thrust. 2. Forwards.
3. Left.
7. Increase thrust.
4. Right.
8. Standby.
5. Backwards.
Thrust increments are determined by the Trolling motor. The thrust range
6. Standby.
is from -50% to 100%.
Selecting the directional controls (Up, Down, Left, Right) will move (‘jog’) the
Selecting the steering buttons will adjust the heading in 5 degree increments. anchor location in 5 foot increments, relative to the boat’s heading. E.g.:
You can select Standby at any time to place the Trolling motor into standby Selecting the Right button once will move the anchor location 5 feet to the
mode. right of the boat’s bow.
150
 Important: 1. Menu — Select the three dots to access the available Trolling motor
modes.
In anchor mode, the trolling motor will operate causing the bow of the boat
to move as needed to maintain its location. Unexpected movement of the 2. Heading (of the trolling motor).
boat may cause imbalance. Be cautious when using this mode until you are 3. Steer port.
familiar with how the system works.
4. Steer Starboard.
5. Decrease thrust/speed.

Note: 6. Increase thrust/speed.

Increments of speed and steering are commanded by the Trolling motor 7. Current thrust percentage/speed.
and as such the stated increments could be different or change. 8. Thrust/Speed selection.
9. Standby.
You can select Standby at any time to place the Trolling motor into standby Thrust increments are determined by the Trolling motor. The thrust range is
mode. from 0% to 100%, reverse thrust is not available in Hold heading mode. The
default thrust for Hold heading mode is 40%. When switching from Manual
control the Trolling motor will retain its previous speed, otherwise it will
10.5 Hold heading gradually ramp up to 40%.
If required, Thrust can be switched to speed by selecting the Speed option.
Hold heading mode aligns the motor’s heading with the boat’s heading and
locks the motor in position so that thrust is in a fixed direction. Actual boat
heading and COG may differ to the motor’s fixed direction due to tide and Important:
wind conditions. In Hold heading mode the thrust level is user selected. In extreme wind or
current it is necessary for the user to select a speed setting with adequate
thrust to remain on course.

Selecting the steering buttons will adjust the ‘held’ heading in 5 degree
increments.
You can select Standby at any time to place the Trolling motor into standby
mode.

Note:
Increments of speed and steering are commanded by the Trolling motor
and as such the stated increments could be different or change.

The Hold heading sidebar includes the following controls:

Trolling motor control 151
10.6 Navigation mode
Navigation mode allows the Trolling motor to follow any active navigation set
by the display (i.e.: performing a “Goto”, or following a route).
Navigation mode is only available when the display has active navigation.
When the Trolling motor is deployed initiating a “Goto” or following a route, it
will display a prompt asking if you wish to use the Trolling motor. Selecting
“yes” will automatically enable Navigation mode.

Note:
• To initiate a “goto”, the waypoint must be within 1 kilometer of your boat
• When following a route, each waypoint must be within 1 kilometer from
the previous waypoint.
• When following a route, if the next waypoint is over 1 kilometer away, the The Navigation sidebar includes the following controls:
Trolling motor will switch to Manual control with 0% thrust.
1. Menu — Select the three dots to access the available Trolling motor
modes.
Example goto cursor notification 2. Active waypoint name.
3. Decrease thrust/speed.
4. Increase thrust/speed.
5. Current thrust percentage/speed.
6. Thrust/Speed selection.
When following a route, the Trolling motor will automatically advance to the 7. Standby.
next waypoint on waypoint arrival.
Thrust increments are determined by the Trolling motor. The thrust range
The normal waypoint arrival notification does not apply when using is from 0% to 100%, reverse thrust is not available in Navigation mode. The
Navigation mode. default thrust for Navigation mode is 40%. When switching from Manual
When the destination waypoint is reached, the Trolling motor will control, the Trolling motor will retain its previous speed, otherwise it will
automatically switch to Anchor mode to maintain the boat’s position at the gradually ramp up to 40%.
destination point. If required, Thrust can be switched to speed by selecting the Speed option.
Selecting the Thrust/speed buttons will adjust the Trolling motor’s
thrust/speed in increments; 4% for thrust and 0.1 Kts for speed.
You can select Standby at any time to place the Trolling motor into standby
mode.
When active navigation is cancelled on the display, the Trolling motor will
automatically switch to Manual control mode.
152
 Note:
Increments of speed and steering are commanded by the Trolling motor
and as such the stated increments could be different or change.

10.7 Alarms and limits

Alarm conditions reported by the Trolling motor will trigger an alarm
notification on the display.
The following alarms can be triggered on the display:
• Trolling motor’s GPS fix lost.
• Over temperature.
• Over current.
• Over range. (In anchor mode, if the Trolling motor is unable to maintain
position, the Over range alarm is triggered.)
• Goto distance limit. (If a requested “Goto” is more than 1 kilometer away,
the Goto distance limit alarm is triggered.)

Trolling motor control 153

CHAPTER 11: WAYPOINTS, ROUTES AND TRACKS
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 11.1 Waypoints — page 155

• 11.2 Routes — page 159
• 11.3 Tracks — page 164
• 11.4 Sharing Waypoints, Routes and Tracks — page 165
• 11.5 Waypoint, routes and tracks capacity — page 166

154
11.1 Waypoints 5. You can select the [Group] field to select or create a waypoint group
for the new waypoint.
Waypoints are used to mark specific locations or points of interest. Waypoints 6. You can select [Options] to enter further details about the waypoint.
can be used in the Chart, Radar and Fishfinder apps. Your MFD can store up
to 10,000 waypoints which can be sorted into up to 200 waypoint groups. From the options dialog you can edit the waypoint’s symbol, name, or
You can navigate to a waypoint by selecting [Goto] from the Waypoint’s group and also enter a comment about the waypoint.
context menu.
Waypoints can be viewed and managed from the waypoint list. Placing a waypoint at a specific latitude and longitude
Waypoints can be customized when they are created or after they are In the chart app you can place a waypoint at a specific latitude and longitude.
created from the waypoint list.

Placing a waypoint using chart context menu

Waypoints can be placed in the chart app, radar app and fishfinder app from
the context menu.

1. Select and hold the desired area onscreen.

2. Select [Place waypoint] from the context menu. From the chart app:
3. Select [OK] to accept the default waypoint settings, or: 1. Select the [Menu] icon.
4. You can select a symbol to use for the waypoint. 2. Select [New].
You can either select a recent symbol from those shown, or select the 3. Select [New waypoint at lat/long].
[Symbol] field to select a symbol from the waypoint symbol lists. The Lat/long onscreen keyboard is displayed.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 155
4. Enter the coordinates for the location you want the waypoint to be placed.

By default the coordinates will be your vessel’s current location. If

required you can also switch coordinates to Loran TDs (time difference
lines) by selecting [Loran TDs].

5. Select [Save].
The waypoint details page is displayed where you can customize/edit the
following waypoint details:
• Name
• Symbol
• Group
• Position
• Comment
From the waypoint details page you can also [Delete] the waypoint,
perform a [Go to] or [View on chart]. 1. Press and release the [Waypoint/MOB] icon located at the top of MFD
app pages, or
Placing a waypoint at your vessel's location 2. Press the [Waypoint/MOB] physical button from any MFD app page, the
Homescreen or whilst a menu is open.
Waypoints can be placed at your vessel’s location from any app using the
Waypoint icon or, the waypoint physical button. The waypoint physical button 3. Select [OK] to accept the default waypoint settings, or:
can also place a waypoint at your vessel’s location from the Homescreen or 4. You can select a symbol to use for the waypoint.
when a menu is open.
You can either select a recent symbol from those shown, or select the
The waypoint/MOB physical button is available on Axiom® Pro, Axiom® 2 Pro [Symbol] field to select a symbol from the waypoint symbol lists.
display or RMK-9/RMK-10 remote keypads.
5. You can select the [Group] field to select or create a waypoint group
for the new waypoint.
6. You can select [Options] to enter further details about the waypoint.
From the options dialog you can edit the waypoint’s symbol, name, or
group and also enter a comment about the waypoint.

Waypoint management
Waypoints are managed using the Waypoint list.
The Waypoint list can be accessed from the Homescreen and from the
Chart app: [Homescreen > My data > Waypoints], or [Chart app > Menu >
Waypoints, routes, tracks > Waypoints].
156
Waypoint list
The Waypoint list is sorted into groups. Selecting a group displays a list of all
the waypoints included in that group.

1. Waypoint group / Event group — name of the waypoint or event group.

1. [Search] — search for waypoints by text or by symbol. 2. Waypoints — list of waypoints in the group.
2. ALL WAYPOINTS — view a list of all waypoints. 3. [Menu] — select to open the group pop-over menu. The following options
3. TODAYS WAYPOINTS — view all waypoints created today. are available:

4. [New group] — create a new waypoint group. • [Rename group] — rename the group

5. UNSORTED — view all waypoints not assigned to a waypoint group. • [Delete group] — delete the group and all of its waypoints.

6. [Create daily event groups] — when enabled, waypoints are automatically • [Hide on chart] / [Show on chart] — when the waypoint list is accessed
saved by day into event groups. The event group folders are named via the Chart app, this option allows you to show or hide the waypoints
using the following date formatting (YYYY/MM/DD) so that they are in the group. Hidden groups will not be displayed in the Chart app.
ordered sequentially in the list. The naming format does not change with 4. LiveView — When accessed via the Chart app, the LiveView pane is
the Date format setting of the display. displayed, which shows the waypoint on the Chart, in the context of the
7. Event groups — event groups are created automatically each day when vessel’s current location. When a waypoint is selected, the LiveView will
[Create daily event groups] is enabled. show the selected waypoint in the center of the LiveView pane.

8. [New waypoint] — create a new waypoint at your vessel’s current location. 5. [This chart: shown] / [This chart: hidden] — identifies whether the current
group is shown or hidden in the Chart app. Selecting this option will
9. Waypoint group — select to view a list of all waypoints in the group. switch between hidden and shown.
10. [Delete] — select the waypoints to be deleted. 6. [Multi-edit] — change details of more than one waypoint in the group.
Selecting a Waypoint group from the list displays a list of all waypoints in When selected, the options under the LiveView pane change and you
that group. can select the waypoints from the list that you want to edit. The following
options are available:
Group list
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 157
 • [Select all] — selects all waypoints in the group. Waypoint symbols
• [Delete selected] — deletes the selected waypoints. A range of waypoint symbols is available, enabling you to use different
symbols to represent different types of locations and objects.
• [Change symbol] — changes the symbol used for the selected
waypoints.
• [Move to another group] — moves the selected waypoints to a different
group.
7. [Sort by] — sort the waypoints in the group by either: [Name], [Date],
[Range], [Symbol] or [Comment].
8. [New waypoint] — creates a new waypoint at your vessel’s current
location.
Selecting a waypoint displays the pop-over menu. Selecting [View waypoint
details] from the pop-over menu displays details for that waypoint.
Waypoint details
When accessed via the Chart app, the waypoint details page will include the
LiveView pane, which displays the waypoints on the Chart, in the context of
the vessel’s current location.

The available symbols are grouped into different lists. The available lists are:
• General
• Fish
The waypoint’s [Name], [Symbol], [Group], [Position] and [Comment] can be • Structure
customized by selecting the relevant field. Below the LiveView pane there
are options to [Delete] the waypoint, set a [Go to], or [View on chart]. • Race marks
• First responder
158
• Nav marks

11.2 Routes
Routes are used to plan your journey in advance. You can plan your journey
directly on your MFD, or at home using software capable of exporting
Waypoints and Routes in standard .gpx format, such as Raymarine’s Seapilot
app.

1. Select and hold on the location for the first waypoint.

2. Select [Build route] from the context menu.
3. Select the location for the second waypoint.
The 2 waypoints will be joined by a line, creating the first leg of your route.
4. Select the location for subsequent waypoints.

Important:
If you place a waypoint in the wrong location you can select [Undo] at any
time to remove the last waypoint placed.
Routes consist of a number of waypoints. Your MFD can store up to 250
Routes, each Route consisting of up to 500 waypoints. The Route capacity
limit is subject to your MFD’s 10,000 Waypoint limit (for example, your MFD 5. Check your Route will be safe to follow, you can move the waypoints in
could store 20 Routes each containing 500 waypoints). your route by dragging them to a new location.
6. When your Route is complete select [Finish route build].
Creating a Route
Routes can be created on the MFD in the Chart app.
Route waypoint spacing
When creating routes the waypoints must be spaced far enough apart to
ensure the route can be navigated successfully by your vessel. Vessel
Note: speed, turning characteristics and waypoint arrival radius will all impact how
When creating routes ensure that the waypoints are farther apart than the effectively a route can be navigated.
distance specified in the waypoint arrival alarm settings. If waypoints are placed closer together than the Waypoint arrival alarm radius
then waypoints in the route may be skipped.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 159
If vessel speed is too high with closely spaced waypoints then you may pass Route highlighting
the next waypoint before the vessel can turn.
When a route is selected or being followed, the route will be highlighted
onscreen.

1. Vessel heading toward waypoint.

2. Vessel skips waypoints that are spaced too close together.
• Followed route — A route currently being followed has the current route
leg and future route legs highlighted. The highlighting is dynamic, with
highlighting removed from route legs already completed.
• Selected route — When you select a route onscreen with the cursor, the
route is highlighted to distinguish the selected route from other routes
which may be present onscreen.
Use Autorouting during route creation
Whilst building a route you can use Autorouting to automatically add a route
leg to a route you have already started to create. The Autorouting features
require compatible cartography.
1. Press and hold anywhere on screen and select either [Autoroute to wpt]
or [Autoroute to here].
Selecting [Autoroute to wpt] will allow you to select a waypoint from your
Waypoints list to include in your route, selecting [Autoroute to here] will
create a route leg to the cursor’s current position.

Once an Autoroute leg has been added you can select [Finish route build] or
add further manual or autoroute route legs.
160
Autoroute Warning: Automatic route generation
Autoroute is available when using compatible cartography. Autoroute allows • Do NOT rely on automatically generated routes to guarantee
you to build a route automatically between a point on the chart and your that the route is safe to navigate. You MUST review the
vessel. suggested route carefully and where necessary edit the
route before following it.
• If a waypoint within any automatically generated route is
added or moved the Automatic route generation algorithm
will NOT be used, extra care should be taken to ensure that
the route leg and any moved waypoints are safe to navigate.

Caution: Easy Routing - Dredged areas

The C-MAP® Easy Routing feature will ignore some hazards in
dredged areas. Easy Routing is intended for passage planning
between harbors rather than within a harbor.

Warning: Traffic separation

Automatic route generation features do not adhere to the
Traffic Separation Schemes identified in Rule 10 of the
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea 1972
You can select any point on the Chart and from the Chart context menu as amended.
select [Autoroute to here] or you can select [Autoroute to] from an existing Raymarine® therefore recommends that you do NOT use
waypoint’s context menu to create a route automatically between your vessel Automatic route generation to create any part of a route
and the chosen point. which will cross traffic lanes or pass near to traffic separation
The created route is generated by comparing data available on your lines. In these situations Automatic route generation MUST
cartography against the minimum safe distances specified in the [Boat be switched Off and the route or route leg MUST be built
details] menu: ([Homescreen > Settings > Boat details]). manually, ensuring compliance to the rules laid out in the
above regulations.
Waypoints will not be placed in areas that conflict with your specified
minimum safe distances. Caution symbols are used for waypoints that are
near objects or restricted areas.
Never follow a route before checking each route leg is safe for your vessel.

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 161

 Warning: Minimum Safe Depth, Width and Width & Height clearances
Height • Navionics® Autorouting and Dock-to-dock does not use the user defined
[Minimum safe width] or [Minimum safe height] settings when generating
Depending on cartography vendor, the [Minimum safe depth], routes. Objects with width / height constraints are marked with hazard
[Minimum safe width], and [Minimum safe height] settings that waypoint symbols, it is critical that these legs are checked to ensure that
you specify for your vessel will be used during automatic route there is sufficient clearance to avoid the hazard.
generation. These settings will ensure that automatic routes
are not generated in areas that are unsuitable for your vessel. • C-MAP® Easy Routing uses the user defined [Minimum safe width] and
[Minimum safe height] settings to determine if sufficient clearance is
Minimum safe settings are user-defined calculations. As these available. The user must apply their own safety margin as appropriate to
calculations are outside of Raymarine’s control, Raymarine current conditions. The Height datum must be checked, as it could be
will not be held liable for any damage, physical or otherwise, Mean High Water Springs (MHWS) or Highest Astronomical Tide (HAT). In
resulting from the use of the automatic route generation both cases the tide can be higher than the datum due to atmospheric
feature or the [Minimum safe depth], [Minimum safe width] or effects such as high air pressure, wind direction, etc.
[Minimum safe height] settings.
Reviewing an automatically generated route
Autoroute - compatible cartography vendors Before following any route you must ensure that it is safe to do so.
The Autoroute feature is compatible with the following cartography vendor Upon Route completion:
features.
1. Range in on each route leg and waypoint that make up the Route.
• Navionics® Autorouting. 2. Check either side of the route leg and around the waypoint for any
• Navionics® Dock-to-dock possible obstructions.
• C-MAP® Easy Routing Obstructions can be charted objects or restricted areas. Routes
Differences between automatic route generation functions
generated automatically should use the caution waypoint symbol in areas
where there are possible obstructions.
There are important differences between the way different vendors handle
automatic route generation. 3. Where obstructions exist move the necessary waypoints so that the
waypoint and route leg is no longer obstructed.
Depth clearances (Tidal height)
• Navionics® Autorouting and Dock-to-dock avoids shallow areas based Importing a route
on the user defined [Minimum safe depth] setting plus an additional You can import routes created in standard gpx format.
Navionics® safety margin. it assumes the lowest tide level, normally
Lowest Astronomical Tide (LAT). The tide can be lower than LAT due to 1. Save your route to a memory card.
atmospheric effects such as high air pressure, wind direction, etc. 2. Insert the memory card into your MFD.
• C-MAP® Easy Routing assumes that there will be some tide. The user must 3. Select Import from card from the Import/export page: [Homescreen > My
apply their own safety margin as appropriate to current conditions. Route data > Import/export > Import from card].
legs that cross areas shallower than the user defined [Minimum safe depth] 4. Locate and select the gpx file that contains your Route.
setting are marked with hazard waypoint symbols, it is critical that these The Route will be imported to your MFD.
legs are checked to ensure that there is sufficient tide to avoid the hazard.
162
Route management
Routes are managed using the Route list.
The Route list can be accessed from the Homescreen and from the Chart app:
• [Homescreen > My data > Routes]
• [Chart app > Menu > Waypoints, routes, tracks > Routes]
If the Route list is accessed from the Chart app menu, then the selected route
is displayed in the live view pane on the right of the screen.

Route list

Selecting a waypoint from the list will open the pop-over menu . From the
pop-over menu you can:
• [Follow from here] — Follow the route from the selected waypoint.
• [Edit waypoint] — edit the waypoints details.
• [Remove from route] — remove the waypoint from the route keeping the
waypoint.
• [Move up] — move the waypoint up in the route list order.
• [Move down] — move the waypoint down I the route list order.
• [Delete waypoint] — delete the waypoint.
From the route list you can [Delete] routes, create a [New route] using From the Route plan you can also :
existing waypoints or [Show/Hide] and existing route..
• navigate the route by selecting [Follow].
You can [Follow] a route or [View route plan] by selecting the relevant option
from the Route pop-over menu. • change the route direction by selecting [Reverse]. Selecting [Reverse] will
overwrite the original route, swapping the start and end waypoints so that
Route plan the route can be followed in the opposite direction. You can revert the
route to its previous direction by selection [Reverse] again.
The route plan displays a list of all waypoints in the route and when accessed
from the Chart app also includes a LiveView Chart pane showing the route’s • add an existing waypoint to the route by selecting [Add waypoint].
location. • change route options by selecting [Route options].

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 163

Route options 11.3 Tracks
Route options can be accessed from the route plan list.
Tracks are used to record where you have been. Tracks are made up of track
points that are created at regular time or distance intervals. You can store up
to 15 tracks on your display, each track can contain up to 10,000 points.
When a track reaches 10,000 points it will be saved and if there is an unused
track available a new track will be started automatically. If all tracks are used,
then when the 15th track reaches 10,000 points track recording will stop
and a notification will be displayed.
Tracks can be converted into routes so that they can be followed.

Creating a track
You can record your vessel’s journey using Tracks.

The following options are available:

• [Rename route] — rename the route.
• [Color] — change the color of the route.
• [Time] — switch between ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) and TTG (Time
To Go).
• [Speed] — switch between [Actual] (SOG) and [Planned]. When the speed
is set to planned you can select a desired speed for navigating the route.
• [Hide/show on chart] — hide or show the selected route. When hidden
the route will not be displayed in the Chart app but will still be accessible
from the Route list. 1. Select and hold on your vessel icon to display the vessel pop-over options.
2. Select [Start track].
• [Export] — export the route to a memory card.
Your vessel’s journey will now be recorded.
• [Delete route] — delete the route. 3. Select [Stop track] from the pop-over options when you have completed
your track.
4. Select [Save] to save the track or [Delete] to remove the track.
You can also start a new track recording at anytime from the Chart menu:
[Menu > New > Start a new track]. When using the Chart menu to start a
track, if a track is already recording then it will be saved before the new track
164
is started. Once a Track is saved it can be converted to a Route so that the • In [Auto] the track interval is set automatically to minimize the track points
same passage may be followed again at a later date. used whilst maintaining the actual path taken.
• When set to [Time], you can choose a specified time period between
Converting a track to a route track points.
From the Track list: [Menu > Waypoints, routes, tracks > Tracks]. • When set to [Distance] you can choose a specified distance between
1. Select a track. track points.
2. Select [Create route from track] from the pop-over options.
3. Select [OK].
Customize tracks
From the Track pop-over options you can:
Track management • rename a track
Tracks are managed using the Track list. • change track color
The Track list can be accessed from the Homescreen and from the Chart • create a route from a track
app: [Homescreen > My data > Tracks], or [Chart app > Menu > Waypoints,
routes, tracks > Tracks]. • delete a track
If the Track list is accessed from the Chart app menu, then the selected track • hide/show the track in the Chart app.
is displayed in a Chart pane on the right of the screen.

Track list 11.4 Sharing Waypoints, Routes and Tracks

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks can be shared with other devices
• MFDs connected over SeaTalkhs ® (RayNet) network will automatically
share waypoints, routes and tracks. When created on 1 MFD it is
automatically duplicated on other MFDs in the network.
• Waypoints, routes and tracks can be shared with other non-networked
MFDs and compatible devices by exporting them to a memory card
and then importing on the desired device. For details refer to:
p.105 — Import/export

Note:
• When your MFD is configured using the First responder
From the track list you can Start or Stop tracks recording, [Delete] a track
Boat activity Waypoints and Routes can be imported and
or choose how tracks are recorded.
exported over an NMEA 0183 connection and Imported over
an NMEA 2000 / SeaTalkng ® connection. For details refer to:
Track interval p.378 — Import and export waypoints and routes over NMEA networks
The track interval determines the time period or distance between track
points when recording a track. You can choose whether to record track • Waypoints, Routes and Tracks cannot be shared over wireless
points by Time, by Distance or set to Auto. connections.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 165
11.5 Waypoint, routes and tracks capacity
Waypoints, routes and tracks are subject to capacity limits. The capacity
limits for LightHouse™ 3 MFDs is shown below
• Waypoints — Your MFD can store up to 10,000 waypoints which can be
sorted into up to 200 waypoint groups
• Routes — Your MFD can store up to 250 routes, each route consisting of
up to 500 waypoints. The route capacity limit is subject to your MFD’s
10,000 Waypoint limit (for example, your MFD could store 20 routes each
containing 500 waypoints)
• Tracks — Your MFD can store up to 15 tracks, each track can contain up
to 10,000 points.

166
CHAPTER 12: SAR (SEARCH AND RESCUE) PATTERNS
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 12.1 SAR (Search and Rescue) patterns — page 168

• 12.2 Sector search pattern — page 168
• 12.3 Expanding square search pattern — page 171
• 12.4 Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern — page 173
• 12.5 Trackline search (return) pattern — page 175
• 12.6 Trackline search (non-return) pattern — page 176
• 12.7 Polygon search pattern — page 178
• 12.8 SAR pattern broadcast and receipt — page 179
• 12.9 Un-managed searches — page 180
• 12.10 Managed searches — page 182
• 12.11 Searches lists — page 188

SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 167

12.1 SAR (Search and Rescue) patterns • Parallel Line: p.173 — Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern
• Trackline (return): p.175 — Trackline search (return) pattern
Attempting to search the water for an object can be challenging, due to the
vastness of the ocean and the effects of tide. Additionally, the object you are • Trackline (non-return): p.176 — Trackline search (non-return) pattern
searching for is not normally in its last known location. • Polygon: p.178 — Polygon search pattern
SAR Patterns are routes that can help you find an object in the water. Once a search pattern is created it can be managed from the searches lists.
Different types of SAR pattern are available and can take the effects of For further information refer to: 12.11 Searches lists
current/tide into account, enabling a more accurate and consistent route to
search. SAR Patterns can be created on your MFD in the [Chart app].
Important:
Important: When they are created, SAR pattern names are automatically pre-fixed with
‘SAR-’. If the ‘SAR-’ is removed or changed from the SAR pattern name
SAR patterns are broadcast at a 0.1 nm resolution. To ensure that SAR it will no longer function as a SAR pattern (i.e.: it will not appear in the
patterns appear the same on broadcaster and recipient MFDs, the [Round searches list or be able to be broadcast or followed as a SAR pattern). The
patterns] option should be enabled in the [Responder Set up] menu renamed pattern will be treated as a normal route.
([Homescreen > Set-up > Responder Set-up]). This will ensure that SAR
patterns are rounded to the nearest 0.1 nm when they are created.
When the MFD is configured using the ‘First responder’ boating activity
profile, SAR patterns can be broadcast and received over STEDS messaging.
For more information refer to: 12.8 SAR pattern broadcast and receipt

Note:
Before attempting to follow a search pattern ensure that you have set
the waypoint arrival radius to the minimum value, otherwise the route
navigated will not follow the search pattern.

12.2 Sector search pattern

The sector search pattern is made up of 9 legs, with the 3rd, 6th and 9th leg
running past the datum. Track spacing will change depending on whether
you are with or against the drift.
Search pattern options can be accessed from the Search patterns menu
page: [Chart app > Menu > New > Search patterns].
Note:
The available search pattern types are:
As the search pattern takes drift into account, the resulting search route
• Sector Search: p.168 — Sector search pattern may not resemble the pattern shown.
• Expanding square: p.171 — Expanding square search pattern
• Creeping line: p.173 — Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern
168
 2. Select [Sector] from the [Search Pattern] options: [Menu > New > Search
pattern]
3. Set the location of the Commence Search Point (CSP) for the search
route by:
i. Manually by selecting the [Commence Search Point (CSP)] field and
inputting the coordinates for the CSP; the [Range] and [Bearing] of the
CSP from your vessel’s location is displayed.

By default and after a power cycle the coordinates shall be set to

your vessel’s current location, or if you have already created a search
pattern then the last used Commence Search Point (CSP) position is
displayed.

ii. Alternatively, set the [CSP] at your vessel’s current location by

selecting the [Location] icon located to the right of the range and
bearing details.
4. Establish set and drift by:
i. Drop your Tide marker in the water and select [Marker dropped].
ii. Wait for the Tide marker to drift through the water.
iii. Relocate to the Tide marker at its new location and select [Drifted
Creating a sector search pattern position] the [Set (Direction)] and [Drift (Speed)] will be calculated and
To create a sector search pattern follow the steps below: displayed.
iv. Alternatively, you can use your vessel’s Heading and SOG to define
the set and drift by selecting the [Set / Drift ] icon located to the right
of the set and drift data.
5. Set the [Track spacing/Radius], [Search speed] and [Leg time]:

The three variables are dependent on each other. One variable is always
the product of the other two

i. Select one of the variables by selecting the radio button (circle)

located to the right of the variable.
ii. The selected variable will be disabled and will be calculated
automatically by setting the remaining 2 variables.
6. Select [Create search route].
The Search created page is displayed shown the details of the created
search route.

1. Open the Char app.

SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 169
 Drift effects on sector search patterns
Set and drift are taken into account when creating sector search patterns.
Some examples are shown below of what impact set and drift can have on
the resulting SAR pattern.

Example sector search patterns

The search route can be immediately followed by selecting [Follow route], or

broadcast over STEDs messaging by selecting [Broadcast].
For details on broadcasting SAR patterns refer to:
p.169 — SAR pattern broadcast and receipt

1. Set (Direction): 0°, Drift (Speed): 0 Kts.

2. Set (Direction): 90°, Drift (Speed): 0 Kts.
3. Set (Direction): 0°, Drift (Speed): 0.5 Kts.
4. Set (Direction): 0°, Drift (Speed): 1.0 Kts.

170
12.3 Expanding square search pattern Creating an expanding square search pattern
To create a Expanding Square search pattern follow the steps below:
The Expanding Square search pattern is an outwards spiralling square
pattern, and is particularly suited to very detailed and methodical searches.

Note:
The Search patterns take drift into account, and therefore the resulting
route may not resemble the patterns shown.

1. Select [Expanding Square] from the [Search Pattern] options: [Chart app >
Menu > Navigate > Search patterns]
2. Set Commence Search Point (CSP)
i. Manually input the [CSP] coordinates; a [Range] and [Bearing] are
displayed to direct your vessel towards it.
ii. Alternatively, set the [CSP] as your vessel’s current location by
selecting the (1) [CSP Shortcut] button.
3. Set Drift
i. Drop the [Datum Marker] in the water and select [Marker dropped].
ii. Wait for the [Datum Marker] to drift through the water.
iii. Return to the [Datum Marker] in the new location and select [Drift
position] to calculate the [Set (Direction)] and [Drift (Speed)].
iv. Alternatively, you can use your vessel’s [Heading] and [SOG] to define
the set and drift by selecting the (2) [Set / Drift shortcut] icon.
4. Set Track spacing / Radius, Search Speed, and Leg time

[All 3 variables are dependent on each other. One variable is always the
product of the other two.]

i. Select one of the variables by selecting the (3) [Output] icon.

SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 171
 ii. The selected variable will then be calculated as a result of changes
made to the other two variables.

Variable Maximum Value

Track spacing / Radius 5 nm / 5 sm / 5 Km
Search Speed 40 Kts / 46 Mph / 74 Kph
Leg Time 59m 59s

iii. Select [Follow Route] to overlay the pattern on the Chart app and
automatically follow the route.
iv. Alternatively, select [OK] to overlay the pattern on the Chart app
without following it.
1. [CSP Shortcut]
2. [Set / Drift Shortcut]
3. [Output]
5. Set the number of legs
i. Select the number of legs for your expanding square search pattern.
6. Create search route

[After all the above steps have been completed you can create your SAR
pattern.]

i. To create a search pattern, select [Create search route] in the bottom

right of the screen.
ii. The creation page will display your SAR pattern data and its location in
the Chart app.

172
Drift effects on expanding square search patterns 12.4 Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern
As the search patterns account for tidal drift the resulting Route may not
resemble the pattern shown above. The [Creeping line search pattern] and [Parallel line search pattern] both
cover a rectangular area. A creeping line search pattern provides greater
coverage of the area but takes time to cover the whole area. A parallel line
Example expanding square search patterns search pattern can cover the same area more quickly whilst still providing
reasonable coverage.

1. Creeping line search pattern

2. Parallel line search pattern
1. Set (Direction): 0°, Drift (Speed): 0 Kts.
2. Set (Direction): 90°, Drift (Speed): 0 Kts.
3. Set (Direction): 0°, Drift (Speed): 0.5 Kts.
4. Set (Direction): 0°, Drift (Speed): 1.0 Kts.

SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 173

Creating a Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern iv. Select the [Major axis] field to set the length of the major axis search
legs.
To create a Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern follow the steps below:
v. Select the [Minor axis] field to set the length of the minor axis search
legs.
Variable Maximum Value
Track spacing / radius 5 NM / 5 sm / 5 km
Search speed 40 Kts / 46 MPH / 74 KPH
Major axis/Minor axis 20 NM / 23 sm / 37 km

1. [CSP icon]
1. Select either [Creeping line] or [Parallel line] from the [Search Pattern] 2. [Direction icon]
options: [Chart app > Menu > New > Search pattern].
Or, If you would prefer not to define the search rectangle dimensions
2. Set the [Commence Search Point (CSP)] by either: using the major and minor axis, the rectangle can be defined by setting
i. Selecting the [Commence Search Point (CSP)] coordinates field to the coordinates of each corner point instead:
enter new coordinates, or.
ii. Selecting the [CSP] icon located to the right of the coordinates to set 6. Define the search rectangle using coordinates [Define by corner points]
your vessel’s current location as the CSP. i. Select [Define by corner points].
3. Select the [Search speed] field to set the speed at which the search ii. Enter coordinates for [Corner 1], [Corner 2], [Corner 3] and [Corner 4].
should be performed.
4. Select the [Track spacing] field to set the distance between each search
leg.
5. Define the search rectangle using axes [Define by axes] :
i. Select [Define by axes] .
ii. Select the [Search orientation]/[1st leg direction] field to set the
orientation for the search pattern, or select the [Direction icon] located
to the right of the [Search orientation]/[1st leg direction] field to set
your vessel’s current heading as the orientation/direction for the
search pattern.
iii. Select the [1st turn direction] field to set whether the first turn will be to
[Port] or [Starboard].
174
 Note: Example trackline search (return) pattern
• The corner coordinates need to form a rectangle. If the coordinates are
not suitable then you will not be able to create the search route.
• The CSP must be on one of the sides of the search pattern.
• For a Creeping Line search pattern the CSP must be located along one
of the longer sides.
• For a Parallel Line search pattern the CSP must be located along one
of the shorter sides.
• The CSP must be on a bearing of between 85° to 95° (i.e. right angle ±
5°) from the previous side.
• The CSP should be half a track width from the corner point.

12.5 Trackline search (return) pattern

The [Trackline search (return)] pattern, also referred to as ‘Trackline
Single-unit Return (TSR)’, is used when the only available information is the The search pattern can also be configured to traverse the route more than
intended route of a vessel or aircraft. This type of search pattern is often twice, enabling a greater area to be searched on either side of the intended
used as an initial search effort due to speed that it can be planned and route.
implemented. Traversals are done in pairs so that the final search leg returns to the same
The [Trackline search (return)] pattern usually consists of 2 search legs, end of the intended route that the search commenced. All search legs use
one on either side of the intended route. The search pattern will follow the the same track spacing.
intended route to one side and then return on the other side. The search
legs will be parallel and be a specified distance (track spacing) apart, with the Traversal examples
intended route in the center (i.e.: The intended route will be separated from
the search legs by half the specified Track distance).

1. Intended route
2. 2 traversals (once per side)
3. 6 traversals (three times per side)
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 175
Creating a trackline search (return) pattern The available options are 2, 4 ,6, and 8.
Trackline search (return) patterns can be created from existing routes or by 9. Select [First turn:] to choose whether you want the first turn of the
creating a route using waypoints. To create a trackline search (return) pattern trackline to go to the right or the left.
follow the steps below:
1. Select [New] from the Chart app menu. This will also therefor determine the side of the route which the
2. Select [Search pattern]. Commence Search Point will be placed.
3. Select [Trackline search (return)].
10. Select [Search speed (STW):] to enter the desired speed at which the
The search pattern creation page is displayed. search should be performed.

Search speed is Speed Through the Water (STW).

11. Select [Create search route].

12. Select [OK] to save the search pattern, or [Follow] to save the search
pattern and immediately start following the route.

Selecting [Back] will return you to the search pattern creation page
without saving the search pattern.

The search pattern will be displayed using orange lines for the search legs.
The search pattern will be available in the Searches list: [Menu > Waypoints,
Routes, tracks > Routes > Searches].

12.6 Trackline search (non-return) pattern

The [Trackline search (non–return)] pattern, also referred to as ‘Trackline
4. Select [Select from route list].
Single-unit Non return (TSN)’, is used when the only available information is
5. Select the desired route from the route list. the intended route of the vessel or aircraft. This type of search pattern is
often used as an initial search effort due to speed that it can be planned
You can also select [Create new route] to create a new empty route that and implemented.
you can then add waypoints to.
The [Trackline search (Non–return)] pattern is a search pattern that follows an
6. Select [Select route] from the pop-over menu. intended route from start to finish.

You will be taken back to the search pattern creation page.

7. Select [Track spacing:] to adjust the distance between each search leg.
8. Select [Num of traversals:] and select the number of times you want the
search pattern to traverse the intended route.
176
Example trackline search (non–return) pattern Creating a trackline search (non-return) pattern
Trackline search (non-return) patterns can be created from existing routes or
by creating a route using waypoints. To create a trackline search (non-return)
pattern follow the steps below:
1. Select [New] from the Chart app menu.
2. Select [Search pattern].
3. Select [Trackline search (non-return)].
The search pattern creation page is displayed.

The search pattern can be configured to traverse the route more than once,
enabling a greater area to be searched on either side of the intended route.
When multiple traversals are required, the search pattern will return to the
end of the route that the search commenced and then follow it to the end
again. These subsequent search legs will be parallel and be a specified
distance (track spacing) from the first traversal and the intended route.
After the first traversal subsequent traversals are done in pairs so that the
final search leg finishes at the end of the intended route. 4. Select [Select from route list].
5. Select the desired route from the route list.
You can also select [Create new route] to create a new empty route that
you can then add waypoints to.

6. Select [Select route] from the pop-over menu.

You will be taken back to the search pattern creation page.

7. Select [Track spacing:] to adjust the distance between each search leg.
1. Intended route No track spacing is required for 1 traversal.
2. 1 traversal (follows intended route)
8. Select [Num of traversals:] and select the number of times you want the
3. 5 traversals (intended route plus 2 per side) search pattern to traverse the intended route.
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 177
 The available options are 1, 3 ,5, and 7. Example polygon search pattern

9. Select [First turn:] to choose whether you want the first turn of the
trackline to go to the right or the left.

No turn is required for 1 traversal.

10. Select [Search speed (STW):] to enter the desired speed at which the
search should be performed.

Search speed is Speed Through the Water (STW).

11. Select [Create search route].

12. Select [OK] to save the search pattern, or [Follow] to save the search
pattern and immediately start following the route. 1. Existing route
2. Polygon search pattern.
Selecting [Back] will return you to the search pattern creation page
without saving the search pattern.
Creating a polygon search pattern
Polygon search patterns can be created from existing routes or by creating
Note:
a route using waypoints. To create a polygon search pattern follow the
The intended route that was used to create the search pattern will be steps below:
hidden so that only the search pattern’s search legs and waypoints are 1. Select [New] from the Chart app menu.
shown onscreen.
2. Select [Search pattern].
3. Select [Polygon].
12.7 Polygon search pattern The search pattern creation page is displayed.
The [Polygon search] pattern can be used to try and locate a target as
it is drifting in a strong current. The search pattern should be created
perpendicular to the direction of drift and is used to search back and forth
‘down current’ of a search area. This search pattern can also be used in any
search situation that requires the search to follow a specified route and end
the search back at the commence search point (CSP).
The Polygon search pattern is created from an existing route and connects
the first and last waypoints in a route to create a polygon shape.

178
 12.8 SAR pattern broadcast and receipt
SAR patterns can be broadcast and received using STEDs messaging. SAR
patterns can be either managed or un-managed.

Important:
SAR patterns are broadcast at a 0.1 nm resolution. To ensure that SAR
patterns appear the same on broadcaster and recipient MFDs, the [Round
patterns to nearest 0.1 nm] option should be enabled in the [Advanced
set up] menu ([Homescreen > Settings > Responder > Advanced set up])
before the SAR pattern is created. This will ensure that SAR patterns are
rounded to the nearest 0.1 nm when they are created.

Un-managed
• When an un-managed SAR pattern is broadcast, it will be received by all
4. Select [Select from route list]. responder vessels that are using the same STEDs passphrase.
5. Select the desired route from the route list. • When an un-managed SAR pattern is received, it can be imported and
followed. Progress updates for un-managed searches will need to be
You can also select [Create new route] to create a new empty route that manually reported using STEDs messaging.
you can then add waypoints to.
Managed
6. Select [Select route] from the pop-over menu.
• When a managed SAR pattern is broadcast, it will be received by all
You will be taken back to the search pattern creation page. responder vessels that are using the same STEDs passphrase. The
broadcaster will assign themselves as Search Mission Coordinator (SMC)
7. Select [Search speed (STW):] to enter the desired speed at which the and assign a specific vessel as the Search and Rescue Unit (SRU). The
search should be performed. SMC will receive automatic progress updates from the SRU.
Search speed is Speed Through the Water (STW). • When a managed SAR pattern is received, the SRU must accept the SAR
pattern to import and initiate the managed search. The SRU will send
8. Select [Create search route]. automatic progress updates to the SMC. Non-SRU recipients will receive
the SAR pattern and can import it for awareness and monitoring purposes.
9. Select [OK] to save the search pattern, or [Follow] to save the search
pattern and immediately start following the route. The SMC will automatically receive progress updates from the SRU when
the SAR pattern is:
Selecting [Back] will return you to the search pattern creation page
without saving the search pattern. • Accepted
• Rejected
The search pattern will be displayed using orange lines for the search legs.
The search pattern will be available in the Searches list: [Menu > Waypoints, • Started (CSP reached)
Routes, tracks > Routes > Searches]. • Diverted from (started diversion away from SAR pattern)
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 179
• Resuming (ended divert and travelling back to SAR pattern). 12.9 Un-managed searches
• Resumed (reached point to resume the SAR pattern)
• Completed Broadcasting an un-managed SAR pattern
To broadcast a SAR pattern where no SMC and SRU is assigned, follow the
• Aborted.
steps below:

Hiding original SAR pattern

When a SAR pattern is broadcast it is duplicated and duplicate is pattern that
is broadcast. To avoid any confusion you can hide the original SAR pattern.

From the [All searches] list:

1. Select [Show/hide].
2. Remove the tick from the original SAR pattern.

The original SAR pattern will have a shorter name (e.g.: SAR-31), 1. Create a SAR pattern. For details refer to:
the broadcast SAR pattern will have a longer name (e.g.: p.168 — SAR (Search and Rescue) patterns
SAR-22272–923456789–00018–0365). 2. After selecting [Create search route], select [Broadcast].
3. If required, change the [Case ID].
3. Select [<] (Back arrow), or [X] (Close) to return to the [All searches] list.
The case ID will automatically increment, however it can also be assigned
manually by selecting the case ID field.

4. If required, change the [Transmission type].

Depending on AIS mode, SAR patterns can be broadcast as a [Secure] or
[Non-secure] transmission:
• In AIS restricted mode only, secure SARs can be sent.
180
 • In AIS normal mode, you can choose whether to send as secure or 2. [View inbox] — Closes the notification and opens the messages inbox so
non-secure. that you can view the related message. The search can be imported by
using the inbox message options.
• In AIS receive only mode, SAR patterns cannot be sent.
Secure broadcasts will only be received by vessels using the same STEDs 3. [Dismiss] — Selecting dismiss will close the notification. The search can
passphrase. Non-Secure broadcasts can be received by all vessels with be imported by using the inbox message options.
STEDs-compatible hardware.

5. Ensure [SMC] (Search Mission Coordinator) is disabled.

6. Select [OK].
7. Select [OK]. Once a SAR pattern is imported, it can be followed by selecting [Follow route]
The SAR pattern is broadcast. or, if the chart app is open, it can be viewed onscreen by selecting [Show
on chart]. If you select [Dismiss] the SAR pattern can be followed at a later
Existing SAR patterns can be broadcast from the searches list: [Chart app time from the searches lists.
> Menu > Waypoints, routes, track > Searches]. Select the SAR pattern and
choose [Broadcast] from the pop-over menu. For more information about SAR patterns, refer to:
p.167 — SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns
SAR pattern receipt (un-managed / not assigned as
SRU) Note:

When you receive an un-managed SAR pattern, or a managed SAR pattern When performing a search on an un-managed SAR pattern, the broadcaster
where you are not the assigned SRU, the SAR pattern can be imported and, will not receive automatic progress updates in the same way as for a
if required, followed. managed search, therefore you may be required to provide regular manual
updates using STEDs messaging.
When a SAR pattern is received, a notification is displayed onscreen.

Search pattern waypoint arrival alarm

When following a search pattern the waypoint arrival alarm will be
triggered when entering the specified arrival radius and also when passing
perpendicular to the waypoint.
The [Search route arrival radius] setting determines the radius/distance
from the waypoint that the waypoint arrival alarm is triggered. The [Search
route arrival radius] can be checked and adjusted from the [Alarms] menu:
[Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Search route arrival radius].
The waypoint arrival alarm can be configured to only trigger when the arrival
radius is reached and not when passing perpendicular by selecting [Radius
The notification provides details about the SAR pattern and the following only] from the bottom of the [Advanced ] Chart app settings menu: [Menu >
options: Settings > Advanced > Waypoint arrival (Search routes)].
1. [Import SAR Route] — Imports the SAR pattern so that it can be displayed
in the chart app.
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 181
12.10 Managed searches Secure broadcasts will only be received by vessels using the same STEDs
passphrase. Non-Secure broadcasts can be received by all vessels with
STEDs-compatible hardware.
SMC action — Broadcasting a SAR pattern
SAR patterns can be broadcast over STEDs messaging when they are 5. Ensure [SMC] (Search Mission Coordinator) is enabled.
created. Follow the steps below to broadcast a new SAR pattern. 6. Select [OK].
7. Select a contact from the [Local], [Recent] or [Buddies] list, or select [Enter
MMSI ] to enter an MMSI manually for the vessel you want to assign as
the SRU.
8. Select [Next] .
9. Select [OK].
The SAR pattern is broadcast.
Existing SAR patterns can be broadcast from the searches list: [Chart app
> Menu > Waypoints, routes, track > Searches]. Select the SAR pattern and
choose [Broadcast] from the pop-over menu.

SMC action — Instructing SRU to divert

An SMC can instruct an SRU to divert. The divert instruction provides the SRU
with the location that they should divert to. Optionally the divert instructions
can also include a point in the current search pattern that the SRU should
perform the divert from. Once the SRU has initiated the divert the SMC can
also instruct the SRU of the point in the search pattern that they should
1. Create a SAR pattern. For details refer to: resume from once the divert is complete.
p.168 — SAR (Search and Rescue) patterns
2. After selecting [Create search route], select [Broadcast]. Important:
3. If required, change the [Case ID]. SAR patterns created with the Round pattern option disabled will be
automatically rounded if they are broadcast. This means that the SMC SAR
The case ID will automatically increment, however it can also be assigned pattern may be different from the SAR pattern received by the SRU. In this
manually by selecting the case ID field. situation SMC instructed diverts may also appear in a different location. To
prevent this occurrence, ensure that the Round pattern option is enabled
4. If required, change the [Transmission type]. on the SMC system before creating the SAR pattern.
Depending on AIS mode, SAR patterns can be broadcast as a [Secure] or
[Non-secure] transmission:
Note:
• In AIS restricted mode, only secure SARs can be sent.
When a SAR pattern is broadcast it is duplicated. To access the
• In AIS normal mode, you can choose whether to send as secure or broadcasted SAR pattern’s context menu options instead of the options for
non-secure. the original SAR pattern you may need to hide the original SAR pattern. For
• In AIS receive only mode, SAR patterns cannot be sent. details refer to: p.180 — Hiding original SAR pattern
182
 2. Select the divert location.
The divert location can be set by:
• selecting a location onscreen and then selecting [Divert to here],
• selecting [Select from wpt list] and using a waypoint that has already
been created.
• selecting [Enter lat/long] and entering the coordinates for the divert
location.
3. Choose where the SRU should divert from by selecting:
• [Select Divert From point] — allows you to select a waypoint in the
search pattern that the SRU should divert from when it is reached.
• [ASAP / At discretion] — allows the SRU to decide when to perform
the divert.
4. If [Select Divert From point] has been selected choose the point along the
search pattern’s route legs or a waypoint in the search pattern and then
select [Divert From here] from the context menu.
5. Select [Send now].

SMC action — Instructing SRU to resume

When an SMC has instructed an SRU to divert and the SRU has initiated
the divert, the SMC can also instruct the SRU of a specific point where they
Note: should resume the search from.
An SMC instructed divert can only be performed once the SRU has reached
the CSP and has commenced the search. Note:
When a SAR pattern is broadcast it is duplicated. To access the
1. Select the SAR pattern onscreen to open the context menu and then broadcasted SAR pattern’s context menu options, instead of the options
select [Instruct SRU to Divert] from the pop-over options. for the original SAR pattern, you may need to hide the original SAR pattern.
For details refer to: p.180 — Hiding original SAR pattern
[Instruct SRU to Divert] can also be selected from:
• The BlueForce target icon’s context menu.
• The SMC searches list pop-over options (If the SMC searches list is
accessed from the Homescreen rather then the Chart app menu you
can only select a waypoint from the list or enter lat/long coordinates
for the divert point).
• The message’s pop-over options from the messages inbox.
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 183
 SRU SAR pattern receipt notification overview
When a SAR pattern is broadcast, that assigns your vessel as the SRU, a
notification is displayed.
The following options are available from the notification:

Note:
1. [Accept] — Imports the SAR pattern and displays the search in the All
An SMC can only specify a resume point once the SRU has initiated the searches list. The SMC will receive automatic notification confirming
divert. that you have accepted the search.
2. [Reject] — Closes the notification without importing the SAR pattern.
1. Select the SAR pattern onscreen to open the context menu and then The SMC will receive automatic notification confirming that you have
select [Instruct SRU to Resume] from the pop-over options. rejected the search.

The [Instruct SRU to Resume] option can also be selected from: 3. [View inbox] — Closes the notification and opens the messages inbox
so that you can view the related message. The search can be accepted
• The SRU BlueForce target icon’s context menu. or rejected from the inbox message’s pop-over options. No automatic
• The SMC searches list pop-over options (If the SMC searches list is notification is sent when [View inbox] is selected, and the SMC will be
accessed from the Homescreen rather than from the Chart app menu waiting for the SAR pattern to be accepted or rejected.
you can only select a waypoint from the waypoint list or enter the 4. [Dismiss] — Selecting dismiss will close the notification. The search can
lat/long coordinates for the divert point). be accepted or rejected from the inbox message’s pop-over options. No
• The message’s pop-over options from the messages inbox. automatic notification is sent when [Dismiss] is selected and the SMC will
be waiting for the SAR pattern to be accepted or rejected.
2. Choose a point along the search route or a waypoint ahead of the divert
location and then select [Resume from here] from the context menu.
3. Select [Send now].

184
SRU action — Accepting a SAR pattern The waypoint arrival alarm can be configured to only trigger when the arrival
To accept, import and start following a SAR pattern when assigned as SRU radius is reached and not when passing perpendicular by selecting [Radius
follow the steps below: only] from the bottom of the [Advanced ] Chart app settings menu: [Menu >
Settings > Advanced > Waypoint arrival (Search routes)].

SRU search controls

When performing a search as an SRU, search controls are available to help
you manage the search.

1. Select [Accept] from the onscreen notification.

Alternatively you can select [Accept search] from the related message’s
pop-over options in the messages inbox. The controls can be accessed from the search sidebar (1), the chart app
context menu (2), the searches list (3), and the Navigate menu (4).
2. Select [Follow route] from the notification.
The following options are available:
Follow route can also be selected from the All searches list and the Chart
app context menu. Divert controls
The search pattern is followed in the same way as any other route, unless a • [Divert] — This option is available when you are following the search
diversion is required. pattern. Selecting Divert allows you to record a diversion from the search.
• [End divert] — This option is available when you have diverted from the
Search pattern waypoint arrival alarm
search pattern (i.e.: once Divert has been selected). Selecting End divert
When following a search pattern the waypoint arrival alarm will be allows you to navigate back to the point at which you diverted from the
triggered when entering the specified arrival radius and also when passing search.
perpendicular to the waypoint.
• [Resume] — This option is available when you are travelling back to a
The [Search route arrival radius] setting determines the radius/distance diversion point. Selecting Resume will navigate to the next waypoint in
from the waypoint that the waypoint arrival alarm is triggered. The [Search the search.
route arrival radius] can be checked and adjusted from the [Alarms] menu:
[Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Search route arrival radius].
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 185
Other 3. Once you have completed the divert, select [End Divert].
• [Abort] — The abort option is available when you are following the search The resume search notification is displayed.
pattern. Selecting Abort will stop the route follow and abort the search.
4. Select [Follow route] to start active navigation back to the divert marker
SRU action — Diverting from a SAR pattern (the point you left the SAR pattern), or select [Dismiss] to resume the
search at a later time.
If you need to divert from a search to investigate a point or area of interest
not covered by the SAR pattern, the [Divert] and [End divert] options should
be used. This will ensure that the SMC is notified of the diversion. Note:
If you select [Dismiss], the SMC will see your status as ‘Resuming’ until you
have resumed the search. To resume the search, select [Resume] from one
of the following locations:
• The search sidebar.
• The chart app [Navigation] menu.
• The SAR pattern context menu.
• The related inbox message options.
• The waypoint options from the SAR route plan list.
The resume search notification is displayed and you can select [Follow
route] to resume active navigation of the SAR pattern from the divert
marker.

5. Once you reach the original divert marker, select [OK] on the waypoint
arrival alarm.
Active navigation of the SAR pattern will be resumed and the SMC will
1. Select [Divert]. be updated that you have resumed the search.
Active navigation of the SAR pattern will stop and a divert marker will
be placed at your vessel’s location. SRU divert as instructed — overview
Note: During a managed search, the SMC may instruct the SRU to divert from the
search pattern to investigate a point or area of interest not covered by the
At any time during a divert you can resume the search from any waypoint SAR pattern.
in the SAR pattern that is ahead of the divert marker, by selecting [Resume When an instruction to divert is received, a notification is displayed onscreen
from here] from the waypoint’s context menu. Active navigation of the SAR and a “Divert to” marker is shown in the Chart app.
pattern will resume from the chosen waypoint.
The SMC may also include instructions of the position within the search
pattern to divert from. In this situation, a corresponding “divert from here”
2. Perform manual navigation or perform other active navigation such as a marker will be shown in the Chart app. If no “Divert From here” marker was
[Goto] to navigate to the point or area of interest. included, the divert should take place ASAP, but at the SRU’s discretion.
186
 SRU action — Diverting as instructed by SMC
Below is an example of SRU actions for an instructed divert that includes both
“Divert To” and “Divert From” markers.

1. SMC divert notification — From the notification you can [View inbox] or
[Dismiss] the notification.
2. “Divert From here” marker — If a “Divert From here” marker is included
in the instruction, when the marker is reached the waypoint arrival alarm
is displayed. Select [Divert now] and active navigation to the “Divert
To here” marker will commence. 1. Select [Dismiss] from the divert notification.
3. “Divert To here” marker — When the “Divert To here” marker is reached, 2. When the “Divert From here” marker is reached, select [Divert now] from
select [End divert] from the context menu and then [Follow route] from the waypoint arrival notification.
the notification to resume the search from the “Divert From here” marker. Active navigation will commence to the “Divert To here” marker.
3. Once the divert is complete, select [OK] on the waypoint arrival notification
and then select [End divert] from the chart context menu.
4. Select [Follow route] from the notification.
Active navigation will commence back to the “Divert From here” marker.
5. Select [OK] on the waypoint arrival alarm.
Active navigation of the search pattern will recommence.

SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 187

SRU action — Resuming from SMC instructed point All searches list
During an SMC instructed divert, the SMC may instruct you to resume from
a different location in the SAR pattern than the point you originally diverted
from.

1. Select [Resume Now] from the notification.

A “Resume here” marker is displayed, and active navigation will
commence to the waypoint.
2. Once the “Resume here” marker is reached, select [OK] on the waypoint 1. The [All searches] tab contains a list of all broadcast and received SAR
arrival notification. patterns.
Active navigation of the search pattern will recommence. 2. The [SMC searches] tab contains only managed searches where your
vessel is the SMC.
3. The status field identifies the status of received managed searches
12.11 Searches lists where your vessel is the SRU. SAR patterns that have been created on
your system will not have a status.
SAR patterns are managed from the searches lists. 4. The link ID field shows the relevant STEDs messaging link ID number.
The searches list can be accessed from the Chart app menu: [Menu 5. You can hide/show SAR patterns in the chart app by selecting the icon.
> Waypoints, routes, tracks > Searches], or from the My Data menu:
[Homescreen > My data > Searches]. When accessed from the chart app, the 6. Shows examples of SAR patterns either created on your system (which
LiveView pane will be displayed and the [Show on chart] options are available. have not been broadcast), or patterns that have been received as an
un-managed SAR pattern.
7. Shows examples of managed SAR patterns that have been broadcast by
your vessel. To see search status, view the SMC searches list.
8. Shows example of a received SAR pattern where your vessel has been
assigned as the SRU. The status field will identify your progress.
9. The SAR pattern pop-over menu provides SAR options and SRU SAR
controls.
188
SMC searches list Search history
The SMC searches list contains only managed searches where your vessel Each event (e.g.: “Started”, “Divert”, “Resume” etc.) of a managed search is
is the SMC. recorded. The search history can be accessed from the searches list.
The SMC searches list will identify the SRU, status, link ID and case ID for
each managed search broadcast by your vessel.

The SMC can cancel a broadcast SAR pattern from the SMC searches list by Each event in the history list can be selected to display more details about
selecting [Cancel] from the SAR pattern pop-over menu. The cancellation each event.
is automatically broadcast.

SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns 189

CHAPTER 13: CHART APP - GENERAL
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 13.1 Chart app chapters — page 191

• 13.2 Chart app overview — page 191
• 13.3 Cartography overview — page 202
• 13.4 LightHouse charts — page 203
• 13.5 S-63 Encrypted Charts — page 206
• 13.6 Navigation — page 210
• 13.7 Rudder bar indicator — page 218
• 13.8 Depths and contours — page 218
• 13.9 Target tracking — page 223
• 13.10 Collision avoidance — page 230
• 13.11 Target intercept — page 238
• 13.12 Reeds almanac — page 239
• 13.13 Find nearest — page 239
• 13.14 Measure — page 241
• 13.15 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality — page 242
• 13.16 Chart settings menu — page 243

190
13.1 Chart app chapters Below is an overview of features available in the chart app. Some features
may not be available in all chart modes. If a required setting option or feature
This document includes a chart app chapter for each of the available chart is not available, try changing the chart mode.
modes. The Chart app – general chapter provides details of features and
functions common to all chart app modes.
To view details about chart mode specific features and settings refer to the
relevant chart app chapter:
• p.252 — Chart app - Navigate mode
• p.254 — Chart app - Fishing chart mode
• p.257 — Chart app - Fish mapping mode
• p.262 — Chart app - Weather mode
• p.275 — Chart app - Tides mode
• p.281 — Chart app - Anchor mode
• p.286 — Chart app - Racing mode

13.2 Chart app overview

The chart app displays a representation of your vessel in relation to land
masses and other charted objects, which enables you to plan and navigate to
your desired destination. The Chart app requires a GNSS (GPS) position fix in
order to display your vessel at the correct location on a world map. For the 1. Sidebar — The Sidebar contains system data that can be viewed in all
chart app to recognise vessel direction, a heading sensor is recommended. If apps.
heading data is not available, a stable source of Course Over Ground (COG)
data may be used instead. 2. Waypoint — Use waypoints to mark specific locations or points of
interest (POI).
The chart app uses chart modes to configure the chart screen and settings
for the relevant activity. For details on available chart modes, refer to: 3. Track — Record the passage your vessel takes.
p.196 — Chart modes 4. Wind indicator — Provides indication of wind direction and speed (Wind
For each instance of the chart app, you can select which chart mode and transducer required).
which electronic cartography you want to use. The selection will be saved 5. Tide indicator — Provides tide Set and Drift indicators. Requires the
and persist over a power cycle. following data: COG (Course Over Ground), Heading, SOG (Speed Over
The chart app can be displayed in both fullscreen and splitscreen page Ground), and STW (Speed Through Water).
layouts. A single App page may consist of up to 4 instances of the chart app. 6. Range rings — Provides a distance indication around your vessel at set
If you are underway and using a chart mode that is not suitable for navigation, intervals.
it is recommended that you create a splitscreen app page and use navigate 7. Destination waypoint — During a Goto operation, this is the current
mode in one of the splitscreen panes. destination waypoint.
Chart app - General 191
8. Chart range — Identifies the scale for the displayed Chart range. 7. Range out — Select to zoom out and show a larger area onscreen.
9. Route — You can plan your route in advance by creating a Route using 8. Range in — Select to zoom in and show a smaller area onscreen.
Waypoints to mark each route leg.
10. Vessel icon — This icon represents your vessel, and is only displayed Chart app simulator
when a GNSS (GPS) position fix is available. The icon will be a black dot
if no Heading is available. When using a demo profile, navigation can be simulated in the Chart app.
11. COG line — If COG data is available, you can display a COG (Course
Over Ground) vector for your vessel. Note:
12. Heading line — If Heading data is available, a Heading vector for your • When a demo profile is active, all data will be simulated by the MFD.
vessel can be displayed.
• Alarms raised by real sensor data will not be triggered.

Chart app onscreen controls • Demo profiles should NOT be used whilst navigating.
Onscreen controls are available which are overlaid in fixed positions • Any networked MFDs will also switch to demo mode.
onscreen.
You can perform a [Goto], [Follow] a route, or navigate manually using the
onscreen controls. The onscreen controls can only be accessed using the
touchscreen.

1. Home — Select to return to the Homescreen.

2. Waypoint / MOB — Select to place a waypoint at your vessel’s location,
or press and hold to activate Man overboard (MOB) alarm.
3. Find vessel — Select to center the vessel icon on the screen. Only
displayed when the vessel is not centred.
4. Stop Nav — Select to end active navigation (i.e.; goto or route follow).
Only shown during active navigation.
5. Pilot — Select to open the Pilot sidebar. Only displayed when autopilot
1. When a demo profile is active, a “Simulated data” message will flash at
integration is enabled.
the top of the screen.
6. Menu — Select to open the Chart app menu.
192
2. You can move the boat symbol to any location using the context menu. The following options are provided:
To do this, use the touchscreen to tap and hold at the required location
on the chart, and then select [More options] and [Move boat here].
3. Select the [Demo] button to adjust the simulated speed of the boat
symbol.
4. Press the [Left arrow] button to change the heading to port in 1°
increments, or tap and hold to keep incrementing.
5. Press the [Time] button to increase the speed of the simulation, or tap
and hold to keep increasing the simulation speed.
6. Press the [Right arrow] button to change the heading to starboard in 1°
increments, or tap and hold to increment continuously.

Chart ranging and panning

You can change the range displayed in the Chart app using the onscreen LAYERS
Range controls or by using the pinch-to-zoom touch gesture. • [AIS] — Switches AIS layer on and off.
You can pan the chart area by swiping your finger across the chart. When the • [AIS PAD zone] — Switches display of Predicted Area of Danger (PAD)
chart is panned the Chart app will enter cursor mode and remain fixed until zones on or off for AIS targets.
motion mode is activated by select the [Find ship] icon.
• [Radar] — Switches Radar layer on or off.
• [Radar PAD zone] — Switches display of Predicted Area of Danger (PAD)
Quick adjust menu zones on or off for Radar targets.
The Chart app includes a [Quick adjust] menu which provides quick access
to some common [Layer], [Vectors] and [View] options, as well as [Recent] • [Radar PAD zone] — Switches display of Predicted Area of Danger (PAD)
waypoints and routes. zones on or off for Radar targets.
• [Reference] — Switches Radar reference mode between [True] and
Note: [Relative].
[Quick adjust] can only be accessed using the touchscreen. • [Period] — Adjust the vector time period.
VECTORS
The [Quick adjust] menu is accessed by selecting the [Quick adjust] icon • [Heading] — Switches own vessel Heading vector on or off.
located in the bottom left corner of the screen. • [COG] — Switches own vessel COG vector on or off.
The [Quick adjust] menu is available in the following Chart modes: VIEW
• [Navigate] • [Orientation] — Changes the Chart app’s Orientation mode.
• [Fishing] • [Waypoints] — Shows or hides all waypoints. Selecting the “3 dots” icon
• [Anchor] displays the Waypoint list.
• [Racing] • [Routes] — Shows or hides all routes. Selecting the “3 dots” icon displays
AIS and Radar options will only be available if compatible hardware is the Routes list.
detected. RECENTS
Chart app - General 193
• Up to 6 recently used routes and/or waypoints can be listed. Selecting an
item in the Recents list will close the menu and zoom to and highlight the
selected item on the Chart app screen.

Context menu
The Context menu provides menu options relevant to the cursor location or
selected object.

1. AIS data — The following AIS data is displayed:

• Vessel name.
• CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of
Approach).
• Course (COG or relative course).
• Speed (SOG or relative speed).
Press and hold on a location or object to open the context menu. Alternatively 2. [View AIS data] — View full page AIS data report.
highlight the location or object and press the physical [OK] button. 3. [Infobox] — Enable and disable onscreen display of AIS data next to the
The context menu provides Latitude, longitude, range and bearing details target symbol.
for the selected location or object. 4. [Intercept] — Enable and disable target interception.
Selecting [More options] will show further available options. 5. [More options] — View further options.
6. [X] (close) — Close the context menu.
AIS target context menu 7. [<] (back arrow) — Go back to first context menu.
When an AIS target is selected in the Chart app, the AIS target context menu 8. [Acquire target] — Acquire the AIS target as a Radar target.
is displayed.
9. [Chart info] — View details of any nearby objects.
The AIS target context menu includes the following information and settings:
10. [Place waypoint] — Create a new waypoint at the target’s current location.
11. [Goto] — Perform a goto.
194
12. [Build route] — Create a route. • CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of
13. [Measure] — Use or remove the ruler tool. Approach).
14. [Find nearest] — Search for nearby point of interest. • Course (COG or relative course).
15. [Track with camera] — Track the target with a compatible PTZ (Pan Tilt • Speed (SOG or relative speed).
Zoom) camera. 2. [Cancel target] — Delete the selected Radar target.
16. [Vector] — Enable and disable target vectors. 3. [Target info] — Enable and disable onscreen display of data next to the
target symbol.
17. [Buddy] — Add or remove target from Buddy list.
4. [Infobox] — Enable and disable onscreen display of AIS data next to the
First responder
target symbol.
When the display is configured using the First Responder activity, the
following additional data and options will be available: 5. [Intercept] — Enable and disable target interception.
6. [More options] — View further options.
• AIS data — Boat type, Status, Bearing, Range, Intcpt (Intercept time).
7. [X] (close) — Close the context menu.
• [Designate TOI].
8. [<] (back arrow) — Go back to previous context menu.
• [Send message].
9. [Acquire target] — Acquire the AIS target as a Radar target.
Radar target context menu 10. [Chart info] — View details of any nearby objects.
When an acquired Radar target is selected in the Chart app, the Radar target 11. [Place waypoint] — Create a new waypoint at the target’s current location.
context menu is displayed. 12. [Goto] — Perform a goto.
The Radar target context menu includes the following information and 13. [Build route] — Create a route.
settings: 14. [Measure] — Use or remove the ruler tool.
15. [Find nearest] — Search for nearby point of interest.
16. [Track with camera] — Track the target with a compatible PTZ (Pan Tilt
Zoom) camera.
First responder
When the display is configured using the First Responder activity, the
following additional data and options will be available:
• AIS data — Boat type, Status, Bearing, Range, Intcpt (Intercept time).
• [Designate TOI].
• [Send message].

Selecting cartography
Appropriate cartography must be used for navigation. If desired you can
select a different cartography for each instance of the chart app. The
selected cartography will be remembered the next time that chart app
1. Target data — The following data is displayed: instance is opened. If no cartography is detected the [Chart app] will default
Chart app - General 195
to Lighthouse Charts basemap. The first time a chart app instance is opened Chart modes
if multiple cartography is detected the app will default to using LightHouse™
charts. The Chart app provides preset modes that can be used to quickly set up
the Chart app for your intended use.

Important:
Note:
Basemaps should not be used for navigation.
The example images below are used when the Homescreen icons are set
to [Classic icons]. If Homescreen icons are set to [Mode icons] then the
icons used on the Homescreen will be used instead. For details of Mode
icon refer to: p.89 — Chart app

To change Chart mode select the required mode from the app menu.

From the Chart app menu:

1. Select the [Settings] icon.
2. Select the cartography that you want to use from the [Cartography] tab.
The following chart modes are available:
The menu will automatically close and the chart app will refresh to display
your selected cartography.

196
 current predictions over a 24 hour period. For details refer to:
p.275 — Chart app - Tides mode
6. [RACING] — Racing mode optimizes the chart app for Race Sailing.
Racing mode is available when the MFD is configured using the Sailing
boat activity. In racing mode the race start line and race timer options
are available from the menu, allowing you to create a start line and
countdown timer which can help optimize your racing start. For details
refer to: p.286 — Chart app - Racing mode
7. [FISHMAPPING] — Fish mapping mode enables you to overlay
fish mapping layers and fish types directly on the chart. Settings
changes are saved to the user profile in use. Fish mapping mode is
available when the MFD is connected to an SR200 Sirius receiver and
requires a SiriusXM fish mapping subscription. For details refer to:
p.257 — Chart app - Fish mapping mode

Vessel icon
1. [NAVIGATE] — Navigate is the default mode. Full chart detail and menu The vessel icon is used to show your vessel’s current GNSS position.
options are available. Settings changes are saved to the user profile in The vessel icon can be changed from the [Boat details] settings menu:
use. For details refer to: p.252 — Chart app - Detailed mode [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Boat type].
2. [FISHING CHART] — Fishing mode optimizes the chart app for
Fishing and if supported by your selected cartography, displays more Chart motion mode
detailed contour lines. Full menu options are available. Settings
changes are saved to the user profile in use. For details refer to: The [chart motion] setting controls the relationship between the chart and
p.254 — Chart app - Fishing chart mode you vessel.
3. [ANCHOR] — Anchor mode optimizes the chart app for anchoring and 3 chart motion modes are available:
provides access to the anchoring wizard so that the anchor drag alarm
parameters can be configured. Full menu options are available in Anchor
mode, and any settings changes are saved to the user profile in use. For
details refer to: p.281 — Chart app - Anchor mode
4. [WEATHER] — Weather mode allows you to overlay weather data directly
on the chart and view animated weather graphics or read weather
reports. Settings changes are saved to the user profile in use. Weather
mode is available when the MFD is connected to a SR150 or SR200 Sirius
receiver. and requires a SiriusXM weather subscription. For details refer
to: p.262 — Chart app – Weather mode
5. [TIDES] — In tides mode, tide station and current station icons are
replaced with graphics representing tide and current conditions.
Animation controls are displayed that enable playback of tide and
Chart app - General 197
 Chart orientation
The orientation setting determines how the chart is orientated in relation to
you vessel’s direction of travel.
The following chart orientations are available:

1. [Relative motion] — Relative Motion mode fixes your vessel’s icon position
and the chart image moves relative to your vessel. In Relative Motion
mode you can use the [Boat position] setting to determine whether the
vessel is fixed in the Center of the chart display or has a Partial offset, or
Full offset. Selecting the partial or full offset has the effect of increasing 1. [North-up] — The chart is orientated so that true north is always upward
the view ahead of your vessel icon on the chart display. on the screen. As your vessel changes direction, vessel icon rotates
2. [True motion] — True Motion mode fixes the chart position and the vessel accordingly to show your relative position to true north North up is the
icon moves in true perspective to the fixed land masses shown on the default chart orientation.
screen. As the vessel’s position approaches the edge of the screen, 2. [Course-up] — The chart is orientated so as to show your current course
the chart image is automatically redrawn to reveal the area ahead of directly ahead of your vessel icon. The chart will rotate so that your COG
the vessel. is always upward on the screen.
3. [Head-up] — In Head-up mode the vessel’s heading always points directly
Note: True Motion mode is not available when the Radar orientation up. As your heading changes the chart rotates accordingly. In Head-up
is set to “Head-up”. mode if heading data is not available then stable COG is used instead.
If heading or COG is not available then Head-up mode is suspended
and the chart will orientate to display 0 degrees directly up if there is no
3. [Auto range] — Auto Range mode ensures that the largest possible chart active navigation or Course-up if there is active navigation.
scale will always and automatically be maintained, to display both the
vessel and the target waypoint on-screen at the same time.
Boat position in not available in [True motion] or [Auto range] modes..
The [Chart motion] and [Boat position] options are available from the [View &
Motion] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > View & Motion].
198
 Note: Vessel details
• To prevent constant rotations as the vessel yaws the chart will not The vessel details pop-over provides access to vessel-related settings.
update unless the heading changes by at least 10 degrees from the
last displayed orientation.
• Head-up mode is not available when chart motion is set to [True
motion].

The [Chart orientation] setting is available from the [View & Motion] settings
menu: [Menu > Settings > View & Motion].

From the vessel details pop-over you can:

• Start or stop recording a track by selecting [Start/track] / [Stop track].
• Change the vessel symbol’s position by selecting a [Boat position] option.

Chart app - General 199

• Change the symbol used to represent your vessel by selecting a [Boat Vessel detail option changes are saved for each chart mode in the current
symbol] option. chart app instance.
• Show or hide vessel heading vector line by ticking or unticking the
[Heading] tick box. By default the heading vector length is determined Fuel range
using STW (Speed Through Water) received from a speed transducer, you
can use SOG instead by enabling the [Use SOG for hdg vector length ] A fuel range ring is available in the Chart app which indicates the maximum
from the [Advanced settings] menu: [Menu > Settings > Advanced]. range that can be achieved travelling in a straight line.
• Show or hide vessel COG vector line by ticking or unticking the [COG] The indicated range is an estimate based on data received from your engine
tick box. management system, or from the LightHouse™ Fuel manager. The range is an
approximate value only, and does not take into account conditions such as
• Use infinite or reference period line length for vectors by ticking or sea state, wind. or tidal currents. The fuel range ring provides an estimate
unticking the [Infinite vectors] tick box. only, and should not be relied upon for accurate navigation.
• Set the length of vectors when not using [Infinite vectors] by selecting
The [Fuel range] ring is enabled and disabled from the [Vessel details]
a [Reference period] option. Vector length is measured in minutes and
pop-over menu.
shows your expected position after the selected time has elapsed.
• Show or hide range rings around your vessel by ticking or unticking the
[Rng rings] tick box.
• Show or hide the tide vector graphic by ticking or unticking the [Tide] tick
box.
• Show or hide the wind vector graphic by ticking or unticking the [Wind]
tick box.
• Show or hide layline graphics by ticking or unticking the [Laylines] tick box.
The Laylines option is only available when your MFD has been configured
using the [Sailing] boat activity.
• Show or hide the [Fuel range] ring.

Note:
In weather mode and fishmapping mode the only option available is
[Start/track] / [Stop track].

Chart mode specific behavior

Depending on chart mode some options are enabled by default:
• Tides mode — Heading, COG and Tide.
1. [Fuel range] ring option in the [Vessel details] pop-over menu.
• Anchor mode — COG, Tide and Wind.
2. Fuel range ring.
• Racing mode — Heading, COG, Tide, Wind and Laylines.
3. A Fuel symbol is placed at the point where your vessel’s current heading
• Navigate mode — Laylines when your MFD has been configured using the
and your estimated fuel range intersect.
[Sailing] boat activity.
200
 Note: Full chart information
When the vessel is close to either the North or South poles, the circle
cannot be drawn above or below the chart area limits, and will instead
appear as an arc.

Charted objects
Charted objects can be selected and information about the object can be
viewed.

When the cursor is over a charted object it will change to the

Object cursor.

Cursor info box

More detailed chart information can be viewed by selecting [Chart info] from
the context menu. The detailed information can be viewed regardless of
whether the [Chart info boxes] setting is enabled or disabled.

Chart layers
Layers (additional data and views) can be overlaid on the Chart app.
Some layers and views are dependent on connected hardware and
cartography type and vendor.

When an object is highlighted the cursor info box will be displayed which
provides details about the object. Selecting the info box will show the object
details on a fullscreen page.
The [Cursor info boxes] can be disabled from the [Advanced] settings menu:
[Menu > Settings > Advanced > Cursor info boxes:].
Chart app - General 201
 13.3 Cartography overview
The Chart app includes a basic world base map. To use the Chart app for
navigation purposes, compatible, detailed Electronic Navigational Charts
(ENC) or Raster Navigational Charts (RNC) are required.
• Raster Navigational Chart (RNC) — A Raster chart is a digital image of
a paper chart, and therefore the available information is limited to the
information available on the equivalent paper chart.
• Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) — ENCs are Vector based charts and
include information that is not available on paper or Raster charts. Objects
and features on Vector charts can be selected to obtain information that
otherwise would not be readily available. Chart objects and features can
also be enabled and disabled, or customized.

Note:
Layers can be enabled and disabled from the [Layers] settings menu: [Menu • The level of detail and features available on charts vary depending on
> Settings > Layers]. vendor, chart type, subscription level and geographic region. Prior to
purchasing charts, check the vendor’s website to establish what level of
For details of the available layers and related settings refer to:
detail is available on the charts you want to purchase.
p.244 — Layers settings menu
• The information relating to available chart detail and settings in this
manual should be treated as guidance only, as it is subject to change,
Camera tracking which is not under Raymarine’s control.
When connected to a compatible Pan and Tilt Thermal camera you can track
targets or point your camera at a specific target or area.
2 options are available for camera tracking: The Chart app range scale will affect the level of detail shown onscreen.
Generally, more detail is available at lower ranges. The chart scale in use is
• [Point camera here] — Points the camera at a specific point onscreen, the
indicated by the scale indicator, the value displayed is the distance that the
camera will remain pointed at this area regardless of your own vessel’s
range scale line represents onscreen.
course.
• [Track with camera] — Tracks a selected target regardless of your own You can remove and insert chart cards at any time. The MFD will automatically
vessel’s or target’s course. detect compatible chart cards and you will be asked if you want to change
your current selection.
Camera tracking options are available from the Context menu in the Chart
and Radar apps: [Context menu > more options > Point camera here], or For chart card selection details, refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
[Context menu > more options > Track with camera]. Different cartography types can be viewed simultaneously using an app page
that includes multiple instances of the Chart app.
Automatic tracking
You can use the Camera app settings to configure automatic tracking for AIS,
Radar and MoB targets: [Camera app > Menu > Settings > Camera motion
> AUTO TRACKING]
202
Supported cartography vendors • Imray — (For details visit https://www.imray.com/
You MFD supports cartography from the vendors listed below.
Note:
For assistance using these charts, refer to the chart vendor.

End-User License Agreements (EULAs)

The EULAs for third-party electronic charts are available via the following
links:
1. Next generation LightHouse™ charts
• LightHouse charts: — LightHouse Navigation Charts EULA 84231-3-EN.pdf
2. Retired LightHouse™ vector, raster and NC2 charts
3. S-63 encrypted charts • Navionics charts: https://www.navionics.com/usa/la
4. Navionics charts • CMAP charts: https://www.c-map.com/legal/terms-and-conditions-eula
5. C-Map
Caution: Care of chart and memory cards
Refer to the Raymarine website for the latest list of available LightHouse™
charts www.raymarine.com/marine-charts/ To avoid irreparable damage to and / or loss of data from
chart and memory cards:
To check the currently supported Navionics charts please visit
www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it • Ensure that chart and memory cards are fitted the correct
To check the currently supported C-MAP® chart please visit: www.c-map.com way around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.
• DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or
Third-party raster charts pliers to insert or remove a chart or memory card.
Raster navigational charts from the following third-party vendors are
• Ensure correct memory card ejection procedure is carried
supported.
out before removing the chart or memory card from the
card reader.
Note:
Raster charts are created by scanning paper charts; each segment of the
paper chart is turned into a digital image. The detail available on raster
charts is therefore limited to the detail on the paper chart it was created 13.4 LightHouse charts
from. Raster charts do not offer the dynamic content that is typically
available on vector-based electronic charts. LightHouse™ charts is the brand name for Raymarine’s electronic navigation
charts. LightHouse™ charts can include a Premium subscription, which adds
new and enhanced features on a regular basis.
• Standard mapping — USA only.(For details, visit: https://www.standard-
map.com/)
Note:
• CMOR Mapping — USA only.(For details, visit: https://www.cmormap-
ping.com/) Legacy LightHouse™ Vector, Raster and NC2 charts have now been
• Strike Lines Charts — USA only.(For details, visit: https://strikelines.com/) discontinued and can no longer be downloaded or updated.
Chart app - General 203
New LightHouse™ charts come with a free 1 year subscription to LightHouse™
Premium. The Premium subscription unlocks data-rich points of interest (POI),
high-resolution satellite aerial overlays and regular chart updates. After the
free subscription period ends, the Premium features can be continued for an
annual fee.
LightHouse™ charts can be purchased directly from the LightHouse™ Chart
Store. Alternatively, they can be purchased from Raymarine dealers, as either
a pre-loaded chart card or a blank chart card that includes a voucher that can
be redeemed from the Chart Store.
To find out more about available regions and the latest features, visit the
LightHouse™ Chart Store: https://chartstore.raymarine.com/lighthouse-charts

LightHouse Chart Store

LightHouse™ charts can be purchased from the LightHouse™ Chart Store,
which can be accessed from a personal computer (PC) or from a mobile
device via the Raymarine app.
You must have a Chart Store account and be logged in to the account before
you can purchase charts in the Chart Store. This account can be created
during the checkout process if required.

Important: Download packages containing Charts for larger regions (such

as North America, Northern Europe, and Australia/NZ) and also those
Pre-loaded LightHouse Chart Cards
including satellite photos, consist of very large files, which can take a long LightHouse™ charts are also available pre-loaded on MicroSD cards. Simply
time (possibly several hours) to download via a mobile device and the insert the card into your MFD’s card reader to start using.
Raymarine app. When purchasing these larger download packages, it is
recommended that you download the Charts from the Chart Store via a Note:
web browser on a laptop or PC. For more information on this procedure, New regions are added all the time, check with your local Raymarine dealer
refer to: p.205 — Downloading Charts from the Chart Store for the latest available regions.

The Chart Store can be accessed using the following link: • North America LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794).
https://chartstore.raymarine.com/lighthouse-charts
• Australia/New Zealand LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number:
R70794–AUS / R70794–ANZ).
• Denmark LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–DEN).
• Finland LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–FIN).
• France LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–FRA).
• Germany LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–GER).
204
• Greece LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–GRE). Redeeming chart voucher
• Great Britain & Ireland LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: If you have purchased a download chart card with a voucher code then the
R70794–IGB). voucher is redeemed from the LightHouse™ chart store.
• Italy LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–ITA). 1. Go to the LightHouse™ chart store: https://chartstore.raymarine.com/light-
house-charts
• Netherlands LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number:
R70794–NED). 2. Click [Redeem].
3. Create a new account, or login to your existing account.
• Norway LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–NOR).
4. Enter your voucher code and click [Submit].
• Portugal LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–POR). 5. Click [View charts] from the voucher accepted page.
• Spain LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–SPA). 6. Select the required region.
• Sweden LightHouse™ preloaded chart card (part number: R70794–SWE). 7. If your voucher entitles you to a second region click [Pick 2nd chart] and
then select your second region.
• Blank 32 GB MicroSD card for LightHouse™ Charts (part number: R70838).
8. Click [Done].
Your selected region(s) will now be available in [MY CHARTS].
Hybrid LightHouse charts
LightHouse™ version 4.1.75 and LightHouse™ Sport version 3.17 (for Element™) Downloading charts from My Charts
operating system updates include a new hybrid chart engine which provides
improved performance for supported LightHouse™ charts. From September Once redeemed charts can be downloaded from the MY Charts area of the
2022 new LightHouse™ chart regions will start to be available which will LightHouse™ charts store.
include support for the new hybrid chart engine. 1. Log in to your account.
The following charts will include support for the hybrid chart engine: 2. Go to the [MY CHARTS] area.
3. Expand the Download options for the region(s) you want to download.
• North America Region (part number: R70794).
4. If updates are available click [Get latest data].
• Western Europe region (part number: R70794–WEU).
5. If you have a valid Premium subscription add the [Streets & POI] and
• Northern Europe Region (part number: R70794–NEU). [Aerial photos] that you want to include.
• Mediterranean Region (part number: R70794–MED). When adding [Streets & Points of Interest] and [Aerial photos] you can
• France (part number: R70794–FRA). create up to 5 area boxes for each feature per purchased region. Follow
the onscreen instructions to define each area of coverage.
• Australia/New Zealand (part number: R70794–AUS / R70794–ANZ).
6. Click [Download].
Note: 7. If you have more than 1 region you can group them together by selecting
New regions are added all the time, check with your local Raymarine dealer the relevant grouping option.
for the latest available regions.
Grouping allows you to minimize download file size, by grouping up to 3
regions, from the same continent together.

8. Check the SD card requirements.

Chart app - General 205
 Important: Important:
A blank chart card purchased from a Raymarine dealer will already be Ensure that the folder contains only 1 file.
in the correct format.

17. The memory card can now be inserted into your MFD.
9. Click [CONTINUE].
10. Check unique ID file.
13.5 S-63 Encrypted Charts
Important:
A blank chart card purchased from a Raymarine dealer will already include S-63 is an International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) standard for
the unique ID file. encrypting, securing and compressing electronic navigational chart (ENC)
data. When correctly configured with a valid S-63 MFD activation file, your
MFD can utilize S-63 Encrypted Charts.
11. Click [CONTINUE]. Advantages of using S-63 encrypted charts include:
12. Check ‘LightHouse_charts’ folder
• Assured authenticity of chart data.
• Regular updates.
Important:
A blank chart card purchased from a Raymarine dealer will already include For more information on S-63 Encrypted Charts, refer to: https://iho.int/en/
the ‘LightHouse_charts’ folder.
S-63 Encrypted Charts installation process
13. Click [CONTINUE]. Unlike electronic cartography from other vendors, S-63 Encrypted Charts
14. Click [Browse to file] and locate the Lighthouse_id.txt file in the root require you to complete an installation procedure.
directory of the chart card.
15. Click [CONTINUE]. Note:
The download package will now be prepared and downloaded to your The recommended installation process requires up to 3 memory cards, and
computer. your MFD requires more than one available card reader slot. For MFDs that
have only one internal card reader slot, an external card reader such as the
Note: RCR-SDUSB or RCR-2 is required.
• Depending on files size and connection speed the package preparation
and download may take some time, click [receive email notification] to 1. MFD hardware activation. Refer to:
get an email when the package is ready to be downloaded. p.207 — Obtaining an S-63 MFD activation file
• If the download does not start automatically once the package has been 2. Copy user permit(s) file from MFD. Refer to:
prepared click [Download]. p.208 — Copying user permit file(s) to memory card
3. Purchase and download charts (requires user permit file). Refer to:
16. Locate the downloaded file and copy to the Lighthouse_charts folder p.208 — Purchasing S-63 Encrypted Charts
on your SD card.
206
4. Install base cell files and cell permits file. Refer to: Example
p.208 — Installing base cells and cell permits
5. Install Cumulative update files and if received, new cell permits file. Refer
to: p.209 — Installing cumulative updates

Important:
• The memory card that the charts are installed on must be present in the
MFD’s card reader for the installed charts to be used.
• After installation, it is recommended that the memory cards containing
the base cells and cumulative updates are kept onboard your vessel so
that if the need arises they can be reinstalled easily.

Obtaining an S-63 MFD activation file

An S-63 MFD activation file must be installed on your MFD to display and
enable the use of S-63 Encrypted Charts on your MFD. Without the S-63 • A — Product name
MFD activation file installed S-63 chart selection and related settings will
not be available. • B — Product number
• C — Serial number
Note: 2. Contact your Raymarine dealer or Raymarine technical support and supply
An S-63 MFD activation file will be required for each MFD you want to them with the above information to obtain an S-63 MFD activation file.
be able to view S-63 encrypted charts on. S-63 encrypted charts are not You will be sent an S-63 MFD activation file specific for your MFD.
shared with other MFD’s on the same network. 3. Copy the received file to a blank / empty MicroSD card.
4. Insert the MicroSD card into the memory card reader slot of your MFD.
1. Identify your MFD’s product name, product number and serial number. After a few seconds the MFD will detect and install the file. A notification
is displayed onscreen when the installation is completed successfully.
The required information can be found on the [Getting started] settings The MFD will now be able to select S–63 Encrypted Charts and display them
menu and the Network settings menu:[Homescreen > Settings > Getting in the Chart app. Related settings will also be available.
started.], [Homescreen > Settings > Network] or from the physical product
label. Scheme administrator certificate
S-63 Encrypted Charts require a valid scheme administrator (SA) certificate.
A current SA certificate is provided with the LightHouse™ 3 and LightHouse™
4operating systems. Access to the SA certificate is provided when the S-63
MFD activation file is installed on your MFD.
The installed SA certificate is valid for a predetermined period of time after
which it will expire. It is also possible for the IHO to issue a new certificate
for security reasons.
Chart app - General 207
When the SA Certificate expires an ‘SSE-22’ notification is displayed on your 5. Download the Cells permits file.
MFD and the SA certificate will require updating before you can update or 6. Download the Base cell file (this is typically a compressed ‘zip’ file).
buy new S-63 Encrypted Charts.
7. Download the Cumulative update file (this is typically a compressed ‘zip’
If the scheme administrator issues a new certificate then an ‘SSE-06’ file).
notification is displayed on your MFD and the SA certificate will require
updating before you can update or buy new S-63 Encrypted Charts.
Important:
Updated SA certificate can be obtained from the IHO website:
https://iho.int/en/. Currently available on the following page: S-63 Encrypted Charts are locked to the MFD specified in the user permit
https://iho.int/en/enc-data-protection file that you supplied to the chart vendor. If you have purchased charts
You can replace the SA Certificate installed on your MFD from the SA for multiple MFDs (i.e. you supplied user permits to more than one MFD),
certificate tab: [Chart app > Menu > Settings > Cartography > S-63 Settings > you must ensure that you split the received cell permit files between the
SA security certificate > Update SA security certificate]. MFDs accordingly.

Copying user permit file(s) to memory card Installing base cells and cell permits
When purchasing S–63 Encrypted Charts the vendor will require the user
permit file(s) for the MFDs you want to use the charts on. When purchasing S-63 Encrypted Charts for the first time and as part of
regular updates base cells and cell permits require installation before they
1. Insert a MicroSD card into your MFD’s card reader. can be used. The base cell files contain the cartographic data and the cell
2. Open the [Cartography] settings tab in the Chart app: [Chart app > Menu permits are used to authorize the use of the base cell files.
> Settings > Cartography].
Typically the base cell files and their related cell permits are updated twice a
3. Select [S-63 Settings].
year.
4. Select the [User permit] tab.
5. Select [Save user permits to a file].
Note:
6. Select the card slot that you inserted the memory card into.
7. Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog. • Base cell files and the cell permits file must be installed before any
8. Safely eject the memory card from your display using the Shortcuts page available cumulative update files.
[Eject SD card] option. • It is recommended that base cell files, cumulative update files and the
The S-63 user permit file must be sent to the chart vendor during the resulting installed chart files are all stored on separate memory cards,
purchase process. e.g.:
– Card 1 = Base cell files and the cell permits file.
Purchasing S-63 Encrypted Charts – Card 2 = Cumulative update files and if applicable the cell permits file.
The process below describes a typical purchasing procedure; however, each
– Card 3 = Installed charts (location that base cell files, cell permits file
vendor’s process may differ slightly.
and cumulative update files are installed).
1. Create an account on the vendor’s website.
2. Login to the account.
3. Select the chart regions you wish to purchase.
4. Send your MFD’s user permits file to the chart vendor (this may be part
of the checkout process).
208
 Note: Note:
If you receive ‘SSE’ messages during the base cell installation, proceed The installation process will create and store chart data in 2 folders on your
with the cumulative update installation and this should resolve the errors. If memory card: ‘senc’ and ‘seapilot’, Overwriting, deleting or altering these
errors persist after the cumulative update installation contact Raymarine folders or data within them will render your charts inoperable.
product support for resolution..

Installing cumulative updates

1. Unzip the downloaded base cell file, using the ‘Extract all’ option of your
PC’s zip file application. When purchasing S-63 Encrypted Charts for the first time and as part of
regular updates any available cumulative updates require installation. The
This ensures that the base cell files are created within a folder named the cumulative update files contain updated cartographic data.
same as the original zip file. Typically cumulative update files are made available fortnightly on the
vendor’s web server.
2. Copy the folder and all contents to the root directory of your memory card.
3. Copy the received cell permits file to the root directory of the same
memory card. Note:
4. Insert the memory card into your MFD’s card reader. • Cumulative update files should be installed after the installation of base
5. Open the Chart app’s [Cartography] selection tab: [Chart app > Menu cell files.
> Settings > Cartography]. • If a new cell permits file is received, this must be installed with the
6. Select [Update S-63 charts]. cumulative update.
7. Select the card reader that contains the base cell files and cell permits file. • It is recommended that base cell files, cumulative update files and the
resulting installed chart files are all stored on separate memory cards,
The card will be scanned for valid files and permits, this process can take e.g.:
some time. Once complete a list of available chart cells is displayed.
– Card 1 = Base cell and the cell permits file.
8. Select [Select all], or select individual cells. – Card 2 = Cumulative update files and if applicable the new cell permits
9. Select [Update selected charts] to install all base cells. file.
10. Select the card reader slot where you want the files to be installed. – Card 3 = Installed charts (location that base cell files, cell permits file
and cumulative update files are installed).
Important:
The same ‘Installed charts’ card and memory card slot MUST be used to
install and update base cell files and cumulative update files.
Important:
If your chart vendor does not supply cumulative update files then updates
11. Wait for the installation to complete. must be installed separately and in release date order.

A progress bar is displayed as the base cells are installed.

1. Unzip the downloaded cumulative update file, using the ‘Extract all’ option
12. Select [OK] on the successfully imported notification. of your PC’s zip file application.
Chart app - General 209
 This ensures that the cumulative update files are created within a folder Note:
named the same as the original zip file.
If errors persist after the installation of cumulative update files contact
2. Copy the folder and all contents to the root directory of your memory card. Raymarine product support for resolution..
3. If required, copy the new cell permits file to the root directory of the
same memory card.
Warning: Expired S-63 Encrypted Charts
4. Insert the memory card into your MFD’s card reader.
S-63 Encrypted Chart cells expire after a set period of time.
5. Open the Chart app’s [Cartography] selection tab: [Chart app > Menu Once expired the charts must not be used for navigation. You
> Settings > Cartography]. will be notified onscreen of the expiration. The charts must be
6. Select [Update S-63 charts]. updated before they can be used for navigation.
7. Select the card reader that contains the cumulative update files and if
applicable, the new cell permits file.
S-63 Encrypted Chart settings
The card will be scanned for updates, this process can take some time. With the S-63 MFD activation file installed the S-63 Encrypted Charts related
Once complete the list of installed base cells is displayed and any cells settings are available on the Cartography settings tab.
that have updates available will be automatically selected.
• [Update S-63 charts] — This option is used to decrypt your purchased S-63
8. Select [Update selected charts] to install all base cells. Encrypted Chart data so that they can be displayed on the MFD.
9. Select the card reader slot where you want the files to be installed. • [View installed S-63 charts] — View a table of all currently installed chart
cells
Important: • [S-63 settings] — Access the following S-63 related settings:
The same ‘Installed charts’ card and memory card slot MUST be used to – [SD card] — Choose external storage location used for the Installed
install and update base cell files and cumulative update files. charts.
– [User permit] — View and save user permits to file,
10. Wait for the installation to complete. – [SA security certificate] — View and update installed SA certificate.
A progress bar is displayed as the base cells are installed.

11. Select [OK] on the successfully imported notification. 13.6 Navigation

Note:
Warning: Maintain a permanent watch
Always maintain a permanent watch, this will allow you to
The installation process will create and store chart data in 2 folders on your respond to situations as they develop. Failure to maintain a
‘Installed charts’ memory card: ‘senc’ and ‘seapilot’, Overwriting, deleting or permanent watch puts yourself, your vessel and others at
altering these folders or data within them will render your charts inoperable. serious risk of harm.

210
 Warning: Autopilot usage Navigating to a waypoint or point of interest (manual
steering)
Autopilots navigate a preset course and do NOT respond
to hazards automatically. The operator must remain at the You can navigate to a waypoint or a point of interest by performing a [Goto].
helm at all times and be ready to avoid hazards and warn When performing a [Goto] active navigation will commence which guides
passengers of course changes. you to a selected destination.
Follow the steps below to perform a [Goto] using manual steering:
Cross Track Error (XTE)
Cross Track Error (XTE) occurs when your vessel is steered or drifts off its
intended course. The distance between your intended course and your
actual position is the Cross track error (XTE).

1. Select and hold on the waypoint or point of interest and select [Goto]
from the context menu.
2. Manually navigate to the selected destination.
The [Off track] alarm can be used to warn you if your vessel reaches a
3. The waypoint arrival alarm will trigger when your vessel reaches the
specified distance from your intended course. The Off track alarm can be
waypoint arrival radius.
configured from the Alarms manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Off track].
When a cross track error exists you can either steer your vessel back on to its The Waypoint arrival radius can be set from the Alarms manager:
intended course or you can use the [Restart XTE] option to zero the XTE value [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Arrival radius].
and use a new course from your current position as the intended course.
If the Waypoint arrival alarm is disabled then no notification will be
Select [Restart XTE] from the Navigation menu: [Menu > Navigation > Restart triggered.
XTE] to restart your XTE..
4. Select [OK] on the waypoint arrival notification.
5. Select the [Stop Nav] onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or
select [Stop] from the context menu or [Navigation] menu to end active
navigation.
Chart app - General 211
You can also navigate to a waypoint from the [Go] menu: [Menu > Go > 2. If required, engage the mechanical drive by either engaging the wheel
Waypoint] or you can navigate to a specified latitude and longitude from the drive’s clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller pin.
[Go] menu: [Menu > Go > Lat/long]. 3. Select the [Pilot] icon located at the top of the screen.
You can end active navigation at any time by selecting the [Stop Nav] 4. Select [Steer to Nav] from the Pilot sidebar.
onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or selecting [Stop] from the 5. Select [Engage pilot].
context menu or [Navigation] menu.
Your vessel will turn and navigate to the selected point.
For more information on waypoints and waypoint management refer to: 11.1
6. The waypoint arrival alarm will trigger when your vessel reaches the
Waypoints
Waypoint arrival radius (pilot in track mode).

Navigating to a waypoint or point of interest (autopilot) The waypoint [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] can be set from the
You can navigate to a waypoint or a point of interest by performing a [Goto]. Alarms manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Arrival radius (pilot
When autopilot integration is enabled, performing a [Goto] will commence in track mode)]. The [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] overrides the
active navigation which will guide you to a selected destination and controls standard [Arrival radius] notification.
will be available to engage your autopilot.
7. Select [Disengage pilot] from the notification and then [Disengage pilot]
Follow the steps below to perform a [Goto] using autopilot steering: from the pop-over.
8. Alternatively, select [Maintain Hdg] from the notification and then [Engage
pilot] from the pop-over to maintain a locked heading on the current
course.
9. Select the [Stop Nav] onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or
select [Stop] from the context menu or [Navigation] menu to end active
navigation.
You can end active navigation at any time by selecting the [Stop Nav]
onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or selecting [Stop] from the
context menu or [Navigation] menu.
For more information on waypoints and waypoint management refer to: 11.1
Waypoints

Following a Route (manual steering)

Once a route is created or imported it can be navigated by performing a
[Follow route]. When performing a [Follow route] active navigation will
commence which guides you through each route leg to the route’s final
waypoint.

Important:

1. Select and hold on the waypoint or point of interest and select [Goto] It is the captain’s responsibility to ensure a route is safe to navigate before
from the context menu. commencing the follow.
212
Follow the steps below to perform a [Follow route] using manual steering: • Select [From this waypoint] to commence active navigation from the
selected waypoint.

Note:
• The [Reverse route direction] option allows you to permanently reverse
the route (i.e.: switch the start and end waypoint) so that the route can
be followed in the opposite direction. To reverse the route select the
check box and then choose either the desired options to commence
active navigation.
• If the selected waypoint is part of more than 1 route then the Route list
will be displayed so that you can choose which route you want to follow.

4. Manually navigate the route leg to the indicated waypoint.

5. The waypoint arrival alarm will trigger when your vessel reaches the
waypoint arrival radius.

The Waypoint arrival radius can be set from the Alarms manager:
1. Select and hold on any route leg (the line drawn between the each of [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Arrival radius].
the route’s waypoints). If the Waypoint arrival alarm is disabled then no notification will be
2. Select [Follow Route] from the context menu. triggered.
You can also select one of the route waypoints and select [more options] 6. Select [OK] to begin active navigation to the next waypoint in the route.
and then [Follow route]. 7. Follow steps 4, 5 and 6 above for all waypoint in the route.
8. Select the [Stop Nav] onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or
Note: select [Stop] from the context menu or [Navigation] menu to end active
If you select the first waypoint in a route then the next step is skipped and navigation.
active navigation commences immediately. You can end active navigation at any time by selecting the [Stop Nav]
onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or selecting [Stop] from the
context menu or [Navigation] menu.
3. Select the desired follow option from the Follow route notification:
For more information on routes and route management refer to: 11.2 Routes
• Select [From Start] to commence active navigation from the first
waypoint in the route.
• Select [From next waypoint] to commence active navigation from the
next waypoint after the selected route leg.

Chart app - General 213

Following a Route (autopilot) 1. Select and hold on any route leg (the line drawn between each of the
route’s waypoints).
Once a route is created or imported it can be navigated by performing a
[Follow route]. When autopilot integration is enabled, performing a follow 2. Select [Follow Route] from the context menu.
route will commence active navigation which guides you through each route You can also select one of the route’s waypoints and select [more
leg to the route’s final waypoint. Options will also be available to control options] and then [Follow route].
your autopilot.
Note:
Important:
If you select the first waypoint in a route then the next step is skipped and
It is the captain’s responsibility to ensure a route is safe to navigate before active navigation commences immediately.
commencing the follow.

3. Select the desired follow option from the Follow route notification:
Follow the steps below to perform a [Follow route] using autopilot steering:
• Select [From Start] to commence active navigation from the first
waypoint in the route.
• Select [From next waypoint] to commence active navigation from the
next waypoint after the selected route leg.
• Select [From this waypoint] to commence active navigation from the
selected waypoint.

Note:
• The [Reverse route direction] option allows you to permanently reverse
the route (i.e.: switch the start and end waypoint) so that the route can
be followed in the opposite direction. To reverse the route select the
check box and then choose either the desired options to commence
active navigation.
• If the selected waypoint is part of more than 1 route then the Route list
will be displayed so that you can choose which route you want to follow.

4. If required, engage the mechanical drive by either engaging the wheel

drive’s clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller pin.
5. Select the [Pilot] icon located at the top of the screen.
6. Select [Steer to Nav] from the Pilot sidebar.
7. Select [Engage pilot].
Your vessel will turn and navigate to the indicated waypoint.
8. The waypoint arrival alarm will trigger when your vessel reaches the
Waypoint arrival radius (pilot in track mode).
214
 The waypoint [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] can be set from the
Alarms manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Arrival radius (pilot
in track mode)]. The [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] overrides the
standard [Arrival radius] notification.

9. Select [Turn to waypoint] to begin active navigation to the next waypoint

in the route.
10. Follow steps 8 and 9 above until you reach the last waypoint in the route.
11. Select [Disengage pilot] from the notification and then [Disengage pilot]
from the pop-over.
12. Alternatively, select [Maintain Hdg] from the notification and then [Engage
pilot] from the pop-over to maintain a locked heading on the current
course.
13. Select the [Stop Nav] onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or
select [Stop] from the context menu or [Navigation] menu to end active Configuration
navigation.
• [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] — The automatic turning to waypoint
You can end active navigation at any time by selecting the [Stop Nav]
notification is displayed when your vessel reaches the specified distance
onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or selecting [Stop] from the
from the current active waypoint.
context menu or [Navigation] menu.
For more information on routes and route management refer to: 11.2 Routes • [Automatically turn to next waypoint] — When this option is enabled, your
vessel automatically turns to the next waypoint in a route.
Automatic turning • [Audible warning at automatic-turns] — When this option is enabled, the
MFD will sound an audible beep as the countdown reaches zero.
Automatic turning enables Evolution™ autopilots to automatically turn to the
next waypoint in a route. When the current waypoint arrival radius has been • [Automatic turn timeout] — Determines the length of the countdown timer.
reached a countdown will commence, and when it reaches zero the vessel If the waypoint arrival alarm is enabled, the Automatic turning to waypoint
will automatically turn toward the next waypoint. notification is used.
The Automatic turning feature requires your Evolution autopilot to be
running software version 3.14 or later. Automatic turning to waypoint notification example

Note:
Waypoints must be farther apart than the [Arrival radius (pilot in track
mode)] distance.

Automatic turning is disabled by default. Automatic turning can be enabled

and configured from the [Autopilot] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Select [Disengage pilot] from the turning to waypoint notification to disengage
Autopilot > Automatically turn to next waypoint]. the autopilot and prevent the vessel from automatically turning.
During active navigation, Automatic turning can also be enabled and disabled If the waypoint arrival alarm is disabled, the brief automatic turning notification
from the [Navigation] menu: [Menu > Navigation > Auto. turn]. is displayed instead of the full turning to waypoint notification.
Chart app - General 215
Automatic turning notification example For further details on route waypoint spacing, refer to:
p.159 — Route waypoint spacing

Following a Route using automatic turning

Once a route is created or imported it can be navigated by performing a
[Follow route]. When autopilot integration and automatic turning are enabled,
performing a follow route will provide the option to engage the autopilot and
commence active navigation which will guide you through each route leg and
To prevent the vessel from automatically turning, select [Disengage pilot]. turn the vessel automatically when each waypoint is reached.

Automatic turning limits exceeded

Important:
When following a route using automatic turning, route waypoints must be
spaced farther apart than the distance specified in the waypoint [Arrival It is the captain’s responsibility to ensure a route is safe to navigate before
radius (pilot in track mode)] alarm. If the next waypoint in a route is present commencing the follow.
within the arrival radius, the Exceeding recommended automatic turn limit
warning is displayed.
Follow the steps below to perform a [Follow route] using automatic turning.

1. Warning within the Automatic turning to waypoint notification.

2. Warning within the Automatic turning notification.

Important:
When the warning is displayed you should take manual control of your
vessel to navigate the route, otherwise waypoints in the route that are
too close together will be skipped.
216
 • Select [From next waypoint] to commence active navigation from the
next waypoint after the selected route leg.
• Select [From this waypoint] to commence active navigation from the
selected waypoint.

Note:
• The [Reverse route direction] option allows you to permanently reverse
the route (i.e.: switch the start and end waypoint) so that the route can
be followed in the opposite direction. To reverse the route select the
check box and then choose either the desired options to commence
active navigation.
• If the selected waypoint is part of more than 1 route then the Route list
will be displayed so that you can choose which route you want to follow.

4. If required, engage the mechanical drive by either engaging the wheel

drive’s clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller pin.
5. Select the [Pilot] icon located at the top of the screen.
6. Select [Steer to Nav] from the Pilot sidebar.
7. Select [Engage pilot].
Your vessel will turn and navigate to the indicated waypoint.
8. The waypoint arrival alarm will trigger when your vessel reaches the
Waypoint arrival radius (pilot in track mode) and a countdown will
commence.
1. Select and hold on any route leg (the line drawn between the each of
If the [Waypoint arrival] alarm is disabled then the Auto turn toast
the route’s waypoints).
notification is displayed instead of the Auto turn waypoint arrival
2. Select [Follow Route] from the context menu. notification.
You can also select one of the route’s waypoints and select [more The waypoint [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] can be set from the
options] and then [Follow route]. Alarms manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Arrival radius (pilot
in track mode)]. The [Arrival radius (pilot in track mode)] overrides the
Note: standard [Arrival radius] notification.
If you select the first waypoint in a route then the next step is skipped and
active navigation commences immediately. Important:
When the auto turn countdown reaches zero your vessel will automatically
3. Select the desired follow option from the Follow route notification: turn towards the next waypoint. NO user action or confirmation is required.
• Select [From Start] to commence active navigation from the first
waypoint in the route. 9. Repeat step 8 until the last waypoint in the route is reached.
Chart app - General 217
10. Select [Disengage pilot] from the notification. 13.8 Depths and contours
11. Select the [Stop Nav] onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or
select [Stop] from the context menu or [Navigation] menu to end active Depth soundings
navigation.
Water depth measurements displayed on charts are called Depth soundings.
You can end active navigation at any time by selecting the [Stop Nav]
onscreen icon located at the top of the screen or selecting [Stop] from the Usually Depth soundings are shown using major and minor units, with minor
context menu or [Navigation] menu. units being smaller and subscript e.g.: Depending on units of measure ‘15’
would mean 1.5 metres, 1 Fathom and 5 feet or 1.5 feet.
For more information on routes and route management refer to: 11.2 Routes
Raster charts
On Raster charts the units of measure the used for Depth soundings is fixed.
13.7 Rudder bar indicator The display of Depth soundings is also fixed and will only change depending
on Chart app range scale.
The rudder bar indicator is used to show a graphical representation of
rudder angle that can be displayed at the bottom of the screen in the chart
app. The rudder bar indicator is available in Navigate, Racing, Anchor and Vector charts
Fishing chart modes. On Vector charts Depth soundings will use the units of measure specified for
depth in the MFD’s settings: [Homescreen > Settings > Units > Depth units:].
Depth sounding values appear differently onscreen:

Example LightHouse™ Charts Depth soundings

The rudder bar indicator requires rudder angle data to be transmitted to the
display using NMEA 2000 PGN 127245.
The rudder bar indicator is enabled and disabled from the Layers chart menu:
[Menu ][Layers ][Rudder bar].
The rudder bar is disabled by default and must be enabled individually for
each chart mode and Chart app page instance.
The Wind shift bar and Rudder bar cannot be displayed at the same time.
When one is enabled the other will be disabled.

1. Bold depth soundings — Depth soundings displayed in Bold reflect

depths shallower than the specified Safety contour depth.
218
2. White outlined depth soundings — Depth soundings displayed with Note:
a white (‘Halo’) outline reflect depths that are the same as the Safety
contour depth. The Depth contours option does not affect the contour fill color.

3. Gray depth soundings — Depth soundings displayed in Gray reflect

depths deeper than the specified Safety contour depth. Example LightHouse™ Charts Depth contours
On Vector charts Depth soundings can be customized from the [Depths]
settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Depths > Show soundings.]
The following Depth soundings options are available:
• [None] — No Depth soundings are displayed unless they are linked to a
depth contour.
• [Manual] — Depth soundings are only shown from zero to the depth
specified in the [Zero to:] option.
• [All] — All Depth soundings are displayed.
When [Show soundings] is set to [All] all depth soundings will be displayed.

Depth contours
Depth contours, also known as bathymetric contours or depth curves, are
lines drawn on cartography that connect points of equal depth creating a
visualization of underwater bottom structure. Contours use color fills to 1. Shallow contour — Depths from zero to the depth specified in the
indicate depth in relation to other contours. [Shallow contour] setting will be within the Shallow contour. By default,
the Shallow contour uses the darkest shade of blue.
Raster charts 2. Safety contour — Depths from the [Shallow contour] to the depth
On Raster charts, depth contours are fixed and are always displayed. specified in the [Safety contour] setting will be within the Safety contour.
The Safety contour uses a thicker line than other contour lines and is
Vector charts colored using a medium shade of blue.

On Vector charts, depth contours can be customized from the [Depths] Important: The Safety contour should be set to the same value as your
settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Depths > Show contours.]. vessel’s [Minimum safe depth] and should be used to identify areas
Depth contours include Depth soundings. The Depth contour soundings are where you should not take your vessel.
differentiated from other Depth soundings by using a white outline.
The following Depth contour options are available: 3. Depth contour — All Depth contours consist of a line and depth
• [None] — No Depth contour lines or depth contour soundings are displayed. soundings that appear along the line.
4. Deep contour — Depths from the [Safety contour] to the depth specified
• [Manual] — Depth contours are only shown from zero to the depth specified
in the [Deep contour] setting will be within the Deep contour. By default,
in the [Zero to:] option.
the Deep contour uses the lightest shade of blue. By default, depths
• [All] — All Depth contours are displayed. greater than the Deep contour will be colored white.
Chart app - General 219
Shallow contour, Safety contour and Deep contour values can be customized 1. Shallow area — When the [Shallow area] feature is enabled all depths
from the [Depths] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Depths]. from zero to the depth specified in the [Zero to:] setting will use red cross
hatching to identify shallow areas.
Depth gradient 2. Depth contour — All depth contours are identified using a line and a
By default, the color gradient used for depth contours is [Dark to Light], as blue color fill gradient.
described in the example above. If required, the [Depth gradient] can be 3. Deep contour — All depths deeper than the depth specified in the [Deep
changed to [Light to Dark], which will invert the colors so that white is used contour:] setting is colored white by default.
for the Shallow contour, and the darkest shade of blue is used for depths
Deep water color
deeper then the Deep contour value.
The color used for the Deep contour can be set to either white or blue. When
The Depth gradient can be changed from the [Depths] settings menu: [Menu set to blue the Deep water contour will use the lightest shade of blue.
> Settings > Depths].
The depth contour settings can be accessed -from the [Depths] settings
menu: [Menu > Settings > Depths ].
Note:
C-MAP depth contours
Charts from different cartography vendors will handle depth contours
differently. When using C-MAP® charts depth contours are automatically colored using
a blue color gradient with the shallowest contour using the darkest shade
and the deepest using white.
Navionics depth contours
Example C-MAP® Charts Depth contours
When using Navionics® charts depth contours are automatically colored
using a blue color gradient with the shallowest contour using the darkest
shade and the deepest using white.

Example Navionics® Charts Depth contours

1. Depth contours — All depth contours are identified using a line and
a blue color fill.
2. Deep contour — All depths deeper than the depth specified in the [Deep
contour:] setting is colored white by default.
220
Deep water color • Distance between waterline and your transducer (item 3 in the below
illustration).
The color used for the Deep contour can be set to either white or blue.
When set to blue the color fill shading is switched so that the Deep water
contour will use the darkest shade of blue and the blue fill will get lighter
the shallower the contour.
The depth contour settings can be accessed -from the [Depths] settings
menu: [Menu > Settings > Depths ].

RealBathy™ depth contours

Raymarine’s RealBathy™ feature allows you to record bathymetry data and
create your own depth contours.
When using the RealBathy™ feature, new contour lines are drawn in realtime
on the screen based on your transducer’s depth readings. Color shading 1. Waterline.
is used to reflect contour depths. The bathymetry data is recorded to the 2. Water depth below transducer face.
inserted memory card.
3. Distance above the bottom face of your depth transducer to the waterline.
Creating RealBathy™ depth contours
RealBathy™ depth contours can be created in realtime as you travel.

RealBathy™ requirements
RealBathy™ requires the following:
From the Chart app:
• LightHouse™ vector based charts.
1. Select LightHouse charts from the [Cartography] menu: [Menu > Settings
• MicroSD card with sufficient free space to record the bathymetry data. > Cartography].
Chart app - General 221
2. Open the [Depths] settings menu: [Menu > Depths]. SonarChart™ Live
3. Select the [Waterline to tdcr] field and enter the distance between the You can create personal bathymetry charts using your depth transducer and
waterline and the bottom face of your transducer. the SonarChart™ Live feature, available with compatible Navionics® electronic
4. Select the [Save to] field and choose the card reader slot that you inserted cartography cards.
you memory card into.
5. Enable the [Record depth data] toggle switch.
Note: Before using SonarChart™ Live ensure you have correctly configured
6. Select [OK] on the notification. your transducer depth settings.
Depth and position data will be logged to the selected memory card slot
whenever a card with sufficient space is inserted. Chart data will not be
overwritten. When using SonarChart™ Live, new contour lines are drawn in real time on
the screen based on your transducer’s depth readings. Color shading is used
to reflect depth, with dark red signifying the shallowest area. The sonar data
Note: is recorded to your cartography card and is shared with Navionics when
Recording depths is restricted by law in some countries (Sweden, Finland, you update your chart card online.
Norway, China. Please check online to see if restrictions apply for your
location. Tide correction
SonarChart™ Live records the actual readings from your depth transducer
7. Enable the [RealBathy] toggle switch. under current tide / water level conditions. You can enable automatic
The bathymetry data will be displayed onscreen in realtime. adjustment of depth readings based on normalized low tide / low water level
depth data taken from a nearby Tide station.
8. Select the [Height correction] field and choose an option.
• [None] — No corrections are made. SonarChart™ Live
• [Tidal] — In tidal environments (for example, seas and oceans) select Navionics SonarChart™ Live feature allows you to record bathymetry data and
[Tidal] and then a list of available stations is displayed, select the closest create your own depth contours.. SonarChart™ Live requires compatible
tide station to your location. Navionics® electronic cartography. SonarChart Live is available without an
active subscription.
• [Lake level] — In fresh water environments (for example, lakes),
select [Lake level] and then enter the current reading from the water When using the SonarChart™ live feature, new contour lines are drawn in
level marker for your location into the field located under the height realtime on the screen based on your transducer’s depth readings. Color
correction field. shading is used to reflect contour depths. The bathymetry data is recorded to
your Navionics chart card. Bathymetry data can be uploaded to the Navionics
9. Adjust the [Visibility:] setting to the desired transparency. website so that the contours can be shared.
100% provides full visibility of the RealBathy contours; as the percentage
decreases the chart detail behind the RealBathy contours becomes more
visible.

10. Select the required [Density:] setting.

Steep drop-offs can result in overlapping contour lines; lowering the

density in these situations provides a clearer contour.
222
 The following targets can only be tracked when the MFD has been configured
using the First responder boating activity during the initial MFD start up
wizard:
• DSC targets — Vessels sending out a DSC distress call can be tracked.For
details on DSC targets, refer to: p.371 — DSC targets
• Intel targets — Targets can be created manually by entering the target’s
position, course and speed. Intel targets can be tracked. For details on
Intel targets, refer to: p.369 — Intel targets
• TOIs — Targets can be designated as “Targets Of Interest” (TOI).For details
on TOIs, refer to: p.372 — Target Of Interest (TOI)

Related topics:
• p.253 — Navigate mode main menu
• p.255 — Fishing chart mode main menu
• p.286 — Racing mode main menu
Note:
Ensure you have correctly configured your transducer depth settings.
AIS target tracking
AIS targets
13.9 Target tracking When your MFD is connected to an AIS receiver or AIS transceiver AIS
The MFD is able to track and display various types of targets to improve equipped vessels can be displayed as AIS targets in the Chart app and Radar
situational awareness and collision avoidance. The types of targets which can apps. Different icons are used to represent different types of AIS target.
be tracked are dependent on connected hardware and MFD configuration. By default the following icons are used:
The following types of targets can be tracked:
• AIS targets — When a compatible AIS receiver or AIS transceiver is
connected AIS targets can be tracked. For details on AIS targets refer
to: AIS targets
• Radar targets — When a compatible Radar scanner is connected Radar
targets can be tracked. For details on Radar targets refer to: Radar settings
Targets that are being tracked are displayed onscreen in the Chart app and
Radar app using representative icons and are listed in relevant target lists.
The target lists can be accessed by selecting [Targets] from the Radar app
and Chart app menu: [Menu > Targets ], and then selecting the relevant tab.
First responder specific target tracking
Chart app - General 223
AIS icons Enhanced AIS icons
Vessel SART (Search Sailing Vessel Commercial
and Rescue
Transponder) /
MOB (Man Over
Board) / EPIRB
(Emergency
Position
Indicating Radio
Beacon) High speed Cargo vessel
vessel / Wing
Land-based ATON In Ground vessel
station

Passenger Other
vessel
SAR (Search and Virtual ATON
Rescue)

Enhanced AIS icons are scaled or outlined according to the reported size of
the vessel, as shown below:
You can enable enhanced AIS target icons from the [AIS Settings] menu:
[Menu > Targets > AIS Settings > Enhanced AIS targets]or the [Advanced] Relative length
settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Advanced > Enhanced AIS targets]. When (Gray outline)
Enhanced AIS targets is enabled the Enhanced AIS icons are used.

The status of an AIS target is shown using different colors, outlines and
flashing as shown below:

224
AIS target status Lost SART / MOB / EPIRB targets
Lost (No border, Uncertain When an AIS SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) / MOB (Man Over
crossed through) (Dashed outline) Board) / EPIRB (Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon) target becomes
lost it remains onscreen and triggers an alarm notification.

Buddy (Yellow Dangerous

fill) and Uncertain
(Dashed outline
and Flashes Red)

Dangerous ATON off

(Flashes Red) position (Red
border)

From the Lost target notification you can:

• select [Place Waypoint] to place a new waypoint at the last known position
of the target.
• select [Clear lost target] to remove the target from the system.
Note:
When the MFD is configured as ‘First responder’ and is connected to STEDs • select [OK] to dismiss the alarm and keep the target onscreen. The target
compatible AIS hardware, Blue Force AIS icons are used to identify other can be cancelled or a waypoint can be placed from the context menu.
STEDs equipped vessels. For details refer to: p.376 — Blue Force Tracking

AIS target capacity

The MFD can display a maximum of 200 AIS target simultaneously.
If more than 200 targets exist, within your range, the 200 targets nearest to
your vessel will be displayed.

Chart app - General 225

AIS target information
Vessels with AIS transceivers can broadcast programmed vessel information,
which can be displayed in the Chart app.

1. Selecting an AIS target icon in the Chart app will display an Infobox
containing AIS identification and position information. The Infobox will
close automatically after approximately 5 seconds.
2. The Infobox can be switched on and off for individual targets from the
AIS target context menu. When switched on, the Infobox is always
displayed for the selected target.
3. Full AIS data can be viewed by selecting [View AIS data] from the AIS
target context menu, or by selecting a target from the target list and When the MFD is configured using the First Responder activity and the
selecting [View full target data] from the pop-over menu. system includes a STEDs-compliant AIS transceiver, duplicated STEDs
transmission data will be shown in blue, to the right of the AIS data item.
4. The AIS target name can be displayed next to the target icon. AIS names
can be switched on and off from the [AIS Settings] menu: [Menu > Targets Accessing target options
> AIS Settings > AIS names]. Target specific options are available for targets that are currently being
tracked. The target options can be accessed from the target’s context
Full AIS data menu and from the Pop-over options in the relevant target list. The options
The data transmitted by an AIS-equipped vessel can be viewed using the AIS available are dependent on the type of target.
target context menu in the Radar app and Chart app. To access a target’s context menu:
Selecting [View AIS data] opens the data page: • Press and hold on the target onscreen, or
226
• Highlight the target onscreen using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button.
To access the target list Pop-over menu:
• Select the target in the relevant target list, or
• Highlight the target in the list using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button.
AIS target options
The following options are available for AIS targets.
• [View full target data] — View fullscreen page displaying all available AIS
data.
• [Add as buddy] — Add the target as a buddy. The Buddy feature enables
you to add AIS-equipped friends and regular contacts as ‘buddies’.
Buddy vessels will be displayed onscreen and in the target list using the
Yellow AIS buddy icon. When assigning an AIS target as a buddy you
can customize the name that is used for the target vessel. The following AIS settings menu
additional Target list Pop-over options are available for buddy vessels:
You can configure AIS target settings from the [AIS Settings] menu: [Menu >
– [Remove as buddy] — The target will revert to using normal AIS target Targets > AIS Settings].
icon. The following options are available:
– [Edit buddy name] — Change the Name of the buddy target. • [Show AIS targets in chart] / [Show AIS targets in Radar] — Enables and
• [Intercept] — Initiates a Target interception. For details see: disables display of AIS targets in the Chart app / Radar app.
p.238 — Target intercept • [Enhanced AIS targets] — Enables and disables the display of enhanced
AIS target icons.
AIS target list
• [AIS names] — When enabled, AIS target names are permanently displayed
The target list identifies: Target name, Range and Bearing from your vessel. next to AIS target icons.
Where relevant, CPA (Closest point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest
• [Show these AIS types] — Enables selection of the types of AIS target that
Point of Approach) values will also be displayed.
will be displayed. Available AIS types:
The AIS targets list can be accessed from the Targets menu in the Radar app – All
and Chart app: [Menu > Targets > AIS]
– Dangerous
The target list is sorted by target proximity to your vessel with the closest
target appearing at the top of the list. The list will automatically update as – Buddies
targets become closer or farther away. • [Hide static targets] — When enabled, AIS targets travelling under 2 knots
Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView will not be displayed, unless it is or becomes dangerous.
app pane on the right of the page and opens the Pop-over menu. • [Silent mode (don’t transmit my position)] — When enabled, your vessel’s
AIS transceiver will not transmit your position or details to other AIS
equipped vessels.
Chart app - General 227
Radar target tracking Acquiring a target manually

Radar targets To acquire a Radar target manually using MARPA (Mini Automatic Radar
Plotting Aid) follow the steps below.
Radar target symbols are used to identify Radar targets onscreen.
With the Radar overlay enabled:
Radar targets are displayed in the Radar app and when Radar overlay is
1. Select the object / target.
enabled ([Chart app > Menu > Targets > Radar settings > RADAR OVERLAY >
Show radar overlay]) they are also displayed in the Chart app. The context menu is displayed.
2. Select [more options].
Acquiring target Acquired target 3. Select [Acquire target].
(manual) — Thin (manual) — Once acquired the target will be tracked.
dashed Green Green circle with
circle Target ID Accessing target options
Target specific options are available for targets that are currently being
tracked. The target options can be accessed from the target’s context
menu and from the Pop-over options in the relevant target list. The options
available are dependent on the type of target.
To access a target’s context menu:
Acquiring Unacknowl-
target (auto) — edged acquired • Press and hold on the target onscreen, or
Thick dashed target (auto) • Highlight the target onscreen using the [Direction controls] and press the
Red circle, — Red circle, [OK] button.
flashes until flashes until ac-
acknowledged knowledged To access the target list Pop-over menu:
• Select the target in the relevant target list, or
Dangerous Lost target • Highlight the target in the list using the [Direction controls] and press the
target — Red (Target not [OK] button.
circle with Target detected for 4
ID, flashes until Radar scans) Radar target options
acknowledged — Gray circle The following options are available for Radar targets.
with Red cross
through • [Cancel target] — Cancels the Radar target. Once cancelled the target
symbol will no longer be displayed onscreen or be listed in the target list.

Note: Cancelled targets will not be tracked and will not trigger the
dangerous target alarm.
Once acquired the target’s COG (Course Over Ground) and SOG (Speed
Over Ground) can be displayed below the target ID.
The Target info is colored Blue if COG and SOG values are True or Orange if • [Show CPA] — Determines when CPA graphics are displayed onscreen
values are Relative. Target info will turn Red if the target becomes dangerous. The following options are available:
228
 – Auto — CPA graphic is displayed if the target becomes dangerous
(based on the Dangerous target alarm settings).
– On — CPA graphic is displayed if there is an interception point between
your vessel’s current course and the target’s.
– Off — CPA graphic is not displayed for the target.

Note: CPA graphics are only displayed in the Radar app. The [Show
CPA] option is not available in the Chart app.

• [Target info] — Enables and disables display of the target’s Course (COG)
and speed (SOG) onscreen.
• [Intercept] — Set target interception. For details see:
p.238 — Target intercept

Radar target list

Radar targets can be cancelled individually by selecting the ‘[X]’ next to the
The target list identifies: Target number, Range and Bearing from your vessel. target’s details in the list, or you can cancel all targets by selecting [Cancel all
Where relevant, CPA (Closest point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest targets].
Point of Approach) values will also be displayed.
The Radar target list can be accessed from the Targets menu in the Radar Radar settings
app and Chart app: [Menu > Targets > Radar]. When the Radar layer is enabled in the Chart app you can configure the
The Radar target list can be sorted by either Number or Range by selecting [Radar settings] from the [Targets] menu: [Menu > Targets > Radar settings].
the [Sorted By] option located at the bottom of the LiveView pane: The following options are available:
• Number — List sorted by Target number so that the first detected target • [Radar selection] — When more than 1 Radar scanner is connected you can
appears at the top of the list. choose which Radar to use for the Radar layer in the Chart app.
• Range — List sorted by proximity to your vessel with the closest target • [Transmit] — Start the Radar scanner transmitting or put it in Standby.
appearing at the top of the list. The list will automatically update as targets • [Dual range] — Enables and disables dual range on compatible Radar
become closer or farther away. scanners.
Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView • [Channel] — When Dual range is active, you can switch between channel
app pane on the right of the page and opens the Pop-over menu. 1 and 2.
• [Sync radar range with chart] — Enables and disables the synchronization
of Chart app range with all Radar app instances on the same app page.

Note: The current range is synchronized when the setting is enabled.

Subsequent range changes in either the selected Chart app instance or
any Radar app instance on the same app page will be synchronized.
Chart app - General 229
• [Show Radar overlay] — Enables and disables the Radar layer in the Chart
app.
• [Visibility] — Determines the percentage visibility (opacity) of the Radar
layer.
• [Palette] — The Radar overlay can be displayed in the following colors:
– Full Color (256 colors)
– Purple
– Black
– Red

Note: When ‘Full color’ is selected, approaching objects are displayed

in Pink.

• [Show sector blanking limits] — Enables and disables blank sectors on The reference mode for vectors can be set to [True] or [Relative].
compatible radar scanners. For more information on blank sectors refer to
22.15 Blank sectors • In [True] reference mode, trails, vectors and history are shown ground
referenced (i.e. their actual path over ground).
• [DOPPLER] — Enables and disables Doppler on compatible radar scanners. • In [Relative] reference mode, trails, vectors and history are shown relative
For more information on Doppler refer to 22.14 Doppler Radar overview to your vessel’s movement.
Vectors are always displayed for Radar targets. Vectors for AIS targets can
Note: If ‘Full color’ is selected for the Radar overlay palette, be set using the [Show AIS vectors] option. The available options are:
approaching targets will appear Pink instead of Red.
• [All] — vectors are displayed for all AIS targets.
• [Manual] — vectors only displayed when enabled individually for each
• [Use COG when no Heading data available] — Enables use of the Radar target using the target context menu.
layer when Heading data is not available. The length of the vector identifies where the target will be after the time
• [Range] — Determines the range used for the Radar layer. specified in [Vector period] has passed.

Target vector settings

Target vectors show the predicted future path of the target. 13.10 Collision avoidance
Target vector settings can be accessed from the [Targets] setting menu: In addition to target tracking specific collision avoidance features are
[Menu > Targets > Target settings]. available to improve awareness for the potential of collisions.
The specific collision avoidance features are:
• Dangerous targets alarm. Refer to: p.231 — Dangerous targets alarm
• Radar guard zones. Refer to: p.350 — Guard zone alarms
230
• Predicted areas of danger. Refer to: p.231 — Predicted areas of danger • [Do not alarm for static AIS targets] — Enables ability to ignore AIS targets
that are considered static (travelling under 2 Knots). Static targets that
• LightHouse chart obstruction alarm. Refer to:
become dangerous will still be identified onscreen but will not trigger the
p.236 — Obstruction alarm (legacy LightHouse charts)
dangerous targets alarm.

Dangerous targets alarm • [Show safe distance] — Enables display of a safe distance circle around
your vessel.
Use the Dangerous targets alarm to notify you if a Radar target or AIS target
will reach a specified distance from your vessel within a specified time. Predicted areas of danger
The Dangerous targets alarm settings can be accessed from the [Collision
Avoidance] menu: [Menu > Targets > Collision Avoidance]. The Predicted areas of danger feature tracks Radar targets and AIS targets
in relation to your own vessel’s Course Over Ground (COG) and Speed
Over Ground (SOG).
If your paths are predicted to cross, an Interception line is displayed between
your vessel and the target. Additionally, Interception zones are displayed to
indicate where there is an increased risk of collision. The Interception line and
the Interception zones are based on your current course and speed and the
target’s current course and speed, and they can help you determine whether
you should change course and / or speed to avoid a potential collision.
The graphics automatically refresh when the MFD receives new position
data from the target.

Important:
The Collision Avoidance feature is a graphical aid only, provided to help
increase user awareness of the potential for collision. It is vital to have
a good understanding of the International Regulations for Preventing
Collisions at Sea (IRPCS / COLREGS), to ensure all actions taken are in
accordance with the IRPCS. Important concepts to understand in relation to
To set up the Dangerous targets alarm, adjust the [Safe distance] to the Collision Avoidance include (but are not limited to): Risk assessment; Right
desired value and then select a [Time to reach safe distance]. The alarm will of Way; Restricted visibility; interpreting lights and shapes; interpreting
be triggered if a tracked target will reach the specified Safe distance from sound and light signals. In the event of conflict, the IRPCS regulations
your vessel within the time period selected. must take precedence. For more information on IRPCS / COLREGS, refer
The following additional options are available for the dangerous targets alarm: to: IRPCS
• [Radar targets] — Enables Radar targets to be included in the dangerous
targets alarm. If this setting is disabled Radar targets will not trigger the
dangerous targets alarm.
• [AIS targets] — Enables AIS targets to be included in the dangerous targets
alarm. If this setting is disabled AIS targets will not trigger the dangerous
targets alarm.
Chart app - General 231
 1. Interception zone (Predicted area based on target’s last reported
position)
Moving target graphics 2. Stationary AIS Target (Last received position)
Moving target graphics are used for targets moving at a speed greater than
2 kts.
Important:
You must still maintain a permanent watch for:
• Vessels that are not equipped with AIS or AIS-equipped vessels that
are not currently transmitting their position, as these targets will not be
displayed in the Chart application.
• AIS-equipped vessels reporting an inaccurate GPS position, your own
vessel’s GPS accuracy, or AIS targets with delayed location updates.
These situations will cause your vessel’s position and / or AIS target
positions to be displayed inaccurately in the Chart application.
1. Interception zone (Predicted area based on target’s last reported • Objects not detected by your Radar scanner.
position)
2. Interception line
Predicted areas of danger settings
3. Target COG line
The Predicted areas of danger feature can be enabled for AIS targets and
4. AIS Target (Last received position) Radar targets in the Chart app.
Stationary Target graphics [Chart app > Menu > Targets > Collision Avoidance]
Stationary target graphics are used for targets moving at a speed less than
2 kts.
232
 Collision scenarios
There are 3 potential scenarios the Predicted areas of danger feature can
warn you about:
• Own vessel moving faster than target
• Target moving faster than own vessel
• Both targets moving at similar speed

Example scenario 1 — Own vessel moving faster than target vessel

Note: These scenarios are examples provided for guidance only.

In the [Collision Avoidance] menu you can change the settings to determine
which types of target (i.e. AIS and Radar) will have an Interception zone:
• [Radar targets] — Enables and disables Predicted area of danger graphics
for detected Radar targets.
• [AIS targets] — Enables and disables Predicted area of danger graphics
for AIS targets.
• [Show for these targets] — Determines when Predicted area of danger
graphics are displayed. Graphics can be displayed for:
– [All targets] — all targets onscreen.
– [Targets crossing my course] — only targets which are predicted to cross
your vessel’s path
• [Distance ahead] — Changes the distance ahead of your vessel that the
Interception line is drawn (only available with [Targets crossing my course]
selected). The distance can be set to a value between 0.5 nm to 5.0 nm.
• [Hide areas for static targets] — Enables and disables graphics for Static In the example above the vessel’s COG will cross with the target’s COG
targets, targets travelling less than 2.0 kts will NOT have Predicted area within the Interception zone, which could cause a collision. You should alter
of danger zones. course and / or speed to avoid the potential collision.

Chart app - General 233

Scenario 1 Course change examples Figure 2. Scenario 1 Speed change examples

1. Course alteration to pass ahead of the Interception zone [Not

recommended] — Proceed with caution, there is always an inherent risk
when passing in front of other vessels.
2. Course alteration to pass ahead of the target vessel [Not recommended]
— This manoeuvre is not recommended as your vessel will still cross
through the target’s Interception zone.
3. Course alteration to pass astern of the target vessel and its Interception
zone — This manoeuvre alters your vessel’s course so that it does not
come into contact with the target’s Interception zone and passes astern
of the target.
4. Course alteration to pass clear astern of the target vessel and its
Interception zone. This is the preferred manoeuvre as it correctly alters
your vessel’s course so that it is clear of the target’s Interception zone
and passes safely astern of the target. This manoeuvre also clearly
indicates to the target vessel your actual change of course.

1. (1)Speeding up [Not recommended] — Increasing vessel speed to pass

ahead of the target vessel. Proceed with caution, there is always an
inherent risk when passing in front of other vessels.
234
2. No speed change [Not recommended] — Not changing speed or course 1. 1st — The first Interception zone (displayed closest to the target vessel)
is not an option as it can result in a collision. represents a bow-to-bow collision.
3. Slowing down [Not recommended] — Slowing down a sufficient amount 2. 2nd — The second Interception zone (displayed farthest from the target
will allow the target vessel to pass ahead of your vessel. vessel) represents the target vessel running you down from behind.
4. (2)Slowing down — Slowing down more than a sufficient amount will allow When altering course and speed, both Interception zones must be avoided.
the target vessel to pass safely ahead of your vessel.
Scenario 2 Course change examples
Note:
• In this example the paths will still cross within the [Intercept distance],
(1)
so the graphics are still displayed.
• (2) In this example the paths will no longer cross within the [Intercept
distance], so the graphics are not displayed.

Example scenario 2 — Target vessel moving faster than your vessel

Note: These scenarios are examples provided for guidance only.

In certain situations, when the target vessel is travelling faster than your
vessel, there may be more than one opportunity for your paths to cross
within the [Intercept distance]. If this is the case then a second Interception
zone is displayed.
1. Course alteration to pass ahead of the Interception zone [Not
recommended] — As the target vessel is moving faster than your vessel
you will pass astern of the target.
2. Course alteration to pass ahead of the first Interception zone [Not
recommended] — Although this course alteration is sufficient to avoid a
potential bow-to-bow collision, it has created a second Interception zone
where the target may now run you down from behind.
3. Course alteration to pass between the 2 Interception zones [Not
recommended] — Although this may seem like the quickest option,
proceed with caution, as the gap between the 2 Interception zones can
close quickly, especially when your vessel slows down.
4. Course alteration to clear astern of the target vessel and its Interception
zone. This would be the preferred manoeuvre as it correctly alters your
vessel’s course so that it is clear of the target’s Interception zone, and
passes safely astern of the target. This manoeuvre also clearly indicates
to the target vessel your change of course.
Chart app - General 235
Figure 2. Scenario 2 Speed change examples 1. Speeding up [Not recommended] — Increasing vessel speed to pass
ahead of the target vessel. Proceed with caution, there is always an
inherent risk when passing in front of other vessels.
2. No change [Not recommended] — Not changing speed or course may
result in a collision.
3. Slowing down [Not recommended] — Slowing down slightly may result in
the 2 Interception zones closing up or merging into a single zone.
4. Slowing down — Slowing down a sufficient amount will allow the target
vessel to pass safely ahead of your vessel, avoiding the Interception
zone(s).

Example scenario 3 — Both vessels travelling at the same speed

Note: These scenarios are examples provided for guidance only.

Course change
When both vessels are travelling at the same speed, course alterations should
be made in accordance with the guidance provided in examples 1 and 2.
Speed change
When both vessels are travelling at the same speed, altering your speed will
change the collision scenario to one of the scenarios detailed in examples
1 and 2.

Obstruction alarm (legacy LightHouse charts)

The Obstruction alarm provides a warning if a charted object, charted depth
contour or charted height clearance is detected that conflicts with the MFD’s
configured [Safety depth] and / or [Safety height] settings.

Note:
• The Obstruction alarm requires Legacy LightHouse™ vector charts as
the alarm’s [Cartography source].
• Object depths, depth contours and clearance heights are based on the
cartography in use.
• If an obstruction is not present in the specified [Cartography source] it
will not trigger the alarm.
236
 Obstruction alarm detection zone
If a Chart app instance is opened that uses the same legacy LightHouse™
charts cartography as the Obstruction alarm’s [Cartography source], then a
detection zone is drawn around the vessel icon. The detection zone outline
When the Obstructions alarm is triggered an alarm notification is displayed turns Red when the Obstruction alarm is triggered.
and an audible beep is sounded on the MFD. From the onscreen notification
you can acknowledge the alarm by selecting [OK], or edit the alarm
parameters by selecting [Edit].

Obstruction alarm parameters

The Obstruction alarm parameters must be configured from the [Alarm
manager] before it can be used: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings >
LightHouse chart obstructions].
The following options must be configured for correct operation:
• [LightHouse chart obstructions] — Enables and disables the obstruction
alarm.
• [Indication only] — Enables and disables the warning notification dialog
(Audible beep and Red detection zone outline only).
• [Cartography source:] — Choose the appropriate (legacy) LightHouse chart 1. When there is no obstruction present, the detection zone outline is
for your region. colored black until an obstruction is detected.
• [Safety depth] — Specifies the minimum safe depth for your vessel. The 2. When the charted depth is the same depth as, or less than the specified
Chart app’s [Safe contour] depth value is synchronized with the Safety safety depth, the Obstruction alarm is triggered.
depth value. 3. When the charted object is the same depth as, or less than the specified
• [Safety height] — Specifies the minimum height for your vessel. safety depth, the Obstruction alarm is triggered.
• [Obstruction warning ahead] — Specifies how much time in advance of Once the Obstruction alarm has been configured, the alarm parameters can
reaching the obstruction the alarm will be triggered. This means the faster be modified from the [Collision avoidance] menu tab in the Chart app:[Chart
your vessel speed is, the farther ahead the detection zone will be drawn. app > Menu > Targets > Collision Avoidance > LightHouse obstruction alarm].
• [Minimum obstruction distance] — Refers to the distance from your vessel
boundary to the (virtual) obstruction detection zone around the vessel. Note:
This parameter specifies the minimum distance from your vessel to the
• You will not be able to use the Obstruction alarm if the [Cartography
obstruction detection zone, in 4 directions: port, starboard, aft and (when
source] has not been set in the Alarms manager.
motionless), fore. The obstruction detection zone is displayed in the
Chart app as an oblong shape around your vessel, and turns Red when • Obstructions may not be displayed at all Chart app ranges, so you may
an obstruction is detected. need to Range in to see the object that triggered the Obstruction alarm.

Chart app - General 237

LightHouse charts dangerous objects 13.11 Target intercept
When using LightHouse™ charts or Legacy LightHouse™ vector charts objects
deemed as dangerous are highlighted using a purple octagon symbol with The [Intercept] feature can be used to help rendezvous with friends or for
an ‘x’ in the center. Pilot boats and the Coast Guard to intercept vessels that are to be boarded.

To use the [Intercept] feature, select and hold the

target icon until the context menu is displayed, then
select [Intercept]. The Chart app will automatically
plot a direct course to a point where your vessel
and the target will cross (intercept).
An interception mark is placed at a predicted point
where both your vessel and the target will cross.

Important:
When performing an individual interception, you
are placing your vessel on a collision course with
the target vessel. In order to prevent a collision,
it WILL be necessary to change to a parallel
course.

Objects such as wrecks, that are in the Deep contour that are shallower Pre-requisites:
than the depth specified in the Safety contour will be highlighted using the • It is vital to have a good understanding of the International Regulations
Danger symbol. for Preventing Collisions at Sea (IRPCS / COLREGS), to ensure all actions
Height restrictions such as bridges, are always highlighted using the Danger taken are in accordance with the IRPCS. For more information on IRPCS /
symbol. COLREGS, refer to: IRPCS
• You must be familiar with the AIS feature.
Note: • You must have a thorough understanding of the Target interception feature
When using Legacy LightHouse™ vector charts the display of Danger and its implications before attempting to use it in a real life scenario.
highlight symbols can be enabled and disabled from the Chart app’s
[Advanced] menu tab: [Menu > Settings > Advanced > Danger highlights].

238
1. Initial Target interception graphics. Selecting a Reeds symbol will display a pop-up with brief details. Selecting
the pop-up displays the full details and any related images. Selecting images
2. Actual vessel movements required to perform the rendezvous. will open the image fullscreen

13.12 Reeds almanac 13.13 Find nearest

The Reeds almanac is available on Raymarine LightHouse charts. The Find nearest feature allows you to select a target or location and search
for nearby objects or places.
The Reeds almanac covers Portugal, Spain, France, Germany, Netherlands,
Denmark, Ireland/Great Britain.
Note:
Reeds marinas are only available in Ireland / Great Britain.
• The level of detail available on charts is dependent on vendor, chart
The Reeds symbols are displayed in the Chart app when the [Streets & POI] type, subscription level and geographic region. Prior to purchasing
layer is enabled: [Chart app > Menu > Settings > Layers > Street & POI]. charts check the vendor’s website to establish what level of detail is
available on the charts you want to purchase.
• The information relating to available chart detail and settings in this
manual should be treated as guidance only as it is subject to change that
is not under Raymarine’s control.

When an object is selected, the [Nearby objects] option is available from the
object context menu.
Chart app - General 239
Object selection find nearest Selecting an option will display a list of all nearby objects for that type. The
list is sorted by an object’s proximity to the selected location. However, the
Range and Bearing displayed is relative to your vessel’s position.
Find nearest options

Note:
Legacy LightHouse Charts refers to retired LightHouse vector, raster and
NC2 Charts.

The options available on the find nearest page depend on the cartography
type you are using:
• [Marinas] (LightHouse Charts, Navionics and C-Map)
• [Anchorages] (LightHouse Charts)
Selecting [Nearby objects] and then [Find Nearest] will display the Find • [Fishing Areas] ( LightHouse Charts)
nearest options page where you can select the type of place or object you • [Fuel] (LightHouse Charts)
want to search for. • [Wrecks] (LightHouse Charts, Legacy LightHouse Charts, Navionics and
Selecting an option will display a list of all nearby objects for that type. The C-Map)
list is sorted by an object’s proximity to the selected location. However, the • [Tides] (Legacy LightHouse Charts, Navionics and C-Map)
Range and Bearing displayed is relative to your vessel’s position.
• [Currents] (Legacy LightHouse Charts, Navionics and C-Map)
Location selection find nearest • [Lakes] (Navionics and C-Map)
• [Obstructions] (LightHouse Charts, Legacy LightHouse Charts, Navionics
and C-Map)
• [Ports/Services] (LightHouse Charts, Navionics and C-Map)
• [Boat Ramps] (LightHouse Charts)
• [Food & Drink] (LightHouse Charts)
• [Toilets] (LightHouse Charts)
• [Beach/Swim/Recreation] (LightHouse Charts)
• [Search for port] (LightHouse Charts, Legacy LightHouse Charts, Navionics,
C-Map)
• [Small Craft Facility] (Legacy LightHouse Charts)
• [Harbor Facility] (Legacy LightHouse Charts)
Pressing and holding on a location will open the Chart context menu, • [Businesses] (Navionics)
selecting [more options] and then [Find nearest] will display the Find nearest
options page where you can select the type of place or object you want • [Point of interest] (C-Map)
to search for. • [Outdoor Recreational Areas (ORA)] (C-Map)
240
• [ORA Services] (C-Map) 1. Point to point ruler.
List options 2. Vessel to point ruler.
From the list of found objects or places the following pop-over options are Multiple rulers can be created and displayed simultaneously.
available for each item in the list:
• View more information about the object by selecting [More info]. Measuring vessel to point
• Navigate to the selected object by selecting [Goto]. To measure the distance and bearing of a location from your vessel’s location
• Create an automatic route to the selected object by selecting [Autoroute follow the steps below.
to], if available. 1. Select (press and hold) on the required location.
• Display the selected object in the Chart app by selecting [Show on chart]. The context menu is displayed.
2. Select [more options].
When an item from the list is selected the [LiveView] on the right of the
screen will highlight and zoom to the selected object. 3. Select [Measure].
4. Select [Measure -from boat] from the pop-over options.
A ruler line is drawn on the screen from your vessel’s location to the
cursor’s location. The distance and bearing from your vessel is also
13.14 Measure displayed in an information box.
The Measure feature can be used to measure distances from your vessel or 5. If you would like to keep the ruler line select [Keep ruler] from the top of
distances between 2 points. the screen.
The ruler will be permanently displayed onscreen, the vessel end of the
The measure feature is available from the Chart context menu: [Context ruler will move with your vessel updating distance and bearing as you
menu > more options > Measure]. travel.
6. If you do not want to keep the ruler select [Exit] from the top of the screen
and select [Discard] from the confirmation dialog.

Measuring point to point

To measure the distance between 2 points and bearing to the first point
follow the steps below.
1. Select (press and hold) any location on the screen.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select [more options].
3. Select [Measure].
4. Select [Measure between points] from the pop-over options.
5. Select the location for the first point.
6. Select the location for the second point.
7. If you would like to keep the ruler line select [Keep ruler] from the top of
the screen.
The ruler will be permanently displayed onscreen.
Chart app - General 241
8. If you do not want to keep the ruler select [Exit] from the top of the screen For further information on ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality, refer to
and select [Discard] from the confirmation dialog. p.457 — ClearCruise features.

Deleting rulers Field of View

You can delete individual rulers or all rulers at the same time. The Field of View (FOV) cone acts as a range indicator to illustrate the area of
1. Select (press and hold) on a ruler point. coverage of the camera with respect to displaying chart objects in the Video
2. Select [Delete ruler] from the context menu. app as part of the ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality features.
Alternatively you can delete all rulers by selecting [Remove all rulers] from Chart objects that are within the scope of the displayed FOV cone will be
the context menu. displayed in the Video app as “flags”. For more information on flags, refer to
p.463 — Augmented Reality flags
The area of coverage of the FOV cone is determined by:
13.15 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality • The camera’s horizontal Field of View (FOV). This setting can be adjusted
in the Video app: [Video settings > Camera Setup tab].
The Chart app has additional Augmented Reality features, which are available
when an AR200 and a compatible IP camera are connected. • The Augmented Reality Range Limit. For more information refer to:
p.466 — Range limit You can also manually specify the maximum
Augmented Reality features must also be enabled and configured in the range limit. When you adjust this setting, the FOV cone in the
Video app. Chart app will change accordingly. For more information, refer to:
With the Augmented Reality features enabled, the AIS Target, Waypoint and p.466 — ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality)
Chart Object data available in the Chart app will also be available in the video
app, where the data will be overlaid onto the live video feed.

The FOV cone can be enabled/disabled in the Chart app settings: [Menu
> Settings > Layers].
242
13.16 Chart settings menu • [Laylines] — For details refer to: p.286 — Laylines

The chart settings menu is organized into tabs with settings and options
appearing under the relevant tab. The settings available in the chart settings
Cartography settings menu
menu are dependent on chart mode and the cartography in use. The cartography settings menu provides settings and details relating to your
electronic charts.
Note:
• The level of detail available on charts is dependent on vendor, chart
type, subscription level and geographic region. Prior to purchasing
charts check the vendor’s website to establish what level of detail is
available on the charts you want to purchase.
• The information relating to available chart detail and settings in this
manual should be treated as guidance only as it is subject to change that
is not under Raymarine’s control.

The following settings tabs are available:

• [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
• [Layers] — For details refer to: p.244 — Layers settings menu
• [Depth] — For details refer to: p.247 — Depth settings menu
• [View & Motion] — For details refer to:
p.249 — View & motion settings menu
• [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu The cartography settings menu provides details of available electronic charts,
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu and allows you to select which electronic charts are used in the current chart
app instance.
Weather mode specific settings menus For details about electronic charts and which charts are compatible with your
The following settings menus are only available in weather mode: MFD, refer to: p.202 — Cartography overview
• [Weather] — For details refer to: p.272 — Weather settings menu The cartography settings menu also provides settings for S-63 encrypted
• [Subscription] — For details refer to: p.272 — Weather subscription charts. For details refer to: p.206 — S-63 Encrypted Charts

Fish mapping mode specific settings menus

The following settings menu are only available in fish mapping mode:
• [Fish Mapping] — For details refer to: p.261 — Fish mapping subscription

Sailing specific settings menus

The following settings menus are only available in racing and navigate
modes when sailing has been selected as the boating activity during the
initial start up wizard:
Chart app - General 243
 Related topics: Menu item and description Options
• p.202 — Cartography overview [AIS] • On
Enables and disables the display of AIS targets in the
• p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus • Off
Chart app.
• p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus
• p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus Note:
• p.286 — Racing mode settings menus AIS hardware is required.
• p.261 — Fish mapping mode settings menus
• p.272 — Weather mode settings menus This setting is always available and not dependent on
the charts in use.
• p.280 — Tides mode settings menus
[Radar] • On
Enables and disables the display of a Radar overlay in
• Off
Layers settings menu the Chart app.
The layers setting menu contains settings related to the level of cartographic
detail, cartography style and available layers that can be overlaid onscreen. Note:
The options that are available depend on the cartography in use and the
hardware connected to your MFD’s network (e.g.: Radar scanner AIS receiver Radar hardware is required.
etc.)
Menu item and description Options This setting is always available and not dependent on
[Chart detail:] • Low the cartography in use.
Allows you to select the level of detail displayed [Range rings] • On
• Medium
onscreen for vector based cartography. Enables and disables the display of Radar style range
This setting is available when using LightHouse™, • High • Off
rings in the Chart app.
Legacy LightHouse™, C-MAP® and Navionics® charts. This setting is always available and not dependent on
[Chart Object Size] Slider bar the cartography in use.
Adjust the display size of chart objects. control.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ charts
and S-63 charts.
[Day color palette] • On
When enabled, [Bright sun] provides a darker color
• Off
palette in the Chart app which is more easily readable
in bright sunlight.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ charts.
[Chart style] • Leisure
Switches between chart presentation styles.
• Government
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ charts.
244
 Menu item and description Options Menu item and description Options
[FOV:] • On [Wind shift bar] • On
Enables and disables the ClearCruise™ Augmented Enables and disables display of the wind shift bar
• Off • Off
Reality (AR) camera’s field of view (FOV) overlay in the indicator.
Chart app. The Wind shift bar is available when Sailing has been
selected as the boating activity during the initial display
start up wizard. The setting is enabled automatically
Note: when switching to the Racing chart mode.
ClearCruise enabled camera is required. For details refer to: p.293 — Wind shift bar
[AIS PAD] • On
Enables the Predicted Area of Danger graphics for AIS
This setting is always available and not dependent on • Off
targets.
the charts in use.
Only available when the AIS layer is enabled.
[Weather Radar] • On
Enables Weather Radar precipitation data overlay in
• Off Note:
the Chart app.
For more information about the collision avoidance
Note: feature refer to p.231 — Predicted areas of danger

Only available when connected to a compatible

SiriusXM weather receiver with a valid subscription. This setting is always available and not dependent on
the charts in use.

This setting is always available and not dependent on

[Radar PAD] • On
Enables the Predicted Area of Danger graphics for
the charts in use. • Off
Radar targets.
[Tides] • On Only available when the Radar layer is enabled.
Enables and disables display of Tide and Current
• Off
graphics at tide and current stations.
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts. Note:
[Streets & POI] • On For more information about the collision avoidance
Enables and disables the display of enhanced street feature, refer to p.231 — Predicted areas of danger
• Off
details and point of interest in the Chart app.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ charts
with a valid premium subscription. This setting is always available and not dependent on
the charts in use.
[Rudder bar] • On
Enables and disables display of rudder bar indicator.
• Off
For details refer to: p.218 — Rudder bar indicator
This setting is always available and not dependent on
the charts in use.

Chart app - General 245

 Menu item and description Options Menu item and description Options
[Aerial overlay] • On [High res bathy] • On
Enables and disables display of a photographic aerial Enables and disables the display of High Resolution
• Off • Off
overlay. Bathymetry charts, which provide improved bottom
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and detail, contours and structure.
C-MAP® charts. This setting is available when using C-MAP® charts.
[Navionics overlays] • None [Sports fishing] • On
Enables and disables the display of a photographic Allows you to display easy-to-use information pages
• Satellite • Off
aerial overlay when using .Navionics® charts. about fishing locations including fish type, size, depth,
• Relief Shading and reef and bottom composition.
This setting is available when using C-MAP® charts.
• SonarChart
Shading [Marine protected areas] • On
Allows clear identification of areas where commercial
[Visibility] • 0% to 100% • Off
and recreational fishing is prohibited or restricted.
Allows you to select the transparency of the aerial
This setting is available when using C-MAP® charts.
overlay layer.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™, [Fishing AOI] • On
Navionics® and C-MAP® charts. Enables and disables the display of Fishing AOIs (Areas
• Off
Of Interest).
[Coverage] • Land
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
Allows you to select the coverage of the aerial overlay.
• Land and sea C-MAP® charts.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
Navionics® charts. • (1)Landand [ActiveCaptain] • On
shallow Enables and disables the display of crowd-sourced data.
• Off
This setting is available when using C-MAP® charts.
Note:
(1) Navionics® charts only.

SIRIUS XM Related topics:

In Fishing chart mode when using a SiriusXM receiver
with a valid subscription, layer options will be available. • p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus
For details, refer to: p.256 — SiriusXM layer options • p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus
[EasyView] • On • p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus
Enables and disables the magnification of useful icons
• Off • p.286 — Racing mode settings menus
and text, making them easier to read.
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.
[Community edits] • On
Enables and disables the display of crowd-sourced data.
• Off
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.

246
Depth settings menu Menu item and description Options
The depth settings menu contains depth contour related settings. [Deep contour:] Numeric depth
Determines the depth at which the deep contour is value
Menu item and description Options shown. E.g. if you set this to a value of 30 meters,
any water with a depth greater than 30 meters will be
[Show soundings] • None displayed as a deep contour.
Enables and disables the display of depth soundings on This setting is not available for Raster charts.
• Manual
the chart. When set to [Manual], depth soundings will be
shown from [Zero to] the maximum depth you specify. • All [Depth gradient] • Dark to light
This setting is not available for Raster charts Allows you to specify the gradient shade between
• Light to dark
shallow and deep.
[Show contours] • None This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
Enables and disables the display of depth contours on legacy LightHouse™ vector charts.
• Manual
the chart. When set to Manual, contours will be shown
from zero to the maximum depth you specify. • All [Deep water color] • White
This setting is available when using LightHouse™, Allows you to specify the color that will be used to
• Blue
C-MAP® and Navionics® vector charts. display Deep water.
This setting is available when using C-MAP® and
[Shallow contour] Numeric depth Navionics® charts.
Determines the depth at which the Shallow contour is value
displayed. The Shallow contour cannot be set to a value [Record depth data] • On
greater than the Safe contour or Deep contour value. Enables depth and position data to be recorded to a
• Off
This setting is available when using LightHouse™, legacy MicroSD memory card.
LightHouse™ and S-63 vector charts. This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
legacy LightHouse™ vector charts.
[Safe contour] Numeric depth
Determines the depth at which the Safe contour is value [Waterline to tdcr] Numeric depth
displayed. Enter the distance between the waterline and your value
The Safe contour cannot be set to a value that is less depth transducer.
than the Shallow contour or greater than the Deep This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
contour. legacy LightHouse™ vector charts.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™, legacy [Save to] • SD1
LightHouse™ and S-63 vectors charts. When a suitable MicroSD card has been inserted, the
• SD2
[Shallow area] • On free space available for recording depth data and
Enables and disables identification of areas deemed RealBathy is displayed.
• Off This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
to be shallow. When enabled, a red hatched area is
displayed in areas shallower than the depth specified legacy LightHouse™ vector charts.
in the [Zero to] field. [RealBathy] • On
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts. Displays on the chart previously recorded RealBathy™
• Off
data saved to a MicroSD memory card.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and
legacy LightHouse™ vector charts.
Chart app - General 247
 Menu item and description Options Menu item and description Options
[Visibility] • 0% to 100% [Shallow depth shading] • On
Determines the transparency of the RealBathy data Enables and disables the identification of areas deemed
• Off
displayed onscreen. to be shallow. When set to On, a red hatched area is
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and displayed in areas shallower than the specified depth.
legacy LightHouse™ vector charts. This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.
[Height correction] • None [Density] • Very high
Determines the level of height correction applied to Determines the density of available depth contours.
• Tidal • High
RealBathy and depth data. This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and • Lake level • Medium
legacy LightHouse™ vector charts.
• Low
[Density] • Low
[Fishing Zone] • On
Selects the density of available depth contours.
• Medium You can set up a Fishing Range by enabling [Fishing
This setting is available when using LightHouse™ and • Off
Zone] and specifying a minimum and maximum depth.
legacy LightHouse™ vector charts. • High
Areas on the chart that are between these depths will
• Very high be colored White; areas outside of these depths will
[Sonar logging] • On be colored Blue.
Allows logging of depth and position data to your This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.
• Off
Navionics chart card.
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.
[SonarChart Live] • On Related topics:
Enables and disables the Navionics SonarChart Live
• Off • p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus
feature, which enables the realtime creation and display
of high resolution bathymetry charts. • History • p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus
When set to [History], historical sonar chart live data
is displayed. • p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts. • p.286 — Racing mode settings menus
[Visibility] • 0% to 100%
Determines the level of transparency used when
displaying SonarChart data.
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.
[Tide correction] • On
Enables sonar logging depth measurements to be offset
• Off
by tide height data from nearby tide stations.
Tide correction will be disabled when viewing historical
SonarChart Live data.
This setting is available when using Navionics® charts.

248
View & motion settings menu Menu item and description Options
The view and motion settings menu contains settings that allow you to control [Boat position] • Center
how the chart is displayed in relation to your vessel. The boat position determines the position of your vessel
• Partial offset
icon onscreen. The default is Center but you can adjust
Menu item and description Options this to provide a greater distance in front of your vessel. • Full offset
Your boat position can only be changed when Chart
[Chart motion] • Relative motion is set to Relative motion.
Relative motion motion
In Relative motion mode the vessel icon remains fixed [Sync view with other charts:] • On
• True motion All charts with [Sync] turned [On] will synchronize
onscreen and the chart area moves relative to your • Off
position. • Auto range orientation and position.
In this mode you can adjust your vessel’s fixed position
using the Boat position setting.
True motion
In True motion mode the chart is fixed and your vessel Related topics:
icon moves around the chart. As your vessel’s position
reaches the edge of the screen, the chart is redrawn to • p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus
reveal the area in front of your vessel. • p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus
Auto range
In Auto range the largest possible scale is maintained • p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus
that will display both your vessel and the destination / • p.261 — Fish mapping mode settings menus
target waypoint simultaneously.
• p.286 — Racing mode settings menus
[Chart orientation] • North-up
North-up
• Head-up
In North-up the top of the screen always points towards
north. As your vessel’s heading changes, the vessel • Course-up
icon rotates accordingly.
Head-up
In Head-up the top of the screen always points towards
your vessel’s current heading, and as your heading
changes the chart rotates accordingly.
Course-up
In Course-up the top of the screen always points
towards your destination, and as your destination
changes the chart rotates accordingly.

Chart app - General 249

Advanced settings menu Menu item and description Options
The advanced setting menu contains advanced settings related to the [Cartographic objects] • Navigation
chart app’s user interface, and determines which cartographic objects are Enables and disables the display of cartographic marks (1)
displayed and the appearance of the chart and its data. objects. The settings available are dependent on the
• Navigation
cartography in use.
mark symbols
Menu item and description Options (1)
[Chart orientation] • North-up Note: • Rocks (2)
North-up
• Head-up • (1) Available on Navionics®, C-MAP® and Legacy • Light sectors
In North-up the top of the screen always points towards
north. As your vessel’s heading changes, the vessel • Course-up LightHouse™ charts. (1)
icon rotates accordingly. • (2) Available on all charts. • Routing
Head-up systems (3)
In Head-up the top of the screen always points towards • (3) Available on Navionics®, C-MAP®, Legacy
your vessel’s current heading, and as your heading LightHouse™ and LightHouse™ charts. • Caution areas
changes the chart rotates accordingly. • (4) Available on Navionics®, C-MAP®, Legacy (1)
Course-up LightHouse™, LightHouse™and S–63 charts. • Marine
In Course-up the top of the screen always points features (3)
towards your destination, and as your destination • (5) Available on Navionics® and C-MAP® charts.
changes the chart rotates accordingly. • (6) This setting is always available and not • Land features
dependent on the cartography in use. (4)
[Enhanced AIS targets] • On
Switches between using standard and enhanced AIS • (7)Available on Navionics® charts. • Business
• Off services (5)
targets.
• (8) Available on S–63 Encrypted Charts
[Auto find ship] • On • Panoramic
When enabled the Chart app will automatically center photos (5)
• Off
to your vessel after 30 seconds. • Roads (6)
[Use Radar without heading data] • On
• Colored
Enables use of Radar overlay without Heading data.
• Off seabed areas
[Use SOG for hdg vector length] • On (7)
Enables you to use SOG data to determine the length • Buoy names
• Off
of the vessel heading vector instead of STW (Speed (8)
Through Water).
• Light desc (8)
[Cursor info boxes] • On
Allows display of information pop-ups for targets and
• Off
objects.
[Tide animation interval] • 15 minutes to
Allows you to select the time interval used for the Tide 2 hours in 15
and Current animations in Tides mode. minute steps.
250
 Menu item and description Options Related topics:
[Chart appearance] • 2D shading (1) • p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus
Allows you to change the appearance of the Chart
• Aerial overlay • p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus
app. The settings available are dependent on the
(2)
cartography in use. • p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus
• Aerial overlay
• p.286 — Racing mode settings menus
opacity (3)
Note: • p.261 — Fish mapping mode settings menus
• Relief shading
• (1) Available onNavionics® charts (1) • p.272 — Weather mode settings menus
• (2) Available on Navionics® and LightHouse™ charts. • Grid (4) • p.280 — Tides mode settings menus
• (3) Available on Navionics®, C-MAP® and • Chart text (4)
LightHouse™ charts.
• Chart Page settings menu
• (4) This setting is always available and not boundaries (5)
dependent on the cartography in use. The page settings menu contains settings related to page layout.
• Text/symbol
• (5) Available on Navionics®, C-MAP®, Legacy size (6) The following options are available:
LightHouse™and LightHouse™ charts.
• Deep water • [Data Overlays] — Enables configuration of Data overlays, which overlay
• (6) Available on C-MAP® and LightHouse™ charts. color (7) key information from connected sensors onto the Chart, Radar, Sonar and
Camera apps.
• (7) Available on Navionics® and C-MAP® charts. • Community
edits (1) • [Edit split ratio] — Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages. For example, 50/50, 70/30 etc.
[My data appearance] • Waypoints
You can change how your User data appears in the names
Chart app. Related topics:
• Route names
This setting is always available and not dependent on • p.49 — Data overlays
the cartography in use. • Track names
• p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus
• Route width
• p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus
• Track width
• p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus
• Vector width
• p.286 — Racing mode settings menus
• Vector length
• p.261 — Fish mapping mode settings menus
• p.272 — Weather mode settings menus
• p.280 — Tides mode settings menus

Chart app - General 251

CHAPTER 14: CHART APP - NAVIGATE MODE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 14.1 Navigate mode — page 253

• 14.2 Navigate mode main menu — page 253
• 14.3 Navigate mode settings menus — page 253

252
14.1 Navigate mode • [Targets] — Provides access to target tracking options. For details refer
to: p.223 — Target tracking
Navigate mode is the primary mode that should be used for navigation. Full • [Settings] — Provides access the chart app settings menu. For details refer
active navigation and target tracking features are available and navigational to: p.253 — Navigate mode settings menus
contours, soundings and objects will be displayed onscreen when using
appropriate cartography.

14.3 Navigate mode settings menus

The following settings menus are available in navigate mode:
• [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
• [Layers] — For details refer to: p.244 — Layers settings menu
• [Depth] — For details refer to: p.247 — Depth settings menu
• [View & Motion] — For details refer to:
p.249 — View & motion settings menu
• [Laylines] — The laylines settings menu will be available when the MFD’s
boating activity is set to [Sailing]. For details refer to: p.286 — Laylines
• [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu

14.2 Navigate mode main menu

Navigate mode includes the relevant menu items for safe navigation.
The following options are available from the main menu:
• [Find ship] — The find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centered in the chart app.
• [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at any time by selecting a
mode. For details of available chart modes refer to: p.196 — Chart modes
• [Go] — Provides options to start active navigation.
• [New] — Provides options to create new waypoints, routes, tracks and
search patterns.
• [Waypoints, routes, track] — Opens the [My data] menu to allow access to
waypoints, routes and tracks lists. For details refer to: p.103 — My data
Chart app - Navigate mode 253
CHAPTER 15: CHART APP - FISHING CHART MODE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 15.1 Fishing chart mode — page 255

• 15.2 Fishing chart mode main menu — page 255
• 15.3 Fishing intel menu — page 255
• 15.4 SiriusXM layer options — page 256
• 15.5 Fishing chart mode settings menus — page 256

254
15.1 Fishing chart mode • [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at any time by selecting a
mode. For details of available chart modes refer to: p.196 — Chart modes
Fishing chart mode optimizes the chart app for fishing. When using supported • [Go] — Provides options to start active navigation.
cartography fishing chart mode will switch to use fishing cartography which
provides enhanced bathymetric contours that are not shown in other chart • [New] — Provides options to create new waypoints, routes, tracks and
modes. search patterns.
• [Waypoints, routes, track] — Opens the [My data] menu to allow access to
Important: waypoints, routes and tracks lists. For details refer to: p.103 — My data
It is not recommended that fishing chart mode is used for navigation. • [Targets] — Provides access to target tracking options. For details refer
to: p.223 — Target tracking
• [Fishing intel] — Provides access to SiriusXM fish mapping options. For
details refer to: p.255 — Fishing intel menu
• [Settings] — Provides access the chart app settings menu. For details refer
to: p.256 — Fishing chart mode settings menus

15.3 Fishing intel menu

The [Fishing intel] menu provides access to SiriusXM options.
The following fish mapping options are available:
• [Fish Mapping Layers] — For details of available fish mapping layers refer
to: p.260 — Fish mapping layers
• [Fishing Recommendations] — For details of available fishing
recommendation layers refer to: p.259 — Fishing recommendations
• [SST] (Sea surface temperature)
When connected to a compatible SiriusXM receiver the [Fishing intel] menu
is available which provides access to fishing recommendations and fish
mapping layers options. For details refer to: p.255 — Fishing intel menu

15.2 Fishing chart mode main menu

Fishing chart mode includes menu items related to fishing and navigation.
The following options are available from the main menu:
• [Find ship] — The find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centered in the chart app.
Chart app - Fishing chart mode 255
Sea surface temperature menu 15.5 Fishing chart mode settings menus
SiriusXM sea surface temperature layer options are available from the
[Fishing intel] menu: [Menu > Fishing intel > SST]. The following settings menus are available in fish chart mode:
• [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
• [Layers] — For details refer to: p.244 — Layers settings menu
• [Depth] — For details refer to: p.247 — Depth settings menu
• [View & Motion] — For details refer to:
p.249 — View & motion settings menu
• [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu

The layer can be enabled and disabled and the transparency can be adjusted
using the [Visibility] control.

15.4 SiriusXM layer options

In fishing chart mode SiriusXM related layer options are grouped together in
the [Layers] settings menu.
The following options are available:
• [Weather Radar] — Enables and disables the Sirius weather radar layer.
• [Weather visibility] — Determines the transparency of the weather radar
layer.
• [Sea surface temps] — Enables and disables the Sirius sea surface
temperature layer.
• [SST visibility] — Determines the transparency of the sea surface
temperature layer.
• [Fish Mapping] — Selecting [Configure] opens the [Fishing intel] menu.
• [Show legend] — Enabled and disables display of the fish mapping legend
onscreen.

256
CHAPTER 16: CHART APP - FISH MAPPING MODE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 16.1 Fish mapping mode — page 258

• 16.2 Fish mapping mode main menu — page 259
• 16.3 Fishing recommendations — page 259
• 16.4 Fish mapping layers — page 260
• 16.5 Layer / fish type identification — page 260
• 16.6 Limiting data display limits — page 261
• 16.7 Fish mapping subscription — page 261
• 16.8 Fish mapping mode settings menus — page 261

Chart app - Fish mapping mode 257

16.1 Fish mapping mode
Fish mapping mode is a chart mode that enables you to utilize
Sirius XM fishing data in the Chart app. When compatible hardware
(e.g.: SR200) is detected, fish mapping mode will be available. Fish
mapping mode requires a valid SiriusXM subscription. To find out more
about fish mapping data and subscriptions visit the SiriusXM website:
https://siriusxmcommunications.com/fishmapping/#features
Fish mapping mode overlays fishing layers and fishing recommendation
locations on the Chart app.

Important:
• Use of fish mapping mode is subject to acceptance of the disclaimer
that is displayed when fish mapping mode is activated. Please read and
ensure you understand the disclaimer’s conditions.
• Fish mapping mode should NOT be used for navigation. Contours used
for safe navigation and related markings and objects are hidden in
fish mapping mode. Active navigation controls and menus are also
not available.
1. Example fishing recommendation — Kingfish location.
• Fish mapping data is only available in North America and its coastal
waters. 2. Example fishing layer — SST contour front.
3. Fishing layer example — Plankton front, weak contour.
To enter fish mapping mode, open the Chart app menu, select [Mode:], and 4. Example context menu — Fishing recommendation.
then select the fish mapping icon. 5. Example fishing recommendation — Billfish location.
6. Fishing layer example — Plankton front, very strong contour.
7. Fish mapping legend.
Fishing mapping layers and Fishing recommendation layers are also available
in the Chart app’s Fishing chart mode.

Activating your SiriusXM receiver

Your MFD is compatible with the SR150 and SR200 SiriusXM receivers. Your
receiver must be activated before you can use fish mapping mode on your
MFD.
The following information is required to activate your SiriusXM receiver:
• Electronic Serial Number (ESN) — The ESN is printed on the product label
located on the underside of your SiriusXM receiver. You can also access
258
 the ESN from the [Fish mapping] settings menus in the chart app: ([Menu > • [Settings] — Provides access to the Chart app settings menu. For details
Settings > Fish mapping > Receiver ESN]). refer to: p.261 — Fish mapping mode settings menus
• Current billing information (if you already have a valid subscription). You can check when fishing data was last received / updated from the [Fish
Mapping] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Fish Mapping].
• Desired subscription package.
1. Obtain your SiriusXM receiver’s ESN.
2. Visit the Sirius Marine Weather website: SiriusXM fish mapping website: 16.3 Fishing recommendations
https://siriusxmcommunications.com/fishmapping/#features, and choose
a subscription package. Fishing recommendations enable you to view recommended locations that
3. Follow the “[Activate Now]” link to activate your receiver online. currently have ideal conditions for finding specific fish types. If conditions are
Alternatively, call 1–844–342–0665. not ideal for a selected species then no recommendation will be displayed.
Once your SiriusXM receiver is activated fish mapping mode will be available The following fish types can be enabled and disabled from the [Fishing
in the chart app menu. Recommendations] menu:

16.2 Fish mapping mode main menu

Fish mapping mode includes menu items related to fish mapping. Active
navigation and target tracking menus such as [Targets] , [Go] and [New] are
not available.
The following options are available from the main menu:
• [Find ship] — The find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centered in the Chart app.
• [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at anytime by selecting a mode.
For details of available chart modes, refer to: p.196 — Chart modes
• [Waypoints, routes, track] — Opens the [My data] menu to allow access to
waypoints, routes and track lists. For details refer to: p.103 — My data
• [Fishing recommendations] — Allows you to select which specific
fish type layers you want to display. For details refer to: 1. [Billfish]
p.259 — Fishing recommendations 2. [Kingfish]
• [Fish mapping layers] — Allows you to select which fishing data layers you 3. [Mahi]
want to display. For details refer to: p.260 — Fish mapping layers 4. [Swordfish]
• [Data display limits] — Allows you to restrict the display data limits for certain 5. [Tuna]
fish mapping layers. For details refer to: p.261 — Limiting data display limits
6. [Wahoo]
• [Animate weed lines] — Animates the weed line layer.
Fishing recommendations are also available in Fishing chart mode. Refer to:
• [Show legend] — Displays an onscreen legend for currently enabled layers. Fishing intel menu: p.255 — Fishing intel menu
Chart app - Fish mapping mode 259
16.4 Fish mapping layers 6. [SST Front] (Sea Surface Temperature front strength) — View contour
lines for areas where there are significant temperature changes which
The fish mapping layers allow you to overlay fishing data in the chart app to create distinct temperature boundaries between bodies of water.
help you identify the best locations for finding fish. 7. [Weed Lines] — View contour lines for locations where floating
The following fish mapping layers can be enabled and disabled from the algae/plants have been sighted recently, or are most likely to be forming.
[Fish mapping layers] menu: The weed lines contour can be animated using the [Animate weed lines]
option in the main menu. The weed line animation can cover a period of
up to 3 days (i.e.: today and up to 2 previous days).
Color gradients are used to identify the concentration or strength of the
relevant contour e.g.: a darker color for plankton contours indicates a higher
concentration of plankton in that area. The legend shows the color gradients
used and what they represent.
Fish mapping layers are also available in Fishing chart mode. Refer to:
Fishing intel menu: p.255 — Fishing intel menu

16.5 Layer / fish type identification

The available layers and fish types are identified by different colors.

1. [30M Sub Temp] (30 metre sub-surface sea temperatures) — View

contour lines for bodies of water below the surface temperature range.
2. [Height Anomaly] (Sea surface height anomaly) — View contour lines for
locations where the sea surface height is different than the surrounding
area. The anomalies show where fronts, eddies, upwellings and
downwellings are located.
3. [Plankton Contours] (Plankton concentration contours) — View contour
lines for areas of plankton concentration to help identify favorable
conditions.
4. [Plankton Front] (Plankton front strength) — View contour lines for areas
of strong plankton concentration bordering areas with relatively low or
no plankton.
5. [SST Contours] (Sea Surface Temperature contours) — View contour
lines for sea surface temperatures.

260
A legend identifying which layers and fish types are currently enabled can You can revert to displaying the full range of received data by switching
be displayed onscreen using the [Show Legend] option from the Chart app the option to [Off].
menu. When several layers/fish types are enabled, you can scroll the legend When manual limits are applied ‘(Limits ON)’ indication is displayed against
to see all enabled items. the layer in the legend and in the status area at the bottom left of the chart
Layers and fish types can also be selected in the Chart app, and the context app.
menu will identify which layer or fish type has been selected.

16.7 Fish mapping subscription

16.6 Limiting data display limits You can check your subscription status and data reception from the [Fish
By default the displayed data limits will cover the full range of received data.
mapping] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Fish mapping].
Upper and lower limits can be specified manually for SST contour, 30M sub
surface sea temperature and height anomaly layers.

The fish mapping settings menu lists the data types that have been received,
and also provides the date and time it was received and last updated.
You can also check your subscription status, and the Sirius receiver’s ESN
and signal strength.

16.8 Fish mapping mode settings menus

1. Select [Data display limits] from the Chart app menu.
2. Select the relevant option field, either [SST Contour limits], [30M Sub The following settings menus are available in fish mapping mode:
Temp Limits] or [Height Anomaly Limits]. • [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
3. Select [Manual] from the pop-over options. • [View & Motion] — For details refer to:
4. Adjust the [Upper limit] and [Lower limit] fields as required. p.249 — View & motion settings menu
The [Manual] option will limit the displayed data to the specified range. • [Fish Mapping] — For details refer to: p.261 — Fish mapping subscription
Setting a data limit option to [Auto] will filter the data according to the data • [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
limits received by your Sirius receiver.
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu
Chart app - Fish mapping mode 261
CHAPTER 17: CHART APP - WEATHER MODE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 17.1 Weather mode — page 263

• 17.2 Weather mode main menu — page 263
• 17.3 Activating your SiriusXM receiver — page 264
• 17.4 Weather layers — page 264
• 17.5 Animated weather — page 265
• 17.6 Weather radar layer — page 266
• 17.7 Cities and Surface observation stations layers — page 267
• 17.8 Cloud top and Lightning layers — page 267
• 17.9 Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers — page 268
• 17.10 Storm cast and Storm tracks layers — page 269
• 17.11 Wind and Watchbox layers — page 270
• 17.12 Wave direction, wave height and wave period layers — page 271
• 17.13 Weather mode settings menus — page 272
• 17.14 Weather settings menu — page 272
• 17.15 Weather subscription — page 272
• 17.16 Glossary of weather terms — page 273

262
17.1 Weather mode Weather symbols are organized into layers, accessible from the chart
menu: [Menu > Weather layers]. Each layer can be enabled and disabled
Weather mode allows you to track weather systems in relation to your vessel independently. For details refer to: p.264 — Weather layers
by overlaying live, historical and forecasted weather data directly on the
chart. In weather mode you can also view animated weather graphics and
read weather reports. Weather mode is available in the chart app if you
Weather mode context menu
have a compatible Sirius weather receiver and valid subscription. Switching The Weather mode context menu provides the standard lat/lon and range
the chart app to weather mode allows you to overlay weather data and and bearing information relative to your vessel. The context menu also
information from your weather receiver. provides access to weather-related data.
Selecting an area onscreen will open the context menu.
Important:
• Use of weather mode is subject to acceptance of the disclaimer that is
displayed when weather mode is activated. Please read and ensure you
understand the disclaimer’s conditions.
• Weather mode should NOT be used for navigation. Contours used for
safe navigation and related markings and objects are hidden in weather
mode. Active navigation controls and menus are also not available.
• Weather data is only available in North America and its coastal waters.

To enter weather mode, open the chart app menu, select [Mode:] and then The context menu provides access to the following reports:
select the weather icon. • [Weather info] — always available.
In weather mode the [Chart orientation] is fixed in [North-Up] mode. • [Reports] — always available.
• [Watchbox data] — available when selecting a watchbox area.
• [Storm cast data] — available when selecting a storm cast arrow.
• [Storm data] — available when selecting a storm track symbol.
• [Forecast for....] — available when selecting a city symbol.

17.2 Weather mode main menu

Weather mode includes menu items related to weather data. Active
navigation and target tracking menus such as [Targets] , [Go] and [New] are
not available.
The following options are available from the main menu:
• [Find ship] — The find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centred in the chart app.
Chart app - Weather mode 263
• [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at anytime by selecting a mode. SR200 diagnostics mode
For details of available chart modes refer to: p.196 — Chart modes
The SR200 diagnostic mode can be accessed from the audio settings menu
• [Weather layers] — Allows you to select the weather layers that you want to from the master MFD on the network. The diagnostics mode should be
display. For details refer to: p.264 — Weather layers referred to when liaising with Sirius product support.
• [Data display limits] — Allows you to restrict the display data limits for the
sea surface temperature layer.
• [Reports] — Displays text based weather reports for your vessel current
location.
• [Animate weather] — Activates weather animation mode. For details refer
to: p.265 — Animated weather
• [Show legend] — Displays an onscreen legend for currently enabled layers.
• [Settings] — Provides access the chart app settings menu.. For details refer
to: p.272 — Weather mode settings menus
You can check when fishing data was last received / updated from the
[Subscription ] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Subscription]. 1. Reset — Performs a factory reset and power cycle of the SR200.
2. Diagnostics mode — Displays the SR200’s diagnostic information.

17.3 Activating your SiriusXM receiver

Your MFD is compatible with the SR150 and SR200 SiriusXM receivers. Your
receiver must be activated before you can use weather mode on your MFD. 17.4 Weather layers
The following information is required to activate your SiriusXM receiver: The weather layers can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers]
• Electronic Serial Number (ESN) — The ESN is printed on the product label menu: [Menu > Weather layers].
located on the underside of your SiriusXM receiver. You can also access The following weather layers are available in weather mode:
the ESN from the [Weather] settings menu in the chart app: ([Menu >
Settings > Subscription > Receiver ESN]). • [Weather radar] — For details refer to: p.266 — Weather radar layer
• Current billing information (if you already have a valid subscription). • [Cities] — For details refer to:
p.267 — Cities and Surface observation stations layers
• Desired subscription package.
• [Cloud top] — For details refer to: p.267 — Cloud top and Lightning layers
1. Obtain your SiriusXM receiver’s ESN.
2. Visit the Sirius Marine Weather website: http://www.siriusxm.com/sxmma- • [Lightning] — For details refer to: p.267 — Cloud top and Lightning layers
rine, and choose a subscription package. • [Sea surface temperature] — For details refer to:
3. Follow the “Activate Now” link to activate your receiver online. p.268 — Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers
Alternatively, call 1–855–796–9847. • [Storm cast] — For details refer to:
Once your SiriusXM receiver is activated weather mode will be available in p.269 — Storm cast and Storm tracks layers
the chart app menu.
264
• [Storm tracks] — For details refer to:
p.269 — Storm cast and Storm tracks layers
• [Surface pressure] — For details refer to:
p.268 — Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers
• [Surface observation stations] — For details refer to:
p.267 — Cities and Surface observation stations layers
• [Wind] — For details refer to: p.270 — Wind and Watchbox layers
• [Watchbox] — For details refer to: p.270 — Wind and Watchbox layers
• [Wave height] — For details refer to:
p.271 — Wave direction, wave height and wave period layers
• [Wave period] — For details refer to:
p.271 — Wave direction, wave height and wave period layers
• [Wave direction] — For details refer to:
p.271 — Wave direction, wave height and wave period layers
1. Player controls.

17.5 Animated weather 2. Historical data animation is available for the weather radar layer.
3. Forecasted data animation is available for wind, wave and surface
In weather mode you can play weather animations of historical weather radar pressure layers.
data and forecasted wind, wave and surface pressure data.
4. Animation progress bar.
Weather animations can be accessed in weather mode by selecting [Animate
weather] from the menu. Animated weather layers
When animate weather is selected the player controls and symbols Animations are available for the following layers: Selecting a symbol will
representing weather layers are displayed. display the animation for that layer.

Chart app - Weather mode 265

 onscreen to aid identification of intensity. The images are displayed as pixels
on screen and the resolution of this feature is 2 km per pixel. Coverage
includes the Continental US, Canada, and portions of Mexico/Caribbean.

1. [Weather radar] — Historical precipitation data for the previous 2 hours

can be played.
2. [Wind] — Offshore wind forecast for up to 48 hours. High resolution
coastal and inland wind forecast for up to 24 hours.
3. [Wave height] — Offshore wave height forecast for up to 48 hours. High
resolution coastal wave height forecast for up to 24 hours. Great Lakes The legend can be enabled from the main menu: [Menu > Show legend].
wave height forecast for up to 24 hours.
The weather radar layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather
4. [Wave period] — Offshore wave period forecast for up to 48 hours. Great layers] menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Weather radar].
Lakes wave period forecast for up to 24 hours.
When the weather radar layer is enabled the transparency of the layer can
5. [Wave direction] — Offshore wave direction forecast for up to 48 hours. be adjusted using the [Visibility] setting: [Menu > Weather layers > Weather
Great Lakes wave direction forecast for up to 24 hours. radar > Visibility].
6. [Surface pressure] — Surface pressure forecast for up to 48 hours.
To exit animations open the [Menu].

17.6 Weather radar layer

With the weather radar layer enabled a color coded radar image is displayed.
This image shows a complete view of any precipitation across North America,
including the type and intensity. Rain, mixed and snow use different color
scales to identify intensity. A legend is available that can be displayed

266
17.7 Cities and Surface observation stations The cities layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers] menu:
[Menu > Weather layers > Cities].
layers
The surface observation stations layer can be enabled and disabled from
The Cities layer and Surface observation stations layer display symbols which the [Weather layers] menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Surface observation
represent the location of cities and surface observation stations respectively. stations].
The symbols used for surface observation stations also identify the type of
station.
17.8 Cloud top and Lightning layers
The cloud top layer provides a satellite image of current cloud coverage and
the lightning layer provides symbols to show the location of recent lightning
strikes.

City forecasts are available from the context menu when a City is selected.

Cloud tops
Cloud tops use Gray shading to identify cloud top height. The shading
changes at 5,000 feet increments, from Dark Gray to White. Clouds lower
1. City than 5,000 feet are not displayed. A legend is available that can be displayed
2. Buoy station onscreen to aid identification of cloud top heights.
3. CMAN station (Coastal-marine automated network) The legend can be enabled from the main menu: [Menu > Show legend].
4. WSI station (Weather services international) The cloud tops layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers]
menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Cloud tops].
5. METAR station (METeorological Aerodrome Reports)
Chart app - Weather mode 267
Lightning The sea surface temperature layer can be enabled and disabled from the
The shade of the lightning symbols represent the time the lightning strike [Weather layers] menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Sea surface temperature].
was detected. When the sea surface temperature layer is enabled the transparency of the
layer can be adjusted using the [Visibility] setting: [Menu > Weather layers >
Sea surface temperature > Visibility].
The Surface pressure layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather
layers] menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Surface pressure].
0 to 5 minutes ago 5 to 10 minutes ago 10 to 15 minutes ago
Surface pressure patterns
The lightning layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers] The Surface pressure layer uses standard meteorological patterns to
menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Lightning]. represent surface pressure conditions.

Symbol Description
17.9 Sea surface temperature and Surface High / low pressure (Blue and Red)
pressure layers
The Sea surface temperature layer uses color coding to identify water
temperature. A legend is available that can be displayed onscreen to aid
identification of sea surface temperature. The Surface pressure layer uses
standard pressure patterns and Isobars to identify surface pressure.
The legend can be enabled from the main menu: [Menu > Show legend]. Warm front (Red)

Cold front (Blue)

Occluded front (Purple)

Stationary front (Red-Blue)

268
 Symbol Description 17.10 Storm cast and Storm tracks layers
Trough (Brown)
The storm cast layer displays arrows that identifies a storm’s direction and
speed. The storm tracks layer identifies a storm’s historic, current and
forecasted path. Associated wind fields are also shown for the storm’s
Squall line (Red)
current location.

Dry line (Red)

Isobars (Gray)

Storm track symbols

Storm track symbols identify the type and time period of the storm.

Chart app - Weather mode 269

 17.11 Wind and Watchbox layers
The wind layer uses arrows or barbs to identify wind direction and speed.
The watchbox layer uses red polygons to identify areas where severe
weather is occurring or forecast within a specified range.

• 1, 2 and 3 represent historical data.

• 4, 5 and 6 represent current data.
• 7, 8 and 9 represent forecast data.
• 1, 4 and 7 represent a hurricane (category 1 to 5).
• 2, 5 and 8 represent a tropical storm.
Wind arrows
The direction of the arrows indicates the wind direction and the size of the
• 3, 6 and 9 represent a tropical disturbance, tropical depression.
arrow indicates wind speed, the larger the arrow the greater the wind speed.
Storm data is available from the context menu when a symbol is selected. Where conditions are calm a circular symbol is used.
Surface wind fields (wind radii) are shown using colored shape representing
the wind field area and speed. Wind barbs
• Pink — wind speed = 64 knots or greater. Wind barbs identify wind direction and speed.
• Orange — wind speed = 50 knots or greater. Barbs provide a more accurate speed identification than arrows.
• Yellow — wind speed = 34 knots or greater.
The storm cast layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers]
menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Storm cast].
The storm tracks layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers]
menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Storm tracks].

270
 17.12 Wave direction, wave height and wave
period layers
The wave direction layer uses arrows to identify the direction waves are
travelling. The wave height layer uses color coding to identify the height
of waves, the wave period layer also uses color coding to identify the gap
between waves. A legend is available that can be displayed onscreen to aid
identification of wave height and wave period.
The legend can be enabled from the main menu: [Menu > Show legend].

Wave direction and wave height

Adding the half barbs, full barbs and flags together provides wind speed. The
direction the barbs point towards indicates where the wind is coming from.
• Half barbs = 5 knots
• Full barbs = 10 knots
• Flag = 50 knots
The wind layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers] menu:
[Menu > Weather layers > Wind].
You can switch between using [Arrows] or [Barbs] for wind data from the
[Weather settings] menu: [Menu > Settings > Weather > Wind symbol].

Watchbox
The watchbox layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers]
menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Watchbox].
When the watchbox layer is enabled you can select a watchbox area
onscreen and view the details by selecting [Watchbox data] from the context The wave direction layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather
menu. layers] menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Wave direction].
The wave height layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather layers]
Watchbox alerts menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Wave height].
Watchbox alerts are alert notifications that are displayed onscreen if a
tornado or thunderstorm alert is received. Watchbox alerts can be enabled
and disabled from the [Weather] settings menu[Menu > Settings > Weather >
Watchbox alerts].
You can specify the range from your vessel that will trigger an alerts using
the Watchbox range setting: [Menu > Settings > Weather > Watchbox range].
Chart app - Weather mode 271
Wave period 17.14 Weather settings menu
The weather setting menu contains settings related to SiriusXM weather
receiver data.
Menu item and description Description
[Wind symbol] • Arrows
Determines whether Arrows or Barbs are used for Wind
• Barbs
direction graphics in Weather mode.
[Marine zone boundaries] • On
Determines whether marine boundaries are shown in
• Off
Weather mode.
[Watchbox alerts] • On
Enables and disables Watchbox alerts.
• Off
[Watchbox range] • 10nm
Determines the range from your vessel that Watchbox
• 50nm
alerts are displayed
• 150nm
The wave period layer can be enabled and disabled from the [Weather
layers] menu: [Menu > Weather layers > Wave period]. • 300nm
• 500nm

17.13 Weather mode settings menus 17.15 Weather subscription

The following settings menus are available in weather mode: You can check your Sirius subscription status and data receipt from the
[Subscription ] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Subscription].
• [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
• [Weather] — For details refer to: p.272 — Weather settings menu
• [Subscription] — For details refer to: p.272 — Weather subscription
• [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu

The subscription settings menu will list the data types that have been
received and provide the date and time it was received and last updated.
You can also check your subscription status, your receiver’s ESN and you
receivers signal strength.
272
17.16 Glossary of weather terms
Term Definition
Cold front The boundary between two different air masses where cold air pushes warm air out of the way and brings colder weather.
Cyclone A large area of low atmospheric pressure, characterized by inward spiralling winds. A “low” also called a “depression”. Also the
name used for a hurricane in the Indian Ocean and Western Pacific.
Depression An area of low pressure. Also called a cyclone.
Dry line A region where there is a strong gradient in dew point temperatures. It is often found in a region where strong thunderstorms develop.
Forecast A prediction which informs us what the weather is going to be like within a specific location.
Front The boundary between two masses of air with different temperatures (i.e. a mass of cold air and a mass of warm air).
High Also known as an 'anticyclone' — an area of high atmospheric pressure with a system of winds rotating outwards. This usually
means dry weather. It is the opposite of a 'low'.
High Pressure A mass of air that presses down strongly on the surface of the Earth because it is being cooled and is therefore more dense.
Hurricane A violent, spiralling storm that forms over the Atlantic Ocean, with winds over 120 kph. Such storms usually have a lifespan of several
days. Also known as a typhoon or tropical cyclone. There are 5 levels of hurricane:
• Category 1 — Winds 74–95 mph (64–82 kt or 119–153 km/hr). Storm surge generally 4–5 ft above normal. No real damage to
building structures. Damage primarily to unanchored mobile homes, shrubbery, and trees. Some damage to poorly constructed
signs. Also, some coastal road flooding and minor pier damage.
• Category 2 — Winds 96–110 mph (83–95 kt or 154–177 km/hr). Storm surge generally 6–8 feet above normal. Some roofing
material, door, and window damage of buildings. Considerable damage to shrubbery and trees with some trees blown down.
Considerable dam age to mobile homes, poorly constructed signs, and piers. Coastal and low lying escape routes flood 2–4 hours
before arrival of the hurricane centre Small craft in unprotected anchorages break moorings.
• Category 3 — Winds 111–130 mph (96–113 kt or 178–209 km/hr). Storm surge generally 9–12 ft above normal. Some structural
damage to small residences and utility buildings with a minor amount of curtain wall failures. Damage to shrubbery and trees
with foliage blown off trees and large trees blown down. Mobile homes and poorly constructed signs are destroyed. Low lying
escape routes are cut by rising water 3–5 hours before arrival of the centre of the hurricane. Flooding near the coast destroys
smaller structures with larger structures damaged by battering from floating debris. Terrain continuously lower than 5 ft above
mean sea level may be flooded inland 8 miles (13 km) or more. Evacuation of low lying residences with several blocks of the
shoreline may be required.
• Category 4 — Winds 131–155 mph (114–135 kt or 210–249 km/hr). Storm surge generally 13–18 ft above normal. More extensive
curtain wall failures with some complete roof structure failures on small residences. Shrubs, trees, and all signs are blown down.
Complete destruction of mobile homes. Extensive damage to doors and windows. Low lying escape routes may be cut by rising
water 3–5 hours before arrival of the centre of the hurricane. Major damage to lower floors of structures near the shore. Terrain
lower than 10 ft above sea level may be flooded requiring massive evacuation of residential areas as far inland as 6 miles (10 km).

Chart app - Weather mode 273

 Term Definition
• Category 5 — Winds greater than 155 mph (135 kt or 249 km/hr). Storm surge generally greater than 18 ft above normal. Complete
roof failure on many residences and industrial buildings. Some complete building failures with small utility buildings blown over or
away. All shrubs, trees, and signs blown down. Complete destruction of mobile homes. Severe and extensive window and door
damage. Low lying escape routes are cut by rising water 3–5 hours before arrival of the centre of the hurricane. Major damage to
lower floors of all structures located less than 15 ft above sea level and within 500 yards of the shoreline. Massive evacuation of
residential areas on low ground within 5–10 miles (8–16 km) of the shoreline may be required.
Isobar A line on a weather map linking areas with equal air pressure.
Lightning Discharge of static electricity in the atmosphere, usually between the ground and a storm cloud.
Low Also called a 'depression' this region of low pressure can mean wet weather.
Low Pressure A mass of air that presses down only weakly on the surface of the Earth’s surface as it is warmed and it therefore less dense.
Millibar A unit used to measure atmospheric pressure.
Occluded Front An area where warm air is pushed upwards as a cold front overtakes a warm front and pushes underneath it.
Precipitation Moisture that is released from the atmosphere as rain, drizzle, hail, sleet or snow, as well as dew and fog.
Pressure Centre A region of high or low pressure.
Squall line A non-frontal band, or line, of thunderstorms.
Super typhoon A typhoon that reaches maximum sustained 1 minute surface winds of at least 65 m/s (130 kt, 150 mph). This is the equivalent of a
strong category 4 or 5 hurricane in the Atlantic basin or a category 5 severe tropical cyclone in the Australian basin.
Tornado A funnel shaped whirlwind which extends to the ground from storm clouds.
Tropical cyclone A low pressure system that generally forms in the tropics. The cyclone is accompanied by thunderstorms and, in the Northern
Hemisphere, a counterclockwise circulation of winds near the earth's surface.
Tropical depression An organized system of clouds and thunderstorms with a defined surface circulation and maximum sustained winds of 38 mph
(33 kt) or less.
Tropical storm An organized system of strong thunderstorms with a defined surface circulation and maximum sustained winds of 39–73 mph
(34–63 kt).
Tropics An area on the Earth's surface that lies between 30º north and 30º south of the equator.
Trough An elongated area of relatively low atmospheric pressure, usually extending from the centre of a low pressure region.
Typhoon The name for a tropical storm originating in the Pacific Ocean, usually the China Sea. They are basically the same as the hurricanes
of the Atlantic Ocean and the cyclones of the Bay of Bengal.
Wave cyclone A storm or low pressure centre that moves along a front.
Wave period The period is the time gap between successive waves and the longer the period the slower the waves travel.

274
CHAPTER 18: CHART APP - TIDES MODE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 18.1 Tides mode — page 276

• 18.2 Tides mode main menu — page 276
• 18.3 Using animation controls — page 277
• 18.4 Setting a specific date for animations — page 277
• 18.5 Tide station information — page 277
• 18.6 LightHouse charts dynamic tide graphic — page 278
• 18.7 Navionics dynamic tide graphic — page 278
• 18.8 Current station information — page 278
• 18.9 LightHouse Charts dynamic current graphic — page 279
• 18.10 C-Map dynamic current graphic — page 279
• 18.11 Navionics dynamic current graphic — page 279
• 18.12 Displaying tide or current graphs — page 280
• 18.13 Tides mode settings menus — page 280

Chart app - Tides mode 275

18.1 Tides mode 4. Skip to the actual date / time — Position data is required from your GNSS
(GPS) receiver to obtain current date and time.
In Tides mode the Tides animation control is displayed onscreen and the
Tide station and Current station symbols in the Chart app are replaced with 5. Own vessel tide (Set and Drift) vector.
dynamic graphics which identify Tide and Current conditions. You can use 6. Play / Pause animation — When the animation is playing it will cycle
the animation controls to play Tide and Current predictions for a 24 hour through the current 24 hour period continuously.
period. The own vessel Tide vector is also enabled in Tides mode.
7. Dynamic tide height graphic.
Note: 8. Dynamic current graphic.
• The Tides mode is only available if you have cartography that provides
the Tides and Current data. Refer to your cartography provider for more Note:
information.
The data provided in the Tide and Current graphs and graphics is for
• The Tides mode requires accurate date information, usually taken from information purposes only and must NOT be relied upon as a substitute for
the GNSS (GPS) position data available to your MFD. Alternatively, you prudent navigation. Only official government charts and notices to mariners
can input a specific date manually. contain all the information needed for safe navigation.

18.2 Tides mode main menu

The Tides mode menu contains items related to tides animation. Active
navigation and target tracking menus such as [Targets] , [Go] and [New] are
not available.
The following options are available from the main menu:
• [Find ship] — The find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centred in the chart app.
• [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at anytime by selecting a mode.
For details of available chart modes refer to: p.196 — Chart modes
• [Animate tides] — For details refer to: p.277 — Using animation controls
• [Select date] — For details refer to:
1. Animation progress bar — The progress bar is Blue for the current 24 p.277 — Setting a specific date for animations
hour period, or Green when playing animations from a different day. • [Settings] — Provides access the chart app settings menu. For details refer
2. Skip forwards — Skips forwards in user defined intervals, when the end to: p.280 — Tides mode settings menus
of the progress bar is reached skipping forward will progress to the next
day.
3. Skip backwards — Skips backwards in user defined intervals. When the
beginning of the progress bar is reached, skipping backward will regress
to the previous day.
276
18.3 Using animation controls Tide graph
Tide graphs can be accessed by selecting [Tide station] from the Tide
The animation controls can be selected using the Touchscreen, alternatively station’s context menu.
you can use the MFD’s physical buttons or a RMK controller to control
animations as described below:
With the Chart app set to [Tides mode].
1. Select [Animate tides] from the menu.
2. Use the [Left] button on the Uni-controller to skip forwards in user defined
intervals.
3. Use the [Right] button on the Uni-controller to skip backwards in user
defined intervals.
4. Use the Uni-controller’s [OK] button to Play or Pause the animation.
You can define the User skip time interval -from the Advanced menu: [Menu
> Settings > Advanced > Tide animation interval].

18.4 Setting a specific date for animations

You can select a specific date for the Tide and Current animation predictions.
1. Select [Select date] from the main menu.
2. Use the [Up] and [Down] arrows to change the date to the required day.
3. Select [Save].
The animation will be set for the specified date. 1. Sunrise — Indicates time of sunrise.
2. Sunset — Indicates time of sunset.
3. Height — Provides tide height in selected units.
18.5 Tide station information 4. Time — Indicates time of day.
When using compatible cartography, Tide station information is available at 5. Low / High tide — Indicates the time of low and high tides.
the location of Tide stations.
6. Time and date options — Use the buttons to view previous, next or
today’s tide predictions, or enter a date by selecting the date field.
Tide station symbol
The location of Tide stations is marked on the Chart using
a diamond-shaped symbol with a ‘T’ in the middle. The
symbol color may vary.

Chart app - Tides mode 277

18.6 LightHouse charts dynamic tide graphic 18.8 Current station information
When the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in [Tides mode], the Depending on your cartography, Current station information may be available
standard Tide station symbol is replaced with a dynamic Tide height graphic: at the location of Current stations.

Current station symbol

The location of Current stations is marked on the Chart
using a diamond-shaped symbol with a ‘C’ in the middle.
The symbol color may vary.

1. High tide (Full Green indicator with equals symbol)

2. Decreasing tide (Red decreasing indicator with down arrow) Current graph
3. Low tide (Nearly empty Green indicator with equals symbol) Current graphs can be accessed by selecting [Current station] from the
Current station’s context menu.
4. Increasing tide (Green indicator with up arrow)

18.7 Navionics dynamic tide graphic

When the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in [Tides mode], the
standard Tide station symbol is replaced with a dynamic Tide height graphic:

1. Tide bar — The tide bar plots the current tide height against the maximum
predicted tide height for that day.
2. Red arrow indicates tide height is increasing.
3. Tide height — Tide height is displayed in user-selected depth units, with 1. Sunrise — Indicates time of sunrise.
decimals displayed in subscript. Decimals are not shown for values of 10 2. Sunset — Indicates time of sunset.
or greater. 3. Speed — Provides current speed in selected units.
4. Blue arrow indicates tide height is decreasing. 4. Time — Indicates time of day.
278
5. Direction — Indicates the direction of the current (relative to North). 18.10 C-Map dynamic current graphic
6. Time and date options — Use the buttons to view previous, next or
today’s tide predictions, or enter a date by selecting the date field. When the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in [Tides mode], the
standard Current station symbol is replaced with a dynamic Current graphic.
7. Ebb / Flood — Displays a list showing ebb, slack and flood tides. Arrows are used to indicate the direction of current flow. The size and color
of the arrow indicates the strength of the current:

18.9 LightHouse Charts dynamic current

graphic
When the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in [Tides mode], the
standard Current station symbol is replaced with a dynamic Current graphic.
Arrows are used to indicate the direction of current flow. The size and color
of the arrow indicates the strength of the current:

1. Yellow square: 0 Knots to 0.1 Knots

2. Yellow small arrow: 0.2 Knots to 1.0 Knots
3. Orange small arrow: 1.1 Knots to 2.0 Knots
1. Yellow small arrow: 0 Knots to 1.0 Knots (Leisure chart style) 4. Orange large arrow: 2.1 Knots to 3.0 Knots
2. Orange medium arrow: 1.1 Knots to 2.0 Knots (Leisure chart style) 5. Red large arrow: Greater than 3.0 Knots
3. Red large arrow: Greater than 2.0 Knots (Leisure chart style)
4. Yellow small arrow: 0 Knots to 1.0 Knots (Government chart style)
5. Orange medium arrow: 1.1 Knots to 2.0 Knots (Government chart style) 18.11 Navionics dynamic current graphic
6. Red large arrow: Greater than 2.0 Knots (Government chart style) When the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in [Tides mode], the
standard Current station symbol is replaced with a dynamic Current graphic.
Arrows are used to indicate the direction of current flow.
The length of the arrow indicates the speed of the current; the longer
the arrow, the faster the speed. The border color of the arrow indicates
increasing or decreasing speed.

Chart app - Tides mode 279

1. Red = increasing current speed.
2. Blue = decreasing current speed.
Current speed is shown inside the arrow. Current speed is displayed in
user-selected speed units, with decimals displayed in subscript. Decimals are
not shown for values of 10 or greater.
If tidal conditions are “slack”, the word “SLACK” appears in a box with a
Blue border.

18.12 Displaying tide or current graphs

1. Select a tide or current station symbol or dynamic graphic.
2. Select [more options] from the context menu.
3. Select [Tide station] or [Current station]

Note:
You can also access tide and current graphs by selecting [More info] from
the pop-over options when performing a [Find nearest] search for tides.

18.13 Tides mode settings menus

The following settings menus are available in tides mode:
• [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
• [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu
280
CHAPTER 19: CHART APP - ANCHOR MODE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 19.1 Anchor mode — page 282

• 19.2 Anchor mode main menu — page 283
• 19.3 Setting up the anchor drag alarm — page 283
• 19.4 Anchor mode settings menus — page 284

Chart app - Anchor mode 281

19.1 Anchor mode
Anchor mode should be used when your vessel is at anchor. Anchor mode
uses your vessel’s GNSS (GPS) position to record your location when your
anchor hits the bottom. Anchor mode will calculate if your vessel has
dragged its anchor from its original location, based on specified values and
then trigger the Anchor drag alarm. To activate the anchor drag alarm the
Anchoring wizard must be completed.

Note:
[Anchor mode] does not take into account effects that tide may have on
chain length or depth values.

Before Anchor mode can be used the system requires the following details:
• GNSS (GPS) position — via a connected receiver.
• Depth — via a connected transducer. 1. Maximum swing radius — calculation determined using Boat length,
Bow to GPS distance, Chain length and Depth.
• Length of your vessel (bow to stern)— value specified in [Boat length] field.
2. Drag limit — calculation determined using Maximum swing radius, Boat
• GNSS (GPS) receiver distance from vessel’s bow — value specified in [Bow length and Bow to GPS distance.
to GPS] field.
3. Boat length — user defined measurement.
[Boat length] and [Bow to GPS] can be set in the [Boat details] settings tab:
[Homescreen > Settings > Boat details]. If the values have not been set then 4. Bow to GPS — user defined measurement.
you will be prompted to enter them when activating [Anchor mode] for the 5. Waterline to deck — 1 meter is add to the calculation to allow for the
first time. distance from the waterline to the deck.
6. Depth — data received from depth transducer.
Note:
7. Depth offset — the specified depth offset is added to the calculation.
If depth data and position data are not available you will not be able to The depth offset is based on your transducer settings (Zero if [Below
start the anchoring wizard. transducer] is selected, positive value if [Below waterline] is selected and
negative value if [Below keel] is selected.) Refer to: p.313 — Depth offset
Anchor mode uses the following data, measurements and calculations: 8. Chain length — default calculation based on 4 times depth. Chain length
can be altered manually to specify actual chain length.
The anchor drag alarm is triggered if your GNSS (GPS) receiver passes the
distance from the original anchor position by the specified drag limit distance.
When anchor mode is active a track of your vessels movements will be
recorded and representative graphics will be displayed onscreen in the chart
app.
282
 9. Drag limit value — Drag limit distance from anchor.

19.2 Anchor mode main menu

Anchor mode includes menu items related to the anchoring feature. Active
navigation and target tracking menus such as [Targets] , [Go] and [New] are
not available.
The following options are available from the main menu:
• [Find ship] — The find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centred in the chart app.
• [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at anytime by selecting a mode.
For details of available chart modes refer to: p.196 — Chart modes
• [Start anchoring] — For details refer to:
1. [Cancel — raise anchor] — selecting this button will cancel the anchor p.283 — Setting up the anchor drag alarm
alarm. The status of the alarm is shown below the button. • [Raise anchor] — Available when anchoring mode is active. Selecting will
2. Max swing radius circle — a circle with a solid black outline is placed cancel anchoring.
around the anchor icon which represent the maximum swing radius. • [Chain length] — Available when anchoring mode is active. Selecting
3. Tide vector — Tide set and drift vector graphic. allows you to adjust your chain length.
4. Drag limit circle — a circle with a dashed red outline is placed around • [Settings] — Provides access the chart app settings menu. For details refer
the anchor icon which represents the drag limit. The Anchor drag alarm to: p.284 — Anchor mode settings menus
is triggered when your vessel’s GNSS (GPS) receivers passes this line.
5. Anchor position — an anchor icon is placed at the GPS position your
vessel was located when Drop anchor was selected in the Anchoring
wizard.
19.3 Setting up the anchor drag alarm
6. Anchor chain — a line is drawn between the anchor icon and the vessel
icon to represent the anchor chain. To set up the anchor drag alarm using the anchoring wizard follow the steps
7. Track line — whilst the anchor alarm is active a track line will be recorded below.
to show where your vessel has been. 1. Select a suitable location to anchor your vessel.
2. Select [ANCHOR] mode from the Chart app menu.
Note: If a track is already being recorded when anchor mode is 3. If prompted enter your [Boat length] and [Bow to GPS] distances and
activated the current track is stopped and saved, once anchor mode is select [OK].
deactivated a new track will start recording automatically. 4. Select the [Start anchoring wizard] button located on the center of the
screen.
8. Wind vector — Wind speed and direction vector graphic The anchoring wizard page 1 is displayed:
Chart app - Anchor mode 283
5. Based on the initial Max swing radius shown in the live view pane, ensure 12. Check that the anchor is secure. If conditions have changed adjust the
the location is suitable and that no obstacle could come into contact with chain length or re-lay the anchor as appropriate.
your vessel as it drifts. 13. Select [Done (Alarm on)].
6. Head your vessel into the wind/tide. 14. The Anchor drag alarm will be triggered if the vessel’s antenna drifts
7. If required, manually adjust the chain length using the [Plus] and [Minus] outside of the specified Drag limit.
buttons. Once the Anchor drag alarm is active it can be cancelled at anytime by
selecting [Cancel – raise anchor] from the Chart app screen or Raise anchor
By default the chain length is 4 times the water depth. from the Alarms manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Anchor Drag
> Raise anchor].
8. Lower your vessel’s anchor.
9. Once the anchor hits the bottom select [Mark anchor position].
10. Layout you remaining chain length while reversing / drifting with the
wind/tide.
19.4 Anchor mode settings menus
11. Select [Chain out]. The following settings menus are available in anchor mode:
The anchoring wizard page 2 is displayed: • [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
• [Layers] — For details refer to: p.244 — Layers settings menu
• [Depth] — For details refer to: p.247 — Depth settings menu
• [View & Motion] — For details refer to:
p.249 — View & motion settings menu
• [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu
284
CHAPTER 20: SAILING FEATURES
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 20.1 Chart app - Racing mode — page 286

• 20.2 Laylines — page 286
• 20.3 Wind shift bar — page 293
• 20.4 Sail plan recommendations — page 294
• 20.5 Sailing data page — page 296
• 20.6 Autopilot wind vane mode — page 296
• 20.7 Race start line (SmartStart™) and Race timer — page 299

Sailing features 285

20.1 Chart app - Racing mode Racing mode settings menus
The following settings menus are available in racing mode:
Racing mode • [Cartography] — For details refer to: p.243 — Cartography settings menu
Racing mode enables sailing and race sailing related features such as the • [Layers] — For details refer to: p.244 — Layers settings menu
race timer and race start line. • [Depth] — For details refer to: p.247 — Depth settings menu
Racing mode is available in the Chart app when [Sailing] has been selected • [View & Motion] — For details refer to:
as the activity during the initial MFD startup wizard. p.249 — View & motion settings menu
Racing mode switches the Chart app to use the Auto range [Cart motion] • [Laylines] — For details refer to: p.286 — Laylines
mode option so that the Cart app maintains the largest chart scale that can
display both the vessel icon and if applicable, the destination/target waypoint. • [Advanced] — For details refer to: p.250 — Advanced settings menu
• [Page settings] — For details refer to: p.251 — Page settings menu
Racing mode main menu
In racing mode the main menu includes both common options and some
sailing specific options. 20.2 Laylines
The following options are available from the main menu: In sailing; Laylines are COG vector lines showing the course the boat will take
• [Find ship] — The Find ship icon will be available in the main menu and as when sailing at the optimum angle to the wind, on either tack. The laylines
an onscreen icon anytime that your vessel is not centered in the chart app. will show whether the boat will reach the intended destination on the current
tack, or if another tack is required to meet the destination. Sailing to the
• [Mode] — Chart app mode can be changed at any time by selecting a target wind angle maximizes your Velocity Made Good (VMG) resulting in
mode. For details of available chart modes refer to: p.196 — Chart modes your boat traveling along the layline.
• [Go] — Provides options to start active navigation. Laylines show the course to a destination point based on True Wind Direction
(TWD) and the selected [Sail performance] option:
• [New] — Provides options to create new waypoints, routes, tracks and
search patterns. • [Mirrored TWA] (True Wind Angle) — This setting assume the boat is
sailing to the optimum wind angle. The current boat heading is used as
• [Race timer] — For details refer to: the active layline (adjusted for tides if the options has been enabled and
p.299 — Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer with estimated leeway if not) and then mirrors the current TWA to show the
• [Race start line] — For details refer to: opposite tack layline.
p.299 — Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer • [Fixed Angles] — The laylines use fixed upwind and downwind angles. For
• [Waypoints, routes, track] — Opens the [My data] menu to allow access to details refer to: p.288 — Fixed angles laylines
waypoints, routes and tracks lists. For details refer to: p.103 — My data • [Polar] — The laylines use a polar table which reflects the performance of
• [Targets] — Provides access to target tracking options. For details refer your particular vessel. For details refer to: p.289 — Polar laylines
to: p.223 — Target tracking [Sail performance] settings can be configured from the Homescreen settings
• [Settings] — Provides access to the chart app settings menu. For details menu[Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].
refer to: p.286 — Racing mode settings menus The chart app’s Laylines settings menu provides further options ([Chart app
> Settings > Laylines]) which allow laylines to account for tides and leeway
and to display wind shift graphics.
286
Example upwind laylines Layline data requirements
The requirements for displaying laylines are as follows:
• The MFD’s [Activity] must be set to [Sailing]. Boat activity is set during the
MFD’s initial startup wizard. If your MFD is not currently using the sailing
activity then a factory reset is required to change activity to [Sailing].
• The following sensor data must be available:
– Wind data
– Speed Through Water (STW)
– GNSS data (COG, SOG, position)
– Heading
• Display of laylines must also be enabled from either the Chart app
[Laylines] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Laylines > Display laylines on
this chart] or from the [Laylines] vessel popover menu option.

Displaying and interpreting laylines

Laylines are displayed differently depending on navigation conditions.
Laylines are displayed when:
• A tack is required to meet an active [Waypoint] or [Goto].
1. Port vessel layline. • The direct distance to the destination point is less than 150 nm from your
2. TWD & TWS. vessel.
3. Tide direction and speed When the destination waypoint is upwind and the layline has not been
reached, the laylines will be displayed as a parallelogram. Green lines
4. Starboard destination layline. represent starboard tack and red lines represent port tack.
5. Starboard vessel layline
Example upwind laylines
6. Destination waypoint.
7. Port destination layline.

Note:
Laylines show the predicted COG (Course Over Ground) when steering to
the optimum upwind or downwind angle. Due to tide and leeway; you
will often have to point the boat at a different angle to the layline in order
to travel along the line. Optimized steering guidance is available on the
Sailing page of the Dashboard app.

Sailing features 287

When the boat passes the layline required to make the destination waypoint Example upwind boat laylines
only 1 layline is drawn from the boat and a perpendicular layline is drawn
from the destination waypoint. Red lines are used for upwind port, green
lines for upwind starboard.
This layline pair creates a corridor within which the boat can sail directly
to the waypoint.

Example upwind port tack laylines

If there is no active navigation or the destination waypoint is more than

150 nm away, only boat laylines will be displayed.
When the destination waypoint is downwind the laylines will be displayed
as an orange parallelogram, adjusted for gybing.

Fixed angles laylines

Example upwind starboard tack laylines The following options are available for fixed angle laylines:

288
• [Sail performance] — Use this option to switch to [Polar] angles specific over 500 popular sailing hulls preloaded. You can use the Polar options in
for your vessel or [Mirrored TWA] . the Laylines tab to select the boat model that best matches your own, in
terms of Polar information.
• [Upwind angle] — Specify the fixed upwind angle. The default upwind
angle is 45° You can adjust the upwind angle to a value between 15° to 70°. For a list of preloaded polars, see: https://raymarine.custhelp.com/app/an-
swers/detail/a_id/5712
• [Downwind angle] — Specify the fixed Downwind angle. The default
downwind angle is 140° You can adjust the downwind angle to a value You can also create your own table of polar data for your specific vessel, by
between 125° to 175°. downloading a template from the Raymarine website and populating the
template with the key polar data for your vessel. This data is often provided
• [Boat type] — Determines the boat icon used in the Chart app. Selecting
by the boat manufacturer - refer to the manufacturer for more information.
one of the following boat types will also provide more accurate leeway
calculations: You can download the Polar Table template here: https://www.rayma-
rine.com/en-gb/learning/online-guides/polar-performance-data
– Sail cruiser (leeway 5° – 10°)
– Race sail (leeway (3° – 5°)
– Catamaran (leeway 10° – 20°)

Note:
– Leeway calculations are only used when Adjust for tides is disabled.
– If you select a boat type other than one with stated leeway angles
then no leeway correction will be applied in the calculations.

• [Display laylines on this chart] — Enables and disables display of laylines

in the current Chart app instance.
• [Adjust for tides] — When enabled layline calculations will take into account
tidal flow and leeway.

Polar laylines
In sailing, the Velocity Made Good (VMG) principle demonstrates that
travelling in a straight line is not always the quickest route, and polars The following options are available for polar laylines:
enable you to optimize your vessel's performance to its best advantage, by • [Sail performance] — Use this option to switch to using specified angles
improving the accuracy of LightHouse 4's dynamic laylines to display how far [Fixed angles] or [Mirrored TWA] .
you need to sail on a current tack to reach a target waypoint after tacking
and taking wind conditions into consideration. • [Polar] — Browse the list to find the boat model that most closely matches
your own boat, or import your own polar table.
Polars describe how fast a sailing vessel may travel at different wind speeds
(TWS), and at different angles to the wind (TWA). Every type of sailing vessel • [Boat type] — Determines the boat icon used in the Chart app. Selecting
has its own polar table (or VPP, Velocity Prediction Program), calculated from one of the following boat types will also provide more accurate leeway
hull shape, weight, rigging, and sail setup. LightHouse 4 has Polar data for calculations:
Sailing features 289
 – Sail cruiser (leeway 5° – 10°) 1. Select the [Sail performance] button and choose [Polar] from the pop-over
menu.
– Race sail (leeway (3° – 5°)
If this is the first time a polar has been selected or imported, the Select
– Catamaran (leeway 10° – 20°) polar menu is displayed.
If a polar has already been selected or imported, select the [Polar] button
Note: instead to open the Select polar menu.
– Leeway calculations are only used when Adjust for tides is disabled. 2. Select [Import polar].
– If you select a boat type other than one with stated leeway angles 3. Browse to the csv file on your memory card.
then no leeway correction will be applied in the calculations. 4. Select the csv file.
You will be returned to the Select polar menu and the [My Polars] option
should be available at the top of the list. The [My polars] option will be
• [Display laylines on this chart] — Enables and disables display of laylines suffixed with the number of imported polars on the display.
in the current Chart app instance. 5. Select [My Polars].
• [Adjust for tides] — When enabled layline calculations will take into account 6. Select the polar you just imported.
tidal flow and leeway. 7. Select [Activate polar] from the pop-over menu.
Importing a Polar table The imported polar table will now be used.
Polar Tables are collections of custom data related to the physical Polar table csv file layout
characteristics of a specific vessel which determine sailing performance.
These Polar tables can be used to help you achieve maximum sailing Polar table csv files must be laid out as follows:
performance for your specific vessel by describing how fast a sailing vessel In the below example each value is placed in a separate cell.
may travel at different wind speeds (TWS), and at different angles to the wind
(TWA). Every type of sailing vessel has its own polar table (or VPP, Velocity Example polar table
Prediction Program), calculated from hull shape, weight, rigging, and sail
setup. LightHouse 4 uses this polar table information to calculate the fastest
course, based on the current wind speed and direction. Polar data for over
500 popular sailing hulls is preloaded into LightHouse 4. If Polar data for your
specific vessel is not preloaded, you can create your own Polar table in csv
format and import it into LightHouse 4.
Typically, Polar data is provided by the boat manufacturer - refer to the
manufacturer for more information.
Polar tables can be imported via the chart app [Laylines] settings menu and
from the [Boat details] menu accessed from the Homescreen.
A Polar table template is available to download from the Raymarine
website, which can be used as a starting point for your custom Polar table:
https://www.raymarine.com/en-us/learning/online-guides/polar-performance-
data 1. TWA (True Wind Angle) — Define the range of TWAs you want to enter
Speed Through Water (STW) values for.
290
 Note: As a minimum 3 rows must be included. Adjusting a Polar table
Polar table that have been imported can be adjusted.
2. TWS (True Wind Speed) — Define the range of TWSs you want to enter
speed values for.

Note: As a minimum 3 TWS values are required.

3. STW (Speed Through Water) values — Define the speed for each
TWA/TWS.
Alternatively polar tables can be laid out with all values in 1 column as shown
below:

Example alternate layout polar table

Only the vessel speed values can be adjusted, the TWA and TWS ranges
cannot be changed.
1. Select the imported Polar table that you want to adjust from the [My
polars] list.
2. Select [Adjust polar table] from the pop-over menu.
3. Select the value that you want to adjust.
1. TWS (True Wind Speed) — All TWS values are entered in the top cell,
4. Use the [Up] and [Down] arrows on the numeric adjustment control to
separated using a semicolon.
change the value.
2. TWA (True Wind Angle) — The TWA is entered as the first characters in 5. Select another location on the screen to close the numeric adjustment
each subsequent cell. control and then select [Save]..
3. STW (Speed Through Water) — The speed for each TWS is entered for
Imported polar table options
each TWA, separated using a semicolon.
When an imported polar table is selected from the [My polars] list a pop-over
A Polar table csv template is available to download from the following menu is displayed which has a number of options.
web page: https://www.raymarine.com/en-us/learning/online-guides/polar-
performance-data The pop-over menu options are:
• [Activate polar] — Selecting will activate the selected polar table.
Sailing features 291
• [Rename] — Selecting will open the onscreen keyboard where you can Variation — high end of range
rename the polar table.
• [Adjust polar table] — Selecting will open the polar table where you can
adjust vessel speed values.
• [Duplicate] — Selecting will create a copy of the selected polar table.
• [Delete] — Selecting will delete the selected polar table from the display.

Wind shift data

As True Wind Direction (TWD) is constantly changing, the position of the
laylines changes over time. These changes are shown as lighter colored
shaded triangles which represent the variation of TWD over a specified time
period.

Variation — Low end of range

With TWD holding at the high end of its range of variation, the vessel can tack
to starboard and will only lay the windward or leeward mark as it reaches the
end of the shaded area. However, if TWD shifts back towards the lower end
of its range of variation, the vessel will fall short of the layline and may have
to perform extra tacks to reach the waypoint.
Depending on the situation, the normal course of action may be to tack when
the vessel is halfway through the shaded area. However this may not be the
shortest or quickest route.
Wind shift settings
Wind shift data settings are available from the [Laylines] settings page:
[Chart app > Settings > Laylines]

With TWD holding at the low end of its range of variation, the vessel can tack
to starboard and will lay the windward or leeward mark when as it enters the
shaded area. However, if TWD shifts back towards the higher end of its
range of variation, the vessel will overstand the windward or leeward mark
and may need to travel farther to reach the waypoint.
• [Show wind shifts] — Toggle wind shifts ON / OFF
• [Time Period] — Select the time period that you want the wind shift data to
cover. The available options are:
– 3 min
292
 – 6 min (default) Dashboard app:
– 12 min In the Dashboard app, the Wind shift bar is included on the default Sailing
– 30 min page and includes a digital wind shift value.

– 60 min In the Dashboard app, the Rudder bar and Wind shift bar are interchangeable.
A Wind shift digital value data item can also be added to any Dashboard app
• [Reset] — Reset the recorded wind shift data page. The Wind shift digital data item is located in the Wind data category.
In the Dashboard app, the Wind shift bar pop-over options allow you to
[Reset] the data and change the [Time period].
20.3 Wind shift bar
When sailing, wind direction is very important, but does not remain constant
in either strength or direction. To use the wind to your best advantage, when
the wind direction shifts, the vessel heading should be adjusted accordingly,
in order to follow a close-hauled course. LightHouse 4 automatically
calculates the mean wind direction, allowing the Wind shift bar to provide
an indication of changes in True Wind Direction (TWD) compared with the
average TWD recorded over a specified time period.
This feature enables you to use the Wind Shift data display to identify the
headers and lifts to help you decide when to tack or gybe.
The Wind shift bar is available when Sailing has been selected as the boating
activity during the initial display start up wizard.
Wind shift time period — The period of time the wind shift data covers can
be adjusted. The following time periods can be set: 3 min, 6 min (default), 12
min, 30 in and 60 min.
Wind shift reset — The wind shift data can be reset which deletes the current
stored data and restarts data collection.
The Wind shift bar can be displayed in the Chart app and in the Dashboard • When on a port tack, wind shifts to port are known as “lifts” and are shown
app. as a positive value extending to the left.
Chart app:
• When on a port tack, wind shifts to starboard are known as “headers” and
The Wind shift bar can be displayed in [Navigate], [Racing] and [Anchor] chart are shown as a negative value extending to the right.
modes and is enabled by default in [Racing] chart mode.
• When on a starboard tack, wind shifts to starboard are “lifts” and are shown
In the Chart app, the Wind shift bar and Rudder bar cannot be displayed at as a positive value extending to the right.
the same time. When one is enabled, the other is disabled.
• When on a starboard tack, wind shifts to port are “headers” and are shown
The Wind shift bar can be enabled and disabled from the [Layers] settings as a negative value extending to the left.
menu: [Menu > Settings > Layers > Wind shift bar].
In the Chart app, the Laylines menu allows you to [Reset] the data and The same rules apply regardless of whether you are travelling upwind or
change the [Time period]. downwind.
Sailing features 293
20.4 Sail plan recommendations • [Sail recommendation (Main)] — single data item.
• [Sail recommendation (Headsail)] — single data item.
Sail plan recommendations published by your vessel’s manufacturer can
be displayed onscreen to help select the correct sail configuration for the • [Sail recommendation] — dual data item (only available in the Dashboard
prevailing wind conditions. The recommendations are updated in real time as app).
Apparent Wind Speed (AWS) and Apparent Wind Angle (AWA) change.
The vessel's sail plan must first be defined in a simple spreadsheet. The Note:
spreadsheet defines a scale of Apparent Wind Speeds (AWS) and the proper It will take approximately 2.5 minutes from display power up or when data
main and headsails to be deployed when sailing upwind or downwind. The becomes available for sail recommendations to be shown.
spreadsheet must then be saved as a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file.
Typically, the sail plan can be provided to you as a csv file by your vessel
manufacturer. If this is not possible, a csv template can be downloaded from A 60 second rolling average is used to calculate Average Wind Speed (AWS).
the Raymarine website, and used as a starting point: Sail Plan Spreadsheet Change monitor:
Template
To ensure wind speed changes are genuine and persistent, changes will be
Sail plans in csv format can then be imported via the Sail Plan page: [Boat monitored over a period of time before they are applied.
details] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Sail plan].
• When wind speed is increasing, changes to the sail plan recommendation
The data of an imported sail plan can be viewed by selecting the plan. may take approximately 1 to 1.5 minutes.
Sail plan recommendations can be shown as: • When wind speed is decreasing, changes to the sail plan recommendation
may take approximately 8 to 10 minutes.
• When upwind changes to downwind or vice versa, changes to the sail plan
recommendation may take approximately 2 minutes.

Sail plan csv file layout

Sail plan csv files must be laid out as follows:
A Sail plan csv template is available to download from the following web
page: https://www.raymarine.com/en-gb/learning/online-guides/automatic-
sail-plan-recommendations

1. Data items in a data overlay.

2. Alert notification (if the [Sail recommendation] alarm is enabled).
3. Data items in the Sidebar.
4. Data items in the Dashboard app.
The sail plan recommendation data items are located under the [Boat] data
category:
294
 Mainsail Headsail
Trysail Storm Jib
None Full
100 100
80 80
75 75
60 60
50 50
40 40
25 25
20 20

1. Upwind/Downwind crossover AWA — Define the apparent wind angle 0 0

above which the sail plan enters downwind mode.
2. Upwind AWS kts — Enter the upwind AWS band thresholds (For the
Importing a sail plan
maximum AWS value, use ‘>’ 1. Create a comma delimited csv file in the correct format.
3. Upwind Mainsail — Enter each upwind band for the mainsail. 2. Save the CSV file to a memory card and insert the card into your MFD’s
card reader.
4. Upwind Headsail — Enter an upwind value for each band of the headsail.
3. Select the [Import plan] button from the [Boat details] settings menu:
5. Downwind AWS kts — Enter the downwind AWS band thresholds (For [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details].
the maximum AWS value, use ‘>’
4. Browse to the csv file on your memory card.
6. Downwind Mainsail — Enter each downwind band for the mainsail. 5. Select the csv file.
7. Downwind Headsail — Enter a downwind value for each band of the 6. Select [OK] on the Sail plan imported notification.
headsail.
Mainsail and Headsail parameters The [Import plan] button will change to show the name of your imported
plan (csv filename).
The following parameters can be entered for the Mainsail and Headsail.
Mainsail Headsail 7. Select the sail plan button to view its details.
Full No 1
Reef 1 No 2
Reef 2 No 3
Reef 3 No 4
Reef 4 Heavy Weather Jib
Sailing features 295
Example imported sail plan recommendation 20.5 Sailing data page
Sailing data and dials are available for display alongside laylines to help
indicate which direction to turn in order to maximise your VMG (Velocity
Made Good) to windward.

From the details page you can also [Delete the plan] and [Import a new plan].
Importing a sail plan will overwrite the existing plan.

Sailing gauges can be displayed in the [Dashboard app] by selecting the

Sailing default data page. For more information on customizing the Sailing
data page, refer to Chapter 25 Dashboard app

20.6 Autopilot wind vane mode

Wind vane mode enables the vessel to ‘steer to wind’ using 1 of 3 wind
datums, you can steer to either the Apparent Wind Angle (AWA), True Wind
Angle (TWA) or to a target wind angle from a polar table.
Wind vane mode is available when the Sailing boating activity is selected
during the initial start up wizard and wind data is available to the display.
The datums available are dependent on the [Sail performance] setting
selected in the [Boat details] menu.
Wind vane mode is engaged from the Pilot sidebar by selecting [Steer to
Wind].
296
When Wind vane mode is enabled it will use the last used datum. 2. Wind shift.
The datum can be changed by selecting the ‘Steer to wind’ data item at the 3. New wind direction.
top of the Pilot sidebar. The available datums are:
4. Relative wind angle.
• [Steer to True Wind Angle] (TWA) — use TWA to maintain a fixed wind
angle to the wind at any point of sail. 5. Vessel turns to maintain the same relative wind angle.
• [Steer to apparent wind angle] (AWA) — , use AWA to maintain a fixed wind Target wind angle from polar
angle to the wind at any point of sail. When the [Sail performance] is set [Polar] and the wind angle is within 10°
• [Steer to target wind angle (from polar)] — Only available when the [Sail of the polar target wind angle, the [Target wind angle from polar] option
performance] settings is set to [Polar]. Use to achieve optimum upwind (or will be available. With this setting selected the vessel will automatically
downwind) performance based on your polar. steer towards the relevant TWA based on current True Wind Speed (TWS)
for the vessel speed specified in your polar table. The upwind or downwind,
Note: port or starboard target wind angle is used, depending on which is closest
to current wind angle.
[Steer to target wind angle (from polar)] is disabled if vessel heading is
more than 10° from the polar target angle. The system tries to use the closest target wind angle to the actual wind angle,
if the target wind angle is more than plus or minus 10° from the actual wind
angle the mode cannot be enabled.
Mirrored TWA and Fixed angles
The target wind angle can be adjusted in 1 degree increments using the
When [Sail performance] is set to either [Mirrored TWA] or [Fixed angles] arrow buttons on the sidebar. If the wind shifts or the wind angle is adjusted
then the datum can be set to TWA or AWA. In TWA and AWA the vessel will which means that the target wind angle is more than 10° from the polar target
automatically steer towards the selected wind angle. The wind angle can be wind angle the mode will switch back to the previous used, i.e.: TWA or AWA.
adjusted in 1 degree or 10 degree increments using the arrow buttons on the
sidebar. If wind shift occurs, the autopilot will adjust the locked heading
to maintain the original wind angle.

1. Wind angle.
2. Target wind angle.
1. Initial wind direction. 3. Destination.
Sailing features 297
4. Course Over ground (COG). Tacking in wind vane mode
5. Layline. The Tack buttons can be used to Tack to the same offset angle on the
opposite side of wind.
Operating hints for wind vane mode
• Always trim your sails carefully to minimize the amount of standing helm.
• Reef the headsail and mainsail a little early rather than too late.
• In Wind Vane mode the autopilot will react to long-term wind shifts, but will
not correct for short-term changes such as gusts.
• In gusty and unsteady inshore conditions, it is best to sail a few degrees
further off the wind so that changes in wind direction can be tolerated.

Caution: Allow time

Allow time for course changes

Caution: Major course changes

When making major course changes, the trim on the boat may
change substantially. Due to this, the autopilot may take some 1. Wind direction.
time to settle accurately onto the new course.
2. Tack.
3. Starting position.
4. Final position.
Tacking is always relative to wind angle and is not adjustable.

Note:
Performing a Tack from the sidebar will always be through the wind. Gybes
are prevented regardless of the [Gybe inhibit] setting.
Example:
• The [Tack to port] button is enabled if the locked wind angle is a port
angle, the [Tack to starboard] button will be disabled.
• The [Tack to starboard] button is enabled if the locked wind angle is a
starboard angle, the [Tack to port] button will be disabled.
Both buttons will be disabled if the locked wind angle is between 0
degrees to 5 degrees or 175 degrees to 180 degrees.
298
1. To Tack to port, select the [Tack to port] button from the Sidebar and then
select [Tack to port] from the pop-over options.
2. To Tack to starboard, select the [Tack to starboard] button from the
Sidebar and then select [Tack to starboard] from the pop-over options.
When you Tack in Wind vane mode, the vessel turns through the Tack angle.
The autopilot will then adjust the heading to mirror the locked wind angle
from the previous tack.

Steering to wind (autopilot)

You can use your autopilot to steer to a fixed wind angle.
1. Select the [Pilot] icon located at the top of the screen.
2. Select [Steer to Wind] from the Pilot sidebar.
3. Select [Engage pilot].
Your vessel will maintain the current wind angle.
You can disengage the autopilot at anytime by selecting [Disengage pilot].

The Race start line feature provides a visual indication of the position of the
20.7 Race start line (SmartStart™) and Race start line on the chart, and provides key data, including Distance to start
line, Line bias, and Time to burn data. These features can also be used in
timer conjunction with Laylines to further assist you in optimizing your approach to
the start line. When the Race start line, Race timer and Laylines are active,
The Race start line and Race timer features can help you achieve a better Laylines will visually protrude from the Race start line’s port and starboard
racing start. The features assist you in approaching the race start line at ends to help guide your vessel on an optimum course to the start line.
the optimum speed, angle and time.
For more information on Laylines, refer to: p.286 — Laylines
The basic concept of an effective race start is to guide your vessel and tune
the sail configuration in an optimum way to ensure you are approaching With the Chart app set to [Racing] mode the [Race start line] can be created
the start line at the very last moment with full power. In race sailing, the by adding port and starboard ends using the chart context menu. The Race
countdown to this last moment is known as “Time to burn”. start sidebar’s Edit line option and the main menu’s Race start line option
can be used to create a start line by pinging your vessel’s location when it
The Race start line and Race timer features are available when ‘Sailing’ is reaches each end of the start line.
selected as the Boating activity during the initial MFD start up wizard.
The Race stat line visual graphics are displayed in Racing mode and Navigate
mode in the Chart app.
The Race start line and Race timer data is displayed in the Race start sidebar
and on the Dashboard app’s Race start data page. For more details on the
Race start page refer to: p.302 — Race start page
The Race start timer is used to count down to the start of the race, once the
timer reaches zero it will count up indicating the time since the race began.
Sailing features 299
The Race start timer can be controlled from the chart app main menu, Race 1. Select the waypoint or chart object to display the context menu.
start sidebar and Race start data page. The Race timer can also be added to 2. Select [Set start line].
any Dashboard app data page.
3. Select [Port end] or [Starboard end].
4. Repeat for the opposite end.
Creating the Race start line
A Race start line is created by placing port and starboard end points. Pinging the Race start line
The end points can be created by: A Race start line can be created using your vessel’s GNSS (GPS) position to
ping each end of the Race start line.
• Placing them anywhere on the Chart app, or for greater accuracy, placing
them using existing chart waypoints and chart objects (e.g. Buoys).
Note:
• Pinging your vessel’s current location, using GNSS (GPS) receiver position
data. The steps below are provided as an example, where the port end point is
placed first. It does not matter which end point is placed first.
Once both end points have been entered, the Race start line will be drawn
between the two points.
When your vessel is at an end point:
Creating a Race start line
1. Select [Edit line] from the Race sidebar or [Race start line] from the Chart
Race start line end points can be placed anywhere on the Chart app. You app’s main menu while in Racing mode.
can also use waypoints or chart objects to place Race start line end points at
specific coordinates. 2. Select [Ping Port end]..

To create an end point on a waypoint or chart object:

3. Manoeuvre to the opposite end point.

300
4. Select [Ping Stbd end].

Editing and clearing the Race start line

The Race start line can be edited and deleted.
To edit the Race start line:
1. Select the line or end points on the chart app.
2. Select [Edit line].
From here you can choose to swap the positions of the Port and
Starboard end points, re-ping them to your vessel’s current position, or
Important: clear the start line.
Pinging the Race start line ends will use your vessel’s location (from an 3. Select [Done] to save changes.
internal or external GNSS receiver). When pinging the end points, it is
important to compensate for the distance between your vessel’s bow and
the GNSS receiver’s location. Starting the Race timer
A Race timer is used to count down until race start.
To increase the accuracy of start line placement: To start the Race timer:
1. Select [Race timer] from:
1. Approach an end point from the same direction you will be traveling
when starting the race. • The Race start sidebar
2. Align your vessel so it is perpendicular to the end point. • The Chart app’s main menu while in Racing mode
• The Race timer data item in the Dashboard app.
3. When the bow of your vessel reaches the end point, ping the location.
2. Select [Timer duration] and set the countdown time (default is 5 minutes).
4. Repeat for the alternate end, ensuring your vessel remains perpendicular
to the line. The Race timer can be set from 1 minute to 30 minutes.

3. Select [Start] to begin the countdown.

4. You can change the countdown time as well as stop and reset the timer
by reopening the Race Timer options.
Sailing features 301
Race laylines Example — Race start page with apparent wind sailing dial
When the Race start line, Race timer and Laylines are active, laylines will
protrude from the Race start line’s port and starboard ends to help guide
your vessel on an optimum course to the start line. A Favoured End Marker
will also appear on the end point that provides a more competitive start. For
more information on laylines refer to 20.2 Laylines
The start line will appear differently depending on whether it is an upwind or
downwind start:
• Upwind starts will show red and green laylines as well as a Favoured End
Marker on the end point closer to the True Wind Direction (TWD).
• Downwind starts will show orange laylines as well as a Favoured End
Marker on the end point farther from the True Wind Direction (TWD).

Race start page

The race start data page is available in the Dashboard app, when the MFD
has been configured to use the Sailing boating activity during the initial MFD
start up wizard. The race start page includes data relevant to race sailing 1. Port wind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
and includes a graphical sailing dial. with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when tacking
to port upwind.
The apparent wind dial is the default dial displayed on the race start page.
2. Compass dial — The compass dial remains fixed and the indicators move
When the [Sail performance] setting has been configured dynamic wind angle around the dial to indicator direction/angle.
targets will be displayed. The sail performance setting can be configured
from the [Boat details] menu: [Homescreen > Boat details > Sail performance]. 3. AWA indicator — Apparent Wind Angle.
If the [Sail performance] setting has not been configured then close hauled 4. Downwind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
angle indicators are displayed instead of wind angle targets. with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when gybing
downwind
The race start page can be used in combination with the Laylines feature
and race start line feature available in the chart app to optimize your sailing 5. TWA indicator — True Wind Angle.
performance. For details about the layline features refer to: 6. Starboard wind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA
• p.286 — Laylines or TWA) with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when
tacking to starboard upwind.
• 20.7 Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer
7. Apparent wind speed
8. Downwind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when gybing
downwind
9. Rudder bar — Provides an indication of rudder position.
10. DISTANCE TO LINE — Distance to your race start line.
302
11. TIME TO BURN — The time to wait to cross the start line at maximum Menu item and description Options
speed.
[Line Bias] N/A
12. RACE TIMER — Select the race timer to configure and start/stop the
race timer. Displays how much closer or further
away the favoured endpoint is to
13. LINE BIAS — Helps to determine the optimum point to cross the start line. the wind in comparison to the other
14. TIME — Current time. endpoint.

The apparent wind dial can be changed to one of the alternative sailing dials. [Time To Burn] N/A
For details refer to: Displays how much time you have
The sailing dials are unique to default pages and cannot be reproduced before you need to navigate towards
on custom data pages. the start line. A negative value is
shown if you are predicted to be
Data items 10, 11, 13 and 14 can be customized. Data item 9 can be hidden if running behind and will not be at the
desired. start line at race start.
• If you are using polars for sail
Race start sidebar performance then speed from
The Race start sidebar includes the following Race sailing related options the polar diagram is used as the
and data. assumed starting speed through
water.
Menu item and description Options
• If you are using fixed angles
[Race Timer] Before Start or mirrored TWA then you can
Displays the countdown time until manually set the expected speed
• Start
race start. When the timer reaches or use your current speed by
• Timer duration opening the race start line context
0 it will begin to count up, indicating
how long it has been since race menu (long pressing the start line).
During Countdown
start. [Edit Line] • Ping Port end
• Sync nearest minute
Allows you to edit the end points of • Ping Stbd (starboard) end
• Up 1 minute the start line or clear it. You can ping
• Swap ends
• Down 1 minute the port or starboard end points to
your current location as well as swap • Clear
• Stop & reset them.
• Done
When Counting Up
• Stop & reset
[Distance To Line] N/A
Displays how far your vessel is from
the closest point of the start line.

Sailing features 303

CHAPTER 21: FISHFINDER APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 21.1 Sonar technologies — page 305

• 21.2 Sonar module range — page 309
• 21.3 Fishfinder app overview — page 309
• 21.4 Opening the Fishfinder app — page 311
• 21.5 Sonar transducer calibration — page 313
• 21.6 Sonar channels — page 314
• 21.7 Placing a Waypoint (Sonar, DownVision and SideVision) — page 315
• 21.8 Zoom mode — page 316
• 21.9 Fish detection — page 317
• 21.10 Sonar scroll back (history) — page 318
• 21.11 Sonar sensitivity controls — page 319
• 21.12 Frequency tuning — page 319
• 21.13 Fishfinder settings menu — page 320
• 21.14 Sonar display settings menu — page 320
• 21.15 Transducer settings menu — page 324
• 21.16 Sounder settings menu — page 324
• 21.17 Fish detection settings menu — page 325
• 21.18 Page settings menu — page 326

304
21.1 Sonar technologies
Traditional sonar technology
Traditional sonar uses a single carrier frequency or carrier wave for the sonar
ping. The sonar works by measuring the time it takes the ping echo to return
to the transducer to determine target depth.

CHIRP Sonar overview

CHIRP sonar produces a conical shaped beam. The coverage of the conical
beam is the water column directly beneath the vessel.

Conical beam

CHIRP technology
CHIRP (Compressed High Intensity Radar Pulse) sonar uses a swept
frequency signal covering a wide range of frequencies which produces more
accurate images with higher detail than traditional sonar.
Benefits of CHIRP sonar include improvements to target resolution, bottom
detection (through bait balls and thermoclines) and detection sensitivity.
CHIRP is utilized by RealVision™ Max 3D, RealVision™ 3D, SideVision™ and
DownVision™ transducers.

Fishfinder app 305

Sonar is effective at a range of speeds. In deeper waters the CHIRP DownVision™ overview
bandwidth is automatically optimized to improve bottom lock and the
detection of moving objects (e.g. fish) in the wider water column. DownVision™ produces a wide-angle side-to-side beam and a thin fore-to-aft
beam. The coverage of the DownVision™ beam is a water column directly
CHIRP sonar screen example beneath and to the sides of the vessel.

DownVision™ beam

DownVision™ is effective at lower vessel speeds. In deeper waters the

CHIRP bandwidth is automatically optimized to improve bottom lock and the
detection of moving objects (e.g. fish) in the wider water column.
The wide, thin beam produces clear target returns. The use of CHIRP
processing and a higher operating frequency provide a more detailed image,
making it easier to identify bottom structures around which fish may reside.
DownVision™ screen example

306
 The sonar image is constructed line-by-line, similar to the way a television
picture is composed of many horizontal lines. Each successive ping from
the transducer adds a new line of image data to the top of your display.
Each new line shows sonar returns from both the port and starboard sides of
your vessel. As new lines are added with each successive ping, older data
gradually scrolls down the display, building up a detailed image of the water
column and bottom to the sides of your vessel. If your vessel maintains the
same bearing and speed for a period of time, you can interpret the image as
a plan of the bottom along your vessel’s course. SideVision™ is effective at
lower vessel speeds.

Note:
SideVision™ does not provide direct depth readings. The scale shown
across the top of the image indicates the distance of features from your
vessel.

SideVision™ screen interpretation

SideVision™ overview
SideVision™ transducers are side looking transducers that produce 2
wide-angle side-to-side beams, each with a thin fore-to-aft beam to build up a
detailed underwater view as your vessel moves forward.. The coverage of
the SideVision™ beams is an area to both side of your vessel.

SideVision™ beams

1. Range scale — The range scale indicates distance (range) to port and
starboard from your vessel.
The transducers send pulses of sound waves into the water on each side
of your vessel, and records the sound waves that are reflected off objects 2. Water — Using the default color palette black indicates no sonar returns
suspended in the water column and the bottom,, known as sonar returns. i.e.: clear water.
Fishfinder app 307
3. Centerline — The solid line represents the centerline of your vessel. left 3D Vision screen interpretation
of the centerline represents the water, objects and bottom to the port
side of your vessel, right of the centerline represents the starboard side.
4. Turbulent water — turbulence in the water caused by such things as
vessel wake can produce a sonar return due to the aeration in the water.
5. Water depth — When using a separate depth transducer current depth
can be displayed in a data overlay.
6. Vegetation — Examples of vegetation growth (e.g: trees) on the bottom.
7. Bait ball — Example of a bait ball at an approximate distance of 18.5
ft from your vessel.
8. Structure — Example of bottom structure. Underwater structures such
as pipelines, piers and other large solid structures may cause an area of
shadow directed away from your vessel’s direction.
9. Vessel direction — Vessel direction of travel. The sonar image will scroll
from top to bottom as your vessel moves.
10. Bottom — Solid mass indicating the bottom, using the default color
palette the bottom is colored copper. It may be possible to identify
the transition of bottom material (e.g.: where an area of mud meets an
area of gravel). 1. Vessel location — The vessel icon indicates location and direction of
your vessel.
RealVision™ 3D overview 2. Range scale — The range scale indicates distance (range) to port and
starboard from your vessel.
RealVision™ 3D and RealVision™ Max 3Dtransducers produce life-like 3D
sonar imagery. When using a RealVision™ 3D or RealVision™ Max 3D 3. Water line — The line represents the top of the water.
transducer the [3D Vision] channel will be available in the Fishfinder app. 4. Depth indicator — Provides an indication of object depths.
RealVision™ 3D and RealVision™ Max 3D transducers are also capable of
producing DownVision™, SideVision™ and CHIRP conical sonar channels. 5. Structure — Example of bottom structure. Underwater structures such as
pipelines, piers and other large solid structures.
3D Vision provides a true, easy-to-understand view of bottom topography,
debris, and fish. 6. Sonar returns — Sonar return/detected object.
7. Bottom — Solid mass indicating the bottom. It ––may be possible to
identify the transition of bottom material (e.g.: where an area of mud
meets an area of gravel).

308
21.2 Sonar module range
Range capabilities of Raymarine transducers/sonar channels are shown
below.
Transducer / sonar channel Range
RealVision™ 3D (3D Vision) 0.6 m (2 ft) to 91 m (300 ft)
SideVision™ 0.6 m (2 ft) to 91 m (300 ft)
each side
DownVision™ 0.6 m (2 ft) to 183 m (600 ft)
CHIRP sonar channel (when using 0.6 m (2 ft) to 274 m (900 ft)
RealVision™ 3D, SideVision™ or DownVision™
transducers
1. Examples of incorrect depth readings due to false bottom tracking.
CHIRP sonar channel (when using 0.6 m (2 ft) to 366 m (1,200 ft)
RealVision™ Max 3D transducer. 2. Actual bottom tracking and water depth.
Traditional 600 W sonar 0.9 m (3 ft) to 914 m (3,000 ft) 3. False bottom tracking providing false depth readings.
CHIRP 1 kW sonar 0.9 m (3 ft) to 914 m (3,000 ft)
Traditional 1 kW sonar 0.9 m (3 ft) to 1,524 m
(5,000 ft)
21.3 Fishfinder app overview
CHIRP 2 kW sonar 0.6 m (2 ft) to 3,048 m The Fishfinder app displays a visualization of the echoes received from
(10,000 ft) a Sonar module and transducer. The Fishfinder app is compatible with
Traditional, CHIRP, DownVision™, SideVision™ and RealVision™ 3D sonar
modules and transducers. The Fishfinder app builds an underwater view of
Note: bottom structure and targets in the water column.
Stated ranges are for optimum conditions and are dependent upon Multiple Sonar modules can be connected at the same time. Sonar modules
connected transducer. can be internal (built-in to your MFD) or external (a separate box on your
network).
For each instance of the Fishfinder app you can select which Sonar module
Sonar minimum depths and channel that you want to use, the Sonar module and channel selection
Accurate bottom tracking can be unreliable in depths shallower than will persist over a power cycle.
0.8 m/2.62 ft. When operating at or below this depth be cautious of The Fishfinder app can be displayed in both Fullscreen and splitscreen app
misleading sonar returns, false bottom tracking and incorrect depth readings pages. App pages may consist of up to 4 instances of the Fishfinder app.
The Minimum sonar depth alarm is triggered when your vessel reaches or is
in water shallower than this depth.
Below are examples of the Sonar app when it is tracking a false bottom in
shallow waters.
Fishfinder app 309
 Icon Description Action
Image Displays onscreen sensitivity / image
adjustment adjustment controls

Pause Pause 3D Vision sonar image.

Unpause When the Fishfinder app is paused, you

can recommence scrolling by selecting the
Unpause icon.

Range/Zoom When [Auto range] is enabled, pressing the

In plus icon activates Zoom mode, subsequent
presses will increase the Zoom factor. When
Range is set to Manual pressing the Plus icon
decreases the distance displayed onscreen.
Auto range can be enabled and disabled from
Fishfinder app controls the Menu: [Menu > Auto range].
The Fishfinder app includes the following onscreen controls. Range/Zoom When in Zoom mode, pressing the minus
Out icon will decrease the Zoom factor and finally
revert to normal mode. When Range is set to
Icon Description Action
Manual pressing the Minus icon increases the
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen distance displayed onscreen.

Touchscreen controls
Waypoint / Place waypoint / activate Man overboard
MOB (MOB) alarm • Pinch-to-zoom changes switches to Zoom mode.
• The Range control determines how far the sonar will ping.
Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar • Press and hold onscreen to display the context menu.

Menu icon Opens the app menu

310
3D Vision channel controls 21.4 Opening the Fishfinder app
When using the 3D Vision channel you can manipulate the view using touch
gestures. The Fishfinder app is opened by selecting a page icon from the Homescreen
that includes a Fishfinder app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your Sonar module is compatible (check the latest details
available on the Raymarine website). If in doubt contact an authorized
Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your Sonar module in accordance with the
documentation that was supplied with the module.
The Fishfinder app will open in 1 of 4 states:

Please select a sonar channel

The first time you open a new app page that includes the Fishfinder app you
will need to select a Sonar channel.

Touchscreen controls
• One finger swipe rotates the image.
• Two finger swipe pans the image around the screen.
• Pinch-to-zoom changes the magnification of the image.
Select [OK] and then choose the Sonar channel you want to use from the list:
• The Range control determines how far the sonar will ping.
• Press and hold onscreen to display the context menu
Physical buttons
• [Ok] button pauses Sonar scrolling.
• [Back] button resumes Sonar scrolling.
• [Ok] button when paused opens the context menu.
• Use the Uni-controller’s [Directional] (Up, Down, Left, Right) controls to
rotate the image.
• Use the Uni-controller’s [Rotary] control or a RMK’s [Range In] and [Range
Out] buttons to Range in and out.
Fishfinder app 311
 No sonar source available
If the ’No sonar source available’ warning is displayed then either:
• your sonar module is still powering up.
• your MFD cannot establish a connection with your external Sonar module
• your Internal Sonar module has no transducer connected.

Check your external sonar module’s network and power connection, check
your MFD’s network or transducer connection ensuring the connections and
Sonar on and pinging cabling is correct and free from damage, then power cycle your system. If
the Sonar module is still not found then refer to your equipment’s installation
If your Fishfinder app has already been set up then when the Fishfinder app documentation for further troubleshooting information.
is opened the Sonar image will be displayed and start scrolling.
No transducer connected
If the ‘No transducer connected’ warning is displayed then your Sonar
module cannot connect to your transducer.

Check your transducer connection(s) are correct and free from damage,
then power cycle your system. If the transducer is still not found then refer
to your equipment’s installation documentation for further troubleshooting
information.

312
21.5 Sonar transducer calibration Setting a depth offset
You can set the point depth readings are taken from.
Sonar transducers should be calibrated to ensure accurate readings are
displayed on the MFD.

Depth offset
Depths are measured from the transducer face to the bottom (e.g.: seabed).
An offset value can be applied to the depth data so that the displayed depth
reading represents the depth reading taken from either the keel (negative
offset) or the waterline (positive offset).
Before setting a waterline or keel offset, establish the vertical distance
between the transducer and waterline or the bottom of your vessel’s keel, as
appropriate. Then set this distance as the depth offset value.

1. Open the [Fishfinder app].

2. Open the [Transducer] settings menu: [Menu > Settings Transducer].
3. If you have more than 1 sonar transducer installed, then you will need
to select the relevant transducer.
4. Select either [Below keel], [Below waterline], or [Below transducer] as
required.
i. If you have selected [Below keel] enter your transducer’s distance
above the lowest point of your keel in the offset field.
ii. If you have selected [Below waterline] enter your transducer’s distance
below the waterline in the offset field.

1. [Below waterline] — The depth reading will be increased from the Setting a temperature offset
transducer’s default reading.
If your sonar transducer includes a temperature sensor then you can check
2. [Below transducer] — This is the default reading from the transducer and calibrate your temperature reading.
(zero offset applied).
3. [Below keel] — The depth reading will be decreased from the transducer’s
default reading.

Fishfinder app 313

1. Open the [Fishfinder app]. Important:
2. Open the [Transducer] settings menu: [Menu > Settings Transducer]. • The [Ping depth limit] should only be enabled when problems are
3. If you have more than 1 sonar transducer installed, then you will need experienced re-acquiring depth readings after the sonar has lost depth
to select the relevant transducer. readings.
4. If required, select the [Enable temperature sensor] toggle switch to enable • Once [Ping depth limit] is enabled, when sailing in waters deeper than
the sensor.. the specified depth limit, the Fishfinder app / transducer will not be able
5. Measure the actual water temperature using a thermometer. to establish a depth reading / bottom lock.
6. Check your reading against the displayed [Current temperature ].
7. If the readings are not the same, select [Calibrate temp] and enter the
The Ping depth limit control enables you to specify a depth limit that your
difference between your 2 readings.
sonar will search down to. It is recommended this limit is set to a depth of
approximately 25% to 50% deeper than the maximum water depth you want
Ping depth limit to use your Fishfinder in. E.g.: In 200 ft max depth water, the ping depth limit
should be set between 250 ft and 300 ft.
When high-powered transducers are searching for a bottom lock, they can
search down to a maximum of 3,048 m (10,000 ft), during the sonar’s hunt
cycle. This means it can take some time to acquire or re-acquire a bottom
lock. To help improve sonar bottom lock re-acquisition time on high powered 21.6 Sonar channels
transducers, a ping depth limit can be set.
When using a CHIRP or non-CHIRP high power (greater than 600 W) The sonar channels that are available depend on the Sonar module and
transducer connected to the 1 kW transducer, the [Ping depth limit] control transducer you have connected.
will be available in the Fishfinder app’s [Transducer] settings menu: [Menu > The sonar channels that may be available are:
Settings > Transducer > Ping depth limit].
• [3D Vision]
• [SideVision]
• [DownVision]
• [High CHIRP]
• [Medium CHIRP]
• [Low CHIRP]
• [High Tuned]
• [Medium Tuned]
• [Low Tuned]
• [200 kHz]
• [100 kHz]
• [50 kHz]

314
Selecting a Sonar channel 21.7 Placing a Waypoint (Sonar, DownVision
The first time you open a new Fishfinder app page you will be requested and SideVision)
to select a channel, subsequently you can change the sonar channel by
selecting a channel icon from the Fishfinder app menu. When you observe something of interest in the Fishfinder app you can place
a waypoint at its location so that you can find the area again.
1. Select and hold on the point of interest onscreen.
The Context menu is displayed and scrolling is paused, temporarily.
2. Select [Add Waypoint] from the context menu.

The Sonar image will remain paused for approximately 10 seconds after
the Waypoint has been placed.

From the Fishfinder app menu:

1. Select [Channel:]
2. Select then icon for the sonar channel you want to display.
3. Select the transducer you want to use for the selected sonar channel.
Only applicable if you have more than one transducer capable of
producing the selected sonar channel.
4. Alternatively, select [All channels] from the Channel pop-over options and
then choose your desired sonar module and channel.
The channel and transducer in use is identified in the bottom left corner of
the screen.

Fishfinder app 315

Placing a waypoint in the 3D Vision channel 21.8 Zoom mode
To place a waypoint whilst viewing a [3D Vision] channel follow the steps
Zoom mode allows you to magnify a specific section of the water column so
below.
that objects or structure appear larger on screen. Zoom mode can zoom to a
maximum of 1 foot depth resolution.
Zoom mode is available on down-looking sonar channels, such as
DownVision™, CHIRP sonar and traditional sonar channels.
Zoom mode can be activated by:
• using the zoom in pinch-to-zoom gesture (i.e.: moving your fingers apart
on the screen.)
• turning the [Uni-controller] (if available) clockwise.
• using the onscreen [Range/Zoom In] icon.
Zoom mode splits the sonar screen to show the zoomed area alongside
a preview of the full water column.
When zoom mode is first activated the zoom box position will change
dynamically to keep the detected bottom in the zoom area. When the zoom
box is moved it will remain in the selected location.

1. Select and hold a location onscreen.

The Waypoint context menu and red waypoint marker is displayed:
2. If required, select [Move position] and then use your finger to drag the
waypoint marker to change its position.
3. Select [Place waypoint] to create a waypoint at the marker’s location.

1. Zoomed area — The zoomed area is shown on the left side of the screen.
2. Water column — The full water column is shown on the right side of
the screen.
316
3. Zoom box — The zoom box indicates the section of the water column
that is magnified on the left side of the screen.
Zooming
The zoom level can be increased and decreased by:
• performing pinch-to-zoom gestures on the zoomed area
• using onscreen range/zoom icons
• turning the [Uni-controller] (if available)
You can also increase and decrease the size of the zoom box using
pinch-to-zoom gestures on the water column.
Zooming out fully will deactivate zoom mode.
Changing zoom area
The section of the water column being magnified can be changed by moving 1. 50:50 zoom view enabled (Default option)
the zoom box up and down the water column.
2. 50:50 zoom view disabled.
You can move the zoom box by:
• dragging your finger up and down the water column
• using the [Up] and [Down] buttons on the [Uni-controller] (if available). 21.9 Fish detection
Fish detection options are available when using a compatible Raymarine®
Zoom mode view sonar module with a Raymarine® or Airmar conical beam capable sonar
By default, zoom mode uses a 50:50 split for the zoomed area and water transducer.
column. You can change the zoom view so that the water column appears The fish detection feature is available when using the following conical beam
narrower and the zoomed area is larger. sonar channels
To change the view mode, use the 50:50 zoom view toggle switch available • [50KHZ]
in the [Sonar display] settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Sonar display >
50:50 zoom view:]. • [200KHZ]
• [SONAR]
• [CHIRP Low]
• [CHIRP High]
• [CHIRP Auto]

Note:
The fish detection feature is not available when using DownVision,
SideVision or 3D Vision sonar channels.
Fishfinder app 317
The Fish detection feature can be accessed from the fishfinder app menu: 21.10 Sonar scroll back (history)
[Menu > Settings > Fish detection]
Fish detection options include: You can “scroll back” in the Fishfinder app to view sonar history.
• [Fish detection beep] — An audible 2–tone beep is sounded when a sonar To activate sonar “scroll back”, perform the following:
target is detected that the fish detection algorithm considers to be a fish. • Sonar and DownVision — Swipe your finger left to right across the sonar
• [Fish icons] — A fish icon is placed onscreen over sonar targets that the screen.
fish detection algorithm considers to be fish. • SideVision — Swipe your finger from the bottom to the top of the sonar
• [Fish depth labels] — The depths of sonar targets are displayed next to the screen.
target that the fish detection algorithm considers to be fish. • 3D Vision — Select the onscreen [Pause] icon.
When sonar scroll back is active, the sonar [Scroll back bar] and [Unpause]
icons are displayed.

The fish detection feature can be adjusted manually as follows:

• [Detection sensitivity] — The detection sensitivity setting determines the
size at which sonar targets are considered to be fish. The higher the value,
the more sonar targets will be considered to be fish. 1. [Unpause] — Selecting this option resumes live sonar scrolling.
• [Ignore fish shallower than:] — Specifies the depth at which the fish 2. [Scroll back bar] — Use this to move back and forward through the
detection algorithm will be used. available sonar history. You can either drag the position indicator right or
• [Ignore fish deeper than:] — Specified the depth at which the fish detection left or select a specific location on the bar to jump to that position.
algorithm will stop being used. In Sonar, DownVision and SideVision channels, subsequent swipes of the
Using these options allows you to specify a specific depth band of water screen will also “rewind” the sonar history, and swiping in the opposite
where you will be fishing, and also the size of the fish you want to catch. direction will “fast forward” the sonar history.

318
21.11 Sonar sensitivity controls Connector Description
[‘SF’ Surface Filter] , or
Optimum performance is usually achieved using the default settings. You
can adjust the image using the Sensitivity controls to improve the displayed [‘NF’ Noise filter]
image. Sensitivity setting adjustment is also applied to the sonar history. The control determines the amount of noise
displayed onscreen by varying the gain throughout
Sensitivity settings can be accessed using the onscreen the water column.
[Image adjustment] icon, or the Adjust sensitivity menu
option: [Menu > Adjust sensitivity]. A lower value decreases the depth at which the
control is applied.
The control can be set to [Auto] or [Manual].
The Sensitivity controls available are dependent upon the transducer and [All to Auto]
sonar module in use. Sets all Sensitivity settings to [Auto] with 0% offset.
Connector Description
[‘G’ Gain]
The control determines the signal strength at which
target returns are shown onscreen.
The Gain control can be set to [Auto] or [Manual].
Depending on Sonar module, in Auto you can add
an offset of up to ± 50%. 21.12 Frequency tuning
A higher value produces more target returns and
noise onscreen. When using an Airmar® CHIRP transducer you can adjust the frequency of
the ‘Tuned’ sonar channels (e.g.: 50 kHz, 200 kHz channels.), using the
[‘I’ Intensity], or [Tune frequency] control.
[‘CG’ Color Gain] The [Tune frequency] setting can be accessed using the onscreen controls
The control sets the lower limit for the color used and from the [Sounder] settings menu.
for the strongest target returns. All target returns
above this value are displayed in the strongest
Note:
color. Those with a weaker value are divided
equally between the remaining colors. The [Tune frequency] control is available when using CP470, CP570,
RVX1000, RVM1600, Axiom Pro RVX and Axiom 2 Pro RVM sonar modules.
The control can be set to [Auto] or [Manual].
The [Tune frequency] control is not available when using the CP370 sonar
Depending on Sonar module, in Auto you can add
module.
an offset of up to ± 50%.

Fishfinder app 319

 • [Transducer] For details refer to: p.324 — Transducer settings menu
• [Sounder] For details refer to: p.324 — Sounder settings menu
• [Fish detection] For details refer to: p.325 — Fish detection settings menu
• [Page settings] For details refer to: p.326 — Page settings menu

21.14 Sonar display settings menu

The [Sonar display] settings menu provides options for how the Fishfinder
screen is presented and also some channel specific presentation options.
Different menu options are available depending on the sonar channel type
that is selected.
• 3D Vision options
• SideVision™ options
• DownVision™ options
1. Onscreen [Tune frequency] control. To adjust the channel frequency • CHIRP and traditional options
using the onscreen controls, select the [Image adjustment] icon located
on the bottom left of the screen, select the [Frequency] control, and then 3D Vision sonar display settings
use the slider bar to adjust the channel’s frequency.
[3D Vision] channels include the following Sonar display options:
2. Settings menu [Tune frequency] control. To adjust the channel frequency
from the settings menu, select [Menu > Settings > Sounder > Tune
frequency], select the frequency field and then use the slider bar to
adjust the channel’s frequency.
The sonar channel name located at the bottom of the Fishfinder app is
updated dynamically to reflect the selected frequency.
The frequency range available is determined by the transducer/sonar module
in use. The minimum and maximum supported frequencies are displayed
on the slider bar.

21.13 Fishfinder settings menu

The table below lists settings applicable to the Fishfinder app and their
location within the app Settings menu. The settings available are dependant
upon the Sonar module in use.
The following settings menus are provided in the Fishfinder app:
• [Sonar display] For details refer to: p.320 — Sonar display settings menu
320
• [Boat icon:] — select the icon that is used to represent your vessel’s • [Invert colors:] — in the Fishfinder app, color scales or shading is used to
position. There are 4 vessel types to choose from. differentiate distances, depths and/or intensity of detected objects. You
• [Target colors:] — Select the color palette that you want detected targets can invert the colors by selecting this option.
to use. The following color palettes are available: • [Background:] — you can change the background color that is used to
– Rainbow represent the water. The following colors are available:
– Burnt Yellow – Black
– Cool Blue – Blue
– Lime Green – White
– Ruby Red – Gray
• [Color targets by:] — select to change how targets are colored. You can • [View mode:] — select how you want the fishfinder image to appear:
choose between: – [GPS track] — the boat icon will remain in the same position and bottom
– [Depth], which colors targets according to their depth; a gradient scale structure and target detail will move in true relation to your vessel’s
can be shown on the 3D grid to aid depth identification, or movements.
– [Intensity], which colors targets according to their size; the bigger the – [Scrolling image] — the sonar pings at a constant speed and displays a
target, the darker the color used. scrolling image behind the boat icon.
• [Show targets as:] — select to change the shape of targets. You can
choose between: SideVision™ sonar display settings
– Point, which provides the highest resolution, or: The SideVision™channel includes the following Sonar display options:
– Sphere, which provides lower resolution but increases target size for
better visibility.
• [Bottom colors:] — select to change the color palette used for the bottom
and bottom structure. The following colors are available:
– Day Break (RVM transducers only)
– Coho Salmon (RVM transducers only)
– Mahi (RVM transducers only)
– Snapper (RVM transducers only)
– Yellowfin (RVM transducers only)
– Copper
– Slate Gray
– Lime Green
– Burnt Yellow
– Cool Blue
– Ruby Red
Fishfinder app 321
• [Color palette:] — select to change the color palette used to identify DownVision™ sonar display settings
the bottom, bottom structure and detected targets. The following color
palettes are available: The DownVision™channel includes the following Sonar display options:

– Day Break (RVM only)

– Coho Salmon (RVM only)
– Mahi (RVM only)
– Snapper (RVM only)
– Yellowfin (RVM only)
– Copper
– Slate Gray
– Lime Green
– Burnt Yellow
– Cool Blue
– Ruby Red
• [Invert colors:] — in the Fishfinder app color scales or shading is used to
differentiate distances, depths and/or intensity of detected objects. you
can invert the colors by selecting this option.
• [Color palette:] — select to change the color palette used to identify
• [View selection buttons:] — select to enable and disable onscreen buttons the bottom, bottom structure and detected targets. The following color
for side selection. palettes are available:
• [Range lines:] — select to enable and disable onscreen vertical lines to – Day Break (RVM transducers only)
represent range from your vessel.
– Coho Salmon (RVM transducers only)
• [Color threshold:] — select to adjust the color threshold. Color threshold
determines the signal strength below which target returns are not shown. – Mahi (RVM transducers only)
A low value results in only the strongest colors or lightest shades being – Snapper (RVM transducers only)
displayed.
– Yellowfin (RVM transducers only)
• [Scroll speed:] — select to adjust the speed the scrolling image.
– Copper
– Slate Gray
– Lime Green
– Burnt Yellow
– Cool Blue
– Ruby Red
322
• [Invert colors:] — in the Fishfinder app color scales or shading is used to – Classic black
differentiate distances, depths and/or intensity of detected objects. you
– Classic White
can invert the colors by selecting this option.
– Sunburst
• [Depth lines:] — select to enable and disable onscreen horizontal lines
to represent water depth. – Grayscale
• [Color threshold:] — select to adjust the color threshold. Color threshold – Copper
determines the signal strength below which target returns are not shown.
– Night vision
A low value results in only the strongest colors or lightest shades being
displayed. • [A-scope:] — select to choose an A scope mode. A-Scope mode provides
a splitscreen view that includes the normal scrolling sonar image and a
• [Scroll speed:] — select to adjust the speed the scrolling image.
smaller pane which shows a ‘live’ image of what is directly below your
transducer. A scope can be set to Center, Right or Cone.
CHIRP and traditional sonar display settings • [Bottom lock:] — select to enable or disable bottom lock. When enabled
The CHIRP and traditional sonar channels include the following Sonar display Bottom Lock flips the range indication readings so that zero is shown as
options: the bottom, this flattens the image of the bottom and makes any objects on
or just above it easier to see. This feature is particularly useful for finding
fish that feed close to the bottom.

Note: When bottom lock is enabled transducer offset values will be

ignored.

• [Depth lines:] — select to enable and disable onscreen horizontal lines

to represent water depth.
• [White line:] — select to enable and disable a solid white line across the
detected bottom.
• [Bottom fill:] — select to enable and disable solid color fill of the detected
bottom and beneath.
• [Color threshold:] — select to adjust the color threshold. Color threshold
determines the signal strength below which target returns are not shown.
A low value results in only the strongest colors or lightest shades being
displayed.
• [Scroll speed:] — select to adjust the speed the scrolling image.
• [Target colors:] — Select the color palette that you want detected targets
to use. The following color palettes are available:
– Deep Blue (RVM transducers only)
– Classic Blue
Fishfinder app 323
21.15 Transducer settings menu Setting Options
Setting Options [Ping rate limit] • 1 to 100
[Transducer] List of available transducers. Allows you to restrict the transducer’s
maximum ping rate to suit current
Allows selection of Sonar transducer. conditions.
[Display depth as] • Below keel [Power mode] • 1 to 100
Determines the position from where depth • Below waterline Adjusts the transducer’s signal strength. In
readings are taken from. [Auto] the sonar module will automatically
• Below transducer
determine the optimal power based on
[Speed transducer] List of available transducers. current depth, speed and bottom signal. In
Allows selection of Speed transducer. [Manual] you can adjust the power to the
desired level.
[Calibrate speed] Offset value.
[Ping rate] • Normal
Allows you to enter an offset between actual
measured speed and the current speed Hyper ping should be used at speeds of up • Hyper
displayed by your transducer. to 40 knots in shallower waters (6 metres
or less). When the depth reaches 6 metres
[Enable temperature sensor] • On
or above the ping rate will automatically
Enables and disables the selected • Off reduce to normal until depth conditions are
transducer’s temperature sensor. met.
[Calibrate temp] Offset value. [Dual channel ping mode] • Auto
Allows you to enter an offset between On sonar modules that offer simultaneous • Independent pings
actual measured water temperature and dual channel operation, such as the CP570,
the current temperature displayed by your • Simultaneous pings
The ping mode can be changed.
transducer.
[Auto] the Fishfinder app will select the best
mode chosen based on range settings.
21.16 Sounder settings menu [Independent pings] maximizes ping rate
Setting Options but may introduce interference.
[Sounder name] Onscreen keyboard. [Simultaneous pings] reduced ping rate and
reduces chance of interference.
Allows you to rename your sonar module.
[Tune frequency] • Supported frequencies
[Ping enable] • On
Enables manual tuning of non-CHIRP single
Enables and disables transducer ping. • Off frequency sonar channels.
The adjustment range is determined by the
transducer/sonar module.

324
 Setting Options Setting Options
[AHRS stabilization] • On [Dual-channel ping mode.] • Independent ping
The AHRS built in to the RealVision™ 3D • Off On Axiom® Pro and Axiom® 2 Pro displays, • Lock to RV 3D Xdcr
transducer is used to stabilize the sonar when using multiple transducers at the
• Lock to <transducer
image onscreen based on your vessel’s same time you can balance the ping rate vs
detected movements. interference between the two transducers
name>

[Reverse Port/Starboard] • Enabled using the [Dual-channel ping mode.] option

When a RV100 transducer is hull/step By default Independent ping is selected, if

• Disabled
mounted the transducer can be installed you experience interference then you can
with the cable orientated towards either ‘lock’ the transducers to ping at the same
the bow or the stern of the vessel. On rate.
installations where the transducer cable is Locking to the transducer with the fastest
orientated towards the stern of the vessel ping rate should give the best results.
then the [Reverse Port/Starboard] control [Reset sounder] • Yes
must be enabled.
Resets the sonar module to factory default • No
[Interference rejection] • Auto
settings.
Removes interference caused by other • Low [Reset trip] • Yes
transducers on your vessel or from vessels
• Medium In installations that include a speed • No
equipped with transducers close by.
• High transducer connected via the sonar
module a trip log is automatically recorded.
• Off Selecting this option resets the sonar
[2nd echo rejection] • Off module’s trip log.
The control helps to remove false target • Low
returns or false bottom that can be caused
• High
21.17 Fish detection settings menu
by signal reflection.
Note:
The fish detection tab is only available when viewing a high CHIRP sonar
channel.

Fishfinder app 325

 Setting Options 21.18 Page settings menu
[Fish detection beep:] • On
The page settings menu allows you to configure data overlays and, when
Enables and disables audible beep when a • Off (default) applicable, adjust the position of the split on pages containing multiple apps.
target is detected that is considered to be a
fish.
[Fish icons:] • On
Enables and disables display of a fish icon • Off (default)
over targets considered to be fish.
[Fish depth labels:] • On
Enables and disables display of depth labels • Off (default)
next to targets considered to be fish.
[Detection sensitivity:] Values from 0 to 10
Determines how sensitive the fish detection (8 (default))
algorithm is.
The higher the value, the more target
returns will be considered to be fish. 1. [Edit data overlays] Fore details refer to: p.49 — Data overlays
[Ignore fish shallower than:] 0 ft to 1000 ft (3.3 ft (default)) 2. [Edit split ratio] Fore details refer to: p.95 — Editing the splitscreen ratio
Targets returns found in water shallower or equivalent units.
than the specified depth will not be
considered to be fish.

Note:
The shallow limit cannot be greater
than the deep limit.

[Ignore fish deeper than:] 0 ft to 1000 ft (984 ft (default))

Targets returns found in water deeper than or equivalent units.
the specified depth will not be considered
to be fish.

Note:
The deep limit cannot be less than the
shallow limit.

326
CHAPTER 22: RADAR APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 22.1 Radar app overview — page 328

• 22.2 Compatible Radar scanners — page 331
• 22.3 Radar feature comparison — page 332
• 22.4 Opening the Radar app — page 335
• 22.5 Set up and configuration — page 336
• 22.6 Radar modes — page 338
• 22.7 Range rings — page 339
• 22.8 Range and bearing — page 340
• 22.9 AIS targets — page 341
• 22.10 Radar targets — page 344
• 22.11 Target data reference mode — page 349
• 22.12 Dangerous targets alarm — page 349
• 22.13 Guard zone alarms — page 350
• 22.14 Doppler Radar overview — page 350
• 22.15 Blank sectors — page 352
• 22.16 Radar sensitivity controls — page 353
• 22.17 Radar settings menus — page 353

Radar app 327

22.1 Radar app overview 5. Radar return — possible target e.g.: vessel.
6. SHM (Ship heading marker) — points in the direction of travel on the
The Radar app displays a visualization of the echoes received from a
azimuth ring.
connected Radar scanner. The Radar app is a navigation aid used to help
enhance collision and situational awareness by enabling target’s distance 7. Own vessel position — indicates own vessel position in relation to the
and speed to be tracked in relation to your vessel. radar returns.
Up to 2 Radar scanners can be connected at the same time. However, only 1 8. AIS target — symbols with vector lines are used to represent AIS targets.
Radar in a system can be a Quantum™ Radar.
9. Radar return — land mass.
For each instance of the Radar app you can select which Radar scanner you
want to use, the Radar scanner selection will persist over a power cycle. 10. Data overlay — by default depth is displayed.
The Radar app can be displayed in both Fullscreen and splitscreen app 11. Sensitivity controls — access the Radar app’s sensitivity controls.
pages. App pages may consist of up to 2 instances of the Radar app.
12. Radar mode and status — identifies the Radar mode, orientation and
motion mode.
13. Range and rings — shows the current Radar app range and spacing
between range rings.
The Radar app allows you to configure alarms which are triggered when a
target or object conflicts with the [Dangerous targets] or [Guard Zone] alarm
settings.
The Range rings, azimuth ring and VRM/EBLs can be used to identify a
targets distance and heading in relation to your vessel.

Radar app controls

Icon Description Action
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man Overboard

(MOB) alarm

1. Azimuth ring — used to provide indication of bearing.

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar
2. Waypoint symbols — waypoint symbols can be displayed in the Radar
app.
3. Range rings — evenly spaced concentric circles help determine
Menu icon Opens the App menu
distances in the Radar app.
4. Tracked radar target — symbols with vector lines are used to represent
tracked radar targets.
328
 Icon Description Action Radar app context menu
Image adjustment Displays onscreen sensitivity / image Context menus provide context sensitive menu options.
adjustment controls • Context menus are accessed in the Radar
app by selecting a location or target.
Power Off Powers down the current Radar scanner • The context menu provides Latitude,
longitude, range and bearing details for
the selected location or object.
Power On Powers up the selected Radar scanner • The context menu provides quick access
to relevant settings or features.
• Select [More options] to display further
Transmit Start Radar transmission options.

Range In Decreases the distance displayed

onscreen (minimum range: 1/16nm).
AIS target context menu
When an AIS target is selected in the Radar app the AIS target context menu
is displayed.
Range Out Increases the distance displayed
The AIS target context menu includes the following information and settings:
onscreen (up to your Radar scanner’s
maximum range).

1. AIS data — The following AIS data is displayed:

• Vessel name.
• Range from your vessel.
• Bearing from your vessel.
Radar app 329
 • CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of
Approach).
• Course (COG or relative course).
• Speed (SOG or relative speed).
2. [True] /[Relative] — Switches Bearing, Course and Speed data between
[True] and [Relative] for the selected target.
3. [Acquire target] — Acquire the AIS target as a Radar target.
4. [View AIS data] — View full page AIS data report.
5. [Infobox] — Enable and disable onscreen display of AIS data next to the
target symbol.
6. [Intercept] — Enable and disable target interception.
7. [More options] — View further options. 1. Target data — The following data is displayed:
8. [X] (close) — Close the context menu. • Range from your vessel.
9. [<] (back arrow) — Go back to first context menu. • Bearing from your vessel.
10. [Goto] — Perform a goto. • CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of
11. [Vector] — Enable and disable target vectors. Approach).
12. [Buddy] — Add or remove target from Buddy list. • Course (COG or relative course).
13. [VRM/EBL 1] — Enable and disable VRM/EBL 1. • Speed (SOG or relative speed).
14. [VRM/EBL 2] — Enable and disable VRM/EBL 2. 2. [True] /[Relative] — Switches Bearing, Course and Speed data between
[True] and [Relative] for the selected target.
15. [Track with camera] — Track the target with a compatible PTZ camera.
3. [Cancel target] — Delete the selected Radar target.
First responder
4. [Show CPA:] —
When the display is configured using the First responder activity the following
additional data and options will be available: 5. [Target info] — Enable and disable onscreen display of data next to the
target symbol.
• AIS data — Boat type, Status, Intcpt (Intercept time).
6. [Intercept] — Enable and disable target interception.
• [Designate TOI].
7. [More options] — View further options.
• [Send message].
8. [X] (close) — Close the context menu.
Radar target context menu 9. [<] (back arrow) — Go back to first context menu.
When an acquired Radar target is selected in the Radar app the Radar target
10. [VRM/EBL 1] — Enable and disable VRM/EBL 1.
context menu is displayed.
The Radar target context menu includes the following information and 11. [VRM/EBL 2] — Enable and disable VRM/EBL 2.
settings: 12. [Track with camera] — Track the target with a compatible PTZ camera.
330
First responder Camera tracking
When the display is configured using the First responder activity the following When connected to a compatible Pan and Tilt Thermal camera you can track
additional data and options will be available: targets or point your camera at a specific target or area.
• AIS data — Boat type, Status, Intcpt (Intercept time). 2 options are available for camera tracking:
• [Designate TOI]. • [Point camera here] — Points the camera at a specific point onscreen, the
• [Send message]. camera will remain pointed at this area regardless of your own vessel’s
course.
Moving (dragging) the context menu • [Track with camera] — Tracks a selected target regardless of your own
In the Radar app the context menu can be moved. vessel’s or target’s course.
Camera tracking options are available from the Context menu in the Chart
and Radar apps: [Context menu > more options > Point camera here], or
[Context menu > more options > Track with camera].

Automatic tracking
You can use the Camera app settings to configure automatic tracking for AIS,
Radar and MoB targets: [Camera app > Menu > Settings > Camera motion
> AUTO TRACKING]

22.2 Compatible Radar scanners

• Cyclone — Solid state open array
• Magnum — Open array
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
• Quantum™ — Radome
1. In the Radar app, tap the screen to display the context menu.
• SuperHD™ — Open array
2. Tap and hold on the context menu header.
• HD — Open array
3. Drag your finger to a new location or object.
4. When you remove your finger, the context menu will remain in position. • HD — Radome
As the context menu is moved across the screen, the context menu details • Digital — Radome (non-HD)
displayed in the top left corner of the context menu are updated to reflect the
new location or current target tracked under the cursor position.

Radar app 331

22.3 Radar feature comparison Radar modes
Feature/setting Radar type
The features and settings available in the Radar app are dependent on your
connected Radar scanner type. Buoy • Magnum — Open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array
Sensitivity controls
• HD — Open array
Feature/setting Radar type
• HD — Radome
Gain • All
Harbor • Cyclone — Solid state open array
Color Gain • Cyclone — Solid state open array
• Magnum — Open array
• Magnum — Open array
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
• Quantum™ — Radome
• Quantum™ — Radome
• SuperHD™ — Open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array
• HD — Open array
• HD — Open array
• HD — Radome
• HD — Radome
Coastal • Magnum — Open array
Rain • All
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
Sea Clutter • All
• Quantum™ — Radome
FTC (Fast Time Constant) • Digital — Radome (non-HD)
• SuperHD™ — Open array
Power Boost • Magnum — Open array
• HD — Open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array
• HD — Radome
Antenna Boost • Magnum — Open array
Offshore • Cyclone — Solid state open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array
• Magnum — Open array
Beam sharpening • Cyclone — Solid state open array
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
Near target enhancement • Cyclone — Solid state open array
• Quantum™ — Radome
• SuperHD™ — Open array
• HD — Open array
• HD — Radome

332
 Feature/setting Radar type Feature/setting Radar type
Bird • Cyclone — Solid state open array Interference Rejection Level • Cyclone — Solid state open array
• Magnum — Open array • Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
• SuperHD™ — Open array • Quantum™ — Radome
• HD — Open array • Digital — Radome (non-HD)
• HD — Radome Expanded Returns • All
Weather • Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome Expansion Level • Digital — Radome (non-HD)
• Quantum™ — Radome Guard Zones • All = 2
Guard Zone Sensitivity • All
Radar features
Maximum Tracked Radar • Cyclone Software V1.25 or later — Solid
Feature/setting Radar type Targets state open array = 100
Sector blanking • Cyclone — Solid state open array • Cyclone — Solid state open array = 50
• Magnum — Open array • Magnum — Open array = 25
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome (Radar • Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome = 25
software version 2.46 and above)
• Quantum™ — Radome = 10
True trails • Cyclone — Solid state open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array = 25
• Magnum — Open array
• HD — Open array = 25
Note: • Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome
• HD — Radome = 25
Requires heading • Quantum™ — Radome
sensor. • Digital — Radome (non-HD) = 10

Doppler • Cyclone — Solid state open array Auto acquisition of Radar • Cyclone — Solid state open array
targets
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome • Magnum — Open array

Dual Range • Cyclone — Solid state open array • Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome

• Magnum — Open array Tuning • Magnum — Open array

• SuperHD™ — Open array • SuperHD™ — Open array

• HD — Open array • HD — Open array

• HD — Radome • HD — Radome

RangeFusion™ • Cyclone — Solid state open array

Interference Rejection • All

Radar app 333

 Feature/setting Radar type Feature/setting Radar type
Transmit Frequency • Cyclone — Solid state open array Timed Transmit • All
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome Bearing Alignment • All
• Quantum™ — Radome MBS (Main Bang • All
Suppression) Off
Scanner Rotation Speed • Cyclone — Solid state open array = 12
RPM, 24 RPM, 36 RPM, 48 RPM, 60 RPM Tuning Preset • Magnum — Open array
and Auto • SuperHD™ — Open array
• Magnum — Open array = 24 RPM and • HD — Open array
Auto (48 RPM)
• HD — Radome
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome = 24 RPM
• Digital — Radome (non-HD)
• Quantum™ — Radome = 24 RPM
STC (Sensitivity Time • Digital — Radome (non-HD)
• SuperHD™ — Open array = 24 RPM and Control) Preset
Auto (48 RPM)
VRM/EBL (Variable Range • All
• HD — Open array = 24 RPM and Auto (48 Markers/Electronic Bearing
RPM) Line)
• HD — Radome = 24 RPM and Auto (48 Display Timing • SuperHD™ — Open array = 0–767m
RPM)
• HD — Open array = 0–767m
• Digital — Radome (non-HD) = 24 RPM
• HD — Radome = 0–767m
Sea Clutter Curve • All
• Digital — Radome (non-HD) = 0–153.6m
Parking Offset • Magnum — Open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array
• HD — Open array
Antenna Size selection • Magnum — Open array
• SuperHD™ — Open array = 4ft / 6ft
• HD — Open array = 4ft / 6ft

Note:
Antenna size selection (i.e.: 3ft, 4ft or
6ft) for Cyclone radars is automatically
detected and cannot be selected
manually.

334
 Feature/setting Radar type Off/Not Connected
Maximum Range • Cyclone — Solid state open array = 96nm
• Magnum — Open array = 4kW = 72nm,
6kW = 96nm
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome = 24nm
• Quantum™ — Radome = 24nm
• SuperHD™ — Open array = 72nm
• HD — Open array = 72nm
• HD — Radome = 48nm If the ‘Off/Not Connected’ message is displayed then:
• Digital — Radome (non-HD) = 48nm • your Radar scanner may be powered down, or
Colors • Cyclone — Solid state open array = 256 • your MFD cannot establish a connection with your Radar scanner
• Magnum — Open array = 256 Select [On] to power up your Radar. If the ‘Radar not found’ message is
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler — Radome = 256 displayed then a connection could not be established, ensure that network
and power connections to your Radar and MFD are correct and free from
• Quantum™ — Radome = 256 damage and then power cycle your system. If the Radar scanner can still
• SuperHD™ — Open array = 256 not be found refer to your Radar’s installation documentation for further
troubleshooting information.
• HD — Open array = 256
• HD — Radome = 256 Off
• Digital — Radome (non-HD) = 8

22.4 Opening the Radar app

The Radar app is opened by selecting a page icon from the Homescreen
that includes the Radar app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your Radar scanner is compatible, check the latest details If the ‘Off’ message is displayed then your Wi-Fi connected Radar scanner is
available on the Raymarine website, if in doubt please contact an paired but powered off, select [On] to power up your Radar
authorized Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your Radar scanner in accordance with the
documentation that was supplied with your Radar.
The Radar app will open in 1 of 3 states:

Radar app 335

Standby (Not transmitting) 1. Select [Transmit] from the main menu.
The radar scanner will stop transmitting and is put into standby mode.

Powering down your radar scanner

With your radar scanner in standby mode:
1. Select the [Off] icon.
2. Select [Yes] to confirm power down.
The radar scanner will still consume a small amount of power whilst it is
powered off, this is to ensure the radar can be powered back up quickly.
If the ‘Standby’ message is displayed then select [Transmit] to begin
transmitting.
22.5 Set up and configuration
Transmitting
Selecting a Radar scanner
On systems with 2 Radar scanners, you can select which Radar scanner is
used in each instance of the Radar app.
1. Select the [Settings] (“cogs”) icon from the Radar app menu.

If your Radar scanner is connected, powered up and transmitting then the

Radar image is displayed and echoes/targets are displayed onscreen.
2. Select the [Scanner:] box on the [Transmission] tab.
Putting the radar into standby A list of available Radar scanners is displayed.
3. Select the Radar scanner that you want to associate with the current
With your selected radar displayed onscreen: instance of the Radar app.
336
4. Close the [Settings] page. • When dual range is enabled on a radar scanner running version 1.xx or 2.xx
The current instance of the Radar app will change to display the selected software the [Expansion] control will be disabled.
Radar scanner. Radar scanner selection shall persist over a power cycle.
Alternatively, with the Radar powered off or in Standby, you can select switch RangeFusion™
Radar scanner by selecting [Change scanner]. When using a Cyclone radar scanner the RangeFusion™ feature is available in
the dual range settings. Range fusion enables the short range and long range
to be displayed simultaneously in a merged view in the same radar app.
When using RangeFusion the short range channel can be viewed separately.
The large range channel is always merged with the short range channel.

Timed Radar transmission

To help conserve power you can configure your Radar to only transmit
periodically.
From the Radar menu:
Dual range 1. Select the [Settings] (“cogs”) icon.
Cyclone, Magnum, HD and SuperHD™ radar scanners are capable of [Dual The settings page is displayed.
range]. Dual range enables you to view 2 ranges (i.e. short range and long 2. Switch on [Time Transmit:] using the toggle switch.
range) simultaneously.
3. Select [Standby:] and choose a time interval.
To view both ranges you will need to configure a splitscreen, dual radar, app
4. Select [Transmit:] and choose the number of rotations you want the Radar
page that displays the same Radar scanner in each window. You can then
to perform.
enable [Dual Range] mode and set the [Channel] for each window from the
[Transmission] tab: [Menu > Settings > Transmission]. The Radar will transmit for the specified number of rotations and then will
switch to Standby for the specified time interval, the sequence will repeat
Note: until Timed Transmit is switched off.
The following dual range limitations do not apply to Cyclone radar scanners. The Timed transmit will revert to Off after a power cycle.

Dual range limitations:

Setting open array antenna size
• Dual range cannot be enabled when radar targets are being tracked (clear When connected to a HD, SuperHD or Magnum open array radar scanner
the target list and try again). you can configure the [Antenna size]. Setting the antenna size can help when
setting a [Parking offset].
• When dual range is enabled manual and automatic radar target acquisition
is disabled
Note:
• In dual range the maximum rotation speed is 24rpm.
Antenna size selection (i.e.: 3ft, 4ft or 6ft) for Cyclone radars is automatically
• When using a Magnum or SuperHD™ open array radar scanner [Antenna detected and cannot be selected manually.
boost] and [Power boost] controls are only applied to the long range
channel.
• Open array radar scanners running version 1.xx or 2.xx software will have From the Radar app:
the short range channel’s maximum range restricted to 3 nm. 1. Select [Menu > Settings > Transmission].
Radar app 337
2. Select the correct size for your Radar’s antenna from the [Antenna size] Reduce the gain to make the target as small as possible on the screen.
option. Note the position of the object on the Radar screen. If the target is not
under the ship’s heading marker (SHM), then bearing alignment adjustment
Check and adjust bearing alignment is required.
The Radar bearing alignment ensures that Radar objects appear at the
correct bearing relative to your boat’s bow. You should check the bearing Adjusting alignment
alignment for any new installation. Adjust the [Bearing alignment] setting until the target object appears under
the SHM.
Example misaligned Radar
The [Bearing alignment] setting can be accessed from the [Installation] tab:
[Menu > Installation > Bearing alignment].

Note:
Heading (HDG) is displayed in the Radar application. Please be aware that
bearing alignment refers to the relative bearing of targets to the vessel's
bow using visual checks / traditional means.

22.6 Radar modes

The Radar app provides preset modes that can be used to quickly achieve
the best picture depending on your current situation. Only Radar modes
supported by your Radar scanner are shown.
To change Radar mode select the required mode from the Radar app menu.

Note:
Modes are not available on legacy Digital radomes (non-HD).

For the list of modes available with your radar scanner refer to:
p.332 — Radar feature comparison
1. Target object (such as a buoy) dead ahead.
2. Target displayed on the Radar display is not aligned with the Ship's
Heading Marker (SHM). Bearing alignment is required.

Checking alignment
Align the bow with a stationary object between 0.25 and 2 NM away.
338
 [HARBOR] 22.7 Range rings
Harbor mode takes into account land clutter
that is typically encountered in a Harbor, so Range rings are evenly spaced concentric circles displayed on the screen
that smaller targets are still visible. This mode that are centered on your vessel. Range rings enable you to easily estimate
is useful when navigating in a Harbor. the distance between two points on the Radar screen.
By default range rings are set to automatic with the number of range rings
displayed and spacing between them determined automatically by the Radar
[BUOY] app’s range.
Buoy mode enhances the detection of smaller The [Range ring mode] can be changed to [Preferred number]. When
targets such as mooring buoys, and is useful preferred number is selected you can specify your preferred number of range
at ranges up to 3/4nm. rings (i.e.: 2, 4, or 6). The number of preferred rings includes the azimuth ring.

Note:
[COASTAL] Due to the relationship between range and ring spacing it is not always
Coastal mode takes into account slightly higher possible to display the preferred number at all ranges.
levels of Sea clutter that are encountered out
of Harbor areas. This mode is useful when in Range ring settings can be accessed from the Presentation tab: [Menu >
open water but keeping to coastal areas. Presentation].

[OFFSHORE]
Offshore mode takes into account high levels
of Sea clutter so that targets are still visible,
useful when navigating in open water away
from the coast.

[BIRD]
Bird mode optimizes the display to help identify
flocks of birds, useful when trying to locate a
fishing area.

[WEATHER]
Weather mode optimizes the display to 1. Range ring distance — each range ring includes the distance from your
help identify precipitation, useful for helping vessel.
determine weather fronts.
2. Azimuth ring — The azimuth ring is the outermost range ring on the
screen and is the farthest complete ring on the screen.
3. Range ring — evenly spaced concentric rings.
Radar app 339
4. Range — shows the range displayed onscreen and is also the distance The displayed range can be adjusted at anytime using the Range controls.
that the azimuth ring is placed at. Range rings can be switched off from the Presentation tab: [Menu > Settings
5. Rings — identifies the distance between each ring. > Presentation > Range rings:]
You can also choose whether to display a numerical range indicator against
each ring using the [Range ring labels:] option.
22.8 Range and bearing
VRM (Variable Range Marker) / EBL (Electronic Bearing
The Radar app helps you identify a target’s range (distance) and bearing
from your vessel. Line)
VRM/EBL is used to determine a targets range and bearing from your vessel,
or from another target. 2 VRM/EBLs are available which are enabled from
the context menu.
[Context menu > More options > VRM/EBL 1] or [Context menu > More options
> VRM/EBL 2]

1. SHM (Ships heading marker).

2. COG/SOG line (Points in the direction of travel (COG), with the length of
the vector providing an indication of speed (SOG)).
3. Range rings.
4. Vessel position.
5. Azimuth ring (The White ring identifies the distance from your vessel to 1. Centered VRM/EBLYou can use a ‘Centered’ (on your vessel) VRM/EBL
the top edge of the screen. Bearing indicators are also provided around to determine the range and bearing of targets in relation to your vessel.
the ring). 2. Floating VRM/EBLYou can use a ‘Floating’ VRM/EBL to determine the
6. North indicator (Always points North). range and bearing between 2 targets.
7. Current displayed Range and Ring separation distance (Range: identifies
the distance from your vessel to the top edge of the screen. Rings:
identifies the distance between each Range Ring).
340
Editing a VRM-EBL
Once a VRM/EBL has been placed you can adjust its size and position.

Target vectors and information can be displayed for each target by selecting
the relevant option from the AIS target context menu. The AIS target context
menu is accessed by selecting the AIS target.

1. Select [Edit VRM/EBL] from the context menu. You can also select the type of AIS targets that should be displayed, i.e.: [All],
[Dangerous], [Buddies] and hide static targets from the AIS Settings tab.
2. To adjust the VRM/EBL select the desired target or drag the labelled
circle to the target.
3. To create a floating VRM/EBL Drag the center circle to the desired target. AIS target capacity
The MFD can display a maximum of 200 AIS target simultaneously.
If more than 200 targets exist, within your range, the 200 targets nearest to
22.9 AIS targets your vessel will be displayed.

With compatible AIS hardware connected to your MFD, AIS targets can be AIS target list
automatically displayed in the Radar app.
AIS targets appear in the AIS target list.
Tracked AIS targets are identified onscreen using target symbols.
The AIS target list can be accessed by selecting the [AIS] tab from the
[Targets] menu: [Menu > Targets > AIS].

Radar app 341

 AIS icons
Vessel SART (Search
and Rescue
Transponder) /
MOB (Man Over
Board) / EPIRB
(Emergency
Position
Indicating Radio
Beacon)
Land-based ATON
station

The list identifies: Target name and Range and Bearing (from your vessel).
Where relevant, CPA (Closest point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest SAR (Search and Virtual ATON
Point of Approach) values are also shown. Rescue)
Selecting a target from the list will highlight the selected target in the
[LiveView] pane on the right of the screen and display Pop-over options.
Pop-over options enable you to [View full target data] or add an AIS target a
buddy by selecting [Add as buddy].
AIS icons used for targets marked as buddies will be filled yellow. You can
also rename buddy targets or remove buddies using the Pop-over options.
You can enable enhanced AIS target icons from the [AIS Settings] menu:
[Menu > Targets > AIS Settings > Enhanced AIS targets]or the [Advanced]
AIS targets settings menu: [Menu > Settings > Advanced > Enhanced AIS targets]. When
When your MFD is connected to an AIS receiver or AIS transceiver AIS Enhanced AIS targets is enabled the Enhanced AIS icons are used.
equipped vessels can be displayed as AIS targets in the Chart app and Radar
apps. Different icons are used to represent different types of AIS target.
By default the following icons are used:

342
Enhanced AIS icons AIS target status
Sailing Vessel Commercial Lost (No border, Uncertain
crossed through) (Dashed outline)

High speed Cargo vessel Buddy (Yellow Dangerous

vessel / Wing fill) and Uncertain
In Ground vessel (Dashed outline
and Flashes Red)

Passenger Other Dangerous ATON off

vessel (Flashes Red) position (Red
border)

Enhanced AIS icons are scaled or outlined according to the reported size of Note:
the vessel, as shown below:
When the MFD is configured as ‘First responder’ and is connected to STEDs
Relative length compatible AIS hardware, Blue Force AIS icons are used to identify other
(Gray outline) STEDs equipped vessels. For details refer to: p.376 — Blue Force Tracking

AIS settings menu

You can configure AIS target settings from the [AIS Settings] menu: [Menu >
Targets > AIS Settings].
The following options are available:
The status of an AIS target is shown using different colors, outlines and • [Show AIS targets in chart] / [Show AIS targets in Radar] — Enables and
flashing as shown below: disables display of AIS targets in the Chart app / Radar app.
• [Enhanced AIS targets] — Enables and disables the display of enhanced
AIS target icons.
Radar app 343
• [AIS names] — When enabled, AIS target names are permanently displayed Multiple radar targets can be tracked simultaneously.
next to AIS target icons. Target vectors and information can be displayed for each target.
• [Show these AIS types] — Enables selection of the types of AIS target that
Radar target options are available from the Radar target context menu. The
will be displayed. Available AIS types:
Radar target context menu provides options for you to [Cancel target], [Show
– All CPA] graphic or display [Target info] onscreen by selecting the relevant
– Dangerous option. The Radar context menu is accessed by selecting the radar target.
– Buddies
Radar target acquisition data source requirements
• [Hide static targets] — When enabled, AIS targets travelling under 2 knots
will not be displayed, unless it is or becomes dangerous. Radar target acquisition requires the following data sources to be available
on your system (e.g. connected to your multifunction display, via SeaTalkng ®
• [Silent mode (don’t transmit my position)] — When enabled, your vessel’s
or NMEA 0183).
AIS transceiver will not transmit your position or details to other AIS
equipped vessels. Data type Example data source
COG (Course Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal
receiver or external receiver).
22.10 Radar targets SOG (Speed Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal
receiver or external receiver).
With a compatible Radar scanner connected to your MFD, radar targets
can be tracked in the Chart app and Radar app. Depending on your Radar HDG / HDT (True Heading) Compass or Autopilot sensor providing
scanner, radar targets can be acquired manually or automatically, based Fastheading data (e.g. Evolution EV-1 /
on your configured [Guard zones]. EV-2).
Tracked radar targets are identified onscreen using target symbols.
Radar targets
Radar target symbols are used to identify Radar targets onscreen.
Radar targets are displayed in the Radar app and when Radar overlay is
enabled ([Chart app > Menu > Targets > Radar settings > RADAR OVERLAY >
Show radar overlay]) they are also displayed in the Chart app.

344
 Acquiring target Acquired target Automatic target acquisition
(manual) — Thin (manual) — With a compatible Radar scanner connected, Radar targets can be acquired
dashed Green Green circle with automatically.
circle Target ID

Acquiring Unacknowl-
target (auto) — edged acquired
Thick dashed target (auto)
Red circle, — Red circle,
flashes until flashes until ac-
acknowledged knowledged

Dangerous Lost target

target — Red (Target not
circle with Target detected for 4
ID, flashes until Radar scans)
acknowledged — Gray circle
with Red cross
through Once configured, targets which enter or appear in your chosen [Guard
Zone](s) will be automatically acquired.

Note:
Once acquired the target’s COG (Course Over Ground) and SOG (Speed
Over Ground) can be displayed below the target ID. • Automatic target acquisition cannot be enabled at the same time as
[Timed Transmit] or [Dual Range].
The Target info is colored Blue if COG and SOG values are True or Orange if
values are Relative. Target info will turn Red if the target becomes dangerous. • Automatic target acquisition will be temporarily paused if the Radar
display range is 12nm or greater.
Acquiring a target manually
To acquire a Radar target manually using MARPA (Mini Automatic Radar
Plotting Aid) follow the steps below.
1. Select the object / target.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select [Acquire target].
Once acquired the target will be tracked.
Radar app 345
Setting up automatic target acquisition Radar target list
Follow the steps below to configure automatic target acquisition. The target list identifies: Target number, Range and Bearing from your vessel.
Where relevant, CPA (Closest point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest
Point of Approach) values will also be displayed.
The Radar target list can be accessed from the Targets menu in the Radar
app and Chart app: [Menu > Targets > Radar].
The Radar target list can be sorted by either Number or Range by selecting
the [Sorted By] option located at the bottom of the LiveView pane:
• Number — List sorted by Target number so that the first detected target
appears at the top of the list.
• Range — List sorted by proximity to your vessel with the closest target
appearing at the top of the list. The list will automatically update as targets
become closer or farther away.
Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView
app pane on the right of the page and opens the Pop-over menu.

1. Select the [Auto Acquisition] tab from the Target menu: ([Menu > Targets
> Auto Acquisition]).
2. Enable Automatic Target Acquisition by selecting the [Automatically
acquire Radar returns as targets] toggle switch.
3. Select the [Acquire within] box and choose [Guard zone 1], [Guard zone 2]
or [Zones 1 & 2] as required.
4. To enable onscreen pop-up notifications of new targets which have been
acquired automatically, select the [Warn me about new targets] toggle
switch.
When multiple targets are acquired simultaneously, an Info dialog is
displayed.
5. You can also adjust the size and position of the Guard zones directly from
the [Auto Acquisition] page by selecting [Adjust zone 1] or [Adjust zone 2].
Radar targets can be cancelled individually by selecting the ‘[X]’ next to the
target’s details in the list, or you can cancel all targets by selecting [Cancel all
targets].

346
Target settings
Target vectors, target history and object trail graphics can be displayed
onscreen to improve situational and collision awareness.
Target settings can be accessed from the [Target Settings] tab: [Menu >
Targets > Target settings].

Reference mode
Target settings can be configured to either [True] or [Relative] mode. In True
mode, Trails, Vectors and History are colored Blue and are shown ground
referenced (i.e. the object or target’s actual Course Over Ground (COG)). In
Relative mode, Trails, Vectors and History are colored Orange and are shown
relative to your vessel’s movement.
To switch the target reference mode, select the [REFERENCE MODE] setting.
Alternatively, you can switch reference mode by selecting the onscreen
[Image Adjustment] icon and then selecting either [True] or [Relative].

Target vectors
Target vectors show the predicted future course of a target.
Target vectors for acquired Radar targets are always shown. By default,
target vectors are also shown for all AIS targets. You can switch the [Show
AIS vectors] to Manual, enabling you to switch vectors for AIS targets On or
Off for each target individually, via the target context menu.
The length of the Vector line signifies where the target will be after the time
specified in [Vector period] has passed. The Vector period can be adjusted
True mode Relative mode by selecting the current [Vector period] value and choosing a time from the
Pop-over options.

The [Target Settings] reference mode is independent of your vessel’s motion Target history
mode.
Target history shows a target’s previous positions.
Target history can be enabled or disabled using the [Show history] toggle
switch.
Target history is plotted by displaying a target symbol at the vessel’s position
each time the value specified in the [Interval] setting has passed. The
[Interval] is automatically calculated based on the target vector’s [Vector
period], divided by 4.

Radar app 347

 • [REFERENCE MODE] — Choose whether Radar targets and objects are
displayed in [True] or [Relative] reference mode.
• Vector period and Trail interval — Displays currently selected values.
• [Clear trails] — Clears and resets the trails displayed onscreen.

Clearing / resetting trails

In an area with multiple target returns, trails can clutter the Radar image,
reducing its ability to provide a target’s path, under these circumstances you
can remove all existing trails using the onscreen [Clear trails] option.
1. Select the onscreen [Image adjustment] icon.
2. Select [Clear trails].

Target context menu

A target context menu is available that provides quick access to useful target
settings.
Trails To open the Radar target context menu, select a target onscreen.
Trails plot the historical movements of objects (Radar returns) for the time
specified in the [Trails period] setting. The Radar context menu provides CPA, TCPA, COG
Trails are subject to the selected “Reference Mode” (i.e. [True] , to show and SOG data for the selected target.
actual motion over “ground” (COG), or [Relative], to show motion relative The context menu also provides the following target
to your vessel). menu options:
Trails can be enabled and disabled using the [Show trails] toggle switch. • [Cancel target] — The Radar target will no longer
be tracked.
Historical object position is shown as a colored trail behind the object.
• [Show CPA] — Determines whether CPA graphics
are shown.The default option is Auto which
Onscreen target settings displays CPA graphics for the target if it becomes
Target settings and information are also available using the onscreen [Image dangerous. You can also set CPA graphics to
adjustment] icon. On, which displays CPA graphics, if there is an
intersect point between your vessel’s current
course and the target’s. When set to Off no CPA
graphics will be displayed for the target.
• [Target info] — Determines whether the target’s
SOG and COG information is displayed under the
target onscreen.

The following target settings and information is available:

348
22.11 Target data reference mode 1. True data.
2. Relative data.
In the Radar app the data shown in individual AIS and Radar target context
menus can be switched between [True] and [Relative] reference mode.
Selecting either [True] or [Relative] from the [Quick adjust] menu will switch 22.12 Dangerous targets alarm
the reference data for all AIS and Radar targets.

Quick adjust menu You can use the Dangerous targets alarm to notify you if a Radar or AIS target
will reach a specified distance from your vessel within a specified time.

Selecting the [True/Relative] toggle switch from the target context menu
will switch between [True] and [Relative] reference data for the selected
target only.

Context menu
To set up the Dangerous target alarm, first adjust the [Safe distance] to the
desired value and then select a [Time to reach safe distance]. The alarm will
be triggered if a tracked target will reach the specified Safe distance from
your vessel within the time period selected.
You can choose whether you want the Dangerous target alarm to trigger for
Radar and / or AIS targets.
You can display a Safe distance ring around your vessel in the Radar app
using the [Show safe distance] control.

Radar app 349

22.13 Guard zone alarms
Guard zones alert you if a Radar return is detected within the Guard zone
area.
2 Guard zones can be configured for each connected Radar scanner.
The Guard zones can be configured from the [Alarms] menu: [Menu > Alarms
> Guard zone 1] or [Menu > Alarms > Guard zone 2]

Adjust the guard zone’s size by dragging the inner and outer perimeter end
points (circles) to the desired locations.
Once configure select [Back].
If required, you can also adjust the Guard zone sensitivity. Sensitivity
determines the size at which objects trigger the alarm.

A Guard zone can be configured as a sector or as a circle around your vessel.

Selecting [Adjust Zone] allows you to configure the size of the Guard Zone. 22.14 Doppler Radar overview
Doppler Radar technology makes it easier to track moving objects with
ground speed exceeding 3 knots.
The Doppler function highlights objects on the Radar display that are moving
towards or away from the vessel (e.g. other vessels, but not land or buoys,
for example). Stationary targets will not be highlighted.
Doppler Radar technology is particularly beneficial in a marine environment,
where poor weather conditions and visibility can make object tracking
challenging. With the integration of Doppler information on the Radar display,
the process of matching on-screen Radar returns with real-world objects
becomes a much simpler task.

350
Doppler Radar works by transmitting a microwave signal which is then Doppler mode — Color palettes
reflected off a moving object at a distance. By analyzing how the object's
Doppler has unique color palettes which help to ensure the Red and Green
motion has altered the frequency of the returned signal, the Doppler Radar
Doppler targets stand out from the Radar image. When Doppler is enabled,
can interpret the variation to provide highly accurate measurements of an
the standard color palette setting will show only the unique Doppler color
object’s direction of travel, relative to the Radar scanner.
palettes: [Doppler grey], [Doppler blue] and [Doppler yellow]. A [Full Color]
option is also available.
Doppler mode
When a compatible Radar scanner is connected, Doppler mode is available. Note:
If ‘Full color’ is selected for the Radar palette, approaching targets will
appear Pink instead of Red.

The Color palettes can be selected from the Presentation tab: [Menu >
Settings > Presentation].

Caution: Doppler limitations

When the target's speed is more than 60 knots Speed Over
Ground (SOG), or the relative speed between your vessel and
the target is greater than 120 knots, the direction of target
returns from high speed vessels may be displayed incorrectly.
Consequently, the displayed target colors may be inverted,
with targets colored red when they should be green, and
vice versa.

Doppler data source requirements

Use of the Doppler Radar features requires the following data sources to be
available on your system (e.g. connected to your multifunction display, via
Doppler mode — Enabling and disabling
SeaTalkng ® or NMEA 0183).
Doppler mode is enabled from the Main menu: [Menu > Doppler].
With Doppler mode enabled, the color palette will change to the default Required data sources
Doppler palette: All approaching targets will be colored Red, and all targets Data type Example data source
moving away from you will be colored Green.
COG (Course Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal
Doppler mode is suspended at ranges of 12 nm and greater. The Radar color receiver or external receiver).
palette will remain the same but targets will not be highlighted.
SOG (Speed Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal
receiver or external receiver).

Radar app 351

Recommended data source
Data type Example data source
HDG / HDT (True Heading) Compass or Autopilot sensor providing
Fastheading data (e.g. Evolution EV-1 /
EV-2).

Note:
A heading data source is not essential for Doppler operation. However
it will improve the performance of Doppler mode at slower speeds (< 15
knots), when tide set and leeway are present.

22.15 Blank sectors

Blank sectors can be manually set to hide specific sections of your radar Blank sectors can be enabled / disabled on the radar overlay in the Chart
display. app: [Chart app > Settings menu > Radar settings]
This feature is useful for vessels that experience false radar readings from For more information refer to Radar settings
onboard structures or equipment.
As blanking also physically disables the scanner’s transmitter for the sector
that you define, this feature is also useful for protecting crew members from
radar radio frequency emissions when they are in close proximity to the
radar antenna. One example of this scenario is when the helm is within the
beamwidth of the radar antenna.

Note:
Sector blanking is only available with Cyclone solid state open array,
Magnum™ Open Array and Quantum™ 2 Doppler running Radar software
version 2.46 or above.

Blank sectors can be enabled from the Radar app settings: [Radar app >
Settings menu > Installation]
Two blank sectors can be enabled. You can edit the minimum and maximum
limits of each blank sector; this will determine how much of the radar display
is hidden.

352
22.16 Radar sensitivity controls Control Name Description
[‘CG’ Color Gain] The control sets the lower limit for the
Optimum performance is usually achieved using the default settings. You color used for the strongest target
can adjust the image using the Sensitivity controls to improve the displayed returns. All target returns above this
image. value are displayed in the strongest
color. Those with a weaker value are
Sensitivity settings can be accessed using the onscreen divided equally between the remaining
[Image adjustment] icon, or the Adjust sensitivity menu colors.
option: [Menu > Adjust sensitivity]. The control can be set to [Auto] or
[Manual].
[All to Auto] Sets all Sensitivity settings to [Auto] with
The Sensitivity controls available are dependant upon the Radar scanner in 0% offset.
use.

Control Name Description

[‘G’ Gain] The control determines the signal
strength at which target returns are
shown onscreen. 22.17 Radar settings menus
The Gain control can be set to [Auto] or
[Manual]. The radar settings menu is organized into tabs with settings and options
A higher value produces more target appearing under the relevant tab. The following settings menus are available:
returns and noise onscreen.
• [Transmission] For details refer to: p.354 — Transmission settings menu
[‘R’ Rain] Precipitation appears on the Radar
screen as lots of small echoes which • [View & Motion] For details refer to: p.354 — View & Motion settings menu
continuously change size, intensity and • [Presentation] For details refer to: p.355 — Presentation settings menu
position. The Rain control suppresses
these echoes making it easier to identify • [Preferences] For details refer to: p.356 — Preferences settings menu
real object. • [Installation] For details refer to: p.356 — Installation settings menu
The higher the Rain control is set the
more echoes will be suppressed. • [Advanced] For details refer to: p.357 — Advanced settings menu
[‘S’ Sea] Radar echoes from waves can clutter • [Page settings] For details refer to: p.358 — Page settings menu
the Radar screen. The Sea control
suppresses these echoes (for up to 5
nm depending on conditions) making it
easier to identify real objects.
The higher the Sea control is set the
more echoes will be suppressed.

Radar app 353

Transmission settings menu Menu item and description Options
The transmission settings menu provides options relating to radar scanner [Dual range] • On
selection and operation. Enables and disables dual range, which enables you to
• Off
display 2 different ranges simultaneously.
Menu item and description Options [Range Fusion] • On
[Scanner] List of available Enables the Range Fusion feature when using dual
• Off
Allows you to select the radar scanner that you want Radar scanners. range on Cyclone radar scanners. With Range Fusion,
to use. (In systems featuring multiple connected radar short and long pulses are combined to provide a
scanners). high-clarity Radar image for both short-range and
long-range targets, simultaneously.
[Channel shown in this app] • Channel 1
Determines which channel is shown in the radar app. (Long range)
Note:
• Channel 2
(Short range) Option only available on Cyclone radar scanners.
[Antenna size selection] • 4ft
Open array radar antenna size selection.
• 6ft
[Timed transmit] • On
Enables and disables Timed transmit.
• Off
View & Motion settings menu
Timed transmit configures your radar to transmit at
periodic intervals to conserve power. The view and motion settings menu contains settings that allow you to control
how the radar is displayed in relation to your vessel.
[Standby] • 3 min
Determines the length of time the radar is in Standby
• 5 min
for in time transmit mode.
• 10 min
• 15 min
[Transmit] • 10 scans
Determines the amount of scans the radar will perform
• 20 scans
when transmitting in time transmit mode.
• 30 scans

354
 Menu item and description Options Menu item and description Options
[Orientation] • Head-up The boat position determines the position of your vessel
Head-up onscreen. You can adjust the Boat position to provide a • Partial offset
• North-up greater distance ahead of your vessel.
The top of the screen always points towards your • Full offset
vessel’s current heading and as your heading changes • Course-up Your boat position can only be changed in [Relative
the Radar image rotates accordingly. motion] mode.
In Head-up the motion mode is fixed to Relative motion.
North-up
The radar image is orientated so that true north is
always upward on the screen. As your vessel changes
direction the SHM (ship heading marker) rotates Presentation settings menu
accordingly to show your relative position to true north. The presentation settings menu provides options for what is displayed on
Course-up the screen.
The radar is orientated so as to show your current
course directly ahead. The radar image will rotate so Menu item and description Options
that your COG is always upward on the screen, as your
heading changes the SHM rotates accordingly. [Range rings] • On
Enables and disables Range rings in the Radar app.
[Motion mode] • Relative • Off
Relative motion motion [Range ring labels] • On
Relative Motion mode fixes your vessel’s position and Enables and disables Range ring distance labels in the
• True motion • Off
the radar image moves relative to your vessel Radar app.
In Relative motion mode you can adjust your vessel’s
onscreen position using the Boat position setting. [Range ring mode] • Auto
True motion The number of Range rings displayed in the Radar
• Preferred
True Motion mode fixes the chart position and the app can be either set automatically according to the
number
vessel icon moves across the screen. As the vessel’s displayed range or you can specify a preferred number
position approaches the edge of the screen, the chart of range rings.
image is automatically redrawn to reveal the area ahead [Rings] • 2
of the vessel. As the vessel’s position approaches the When Range ring mode is set to Preferred number use
• 4
edge of the display, the image is automatically redrawn this setting to specify your preferred number.
to reveal the area ahead of the vessel. • 6
In True motion mode the boat position is fixed to [Full
[Color palette] List of color
offset].
Allows selection of the color palette. palettes.
[Show waypoints] • On
Note: Allows the display of waypoint icons in the Radar app.
• Off
True Motion mode is not available when the Radar
orientation is set to “Head-up”.

[Boat position] • Center

Radar app 355

Preferences settings menu Description Options
The preferences settings menu provides options to help you customize your [Tune adjust] • Auto
Radar to your personal preference. Allows you to adjust the Radar scanner’s receiver for
• Manual (0% to
maximum target returns.
100%)
Description Options It is recommended that the Radar scanner is allowed
to warm up for at least 10 minutes prior to making
[VRM/EBL reference] • True/Mag adjustments.
Determines the reference point used for VRM/EBLs.
• Relative [Radar Rotation Speed] • 24 RPM
[Interference rejection] • On Allows you to select the appropriate rotation speed for
• Auto (24 / 48
Suppresses interference from other Radar scanners in your range.
• Off RPM)
the vicinity. The Auto option provides an increased refresh rate at
Radar ranges up to 3 nm.
[Interference rejection level] Quantum™ /
Determines the amount of interference suppression Cyclone [Transmit frequency] • Low
used. Changing the Transmit frequency can reduce
• Level 1 to Level • Normal
Only available when [Interference rejection] is enabled. interference on the Radar image.
5 • High
Non-HD Digital [Beam sharpening] • On
Radomes Reduces the beamwidth of the Radar by the amount
• Off
• Normal specified in [Beam sharpening amount], to produce
targets that have less resolution, which makes it easier
• High to identify targets that are close together.
[Near Target Enhancement] • On Intended for Radars with 3 ft or 4 ft antennas, which
The size of targets within the first half of the displayed have less beamwidth than a 6 ft antenna.
• Off
range will be increased to provide a more consistent
size of targets as they approach your vessel (i.e. the Note:
center of the screen).
Option only available on Cyclone radar scanners.

Note: [Beam sharpening amount] • 0% to 100%

Option only available on Cyclone radar scanners. Percentage of the beamwidth reduction for the Radar’s
[Beam sharpening] feature.
[Expanded returns] • On
When enabled, increases the Radar pulse length to
provide larger target returns.
• Off Installation settings menu
[Expansion level] • Low The installation settings menu provides options used during installation to
Determines the amount of target expansion applied. help set up your radar
• High
Only available when [Target expansion] is enabled. During normal operation it should not be necessary to adjust Installation
settings.

356
 Menu item and description Options Menu item and description Options
[Bearing alignment] • 179.5° Port to [Main Bang Suppression (MBS)] • Off
Enables you to align the Radar image correctly in 180° Starboard MBS eliminates saturation in radar returns displayed in
• On
relation to your vessel’s bow. Correct alignment is the immediate vicinity of your vessel. When adjusting
necessary for the accurate display of radar returns and [Zero range] it is recommended that MBS is set to Off.
targets. [Sea clutter curve] • 1 to 8
[Parking offset] • 0° to 359° Adjusts the Radar scanner’s sensitivity to Sea clutter.
Allows you to select the “parked” position of your Open
[Wired adapter channel (requires Radar reboot)] • 1 to 11
Array’s antenna, which is the physical position that the
Changes channel to eliminate noise. For details refer
antenna will be in, relative to the pedestal when the
to: p.522 — Changing Quantum radar channel
radar is in Standby.
This feature is only available when the Open Array [Set scanner’s zero rotation position] Set
radar scanner is in Standby. The Zero position is set in the factory. It should only
need changing if the slip ring has been replaced or if
[Blank sector 1] • 0° to 359°
the unit has been taken apart.
Allows you to hide a specific section of the radar
• 0° to 10° [Reset] N/A
display, creating a “blank” sector onscreen that shows
(default) Reset the Radar’s settings to their factory default values.
no radar signal returns.

Note: Advanced settings menu

Sector blanking is only available with Cyclone The advanced settings menu contains advanced settings related to the radar.
solid state open array, Magnum™ Open Array and
Quantum™ 2 Doppler running Radar software version During normal operation it should not be necessary to adjust Installation
2.46 or above. settings.

[Blank sector 2] • 0° to 359° Menu item and description Options

Allows you to hide an additional section of the radar
• 180° to 190° [Tune preset] • 0 to 255
display, creating a “blank” sector onscreen that shows
(default) Radar tuning is controlled either automatically
no radar signal returns.
or manually, using the [Tune adjust] setting.
Tune preset controls the range available to the
Note: [Tune adjust] control.
Sector blanking is only available with Cyclone [STC preset] • 0% to 100%
solid state open array, Magnum™ Open Array and The Sensitivity Time Control (STC) can be used
Quantum™ 2 Doppler running Radar software version to equalize targets across the image. If you find
2.46 or above. targets are brighter or dimmer nearer the center
of the image adjust the STC preset until the
desired result is achieved.

Radar app 357

 Menu item and description Options
[Zero range] • 0 to 153m / 502ft
Zero range (Display timing) is used to configure
the zero range of the Radar scanner so that
objects appear at the correct distance.
[Reset] • Yes
Resets Installation and advanced settings to
• No
factory defaults.

Page settings menu

The page settings menu contains settings related to page layout.
The following options are available:
• [Data Overlays] — Enables configuration of Data overlays, which overlay
key information from connected sensors onto the Chart, Radar, Sonar and
Camera apps.
• [Edit split ratio] — Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages. For example, 50/50, 70/30 etc.

358
CHAPTER 23: FIRST RESPONDER
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 23.1 First responder features — page 360

• 23.2 Lost depth alarm — page 363
• 23.3 Heading and SOG Homescreen status — page 363
• 23.4 Settings password protection — page 363
• 23.5 Data logging — page 364
• 23.6 Waypoint at Range and Bearing from location — page 365
• 23.7 Route sending and receiving — page 365
• 23.8 Intel targets — page 369
• 23.9 DSC targets — page 371
• 23.10 Target Of Interest (TOI) — page 372
• 23.11 First responder AIS modes — page 375
• 23.12 AIS high target alarm — page 376
• 23.13 SITREP (Situation report) — page 376
• 23.14 First responder target context menus — page 377
• 23.15 Depth markers — page 378
• 23.16 Import and export Waypoints and Routes over NMEA networks — page 378

First responder 359

23.1 First responder features Note:
On an MFD network only the Data master MFD needs to be configured.
Configuring the MFD for First responders enables extra features that are
otherwise not available on the MFD. Several of the First responder features
require a STEDs compatible AIS transceiver to enable Sensitive Tactical First responder features
Information Exchange and Display System (STEDS) functionality.
The following features are available when the MFD is configured as ‘First
First responder and STEDS features require [First responder] to be selected responder’
as the ‘Boating activity’ during step 2 of the MFD’s initial startup wizard.
• The [Responder] settings menu tab is available and the [Responder vessel
type] can be selected. For details refer to p.361 — Responder settings
Note:
• Data logging is enabled. For details refer to p.364 — Data logging
To change boating activity a factory reset must be performed to initiate
the startup wizard. • DSC target tracking are enabled. For details refer to p.371 — DSC targets
• Intel target tracking is available. For details refer to p.369 — Intel targets
STEDS specific features also require • LightHouse™ charts obstruction alarm is available For details refer to
p.236 — Obstruction alarm (legacy LightHouse charts)
• an AIS5000 to be connected to the same NMEA 2000 / SeaTalkng ®
network as the MFD. • Settings password protection. For details refer to
p.363 — Settings password protection
Note: The AIS5000 must be correctly configured with an MMSI number • Place waypoint at range and bearing. For details refer to
and where required a radio operators license must be obtained. p.365 — Waypoint at Range and Bearing from location
• Homescreen Heading and SOG indication. For details refer to
p.363 — Heading and SOG Homescreen status
• each vessel must be configured with the same STEDS passphrase.
• Depth monitoring / lost depth alarm. For details refer to
STEDS features use the existing Automatic Identification System (AIS)
p.363 — Lost depth alarm
network to transmit and receive messages and data but as the messages and
data are encrypted they are not visible or available to standard Class A and • Importing and exporting waypoints and Routes
Class B AIS receivers/ transceivers. over NMEA networks. For details refer to
p.378 — Import and export Waypoints and Routes over NMEA networks
STEDs encryption
The encryption is 128bit AES encryption which is compliant with the • Placing horizontal depth markers in the sonar app. For details refer to
requirements of FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard Publication). p.378 — Depth markers
The symmetric STEDs passphrase is used to encrypt and decrypt STEDs • AIS maximum/high targets alarm. For details refer to
messages to ensure that only vessels with MFDs configured with the same p.376 — AIS high target alarm
passphrase can send and receive the messages.
First responder STEDS features
e.g. If another law enforcement geographically close to your network of
The following STEDS features are available when the MFD is configured as
vessels also uses the STEDs encrypted MFD functionality, unless they have
‘First responder’ and the STEDS requirements have been met
a matching key there cannot be any interaction between the 2 agencies,
and instead each agency will see the other’s vessels as a normal AIS target • The STEDS text messaging app is available. For details refer to
(providing they aren’t in AIS restricted mode). p.385 — Messaging app
360
• SITREP status can be configured. For details refer to MMSI / AIS
p.376 — SITREP (Situation report) • [MMSI] — Set your vessel’s MMSI number.
• AIS restricted mode is available. For details refer to
p.375 — First responder AIS modes Important:
• Targets of Interest (TOI) feature is enabled. For details refer to – In the United States of America (USA), the MMSI and Static Data
p.372 — Target Of Interest (TOI) must be entered only by a Raymarine® dealer or other appropriately
• Blue Force tracking is used to identify other STEDS configured vessels. qualified installer of marine communications equipment for marine
For details refer to p.376 — Blue Force Tracking vessels. In the USA, the user is NOT authorized to do this.
• Managed and un-managed Search and Rescue (SAR) patterns can be – In Europe and other parts of the world outside of the United States of
broadcast and received over STEDS messaging. For details refer to America, the MMSI can be set up by the user.
p.179 — SAR pattern broadcast and receipt
– For further details, refer to the relevant Telecommunications
• Routes can be broadcast and received over STEDs messaging. for details Regulatory Body for your region.
refer to: p.365 — Route broadcast and receipt

• [AIS mode] — Determines the transmit/receive mode of STEDS AIS

LightHouse software updates for STEDs enabled hardware. For details see: p.375 — First responder AIS modes
systems
STEDS passphrase
Data sent or received using STEDs messaging will be erased when the
MFD’s software is updated. • [Passphrase] — Enter the designated passphrase your team / organization
is using to transmit and receive STEDS messages.
The following data will be erased:
• [Clear passphrase] — Deletes the entered passphrase.
• Inbox messages
• [Passphrase auto-wipe] — Passphrase expiry. Set the number of days
• SAR patterns before the passphrase is automatically deleted (the passphrase will be
• Targets of interest wiped at 00:00 UTC).
Data logging
Responder settings • [Data logging] — Enables and disables Data logging.
The Responder menu tab is only available when [First responder] is selected • [Logging interval] — Time interval between recording data.
as the ‘Boating activity’ during step 2 of the MFD’s initial startup wizard. The
Responder menu includes settings for STEDS specific features, which require • [Save to:] — Select the card slot to use for Data logging.
an AIS5000 to be connected to the system. Password protection
Unit details • [Activate password lock] / [Deactivate password lock] — When activated
• [Asset type] — Select either Vessel or Aircraft. critical settings cannot be changed without entering the specified
• [Unit type] — Select unit type from the list. password.

• [Unit name] — Enter your unit name (this option is the same as the [Boat Advanced
name] option available in the [Boat details] settings menu). • The following Advanced setting can be accessed from the From the
The unit type and asset type settings will synchronize and set the same [Advanced set-up] menu:
values on a STEDs compliant AIS transceiver e.g.: Raymarine’s AIS 5000. – TOI OneShot settings For details refer to: p.373 — TOI OneShot settings
First responder 361
 – FID and checksum settings For details refer to:: • Tx FID 56 (Legacy SITREP)
p.362 — STEDS messaging transmission FIDs and checksums • Tx FID 57 (Legacy static data)
– NMEA 2000 messages For details refer to:
p.362 — NMEA 2000 messages Note:
– Inbox message retention For details refer to:
FID 10 and FID 11 are enabled by default. FID 56 and FID 57 are disabled by
p.386 — Inbox message retention
default.
– Round patterns to nearest 0.1 nm — Enabling [Round patterns] ensures
that SAR patterns appear the same on both broadcaster and recipient
MFDs. This setting is disabled by default. Checksum validation
Checksum validation is enabled by default but can be enabled and disabled
Important: SAR patterns are broadcast at a 0.1 nm resolution. If you
from the [Transmission checksums] menu: [Homescreen > Settings >
intend to broadcast a SAR pattern ensure that [Round patterns] is
Responder > Advanced set-up > Configure > Transmission checksums].
enabled before the SAR pattern is created.
When enabled received FID’s checksums are checked to validate messages.
Checksum validation is available for the following FIDs:
– [Operate in Secondary SMC behavior]. For details refer to:
p.362 — Act in secondary mode • FID 3— PI message acknowledgement
• FID 4 — Target of interest — 15s
Act in secondary mode • FID 5 — Target of interest — 60s
If the MFD is not the primary system on the NMEA 2000 network that is being
• FID 6 — Target of interest — 180s
used for SMC searches, the MFD should be put into secondary mode.
In secondary mode the MFD will ignore SMC requests from other systems • FID 7 — Target of interest — 600s
on the same NMEA 2000 network. • FID 8 — Target of interest — single
Secondary mode can be enabled from the [Advanced set-up] menu: • FID 10 — Situation report (v0 and v1 supported when clear)
[Homescreen > Settings > Responder > Advanced set-up > Configure].
• FID 11 — Static data report (v0 and v1 supported when clear)
Enable the [Operate in Secondary SMC behavior] toggle switch.
If the toggle is not enabled then the MFD will receive SMC requests from • FID 23 — Search pattern report (encrypted)
other systems on the same NMEA 2000 network. • FID 28 — Text message

STEDS messaging transmission FIDs and checksums NMEA 2000 messages

The SITREP and Static data functional IDs (FIDs) and FID checksum validation Below is a list of NMEA 2000 PGNs that can be enabled and disabled
can be enabled and disabled from the [Advanced set-up] menu. [Homescreen from the [Advanced set-up] menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Responder >
> Settings > Responder > Advanced set-up > Configure] Advanced set-up > Configure > NMEA 2000 Messages].
STEDS messages • [Transmit PGN 130311 (environmental)]
The following transmission SITREP and Static data FIDs are available: • [Transmit PGN 130312 (temperature)]
• Tx FID 10 (SITREP) • [Output true heading] (PGN 127250)
• Tx FID 11 (Static data) • [Transmit PGN 127237 (heading track control)]
362
• [Output Rx SITREP as Class A] (Converts received secure SITREP to Class • No SOG is displayed if no source for SOG data is available.
A Position Report and transmits on NMEA 2000 PGN 129038) • No Hdg is displayed if no source of heading data is available.
• [Output Rx Static Data as Class A] (Converts received secure Static Data to
Class A Static and Voyage and transmits on NMEA 2000 PGN 129794)
• [Output Rx Legacy SITREP as Class A] (Converts received legacy SITREP to 23.4 Settings password protection
Class A Position report and transmits on NMEA 2000 PGN 129038)
• [Output Rx Legacy Static Data as Class A] (Converts received legacy Critical settings can be password protected to prevent them from being
Static Data to Class A Static and Voyage and transmits on NMEA 2000 changed inadvertently.
PGN 129794) The settings password lock is activated from the Responder settings tab
menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Responder].

23.2 Lost depth alarm Important:

MFDs configured using the First responder boating activity can constantly If the password is forgotten the MFD will require a
monitor the availability of depth data using the lost depth alarm.. Power on reset to remove the password. Refer to:
If depth data becomes unavailable (i.e.: lost) then the lost depth alarm is p.520 — Performing a power on reset on an Axiom® Pro display
triggered. If depth data is intermittent then the alarm will only be triggered
once every 60 seconds. The alarm will be automatically dismissed when If password protection has been activated the following settings cannot be
depth data becomes available again. changed without first entering the password:
Depth transducer settings
The settings determining where depth readings are taken from and, if
applicable, the associated depth offset value, located in the Fishfinder app
The lost depth alarm is disabled by default and can be enabled from the settings menu: [Fishfinder > Settings > Transducer].
[Alarms] manager: [Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > Lost depth alarm]. Wireless connection settings
The following settings located in the [This display] menu: [Homescreen >
Settings > This display].
23.3 Heading and SOG Homescreen status • [Wireless display]
When either Heading or Speed Over Ground (SOG) data is not available then • [Allow devices to connect via Wi-Fi]
a relevant message is displayed in the top right corner of the Homescreen
• [Pair with Quantum].
under the GNSS (GPS) status..
• [Settings reset]
• [Factory reset]
• [Bluetooth settings]
Boat details settings
The following settings located in the Boat detail menu: [Homescreen >
Settings > Boat details]
First responder 363
• [Min safe height]
• [Min safe width]
• [Min safe depth]
• [Boat length]
• [Bow to GPS]
Homescreen settings
The following settings accessed from the Homescreen: 1. Data logging active

• [Bluetooth settings] — accessed from the status area. 2. Data logging error (e.g.: no MicroSD card inserted)

• [Wi-Fi connection] — accessed -from the third-party [Apps] page. 3. Data logging disabled

• [Homescreen app page pop-over] — accessed by pressing and holding The Data logger records the following data, when available:
on a blank space or app page icon. Own vessel:
• Date and time
• Latitude and Longitude
23.5 Data logging
• Heading
The Data Logger records, at regular intervals, readings taken by your vessel’s • Speed (SOG)
equipment, an active Man overboard alarm, and the 5 closest AIS targets.
• Depth
The Data logger is enabled by default and records data to a CSV file saved
to a MicroSD card inserted into a card slot on the MFD. A new CSV file is Man Overboard:
created every hour up to a maximum of 73 files (72 hours of data), after which • Latitude and Longitude
the first file will be overwritten by the next new Data logging file.
• Elapsed time
If the MicroSD card is removed or reaches capacity, Data logging will be
suspended and a notification will be displayed onscreen. 5 closest AIS targets:
• Vessel name
Note: • Vessel MMSI
• On MFD networks only the datamaster MFD can be used to perform • Latitude and Longitude
data logging.
• Heading
• For optimal performance, Do NOT use cartography cards for Data
logging. • Speed (SOG)
The Data logger can be configured from the [Responder] settings menu:
[Homescreen > Settings > Responder].
The status of the Data logger is displayed in the status area of the
Homescreen using icons.

364
23.6 Waypoint at Range and Bearing from From the Waypoint from range and bearing dialogue you can also [Delete]
the Waypoint if you do not want to keep it, or initiate a [Goto].
location
If an intelligence report is received that provides a target’s range and bearing
from the reporter’s location a waypoint can be created using the reported 23.7 Route sending and receiving
details.
When the display has been configured using the [First responder] activity
The waypoint can be placed in the Chart app by opening the Chart context and the system includes a STEDs compatible AIS transceiver, routes can
menu at the location given and selecting [more options] and then [Place Wpt be sent and received.
at Rng/Brg] to open the Waypoint dialog.
Screenshot of chart context menu and new waypoint dialog Note:
• Broadcast routes — can contain a maximum of 7 waypoints. Broadcast
routes with more than 7 waypoints cannot be sent.
• Direct routes — can contain a maximum of 5 waypoints. Direct message
routes with more than 5 waypoints cannot be sent.
• Receiving routes — Routes containing up to 14 waypoints can be
received by the system.
• Forwarding routes — Received routes can be forwarded. Routes with up
to 5 waypoints can be forwarded as a [Direct message] route. Routes
with up to 7 waypoints can be forwarded as a [Broadcast] route. Routes
with more than 7 waypoints cannot be forwarded.

Once a route is created it can be [Broadcast] or sent as a [Direct message].

As a minimum the following fields are required to create the waypoint: A [Broadcast] route will be received by all vessels that are using the same
STEDs passphrase as the sending vessel. A [Direct message] will be sent to
• [Cursor position] — Enter the reporter’s coordinates an individual vessel.
• [Bearing from cursor position] — Enter the reported target’s Bearing The [Send route] option is available from the [Route] context menu and from
the [Route list] pop-over menu.
• [Range from cursor position] — Enter the reported target’s Range
When a route is sent it will be received as a message which will be available
The following additional fields can be completed, if required:
in the Messages inbox.
• [Name] — Give the Waypoint a name
• [Symbol] — Change the default Waypoint symbol.
• [Group] — Assign the Waypoint to a Waypoint group.
• [Comments] — Add any additional details.
To finalize the waypoint creation select [Back] or [Close] the dialogue.
First responder 365
Broadcasting a route The route will be broadcast to all vessels in range which have the same
STEDs passphrase as the sending vessel.
A route can be broadcast to all vessels using the same STEDs passphrase.

Sending a route using direct message

A route can be sent to an individual vessel using its MMSI number, a vessel
that is in your buddy list or to a vessel in the local vicinity.

1. Select [Send route] from either the [Route] context menu or from the
[Route list] pop-over menu.

To access the [Send route] option from the context menu, open the
[Route] context menu and select [More options].

2. Select [Broadcast]. 1. Select [Send route] from either the route context menu or from the route
list pop-over menu.
3. Select the [Type] field and choose the relevant route type.
4. If required, adjust the [Start time] and [Expiry time]. To access the [Send route] option from the context menu open the route
context menu and select [More options].
For details, refer to:
p.367 — Adjusting Start time and Expiry time for routes 2. Select [Direct message].
3. Select a contact from the [Recent], [Buddies] or [Local] recipients list, or
5. Select [OK]. select [Enter MMSI] and enter the vessel’s MMSI number.
366
4. Select [Next] . 4. Select [Expiry time].
5. Select the [Type] field and choose the relevant route type.
6. If required, adjust the [Start time] and [Expiry time].

For details refer to:

p.367 — Adjusting Start time and Expiry time for routes

7. Select [OK].
The route will be sent to the selected contact/MMSI.

Adjusting Start time and Expiry time for routes

When broadcasting or sending a route via a direct message, the [Start time]
and [Expiry time] can be adjusted.
By default, the [Start time] will be the current system data and time.
By default, the [Expiry time] will be 24 hours later than the current system
date and time.
1. Select [Start time].

5. Use the [Up] and [Down] arrows to adjust the expiry date and time.
6. Alternatively, select [Duration] and adjust the duration before the route
will expire.
7. Select [OK].
Once the expiry time is reached, “Expired” will be displayed against the
Route in the Routes list, for both the sender and recipients of the route.

2. Use the [Up] and [Down] arrows to adjust the start date and time.
3. Select [OK].
First responder 367
Receiving a route Following a received route
A message notification is displayed onscreen when a route is received. Once a route has been received it can be followed in the same way as any
other route.

1. Select [Follow route] from the Route context menu, or select [Follow] from
the Route’s pop-over menu in the [Received] routes list.
1. Selected either [Dismiss] or [View inbox] .
2. Select how you wish to follow the route.
2. Select [OK] on the Route received info dialog.
Active navigation of the route will commence.
3. If you selected [View inbox] then the Messages inbox will be displayed.
The received route will be available in the Chart app and will be listed in the
[All routes] and [Received routes] lists.
Cancelling a sent route
Sent routes can be cancelled by the sending vessel.
The sent route can be cancelled from the Routes list. The routes list can be
accessed from:
• [Homescreen > My Data > Routes], or
• [Chart app > Menu > Waypoints, Routes and Tracks > Routes]

368
 23.8 Intel targets
Intel targets are targets created manually based on visual or reported
information of a vessel’s position and if available, course and speed.
Intel targets are listed in the Intel targets list and an icon is used in the Chart
app to represent the target.

1. Select the [Sent] tab. When an Intel target is created a

2. Select the sent route. purple Intel target icon is placed
onscreen at the specified position.
3. Select [Send cancellation] from the pop-over menu. If Heading and Speed have been
4. Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog. specified the target icon will move
A route cancellation message will be received by the recipient vessel(s), and appropriately and display a course
the route’s status will be set to Cancelled. vector, otherwise the icon will
remain static.

Intel targets will remain on the system until cancelled.

First responder 369

Creating an Intel target Accessing target options
Targets can be creating using reported or sighted information about a targets Target specific options are available for targets that are currently being
location, Heading and Speed. tracked. The target options can be accessed from the target’s context
menu and from the Pop-over options in the relevant target list. The options
available are dependent on the type of target.
To access a target’s context menu:
• Press and hold on the target onscreen, or
• Highlight the target onscreen using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button.
To access the target list Pop-over menu:
• Select the target in the relevant target list, or
• Highlight the target in the list using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button.

Intel target options

The following options are available for Intel targets.
• [Designate TOI] — If your MFD is configured for STEDS you can
designate a target as a Target of Interest (TOI). For details see:
p.372 — Target Of Interest (TOI)
Intel targets are created from the Chart app’s [New] menu: [Menu > New >
Intel target] • [Cancel Target] — Cancels the Intel target and removes it from the system.

To create an Intel target follow the steps below: • [Intercept] — Initiates a Target interception . For details see:
p.238 — Target intercept
1. Place the cursor at the desired location in the Chart app..
2. Select [New] from the Chart app menu. • [Show on chart] — Displays the target centered in the Chart app.
3. Select [Intel target].
4. Ensure that the latitude and longitude for the target are correct in the Intel target list
[Position] field, adjusting if necessary. The target list identifies the target position, course, speed and the type of
5. Select whether the Intel is [Visual] or [Reported]. intel the target is based on (i.e.: Visual or Reported.). If the target has been
6. Enter a [Speed] and [Course] for the Intel target. designated as a TOI then the related Link ID will also be displayed.
7. Select [Save]. The Intel targets list can be accessed from the Targets menu in the Radar
app and Chart app: [Menu > Targets > Intel].
The Intel target will be displayed in the Chart app using a purple target icon.
Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView
Intel targets can also be created from the Pop-over options in the Intel targets app pane on the right of the page and opens the Pop-over menu.
list: [Menu > Targets > Intel > New intel target].

370
 Accessing target options
Target specific options are available for targets that are currently being
tracked. The target options can be accessed from the target’s context
menu and from the Pop-over options in the relevant target list. The options
available are dependent on the type of target.
To access a target’s context menu:
• Press and hold on the target onscreen, or
• Highlight the target onscreen using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button.
To access the target list Pop-over menu:
• Select the target in the relevant target list, or
• Highlight the target in the list using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button.

DSC target options

The following options are available for DSC targets.
23.9 DSC targets • [Designate TOI] — If your MFD is configured for STEDS you can
designate a target as a Target of Interest (TOI). For details see:
Waypoints created from DSC notifications will be displayed in the DSC target p.372 — Target Of Interest (TOI)
list and are displayed onscreen at the originating vessel’s reported position. • [Cancel Target] — Cancels the DSC target and removes the DSC waypoint
For details on creating a waypoint from a DSC notification see: from the system.
p.132 — DSC distress notification • [Intercept] — Initiates a Target interception . For details see:
DSC target symbols are static and remain in the reported position, however p.238 — Target intercept
if a DSC position update is received a new DSC waypoint symbol can be • [Goto] — Initiate navigation to the target position.
placed at the new location.
• [Show on chart] — Displays the target centered in the Chart app.

DSC target list

The target list identifies: The MMSI number of the originating vessel, its
reported Position, Range and Bearing from your vessel and the Type of
distress. If the target has been designated as a TOI then the related Link ID
will also be displayed.
The DSC target list can be accessed from the Targets menu in the Radar app
and Chart app: [Menu > Targets > DSC]
DSC targets will remain on the system until cancelled manually. Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView
app pane on the right of the page and opens the Pop-over menu.
First responder 371
 Sent recurring TOI icon
A recurring TOI is represented on the sender’s MFD using a
red triangle icon with 2 red rings around it.
Recurring TOIs will be tracked until cancelled.

Sent OneShot TOI icon

A OneShot TOI is represented on the sender’s MFD using a
red triangle icon with 2 red dashed rings around it.
OneShot TOIs will be tracked until the decay period has
elapsed. See: p.373 — OneShot TOI decay times

Received TOI icon

A TOI that has been received from another vessel is
represented on the recipient’s MFD using a red triangle
icon.
When a TOI message is received a notification is displayed
onscreen. The incoming message is saved in the
[Messages] app..
A TOI received from another vessel cannot be forwarded
23.10 Target Of Interest (TOI) on to other vessels.
Received TOIs will be tracked until cancelled.
AIS, Radar, DSC and Intel targets can be designated as TOIs. Once a target is
designated as a TOI, STEDS messaging is used to broadcast the TOI to all
vessels in range or to send the TOI to an individual MMSI number. TOIs can If a Radar target or AIS target that a TOI is based on becomes lost then the
also be received over STEDS messaging. TOI will also become lost.

Important:
Recipient MFDs must have the same STEDS passphrase installed as the
sender’s MFD.

TOIs can be assigned as ‘OneShot’ TOIs or as recurring TOIs. OneShot TOIs

are sent once and are automatically cancelled after a specified decay period.
Recurring TOIs are repeated until cancelled at the selected transmission rate.
TOIs created from Inter targets or DSC targets are always assigned as
OneShot TOIs.
TOI icons are displayed in the Chart app and Radar app. Different icons are
used to differentiate between sent and received TOIs.

372
OneShot TOI decay times 2. Radar targets
TOIs designated as OneShot are temporary and are subject to a delay period 3. Intel targets
before reverting to their original target states (i.e.: AIS target, Radar target, 4. DSC targets
DSC target or Intel target).
5. Received TOI

Note:
Received OneShot TOIs use the standard received TOI icons for the
duration of both delay periods and will then disappear.

TOI OneShot settings

TOI OneShot decay times and automatic repeat for sending / broadcasting
the related STEDS message can be adjusted.
TOI OneShot settings are accessed from the [Advanced set-up] menu:
[Homescreen > Settings > Responder > Advanced set-up > Configure].
The following settings are available:
• [T1] — Number of seconds for the initial delay period.
• [T2] — Number of seconds for the second delay period.

TOI transmission rates

TOIs can be transmitted as either a single ‘OneShot’ transmission or as a
recurring transmission.
TOIs generated from Intel targets or DSC targets are automatically assigned
as OneShot TOIs. TOIs generated from AIS targets and Radar targets allow
the sender to select the TOI rate when the TOI is created. Recipients and
senders can change the TOI rate at anytime.
The following TOI rates can be selected:
• OneShot (Single Transmission) — TOI message is transmitted only once.
• T1 Initial delay — The OneShot TOI icon is used to represent OneShot TOIs
until an initial delay period has expired. • Slow Target (600 sec repeat) — TOI message is transmitted every 600
seconds.
• T2 Second delay — After the initial delay period has expired the TOI will
revert to using its original target icon but maintain the Red dashed rings • Medium Target (180 sec repeat) — TOI message is transmitted every 180
around the icon. After a second delay period expires the Red dashed seconds.
circles are removed and the target reverts to using its original target icon. • Fast Target (60 sec repeat) — TOI message is transmitted every 60
After the second delay period expires the target is no longer designated seconds.
as a TOI. • Aircraft Target (15 sec repeat) — TOI message is transmitted every 15
1. AIS targets seconds.
First responder 373
 Note: TOI options
• A vessel can only send 1 recurring TOI message at a time. If a second TOI options are available which change the status and details of a TOI.
recurring TOI message is sent out it will replace the first TOI message. Changes to TOI options are sent and received over STEDS messaging.

• A vessel can send out multiple OneShot TOI messages. Note:

• A vessel can receive multiple OneShot and recurring TOI messages. Context menu options — In addition to the TOI options listed below, options
• TOI rates for Intel targets and DSC targets are always set as OneShot relevant to the type of target the TOI originated from will also be available
and cannot be changed. in the target context menu (i.e.: Radar, AIS, DSC or Intel).

• [Cancel TOI] — TOIs can be cancelled by selecting [Cancel TOI].

TOI position updates – Sent TOI — When a sender selects [Cancel TOI] the local TOI target
TOI positions are updated as follows: icon will revert to its original target icon and the TOI is automatically
cancelled for all recipients.
• AIS targets and Radar targets will receive regular position updates from
the relevant device. – Received TOI — When a recipient selects [Request TOI cancellation] a
cancellation request is sent to the originator and once acknowledged
• Intel targets will maintain their initially reported heading and speed the TOI target icon will be removed or revert to its original target icon.
• DSC targets remain static, unless position reports are received. • [TOI description] — The type of vessel that the TOI target icon represents
can be set or updated using the [TOI description] option. Changes are
Accessing target options automatically updated for the sender and all recipients.
Target specific options are available for targets that are currently being • [TOI status] — The status of the TOI can be set or updated using the [TOI
tracked. The target options can be accessed from the target’s context status] option. Changes are automatically updated for the sender and
menu and from the Pop-over options in the relevant target list. The options all recipients.
available are dependent on the type of target. • [Intercept] — Selecting [Intercept] initiates target interception for the
selected target. For details see: p.238 — Target intercept
To access a target’s context menu:
• [Centre on chart] — Selecting [Centre on chart] centres the TOI in the Chart
• Press and hold on the target onscreen, or app.
• Highlight the target onscreen using the [Direction controls] and press the • [View related messages] — Selecting [View related messages] opens the
[OK] button. STEDS messaging app and displays all related messages (messages that
To access the target list Pop-over menu: have the same link ID as the selected TOI).
• [TOI rate] — The rate of transmission can be changed for recurring TOIs by
• Select the target in the relevant target list, or
selecting [TOI rate] and then selecting the required rate.
• Highlight the target in the list using the [Direction controls] and press the
[OK] button. Note: TOI rate for OneShot TOIs cannot be changed.

• [Clear lost TOI] — Selecting removes the TOI from the TOI list and either
removes the TOI icon from the Chart app or reverts the target icon to its
previous target icon.
374
TOI list
Targets currently designated as TOIs are listed in the TOI target list: The TOI
list identifies: The Link ID created when the TOI was sent/broadcast. The
Description, Originating vessel, Range and Bearing and the TOI status.
The TOI list can be accessed from the Targets menu in the Radar app and
Chart app: [Menu > Targets > TOI]
Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView
app pane on the right of the page and opens the Pop-over menu. The following AIS modes are available:
TOI target list • [Normal] — In this mode your AIS hardware will receive and transmit AIS
messages and encrypted AIS messages.
• [Receive only] — In this mode your AIS hardware receives AIS messages
and encrypted AIS messages, but transmits nothing (maintaining radio
silence).
• [Restricted] — In this mode your AIS hardware will receive AIS messages
and encrypted AIS messages, but only transmits encrypted AIS messages
(no AIS messages are transmitted). This means vessels with ‘standard’ AIS
receivers / transceivers will not be able to detect Blue Force vessels.
The AIS mode can also be changed from the [AIS Settings] menu: [Menu >
Targets > AIS Settings > AIS mode] and from the Homescreen settings menu:
[Homescreen > Settings > Responder]. [AIS mode]

Note:
[AIS mode] replaces the [Silent mode] option available on non-STEDS First
responder configurations.

AIS mode status icons

Status icons are displayed in the Homescreen status area which identify
23.11 First responder AIS modes the current AIS mode in use.

With compatible STEDS AIS hardware connected the mode of the AIS
hardware can be set from the MFD.
The AIS modes can be viewed and changed from the Status area in the
Homescreen. Select the Status area and then select AIS to display and select
available modes.
The AIS mode of the connected STEDs compatible AIS hardware will
automatically be updated to match the selected mode. 1. Restricted mode.
First responder 375
2. Normal mode. When between 90 and 99 AIS targets are detected, [High AIS] is displayed in
3. Receive only mode. the bottom left corner of the Chart app and Radar app. When 100 or more
AIS targets are detected, [Max AIS] is displayed.
4. Error.
The alarm can be enabled and disabled from the [Alarms] manager:
[Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > High/maximum AIS targets].
Blue Force Tracking
Other vessels that are equipped with STEDS compatible AIS hardware, such
as the AIS5000 are displayed onscreen using Blue Force AIS target icons. 23.13 SITREP (Situation report)
The following icons are used:
SITREP status is transmitted and received over STEDS messaging so that
Blue Force Blue Force SAR other STEDS equipped vessels using the same STEDS passphrase can see
vessel your status and you can see their status.
The current SITREP status is displayed in the Status area of the Homescreen.
The SITREP status can be changed by selecting [Status:] from the Status area
Pop-over menu and then selecting a SITREP.

The Blue Force icons are used as long as:

• your MFD has a matching First responder passphrase.
• you have received a SITREP from them within the last 6 minutes.
• their AIS mode is not set to Receive only.
If the above conditions are not met then the target icon will revert to using
the standard, Green AIS target icon.

23.12 AIS high target alarm

When the MFD is configured using the ‘First responder’ activity, the AIS high
target alarm is available which, when enabled, will trigger when the MFD
approaches and also when it exceeds the maximum quantity of AIS targets
that can be shown onscreen.
The AIS high target alarm is only triggered when either the Chart app or Note:
Radar app is open.
• SITREP status is transmitted every 15 seconds if a vessel is traveling
• When the AIS target count reaches 90, the alarm will warn that the MFD
at 3 knots or more.
is approaching its maximum limit.
• When the AIS target count is greater than 100, the alarm will warn that the • SITREP status is transmitted every 30 seconds if a vessel is traveling
MFD has exceeded its maximum limit. under 3 knots for more than 3 minutes.
376
The SITREP status of other vessels is displayed in the Blue Force Target’s Example AIS target context menu
context menu in the Chart app and Radar app.

The MFD supports both current (FID 10) and legacy (FID 56) SITREPs.

Note:
• Blue Force targets using Legacy SITREP FID 56 are displayed using the
Blue Force icons, however cannot be interacted with (i.e.: you cannot 1. Boat type and status — Only available for AIS targets.
send or receive text messages, SAR patterns or TOIs).
2. Intercept distance and time — Only available when [Intercept] is enabled.
• Blue Force targets using Legacy SITREP FID 56 can also be displayed
when using an NMEA 0183 connection but cannot be interacted with. 3. [Designate TOI]
4. [Send message] — Only available for AIS targets.

23.14 First responder target context menus

When the display has been configured using the [First responder] activity
extra data and options are available in AIS target and Radar target context
menus.
The following additional data and options are provided for first responders:

First responder 377

23.15 Depth markers 23.16 Import and export Waypoints and
Depth markers are visual indicators that can be placed in the sonar app at a
Routes over NMEA networks
specified depth. The marker will remain onscreen until removed. Waypoints and Routes can be imported and exported over NMEA 0183 and
NMEA 2000 (N2K) / SeaTalkng ®

Note:
• Receiving waypoints and routes is subject to the waypoint and
route capacity of your MFD. The transfer will fail if the MFD’s
capacity is reached during the transfer. For capacity limits refer to:
p.383 — Waypoint, routes and tracks capacity
• It is recommended that importing and exporting waypoints over
NMEA 0183 and NMEA 2000 is used for small batches of less than
150 waypoints. The preferred method for importing and exporting
larger amounts of waypoint is via memory card transfer. Refer to:
p.105 — Import/export

The import and export options are available from the Import/Export menu:
[Homescreen > My data > Import/Export > Import/export from network].

Placing a depth marker allows you to quickly identify objects in the water
column at a certain depth.

Placing a depth marker

Follow the steps below to place a depth marker.
From the sonar app:
1. Select and hold an area onscreen.
2. Select [Show depth marker].
3. Turn the uni-controller or use the uni-controller’s joystick up and down
to adjust the depth of the marker.
4. Select [Done] or press the [OK] button.
You can remove the depth marker by selecting anywhere onscreen and
selecting [Remove depth marker] from the context menu or you can move
the depth marker to a new location by selecting [Move marker here] from
the context menu. The [Import waypoints via N2K] and [Import Routes via N2K] options are
only enabled when another compatible MFD is present on the NMEA 2000 /
SeaTalkng ®network.
378
The [Import via 0183] and [Export via 0183] options are always enabled and Important:
require interaction on the other MFD.
If there is only 1 compatible device connected then this step will be skipped.
Importing Waypoints or Routes over NMEA 2000
A list of Waypoints or Routes on the selected device will be displayed.
Follow the steps below to Import Waypoints or Routes over an NMEA 2000 /
SeaTalkng ® network.
3. Select each waypoint or route that you want to import, or select [Select all].
4. Select [Import].
Note: 5. Select [OK] on the import confirmation dialog.
LightHouse 3 and LightHouse 4 MFDs allow more than 1 waypoint or route The selected waypoints or routes will now be available on the MFD.
to have the same name. It is recommended that you check that the import
will not create waypoints or routes with the same name and if necessary
rename them before importing. Importing waypoints or routes over NMEA 0183
This procedure details importing waypoint or routes to an MFD running either
the LightHouse 3 or LightHouse 4 operating system from an MFD running the
Example importing waypoints
First responder version of the LightHouse 2 operating system.

Note:
It may be possible to import waypoints and routes from other NMEA
0183 devices following a similar procedure, refer to the instructions
that accompanied the NMEA 0183 device and use them in place of the
LightHouse 2 steps below.

Note:
LightHouse 3 and LightHouse 4 MFDs allow more than 1 waypoint or route
to have the same name. It is recommended that you check and rename
waypoints or routes that have the same name as existing waypoints and
routes before importing.

From the [Import/export] menu: [Homescreen > My data > Import/export]:

1. Select either [Import waypoints via N2K] or [Import Routes via N2K].
2. Select the device from the list that has the waypoints or routes that you
want to import.

First responder 379

1. Ensure that an NMEA 0183 input port on the receiving MFD is correctly
connected to an NMEA 0183 output port on the LightHouse 2 First
responder MFD.

Example NMEA 0183 connection

3. On the LightHouse 2 MFD:

i. Select [My data] from the Homescreen.
ii. Select either [Waypoints] or [Routes]..
iii. Select [Import/Export] from the top of the waypoint list / routes list.
iv. Select either [Export Waypoints to Connected Device (0183)] or [Export
Routes to Connected Device (0183)].
1. Receiving MFD (e.g.: Axiom Pro running LightHouse 3 / LightHouse 4 ) v. Select the Waypoints or the Routes you want to transfer.
vi. Select [Send].
2. LightHouse 2 MFD (e.g.: eS series)
3. Example connection Port 1, positive input (White) to Port 1, positive
output (Yellow)
4. Example connection Port 1, negative input (Green) to Port 1, negative
output (Brown)

Note:
If you require 2 way transfer of waypoint and routes also connect:
• Example connection Port 1, positive output (Yellow) to Port 1, positive
input (White)
• Example connection Port 1, negative output (Brown) to Port 1, negative
input (Green)

2. Select [Import via 0183] from the [Import/Export] menu: [Homescreen >
My data > Import/export ].
The receiving MFD will be waiting to receive over NMEA 0183 connection.
4. Back on the receiving MFD:
i. When all waypoints or routes have been received select [Finish].

380
 ii. Select [OK] on the Import complete dialog.. 1. Sending MFD (e.g.: Axiom Pro running LightHouse 3 / LightHouse 4 )
2. LightHouse 2 MFD (e.g.: eS series)
3. Example connection Port 1, positive output (Yellow) to Port 1, positive
input (White)
4. Example connection Port 1, negative output (Brown) to Port 1, negative
input (Green)

Note:
If you require 2 way transfer of waypoint and routes also connect:

Exporting waypoints or routes over NMEA 0183 • Example connection Port 1, positive input (White) to Port 1, positive
output (Yellow)
This procedure details exporting waypoints or routes from an MFD running
the LightHouse 3 or LightHouse 4 operating system to an MFD running the • Example connection Port 1, negative input (Green) to Port 1, negative
First responder version of the LightHouse 2 operating system. output (Brown)

Note: 2. Ensure the sending MFD’s NMEA 0183 Transmission mode setting is set
It may be possible to export waypoints and routes to other NMEA 0183 to [Single-ended].
devices following a similar procedure, refer to the instructions that The Transmission mode settings is located on the NMEA set-up menu
accompanied the NMEA 0183 device and use them in place of the page: [Homescreen > Settings > Network > NMEA set-up > ]
LightHouse 2 steps below.

1. Ensure that an NMEA 0183 output port on the sending MFD is correctly
connected to an NMEA 0183 input port on the LightHouse 2 First
responder MFD.

Example NMEA 0183 connection

3. From the LightHouse 2 MFD:

i. Select [My data] from the [Homescreen].
ii. Select either [Waypoints] or [Routes].
iii. Select [Import/Export] from the top of the waypoint list / routes list.

First responder 381

 iv. Select either [Import Waypoints from Connected Device (0183)] or v. Select [OK] on the export complete dialog.
[Import Routes from Connected Device (0183)].

5. From the LightHouse 2 MFD:

i. LightHouse 2 MFDs do not allow more than 1 waypoint or routes to
have the same name. If the MFD detects a waypoint or route with a
name that conflicts with a waypoint or route already in the system the
following options are displayed:
The LightHouse 2 MFD will be waiting to receive over NMEA 0183
connection. • [Copy as new waypoint] / [Copy as new route]— renames the
waypoint / routes and imports it.
4. From the sending MFD:
i. Select [Export via 0183] from the Import/export menu: [Homescreen > • [Copy & Replace] — replaces the existing waypoint or route with
My data > Import/export]. the new one.
ii. Select either [Export waypoints] or [Export routes]. • [Don’t copy] — Keeps the existing waypoint or route and does not
iii. Select the waypoints or the routes that you want to export. import the new one.
iv. Select [Export]. ii. When all waypoints or routes have been received select [Finish].

382
Waypoint, routes and tracks capacity
Waypoints, routes and tracks are subject to capacity limits. The capacity
limits for LightHouse™ 3 MFDs is shown below
• Waypoints — Your MFD can store up to 10,000 waypoints which can be
sorted into up to 200 waypoint groups
• Routes — Your MFD can store up to 250 routes, each route consisting of
up to 500 waypoints. The route capacity limit is subject to your MFD’s
10,000 Waypoint limit (for example, your MFD could store 20 routes each
containing 500 waypoints)
• Tracks — Your MFD can store up to 15 tracks, each track can contain up
to 10,000 points.

First responder 383

CHAPTER 24: MESSAGING APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 24.1 Messaging app — page 385

384
24.1 Messaging app • [Restricted] — In restricted mode, only secure messages can be sent.
• [Normal] — In normal mode, the transmission type can be set to secure,
MFDs configured with a STEDs-compliant AIS transceiver can send and non-secure or safety related.
receive information with other STEDs-equipped vessels using the messaging
app. • [Receive only] — In receive-only mode, messages cannot be sent but can
still be received.
The following types of information can be sent and received:
The transmission types are explained below:
• Text messages
• Targets Of Interest TOIs) • [Secure] — Secure messages can only be received by vessels that are
using the same STEDs passphrase as the sender/broadcaster. Secure
• Search and Rescue (SAR) patterns broadcast messages are limited to 79 characters in length. Secure direct
• Situation reports (SITREP) messages are limited to 57 characters.
• Static data • [Non-secure] — Non-secure messages can be received by any vessel with
a STEDs-compliant AIS transceiver, and does not require recipients to
When a message is received a dialog is displayed onscreen.. The dialog will have the same STEDs passphrase as the sender/broadcaster. Non-secure
display the message and identify the sender and if applicable the link ID. broadcasts are limited to 86 characters in length. Non-secure direct
messages are limited to 80 characters.
Example text message
• [Safety related] — Safety-related messages can be received by any
vessel with a STEDs-compliant AIS transceiver. This transmission type
does not require recipients to have the same STEDs passphrase as the
sender/broadcaster. Safety-related broadcasts are limited to 90 characters
in length. Safety-related direct messages are limited to 85 characters.
The following options are available when a text message is received:
Message inbox
• [Reply] — Displays the onscreen keyboard so that a reply can be entered
and sent. The inbox stores all sent and received messages.
• [View inbox] — Opens the messaging inbox so that you can view messages. The transmission type is identified on the right side of the message. If a
• [Dismiss] — Dismisses the dialog (the message will be saved in the secure message has a Link ID then this will also appear on the right side
messages inbox). of the message.

Sent and received messages are stored in the messages inbox.

The messages inbox can be accessed by creating a Messages app page
on the Homescreen or from the [My data] menu: [Homescreen > My data >
Messages].

Transmission type
The messaging app uses various transmission types for different kinds of
messages; these are: secure, non-secure, and safety related.
The available transmission types are dependent on AIS transceiver mode:
Messaging app 385
 Note:
• The date and time provided for each inbox message is the last modified
date, and may not be same as the date and time each message was
originally created or received.
• Messages are removed from the inbox after a specified retention time.

Filtering
The inbox can be filtered to show only related messages or to show only
messages from/to a specific sender. To filter the list of messages, select
an inbox message and select either [View messages from/to this sender]
or [View related messages].

Inbox message retention

Inbox message retention can be set from 1 to 30 days. The inbox message
1. Received messages appear on the left side of the screen. retention can be set from the [Responder ][Advanced set-up] menu:
2. When a message is acknowledged, a tick is displayed after the date [Homescreen > Settings > Responder > Advanced set-up > Configure >
and time. Message inbox > Retention days]
3. Sent messages appear on the right side of the screen.
Broadcasting a new message
4. [Sort by] — The inbox can be sorted by time or by Link ID. The sort by
option in not available when the inbox is filtered. Broadcast messages are sent over the AIS network and can be received by
multiple vessels.
5. [Export inbox] — Exports the current view / filter of messages to a .CSV 1. Select [Broadcast message] from the Chart app’s [New] menu or select
(Comma Separated Values) spreadsheet file to a memory card inserted [New broadcast] from the Messages inbox.
in the MFD’s card reader. The Export inbox option is only available when
a memory card is present in the MFD’s card reader. The onscreen keyboard is displayed.
6. If a message has not been acknowledged, the text above the message
will be displayed in red and an ‘x’ is displayed after the date and time. 2. Enter your message.

7. [New broadcast] — Select to send a broadcast to all responder vessels. Messages are subject to a character limit the amount of remaining
character is shown on the onscreen keyboard. You can also select the
8. Currently selected message is highlighted. speech bubble button to select a predefined message.
9. [New direct message] — Select to send a direct message to a specific
responder vessel. 3. Select the TYPE button and select a transmission type.
If your AIS transceiver is in restricted mode only secure transmissions
can be broadcast.

4. Select [Send].
5. Select [OK].
386
Sending a new direct message Replying to a message
A new direct message can be sent to specific vessel using its MMSI number You can reply to direct messages and broadcasts either from the message
or to an AIS vessel designated as a ‘Buddy’. notification or from the inbox.
1. Select [Direct message ] from the chart app’s [New] menu or select [New 1. Select [Reply] from the message notification, or long hold on the inbox
direct message ] from the messages inbox. message and select either [Reply] or [Broadcast reply].

The recent recipients list is displayed. The onscreen keyboard is displayed.

2. Select a recipient from either the recent list or from the Buddy list. 2. Enter your message.
Alternatively select [Enter MMSI] to enter a new recipient’s MMSI number.
Messages are subject to a character limit; the keyboard displays the
3. Select the transmission type for the message. number of remaining characters. You can also select the “speech bubble”
icon to select a predefined message.
If your AIS transceiver is in restricted mode only secure transmissions
can be broadcast.
3. Select [Send].
4. Select [Next] . 4. Select [OK].
5. Enter your message.
Onscreen keyboard
The onscreen keyboard is displayed. Messages are subject to a character
Use the messaging onscreen keyboard to type your messages.
limit the amount of remaining character is shown on the onscreen
keyboard. You can also select the speech bubble button to select a
predefined message.

6. Select [Send].
7. If required, select the [Request acknowledgement] check box.
8. Select [OK].
Direct message Blue Force targets
A direct message can be sent to Blue Force targets in the Chart app and
Radar app.
Open the Blue Force target’s context menu and
select [Send message] to display the onscreen
keyboard, which can be used to enter your
message. Once your message is complete, select
[Send] to send it.
1. Text entry area.
For more information on Blueforce AIS targets, refer
to: p.376 — Blue Force Tracking 2. Remaining characters.
3. Selecting the [Template Text] icon will change the onscreen keyboard to
a list of template messages that can be used. Selecting [My Position] will
enter your vessel’s current coordinates into the message.
Messaging app 387
4. Move cursor. [Message failed to send] — Direct message has failed to be
5. Transmission type. acknowledged by the recipient's hardware.

Message symbols Note:

Symbols attached to messages in the [Inbox] indicate its type and status. The failed message will remain in the [Inbox] .

[Link ID] — A link ID generated and used by responder vessels.

[Broadcast] — A broadcast to all other responder vessels.

Note:
[Direct message] — A direct message to a specific responder Replying to a direct message or broadcast that has a link ID will
vessel. send a reply that contains the same link ID.
[Sender] — Indicates the sender (left of the arrow) and recipient
(right of the arrow) of a direct message.

[Message sent] — Direct message has been sent and acknowledged

by the recipient’s hardware.

[Message sending] — Direct message is still waiting to be

acknowledged as successfully received by the recipient’s
hardware.

Note:
A maximum number of 4 attempts will be made to send the
message by the sender’s hardware, with 150 seconds of
separation between each attempt.

388
CHAPTER 25: DASHBOARD APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 25.1 Dashboard app overview — page 390

• 25.2 Default data pages — page 391
• 25.3 Customizing a data item — page 391
• 25.4 Engine page — page 398
• 25.5 Sailing page — page 399
• 25.6 Race start page — page 400
• 25.7 Navigation page — page 401
• 25.8 Rolling road page — page 402
• 25.9 Fuel page — page 403
• 25.10 Tanks page — page 403
• 25.11 Bidata and single data pages — page 404
• 25.12 Generators page — page 404
• 25.13 CZone plug and play — page 406
• 25.14 App menu — page 407

Dashboard app 389

25.1 Dashboard app overview
The Dashboard app enables you to view system data. System data may be
generated by your MFD or by devices connected to your MFD via SeaTalkng ®
/ NMEA 2000 and ethernet. The Dashboard app can also be configured to
provide monitoring and control of your compatible digital switching devices.

Note:
For data to be available in the Dashboard app it must be transmitted to your
MFD from compatible hardware using supported protocols and messages.

The Dashboard app can be displayed in Fullscreen and half screen portrait
app pages.
For each instance of the Dashboard app you can select which pages you
want to display, Page selection will persist over a power cycle.

Example Dashboard app pages

1. [Home] — Closes the app and displayed the homescreen.
2. [Waypoint / MOB] — Momentary press places a new waypoint at your
vessel’s current location. Long press activates the Man Over Board
(MOB) alarm.
3. [Pilot] — Opens and closes the pilot sidebar.
4. [Menu] — Opens the app menu.
5. [Sidebar] — Press and slide right to open the sidebar.
6. [<] (Left arrow) — Displays the previous data page.
7. [>] (Right arrow) — Displays the next data page.

Switching data page

1. Use the [<] (Left arrow) and [>] (Right arrow) located at the bottom of the
screen, to cycle through the available data pages.
The Dashboard app is pre-configured with a number of customizable pages 2. Alternatively, you can select a specific data page from the app menu.
based on your chosen MFD profile and connected devices.
Selecting data pages to display
Dashboard app onscreen controls
For each instance of the Dashboard app you can select which data pages
MFD app use icons for controls which are permanently onscreen. you want to be available.
The following control icons are available in the Dashboard app: 1. Select the [Pages] tab: [Menu > Settings > Pages].
390
2. Select the relevant page from the list.
3. Select [Hide page] from the pop-over options to hide the page, or [Show
page] so that the page will be available..
The selection will apply to the current instance of the Dashboard app.

25.2 Default data pages

The Dashboard app comes with a selection of default data pages. The
defaults pages can be customized and hidden from view. New data pages
can also be created, customized and deleted.
The following pages are available by default:
• Engines. For details refer to: p.398 — Engines page
• Sailing (only shown if boating activity is set to Sailing in startup wizard). For
details refer to: p.399 — Sailing page
• Race start (only shown if boating activity is set to Sailing in startup wizard).
For details refer to: p.400 — Race start page
25.3 Customizing a data item
• Navigation. For details refer to: p.401 — Navigation page
The data items displayed on each page can be changed.
• Rolling road. For details refer to: p.402 — Rolling road page
• Fuel. For details refer to: p.403 — Fuel page
• Tanks. For details refer to: p.403 — Tanks page
• Bidata. For details refer to: p.404 — Bidata and single data pages
• Single data. For details refer to: p.404 — Bidata and single data pages
A list of all data pages is available on the [Pages] settings menu: [Menu >
Settings > Pages.]

1. Select and hold on the data item you want to change and then Select
[Edit] from the pop-over menu.
2. Select a data category from the list.
3. Select the new data item from the chosen category.
Dashboard app 391
4. The new data item is displayed. The data items will be available for each detected battery.
Alternatively, to use physical buttons instead of the touchscreen you can Detected batteries are shown in the battery configuration page: [Homescreen
select [Customize page] from the app menu: [Menu > Customize page] and > Settings > Boat details > Num of batteries > Configure batteries].
then follow the steps above.
Boat data
Display data Boat data requires supported sensors to be connected.
The following data items are available in the [Boat] category:
Data transmitted by compatible devices connected to the same network as
the display, as well as data generated by the display, can be shown as data • (1)Sail recommendation (Main)
items in the Dashboard app, the sidebar and as a data overlay. • (1)Sail recommendation (Headsail)
Data items are organized into categories. • Rudder angle (PGN 127245)
Note: • Rate of turn (PGN 127251)
• Standard NMEA 2000 PGNs are listed next to the relevant data items. • (2)Roll (PGN 127257)
• (3)Steering angle
• Supported Raymarine and third-party proprietary messages are not
listed. • Mast rotation
• NMEA 0183 sentences are not shown. • Pitch (PGN 127257)
• (1)(2)Sail recommendation
To view a list of all supported NMEA 2000 PGNs, refer to: • Trim tabs(1) (PGN 130576)
p.540 — NMEA 2000 PGN support
Note:
To view a list of all supported NMEA 0183 sentences, refer to:
p.539 — NMEA 0183 sentence support • (1) Requires Sailing activity and imported Sail plan.
To change or add a data item in the Dashboard app or sidebar, select and • (2) Data item can only be displayed in the Dashboard app.
hold on the data cell and select [Edit] from the pop-over options to display
the list of data categories. • (3) Requires Mercury engine integration.
To change or add a data item to a data overlay, use the [Page settings] menu
from the relevant MFD app. For details, refer to: p.49 — Data overlays Depth data
Battery data Depth data requires a compatible instruments or sonar transducer connected
Batteries are detected automatically by the display. to the display.
If no compatible batteries are detected the [Battery] category will be hidden. The following data items are available in the [Depth] category:
The following data items are available in the [Battery] category: • Maximum depth
• Battery voltage (PGN 127508) • Minimum depth
• Battery current (PGN 127508) • Depth (PGN 128267)
• Time till zero charge (PGN 127506) Display data
• Battery temperature (PGN 127508) The display data category is used for voltage detected by the display.
• State of charge (PGN 127506) The following data items are available in the [Display] category:
392
• Supply voltage The following items will be available for each engine.
• Supply voltage level(1) • Jack plate position (PGN 128780)
• RPM (PGN 127488)
Note:
• Engine trip (PGN 127497)
• The display category and data items are not available in the Dashboard
• Trans oil temp (PGN 127493)
app.
• Fuel flow (avg) (PGN 127497)
• (1) Data item is only available in the sidebar.
• Trans oil pressure (PGN 127493)
• Gear (PGN 127493)
Distance data
• Oil temperature (PGN 127489)
Distance data requires a compatible speed transducer and or GNSS receiver.
• Alternator (PGN 127489)
The following data items are available in the [Distance] category:
• Boost pressure (PGN 127488)
• Distance to line
• Oil pressure status (PGN 127489)
• Distance to tack
• Oil pressure (PGN 127489)
• Trip (manual)
• Engine hours (PGN 127489)
• Trip (month)
• Coolant temperature (PGN 127489)
• Trip (day)
• Coolant pressure (PGN 127489)
• Trip (season)
• Fuel pressure (PGN 127489)
• Ground log (PGN 128275)
• Fuel flow (inst) (PGN 127489)
• Trip (PGN 128275)
• Tilt position (PGN 127488)
• Log (PGN 128275)
• Engine load (PGN 127489)
• Log Trip (1) (PGN 128275)
• Fuel flow (PGN 127489)
• Line bias
Engine configuration settings are available in the [Boat details] settings menu:
Note: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Num of engines].
(1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app Fuel data
The fuel data category include items related to fuel management. Fuel
Engine data management is dependent on engine data being available on the SeaTalk
NG® backbone.
Engine data requires the display to be connected to a supported engine
management system. Depending on manufacturer a compatible engine The following data items are available in the [Fuel] category:
interface or gateway may be required. • Total propulsive fuel (vol)
The following data items are available in the [Engine] category: • Total fuel (vol) (PGN 127505)
• Exhaust Gas Temperature (PGN 130316) • Total fuel (%)
• Engine • Fuel (vol)(1)
Dashboard app 393
• Fuel (%)(1) • Sunset Sunrise(1)
• Fuel used (trip) (PGN 127497) • Set Drift(1) (PGN 129291)
• Est. fuel remaining (PGN 127496) • Water & Supply(1)
• Engine economy total (PGN 127497)
Note:
• Time to empty (PGN 127496)
• (1) Data items are only available in the Dashboard app
• Distance to empty (PGN 127496)
• Fuel flow total (PGN 127497 / PGN 127489)
Inside environment data
• Fuel used (season) (PGN 127497)
Inside environmental data items require connection of compatible sensors.
The data items above will be available for each configured fuel tank. When
The following data items are available in the [Inside environment] category:
more than 1 fuel tank is configured then the data items will be provided in the
[All Tanks] category and will combine the fuel data items for all tanks. • Inside humidity (PGN 130313)
• Inside temperature (PGN 130316)
Note:
The data items above will be available for the number of interior
(1) For systems with multiple fuel tanks these data items will remain environmental sensors specified in the [Boat details] settings menu:
available for each individual tank. [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Num of interior environment sensors].
GPS data
Environment data The GPS data category contains data items related to the GNSS receiver in
Environmental data items require connection of compatible sensors and use by your display.
transducers. The following data items are available in the [GPS] category:
The following data items are available in the [Environment] category: • Cursor position
• True wind chill • Loran cursor position
• App wind chill (PGN 130312 / 130316) • Loran position
• Max water temp • Course over ground (PGN 129026)
• Min water temp • Average SOG
• Water temp (PGN 130310 / 130311 / 130312 / 130316) • Maximum SOG
• Max air temp • Speed over ground SOG (PGN 129026)
• Min air temp • Vessel position (PGN 129025 / PGN 129029)
• Drift (PGN 129291) • COG SOG (Course Over Ground) (Speed Over ground)(1) (PGN 129026)
• Dew point (PGN 130312 / 130316) • Opp. tack COG (PGN 129026)
• Barometric pressure (PGN 130310) • Maximum SOG (all time) (PGN 129026)
• Air temp (PGN 130310)
Note:
• Set (PGN 129291)
• Humidity (PGN 130310 / 130311 / 130313) (1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app
394
Heading data • Course to steer
Heading data requires a connected sensor providing vessel heading. • Next track leg bearing
The following data items are available in the [Heading] category: • Distance to waypoint
• Steer to layline(1) • Distance made good
• Heading error • Course made good
• Locked heading • Bearing origin to waypoint
• Heading (PGN 127250) • Bearing to waypoint
• Opp. tack COG • Active waypoint
• Course over ground • ETA at destination (Estimated Time of Arrival)
• Opp. tack heading • ETA at waypoint (Estimated Time of Arrival) (PGN 129284)
• Locked heading & Error((2)) • Distance to go
• Heading & Speed((2)) • CTS & DTW(1) (Course To Steer & Distance To Waypoint)
Note: • CMG & VMG(1) (Course Made Good & Velocity Made Good)
• BTW & DTW(1) (Bearing To Waypoint & Distance To Waypoint)
• (1) [Steer to layline] data will only be populated when the boating activity
has been set to sailing in the initial MFD start up wizard. • Waypoint info(1)
• (2) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app. • CMG & DMG(1) (Course Made Good & Distance Made Good)

Note:
Navigation data
(1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app
Navigation data requires a compatible sensor providing position related data.
Active navigation is required for waypoint and route related data items.
The following data items are available in the [Navigation] category: Pilot data
• Sailing time to waypoint A rudder reference transducer is required for pilot data items.
• Sailing distance to waypoint The following data items are available in the [Pilot] category:
• Next waypoint • Rudder angle (PGN 127245)
• Loran target position • Steering angle (Requires Mercury engine integration.)
• Cross tack error (PGN 129283) Speed data
• Time to waypoint Speed data includes data items related to vessel speed.
• Time to destination The following data items are available in the [Speed] category:
• Target position • VMG to waypoint (Velocity Made Good)
• ETA at waypoint (time & date) (Estimated Time of Arrival) (PGN 129284) • Speed thru water (PGN 128259)
• ETA at destination (time & date) (Estimated Time of Arrival) (PGN 129284) • VMG to windward (Velocity Made Good)
Dashboard app 395
• Avg speed • Ground wind direction (Ground Wind Direction) (PGN 130306 / 129026)
• Max speed • Ground wind speed (Ground Wind Direction) (PGN 130306 / 129026)
• Maximum SOG (all time) • True wind direction (PGN 128259 & 130306 & 127250)
• Target speed • Minimum true wind angle
• Polar performance(1) • Maximum true wind angle
• Minimum true wind speed
Note:
• True wind speed (PGN 128259 & 130306)
(1) [Polar performance] data will only be populated when the boating activity
is set to Sailing in the initial MFD start up wizard.
• Maximum app wind speed
• App wind speed (PGN 130306)
Time data • Minimum app wind angle
Time data requires a compatible device to be connected providing time data. • App wind angle (PGN 130306)
The display the following data items are available in the [Time] category: • Maximum app wind angle
• Sunset time • Minimum app wind speed
• Sunrise time • Minimum true wind speed
• UTC date (Universal Time Coordinated) (PGN 129033) • GWD & Beaufort(1) (Ground Wind Direction) (PGN 130306 / 129026)
• UTC time (Universal Time Coordinated) (PGN 129033) • GWS & GWD(1) (Ground Wind Speed & Ground Wind Direction)
• Race timer • AWA & VMG(1) (Apparent Wind Angle & Velocity Made Good)
• Date (PGN 126992) • AWA & AWS (1) (Apparent Wind Angle & Apparent Wind Speed)
• Time (PGN 126992) • TWA & VMG wind(1) (True Wind Angle & Velocity Made Good)
• Time to tack • TWA & TWS(1) (True Wind Angle & True Wind Speed)
• Time to burn Note:
Wind data (1) Data item is only available in the Dashboard app
Wind data requires a compatible wind transducer to be connected.
The following data items are available in the [Wind] category: Tank level data
• Next leg TWA (PGN 128259 & 130306) Tank level data shows the percentage fill for each detected tank.
• Target Apparent Wind Angle (PGN 128259 & 130306) The following data categories are available for tanks:
• Target True Wind Angle (PGN 128259 & 130306) • Fuel (Gasoline)
• Wind shift • Fresh water (PGN 127505)
• True wind angle (PGN 128259 & 130306) • Live well (PGN 127505)
• Cardinal • Grey water (PGN 127505)
• Beaufort • Black water (PGN 127505)
396
Each tank type has its own data category and if more than 1 tank of each type • Generator line 2 frequency (PGN 127748)
is detected there will be subcategory for each tank.
• Generator line 3 power (PGN 127746)
Generator data • Generator line 3 current (PGN 127746)
The generator data category is only available when a generator transmitting • Generator line 3 to neutral voltage (PGN 127749)
supported NMEA 2000 PGNs is detected by the display.
• Generator line 3 to line 1 voltage (PGN 127749)
The following data items are available in the [Generator] category:
• Generator line 3 frequency (PGN 127749)
• Engine load (PGN 127489)
The additional data items above will be available for each detected 3 phase
• Engine RPM (PGN 127488) generator.
• Fuel flow (PGN 127489)
Load cell data
• Coolant temperature (PGN 127489)
Load cells are sensors used to measure the load bearings on key rigging
• Oil temperature (PGN 127489) components, such as forestay, sidestay, backstay, or any sheet, halyard,
• Oil pressure (PGN 127489) control line, vang, tack line, or runner.

• Oil pressure (status) (PGN 127489) A predefined list of [Load cells] is available.

• Generator battery voltage (PGN 127508) For load cell data to be populated a supported load cell gateway is required.

• Engine hours (PGN 127489) Cyclops Marine load cells

• Exhaust gas temperature (PGN 130316) Cyclops Marine is a third party company providing wireless load-sensing
devices for use in sailing, and especially race sailing.
• Generator state (PGN 127514)
The Cyclops Marine sensors connect wirelessly to the below-deck Cyclops
• Generator voltage (PGN 127751) Marine Gateway, which interfaces with compatible Raymarine MFDs and
• Generator current (PGN 127751) displays key load bearings at identified stress points on a yacht's rigging.
The data items above will be available for each detected generator. In the MFD's Dashboard app, you can see at a glance the live, static and
dynamic load data transmitted by the Cyclops Marine sensors, at up to 50
• Generator line 1 power (PGN 127744) sensor placements.
• Generator line 1 current (PGN 127744)
• Generator line 1 to neutral voltage (PGN 127747)
• Generator line 1 to line 2 voltage (PGN 127747)
• Generator line 1 frequency (PGN 127747)
• Generator line 2 power (PGN 127745)
• Generator line 2 current (PGN 127745)
• Generator line 2 to neutral voltage (PGN 127748)
• Generator line 2 to line 3 voltage (PGN 127748)
Dashboard app 397
25.4 Engine page 12. FUEL — Graphical representation of the percentage of fuel remaining.
The engine dial and its contents are unique to the engine page and cannot
The engine page is always available. The number of engines displayed on be reproduced on other data pages. The engine dial cannot be removed or
the engine page is based on the number of engines selected during the initial hidden.
MFD start up wizard. The engine page includes data relevant to engines and
includes the graphical engine dial. Data items 1,2, 9 and 10 can be customized. Data items 3 and 7 can be
hidden if desired.
Example single engine data page
Multi engine page examples

1. BATTERY 1 — Engine battery voltage.

2. OIL TEMP — Engine oil temperature.
3. GEAR — Transmission gear.
1. 2 engine page example.
4. RPM indicator — Graphical representation of engine RPM.
5. Oil pressure indicator — Current engine oil pressure indication. 2. 4 engine page example

6. RPM — Digital RPM value. When the MFD has been configured with more than 1 engine the page layout
and data is changed appropriately for the number of engines up to 5.
7. Maintenance indicator — Illuminates when engine maintenance is
required.
Note:
8. Rudder bar — Provides an indication of rudder position.
The number of engines displayed on the engine page can only be changed
9. Coolant temperature — Current engine coolant temperature indication. by performing a factory reset and choosing a different number of engines
10. Check engine — Illuminates when an engine fault is detected. at the start up wizard.
11. SOG — Speed Over Ground.
398
25.5 Sailing page 5. Port wind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when tacking
The sailing data page is available when the MFD has been configured to use to port upwind.
the Sailing boating activity during the initial MFD start up wizard. The sailing 6. Downwind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
page includes data relevant to sailing and includes a graphical sailing dial. with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when gybing
The apparent wind dial is the default dial displayed on the sailing page. downwind
When the [Sail performance] setting has been configured dynamic wind angle 7. Apparent wind speed
targets will be displayed. The sail performance setting can be configured
from the [Boat details] menu: [Homescreen > Boat details > Sail performance]. 8. Compass dial — The compass dial remains fixed and the indicators move
around the dial to indicator direction/angle.
If the [Sail performance] setting has not been configured then close hauled
angle indicators are displayed instead of wind angle targets. 9. Rudder bar — Provides an indication of rudder position.
The sailing page can be used in combination with the Laylines feature 10. Starboard wind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA
available in the chart app to optimize your sailing performance. For details or TWA) with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when
about the layline features refer to: p.286 — Laylines tacking to starboard upwind.
Example — Sailing page with apparent wind sailing dial 11. AWA indicator — Apparent Wind Angle.
12. Downwind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when gybing
downwind
13. TWA indicator — True Wind Angle.
14. TIME TO TACK — Time left to tack.
15. SAILING WPT TTG — Waypoint Time To Go (current destination waypoint
or goto location).
16. TARGET STW — Speed Through Water target.
17. POLAR PERFORMANCE
The apparent wind dial can be changed to one of the alternative sailing dials.
For details refer to: p.400 — Sailing dials
The sailing dials are unique to default pages and cannot be reproduced
on custom data pages.

1. DISTANCE TO TACK — Distance to go before performing a tack. Data items 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 can be customized. Data item 9 can be hidden
if desired.
2. SAILING DTW — Distance To Waypoint (current destination waypoint
or goto location).
3. SPEED THRU WATER — Current vessel speed received from speed
transducer.
4. STEER TO LAYLINE — Heading to steer to layline.
Dashboard app 399
Sailing dials 25.6 Race start page
There are several variations of the sailing dial that can be displayed in the
Navigation, page, sailing page and race start page. The race start data page is available in the Dashboard app, when the MFD
has been configured to use the Sailing boating activity during the initial MFD
Examples — Dashboard app sailing dials start up wizard. The race start page includes data relevant to race sailing
and includes a graphical sailing dial.
The apparent wind dial is the default dial displayed on the race start page.
When the [Sail performance] setting has been configured dynamic wind angle
targets will be displayed. The sail performance setting can be configured
from the [Boat details] menu: [Homescreen > Boat details > Sail performance].
If the [Sail performance] setting has not been configured then close hauled
angle indicators are displayed instead of wind angle targets.
The race start page can be used in combination with the Laylines feature
and race start line feature available in the chart app to optimize your sailing
performance. For details about the layline features refer to:
• p.286 — Laylines
• 20.7 Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer

Example — Race start page with apparent wind sailing dial

1. Apparent wind dial — For details refer to: p.399 — Sailing page
2. Navigation dial — For details refer to: p.401 — Navigation page
3. True wind dial — The true wind dial uses true wind values instead of
apparent wind values.
4. Sailing wind angle dial — The sailing wind angle dial displays digital
wind angle instead of apparent wind speed of true wind speed.

1. Port wind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when tacking
to port upwind.
400
2. Compass dial — The compass dial remains fixed and the indicators move 25.7 Navigation page
around the dial to indicator direction/angle.
The navigation data page is always available. The navigation page includes
3. AWA indicator — Apparent Wind Angle. data relevant to navigation and includes a graphical navigation compass dial.
4. Downwind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when gybing Default Navigation page
downwind
5. TWA indicator — True Wind Angle.
6. Starboard wind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA
or TWA) with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when
tacking to starboard upwind.
7. Apparent wind speed
8. Downwind angle target — Align the larger wind indicator (AWA or TWA)
with the notch to optimize Velocity Made Good (VMG) when gybing
downwind
9. Rudder bar — Provides an indication of rudder position.
10. DISTANCE TO LINE — Distance to your race start line.
11. TIME TO BURN — The time to wait to cross the start line at maximum
speed.
12. RACE TIMER — Select the race timer to configure and start/stop the 1. SOG — Speed Over Ground.
race timer. 2. ACTIVE WPT — Active waypoint is the current destination (waypoint
13. LINE BIAS — Helps to determine the optimum point to cross the start line. or goto location).
14. TIME — Current time. 3. WPT ETA — Estimated time of arrival for the active waypoint location.
4. DTW — Distance to the active waypoint.
The apparent wind dial can be changed to one of the alternative sailing dials.
For details refer to: 5. COG indicator — Course Over Ground.
The sailing dials are unique to default pages and cannot be reproduced 6. Tide indicator — Tide direction.
on custom data pages. 7. Heading — Vessel heading.
Data items 10, 11, 13 and 14 can be customized. Data item 9 can be hidden if 8. Compass dial — The compass dial will rotate to provide indication of
desired. heading.
9. Rudder bar — Provides an indication of rudder position.
10. AWA indicator — Apparent Wind Angle.
11. TWA indicator — True Wind Angle.
12. BTW — Bearing to the active waypoint.
13. Tack hdg — Tack heading.
Dashboard app 401
14. Depth — Water depth. 25.8 Rolling road page
15. VMG to WPT — Velocity Made Good to Waypoint. The rolling road data page is always available. The rolling road page includes
The navigation dial and its contents are unique to the navigation page and data relevant to navigation and includes a graphical rolling road.
cannot be reproduced on other data pages. The navigation dial cannot be
removed or hidden. Default Navigation page

Data items 1 to 4 and 12 to 15 can be customized. Data item 9 can be hidden

if desired.

Close hauled angle indicators

If the [Sail performance] setting has not been configured then sailing dials will
display fixed port and starboard close hauled angle indicators instead of the
dynamic port, starboard and downwind angle targets.

Example — Sailing dial with close hauled angle indicators

1. BTW & DTW — Bearing and distance to active waypoint or goto location.
2. HEADING — Current vessel heading.
3. VMG TO WPT — Velocity Made Good to the active waypoint or goto
location.
4. Next waypoint — When following a route the next waypoint is displayed.
5. Active waypoint symbol — Active waypoint is the current destination
(waypoint or goto location).
6. Port boundary line
7. Rudder bar — Provides an indication of rudder position.
8. Cross Track Error (XTE) — Distance from track line.
9. Depth — Current water depth.
10. Starboard boundary line
11. Vessel icon — Current vessel position.
12. Steering indicator — Provides steering instruction.
13. WPT ETA — Estimated time of arrival for the active waypoint location.
402
14. COG SOG — Course Over Ground & Speed Over Ground. 6. ECON TOTAL — Total fuel economy.
The rolling road graphic can be reproduced on custom pages using the The fuel dial is unique to the fuel page and cannot be reproduced on other
[Navigation > Rolling road data item]. The rolling road graphic can be data pages. The fuel dial can be changed or hidden. All other data items on
changed or hidden. the fuel page can also be customized or hidden if desired.
Data items 1 to 3, 9, 13 and 14 can be customized. Data item 7 and 12 can
be hidden if desired. Note:
The number of fuel tanks displayed on the fuel page can only be changed
by performing a factory reset and choosing a different number of fuel tanks
25.9 Fuel page at the start up wizard.
The fuel data page is always available. The number of fuels tanks displayed
on the fuel page is based on the number of fuel tanks selected during the
initial MFD start up wizard. If more than 1 fuel tank is selected then the first 2 25.10 Tanks page
tanks will be displayed. The fuel page includes data relevant to fuel usage
and includes a graphical fuel dial. The tanks data page is always available. The number of tanks displayed is
based on the number of each type of tank selected during the initial MFD
Example fuel page start up wizard. The tanks page shows the capacity remaining for each tank.

Example tanks page

1. Fuel graphic
2. Fuel (%) — Indication of percentage fuel remaining.
3. Fuel indicator — Indication of percentage fuel remaining. 1. FUEL 1 (%) — Percentage of fuel remaining in Fuel tank 1.
4. FUEL FLOW TOT. — Total fuel flow. 2. FUEL 2 (%) — Percentage of fuel remaining in Fuel tank 2.
5. DTE — Distance To Empty. 3. GAS 1 (%) — Percentage of fuel remaining in Gasoline tank 1.
Dashboard app 403
4. FRESH 1 (%) — Percentage of fresh water remaining in fresh water tank 1. 1. Single data page — By default the single data page displays the current
time.
5. LIVE 1 (%) — Percentage of used capacity of the live well 1.
2. Bidata page — By default the bidata page displays SOG (Speed Over
6. GREY 1 (%) — Percentage of grey water in grey water tank 1.
Ground) and depth.
7. BLACK 1 (%) — Percentage of black water in black water tank 1.
The data items on the single data and bidata pages can be customized.
8. BLACK 2(%) — Percentage of black water in black water tank 2.
The combined graphical and digital percentage data item shown on the tanks
page is unique to the tanks page and cannot be reproduced on other data 25.12 Generators page
pages. The tank data items can be changed or hidden.
When the display detects generators which transmit supported NMEA 2000
Note: PGNs, a pre-configured generator page will be available in the Dashboard
app.
The number of tanks displayed on the tanks page can only be changed
by performing a factory reset and choosing a different number of tanks at Typically, a generator is connected to the display’s SeaTalk NG / NMEA 2000
the start up wizard. network, via the generator manufacturer’s NMEA 2000 interface / gateway. If
a gateway is used, ensure that it’s running an appropriate software version —
refer to the generator manufacturer.
25.11 Bidata and single data pages The generator page displays data for the first 2 detected generators. For
the display of data for more than 2 generators, a Digital Control System
The Bidata and single data pages are always available. (digital switching) solution is recommended.
For information on compatible interfaces, refer to your generator’s
manufacturer.
Details of detected generators are available in the Generator configuration
page. For details, refer to: p.113 — Generator configuration

Example page for single generator

The example provided below shows data provided by a Fischer Panda
generator, connected to the display’s SeaTalk NG / NMEA 2000 network via
a Fischer Panda Communication Interface FP-CAN to NMEA 2000, (Part
number: 0031409), running gateway software version 2v11 or later.

404
 • Output voltage (PGN 127747, PGN 127748, PGN 127749)
• Output current (PGN 127744, PGN 127745, PGN 127746)
• Output frequency (PGN 127747, PGN 127748, PGN 127749)
When more than one generator is detected, the generators page will show
the data for the first 2 detected generators.

Example multiple generators

1. Example generator page for DC generator.

2. Example generator output data for a 3-phase AC generator.
The pre-configured generator page contains the following data items:
• Generator state (PGN 127514)
• Engine hours (PGN 127489) Generator data items can also be added to app data overlays, custom
dashboard pages, and the sidebar. For a list of data items, refer to the
• Alternator voltage (PGN 127489) Generator section of the data items list: Generator data
• Coolant temperature (PGN 127489)
• Exhaust gas temperature (PGN 130316)
• Oil pressure state (PGN 127489)
DC generators also include the following data items:
• Output voltage (PGN 127751)
• Output current (PGN 127751)
AC generators include the following data items for up to 3 phases:
Dashboard app 405
Generator start/stop
Generators that include a compatible remote controller can be started or
stopped from the display.

Once the CZone plug and play wizard is completed successfully you will have
access to all of the programmed circuits via the Dashboard app.
When you select the [Generator status] data item from the Dashboard app or
Sidebar, a pop-over option allows you to either [Start] or [Stop] the generator. The wizard will create pages with up to 12 buttons per page (4 x 3), with a
maximum number of 120 buttons. The buttons will be created in the circuit
ID order from the configuration file.
25.13 CZone plug and play Splitscreen page configurations are supported with 12 buttons per page (2
x 6).
Digital switching pages for CZone® digital switching systems can be set up
automatically in the Dashboard app using the CZone plug and play wizard. Creating CZone digital switching pages automatically
When the Dashboard app detects CZone hardware and the system does not
Note: have an existing digital switching configuration installed, the CZone plug
• The Plug and play process requires a display interface to be present in and play wizard is started.
the CZone configuration file for Raymarine MFDs.
• Only 1 display interface dipswitch number must be used to represent Note:
all Raymarine MFDs in the system. The CZone plug and play wizard can be initiated at any time from the
• If the CZone configuration file contains only 1 display interface then the [Pages] settings menu [Dashboard app > Menu > Settings > Pages]by
MFD will automatically select that assigned display interface dipswitch selecting [Add page ] and then [CZONE] from the pop-over menu.
number.

406
 25.14 App menu
Settings for the Dashboard app are accessed by selecting the menu icon
located on the top right of the app page.
From the main menu the following options are available:
• Data pages — You can switch to any page by selecting it from the main
menu.
• [Customize page] — Select to customize the data items on the current
page. For instructions refer to: p.391 — Customizing a data item
• [Reset page] — Select to reset the page’s data items to default
• [Reset min/max/ave] — Select to reset minimum, maximum and average
data items values (e.g.: minimum and maximum depth values).
• [Settings] icon — Select to open the Settings menu.

Settings menu
The Dashboard app settings menu is accessed by selecting the settings icon
Note: located at the bottom of the main menu. The settings menu is organized
into full page menu’s that are accessed by selecting the tabs at the top of
If you already have a CZone pages configured using the Raymarine the screen.
graphics tool selecting [Import custom pages] will allow you to browse
an inserted memory card for your custom pages file and import into the The following settings menus are available:
Dashboard app. • [Pages]
• [Circuits]
1. Select [Auto plug and play].
• [Units]
The CZone configuration will be imported to the display.
• [Advanced]
2. Select the [Select] button and choose the dipswitch number as
determined by your CZone configuration. • [Page settings]
3. Select [Save].
4. Select [Yes] to auto generate pages.
5. Select [OK].

Dashboard app 407

Pages settings menu 3. Show in app — Identifies if the page is available in the Dashboard app. If
The [Pages] settings menu is used to customize the Dashboard app. the eye icon has a slash through it, the page is currently hidden.
4. [Add page] — Select to add a new custom page.
5. [Import custom pages] — Select to import a third-party
digital switching page or configuration. For details, refer to:
Importing digital switching pages
6. [Export custom pages] — Select to export a third-party
digital switching page or configuration. For details, refer to:
Exporting digital switching pages

Exporting digital switching pages

You can export third-party digital switching pages and configuration files so
that they can be restored at a later date. Digital switching pages are not
included in the standard “Import/export” process, which is used to backup
user data and settings.

Important:
Each display may have a different digital switching configuration. You
1. Pages list — A list of all pages that can be displayed in the Dashboard MUST perform the digital switching pages export on each display that
app. has a digital switching configuration.
2. Pop-over menu options — Selecting a page from the list opens the
pop-over menu. The pop-over menu includes the following options:
From the Dashboard app’s [Pages] settings menu [Menu > Settings > Pages]:
• [Hide page] / [Show page] — Select to show or hide the page. 1. Select [Export custom pages].
• [Move up] — Select to move the page up the list. The page order 2. Select the relevant card slot from the Info dialog.
determines where the page will appear when cycling through pages 3. Select [Save] to accept the default filename, or use the onscreen
using the arrows, and also determines the page’s position in the main keyboard to enter your own filename and then select [Save].
menu.
• [Move down] — Select to move the page down the list. The page
order determines where the page will appear when cycling through Important:
pages using the arrows, and also determines the page’s position in For systems with multiple displays that have different configurations,
the main menu. ensure that you name the export file appropriately so you can identify
• [Add page] — Select to add a new custom page. which display it came from.
• [Delete page] — Select to delete a custom page that you previously
added. 4. Select [OK] to return to the Import/export page, or select [Eject card] to
• [Rename] — Select to rename the page. safely remove the memory card.
• [Reset all] — Select to reset all data items on all pages to defaults.
408
Importing digital switching pages Circuits settings menu
You can import third-party digital switching pages and configuration files The Circuits settings menu is used to view tripped circuits related to
from a memory card. Digital switching pages are not included in the standard third-party digital switching configurations.
“Import/export” process, which is used to restore user data and settings.
Units settings menu
Important:
The Units []menu is used to specify your preferred units of measure for
You should have a different configuration file for each display. You MUST data readings. The Units menu can be accessed from the Homescreen:
import the correct configuration file for the display you’re currently using. [Homescreen > Settings > Units] or from the Dashboard app: [Menu > Settings
> Units].
From the Dashboard app’s [Pages] settings menu [Menu > Settings > Pages]: Units
1. Select [Import custom pages].
Measurement Units
2. Select [Yes] to confirm import.
3. Browse your memory card for the correct configuration file for the display. [Distance units] • [NM & ft] — Nautical miles & Feet
4. Select the configuration file. • [NM & m] — Nautical miles &
The digital switching pages and configuration will be imported. Meters
• [mi & ft] — Miles & Feet
• [km & m] — Kilometers and Meters
• [NM & yd] — Nautical miles &
Yards
[Speed units] • [Kts] — Knots
• [MPH] — Mile per hour
• [KPH] — Kilometers per hour
[Depth units] • [Meters] — m
• [Feet] — ft
• [Fathoms] — Fm
[Temperature units] • [Celsius] — C
• [Fahrenheit] — F
[Date format] • MM : DD : YYYY
• DD : MM : YYYY
• MM : DD : YY
• DD : MM : YY
Dashboard app 409
 Measurement Units Bearing and variation
[Lat/Long format] • DD°MM’.MMM Menu item/description Options
• DD:MM:SS [Bearing mode] • True
• DD:MM:SS.S Determines how bearing and • Magnetic
heading data is displayed.
• DD:MM.MMM
[System Datum] List of available datums.
• DD°MM’SS
Determines the datum used by your
• DD°MM.MMM’ display. This should be set to the
[Volume units] • [US Gallons] — Gsl same datum used by your paper
charts.
• [Imperial Gallons] — Gal
[Variation] • Auto
• [Liters] — Ltr
When set to [Auto] the display will • Manual
[Economy units] • Distance per Volume automatically compensate for the
• Volume per Distance naturally-occurring offset of the
Earth’s magnetic field.
• Liters per 100 km
[Manual variation] 30° W to 30° E
[Wind speed units] • [Knots] — kts
When [Variation] is set to [Manual],
• [Meters per Second] — m/s you can specify an offset.
[Pressure units] • [Bar]
Time differentials
• [PSI] Time differentials are used for Loran positioning.
• [Kilopascals] — KPa Measurement Units
[Time format] • 12hr [Chain] List of available Loran ‘master’
• 24hr chains.
[Slave 1] Filtered list of slave stations based
Cannot be set to the same as Slave on selected chain..
2
[Slave 2] Filtered list of slave stations based
Cannot be set to the same as Slave 1 on selected chain..
[ASF 1] -9.9 to +9.9
Additional Secondary Factors
[ASF 2] -9.9 to +9.9
Additional Secondary Factors
410
Engine RPM settings
The advanced settings menu allows you to specify some advanced settings
for engine RPM dials and data.
Engine RPM settings
The following engine RPM settings are available:

1. [Wind angle response] (applies to data received from a wind transducer).

2. [Wind speed response] (applies to data received from a wind transducer).
3. [Heading response] (applies to data received from a Heading sensor).
1. [Maximum RPM] — Select to specify a maximum RPM for your engine
dials, or allow the system to automatically configure the Maximum RPM. 4. [Depth response] (applies to data received from a Depth transducer).
2. [Custom RPM red zone] — Enable toggle to allow selection of a custom 5. [STW response] (applies to speed data received from a Paddlewheel
red zone for engine RPM dials. speed transducer).
3. Custom RPM red zone field — With [Custom RPM red zone] enabled you 6. [COG/SOG filter] (applies to COG and SOG data received from a GNSS
can specify the RPM at which the red zone begins. (GPS) receiver).
4. — You can specify how sensitive to change the engine RPM read out is. The data response settings can be set from 1 to 15, with 12 being the default.
The RPM damping can be [Off], [Low] or [High]. The higher the value, the faster the update rate. The data response settings
will apply to the displayed data item in the Dashboard app, Sidebars and
Data overlays.
Data response settings
The COG/SOG filter settings are: Low, Medium and High.
The advanced settings menu allows you to specify how responsive certain
data items are to change i.e.: the rate at which the data is updated.
The following data response (damping) settings are available:

Dashboard app 411

Page settings menu
The page settings menu allows you to configure data overlays and, when
applicable, adjust the position of the split on pages containing multiple apps.

1. [Edit data overlays] Fore details refer to: p.49 — Data overlays
2. [Edit split ratio] Fore details refer to: p.95 — Editing the splitscreen ratio

412
CHAPTER 26: MERCURY APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 26.1 Mercury app overview — page 414

• 26.2 Mercury sidebar overview — page 418
• 26.3 SkyHook mode — page 419
• 26.4 Autopilot control — page 420
• 26.5 Active Trim — page 423
• 26.6 Troll control — page 424
• 26.7 Cruise control — page 425
• 26.8 Sport exhaust — page 426
• 26.9 Steering angle indicator — page 426
• 26.10 Engine data page — page 426
• 26.11 Faults — page 427

Mercury app 413

26.1 Mercury app overview Fullscreen app page

Engine data from Mercury engines can be displayed in the Mercury app when
the display is connected to the same SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000 backbone as
the Mercury engine gateway.

Note:
It is recommended that your Mercury Smartcraft connect gateway is
upgraded to the latest version of software by a Mercury dealer.

Note:
• A Mercury app page icon will be available on the Homescreen when
[Mercury] is selected as the Engine manufacturer during the display’s
initial start up wizard.
• The Mercury app can also be made available by changing the Engine
manufacturer setting to [Mercury] and manually adding a Mercury app 1. Engine alternator voltage — In the fullscreen app the engine alternator
page icon to the Homescreen. voltage data items can be changed to show steering angle indicator
– The Engine manufacturer setting is located in the display’s Boat instead.
details settings: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Engine 2. System status — Engine status and start up sequence is displayed.
manufacturer:]. 3. Dynamic engine RPM red zone — The RPM red zone is determined
– To create a Mercury app page icon manually, refer to: automatically based on engine type. When an engine reaches the RPM
p.94 — Creating an app page red zone, the red zone color will change from dark red to bright red.
4. Dynamic engine RPM indicator— Indicates the engine’s current RPM.
Engine data for up to 4 engines can be displayed. The number of engines 5. Engine RPM value — Displays current RPM values.
that data is displayed for is determined by the number of engines specified 6. Dynamic transmission status — Indicates the current transmission gear.
in the display’s boat details settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat 7. Fuel tanks levels and total fuel — When a tank reaches 20% of its
details > Num of engine:]. capacity, the level indicator will turn red. Up to 5 fuel tanks are supported.
Data for port engine(s) is displayed on the left dial, and data for starboard 8. Current vessel speed (Speed Through Water).
engine(s) is displayed on the right dial. In 3 engine systems, the right dial is
also used to display data for the Center engine. 9. Tab position — Indicates vessel tab position as a percentage, with 0%
being fully trimmed up (stored), and 100% fully trimmed down.
In 3 and 4 engine configurations, the RPM dial and transmission graphics are
dynamic and will switch between engines under different conditions. 10. Engine trim — Indicates the engine trim position. Numeric values will be
displayed between 1 and 10. Although the highest numeric value is 25,
values above 10 are not displayed and are instead replaced by an icon,
to indicate that the boat is being trailered.
414
The Mercury app can also be displayed in a splitscreen app page using either • Autopilot control: Active route (LH4.3 or greater)
half screen portrait or landscape panes. When viewed in splitscreen app
• Active Trim control (LH4.3 or greater)
pages the page layout will be different.
Engine notifications • Primary helm display selection (LH4.3 or greater)
Engine notifications such as alarms and warnings will be shown on the • SkyHook, BowHook, DriftHook control (LH4.6 or greater)
display screen. Refer to: p.416 — Engine warning messages
Splitscreen app pages
Warning: Position holding/trolling features
The Mercury app can be viewed in a horizontal or vertical splitscreen app
A rotating propeller, moving vessel, or a device attached to a page.
moving vessel can cause serious injury or death to people
in the water. The MFD includes features which can control
vessel engines and/or devices which can move the vessel.
Stop the engines immediately whenever anyone is in the
water near the vessel.

Mercury features
Raymarine’s Mercury integration allows Raymarine displays running
LightHouse™ version 4.1 or greater to replace the dedicated VesselView
display, when it is connected to a SmartCraft connect gateway.
Supported features:
• Support for up to 4 engines
• Mercury app
• Engine data
• Fault code notifications The layout of data on splitscreen pages differs from the fullscreen pages to
accommodate the smaller page size.
• Software update
• Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (SmartCraft Connect connection to SmartCraft
Manager mobile app)
• Fuel tank level
• Skyhook (Activated using joystick)
• Engine fluid levels V12/V8/V6
• Steering angle
• Cruise control
• Troll control
• Autopilot control: Autoheading (LH4.3 or greater)
Mercury app 415
Changing alternator voltage to steering angle indicator System status
By default, the fullscreen Mercury app page displays engine alternator The System status is displayed in the center of the page.
voltage at the top of the page; this can be changed to display the steering When the system is started a scan is performed after which System OK is
angle indicator instead. displayed.
No Communication is displayed if the engines are turned off or engine data
cannot be detected.
If the system is restarted after a brief time the system scan is not performed.

Engine warning messages

Engine alarms, warnings and notifications will be shown on the display as
they are triggered.
Engine warning messages are color-coded to signify their severity:

Alarms

Alarms are red — Alarms are used to signify that immediate action is required
due to a potential or immediate danger or damage. Alarms are accompanied
by an audible tone. The alarm message continues to be displayed and the
1. Select and hold the alternator voltage area located at the top of the audible tone will continue to sound until the message is acknowledged, or
screen. the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer present. Acknowledged
2. Select [Edit] from the pop-over menu. alarms may remain active whilst the alarm condition persists, but will not
trigger further onscreen or audible notifications.
3. To display the steering angle indicator, select [Boat > Steering angle ]
or [Pilot > Steering angle] Alarms are listed in the Fault code history which can be viewed from the app
menu: [Menu > Settings > Fault code history].
You can change back to displaying engine alternator voltage by selecting:
[Engine > All Engines > Alternator]. Warnings

The data item can also be changed using the Mercury app menu: [Menu >
Customize page].

416
Warnings are Orange — Warnings are used to signify that there has been Helm grouping
a change in situation requiring your attention. Warnings are accompanied
by an audible tone. The alarm message continues to be displayed and the
audible tone will continue to sound until the message is acknowledged, or the
conditions that triggered the warning are no longer present. Acknowledged
warnings may remain active whilst the warning condition persists, but will not
trigger further onscreen or audible messages.

Notices

Notices are Blue — Notices are used to provide information requiring user
acknowledgement. Notices are not accompanied by an audible tone.

Displays that are in the same area should be in the same group.
Mercury SmartCraft helm grouping
Mercury SmartCraft integration is only available on displays assigned to Primary display selection
display groups Helm 1, Helm 2, Helm 3 and Helm 4.
Helm grouping should be configured during installation. If required the helm
grouping can be changed from the [This display] menu: [Homescreen >
Settings > This Display > Display group:].

When more than 1 display is in a group then a primary display must be

selected. On the selected primary display the relevant Mercury sidebar will
automatically be displayed on engine start and when a Mercury feature is
activated.

Mercury app 417

To assign the primary display, select the [This is my primary display for this
helm group] from the [This display] settings menu: [Homescreen > Settings
> This Display ].

Information messages
When integrated with a Mercury SmartCraft system the display supports
standard information messages transmitted by the SmartCraft system.

1. [Mercury] sidebars.
26.2 Mercury sidebar overview 2. [Data] sidebar.
3. [Cruise control] sidebar.
The Mercury sidebar is available in all MFD apps, and provides quick access
to Mercury features and engine data.
4. [Troll control] sidebar.

Selecting the Mercury icon displays additional icons representing the various 5. [Autopilot] sidebar.
Mercury sidebars available. Selecting a Mercury sidebar icon will display 6. [Active Trim] sidebar.
the relevant sidebar.
7. [SkyHook] sidebar
An amber circle in the top right of the Mercury icon (as shown in (1) in the
screenshot shown above) indicates an active control feature, such as [Cruise
control] or [Troll control]. The relevant sidebar icon will also be colored
amber, as shown in (3), (5) and (6) in the screenshot shown above.

418
26.3 SkyHook mode Important:
• Before [SkyHook] is engaged you must inform passengers how the
SkyHook is a virtual digital anchor which uses GNSS (GPS) data to maintain feature works, and that they must stay out of the water.
a boat’s position. SkyHook engages the engines or drives in a number of
directions and speeds to compensate for the effects of wind and current • After [SkyHook] is engaged you must remain at the helm and maintain a
on the vessel. vigilant watch, so that [SkyHook] can be quickly deactivated if someone
goes in the water.
The SkyHook feature can be controlled from the [SkyHook] Mercury sidebar,
which also allows you to switch between the [SkyHook], [BowHook] and
[DriftHook] features. Once engaged, [SkyHook] remains active until it is disengaged
The [SkyHook] sidebar includes the following information and controls:

SkyHook mode

1. [SkyHook] sidebar.
2. [BowHook] sidebar.
3. [DriftHook] sidebar. 1. Whilst engaged, the status switches between “SkyHook active” and
When [SkyHook] is selected, a warning is triggered alerting the operator to “Propeller injury hazard”.
ensure that there are no swimmers in the vicinity of the vessel. 2. The target heading is displayed.
3. [Left arrow] button — Selecting the [Left arrow] decreases the locked
heading in 1° increments.
4. [Right arrow] button — Selecting the [Right arrow] increases the locked
heading in 1° increments.
Mercury app 419
5. [Drifthook] button — Selecting [Drifthook] engages [DriftHook] mode. DriftHook mode
6. [Bowhook] button — Selecting [Bowhook] engages [BowHook] mode. In DriftHook mode, the vessel’s reported heading will change based on the
7. [Standby] button — Selecting [Standby] disengages [Skyhook] mode. prevailing wind and tide conditions, even while the vessel maintains its
current position. However, unlike the similar BowHook mode, DriftHook
8. [Skyhook] icon — Selecting the [Standby] icon located in the top right of mode additionally allows you to adjust the heading manually in increments.
the Chart app will also disengage [SkyHook] mode.

BowHook mode
In BowHook mode, the vessel’s reported heading will change based on the
prevailing wind and tide conditions, even while the vessel maintains its
current position.

26.4 Autopilot control

Compatible Mercury® autopilots connected to the SmartCraft® connect
gateways via the SmartCraft® bus can be integrated with the display so that
the autopilot can be controlled from the display. On these systems the
autopilot control will be available.
Autopilot controls can be accessed from the Autopilot sidebar. Performing a
[Goto] or [Follow route] in the Chart app will also provide options to engage
your autopilot.

420
Autopilot sidebar selection Autopilot sidebar states

1. With the autopilot in standby, the Autopilot sidebar has [Autoheading] or

When the autopilot is engaged, the Autopilot sidebar is displayed [Route] options. You can select [Autoheading] to engage the autopilot
automatically. With the autopilot disengaged (i.e.: in Standby mode), you can and maintain the current heading.. If you are already following a route,
display the Autopilot sidebar by selecting the Autopilot icon located on the you can select [Route] to engage the autopilot in Route mode. In Route
top right of the screen, or by manually selecting the Autopilot sidebar icon mode, the boat will follow the route and when a waypoint is reached the
from the Mercury sidebar options. boat will automatically proceed to the next waypoint in the route.
2. Autoheading — When Autoheading is engaged, the sidebar displays the
current target heading and provide controls to increase and decrease
the heading angle in 1° or 10° increments.
3. Route mode — In Route mode, the sidebar displays navigation data
and provides controls to switch to [Autoheading], advance to the next
waypoint ([Advance wpt.]), or restart the “route follow” command ([Restart
here]).

Enabling and disabling Mercury® autopilot integration

Integration with Mercury® autopilots can be enabled and disable from the
Autopilot settings menu.
From the [Homescreen]:
1. Select [Settings].
Mercury app 421
2. Select [Autopilot]. • Selecting the [Autoheading] button on the autopilot sidebar and then
3. Select the [Control pilot from chartplotter(s):] toggle switch. selecting [Engage Autopilot].
When disabled the autopilot control of Mercury® engines will not be available. • Pressing the physical [Pilot] button on an Axiom® 2 Pro display or
pressing and holding the physical [STBY (Auto)] button on an Axiom®
Warning: Maintain a permanent watch Pro display or RMK remote.
Always maintain a permanent watch, this will allow you to 5. Adjustments to the heading can be made in 1° and 10° increments using
respond to situations as they develop. Failure to maintain a the controls on the Autopilot sidebar.
permanent watch puts yourself, your vessel and others at
serious risk of harm.
Engaging Route mode
Warning: Autopilot usage Route mode allows you to automatically navigate a preset route saved on
your display.
Autopilots navigate a preset course and do NOT respond
to hazards automatically. The operator must remain at the
helm at all times and be ready to avoid hazards and warn Important:
passengers of course changes. • When following a route, Route mode will automatically turn the boat
upon waypoint arrival to the next waypoint in the route.
Engaging Autoheading • The operator must remain at the helm at all times. Route mode is NOT
designed to allow unattended operation of the boat.
Autoheading allows the boat to automatically maintain a heading while
underway. • It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that the route is safe to
follow before engaging the autopilot.
Important: • It is also the responsibility of the operator to ensure that, when a
• The operator must remain at the helm at all times. Autoheading is NOT waypoint arrival circle is reached, the next turn is safe to perform.
designed to allow unattended operation of the boat.
• It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that the passage is safe 1. Ensure that the engines are running.
to navigate before engaging the autopilot. 2. Place at least one running engine in forward gear.

1. Ensure that the engines are running. Important:

2. Place at least one running engine in forward gear.
Route mode does not function with Electronic Remote Control (ERC) levers
in neutral or reverse.
Important:
Autoheading does not function with Electronic Remote Control (ERC) levers
3. Steer the boat in the direction of the first waypoint.
in neutral or reverse.
4. Engage Route mode by:
• Selecting [Follow route] from the Route context menu and then
3. Steer the boat to the desired heading.
selecting [Engage Autopilot] from the notification dialog.
4. Engage Autoheading by:
422
 • Selecting the desired location or waypoint in the Chart app, selecting Shortcuts menu
[Goto] from the Chart context menu, and then selecting [Engage
Autopilot] from the notification dialog.
5. When the final destination waypoint or the last waypoint in a route has
been reached, a warning is displayed giving you the following options:
• Select [Maintain Heading] to enter Autoheading mode.
• Select [Standby] to disengage the autopilot.

Disengage the autopilot (Standby)

The autopilot can be disengaged i.e.: put into Standby mode at any time.

Sidebar and app screen

The autopilot can be placed in Standby by:

• selecting the red Autopilot icon located on the top right of the screen and
then selecting [Standby].
• selecting the [Standby] button from the Autopilot sidebar and then
selecting [Standby].
• selecting the [Standby] icon from the Shortcuts menu.
• pressing the physical [Standby] on an Axiom® 2 Pro display or pressing the
physical [STBY (Auto)] button on an Axiom® Pro display or RMK remote.

26.5 Active Trim

If your Mercury system supports it, Active Trim can be set up and controlled
from the display. Active Trim is Mercury Marine’s patented GPS‑based
automatic trim system. This intuitive, hands‑free system continually adjusts
engine or drive trim for changes in operating conditions to improve
performance, fuel economy, and ease of operation.
Active Trim responds to boat maneuvers with precision, and delivers a better
overall driving experience. For further details on Active Trim, refer to your
Mercury operator’s guide.

Mercury app 423

 Note:
If Active Trim has previously been configured, ensure that the Running
profile in the Active Trim sidebar is set to 3 before you begin.

1. Start the engines and place in neutral gear.

2. Select [Active Trim set-up] from the Mercury app’s [Advanced] settings
menu: [Menu > Settings > Advanced ], or select [Configure] from the
Active Trim can be configured from the Mercury app’s [Advanced] settings Active Trim sidebar.
menu: [Menu > Settings > Advanced ]. From this menu. Active Trim can also 3. Trim all engines to the fully up position.
be configured by selecting [Configure] from the Active Trim sidebar. 4. Select [Next] .
The Active Trim sidebar is accessed from the Mercury sidebar options. 5. Trim all engines to the fully down position.
6. Select [Next] .
7. Select [Next] .
8. Increase the boat speed to cruising speed.
9. Increase the major profile until the boat begins to porpoise, then decrease
by one profile.
Once configured, you can adjust Active Trim performance by increasing or
decreasing the Running profile from the Active Trim sidebar.
If required, the major profile can be changed at any time, by selecting the
[Select major profile] button from the [Advanced] menu.

26.6 Troll control

On supported engines and outboards the troll control feature will be available
on the Mercury sidebar.
Controls for the troll feature are available in the Mercury Troll sidebar. The
troll feature enables you to select a specific low value RPM that your engines
Once configured, Active Trim can be enabled and disabled from the Active will maintain until troll is disabled. The RPM speed can be adjusted in 10 RPM
Trim sidebar. You can also switch the Running profiles from this sidebar. increments using the [+] (plus) and [-] (minus) buttons on the sidebar.

Setting up Active Trim

To configure Active Trim from the display, follow the steps below:
Whilst Active Trim is being configured, any other displays in the same helm
group will show the progress in the Active Trim sidebar.
424
 Cancelling troll control
To regain manual throttle control troll mode must be cancelled.
Troll control mode can be cancelled by:
• Placing handles in neutral position, or
• Selecting [Disable] from the troll sidebar.

26.7 Cruise control

On supported engines and outboards the cruise feature will be available on
the Mercury sidebar.
Controls for the cruise feature are available in the Mercury Cruise sidebar.
The cruise feature enables you to select a specific RPM that your engines will
maintain until cruise is disabled. The RPM speed can be adjusted in 50 RPM
increments using the [+] (plus) and [-] (minus) buttons on the sidebar.

Enabling troll control

Troll control is enabled from the troll sidebar. For the troll controls to be
available the engines must be in forward gear and idle.
1. Place the engines in forward gear and ensure they are idle.
2. If no sidebar is displayed, swipe your finger from the left edge of the
screen to the middle.
3. Select the Mercury icon.
4. Select the Troll icon.
5. Use the [+] (Plus) and [-] (Minus) buttons to adjust your desired engine RPM.

The [+] (Plus) and [-] (Minus) buttons will be deactivated if the minimum or
maximum value has been selected.

6. Select [Enable].
Your engine RPM will now increase to the set level.
If troll is active the troll sidebar icon will be colored amber. Hiding the sidebar Enabling cruise control
will not affect troll operation. Cruise control is enabled from the cruise sidebar.
When enabled you can adjust the engines RPM using the [+] (Plus) and [-] 1. If no sidebar is displayed, swipe your finger from the left edge of the
(Minus) buttons. screen to the middle.
2. Select the Mercury icon.
Mercury app 425
3. Select the Cruise icon. Steering angle indicator locations
4. Use the [+] (Plus) and [-] (Minus) buttons to adjust your desired engine RPM.
5. Select [Enable].
6. Place the remote control handles in the forward gear position, and place
the handles in the wide‑open throttle position.
Your engine RPM will now increase to the set level.
If cruise is active the cruise sidebar icon will be colored amber. Hiding the
sidebar will not affect cruise operation.
In cruise mode you can adjust the desired RPM using the [+] (Plus) and [-]
(Minus) buttons.

Cancelling cruise control

To regain manual throttle control cruise mode must be cancelled.
Cruise control mode can be cancelled by selecting [Disable] from the cruise
1. Location in fullscreen app page.
sidebar.
2. Location in Mercury sidebar.
3. Location in splitscreen app page.
26.8 Sport exhaust The Steering angle indicator is non-linear and is more sensitive at lower
steering angles.
On supported outboards the option to switch the sport exhaust feature on
and off will be available on the Mercury engine data sidebar.
Note:
The sport exhaust feature allows you to change the sound of the outboard
idle relief exhaust volume. Enabling the sport exhaust feature opens an The steering angle indicator is disabled when a Mercury joystick is active.
exhaust passage, allowing a more deep exhaust sound.

Note: 26.10 Engine data page

Mercury Smartcraft Connect Gateway software release 3 or greater is
The Mercury engine data page displays various engine related data for your
required.
Mercury engines.
The Engine data page can be accessed from the Mercury app: [Menu >
26.9 Steering angle indicator Engine data] or from the Mercury sidebar by selecting [More].

The steering angle indicator provides an onscreen indication of the steering

position.
The Steering angle indicator is available in the Mercury app and the Mercury
sidebar.
426
 Note:
*Only available on supported engines.

On compatible engines the engine data page also provides options to initiate
automatic engine oil level and transmission fluid level check procedures.

26.11 Faults
Fault code history
The fault codes tab displays live and historical detected engine faults.

The following is the full list of data that is available for each configured engine.
• RPM
• *Oil level
• *Transmission fluid level
• Engine hours
• Battery voltage
• Trim position
• Coolant pressure
• Coolant temperature
• Oil pressure
• Oil temperature By default the Fault codes history tab displays fault codes for all engines. You
• Fuel flow can use the [Filter] option to display fault codes for a specific engine.
• Gear pressure Active and historical engine fault codes can also be viewed from the display’s
Alarm manager: [Homescreen > Alarms] and selecting either [Active] or
• Gear temperature [History] tab.
• Load %
• Boost pressure
• Steering angle
Mercury app 427
On Board Diagnostics (OBD)
Displays that are configured for use with Mercury engines can display OBD
faults. When an OBD fault occurs an alarm will be triggered on the display.
An OBD icon will be displayed on the splashscreen during boot up to signify
that the display supports OBD.
Notifications and icons will be shown when an OBD fault occurs or is active.

1. Splashscreen icon signifying that OBD is supported.

2. The Alarms icon on the homescreen will display an OBD icon when
a fault is active.
3. The home icon in MFD apps will display an OBD icon when a fault is
active.
4. When an OBD fault is triggered an alarm notification will be triggered.
OBD fault information will be available in the Alarm manager and in the
Mercury app settings menu.

428
CHAPTER 27: YAMAHA APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 27.1 Yamaha engine gateway selection — page 430

• 27.2 Yamaha HDMI overview — page 430
• 27.3 Yamaha app overview — page 430
• 27.4 Customizing Data pages — page 431
• 27.5 Engine page — page 435
• 27.6 Settings — page 438

Yamaha app 429

27.1 Yamaha engine gateway selection 27.3 Yamaha app overview
When the MFD is connected to Yamaha engines via a compatible gateway / The [Yamaha app] enables you to view engine system data from a connected
interface, engine related data can be displayed in the dedicated Yamaha app. Yamaha Command Link or Command Link Pro network.
Engine gateway selection is performed as part of the Boat details settings
in the initial MFD start up wizard. The selection can also be changed in the Note:
Boat details settings tab: [Homescreen > Settings > Boat details > Engine
manufacturer]. • The Yamaha app will only display data when a compatible Yamaha
Command Link or Command Link Pro network is connected to the MFD
• If you have a compatible gateway interface, select [Yamaha] from the via a Yamaha NMEA 2000 gateway or CL7 gauge.
Engine manufacturer options.
• The Yamaha app can only be displayed as a Fullscreen app page.
• If you have a compatible gateway that includes the Yamaha MFD HDMI
interface, select [Yamaha HDMI] from the Engine manufacturer options. • The Yamaha app is pre-configured with a number of customizable data
pages.
Compatible Yamaha gateways • For each instance of the Yamaha app you can select which Data pages
you want to use; the Data page selection will persist over a power cycle.
The following gateways are compatible:
• The Yamaha app is compatible with Yamaha Command Link and
Command Link Pro when connected to the MFD via a Yamaha NMEA 2000
gateway or CL7 gauge.
• The Yamaha HDMI app is compatible with Yamaha Command Link and
Command Link Pro when connected to the MFD via a Yamaha Helm Master
EX 6YG gateway and MFD interface (MFDI).

27.2 Yamaha HDMI overview

The MFD will display the HDMI video input feed from the Yamaha MFDI.
Control is achieved using the Yamaha supplied handheld controller.
Please refer to the documentation that was supplied with your Yamaha
engine system.

430
Requirements 27.4 Customizing Data pages
The Yamaha app is available when a compatible Yamaha Command Link or
Command Link Pro network is connected to the MFD via a Yamaha NMEA The Yamaha App contains 3 default data pages: [Engines], [Data] and [Tanks] .
2000 gateway (6YG-8A2D0-00-00) or CL7 display. The data items displayed on each page can be changed, hidden or reset.
To customize each page:
Note: 1. Select and hold the relevant Data item.
Do not use the Gateway module (6YG-8A2D0-00-00) and CL7 display i. Alternatively you can select [Customize page] from the app menu:
together on the same network. [Menu > Customize page].
2. Select [Edit], [Hide] or [Reset] from the Data item pop-over menu.
i. [Edit] — you can select the new data item you want to add to the page.
Yamaha app controls ii. [Hide] — removes the data item from the page.
Icon Description Function iii. [Reset] — reset the value of the selected data item (only available for
certain data items).
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen.
Available data items
Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man Engine page
overboard (MOB) alarm.

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

Menu icon Opens the app menu.

Left arrow Displays the previous data page.

Right arrow Displays the next data page.

Switching data page

1. Use the [Left arrow] and [Right arrow] buttons, located at the bottom of
the screen, to cycle through the available data pages. [Cell 1 and Cell 2]
2. Alternatively, you can select a specific data page from the Yamaha app
menu. [Data type] [Data item] [Data type] [Data item]
Yamaha app 431
 [Depth] • Depth [Environ- • Water Temp Data Page
ment]
[Distance] • Trip [GPS] • SOG
[Engine] • Engine Trip [Pilot] • Rudder
Hours
• Engine Hours
[Fuel] • Engine economy [Speed] • STW
total
• Fuel flow total
• Fuel used (trip)
• Est. fuel
remaining
[Cell 3] [Cell 4]
[Data type] [Data item] [Data type] [Data item]
[Engine] • Coolant Temp [Boat] • Accessory voltage level
• Coolant Pres • Accessory voltage [Data type] [Data item] [Data type] [Data item]
• Alternator Level • Supply voltage level [Battery] • TTZ [GPS] • COG
• Alternator • Supply voltage • SOC • Avg SOG
• Oil Pres • Max SOG
• SOG
• Loran Position
• Position
• COG SOG
[Boat] • Mast Rot [Heading] • Lock Hdg Err
• Roll • Tack Heading
• ROT • Lock Hdg
• Heading
• Heading & STW

432
 [Depth] • Max Depth [Naviga- • VMG to Wpt [Engine] • RPM [Speed] • VMG to Wind
tion]
• Min Depth • BTW & DTW • Engine Trip • Avg STW
Hours
• Depth • CMG & VMG to WPT • Max STW
• Fuel Rate (Avg)
• Compass • STW
• Inst Fuel
• BTW
Economy
• XTE
• Engine Fuel Rate
• DTW
• Engine Hours
• CMG
• DMG
• Wpt ETA
• TTP
• Target Pos
• Loran Target Pos
• Wpt TTG
• Wpt
• Rte ETA
• Next turn angle
• Origin target distance
• Next waypoint name
• BOTW
[Distance] • Trip season [Pilot] • Rudder
• Trip month
• Trip day
• Trip manual
• Ground Log
• Trip
• Log

Yamaha app 433

 [Fuel] • Engine economy [Time] • Timer
• Min TWS
total
• Sunset Time
• Max TWS
• Fuel flow total
• Sunrise Time
• TWA
• Time to empty
• UTC Time
• TWA (CH)
• Distance to
• Local Time
empty • Max TWA
• UTC Date
• Fuel used • Min TWA
(season) • Local Date
• TWD
• Total Trip Fuel • Time and Timer
• GWS
• Fuel used (trip)
• GWD
• Est. fuel
• Beaufort (wind force
remaining
scale)
[Environ- • Drift from ps [Wind] • Max AWA
ment] Tanks Page
• Wind Chill (App) • GWD + Beaufort
• Wind Chill (True) • TWA & TWS
• Dew Point • TWA (CH) & TWS
• Max Air Temp • TWA & VMG to Wind
• Min Water Temp • AWA & AWS
• Water Temp • AWA (CH) & AWS
• Set • AWA & VMG to Wind
• Drift • GWS & GWD
• Sunrise/Sunset • AWS
• Set Drift • Max AWS
• Min AWS
• AWA
• AWA (CH)
[Data type] [Data item] [Data type] [Data item]
• Cardinal Wind
[Boat] • Fresh Water [Fuel] • Total Fuel (vol)
• Min AWA
• Live Well • Total Fuel
• TWS
• Gray Water
434
 • Black Water
Engines
• Fuel level
The number of Yamaha engines connected to your MFD’s network
determines how the engine page is displayed.

27.5 Engine page

In addition to the customizable data cells available, the Engine page also
displays the following engine and tank data for your vessel:
• Rudder position (single engine only)
• Transmission
• Speed
• Revolutions Per Minute (r/min)
• Engine trim
• Number of fuel tanks and fill level
Troll mode can also be enabled from this page.

The number of engines and their manufacturer can be set on the [Boat
details] page.
[Homescreen > Settings > Boat details]

If your vessel is setup using the old quad engine system (2 MFDs for Port and
Starboard Engines), you can select which engines are displayed per MFD
by selecting [Configure Yamaha Quad display] and choosing [Port side] or
[Starboard side].

Yamaha app 435

 1. Neutral
2. Forward
3. Reverse
4. No transmission data detected
The engine page will update to reflect which engines your MFD is networked
to, with Port and Central Port symbols or Starboard and Central Starboard Note:
symbols. If no transmission information is detected from the CAN bus after 3
seconds, it will timeout. Ensure that your engine(s) are compatible and
have been connected to your MFD network correctly.

Status and warning indicators

The engine page will display indicators for
engine status and warnings.

1. Port engine
2. Central Port engine These status and warning symbols are described below:
3. Central Starboard engine
4. Starboard engine

Transmission
The transmission icons indicate which transmission mode your vessel’s
engine is currently in:
1. [Engine warming up status]
436
2. [Synchronization status] Tanks
3. [Immobilizer lock status]
The engine page displays the number
of tanks aboard your vessel, their type,
instance number and fill level.

Note:
• The number of tanks and their type
is determined during the installation
wizard.
• Tanks require calibration, for more
information refer to 7.7 Calibrating tanks
• No more than 6 tanks can be displayed
on the engine page.
1. [Overheat warning]
• If there are more than 6 tanks detected
2. [Low oil pressure warning] on your vessel’s network the engine
3. [Water in fuel warning] page will display them using the
following hierarchy: fuel, fresh water,
4. [Low voltage warning] waste water, gasoline, followed by
5. [Check engine warning] prioritizing the lowest instance numbers
first.
6. [Steering system warning]
7. [Catalyst warning]
Engine trim
The trim bar displays the trim level of your
engine(s), a higher blue bar equates to a
higher trim percent. The trim bar will begin
to flash if you attempt to set the engine trim
beyond 100%.

Yamaha app 437

Troll mode Maintenance
If your engine supports Troll mode it can The Maintenance tab displays the amount of time since your Yamaha
be enabled from the engine page. Troll engine(s) have been serviced.
mode is enabled by pressing the Troll mode
The amount of hours since last service will automatically accumulate when
toggle or by selecting it from the menu.
your Yamaha engine(s) are running. When your engine(s) have been serviced
you can long hold the row and select [Reset] from the pop up to return the
Note: amount of hours back to 0.
• Lower engine RPM and go into idle
mode before attempting to activate
Troll mode.
• When Troll mode is enabled your RPM
gauge will change from x100 r/min to
r/min, allowing for more precise control.

27.6 Settings
The settings page can be used to view fault codes, schedule maintenance,
and calibrate your engine(s).

Fault codes Note:

The fault codes tab displays all live engine faults detected on the network.
• A default interval of 100 hours is displayed at the top, this is the
recommended maximum amount of time you can use your engine(s)
before a service is required.
• Additional user configurable intervals can be customized by long holding
each row and choosing the interval length.

Advanced
The Advanced tab is used during the installation and calibration of your
Yamaha engine(s). For more information on how to install and calibrate your
Yamaha engine(s) refer to Yamaha engine installation manual or Yamaha
Note: dealer.
• The fault codes tab default setting is to display fault codes from all [Options:]
engines.
[Gateway reset] — System protocol information reset.
• You can use the filter option to display fault codes for a specific engine [Engine instances reset] — Engine instances reset. Engine(s) will be reordered
and hide codes for all other engines. based on engine position:
438
 Engine Port Central Central Star-
or Star- board
Central board
Port
Single Engine 0 - - -
Twin Engine 0 - - 1
Triple Engine 0 1 - 2
Quad Engine 0 1 2 3

[All pages reset] — All data items on each data page are reset to default.
[Fuel flow offset] — Set the Fuel flow offset value in accordance with your
Fuel flow gauge reading.
[Trim Calibration] — Calibrate your engine trim by pressing [Set to zero] if any
number other than 0 is showing on the Trim Position when engine(s) have
stopped.

Yamaha app 439

CHAPTER 28: VIDEO APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 28.1 Video app overview — page 441

• 28.2 Thermal camera screen overview — page 444
• 28.3 Opening the Video app — page 444
• 28.4 Video app settings — page 447
• 28.5 Maritime (M-Series) camera compatibility — page 450

440
28.1 Video app overview
Analog video feeds and IP (Internet Protocol) digital video feeds can be
viewed, recorded and played back on the display using the Video app.
Examples of video feeds include: CCTV cameras and Thermal imaging
cameras, Blu-Ray player etc. It may also be possible to view analog video
feeds from other sources using a suitable third party analog-to-IP video
converter.
Up to 4 video feeds can be displayed simultaneously when using a
splitscreen app page.

Note:
Video network streaming
• IP video feeds will be available to all networked displays.
• The analog video feed [VIDEO 1] available on the Power/Data/Video
cable on Axiom® Pro and Axiom® 2 Pro displays are encoded as RTSP
streams and can be viewed on all networked displays. Warning: Distraction disclaimer
• The analog video feed [VIDEO 1] available on the Alarm/Video cable on • The MFD/Chartplotter includes various entertainment apps.
Axiom® XL displays is encoded as an RTSP stream and can be viewed Whilst navigating do NOT let these apps distract your
on all networked displays. attention from safe navigation.
• The analog video feed [VIDEO 2] available on the Power/Data/Video • Any distraction while navigating causes a lapse in
cable on Axiom® XL displays is not streamed to networked displays. concentration which increases the risk of collision. To avoid
hazards you must give navigation your full attention at all
• The analog video feed [VIDEO 2] available on the Power/Audio/Video times.
cable on Axiom® 2 XL displays is encoded as an RTSP stream and can
be viewed on all networked displays.
• The analog video feed [VIDEO 1] available on the Alarm/Video cable on Video app pages
Axiom® 2 XL displays is not streamed to networked displays. Each Video app instance is unique, this means that once you have selected a
feed to display in a Video app page then your feed selection is saved and the
same feed will be displayed whenever that app page icon is opened from
the Homescreen. If you open the same Video app page from a networked
MFD, the same feed will be displayed on each MFD.

Video app 441

 3. Select the [Camera setup] tab.
4. Select the Camera name field.
5. Use the onscreen keyboard to rename your feed and then select [Save].
Repeat the above steps for each video feed you want to rename. You can
also associate a different icon to your video feed by selecting the [Icon] field.

Video app controls

Icon Description
[Home icon]
Takes you to the Homescreen

[Waypoint / MOB]
Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB) alarm

[Pilot icon]
You can create additional Video app pages and assign a different feed to Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar
each. This will allow you to view multiple feeds on multiple networked MFDs
simultaneously. [Menu icon]
For example, if you want to display a different video feed on different Opens the app menu
networked MFDs, you must first create additional Video app pages.
[Record]
Note: Start recording (Replaced by Stop icon whilst recording.)
When you have multiple Video app page icons on your Homescreen,
you may wish to rename each icon to help you easily identify the [Stop]
feeds(s) assigned to each app page. For information on how to rename Stop recording (Replaced Record icon when not recording.)
Homescreen icons, refer to:
p.94 — Customizing an existing app page [Take photo]
Take a photo of what is currently displayed in the active feed.

Renaming video feeds

Pan, Tilt, Zoom (PTZ) camera controls
In multi camera installations you can rename your feed from within the Video
app. Extra controls are available for cameras that can pan, tilt or zoom.
From the Video app menu: • Using the touchscreen, swipe your finger across the screen to pan or tilt
1. Select the icon for the camera you want to rename so that its feed is the camera.
displayed. • Using the touchscreen, use a “Pinch-to-Zoom” action with your thumb and
2. Goto the Video app’s [Settings] menu: [Menu > Settings]. forefinger to zoom in and out of the video image.
442
• When not in use, place the camera in the Parked position by selecting 4. Image flipped and mirrored / reverse view — For cameras facing aft,
[Park camera] from the menu: [Menu > Park camera] where the camera image appears upside-down.
• To move the camera to its Home position, select [Home] from the menu: On supported cameras, the video feed can be flipped and reversed directly
[Menu > Home] from the Video app’s [Camera setup] menu. [Menu > Settings > Camera
setup].
Image flip and mirroring
Depending on the specific type of camera connected, the video feed can be
flipped upside down and reversed.
Flipping the camera image is required when the camera has been installed
upside-down (ball-down configuration). In this scenario, flipping the image
will correct the image’s orientation onscreen.
Reversing the image is useful for installations where the camera is rear-facing
and you are viewing the image on a forward-facing display, as it provides an
effect similar to looking through a rear view mirror.

1. [Mirrored view] — When enabled, mirrors / reverses the image.

2. [Flip image vertical] — When enabled, image is flipped upside-down.
If the camera supports image flip and reversing but the controls are not
available in the Camera setup menu, you may be able to access the camera’s
built-in web interface to change these settings. Refer to the documentation
for your camera for details.

Note:
Augmented reality — If your camera supports Augmented Reality (AR),
flipping the image and / or reversing the image will prevent Augmented
1. Standard view — For forward-facing cameras. Reality (AR) objects appearing correctly onscreen.
2. Mirrored/reverse view — For cameras facing aft.
3. Image flipped view — For forward-facing cameras, where the camera
image appears upside down.
Video app 443
28.2 Thermal camera screen overview d. [Docking scene] — optimized for use when the boat is docking at
night.
When viewing the thermal or visible light video feed of a compatible thermal 2. [IR Focus] — shown when autofocus is activated, to indicate the progress
camera, additional controls are available. of the operation.
3. (1)[Increase
focus] — manually increases camera focus.
Note:
4. (1)[Autofocus] — enable/disable autofocus.
The status icons are embedded in the video stream from the camera. Only
the focus and zoom controls can be interacted with. 5. (1)[Decrease focus] — manually decrease focus.

Note: (1) For cameras that support manual focus, the controls are
displayed temporarily when you tap the touchscreen.

6. Azimuth (Position) and Elevation (Tilt) indicator — Shows the azimuth

(or direction) of the camera relative to the vessel, as well as the vertical
tilt of the camera. The triangle shows the approximate camera field of
view (FOV). The diamond shows the approximate camera position.
7. Payload — Identifies the type of video feed being displayed, e.g. thermal
or visible light.

1. Scene Automatic Gain Control (AGC) settings — the icon for the currently
selected scene is displayed. The following scenes are available:
a.[Thermal video feed]
b. [Daylight / visible light video feed]
8. [Zoom out]
9. [Zoom in]

a. [Night scene] — optimized for use on the open water at night. 28.3 Opening the Video app
b. [Contrast scene] — optimized for good visibility of small moving The Video app is opened by selecting an app page icon from the
objects. Homescreen which includes the Video app.
c. [Day scene] — optimized for use on the open water during the day. Pre-requisites:
444
1. Ensure your video feed is compatible by checking the latest details
available on the Raymarine website against your device’s specification. If
in doubt please contact an authorized Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your video device in accordance with the
documentation that was supplied with your device.
The Video app will open in 1 of 3 states:
If the ‘Camera not yet available’ message is displayed for more than 2
minutes, then your MFD cannot connect to your camera. Ensure network
Note: and power connections to your camera and MFD are correct and free from
If the Video app is opened soon after powering on your system, you may damage and then power cycle your system. If the camera feed is still not
have to wait for the device(s) to finish booting before the video feed is displayed, refer to your equipment’s installation documentation for further
displayed. troubleshooting information.

No camera detected
Video feed displayed
The ‘No camera detected’ message is displayed if:
If your device is powered up and operational then the Device’s video feed
is displayed. • a Video app page is opened for the first time and no compatible camera is
connected.
• a Video app page is opened for the first time before the camera has
finished booting up.

If the ‘No camera detected’ message is displayed for more than 2 minutes,
then your MFD cannot connect to your camera. Ensure network and power
connections to your camera and MFD are correct and free from damage and
then power cycle your system. If the camera feed is still not displayed, refer
to your equipment’s installation documentation for further troubleshooting
information.

Camera not yet available

The ‘Camera not yet available’ message is displayed if:
• a Video app page is opened before the camera has finished booting up.
• connection to the camera is lost.
Video app 445
Selecting a video feed [Combo app > Menu > Settings > Image Tab > Active feed > Visible /
Thermal]
You can change the feed that is displayed in the
Video app. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other app instance and video stream.
From the Video app main menu, select the icon for
the camera that you want to display. Dual MFDs
Activate dual video streaming on at least 2 MFDs connected on the same
network.

Note:
Make sure your MFDs are both correctly connected on the same network
as the dual payload camera.

Dual streaming 1. Open the [Video app] on one of the MFDs.

M-Series cameras with dual payloads (visible and thermal camera lens) can 2. Select the dual payload camera and select the stream you want to display
stream a visible feed and thermal feed simultaneously. (visible or thermal):

[Video app > Menu > Settings > Image Tab > Active feed > Visible /
Thermal]

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other MFD and video stream.

Note:
Dual streaming requires:
• A dual payload M-Series camera: M300, M400 and M500.

Single MFD
Activate dual video streaming on a single MFD.
1. From the [Homescreen], create a custom combo app that comprises of at
least 2 [Video apps]. For more information on creating and customizing
LightHouse apps, refer to: p.94 — Creating an app page
2. Open the combo app and select one of the Video app instances.
3. Select the dual payload camera and select the stream you want to display
(visible or thermal):
446
28.4 Video app settings Settings Options
[Palette] • WhiteHot
The Settings menu provides access to the Video app’s features and
functions. The options available in the Settings menu are dependent on your Various color palettes are available to suit different • BlackHot
system configuration and connected devices. conditions or your personal preference.
• RedHot
Image tab • RedHot Inverse

Settings Options • Fusion

[Active feed] • Thermal • FireIce

On cameras with more than 1 payload you can • Visible • FireIce Inverse
select which feed to display in the Video app. [Scene] • Day
[Blending Mode] • Off Scene presets that have been optimized for • Night
On cameras with more than 1 payload you can blend • CTV different running conditions.
• Docking
the two feeds together, displaying an overlap of
• MSX • High contrast
daylight stream on top of thermal image, providing
enhanced detail. [Auto focus] • Activate
• CTV - Colored daylight image blended with the The camera will focus the image.
thermal feed.
[Low light mode] • On
• MSX - Black and white daylight image detects
Visible cameras supporting low light mode can set • Off
and sharpens the edges of objects shown on the
this during low light conditions.
thermal feed. • Auto
[Blending Level] • 0% to 100% [Wide Dynamic Range] • Disable
Set the percentage of the blend between both Improves the viewable range of darkness to • Enable
camera feeds for CTV or MSX blending. lightness of the image.
[Light] • On [Contrast Enhancement] • Disable
For cameras that include a light this setting switches • Off Adjusts the brightness and contrast of the image to • Enable
the camera’s light on and off as well as flashing make dark and bright sections more distinguishable.
• Flash
mode and SOS mode.
[Electronic stabilization] • Disable
• SOS
Stabilizes the image to reduce blurring caused by • Enable
camera shake.

Video app 447

 Settings Options Settings Options
[Digital Zoom] • Disable [On-screen icons] • None
Zooms the camera feed to maximum. • Enable Sets the level for the camera’s built-in onscreen • Minimal
icons
[Roll correction](Requires AR200) • Disable • All
Accounts for boat tilting and will adjust video feed • Enable [Save default settings] • Save
accordingly. Video feed horizon will be parallel with
Save the current camera settings as the default.
the actual horizon.
[Restore default settings] • Run default
Camera setup tab Restore the camera settings to default. restore

Settings Options [Self-tests and calibration] • Pan/tilt test

[Heater] • Disable Offers a series of tests and calibration options for • Reset IR lens
Enables and disables the camera’s built-in heater • Enable your camera.
• Flat Field
used to de-mist the camera lens. Correction
[Zoom Lock] • Disable • Set elevation
Synchronize zoom level between visible and • Enable reference
thermal camera feeds. • Set forward
[Mirrored view] • Disable position
Flips the camera image to provide a mirror image, • Enable [Restore factory settings] • Run factory restore
suitable for rear view installations. Restore camera settings to factory default.
[Camera name] • Displays the
onscreen Photo and Video recording tab
Change your camera name.
keyboard.
Settings Options
[Icon] • List of icons.
[Save files to:] • SD 1
Select the icon to be used for the camera.
Determines the save location for photos and video • External SD 1
[Flip image vertical] • Disable recordings.
• USB Media
Flips the camera image upside down, suitable for • Enable
Ball-down installations. Note:
[UI language] • List of languages. [External SD 1] and [USB Media] are available
Select the language of the user interface. when using the RCR-SDUSB (A80440)
Accessory.

448
ClearCruise™ tab (Augmented Reality) (Requires AR200) ClearCruise™ tab (Object Detection) / (Video Analytics)
Settings Options Settings (ClearCruise™ tab — Object Detection / Options
[Augmented Reality] • Disable Video Analytics)

Enables / disables Augmented Reality and [Highlight detected objects] • Disable

• Enable
Augmented reality settings. Uses proprietary ClearCruise™ technology to • Enable
[AIS labels] • Disable highlight and track objects detected in the water.

Display other vessels as flags (requires AIS). [Beep on detection] • Disable

• Enable
When enabled, the MFD will audibly beep when an • Enable
[Hide static targets] • Disable
object is detected.
Hide AIS targets travelling under 2 knots (requires • Enable
[Display estimated range] • Disable
AIS).
When enabled, the MFD will display an estimated • Enable
[Waypoints] • Disable
range for highlighted objects (objects must be
Display Waypoints as flags. • Enable closer than 300 ft).
[Chart objects] • Disable [Detection threshold] • 1 to 16
Display Chart objects as flags (requires compatible • Enable Enables you to change the object detection
charts). sensitivity.
[Cartography source] • Cartography
source options Camera motion tab
Select the cartography ClearCruise displays data
from (requires compatible charts). Settings Options
[Compass] • Disable [Camera height above the waterline] • 0ft to 99ft
Display the Compass bar. • Enable To ensure correct alignment of the camera for
tracking purposes the height the camera has been
[Range limit] • 1/8nm to 13nm
installed at, above the waterline, must be set.
Set the maximum range flags will automatically be [Set forward position] Displays the forward
displayed from. alignment picture
Adjust the Forward position of your camera
[Man overboard] • Disable
Enables and disables automatic tracking of a MOB • Enable
alarm.
The most recent target is tracked.

Video app 449

 Settings Options Settings Options
[Dangerous AIS targets] • Disable [Scan width] • Narrow
Enables and disables automatic tracking of • Enable Determines how far the camera pans from left to • Medium
Dangerous AIS targets. right when in Surveillance mode.
• Wide
The most recent target is tracked.
[Scan speed] • Slow
[Dangerous MARPA targets] • Disable
Determines the speed at which the camera pans • Medium
Enables and disables automatic tracking of • Enable from left to right when in Surveillance mode.
Dangerous Radar targets. • Fast

The most recent target is tracked. Page settings

[Vertical stabilization] • Disable
Settings Options
Minimizes the effects of vessel pitch (while used in • Enable
[Edit data overlays] • List of data
a forward or reverse facing position) and vessel roll
Add data overlays to video feed. overlays
(while used in a port or starboard facing position).
[Horizontal stabilization] • Disable [Fullscreen mode] • Disable
Minimizes the effects of vessel pitch (while used in • Enable Hides the [Home] and [Menu] buttons when viewing • Enable
a forward or reverse facing position) and vessel roll the live video feed.
(while used in a port or starboard facing position). To show the [Home] or [Menu] buttons, swipe down
*Horizontal stabilization is intended to keep the from the top of the screen or use the power swipe
camera pointed in a fixed heading, even as the / key.
vessel turns.
28.5 Maritime (M-Series) camera compatibility
Note:
Support for the various video features and settings, as per each M-Series
Horizontal stabilization is not a form of target
camera variant.
tracking. It is best used to reduce the effects
of subtle heading changes when running in a For an explanation of the settings listed in the following table, refer to:
fixed direction. Whenever the vessel makes a p.447 — Video app settings
notable course change, the camera will need
to be manually adjusted to align with the new
heading Note:
* Applicable to dual payload M300 variants only
[Enable scan] • Disable
Enables and disables Surveillance mode. • Enable
Surveillance mode pans the camera left to right
continuously to the specified speed

450
 Setting (Image) Compatible cameras Setting (Image) Compatible cameras
[Active feed] • *M300 [Scene] (Thermal feed) • M100 / M200
• Thermal • M400 • Day • *M300
• Visible • M500 • Night • M400
[Blending mode] • *M300 • Docking • M500
• Off • High Contrast
• CTV [Auto focus] (Visible feed) • N/A
• MSX • Activate
[Blending level] • *M300 [Low light mode] (Visible feed) • *M300
• 0% to 100% • Off • M400
[Light] • M400 • On • M500
• Off • M500 • Auto
• On [Wide dynamic range] (Visible feed) • *M300
• Flash • Disable • M400
• SOS • Enable • M500
[Palette] (Thermal feed) • M100 / M200 [Contrast enhancement] (Visible feed) • N/A
• WhiteHot • *M300 • Disable
• BlackHot • M400 • Enable
• RedHot • M500 [Electronic stabilization] (Visible feed) • M400
• RedHot Inverse • Disable • M500
• Fusion • Enable
• Fusion Inverse [Digital Zoom] • M100 / M200
• FireIce • Disable • *M300
• FireIce Inverse • Enable • M400
• M500
[Roll correction] (Requires AR200) • M100 / M200
• Disable • *M300
• Enable

Video app 451

 Setting (Camera setup) Compatible cameras Setting (Camera setup) Compatible cameras
[Heater] • M100 / M200 [On-screen icons] • *M300
• Disable • *M300 • None • M400
• Enable • M400 • Minimal • M500
• M500 • All
[Zoom lock] • *M300 [Save default settings] • *M300
• Disable • M400 • Save • M400
• Enable • M500 • M500
[Mirrored view] • M100 / M200 [Restore default settings] • *M300
• Disable • *M300 • Run default restore • M400
• Enable • M400 • M500
• M500 [Self-tests and calibration] • M100 / M200
[Camera name] • M100 / M200 • *M300
• Onscreen keyboard • *M300 • M400
• M400 • M500
• M500 Pan/tilt test • M400
[Icon] • M100 / M200 • M500
• List of camera icons • *M300 Set elevation reference • *M300
• M400 • M400
• M500 • M500
[Flip image vertical] • M100 / M200 Set forward position • M100 / M200
• Disable • *M300 • *M300
• Enable • M400 • M400
• M500 • M500
[UI language] • *M300 Spotlight test • M400
• List of available languages • M400 • M500
• M500

452
 Setting (Camera setup) Compatible cameras Setting (ClearCruise™) Compatible cameras
[Self-tests and calibration] (Thermal feed) • M100 / M200 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality (Requires • M100 / M200
• *M300
AR200) • *M300
• M400 [Augmented Reality] • M100 / M200
• M500 • Disable • *M300
IR test pattern • N/A • Enable
Reset IR lens • M100 / M200 [AIS targets] • M100 / M200
• M400 • Disable • *M300
• M500 • Enable
Flat field correction • M100 / M200 [Hide static targets] • M100 / M200
• *M300 • Disable • *M300
• M400 • Enable
• M500 [Waypoints] • M100 / M200
[Restore factory settings] • M100 / M200 • Disable • *M300
• Run factory restore • *M300 • Enable
• M400 [Chart objects] • M100 / M200
• M500 • Disable • *M300
• Enable
Setting (Photo & Video recording) Compatible cameras [Cartography source] • M100 / M200
[Save files to] • M100 / M200 • Disable • *M300
• List of connected SD cards • *M300 • Enable
• M400 [Compass] • M100 / M200
• M500 • Disable • *M300
• Enable
[Range limit] • M100 / M200
• Disable • *M300
• Enable

Video app 453

 Setting (ClearCruise™) Compatible cameras Setting (Camera motion) Compatible cameras
ClearCruise™ Object Detection (Video • M100 / M200 [Dangerous AIS target] • M200
Analytics)
• *M300 • Disable • *M300
[Highlight detected objects] • M100 / M200 • Enable • M400
• Disable • *M300 • M500
• Enable [Dangerous MARPA target] • M200
[Beep on detection] • M100 / M200 • Disable • *M300
• Disable • *M300 • Enable • M400
• Enable • M500
[Display estimated range] • M100 / M200 [Vertical stabilization] • *M300
• Disable • *M300 • Disable • M400
• Enable • Enable • M500
[Detection threshold] • M100 / M200 [Horizontal stabilization] • *M300
• 0–12 • *M300 • Disable • M400
• Enable • M500
Setting (Camera motion) Compatible cameras [Enable scan] • M200
[Camera height above waterline] • M100 / M200 • Disable • *M300
• Adjust value • *M300 • Enable • M400
• M400 • M500
• M500 [Scan width] • M200
[Forward position] • M200 • Disable • *M300
• Adjust position and Save • *M300 • Enable • M400
• M400 • M500
• M500 [Scan speed] • M200
[Man overboard] • M200 • Disable • *M300
• Disable • *M300 • Enable • M400
• Enable • M400 • M500
• M500

454
 Setting (Page) Compatible cameras
[Edit data overlays] • M100 / M200
• List of data overlays • *M300
• M400
• M500
[Fullscreen mode] • M100 / M200
• Disable • *M300
• Enable • M400
• M500

Video app 455

CHAPTER 29: CLEARCRUISE
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 29.1 ClearCruise™ features — page 457

• 29.2 Camera setup — page 458
• 29.3 AR200 setup for Augmented Reality — page 461
• 29.4 ClearCruise™ Object Detection (Video Analytics) overview — page 461
• 29.5 Augmented Reality (AR) overview — page 463
• 29.6 Augmented Reality flags — page 463
• 29.7 ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality) — page 466
• 29.8 Roll correction — page 467
• 29.9 AR200 Calibration (Linearization) — page 468

456
29.1 ClearCruise™ features Note:
Weather conditions can cause the target's temperature, luminance,
ClearCruise™ features are designed for enhancing situational awareness contrast or chrominance to be below a detectable range in relation to
and aiding navigation. the background image. Therefore, the effectiveness of the ClearCruise
ClearCruise™ technology provides 2 separate features, which are described Object Detection (Video Analytics) feature for distinguishing targets and
in more detail throughout this chapter: non-targets is dependent on optimal scene conditions. It is recommended:
• Object Detection (Video Analytics) • The visible image is adjusted to contain good color, brightness and
contrast;
• Augmented Reality (AR)
• Accuracy can be improved by excluding irrelevant regions such as sun
Object Detection glare.
[Object Detection] (Video Analytics) is a feature available for M100, M200,
and M300 Series thermal cameras. Intelligent thermal analytics technology Augmented Reality
provides audible and visual alerts when “non-water” objects are identified
in the scene. Vessels, obstacles, and navigation markers can all be The [Augmented Reality] feature places layers of digital information directly
automatically identified by the camera without the need for Chart or Radar over the top of the Video app’s video feed. Data from the Chart app is used
data. to generate informative text and images (flags) on the Video app. When
calibrated correctly, ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality accurately overlays
Compatible cameras for Object Detection automatically-updating flags on the Video app so they overlap real-life
• Thermal Camera (M100, M200, or M300 Series), running the latest objects.
available software version. Required components for Augmented Reality (IP cameras)
• AR200 Augmented Reality Sensor
Note: Visit www.raymarine.com/software to download the latest software
for your camera. • IP camera (CAM300, CAM210IP, or CAM220IP)
Required components for Augmented Reality (M-Series cameras)
• AR200 Augmented Reality Sensor
• M-Series camera (M100, M200 and M300 Series)

Important:
Cameras utilizing ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality are subject to an
unstable image on rough waters.

ClearCruise 457
 Note:
• The camera’s height above the waterline and camera’s view direction
need to be physically measured for accurate camera installation.
• The camera’s horizontal field of view can be found in your camera’s
installation manual specification.

Fixed camera calibration

Fixed mount cameras require calibration for Augmented Reality to function
correctly.
1. For first time setup, either:
i. Select the [Enter Details] prompt in the Video app.
ii. Select the [ClearCruise] tab in the Video app’s Settings, [Video app
> Settings > ClearCruise.] There will be a prompt to [Enter Details]
using the [Camera Installation] page.
2. Go directly to the [Camera Installation] page in the Video app ([Settings >
Camera Setup > Camera Installation]).
3. The [Camera Installation] page will offer a series of camera installation
Note: ClearCruise’s performance is dependent on environmental options which all need to be completed correctly.
conditions and is not a replacement for maintaining a visual watch.

29.2 Camera setup

Before using the Augmented Reality features, it’s important to correctly install
and setup your compatible camera.
Refer to your camera’s installation manual to determine the correct physical
installation and connections for using the camera as part of an Augmented
Reality system.
A number of additional camera-related settings and calibrations must be Note:
completed in the Video app before Augmented Reality features can be used: Incorrect physical camera installation and incorrect settings provided in
• Camera height above the waterline. the camera setup page could result in an inaccurate Augmented Reality
overlay.
• Camera direction.
• Camera horizontal field of view [not required for cameras which auto
• To adjust the values of [Camera height above waterline], [Camera direction]
assign their field of view].
and [Field of view], select the value boxes of each option and adjust using
• Horizon calibration. the arrows.
458
 Menu item Options
[Camera height above waterline] • 0m to 50m
• 0ft to 165ft
[Camera direction] • 0° (Forward) (default)
• 0° to 180°p (Port)
• 0° to 180°s (Starboard)
[Field of view] • 30° to 120°
• [CAM210IP – 53°]
• [CAM220IP – 93°]
• [CAM300 – 90° recommended]

• To Calibrate horizon, use the [up], [down], [rotate left] and [rotate right]
arrow keys until the red line is placed on the horizon. When the line is in
position, select [Save].
Pan and Tilt camera calibration
Important:
Pan and Tilt cameras require calibration for Augmented Reality to function
Calibrating the horizon correctly is essential for accurate Augmented correctly.
Reality overlay. Calibrating on calm water and in clear sight of the horizon 1. For first time setup, either:
is recommended.
i. Select the [Enter Details] prompt in the Video app.
ii. Select the [ClearCruise] tab in the Video app’s Settings: [Video app
> Settings > ClearCruise]. There will be a prompt to [Enter Details]
using the [Camera Installation] page.
2. Go directly to the [Camera Installation] page in the Video app ([Settings >
Camera Setup > Camera Installation]).
3. The [Camera Installation] page will offer a series of camera installation
options which all need to be completed correctly.

ClearCruise 459
 Note:
Incorrect physical camera installation and incorrect settings provided in
the camera setup page could result in an inaccurate Augmented Reality Important:
overlay.
• Calibrating the camera’s forward position is essential
for accurate Augmented Reality overlay when the
• To adjust the values of [Camera height above waterline] select the value camera pans and tilts. Calibrating on calm water
box and adjust using the arrows. and with a clear view of the front of your vessel is
recommended.
Menu item Options
• Certain cameras display a camera direction indicator,
[Camera height above waterline] • 0m to 50m which can help identify when the camera is facing
• 0ft to 165ft directly forward.

• To Calibrate the camera’s [Forward Position], adjust the camera direction

so that the vertical black line is positioned directly forward, parallel to your • To Calibrate the camera’s [Horizon position], use the arrow keys to align
vessel’s forward position. the horizontal red line so that it is level with the horizon.
• Pan and tilt the camera 360° during calibration to ensure that the horizon
line has been positioned correctly.

460
 29.4 ClearCruise™ Object Detection (Video
Analytics) overview
The Object Detection (Video Analytics) features provide audible and
visual alerts when “non-water” objects are identified by connected
M100/M200/M300 Series cameras.
Objects that visually differ from the water will be identified by the camera as
a “non-water” object.
The following features are available with Object detection:
• [Highlight detected objects] — Enables/disables object highlighting, which
automatically identifies and highlights “non-water” objects.
• [Beep on detection] — Enables/disables an audible beep when an object is
detected ([Highlight detected objects] must be enabled)
• [Display estimated range] — Enables/disables display of an object’s
estimated range from your vessel. [Highlight detected objects] must be
enabled, and the object must be closer than approximately 100 m (~300 ft).

Important:
Note:
Calibrating the horizon correctly is essential for accurate Augmented
Reality overlay. Calibrating on calm water and in clear sight of the horizon The minimum range for estimated range is 5 m (16.4 ft), objects within this
is recommended. range will still be highlighted but will not display an estimated range.

29.3 AR200 setup for Augmented Reality

Before using the Augmented Reality features, it’s important to correctly install
and setup the AR200 Augmented Reality sensor.
Refer to the AR200 Installation manual (87372) to determine the correct
physical installation and connections for using the AR200 as part of an
Augmented Reality system.

ClearCruise 461
 Setting Description
• Object detection can be particularly useful at night or
visually limiting environments such as storms or fog. [Highlight detected Enables/disables object highlighting.
objects]
• In the event of an emergency, such as man overboard,
Object detection could be a useful aid that helps to [Beep on detection] Enables/disables an audible beep when an object
identify and predict the distance from the MOB. is detected ([Highlight detected objects] must be
enabled).
Note: [Display estimated Enables/disables display of an object’s estimated
range] range from your vessel ([Highlight detected objects]
ClearCruise’s performance is dependent on conditions must be enabled, and the object must be closer
and is not a replacement for maintaining a visual watch. than approximately 100 m (~300 ft).

ClearCruise settings (Object Detection / Video Important:

Analytics)
ClearCruise Object Detection (Video Analytics) is only compatible with
Object Detection (Video Analytics) features and settings can be enabled and cameras that are positioned upright. ClearCruise Object Detection will not
disabled in the [ClearCruise] tab in the Video app. function with cameras that are upside down and have vertical flip enabled.
[Video app > Settings > ClearCruise]

462
29.5 Augmented Reality (AR) overview Important:
Rear-facing cameras with a flipped or mirrored image may not place
ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality uses data from the display’s Chart app and Augmented Reality content as accurately as a forward-facing camera.
displays this data in realtime as an overlay in the Video app.

29.6 Augmented Reality flags

ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality displays AIS Targets, Waypoints and Chart
Objects as individual Augmented Reality [Flags] in the Video app.
All flags display an icon and your vessel’s distance from the target’s location.

The [Augmented Reality] feature places layers of digital information directly

over the top of the Video app’s video feed. Data from the Chart app is used
to generate informative text and images (flags) on the Video app. When
calibrated correctly, ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality accurately overlays
automatically-updating flags on the Video app so they overlap real-life
objects. 1. Waypoint flag
The Augmented Reality feature requires an Axiom® or , Axiom® 2 display, an 2. Chart Object flag (buoy)
AR200 sensor, and a compatible camera. 3. AIS Target flag (passenger ferry; icon points in the direction of travel
relative to the camera feed)
Note: 4. Dangerous AIS Target flag (passenger ferry; icon points in the direction
• The Augmented Reality feature requires correct camera calibration for of travel, relative to the camera feed)
accurate image overlay.
• The Augmented Reality feature serves as an aid to navigation and Note:
situational awareness only, and should not be solely relied on for precise AIS flags update periodically; however, accurate placement is not
navigation. Always maintain a visual watch. guaranteed.
ClearCruise 463
• AIS Targets, Waypoints and Chart Object flags can be quickly enabled /
disabled via buttons in the Video app.
• The maximum range within which flags are automatically shown can also
be adjusted in the Video app.

Selected flags
Augmented Reality flags in the Video app can be selected (highlighted),
providing access to more information about the object and additional
features.
A flag is an onscreen visual overlay element displayed in the Video app when
the Augmented Reality features are enabled. A flag represents an object
from the Chart application: e.g. AIS target, Waypoint, or other chart object.
When a flag is selected, the corresponding object is also highlighted in the
Chart app. Conversely, selecting an object in the Chart app highlights the
corresponding flag in the Video app.
Only one flag may be selected at a time. Selecting a flag highlights it in red and provides additional information about
the object in a context menu. The menu also provides additional features.
The range of features available in the context menu depends on the type of
object selected:
[AIS Target Flag]
Option Description
[AIS Target name] The name of the target vessel.
[Target data] Vessel (name), CPA, TCPA, COG, SOG.
[View AIS data] Displays the AIS data transmitted by the
target vessel.
1. AIS Flag
2. Selected AIS Flag

464
 Option Description Goto flag
[Buddy (toggle ON/OFF)] Add the vessel to your “Buddy List”, with Selecting [Goto] on a selected Augmented Reality flag will plot a direct
the option to rename it. The Buddy feature course to the flag’s last known location.
enables you to add AIS-equipped friends A [Goto] flag will appear in the last known location of the selected flag in both
and regular contacts to a “Buddy List” on the Video and Chart apps, and in the Video app’s [Compass bar]. The flag is
your MFD. As soon as a vessel on your displayed with a Goto icon, as a blue copy of the original flag.
Buddy List comes within range of your AIS
receiver, the onscreen vessel icon changes Selecting the [Goto] flag makes it a selected flag, and also displays a context
to indicate this. menu providing more information about the location of the flag, and the
option to stop a goto action.
[Goto] The Chart app will plot a direct route to the
last known location of the target.
[Place waypoint] The Chart app will place a waypoint at the
last known location of the target.

[Waypoint Flag]
Option Description
[Waypoint name] The name of the waypoint.
[Target data] Lat, Lon, Rng, Brg.
[Goto] The Chart app will plot a direct route to the last
known location of the target.
[Delete] Delete the waypoint.
[Edit] Edit the waypoint’s Name, Symbol, Group, Position, • Selecting [Stop] removes the Goto flag from the Video app and Chart app.
and add a Comment. • If the camera loses sight of the [Goto] flag, it will display red and green
navigational arrows on the [Compass bar], indicating whether you need
[Chart Object Flag] to turn port or starboard to regain sight of the flag. However, this only
works if the camera is forward-facing.
Option Description
[Chart Object name] The name of the chart object.
[Target data] Lat, Lon, Rng, Brg.
[Goto] The Chart app will plot a direct route to the last
known location of the target.

ClearCruise 465
29.7 ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality)
Augmented Reality settings can be edited in the [ClearCruise] tab in the
Video app.
Setting Description
[AIS labels] Enables/disables the display of other vessels as
Augmented Reality flags (requires AIS).
[Hide static targets] Enables/disables the display of AIS targets travelling
under 2 knots (requires AIS).
[Waypoints] Enables/disables the display of Waypoint
Augmented Reality flags.
[Chart objects] Enables/disables the display of Chart objects
(requires compatible charts).
[Cartography source] Select the cartography source that the ClearCruise™
features will use for the display of chart objects
in the Video app Augmented Reality features.
(Requires compatible charts).
[Compass] Enables/disables the display of the Compass bar in
the Video app.
[Range limit] Sets the maximum range at which the camera will
detect and display Augmented Reality flags. This
range is displayed visually in the Chart app with Note:
the “FOV cone”. Refer to: p.242 — Field of View.
For the maximum range supported by your camera, The variety of chart objects is dependent on the selected cartography
refer to: p.466 — Range limit source. For more information on different cartography sources, refer to:
p.239 — Find nearest

Range limit
The Range Limit is the maximum range at which ClearCruise™ can display AIS
targets, Waypoints and Chart Object flags in the Video app.
The range limit can be checked using the Field of View (FOV) cone in the
Chart app. All AIS targets, Waypoints and Chart Objects within the area of
coverage of the FOV cone can be displayed as Augmented Reality flags in
the Video app. For more information, refer to: Field of View

466
 When enabled, the Roll Correction feature accounts for the boat tilting and
stabilizes the video feed accordingly. This means that the video feed’s
Note: horizon will be parallel with the actual horizon. When disabled, the video feed
Some chart objects just outside of the FOV cone might still display in the will tilt with the boat and the MFD screen.
Video app as flags.

You can specify this range limit manually in the Video app: [Video Settings
> ClearCruise tab]. Any adjustments you make will be reflected in the FOV
cone display in the Chart app.

29.8 Roll correction

Roll Correction automatically adjusts the Video app image when the vessel
tilts (rolls) to port or starboard.

Note:
Roll correction is only available with IP cameras.

Roll Correction can be enabled/disabled in the Video app: [Settings > Image].

ClearCruise 467
 2. Roll correction enabled

29.9 AR200 Calibration (Linearization)

To enable accurate placement of Augmented Reality (AR) flags on the
camera’s video feed, the AR200’s AHRS sensors need to compensate for
local magnetic fields, as well as the Earth’s magnetic fields.
Calibration is achieved using an automatic linearization process. The
linearization process starts automatically after your vessel has turned
approximately 100°, when travelling at a speed of between 3 to 15 knots.
The linearization process requires no user input, however at least a 270°
turn is required before linearization can be completed. The duration of the
linearization process can be decreased by completing a full 360° turn, when
travelling at a speed of between 3 to 15 knots. The linearization process can
also be restarted at anytime.

In the Video app the Linearization progress bar is displayed when

linearization is in progress. The bar is filled to indicate completeness, and will
turn Red if the process is paused or otherwise interrupted.
The time taken to complete the linearization process will vary according to
the characteristics of the vessel, the AR200’s installation location, and the
levels of magnetic interference present at the time linearization is performed.
Magnetic interference can be caused by objects onboard your vessel, such
as:
• Speakers
• Electronic equipment
• Electrical cabling
• Metal bulkhead or hull
Magnetic interference can also be caused by external objects in close
proximately to your vessel, such as:
• Metal hulled vessels
1. Roll correction disabled
• Underwater electrical cables
468
• Marine pontoons Item Description
1 [Current reading:]
Magnetic deviation
The current heading reported by the AR200.
Magnetic deviation is the error induced in a compass caused by interference
from local magnetic fields. 2 [Maximum deviation at last calibration:]
The automatic linearization process results in a deviation value being set for The maximum deviation reported during the last linearization
your AR200. If Augmented Reality flags in the Video app are not aligned with process.
their onscreen objects, or the compass is out of alignment, you should check
the AR200’s current calibration settings. For instructions on how to do this, Important:
refer to the following section: p.469 — AR200 calibration settings
If the [Maximum deviation at last calibration] is 45° or
above, it is recommended that the AR200 unit is moved
AR200 calibration settings and re-installed in a location which is subject to less
The calibration settings page provides access to the AR200’s compass magnetic interference.
calibration options.
The AR200 calibration page can be accessed using your datamaster MFD; [Calibration in progress:]
from the Homescreen select: [Settings > Network > Data sources > Heading
While linearization is in progress the progress percentage is
> AR200 > Calibrate]. displayed.
3 [Compass offset]
Once the linearization process has completed, it is possible
that the heading value may be slightly out of alignment. This is
common where installation space is limited and the AR200 is
not properly aligned with your vessel’s longitudinal axis. In this
case, it is possible to manually adjust the Compass offset.
4 [Compass lock]
When enabled, the Compass lock prevents the continual
monitoring and adaptation of the compass linearization process.
For more information, refer to: p.470 — Compass lock.
5 [Reset calibration]
You can reset your AR200’s current linearization settings by
selecting [Reset calibration]

Continual monitoring and adaptation

To ensure optimum performance, after the initial linearization process is
complete the unit continues to monitor and adapt the compass linearization
to suit current conditions.
ClearCruise 469
If the conditions for linearization are less than ideal, the automatic
linearization process temporarily pauses until conditions improve again. The
following conditions can cause the linearization process to temporarily pause:
• significant magnetic interference is present
• vessel speed too slow or too fast
• rate-of-turn too slow or too fast

Compass lock
Once you are satisfied with the compass accuracy, you can lock the setting
to prevent the system from completing a further automatic linearization in
the future.
This feature is particularly useful for vessels in environments that are exposed
to strong magnetic disturbances on a regular basis (such as offshore wind
farms or very busy rivers, for example). In these situations it may be desirable
to use the Compass lock feature to disable the continuous linearization
process, as the magnetic interference may build a heading error over time.

Note:
The compass lock may be released at any time, to allow the compass
continual monitoring and adaptation to re-commence. This is particularly
useful if planning a long voyage. The earth’s magnetic field will change
significantly from one geographical location to another, and the compass
can continually compensate for the changes, ensuring you maintain
accurate heading data throughout the voyage.

470
CHAPTER 30: YOUTUBE & YOUTUBE TV
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 30.1 YouTube TV — page 472

• 30.2 YouTube — page 472
• 30.3 MFD controls — page 472

YouTube & YouTube TV 471

30.1 YouTube TV 30.2 YouTube
The YouTube TV app allows you to watch live sports, shows and news The YouTube app allows you to browse and watch YouTube content directly
directly on your MFD screen. The YouTube TV app can only be added as a on your MFD screen. The YouTube app can only be added as a Fullscreen
Fullscreen app page. app page.

Note: Note:
• YouTube TV is only available in the United States of America. • YouTube requires an internet connection
• YouTube TV requires an internet connection and an active subscription
to YouTube TV.

Warning: Distraction disclaimer

• The MFD/Chartplotter includes various entertainment apps.
30.3 MFD controls
Whilst navigating do NOT let these apps distract your
The MFD controls are automatically hidden when using the YouTube and
attention from safe navigation.
YouTube TV apps.
• Any distraction while navigating causes a lapse in To access the MFD controls when the YouTube or YouTube TV apps are
concentration which increases the risk of collision. To avoid displayed:
hazards you must give navigation your full attention at all
times.

472
• Slide the Sidebar menu handle (located on the left side of the screen)
to open the Sidebar.
• Pull down on the menu handle (located at the top of the screen) to access
MFD controls:

1. [Home] icon — Select to go back to the Homescreen.

2. [Waypoint/MoB] icon — Select to place a waypoint at the vessel’s
current location. Alternatively, a long touch of the [Waypoint/MoB] icon
onscreen triggers the MoB alarm.
3. [Pilot] icon — Select to open the Pilot sidebar.
4. [Back] icon (only available when viewing a video). — Select to go back
to the YouTube / YouTube TV homepage.

YouTube & YouTube TV 473

CHAPTER 31: AUDIO APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 31.1 Audio app overview — page 475

• 31.2 Opening the Audio app — page 479
• 31.3 Getting started — page 480
• 31.4 Audio app menu options — page 482

474
31.1 Audio app overview Warning: Distraction disclaimer
The Audio app can be used to control compatible entertainment systems that • The MFD/Chartplotter includes various entertainment apps.
are connected to the same network as your MFD. Whilst navigating do NOT let these apps distract your
attention from safe navigation.
The Audio app can be displayed in Fullscreen and half screen portrait app
pages. • Any distraction while navigating causes a lapse in
concentration which increases the risk of collision. To avoid
hazards you must give navigation your full attention at all
times.

Compatible entertainment systems

The table below lists compatible entertainment systems which have been
approved for use with the MFD Audio app. The Audio app can be used to
control up to 3 entertainment systems from the same manufacturer. However,
connecting entertainment systems from Fusion and Rockford Fosgate at the
same time is NOT supported.

SiriusXM receivers
Raymarine part Supported Network
Model number number connection
1. [Mute All] — Mutes all zones on all connected entertainment systems. SR150 E70161 Ethernet / RayNet
2. [Device] — On systems where more than 1 entertainment system are SR200 E70499 Ethernet / RayNet
installed you can select which device the audio app controls.
3. [Zone] — On devices that support multiple zones you can select which
zone the audio app controls.
Rockford Fosgate entertainment systems
4. [Source] — Change the media source for the selected entertainment
system. Raymarine part Supported Network
Model number number connection
5. Audio source details and controls for currently selected source.
RMX-2 E70397 NMEA 2000
6. Volume and player controls for currently selected zone or multi-zone.
RMX8DH E70394 NMEA 2000
7. [Power] — Power on or off connected entertainment systems. RMX8BB E70395 NMEA 2000
RMX5CAN E70396 NMEA 2000

Audio app 475

Fusion entertainment systems Audio app controls
Model number Supported Network connection
Audio player controls
AV750 NMEA 2000
Ethernet Icon Description
AV755 NMEA 2000 [Power Off]
Ethernet Powers off the Entertainment system.
BB100 NMEA 2000
BB300 NMEA 2000
RA70 NMEA 2000
RA70N NMEA 2000 [Mute All]
Mutes all audio zones.
RA205 NMEA 2000
RA670 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
RA770 NMEA 2000
Ethernet [Volume Down]
Decreases volume for current zone.
SRX400 Ethernet
UD750 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
UD755 NMEA 2000
Ethernet [Volume Up]
Increases volume for current zone.

JL Audio
Model number Supported Network connection
MM50 NMEA 2000
[Forwards]
MM100s-BE NMEA 2000 • Skip to the next track (USB and Bluetooth)
MMR-40 NMEA 2000 • Seek/Search Forward (Radio)

Note:
Note: Control is not available from SiriusXM device.
Connecting entertainment systems from Fusion and Rockford Fosgate
at the same time is not supported.
476
 Icon Description Icon Description
[Backwards] [Shuffle]
• Skip back to beginning of current track (USB and • On
Bluetooth)
• Off
• Seek/Search Backward (Radio)

Note: [Play]
Select to commence playback.
Control is not available from SiriusXM device.

[Manual Tune ]
• On — (enables Forwards and Backwards icons
for manual tuning) [Pause]
• Off Select to Pause playback.
[Tune Up ]
Manually searches up for radio stations/channels.

Note: [Stop]
Control is not available from SiriusXM device. Select to Stop (Mute) Radio devices.

[Tune Down]
Manually searches down for radio stations/channels.

Note:
[Like]
Like a track (Pandora only).
Control is not available from SiriusXM device.

[Repeat]
• Off
• Repeat Track
• Repeat All

Audio app 477

 Icon Description Icon Description
[Dislike] [Waypoint / MOB]
Dislike a track (Pandora only). Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB)
alarm.

[Radio presets] [Pilot]

Save your favorite radio stations/channels to 4 Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar
preset buttons. Press and hold to save, press once
to change to saved station/channel.

Note:
Control is not available from SiriusXM device. Audio sidebar
With compatible audio equipment connected the Audio sidebar is available
which enables you to control your audio system from an MFD app.
Standard app controls
Icon Description
[Menu]
Opens the app menu.

[Home]
Takes you to the Homescreen.

The Audio sidebar includes the following controls:

• Audio device selection.
• Zone selection.
• Source selection
478
• Track/Station selection. Entertainment system powered off
• Volume controls. If all Entertainment systems are powered off then a Power icon is displayed
for each connected system. An icon is also displayed to power on All
systems. Selecting the [Power icon] will switch your Entertainment system on.
Selecting the All icon will power on all connected systems.
31.2 Opening the Audio app
The Audio app is opened by selecting an app page from the Homescreen
that includes the Audio app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your Entertainment system(s) are compatible by checking the
latest details available on the Raymarine website. If in doubt please
contact an authorized Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your Entertainment system(s) in accordance
with the documentation that was supplied with the system.
The Audio app will open in 1 of 3 states:

Audio app displayed

If your Entertainment system is powered up and operational then the player
controls are displayed and can be used to control your system.
No audio devices found
If the Audio app is opened soon after powering on your MFD, the ‘No audio
device found’ message may be displayed whilst the network is being
established. If the message is displayed for more than 10 seconds, your
MFD cannot connect to your Entertainment system(s). Ensure network and
power connections to your Entertainment system(s) and MFD are correct and
free from damage and then power cycle your system. If the Entertainment
system(s) are still not displayed then refer to your equipment’s installation
documentation for further troubleshooting information.

Audio app 479

 Muting and unmuting

31.3 Getting started

Selecting an audio zone
If the select entertainment system supports multiple zones you can select 1. Select [Mute All], to mute all audio.
which zone the audio app controls..
1. Select [Zone]. When multiple entertainment systems are connected selecting [Mute all]
will mute all zones on all connected entertainment systems.
The zone pop-over menu is displayed.
2. Select the zone you want to control. 2. To unmute the selected entertainment system, select the Mute icon in the
Tip center of the screen. If your entertainment system supports independent
zone control then only the selected zone will be unmuted.
Refer to the instructions provided with your entertainment system for details
on naming your zones. This aids device and zone identification when multiple Selecting [Unmute all] will unmute all zones for all connected
systems each with multiple zones are connected. entertainment systems.

Selecting an audio source

Before you can select an audio source from your MFD, the source must
already be available to your Entertainment system’s main control unit (“head
unit”).
1. Select an audio source (mode) icon from the app [Menu].
The currently selected zone will switch to the selected audio source.
Depending on your entertainment system all zones will change and play the
same audio source, or you may be able to play a different source on each
zone. Check the instructions provided with your system for details.
480
Browsing for tracks Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not available from an external audio
You can browse USB and Bluetooth devices for tracks. head unit.

Saving presets
Up to 4 presets can be saved for each Radio audio source (i.e.: AM Radio, FM
Radio, Weather, SiriusXM and Pandora).
1. Whilst listening to the station you want to save, press and hold the
relevant Preset button for approximately 3 seconds.

Powering off entertainment systems

Connected entertainment systems can be powered off using the Audio app.
With the Audio app displayed and the entertainment system powered on:
1. Select the [Power] icon located on the bottom left of the screen.
If only 1 entertainment system is connected then the entertainment system
will power off. If more than 1 entertainment system is connected then
pop-over options are displayed allowing you to choose the entertainment
system to turn off, or you can select [Power down all] to power off all
connected systems.
With the relevant USB or Bluetooth device selected as the audio source:
1. Select [Tracks] from the Menu. Tip
The file browser is displayed. Refer to the instructions provided with your entertainment system for details
2. Alternatively, you can select the current track’s details to open the file on naming your device. This aids device identification when multiple systems
browser. are connected.
3. Browse to the file you want to play.

Wait for the file list to finish loading before selecting a track.

4. Select the track you want to play.

Browsing for stations / channels

You can browse available Radio stations/channels.
With the relevant Radio device selected as the audio source:
1. Select [Stations] or [Channels] from the Menu.
The station or channel browser is displayed.
2. Browse to and select the station or channel you want to listen to.
Audio app 481
31.4 Audio app menu options Menu item / Description Options
[Tracks] / [Channels] / [Stations] Folder browser or
The options available in the Audio app menu are dependent on the channel/station list.
connected entertainments systems and audio source. • The Tracks menu option is available for
USB and Bluetooth audio sources. When
Menu item / Description Options selected the folder browser is displayed.
[Power] • On • The Channels menu option is available
Enables you to Power your Entertainment for SiriusXM.
• Off
system on and off
[Device] List of connected devices. Note: Control is not available from
When more than 1 entertainment system is SiriusXM device.
connected you can change which system
the audio app is controlling / displaying
details for. • The Stations menu option is available for
Pandora.
[Zone] List of zones..
When the entertainment system supports [Settings] • Audio setting
multiple zones you can change which zone Displays the Settings menu
• Page settings
the audio app is controlling / displaying
details for.
[Source] • AM Radio Audio app settings menu
Change the audio source for the
• FM Radio
entertainment system. If your entertainment
system supports independent control of • Weather
zones then only the source for the selected
• Sirius XM
zone will change. Only supported audio
source will be displayed. • Pandora
• Auxiliary
• USB
• Bluetooth
• Airplay
• S/PDIF

482
Audio settings tab Menu item Description Options
[Multi-zone volume Allows you to select • Audio zones
Menu item Description Options control:] independent audio zones 1–12
[Balance] Allows you to control the • L = Left that are controlled by
left / right speaker balance speakers up multi-zone volume control.
of your entertainment to 100%
system speakers.
• Left = Right Note:
(Balance
Only available on Fusion
centered)
audio devices with
• R = Right multi-zone control.
speakers up
to 100% [Reset:] Performs a factory reset • Reset
and power cycle of the
[Fade] Allows you to control the • F = Front
SR200.
front / back speaker fade of speakers up
your entertainment system to 100%
speakers. Note:
• Front =
Back (Fade Only available on Sirius
Note: centered) SR200 devices.
Only available on • R = Rear [Diagnostics mode:] Displays the SR200’s • Display
Rockford Fosgate speakers up diagnostic information. diagnostics
entertainment systems. to 100%

[Crossover (Low pass Allows you to select the • 60 Hz Note:

filter):] crossover frequency. The
• 80 Hz Only available on Sirius
Low Pass Filter (LPF) will
SR200 devices.
block all audio frequencies • 120 Hz
above the threshold you
• APF Page settings tab
specify. Selecting APF (All
Pass Filter) will allow all Settings Description
frequencies.
[Data Overlays] Enables configuration of Data overlays
[Crossover (High pass Allows you to select the • 60 Hz
filter):] crossover frequency. The [Edit split ratio] Enables you to customize the position of the
• 80 Hz partitions in splitscreen app pages.
High Pass Filter (HPF) will
block all audio frequencies • 120 Hz
below the threshold you Adjusting balance and fade controls
• APF
specify. Selecting APF (All From the [Audio settings] menu: [Menu > Audio settings]
Pass Filter) will allow all 1. Select the [Balance] setting field or the [Fade] setting field.
frequencies.
The Adjustment slider control is displayed.
Audio app 483
2. Place your finger on the White marker and then slide it left or right to 2. Enable and disable multi-zone volume control by selecting the text as
adjust the setting the required value, alternatively use a [Rotary controller] shown below.
to adjust the setting the required value.

Note:
The fader control will only be displayed for systems that support fading..

Adjusting multi-zone controls

When supported by the entertainment system the audio app can be
configured to control the volume of multiple zones simultaneously. 1. To enable multi-zone control select the text ‘[This zone]’.
From the [Audio settings] menu: [Menu > Audio settings]: 2. To disable multi-zone control select the text ‘[Multi-zone]’.
1. Select the zones you want to include in Multi-zone volume control.
SR200 diagnostics mode
The SR200 diagnostic mode can be accessed from the audio settings menu
from the master MFD on the network. The diagnostics mode should be
referred to when liaising with Sirius product support.

484
1. Reset — Performs a factory reset and power cycle of the SR200.
2. Diagnostics mode — Displays the SR200’s diagnostic information.

Audio app 485

CHAPTER 32: PDF VIEWER APP
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 32.1 PDF Viewer app overview — page 487

• 32.2 Opening PDF files — page 487
• 32.3 PDF Viewer controls — page 488
• 32.4 Searching a PDF — page 488

486
32.1 PDF Viewer app overview Note:
• Recent files cannot be opened if the files are deleted or the external
The PDF Viewer app can be used to browse and open PDF files located storage device is removed.
on your external storage device(s).
• A maximum of 15 of the most recent files can be shown in the pinned and
A typical use for the PDF viewer is to display Raymarine product
unpinned recent files list.
handbooks that you have downloaded from the Raymarine website
(www.raymarine.com/manuals). PDF files must first be copied to a MicroSD
card using an external device (such as a PC or tablet). You can then insert
the MicroSD card into your MFD’s card slot, and access the PDF file(s) via
the PDF Viewer app.

Note:
• Secured PDF documents (encrypted with certificate or password) are
not supported.

Warning: Distraction disclaimer

• The MFD/Chartplotter includes various entertainment apps.
Whilst navigating do NOT let these apps distract your
attention from safe navigation.
• Any distraction while navigating causes a lapse in
concentration which increases the risk of collision. To avoid
hazards you must give navigation your full attention at all
times.

32.2 Opening PDF files

When opened, the PDF Viewer app allows you to browse PDF files available
on your external storage device(s).
Select [Browse] to open a PDF file.
Recently-viewed files are displayed on the right-hand side of the initial app
start screen, for quick access. These files can be opened, pinned to the top
of the list, or removed from the list.
To access these options, long-hold touch on a filename to display the context
menu.
PDF Viewer app 487
32.3 PDF Viewer controls 11. Close PDF — Closes the PDF and displays the initial PDF Viewer app
start screen.
When a PDF file is displayed in the PDF Viewer app, the following options 12. Settings — Displays the Settings menu, which allows you to add data
are available. overlays to the PDF Viewer app.

32.4 Searching a PDF

You can search a PDF document for a word or phrase using the Find function.

1. First page — Select to display the first page of the PDF document.
2. Page back — Select to display the previous page.
3. Pages — Indicates current page and total number of pages. You can also
tap this element and enter a specific page number.
4. Page forward — Select to display the next page.
5. Last page — Select to display the last page of the PDF document.
With the PDF displayed in the viewer:
6. Zoom out — Select to zoom out, in 10% increments.
1. Select [Find].
7. Zoom in — Select to zoom in, in 10% increments. 2. Enter the word or search term.
8. Find — Select to display the onscreen keyboard and enter a search 3. Select [FIND].
word or phrase.
The document will scroll to the first occurrence of the searched term, which
9. Fit page width — Zoom the document display to fit the width of the will be highlighted. Use the [Right arrow] and [Left arrow] controls to cycle to
PDF page. the previous or next occurrence of the search term. You can also search for
10. Fit page height — Zoom the document display to fit the height of the another term by selecting [Find] and entering a new term, or you can cancel
PDF page. the find function by selecting [Cancel].
488
CHAPTER 33: MOBILE APP SUPPORT
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 33.1 Raymarine mobile apps — page 490

• 33.2 Connecting an Android device to the display — page 490
• 33.3 Connecting an iOS device to the display — page 491
• 33.4 Raymarine app — page 491
• 33.5 Fishidy sync — page 495
• 33.6 Navionics plotter sync — page 496
• 33.7 Controlling your display using RayControl — page 496
• 33.8 Controlling your display using RayRemote — page 497
• 33.9 Viewing your MFD screen using RayView — page 497

Mobile app support 489

33.1 Raymarine mobile apps Example Android Wi-Fi connection

Please check the relevant app store for Raymarine mobile apps.

Note: When updating your MFD software ensure that you check for
updates to your mobile apps. Note:
Depending on device type, manufacturer and version of the Android
operating system in use, screens and options may be different than in
33.2 Connecting an Android device to the the example above.
display
1. Enable Wi-Fi by setting the toggle to on (blue) and select your MFD from
Android devices can be connected to the display’s Wi-Fi connection.
the available networks.
Open your Android device’s Wi-Fi settings from the top drop down menu or 2. Enter your MFD’s Wi-Fi passphrase and select [Connect].
via the [Settings] icon.
Make sure the password you enter is case sensitive.

3. Once your Android device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi network, it

will display “Connected” under the MFD’s device name.
For troubleshooting advice, refer to the Wi-Fi troubleshooting information in
the Troubleshooting chapter.

490
33.3 Connecting an iOS device to the display 33.4 Raymarine app
iOS devices can be connected to the display’s Wi-Fi connection. You can use the Raymarine app to purchase and download LightHouse™
Open your iOS device’s Wi-Fi settings from the top drop down menu or via Charts from the Chart Store.
[Settings].
Important: Download packages containing Charts for larger regions (such
as North America, Northern Europe, and Australia/NZ) and also those
including satellite photos, consist of very large files, which can take a long
time (possibly several hours) to download via a mobile device and the
Raymarine app. When purchasing these larger download packages, it is
recommended that you download the Charts from the Chart Store via a
web browser on a laptop or PC. For more information on this procedure,
refer to: p.205 — Downloading Charts from the Chart Store

If you wish to use the Raymarine app to download LightHouse charts, use the
following procedure:
1. Log in to the Raymarine app with an existing Raymarine account, or
create a new account using the app.
2. Purchase LightHouse™ Charts, via the Chart Store accessible from the
app.
3. Define the regions and types of cartographic data you want the chart
to contain.
4. Connect your mobile device’s Wi-Fi to your Raymarine multifunction
Note: display (MFD). For information on connecting your mobile device, refer to:
Depending on device type, and iOS version in use, screens and options • Android — p.490 — Connecting an Android device to the display
may be different than in the example above. • iOS — p.491 — Connecting an iOS device to the display
5. Download the charts to a MicroSD card inserted in your Raymarine
1. Enable Wi-Fi by setting the toggle to on (green) and select your MFD multifunction display (MFD). Alternatively, if you’re using an Axiom® or
from the available networks. Axiom® 2 MFD, you can download the charts to the MFD’s internal
2. Enter your MFD’s Wi-Fi passphrase and select join. memory storage

Make sure the password you enter is case sensitive. How to obtain the Raymarine app
3. When your iOS device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi it will display a The Raymarine app is available for Android and Apple iOS devices, and can
tick next to the MFD’s name. be installed on your mobile device from the relevant app store.
For troubleshooting advice refer to the Wi-Fi troubleshooting information on To obtain the Raymarine app from the relevant app store for your device,
the Troubleshooting chapter p.514 — Troubleshooting point your mobile device’s camera at one of the following QR codes:
Mobile app support 491
 Apple iOS Android LightHouse Chart Store
LightHouse™ charts can be purchased from the LightHouse™ Chart Store,
which can be accessed from a personal computer (PC) or from a mobile
device via the Raymarine app.
You must have a Chart Store account and be logged in to the account before
you can purchase charts in the Chart Store. This account can be created
during the checkout process if required.

Important: Download packages containing Charts for larger regions (such

as North America, Northern Europe, and Australia/NZ) and also those
including satellite photos, consist of very large files, which can take a long
time (possibly several hours) to download via a mobile device and the
Raymarine app. When purchasing these larger download packages, it is
recommended that you download the Charts from the Chart Store via a
web browser on a laptop or PC. For more information on this procedure,
Once you’ve installed the app, you will need to create a Raymarine account refer to: p.205 — Downloading Charts from the Chart Store
to log in to the app.

LightHouse charts The Chart Store can be accessed using the following link:
https://chartstore.raymarine.com/lighthouse-charts
LightHouse™ charts is the brand name for Raymarine’s electronic navigation
charts. LightHouse™ charts can include a Premium subscription, which adds
new and enhanced features on a regular basis.

Note:
Legacy LightHouse™ Vector, Raster and NC2 charts have now been
discontinued and can no longer be downloaded or updated.

New LightHouse™ charts come with a free 1 year subscription to LightHouse™

Premium. The Premium subscription unlocks data-rich points of interest (POI),
high-resolution satellite aerial overlays and regular chart updates. After the
free subscription period ends, the Premium features can be continued for an
annual fee.
LightHouse™ charts can be purchased directly from the LightHouse™ Chart
Store. Alternatively, they can be purchased from Raymarine dealers, as either
a pre-loaded chart card or a blank chart card that includes a voucher that can
be redeemed from the Chart Store.
To find out more about available regions and the latest features, visit the
LightHouse™ Chart Store: https://chartstore.raymarine.com/lighthouse-charts
492
 • If using mobile data, ensure you have sufficient data allowance remaining
to prevent being charged.
• Ensure you have sufficient free space on your mobile device’s internal
storage for the charts to be downloaded to.
• Ensure that the memory card you want to use is formatted in the exFAT file
system format (Chart cards purchased from the Raymarine chart store will
arrive in this format).
• Ensure that the memory card has been inserted into the display’s card
reader prior to commencing the process (this will create the necessary
Lighthouse_ID file in the card’s root directory.
• A file named ‘Lighthouse_charts’ must be created in the memory card’s
root directory (Chart cards purchased from the Raymarine chart store will
already include this file).
• It is recommended that there are no other files on the memory card prior
to downloading charts to it.
• Ensure [Allow devices to connect] is enabled in your display settings:
– Element™ displays: [Homescreen > Settings > Wi-Fi].
– Axiom® displays: [Homescreen > Settings > This display > Wi-Fi
SHARING].
Downloading charts using the Raymarine app
• Connect your mobile device’s Wi-Fi to your MFD. For information on
Purchased LightHouse™ charts can be downloaded to the MFD via a mobile connecting your mobile device, refer to:
device, using the Raymarine app and Wi-Fi to transfer the charts to a MicroSD
– Android — p.490 — Connecting an Android device to the display
(µSD) memory card inserted into your MFD, or to the internal storage of an
Axiom® or Axiom® 2 MFD. – iOS — p.491 — Connecting an iOS device to the display

Important: Download packages containing Charts for larger regions (such Note:
as North America, Northern Europe, and Australia/NZ) and also those
• Once a storage location (memory card or internal memory) has been
including satellite photos, consist of very large files, which can take a long
chosen for your charts you cannot change it. Charts cannot subsequently
time (possibly several hours) to download via a mobile device and the
be saved to a different card.
Raymarine app. When purchasing these larger download packages, it is
recommended that you download the Charts from the Chart Store via a • Charts cannot be downloaded to the internal storage of Element™
web browser on a laptop or PC. For more information on this procedure, displays.
refer to: p.205 — Downloading Charts from the Chart Store

When downloading charts via a mobile device and the Raymarine app, the
following pre-requisites should be observed:
Mobile app support 493
 Apple iOS Android

1. Install and open the Raymarine app from the relevant app store, using the
relevant QR code provided below.
2. Create an account or Log in to the Raymarine app.
3. If requested select [ALLOW ONLY WHILE USING THE APP].
4. Go to the [MY CHARTS] area.
5. Select the chart region you want to download. Once you’ve installed the app, you will need to create a Raymarine account
to log in to the app.
6. If you have more than one region on the same continent in MY CHARTS,
to minimize download file size, you can group up to 3 regions together.
7. If updates are available click [Get latest data]. Account settings
8. If you have a valid Premium subscription you can add [Streets & Points You can edit your Raymarine account details using the [Account] menu.
of Interest] and [Aerial photos] by clicking [Add now], next to the items You can edit the account’s:
you want to include.
• Name
When adding [Streets & Points of Interest] and [Aerial photos] you can • Email address
create up to 5 area boxes for each feature per purchased region. Follow
the onscreen instructions to define each area of coverage. • Password
• Region
9. Select [Download] and then follow the onscreen instructions to download
your charts to your MFD. • News and offers notification settings

How to obtain the Raymarine app

The Raymarine app is available for Android and Apple iOS devices, and can
be installed on your mobile device from the relevant app store.
To obtain the Raymarine app from the relevant app store for your device,
point your mobile device’s camera at one of the following QR codes:

494
33.5 Fishidy sync Enable sync
After connecting your mobile device to your MFD’s Wi-Fi, you can begin
You can synchronize Fishidy Spots and Waypoints between the Fishidy app syncing waypoints and Fishidy spots with the Fishidy app.
and your MFD’s Chart app.
1. From the Fishidy app select [More].
2. Select [Raymarine Sync].
Note:
3. Select [ Enable Sync] to begin synchronization between your Fishidy app
Fishidy sync requires: and MFD.
• Fishidy software version 6.1.0 or later.
• LightHouse version 3.11 or later.
• LightHouse version 4.0 or later.

Note:
Fishidy is currently available in:
• North America
Additional regions will become available in future Fishidy updates. 4. When prompted by your MFD, select [Yes] to confirm sync.

If you select [No], sync will be cancelled and will need to be restarted.

Once enabled, data will automatically sync in real-time across both devices
via Wi-Fi.

Mobile app support 495

 Note: 33.6 Navionics plotter sync
• Fishidy Spots and Waypoints will be shared and can be interacted with You can use the Navionics boating mobile app to:
from both devices.
• transfer waypoints and routes between your MFD and mobile device.
• Your private waypoints remain private, whether viewing on Fishidy or • update, activate and renew your Navionics cartography
your Raymarine MFD system.
• If you edit a Fishidy Spot or Waypoint on either device when sync is
disabled (e.g. editing the name), re-enabling sync might place the item in
the Fishidy [Recycle Bin]. In this scenario, the data can be restored from 33.7 Controlling your display using
the recycling bin in the Fishidy app. RayControl
• Attempting to sync a new Fishidy account to your MFD while it is already The RayControl app allows you to remotely view and control your display
synced with another account will prompt you to end sync with the first from your mobile device.
account. Ending sync with the first account and syncing the second
account replaces any existing Fishidy Spots and Waypoints. 1. Download and install RayControl from your app store.
2. Ensure your mobile device is connected to your display’s Wi-Fi.
3. Open the RayControl app.
Disable sync 4. Control your display using your mobile device’s touchscreen in the same
You can disable Fishidy sync from the Fishidy app or your MFD. way you would interact with the display’s touchscreen.
1. [Fishidy app] 5. You can also use a representation of a display’s physical buttons by
i. Access the [Raymarine Sync] menu and select [Disable Sync]. sliding the controls sidebar out from the right of the screen or on smaller
ii. [More > Raymarine Sync > Disable Sync] devices selecting [Remote Control].
2. [MFD]
i. Access the[ My Data] page, select [Mobile sync] and select [Disable
sync].
ii. [Homescreen > My Data > Mobile sync > Disable sync]

496
33.8 Controlling your display using 33.9 Viewing your MFD screen using RayView
RayRemote The RayView app allows you to remotely view your MFD from your mobile
device.
The RayRemote app allows you to remotely control your display from your
mobile device.

1. Download and install RayView from your app store.

2. Ensure your mobile device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi.
3. Open the RayView app.
4. Your mobile device’s screen will now mirror your MFD’s screen.

1. Download and install RayRemote from your app store.

2. Ensure your mobile device is connected to your display’s Wi-Fi.
3. Open the RayRemote app.
4. Control your display on your mobile device using the on-screen
equivalents of the physical buttons.

Mobile app support 497

CHAPTER 34: PARTNER INTEGRATION AND THIRD-PARTY APPS
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 34.1 Partner integration — page 499

• 34.2 LightHouse third-party apps — page 499
• 34.3 App launcher — page 499
• 34.4 Interface shortcuts on the homescreen — page 501
• 34.5 Bluetooth speaker set up — page 501

498
34.1 Partner integration A list of current approved APKs can be found on the Raymarine website:
Details of current integration partners is available on the Raymarine website:
Raymarine allows third-party hardware suppliers to integrate their hardware http://www.raymarine.com/multifunction-displays/lighthouse3/lighthouse-
with Raymarine Axiom® and Axiom® 2 displays. apps/
Integration allows Interface shortcuts to be available on the display which
provide access to HTML-based user interfaces for integration partner’s Note:
hardware. • APKs from other sources such as the Google Play store that have not
The hardware must be connected to the display using an ethernet connection. been signed by Raymarine cannot be installed on Raymarine displays.
Interface shortcuts can be accessed from the App launcher and can also be • Raymarine does not warrant or provide support for third-party apps or
included in app pages on the homescreen. any related third-party hardware. Please refer to the relevant third party
Details of current integration partners is available on the Raymarine website: app developer for assistance and troubleshooting.
http://www.raymarine.com/multifunction-displays/lighthouse3/lighthouse-
apps/ For a list of compatible app versions for Axiom® and Axiom® 2 displays refer
Raymarine also partners with third-party hardware suppliers that use Android to: p.553 — Android apk compatibility
APK apps to control their hardware. These APKs are approved and installed
the same way as LightHouse third-party apps.

Note: 34.3 App launcher

• For partners who integrated after the release of LightHouse™ 3 version The app launcher provides access to LightHouse™ third-party apps and
3.16, the interface shortcuts are only displayed when the display detects Interface shortcuts for third-party partner hardware.
partner hardware. Select the [Apps] icon located at the bottom of the Homescreen to open
• For partners who integrated after the release of LightHouse™ 4, the the App launcher.
interface shortcuts are only displayed when the display detects partner
hardware.
• Raymarine does not warrant or provide support for third-party user
interfaces or related third-party hardware. Please refer to the relevant
partner for assistance and troubleshooting.

34.2 LightHouse third-party apps

LightHouse™ third-party apps are Android APK apps, developed by third
parties and approved for use on Raymarine displays running the LightHouse™
3 or LightHouse™ 4 operating system.
Android APK apps must be digitally signed by Raymarine. Signed APKs
can then be bundled with LightHouse™ operating system updates and / or
downloaded from the Raymarine website and installed on the displays.
APK apps can be accessed from the App launcher.
Partner Integration and third-party apps 499
Selecting an icon will launch the app. 3. From the [App Launcher] page, select[ Install from SD / USB].
Some apps require an internet connection. You can connect your MFD to 4. Browse to and select the apk file to install the app.
the internet by selecting the Wi-Fi connection icon located on the top right of 5. The app will be located on the [App Launcher] page.
the screen. Refer to: p.83 — Internet connection You can uninstall Lighthouse third-party apps from your MFD by long
APK apps downloaded from the Raymarine website can pressing them and selecting [uninstall].
be installed by selecting [Install from SD / USB]. Refer to:
p.500 — Installing Lighthouse third-party apps
Removing an apk app
To listen to audio, a Bluetooth speaker must be connected to the MFD. Refer
to: p.501 — Bluetooth speaker set up Android apk apps can be removed (uninstalled) from your MFD by follow
the steps below.
Apps may run in the background, enabling you to use your MFD as usual
whilst, for instance, listening to music.
MFD alarms will be displayed and sounded as normal whilst using apps or
partner interfaces. When paired with a Bluetooth speaker, alarms will also be
sounded through the speaker.
Bluetooth speaker volume can be controlled from the Shortcuts page or from
the Status bar area on the Homescreen.

Note:
If you use a wireless connection to a Quantum Radar, the Radar should be
put in Standby before connecting your MFD to the internet.

Warning: Distraction disclaimer

• The MFD/Chartplotter includes various entertainment apps.
Whilst navigating do NOT let these apps distract your
attention from safe navigation.
From the homescreen:
• Any distraction while navigating causes a lapse in
1. Select [Apps] to open the App launcher.
concentration which increases the risk of collision. To avoid
hazards you must give navigation your full attention at all 2. Press and hold on the android apk app to open the pop-over menu.
times. Partner hardware interface shortcuts cannot be removed this way.

3. Select [Uninstall application].

Installing Lighthouse third-party apps
4. Select [Yes] on the notification.
Additional Lighthouse third-party apps can be installed on your MFD via an
SD card or USB. The app will be removed from the MFD.
To install Lighthouse third-party apps:
Note:
1. Copy the downloaded apk to your MicroSD card or USB device.
2. Insert SD card or USB device into your MFD or external card reader. Apps that do not have the [Uninstall application] option cannot be removed.
500
34.4 Interface shortcuts on the homescreen 34.5 Bluetooth speaker set up
When the MFD detects integration partner hardware, Interface shortcuts Enabling and disabling Bluetooth
can be added to the homescreen.

Example

1. Select the Status bar area located in the top right of the screen.
2. Select [Bluetooth Settings].
3. Select the Toggle switch on the right of the Bluetooth settings page to
enable Bluetooth.
Alternatively the Bluetooth settings page can be accessed from the This
display settings tab: [Homescreen > Settings > This display > Bluetooth
> Bluetooth settings].

Bluetooth Settings

The Interface shortcuts can be added as either Fullscreen app pages or as

part of portrait splitscreen app pages.
The method for creating the app page is the same as for creating an MFD
app page. Refer to: p.94 — Creating an app page
If the associated hardware is removed or not detected, the app page icons
will remain on the homescreen but you will not be able to access the
hardware’s user interface.

1. Bluetooth options — Provides the following options:

Partner Integration and third-party apps 501
 • Refresh — Selecting refreshes the list of available devices. From the Homescreen select the Status area and then select the Speaker
• Rename this device — Allows you to rename the Bluetooth name your symbol to display the Bluetooth volume control for LightHouse™ app and
MFD uses. MFD alarms.

• Show file received — Not used as your MFD cannot receive files over Shortcuts page
Bluetooth.
2. Paired devices — List of devices paired with your ~MFD.
3. Enable/Disable Bluetooth.
4. Paired device settings — Allows you to rename the paired device or
forget the device.
5. Available devices — List of available Bluetooth devices.
6. MFD Bluetooth name.
7. Back button.
8. Home button.

Pairing a Bluetooth speaker

Before attempting to pair with a Bluetooth speaker, ensure that the speaker Press or swipe the [Power] button to display the Shortcuts page and then
is switched on and discoverable. select the speaker symbol to display the Bluetooth volume control for
With your MFD’s Bluetooth function enabled: LightHouse™ apps and MFD alarms.
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, select the relevant device from the
[Available devices] list.
2. If requested, confirm the Bluetooth pairing code.
If pairing is successful, the speaker will appear in the [Paired devices] list and
display the [Connected] message.

Bluetooth volume control

When your MFD is connected to a Bluetooth speaker, controls will be
available to adjust speaker volume.
Homescreen

502
CHAPTER 35: YACHTSENSE ECOSYSTEM
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 35.1 YachtSense ecosystem — page 504

• 35.2 How to obtain the Raymarine app — page 506
• 35.3 Deleting a boat system — page 510
• 35.4 Unlinking (Removing) a router — page 511
• 35.5 YachtSense Link router account transfer / ownership transfer — page 513

YachtSense ecosystem 503

35.1 YachtSense ecosystem • Axiom or Axiom 2display.

YachtSense is Raymarine’s digital vessel monitoring and control solution.

Note:
The YachtSense ecosystem enables on and off-boat monitoring and control
of connected vessel systems and data. • The YachtSense Link router must be connected to the same SeaTalk NG
On-boat monitoring and control can be achieved using Raymarine Axiom and backbone as the YachtSense Digital Control System, and any displays.
Axiom 2 displays or the Raymarine app installed on a mobile phone or tablet. • The router must also have a RayNet connection to the YachtSense
Off-boat (remote) monitoring and control can be achieved using the Digital Control System’s master module, and any displays.
Raymarine app running on a compatible mobile phone or tablet. Off-boat
monitoring and control also requires
• Premium subscription to the Raymarine app. On-boat features
• Your system to have an active internet connection. The YachtSense ecosystem provides a number of “on-boat” software
features that can be used whilst onboard your vessel.

Raymarine app connected directly to an MFD

The following features are available when using the Raymarine app on a
mobile device that is connected directly to a Raymarine display’s Wi-Fi
Access Point:
• Stream and control the display.
• Download and transfer LightHouse charts to a memory card, or the
display’s internal storage.
The full YachtSense ecosystem consists of: • Transfer files such as backups of waypoints and settings, images or videos,
• YachtSense Link router between your mobile device and the display.
• YachtSense Digital Control System, running Release 2 software (or later) • View NMEA 2000 data.
• Raymarine app.
• Premium app subscription (required for off-boat connectivity).
504
Raymarine app connected to YachtSense Link router Raymarine app connected to YachtSense Link router with YachtSense
Digital Control System

The following features are available when using the Raymarine app on a
mobile device that is connected to the YachtSense Link router’s Wi-Fi Access
Point:
• Stream and control any display on the network.
• Download and transfer LightHouse charts to a memory card or the display’s
internal storage.
• Transfer files such as backups of waypoints and settings, images or videos,
between your mobile device and the display.
The following features are available when using the Raymarine app on a
• View NMEA 2000 data. mobile device that is connected to the YachtSense Link router’s Wi-Fi Access
• Voltage monitoring of devices connected to the router’s input channels. Point on systems that include a YachtSense Digital Control System:
The router’s web interface can also be used to monitor input channels. • Stream and control any display on the network.
• Control of devices connected to the router’s output channels. The router’s • Download and transfer LightHouse charts to a memory card or to the
web interface can also be used to control output channels. display’s internal storage.
• Transfer files such as waypoint and settings backups, images or videos,
between your mobile device and the display.
• View NMEA 2000 data. (The range of data that can be viewed is
dependent on the specific configuration and design of your YachtSense
ecosystem and the associated Raymarine app.)
• Voltage monitoring of devices connected to the router’s input channels.
The router’s web interface can also be used to monitor input channels.
• Control of devices connected to the router’s output channels. The router’s
web interface can also be used to control output channels.
• Monitoring and control of vessel systems and devices connected to the
YachtSense Digital Control System input and output channels (input and
output channels can also be monitored and controlled using a Raymarine
display, or directly from the master or remote module).
YachtSense ecosystem 505
 Note: • Monitor your vessel’s location using the app’s geofence features.
The YachtSense Digital Control System requires a specific configuration • View NMEA 2000 data. (The range of data that can be viewed is
and app page design for the Raymarine app. Refer to an authorized dependent on the specific configuration and design of your YachtSense
Raymarine dealer for more information. ecosystem and the associated Raymarine app.)
• Voltage monitoring of devices connected to the router’s input channels.
• Control of devices connected to the router’s output channels.
Off-boat premium features
• Monitoring and control of vessel systems and devices connected to the
The YachtSense ecosystem provides a number of premium “off-boat” YachtSense Digital Control System input and output channels.
software features, which can be used whilst away from your vessel.
Note:
Note:
If the router is in [Low power mode] only a Cellular connection can be used
• Off-boat features require a YachtSense Link router and a valid premium to wake the router remotely.
subscription to the Raymarine app.
• Off-boat features require the YachtSense Link router to have an active
internet connection. 35.2 How to obtain the Raymarine app
• YachtSense Digital Control System requires a specific configuration and The Raymarine app is available for Android and Apple iOS devices, and can
app page design for the Raymarine app. Software Release 2 (or later) be installed on your mobile device from the relevant app store.
is required.
To obtain the Raymarine app from the relevant app store for your device,
point your mobile device’s camera at one of the following QR codes:
Apple iOS Android

Once you’ve installed the app, you will need to create a Raymarine account
Whilst off-boat you can: to log in to the app.
506
How to connect guide Transferring LightHouse charts
If the app is not currently connected to a boat system, the [How to connect] The Raymarine app can be used to redeem LightHouse chart vouchers and
option is available in the app to guide you through setting up a boat system to download and transfer the charts directly to your chartplotter (MFD).
and connecting to your chartplotter (MFD) or YachtSense Link router.
Note:
Connect to a chartplotter (MFD) directly To download LightHouse charts to a memory card you must first purchase
a pre-formatted LightHouse charts MicroSD card (R70795 or R70838), and
You must be connected directly to the chartplotter’s (MFD’s) Wi-Fi connection. insert it into your MFD before starting the transfer process.
If your chartplotter (MFD) does not have an internet connection, you must log
in to the Raymarine app first before switching network. 1. Select the [Management] icon located at the bottom of the screen.
If your chartplotter (MFD) does not have a connection to the internet, when 2. Select [Charts].
you connect to it, your mobile device may automatically revert to its previous If you have already purchased charts, they will be listed in the [My charts]
network. If you try to connect again a notification is displayed. Select menu. Otherwise, the [Chart catalog] is displayed where you can search
[Connect] or [Connect anyway]. for charts and redeem voucher codes.
When you are connected to a chartplotter (MFD), you can: 3. Select the chart that you want to download, using the [My charts] menu.
• Start display mirroring 4. Follow the onscreen instructions to download your charts.

• View data During the download process, you will be able to group chart regions,
Add [Streets & POI] and [Aerial photo] areas, and select a storage location.
• Transfer files
• Transfer LightHouse charts Note:

When connecting directly to a chartplotter (MFD) it must be configured to Chart downloads have large files sizes and may take some time to
allow Wi-Fi sharing: [Homescreen > Settings > This display > Wi-Fi Sharing]. download and transfer.

Display mirroring (view and control) Chartplotter file transfer

You can view and control your chartplotter (MFD) from the Raymarine app. File transfer between chartplotter (MFD) and your mobile device is available
using the [Chartplotter file transfer] option in the [Management] tab.
Chartplotters (MFDs) will be available under [Display mirroring] in the [Control]
tab when connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your mobile device. Select If this is the first time that the file transfer has been attempted, you will need
a chartplotter (MFD) to initiate display mirroring. to confirm access from the chartplotter (MFD).
You can select a chartplotter (MFD) and then browse internal and external
Display mirroring is always available when you are connected to the Router’s storage for either a file to upload to your mobile device, or a location to
Wi-Fi connection or to an MFD’s Wi-Fi connection. upload a file from your mobile device.
Selecting a file from your chartplotter (MFD) provides the following related
options:
• View the file
• Copy the file.
• Share the file.
YachtSense ecosystem 507
You can also upload a file from your mobile device to your chartplotter (MFD) Geofencing
by selecting [Upload a file here].
A Geofence is a security feature that alerts you if your boat leaves or enters a
Note: chosen area.

You cannot use the Raymarine app to delete files that are stored on your When a geofence alert is triggered a notification will be sent to the cellular
chartplotter (MFD). telephone number specified in the Boat alerts settings.
Geofencing is available with a premium Raymarine app subscription.

Connect to your YachtSense Link router Geofence

After setting up your YachtSense Link router and configuring its wireless When your boat system includes a YachtSense Link router you can set up
networks (Wi-Fi and / or cellular (mobile) connections) you can use the geofences.
Raymarine app to create a boat system and link your router to your Raymarine 1. Select [+ Add new geofence] from the Geofence tab.
account. Linking allows off boat monitoring and control of compatible
2. Select [Radius].
systems connected to your router.
A geofence circle is placed over your vessel.
Note:
• You cannot link a router that is already linked to a different account. 3. Increase or decrease the geofence radius by selecting the circle and
dragging towards or away from you vessel’s location.
• If your mobile device is already connected to a boat system it must be
disconnected before another boat system can be added. Alternatively you can use the [+] (plus) and [–] (minus) buttons to fine tune
• The premium subscription features can only be used on 2 boat systems the circle radius.
at a time.
4. Select the Name field to customize the geofence name.
5. Enable the [Boat leaves location] and / or [Boat enters location] toggle
The linking process includes: switches as appropriate for your needs.
1. Connecting your mobile device to your YachtSense Link router’s Wi-Fi 6. If desired, change the color of the geofence by selecting the colored
connection. circle in the Color area.
2. Creating a boat system by entering your boat’s name. 7. Select [Create] from the top of the screen.
3. Scanning the router’s QR code to connect the router to your account. Multiple geofences can be created. The geofence circle radius can be
The QR code can be found on the label on the side of your router or on adjusted or can be disarmed by selecting the relevant geofence details
the Info page of the router’s web interface. located at the bottom of the screen.
When connected to the router you can:
Temporary mooring
• Create geofences
You can also create temporary mooring geofences for short stay stops.
• View data
• Control digital switching input and output channels Temporary mooring geofences are only triggered when your vessel exits a
geofence circle, and are automatically deleted when it is disarmed.
• Start display mirroring
You can only have one temporary mooring geofence active at any one
• Transfer files time. Creating a second temporary mooring geofence will replace the first
• Transfer LightHouse charts geofence.
508
Data view and channel control To delete a data item, press and hold and then drag it to the trash bin icon
at the bottom of the screen.
Depending on your system’s configuration, you can use the app to view live
data and control certain channels. You can add or change data items at any time by selecting the [Edit] icon,
located at the top of the data page.
• A data page can be created in the Raymarine app to view compatible data
which is available on your network.
User access management
Note: When connected directly to a chartplotter (MFD) the data items You can log out / in to your account, edit your user account details or update
available will be limited. Connecting to a YachtSense ™ Link router will your premium plan subscription by selecting the profile icon on the right
provide the maximum available data items. side of the side menu.

Guest mode
• When connected to a boat system that includes a YachtSense Link router
you can view the status of the input channels and switch the output The Raymarine app may be used to connect to a different YachtSense
channels on and off from the [Control] tab. If the channel has been disabled system/Raymarine account in guest mode. (e.g.: If you are on a friend’s
in the router’s web interface, it will not be shown in the app. boat or borrowing / chartering a boat that includes a Raymarine® display
or YachtSense Link router).
• When your boat system includes both a YachtSense Link router and a
Yachtsense Digital Control System, the status and control of the input and You must be connected to the Router’s Wi-Fi access point or a display’s
output channels is available from the [Control] tab. Wi-Fi access point and using the Raymarine app logged in to an account that
is not linked to that system.
• When you have an active premium Raymarine app subscription and your
boat system includes both a YachtSense Link router and a Yachtsense Guest mode allows you to use the screen mirroring feature to view and
Digital Control System, the status and control of the input and output control Raymarine® displays that are connected to that system.
channels can be accessed remotely when you are away from your boat.
Note:
Note: In guest mode no off boat features are available and you will not be able
In order for Yachtsense Digital Control System controls to be available on to onboard a router, use geofences, view or control Yachtsense Link and
the Raymarine app, your Yachtsense Digital Control System configuration YachtSense Digital Control System input and output channels, upload files
must include the necessary app page layouts. If required, please contact or transfer LightHouse charts.
your Yachtsense Digital Control System installer, who will need to create
an updated configuration for your system.
Boat alerts
Viewing NMEA 2000 (SeaTalkng) data Alerts raised by your system can be viewed in the app by selecting [Boat
alerts] from the side menu.
To create a data page for NMEA 2000 / SeaTalkng data, follow the steps
below. You can also enter a cellular telephone number to automatically receive boat
1. Select [Add data] from the Data tab. alerts on your mobile device remotely.
2. Select a data category and then select the relevant data item. The cellular telephone number can be entered by selecting the settings icon
3. To add more data items, select the [+] (plus) icon and repeat steps 2 and 3. from the boat alerts menu.
4. When finished, select [Done].
YachtSense ecosystem 509
Boat systems
You can create / connect up to 10 boat systems to the Raymarine app. With
an active premium Raymarine app subscription up to 2 boat systems can be
configured to receive premium features.

35.3 Deleting a boat system

A boat system can be deleted from the Raymarine app following the steps
below:
1. Select the menu icon located on the left of the screen to open the side
menu.
2. Select and hold on the boat system of the boat you want to remove.

If you have more than one boat set up, you will first need to select the
relevant boat system from the dropdown list.

3. Select [Delete] and then confirm the deletion.

4. Select [Delete] again to confirm.

510
5. Select [OK]. 6. You must also unsync the MFD from the Raymarine app by accessing the
[My data] menu on your MFD and selecting [Mobile sync] and [Cancel
Raymarine sync].
The boat system and all of its devices are now deleted from your app. If
the deleted boat system included a YachtSense link router then the router
will also be unlinked from your account and can now be linked (onboarded)
again to the same account, or to a different account.

35.4 Unlinking (Removing) a router

You can remove a YachtSense Link router from a boat system in the
Raymarine app by following the steps below.
1. Select the menu icon located on the left of the screen to open the side
menu.

YachtSense ecosystem 511

2. If you have more than one boat system, select the relevant boat system
that the router is connected to.
3. Select the [YachtSense Link] router.
4. Select [Remove].

5. Confirm by selecting [Remove].

512
 If you cannot contact the previous owner, Raymarine technical support may
be able to contact them on your behalf.
In most cases if the previous owner cannot be reached or is unwilling to
remove the router from their account, it will NOT be possible for you to link
your router.
If you purchased the router new, via either a third party reseller or as a
refurbished unit, and you receive a message that your router is already
assigned to an account, you should return it to the seller for a refund or
exchange and let them know that it is already linked to another account.

6. You must also unsync the MFD from the Raymarine app by accessing the
[My data] menu on your MFD and selecting [Mobile sync] and [Cancel
Raymarine app sync].
The router is now removed from the boat system and unlinked from your
account. The router can now be linked again to the same account, or to a
different account.

35.5 YachtSense Link router account transfer

/ ownership transfer
YachtSense Link routers can only be linked to one account at a time.
To link the router to a different account it must first be removed from the
existing account. For instructions refer to: p.511 — Removing a router
Attempts to link to a router that is already linked to an account will fail.
If you receive a message when trying to link to your router that states it is
already assigned to another account, you will need to contact the previous
owner and ask them to remove the router from their account.

YachtSense ecosystem 513

CHAPTER 36: TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 36.1 Troubleshooting — page 515

• 36.2 Diagnostic product information — page 515
• 36.3 RNS-8 Diagnostic information — page 516
• 36.4 NMEA 0183 diagnostics — page 517
• 36.5 NMEA 2000 diagnostics — page 518
• 36.6 Power up troubleshooting — page 519
• 36.7 Radar troubleshooting — page 521
• 36.8 GNSS (GPS) troubleshooting — page 522
• 36.9 Sonar troubleshooting — page 523
• 36.10 Camera troubleshooting — page 527
• 36.11 Augmented Reality (AR) Troubleshooting — page 529
• 36.12 Wi-Fi troubleshooting — page 530
• 36.13 IP address conflict troubleshooting — page 532
• 36.14 Wireless display troubleshooting — page 533
• 36.15 Data troubleshooting — page 533
• 36.16 Touchscreen troubleshooting — page 534

514
36.1 Troubleshooting 2. Select the storage device you want to save the data to.
3. Enter a filename.
The troubleshooting section provides possible causes and the corrective 4. Select [Save].
action required for common problems that are associated with the installation
and operation of your product. 5. Select [OK].
Before packing and shipping, all Raymarine® products are subjected to A .json file will be saved, using your chosen filename to your memory card.
comprehensive testing and quality assurance programs. If you do experience You may view the file using a most standard notepad applications.
problems with your product, this section will help you to diagnose and correct
problems to restore normal operation.
Saving crash and system logs
If after referring to this section you are still having problems with your
product, please refer to the Technical support section of this manual for System logs and crash logs can be saved to memory card so that if requested
useful links and Raymarine® Product Support contact details. by Technical support during troubleshooting they can be sent to Raymarine.

36.2 Diagnostic product information

Diagnostic product information can be viewed from your MFD, for products
networked using SeaTalkhs ® and SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000.
To view diagnostic product information, select [View all product info] from
the [Diagnostics] pop over menu: [Homescreen > Settings > Network >
Diagnostics > View all product info].

1. Select the [Diagnostics] button from the Network settings menu:

[Homescreen > Settings > Network > Diagnostics].
2. Select either:
• [Save this display’s logs] — Only logs from this display will be saved.
• [Save crash logs from all products] — Logs from all networked devices
will be saved.
• [Save system logs] — Only system logs will be saved.
Saving product information 3. Select [OK] on the ‘Logs saved’ dialog.
Diagnostic product information can be saved to a MicroSD card for off boat The logs will be saved to a ‘logs’ folder that will be created on your memory
records. card. The logs will be compressed as a ‘.zip’ file ready to be sent to
Raymarine.
With the Diagnostics product information page displayed:
1. Select [Save data].
Troubleshooting 515
Saving YachtSense Link logs 36.3 RNS-8 Diagnostic information
Logs held on the YachtSense ™ Link router can be saved to memory card on a
display running LightHouse™ V4.1 or greater. The following range of diagnostic information is available for the RNS-8
Network switch, which can be displayed on LightHouse™ 4 multifunction
displays running software version 4.5 or later.
Note:
To view RNS-8 diagnostic product information on a LightHouse™ 4
Savings crash logs using the [Save crash logs from all products] option multifunction display, select [RNS-8] from the [Diagnostics] pop over menu on
available from the [Diagnostic] button will include YachtSense ™ Link router the multifunction display: [Homescreen > Settings > Network > Diagnostics >
logs. The below steps will only save the router’s logs. RNS-8].
The following diagnostic information is displayed:

Diagnostic Description
1. Select the YachtSense ™ Link router button from the list of Networked Name: Provides the product name.
devices: [Homescreen > Settings > Network > Raymarine YachtSense
Link E70640 xxxxxxx]. Address: Provides the product IP address.
Serial: Provides the product serial number.
The network list will include 3 entries for the router, the correct option is
the device that includes the router’s part number i.e.: E70640. Version: Provides the product software version number.

2. Select [Save logs] from the pop-over options. Additional port diagnostic information can be displayed by tapping the row
for the relevant unit and then selecting [Port traffic]. Once selected, the
3. Select [OK] on the ‘logs saved’ dialog.
following port diagnostic information is displayed:
The logs will be saved to a ‘logs’ folder that will be created on your memory
card. The logs will be compressed as a ‘.zip’ file ready to be sent to
Raymarine.

516
 Diagnostic Description
POE Class (Watts) — (PoE Provides the PoE classification of a
ports 1, 3, 5, 7): connected PoE Powered Device (PD), and,
the maximum power consumption (Watts)
required by the PoE classification.
Power (Watts) — (PoE ports Provides the current power consumption
1, 3, 5, 7): (Watts) of your connected Powered Device
(PD).

Note: The network switch can

output a maximum of 120 Watts, for
consumption by up to 4 PoE Powered
Devices (i.e. 30 W maximum per
Powered Device ).

Diagnostic Description 36.4 NMEA 0183 diagnostics

Throughput (Bytes) — (port Provides the current amount of data (Bytes) You can view and record data transmitted to and received from connected
1–8): that is currently being transferred via your NMEA 0183 devices. This can help in troubleshooting device/data issues and
network switch from a specific port. the resulting log may be requested by Technical support when discussing
Total Throughput (Bytes) — Provides the total amount of data (Bytes) technical issues.
(port 1–8): that has been transferred via your network
switch from a specific port. Note:
Speed (Bps) — (port 1–8): Provides the current data transfer speed (in The NMEA 0183 diagnostics option is available on Axiom™ Pro and Axiom™
Bytes per second) for a specific port. XL displays. The menu is not available on Axiom™, Axiom™+, Axiom™ 2
Negotiated Speed (Mbps) Provides the port’s maximum data transfer Pro or Axiom™ 2 XL displays.
— (port 1–8): speed (10/100/1000 Mbps), which is
negotiated during connection.
The diagnostics menu is opened by selecting the [NMEA0183 messages]
option from the [Diagnostics] button: [Homescreen > Settings > Network >
Diagnostics > NMEA0183 messages].

Troubleshooting 517
 36.5 NMEA 2000 diagnostics
You can view and record data transmitted to and received from connected
NMEA 2000 / SeaTalkng ® devices. This can help in troubleshooting
device/data issues and the resulting log may be requested by Technical
support when discussing technical issues.
The diagnostics menu is opened by selecting the [NMEA devices &
messages] option from the [Diagnostics] button: [Homescreen > Settings >
Network > Diagnostics > NMEA devices & messages].
The menu will display a list of connected devices.

From the diagnostics menu you can:

1. [Resume display] / [Pause display] — Select button to start or stop display
of data.
2. [Rx/Tx] — Select to filter between [Rx] (Received data) and [Tx]
(Transmitted data), or both [Rx/Tx] .
3. [Port 1] / [Port 2] — Select to switch between NMEA 0183 ports.
4. [Start recording] / [Stop recording] — Select to start or stop recording
data to a memory card. The data will be saved to a .log file in the root
directory of the memory card.
5. [Save to:] — Select to choose a card reader slot to save the data to.
6. [Raw data] — Disable to view a more user friendly description of the data.
When enabled the raw data is displayed. Only raw data is recorded to
memory card. From the diagnostics menu you can:
1. [Resume display] / [Pause display] — Select button to start or stop display
of data.
2. [NMEA messages] — Select to display a list of all transmitted and received
data from all devices..
3. [Start recording] / [Stop recording] — Select to start or stop recording
data to a memory card. The data will be saved to a .log file in the root
directory of the memory card.
518
4. [Save to:] — Select to choose a card reader slot to save the data to. Possible causes Possible solutions
5. [Refresh] — Select to refresh the list of devices. Blown fuse / tripped 1. Check condition of relevant fuses and breakers
6. [NMEA messages] — Select a device from the list and select NMEA breaker. and connections, replace if necessary. (Refer
messages to view a list of messages for that device. to the Technical Specification section of your
product’s installation instructions for fuse
ratings.)
2. If fuse keeps blowing check for cable damage,
36.6 Power up troubleshooting broken connector pins or incorrect wiring.
Product does not turn on or keeps turning off Poor / damaged 1. Check that the power cable connector is
/ insecure power correctly orientated and fully inserted into the
supply cable / display connector and locked in position.
connections
2. Check the power supply cable and connectors
for signs of damage or corrosion, and replace
if necessary.
3. With the display turned on, try flexing the power
cable near to the display connector to see if
this causes the unit to restart or lose power.
Replace if necessary.
4. Check the vessel’s battery voltage and the
condition of the battery terminals and power
supply cables, ensuring connections are secure,
clean and free from corrosion. Replace if
necessary.
5. With the product under load, using a
multi-meter, check for high voltage drop
across all connectors / fuses etc, and replace
if necessary.
Incorrect power The power supply may be wired incorrectly, ensure
connection the installation instructions have been followed.

Product will not start up (restart loop)

Troubleshooting 519
 Possible causes Possible solutions 5. Swipe your finger from right to left once to highlight [Yes] .
Power supply and See possible solutions from the table above, entitled 6. Swipe your finger from left to right once to restore your display to factory
connection ‘Product does not turn on or keeps turning off’. default settings.
7. When [Data wipe complete] is displayed, swipe your finger from left to
Software corruption 1. In the unlikely event that the product’s software right to restart your display.
has become corrupted, try downloading and
installing the latest software from the Raymarine
website. Performing a power on reset on an Axiom® Pro display
2. On display products, as a last resort, attempt to
perform a ‘Power on Reset’. Be aware that this Important:
will delete all settings / presets and user data Before performing a power on reset ensure you have backed up your
(such as waypoints and tracks), and revert the settings and user data to a memory card.
unit back to factory defaults.

Warning: Factory reset warning 1. Switch off power at the breaker to ensure that the display is completely
powered off, and not in Standby mode. Alternatively, remove the power
Performing a factory reset will restore all system and app
cable from the display.
settings to factory defaults and erase all user data (such as
waypoints, routes, tracks, camera recordings and photos). 2. Within approximately 10 seconds of powering on your display, press and
hold the [Back] and [Switch active] buttons until the screen goes black
and the Raymarine logo appears.
Performing a power on reset on touch only displays The display will boot into Recovery mode.
3. Use the directional controls to highlight [Wipe data/factory reset].
Important: 4. Press [Ok].
• Before performing a power on reset ensure you have backed up your 5. Select [Yes] to restore your display to factory default settings.
settings and user data (waypoints, routes and tracks) to a memory card. 6. When ‘Data wipe complete’ is displayed, select [Reboot system] now.
• You may also want to save any crash logs that are stored on your display
to memory card for future reference. Performing a power on reset on an Axiom® 2 Pro
display
1. Switch off power at the breaker to ensure that the display is completely
powered off, and not in Standby mode. Alternatively, remove the power Important:
cable from the display.
2. Power on your display, and within approximately 10 seconds, swipe your Before performing a power on reset ensure you have backed up your
finger from right to left (opposite direction to powering on) across the settings and user data to a memory card.
[Power] button swipe area 5 times.
Recovery options are displayed. 1. Switch off power at the breaker to ensure that the display is completely
3. Swipe your finger from right to left twice to highlight [Wipe data/factory powered off, and not in Standby mode. Alternatively, remove the power
reset]. cable from the display.
4. Swipe your finger from left to right once to accept. 2. Plug the power cable back in or turn the breaker back on.
520
3. If the display was previously in Standby then press thee power button Possible Causes Possible Solution
to power up the display, otherwise the display will power up when the
power supply is reconnected. Damaged or 1. Check that the cable connectors are fully
disconnected Power inserted and locked in position.
4. Within approximately 10 seconds of powering on your display, press and cable / RayNet cable
hold the [Back] and [Menu] buttons until the screen goes black and the 2. Check the power supply cable and connectors
Raymarine logo appears. for signs of damage or corrosion, replace if
The display will boot into Recovery mode. necessary.
5. Use the directional controls to highlight [Wipe data/factory reset]. 3. With the product turned on, try flexing the
6. Press [Ok]. cable near to the display connector to see
if this causes the product to re-boot/loose
7. Use the directional controls to highlight [Factory data reset]. power, replace if necessary.
8. Press [Ok].
4. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the
9. When ‘Data wipe complete’ is displayed, select [Reboot system now]. condition of the battery terminals and power
10. Press [Ok]. supply cables, ensuring connections are
secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace
if necessary.
36.7 Radar troubleshooting 5. With the product under load, using a
multi-meter, check for high voltage drop
No connection can be made to the scanner across all connectors/fuses etc (this can
cause the product to reset/turn off), replace
Possible Causes Possible Solution if necessary.
Radar powered down • If the scanner product has shut down, power it 6. Check condition of relevant breakers and
up by opening the Radar app and selecting the fuses, replace if necessary. If the breaker
[Power] icon. keeps tripping or fuses keep blowing, contact
• A Quantum Radar will shut down after 30 a Raymarine authorized dealer for assistance.
minutes if neither a wired (RayNet) , nor a Open Array power in • Ensure Open Array power switch is in the On
wireless (Wi-Fi) connection can be made to a Off position position.
MFD.
Software mismatch • Ensure all Raymarine products contain the
Radar not transmitting • Select [Transmit] for the relevant Radar scanner between equipment latest available software, check the Raymarine
from the Radar app. may prevent website: www.raymarine.com/software for
Missing or incorrect • If using a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection, check communication software compatibility.
Wi-Fi credentials that you have entered the correct SSID and
passcode for your Radar. Both the SSID and
passcode are provided on the Radar scanner’s
packaging, and are also shown on the serial
number label on the underside of the product.

Troubleshooting 521
Poor image quality 2. Select the [Wired Adapter Channel] field.
Possible Causes Possible Solution
High network • Disconnect Wireless display and close the
bandwidth usage Wireless display page.
may interfere with
• Disconnect other devices connected wirelessly.
a Quantum Radar
connected wirelessly

Displayed bearing is different to the true bearing 3. Change the channel to a different number.
Possible Causes Possible Solution 4. Reboot the Radar scanner for the changes to take effect.
Bearing alignment • Carry out the Bearing Alignment procedure.
adjustment required
36.8 GNSS (GPS) troubleshooting
Radar will not initialize (Voltage control module (VCM) stuck in
“sleep mode” No fix displayed
Possible Causes Possible Solution Possible causes Possible solutions
Intermittent or poor Check power connection at VCM. (Voltage at input Geographic location or prevailing Check to see if a fix is obtained
power connection = 12 / 24 V, Voltage at output = 40 V) conditions preventing satellite fix. in better conditions or another
geographic location.
Changing Quantum radar channel GNSS (GPS) connection fault. Ensure that external GNSS (GPS)
connections and cabling are correct
In rare circumstances Radar noise which cannot be eliminated using the and fault free.
Radar app’s [Sensitivity] settings may be fixed by changing the Radar’s
internal wired adaptor channel. External GNSS (GPS) receiver in Ensure GNSS (GPS) receiver has a
poor location e.g.: clear view of the sky.
Note: • Below decks.
• This feature requires Quantum 2 software version 2.50 (or later) / • Close proximity to transmitting
Quantum software version 2.44 (or later) and LightHouse™ 4 MFD equipment, such as a VHF radio.
software version 4.3.54 (or later).
GNSS (GPS) installation problem. Refer to the installation instructions
• In the first instance you should try adjusting [Sensitivity] settings to supplied with your product.
eliminate the noise before changing the [Wired adaptor channel].

Follow the steps below to change the channel from your display:
Note: A GNSS (GPS) Status screen is accessible from the display. This
1. Select the [Installation] tab from the Radar app menu: ([Menu > Settings > provides satellite signal strength and other relevant information.
Installation]).
522
36.9 Sonar troubleshooting Possible causes Possible solutions
External sonar • Check that the unit is correctly connected to the
Scrolling image is not being displayed module: SeaTalkhs Display or network switch. Check all connections
Possible causes Possible solutions / RayNet network ensuring connections are secure, clean and free
problem. from corrosion, replace if necessary.
Sonar disabled Enable [Ping] from the Fishfinder app’s sounder
tab: [Menu > Settings > Sounder > Ping enable]. External sonar Ensure all Raymarine products contain the latest
module: Software available software, check the Raymarine website:
Incorrect transducer Check that the correct transducer is selected in the mismatch between www.raymarine.com/software for software
selected Fishfinder app’s Transducer tab: [Menu > Settings equipment compatibility.
> Transducer ]. may prevent
Damaged cables 1. Check that the transducer cable connector is communication.
fully inserted and locked in position.
2. Check the power supply cable and connectors
for signs of damage or corrosion, replace if No depth reading / lost bottom lock
necessary.
Possible causes Possible solutions
3. With the unit turned on, try flexing the cable
near to the display connector to see if this Transducer location Check that the transducer has been installed in
causes the unit to re-boot/lose power, replace accordance with the instructions provided with the
if necessary. transducer.

4. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the Transducer angle If the transducer angle is too great the beam can
condition of the battery terminals and power miss the bottom, adjust transducer angle and
supply cables, ensuring connections are recheck.
secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace Transducer kicked-up If the transducer has a kick-up mechanism, check
if necessary. that it has not kicked up due to hitting an object.
5. With the product under load, using a Power source With the product under load, using a multi-meter,
multi-meter, check for high voltage drop across insufficient check the power supply voltage as close to the unit
all connectors/fuses etc (this can cause the as possible to establish actual voltage when the
Fishfinder applications to stop scrolling or the current is flowing. (Check your product’s Technical
unit to reset/turn off), replace if necessary. specification for power supply requirements.)
Damaged or fouled Check transducer condition, ensuring it is not Damaged or fouled Check transducer condition, ensuring it is not
transducer damaged and is free from debris/fouling. If transducer damaged and is free from debris/fouling. If
necessary, clean or replace your transducer. necessary, clean or replace your transducer.
After cleaning or replacement coat the transducer After cleaning or replacement coat the transducer
using a water-based anti-fouling paint. using a water-based anti-fouling paint.
Wrong transducer Check product and transducer documentation and
fitted ensure that the transducer is compatible with your
system.
Troubleshooting 523
 Possible causes Possible solutions Poor / problematic image
Damaged cables 1. Check the unit’s connector for broken or bent Possible causes Possible solutions
pins. Targets will appear Increase vessel speed.
2. Check that the cable connector is fully inserted differently if your vessel
into the unit and that the locking collar is in the is stationary (e.g.: fish will
locked position. appear on the display as
straight lines).
3. Check the cable and connectors for signs of
damage or corrosion, replace if necessary. Scrolling paused or speed Unpause or increase sonar scrolling speed.
set too low
4. With the unit turned on, try flexing the power
cable near to the display connector to see Sensitivity settings may Check and adjust sensitivity settings or perform
if this causes the unit to re-boot/lose power, be inappropriate for a Sonar reset.
replace if necessary. present conditions.
5. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the Damaged cables 1. Check the unit’s connector for broken or
condition of the battery terminals and power bent pins.
supply cables, ensuring connections are 2. Check that the cable connector is fully
secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace inserted into the unit and that the locking
if necessary. collar is in the locked position.
6. With the product under load, using a 3. Check the cable and connectors for
multi-meter, check for high voltage drop across signs of damage or corrosion, replace if
all connectors/fuses etc (this can cause the necessary.
Fishfinder applications to stop scrolling or the
unit to reset/turn off), replace if necessary. 4. With the unit turned on, try flexing the
power cable near to the display connector
Vessel speed too Slow vessel speed and recheck. to see if this causes the unit to re-boot/lose
high power, replace if necessary.
Bottom too shallow or The bottom depth may be outside of the 5. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the
too deep transducers depth range, move vessel to shallower condition of the battery terminals and
or deeper waters as relevant and recheck. power supply cables, ensuring connections
Ping depth limit set If using a transducer with greater than 600 W are secure, clean and free from corrosion,
power, check if the [Ping depth limit] has been replace if necessary.
enabled: [Menu > Settings > Transducer > Ping 6. With the product under load, using a
depth limit]. multi-meter, check for high voltage drop
If you are in water deeper than the specified [Ping across all connectors/fuses etc (this can
depth limit] then the transducer may not provide cause the Fishfinder applications to stop
depth readings. scrolling or the unit to reset/turn off),
Disable or adjust setting and retry. replace if necessary.

524
 Possible causes Possible solutions Note:
Transducer location • Check that the transducer has been installed If you are experiencing issues with the fishfinder app scrolling
in accordance with the instructions provided image you can record a video file of the issue that can be sent
with the transducer. to Raymarine technical support for analysis. For details refer to:
p.525 — Diagnostics sonar recording
• If a transom mount transducer is mounted
too high on the transom it may be lifting out
of the water, check that the transducer face Sonar depth data recording/logging
is fully submerged when planing and turning.
The MFD includes features that will record or log your vessel’s depth and
Transducer kicked-up If the transducer has a kick-up mechanism, position data.
check that it has not kicked up due to hitting
an object. Vessel depth and position logging features:
• RealBathy™ — In the chart app when using LightHouse™ charts, the
Damaged or fouled Check transducer condition, ensuring it is not
RealBathy™ feature logs vessel depth and position to enable creation of
transducer damaged and is free from debris/fouling. If
personalized depth contours that can be displayed in realtime. For details
necessary, clean or replace your transducer.
refer to: p.221 — RealBathy™ depth contours
After cleaning or replacement coat the
transducer using a water-based anti-fouling • SonarChart™ Live — In the chart app, when using compatible Navionics
paint. charts, the SonarChart™ Live feature logs vessel depth and position to
enable creation of personalized depth contours that can be displayed in
Damaged transducer Check that the transducer cable and realtime. For details refer to: p.222 — SonarChart™ Live
cable connection is free from damage and that
the connections are secure and free from • Data logging — When the MFD is configured using the First Responder
corrosion. profile, vessel depth, vessel position, active MoB, and details of nearby AIS
targets are logged to a CSV file and saved to a memory card. For details
Turbulence around the Slow vessel speed and recheck. refer to: p.364 — Data logging
transducer at higher
speeds may affect • Sonar recording — The sonar recording feature is for troubleshooting
transducer performance purposes only, and records the fishfinder app’s scrolling image to a video
file for analysis by Raymarine technical support. For details refer to:
Interference from another 1. Turn off the transducer causing the p.525 — Diagnostics sonar recording
transducer interference.
All of the recording/logging features can be enabled and disabled as desired;
2. Reposition the transducers so they are for instructions, refer to the links provided above.
farther apart.
Unit power supply fault Check the voltage from the power supply, if Diagnostics sonar recording
this is too low it can affect the transmitting Sonar recording enables you to record the fishfinder scrolling image
power of the unit. as a video file, for troubleshooting purposes only. This means that any
issues encountered in the Fishfinder app can be recorded and provided to
Raymarine technical support for analysis. The recorded file is saved to a
memory card, but cannot be viewed in standard video player software.
Sonar recording is enabled from the [Diagnostics] options in the [Network]
settings tab: [Homescreen > Network > Diagnostics > Enable sonar recording].
Troubleshooting 525
When sonar recording is enabled, the [Start recording], [Copy recording], and 1. Select [Enable sonar recording] from the Diagnostics menu: [Homescreen
[Stop recording ] options will be available in the fishfinder app’s main menu. > Network > Diagnostics > Enable sonar recording].
For more information. refer to: Recording sonar for troubleshooting 2. Insert a memory card into a card reader slot.
Sonar recording creates a .rec video file, which can be copied to a memory 3. Open the fishfinder app.
card and sent to technical support. 4. Select [Start recording] from the main menu.
5. Select [Stop recording] from the main menu.
Recording sonar for troubleshooting
6. Select [Copy recording] from the main menu.
The fishfinder app scrolling image can be recorded and transferred to
7. Select the relevant card reader slot.
memory card so that it can be sent to Raymarine technical support for
analysis. This feature is intended to be used for diagnostic purposes only. 8. Select [Copy recording].
A .rec video file will now be saved to your memory card.
Note:
The recording options shown in the screenshot below are only available in
the fishfinder app when the [Enable sonar recording] option is enabled in
the Diagnostics menu. For more information, refer to: Diagnostics sonar
recording

526
36.10 Camera troubleshooting PTZ cameras — Erratic or unresponsive controls
Possible causes Possible solutions
Video not displayed Network problem. • Check that the controller and camera are
Possible causes Possible solutions correctly connected to the network.
Incorrect power up Your MFD needs to be powered up before your • If used, check the status of the network switch.
sequence camera to enable the MFD to provide the camera • Check that RayNet cables are free from damage.
with a valid IP address.
Control conflict, e.g. Ensure that no other controllers are in use at the
Camera not Ensure the camera feed and network settings are caused by multiple same time.
compatible. compatible: users at different
• Camera feed should be set to 720p max. stations.
• Network should be set to obtain network address Problem with the • Check power / network cabling to the controller
automatically (DHCP). controller. and PoE injector, if used.
• Anonymous login should be enabled. • Check other controllers, if available.
Too many IP feeds on Displaying multiple feeds on multiple MFDs
network. simultaneously may cause some feeds to not be Cannot switch between camera feeds
displayed. Try viewing less feeds.
Possible causes Possible solutions
Problem with the 1. Check the unit’s connector for broken or bent
Camera is not a dual Only “dual payload” (dual lens) cameras support
camera connections. pins.
payload model. feed switching.
2. Check that the cable connector is fully inserted
into the unit and that the locking collar is in the
locked position. Noisy image
3. Check the cable and connectors for signs of Possible causes Possible solutions
damage or corrosion, replace if necessary. Poor quality or faulty • Ensure cable runs are no longer than they need
4. With the unit turned on, try flexing the cabling. to be.
power cable to see if this causes the unit to • Use only high quality shielded cable suitable for
re-boot/loose power, replace if necessary. the marine environment.
Problem with power • Check the power connections to the camera, Cable is picking • Ensure you are using a high quality shielded
supply to the camera JCU, and PoE injector (if used). up electromagnetic cable.
or thermal camera’s interference (EMI)
• Ensure that the power switch / breaker is on. • Ensure proper cable separation, for example do
JCU (if used as the from another device.
primary controller) • Check the fuse / breaker state. not run data and power cables in close proximity
with each other.
Camera is in Standby Use the camera controls (either the Camera app
mode. or a Thermal camera’s JCU) to “wake” the camera • In certain conditions it may be necessary to
from standby. fit suppression ferrites to cabling to eliminate
interference.
Troubleshooting 527
Image too dark or too light
Possible causes Possible solutions
Brightness set too Check MFD brightness and adjust if necessary.
low.
The contrast and / or Check Camera brightness and contrast, adjust if
brightness settings in necessary.
the Camera app are
set too low.
The Scene Mode When viewing a thermal camera feed, a particular
is not appropriate environment may benefit from using a different
for the current Scene Mode setting. For example, a very cold
conditions. background (such as the sky) could cause the
camera to use a wider temperature range than
appropriate. Adjust the Scene as appropriate.

Image freezes momentarily

Possible causes Possible solutions
FFC (Flat Field A Thermal camera’s image will pause momentarily
Correction). on a periodic basis during the Flat Field Correction
(FFC) cycle. Just prior to the FFC, a small green
square may appear in the upper left corner of the
screen.

Image is inverted (upside down or mirror image)

Possible causes Possible solutions
Vertical or Horizontal Check the image flip controls to ensure they are
flip control incorrectly set correctly for your installation.
set

528
36.11 Augmented Reality (AR) Troubleshooting
AR options not available in Video app
Possible causes Possible solutions
Wrong camera selected. Ensure that the correct AR-compatible camera has been selected in the Video app menu.
Compatible camera not detected. 1. Ensure your camera is AR compatible.
2. Ensure your camera is correctly installed and networked to your MFD.
AR200 not detected. Ensure your AR200 is correctly installed and on the same network as the MFD from which you
are using the AR features.
Incorrect LightHouse™ software version. Ensure that your MFD is running LightHouse™ 3 version 3.7 or above or LightHouse™ 4.
AR options turned off. The Compass bar, AIS, Waypoint and Chart object flags can be enabled and disabled from the
[ClearCruise] settings page ([Video app > Menu > Settings > ClearCruise]). Ensure relevant options
are enabled.

Note:
For AIS flags to be displayed, compatible AIS hardware must be operational and connected
to the same network as your MFD.

AR flags do not appear directly above on-screen target

Possible causes Possible solutions
AIS update rate Depending on the classification of the target’s AIS hardware, transmitted position updates may
be sent up to 3 minutes apart and therefore the flag may appear up to 3 minutes behind the
actual onscreen target.
Camera Field of View (FOV) set incorrectly. Ensure that the FOV setting reflects your camera’s horizontal FOV. Check your camera’s
documentation for FOV specifications.
AR200 interference If your AR200 is installed in a location which includes a source of magnetic interference large
enough to affect AR flag placement, you may need to re-install the AR200 in a different location.
Deviation too high 1. Reset the AR200 calibration by selecting [Reset] from the AR200 calibration page:
[Homescreen > Settings > Network > Data sources > Heading > Raymarine AR200 Attitude >
Calibrate].
2. If the problem persists, you may need to move your AR200 to a location with less magnetic
interference.

Troubleshooting 529
36.12 Wi-Fi troubleshooting Possible cause Possible solutions

Before troubleshooting problems with your Wi-Fi connection, ensure that Incorrect network Ensure you are using the correct passphrase, the
you have followed the Wi-Fi location requirements guidance provided in the credentials Wi-Fi network’s passphrase can be found in the
relevant installation instructions and performed a power cycle/reboot of the Wi-Fi settings on the broadcasting device (the
devices you are experiencing problems with. device that you are trying to connect to).
Bulkheads, decks 1. Try repositioning the devices so the structure is
Cannot find network and other heavy removed from the direct line of sight between
structure can the devices, or
Possible cause Possible solutions degrade and even
2. If possible use a wired connection instead.
Wi-Fi not currently Ensure Wi-Fi is enabled on both Wi-Fi devices and block the Wi-Fi
enabled on devices. rescan available networks. signal. Depending
on the thickness
Some devices may Power cycle / reboot devices and rescan available and material used it
automatically turn networks. may not always be
off Wi-Fi when not in possible to pass a
use to save power. Wi-Fi signal through
Device not 1. Try to enable broadcasting of the device’s certain structures
broadcasting. network using the Wi-Fi settings on the device Interference being 1. Change the Wi-Fi Channel of the device you are
you are trying to connect to. caused by other trying to connect to and retry the connection.
2. You may still be able to connect to the device, Wi-Fi enabled or You can use free Wi-Fi analyzer apps on your
when it is not broadcasting, by manually older Bluetooth smart device to help you choose a better
entering the device’s Wi-Fi Name / SSID and enabled devices channel (channel with least traffic).
passphrase in the connection settings of the (Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
2. Temporarily disable each wireless device in
device you are trying to connect. both operate in the
turn until you have identified the device causing
2.4 GHz frequency
Devices out of range Move devices closer together or, if possible remove the interference.
range, some older
or signal being the obstructions and then rescan available network.
bluetooth devices
blocked.
may interfere with
Wi-Fi signals.)
Cannot connect to network
Possible cause Possible solutions
Some devices may Power cycle/reboot devices and retry the
automatically turn connection.
off Wi-Fi when not in
use to save power.
Trying to connect Ensure you are trying to connect to the correct Wi-Fi
to the wrong Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi network’s name can be found in
network the Wi-Fi settings on the broadcasting device (the
device that you are trying to connect to).
530
 Possible cause Possible solutions Connection extremely slow and or keeps dropping out
Interference caused Temporarily switch off each device in turn until you Possible cause Possible solutions
by other devices have identified the device causing the interference, Wi-Fi performance • Move devices closer together.
that use the 2.4GHz then remove or reposition the offending device(s). degrades over
frequency See list • For fixed installations such as a Quantum Radar,
distance so products
below of some enable the Wi-Fi connection on an display
farther away will
common devices installed closer to the device.
receive less network
that use the 2.4GHz bandwidth. Products
frequency: installed close to
• Microwave ovens their maximum
Wi-Fi range will
• Fluorescent experience slow
lighting connection speeds,
• Cordless phones / signal drop outs or
baby monitors not being able to
connect at all.
• Motion sensors
Interference being 1. Change the Wi-Fi Channel of the device you are
Interference caused Temporarily switch off each item in turn until you caused by other trying to connect to and retry the connection.
by electrical and have identified the device causing the interference, Wi-Fi enabled or You can use free Wi-Fi analyzer apps on your
electronic devices then remove or reposition the offending device(s). older Bluetooth smart device to help you choose a better
and associated enabled devices channel (channel with least traffic).
cabling could (Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
generate an 2. Temporarily switch off each device in turn until
both operate in the
electromagnetic field you have identified the device causing the
2.4 GHz frequency
which may interfere interference, then remove or reposition the
range, some older
with the Wi-Fi signal. offending device(s).
bluetooth devices
may interfere with
Wi-Fi signals.)
Interference from 1. Change the Wi-Fi Channel of the device you are
devices on other trying to connect to and retry the connection.
vessels. When in You can use free Wi-Fi analyzer apps on your
close proximity to smart device to help you choose a better
other vessels, for channel (channel with least traffic).
example, when
2. If possible, move your vessel to a location with
moored up in a
less Wi-Fi traffic.
marina, many other
Wi-Fi signals may be
present.

Troubleshooting 531
Network connection established but no data circumstances an IP address conflict can occur. An IP address conflict means
that more than 1 device on the network has been assigned the same IP
Possible cause Possible solutions address. Possible causes and solutions are shown below.
Connected to the Ensure that your devices is connected to the correct
wrong network. network. Possible cause Possible solutions

Device software Ensure both devices are running the latest available There is more than • Disable the DHCP server on devices where it is
incompatibility. software. one device on the not required.
network acting as a
It may be possible 1. Try updating software to a later version, or • Where multiple DHCP servers are required,
DHCP server.
that the device has ensure that there is no cross over in the ranges
2. try reinstalling the software. they are assigning.
become defective.
3. Obtain new replacement device. One or more devices • Change devices with a static IP address to
have been assigned Dynamic so that it is assigned a unique address
Mobile application running slowly or not at all a static IP address. by the DHCP server.
Possible cause Possible solutions • If a static address is required, ensure it is outside
of the range of addresses which can be assigned
Raymarine® app not Install mobile app from relevant app store. by the DHCP server.
installed
YachtSense Link From router software version 4.20 and above
Raymarine® app Ensure mobile app and display software are latest router software display’s can no longer be connected to the router
version not available versions. update. using a Wi-Fi connection.
compatible with
display software • If your display has previously been connect using
a Wi-Fi connection but also has a RayNet wired
Mobile apps not Enable “Viewing only” or “Remote Control” as connection then you will need to ‘Forget’ the
enabled on display required in the Mobile Apps setting on your display. Wi-Fi network connection.
Third party DHCP • If using a third party DHCP server, for
36.13 IP address conflict troubleshooting server incorrectly guidance on correct configuration refer to:
configured or p.550 — Ethernet (IPv4) networking of
Under normal circumstances in a Raymarine® system the data master display incompatible. Raymarine devices with third-party products
or a YachtSense ™ Link router will act as a DHCP server and assign unique IP
addresses to all connected network devices during power up. Under certain

532
36.14 Wireless display troubleshooting Wireless display disconnects
Possible cause Possible solutions
Cannot connect to wireless display Changing the Wi-Fi Sharing option Do not change Wi-Fi sharing options
Possible cause Possible solutions on your MFD will cause the wireless whilst connected to a wireless
display to disconnect. display.
Some Miracast compatible but non Disable Wi-Fi Sharing on your MFD
Wireless display may require factory
certified devices may not be able to and retry connection.
reset to re-establish connection.
connect with Wi-Fi Sharing enabled.
Quantum wireless pairing process Do not pair with a Quantum Radar
Wi-Fi Sharing has been enabled or Try power cycling devices and trying
will cause wireless display to whilst wireless display connection is
disable since the wireless display again.
disconnect. active.
was first connected. Depending on dongle used a factory
reset may be required to establish Wireless display too far away Try moving the wireless display
a connection. closer to the MFD and retry
connection.
Missed confirmation on wireless Restart connection procedure and
display ensure you check the wireless
display for confirmation dialogs.
36.15 Data troubleshooting
Wireless display too far away Try moving the wireless display
closer to the MFD and retry
connection.
Instrument, engine or other system data is unavailable at all
displays
Chromecast devices are not Purchase a Miracast compatible
supported. device. Possible causes Possible solutions
Data is not being received at the • Check transmitted data is
display(s). compatible with your display.
Refer to MFD supported PGN list.
Poor performance
• Check the data bus (e.g.
Possible cause Possible solutions SeaTalkng) wiring and
High video processing demand. The Camera app, Raymarine mobile connections.
app connections can interfere with Data source (e.g. instrument display • Check the source of the missing
the wireless display performance as or engine interface) is not operating. data (e.g. instrument display or
they use shared video processing engine interface).
resource. Try switching off
video feeds and/or mobile app • Check power to the data bus.
connections. Software mismatch between • Check the Raymarine website
Wireless display too far away Try moving the wireless display equipment may prevent and ensure all your Raymarine
closer to the MFD and retry communication. products have the latest software.
connection.

Troubleshooting 533
Instrument or other system data is missing from some but not
all displays
Possible causes Possible solutions
Network connection problem. • Check that all required equipment
is connected to the same network.
• Check correct operation of
network switch, if used.
• Check network cabling is correct
and free from damage.
Software mismatch between Check all MFDs are using the same
equipment may prevent version of software.
communication.

36.16 Touchscreen troubleshooting

Touchscreen does not operate as expected.
Possible causes Possible solutions
Touch lock is enabled. Disable TouchLock, using the power
button..
Screen is not being operated with Bare fingers must make contact
bare fingers, for example gloves are with the screen for correct
being worn. operation. Alternatively you may
use conductive gloves.
Saltwater deposits on the screen. Carefully clean and dry the screen
with a damp non-abrasive cloth.

534
CHAPTER 37: TECHNICAL SUPPORT
CHAPTER CONTENTS

• 37.1 Raymarine product support and servicing — page 536

• 37.2 Learning resources — page 537

Technical support 535

37.1 Raymarine product support and servicing • Help desk: https://raymarine.custhelp.com/app/home
• Tel: +44 (0)1329 246 777
Raymarine provides a comprehensive product support service, as well as
warranty, service, and repairs. You can access these services through the United States (US):
Raymarine website, telephone, and e-mail. • Help desk: https://raymarine.custhelp.com/app/home
Product information • Tel: +1 (603) 324 7900 (Toll -free: +800 539 5539)
If you need to request service or support, please have the following Australia and New Zealand (Raymarine subsidiary):
information to hand:
• E-Mail: [email protected]
• Product name.
• Tel: +61 2 8977 0300
• Product identity.
France (Raymarine subsidiary):
• Serial number.
• E-Mail: [email protected]
• Software application version.
• Tel: +33 (0)1 46 49 72 30
• System diagrams.
Germany (Raymarine subsidiary):
You can obtain this product information using diagnostic pages of the
connected display. • E-Mail: [email protected]
Servicing and warranty • Tel: +49 40 237 808 0
Raymarine offers dedicated service departments for warranty, service, and Italy (Raymarine subsidiary):
repairs. • E-Mail: [email protected]
Don’t forget to visit the Raymarine website to register your product • Tel: +39 02 9945 1001
for extended warranty benefits: https://www.raymarine.com/en-
us/support/product-registration Spain (Authorized Raymarine distributor):
United Kingdom (UK), EMEA, and Asia Pacific: • E-Mail: [email protected]
• E-Mail: [email protected] • Tel: +34 96 2965 102
• Tel: +44 (0)1329 246 932 Netherlands (Raymarine subsidiary):
United States (US): • E-Mail: [email protected]
• E-Mail: [email protected] • Tel: +31 (0)26 3614 905
• Tel: +1 (603) 324 7900 Sweden (Raymarine subsidiary):
Web support • E-Mail: [email protected]
Please visit the “Support” area of the Raymarine website for: • Tel: +46 (0)317 633 670
• Manuals and Documents — http://www.raymarine.com/manuals Finland (Raymarine subsidiary):
• Technical support forum — https://raymarine.custhelp.com/app/home • E-Mail: [email protected]
• Software updates — http://www.raymarine.com/software • Tel: +358 (0)207 619 937
Worldwide support Norway (Raymarine subsidiary):
United Kingdom (UK), EMEA, and Asia Pacific: • E-Mail: [email protected]
536
• Tel: +47 692 64 600 i. to display detailed software information and your display’s network
Denmark (Raymarine subsidiary): IP address, select your display from the list.
ii. to display detailed diagnostics information for all products, select
• E-Mail: [email protected] [Product info] from the [Diagnostics] pop over menu.
• Tel: +45 437 164 64
Russia (Authorized Raymarine distributor): Remote Support via AnyDesk
• E-Mail: [email protected] The AnyDesk remote desktop app is available on your Raymarine
multifunction display from the app launcher: [Homescreen > Apps].
• Tel: +7 495 788 0508
The AnyDesk app enables a Raymarine Product Support representative to
remotely connect to and control your MFD over an Internet connection, for
Viewing product information the purposes of technical support and troubleshooting.
Use the [Settings] menu to view hardware and software information about To get started, you will first need to contact Raymarine Product Support.
your display, and connected products. If the representative considers that your support case would benefit from
a remote session, you need to first ensure that your MFD has an active
Internet connection via Wi-Fi. Next, launch the AnyDesk app from your MFD’s
homescreen, and then provide the displayed unique ID to the Raymarine
Product Support representative. Then follow any further instructions provided
to you by the representative.
Attention
• AnyDesk is provided for troubleshooting and support purposes only, and
is NOT intended to perform remote functions on your vessel. Raymarine
will NOT be held liable for damage or injury to equipment or persons
caused by the use of a remote connection to your MFD.
• Do not disclose your AnyDesk ID to anyone other than authorised
Raymarine Product Support personnel.
• Do not use the AnyDesk app to remotely activate connected devices
such as Autopilot, Radar or Sonar hardware.

37.2 Learning resources

1. Select [Settings], from the Homescreen. Raymarine has produced a range of learning resources to help you get the
The [Getting started] menu contains hardware and software information most out of your products.
for your display.
2. You can view further information about your display, or view information Video tutorials
about products networked using SeaTalkhs ® and SeaTalkng ® / NMEA
Raymarine official channel on YouTube
2000, by selecting the [Network] tab, then:
Technical support 537
• http://www.youtube.com/user/RaymarineInc

Training courses
Raymarine regularly runs a range of in-depth training courses to help you
make the most of your products. Visit the Training section of the Raymarine
website for more information:
• http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=2372

Technical support forum

You can use the Technical support forum to ask a technical question about
a Raymarine product or to find out how other customers are using their
Raymarine equipment. The resource is regularly updated with contributions
from Raymarine customers and staff:
• https://raymarine.custhelp.com/app/home

538
Appendix A NMEA 0183 sentence support • MSK — Control for a Beacon Receiver (Receive / Transmit)
• MSS — Beacon Receiver Status (Receive / Transmit)
Note: • MTW — Mean Temperature of Water (Receive / Transmit)
• Axiom® Pro and Axiom® XL displays support direct NMEA 0183 • MWV — Wind Speed and Angle (Receive / Transmit)
connections.
• RMA — Recommended Minimum Navigation Information — Loran-C Data
• Axiom®, Axiom®+, Axiom® 2 Pro and Axiom® 2 XL displays do NOT (Receive / Transmit)
support direct NMEA 0183 connections.
• RMB — Recommended Minimum Navigation Information — GPS Data
(Receive / Transmit)
Supported sentences:
• RMC — Recommended Minimum Navigation Information — Specific GPS
• AAM — Waypoint Arrival Alarm (Receive / Transmit) Data (Receive / Transmit)
• ALR — Set Alarm State (Receive) • RTE — Routes (Receive / Transmit)
• APB — Autopilot B Sentence (Receive / Transmit) • RSD — Radar System Data (Receive / Transmit)
• BWC — Bearing & Distance to Waypoint — Great Circle (Receive / Transmit) • SSD — AIS Ship Static Data (Receive)
• BWR — Bearing & Distance to Waypoint — Rhumb Line (Receive / Transmit) • THS — True Heading and Status (Receive / Transmit)
• DBT — Depth Below Transducer (Receive / Transmit) • TTM — Tracked Target Message (Receive / Transmit)
• DPT — Depth (Receive / Transmit) • VDM — AIS VHF Data-link Message (Receive)
• DSC — Digital Selective Calling Information (Receive) • VDO — AIS VHF Data-link Own-Vessel Report (Receive)
• DSE — Extended DSC (Receive) • VHW — Water Speed and Heading (Receive / Transmit)
• DTM — Datum Reference (Receive / Transmit)
• VLW — Distance Travelled Through Water (Receive / Transmit)
• GBS — GPS Satellite Fault Detection (Receive / Transmit)
• VTG — Course Over ground & Ground Speed (Receive / Transmit)
• GGA — Global Positioning System Fix Data (Receive / Transmit)
• VSD — AIS Voyage Static Data (Receive)
• GLL — Geographic Position — Latitude / Longitude (Receive / Transmit)
• WPL — Waypoint Location (Receive / Transmit)
• GLC — Geographic Position — Loran-C (Receive / Transmit)
• XTE — Measured Cross Track Error (Receive / Transmit)
• GSA — GPS DOP & Active Satellites (Receive / Transmit)
• ZDA — Time & date (Receive / Transmit)
• GST — GPS Pseudorange Error Statistic (Receive / Transmit)
• GSV — GPS Satellites in View (Receive / Transmit)
• HDG — Heading — Deviation & Variation (Receive / Transmit)
• HDM — Heading — Magnetic (Receive / Transmit)
• HDT — Heading — True (Receive / Transmit)
• MDA — Meteorological Composite (Receive / Transmit)
NMEA 0183 sentence support 539
Appendix B NMEA 2000 PGN support • 127257 — Attitude (Receive / Transmit)
• 127258 — Magnetic Variation (Transmit)
Supported standard NMEA 2000 PGNs are listed below. Raymarine and
other proprietary PGNs are not listed. • 127488 — Engine Parameters, Rapid Update (Receive)
• 127489 — Engine Parameters, Dynamic (Receive)
Note:
• 127493 — Transmission Parameters, Dynamic (Receive)
Support for some PGNs may be restricted to a specific application.
• 127496 — Trip Parameters, Vessel (Receive)
• 127497 — Trip Parameters, Engine (Receive)
Administration PGNs • 127498 — Engine Parameters, Static (Receive)
• 59392 — ISO Acknowledge (Receive / Transmit)
• 127503 — AC input status (Receive)
• 59904 — ISO Request (Receive / Transmit)
• 127504 — AC output status (Receive)
• 60160 — ISO Transport Protocol, Data Transfer (Receive)
• 127505 — Fluid Level (Receive)
• 60416 — ISO Transport Protocol, Connection Management — BAM Group
Function (Receive) • 127506 — DC detailed status (Receive)
• 60928 — ISO Address Claim (Receive / Transmit) • 127507 — Charger status (Receive)
• 65240 — ISO Commanded address (Receive) • 127508 — Battery status (Receive)
• 126208 — NMEA — Request, Commanded, Acknowledged Group Function • 127509 — Inverter status (Receive)
(Receive / Transmit) • 127510 — Charger configuration status (Receive)
• 126464 — PGN Transmit and Receive List (Receive / Transmit) • 127511 — Inverter configuration status (Receive)
• 126996 — Product Information (Receive / Transmit) • 127512 — AGS configuration status (Receive)
• 126998 — Configuration Information (Receive / Transmit) • 127513 — Battery configuration status (Receive)
• 127514 — AGS Status (Receive)
Data PGNs
• 127744 — AC Power / Current-Phase A (Receive)
• 126983 — Alert (Receive)
• 127745 — AC Power / Current-Phase B (Receive)
• 126984 — Alert Response (Transmit)
• 127746 — AC Power / Current-Phase C (Receive)
• 126985 — Alert Text (Receive)
• 127747 — AC Voltage / Frequency-Phase A (Receive)
• 126986 — Alert Configuration (Receive)
• 126992 — System Time (Receive / Transmit) • 127748 — AC Voltage / Frequency-Phase B (Receive)
• 126993 — Heartbeat (Receive / Transmit) • 127749 — AC Voltage / Frequency-Phase C (Receive)
• 127237 — Heading/Track Control (Receive) (Transmit is available in the • 127750 — Converter (Inverter/Charger) Status (Receive)
First responder profile) • 127751 — DC Voltage / Current (Receive)
• 127245 — Rudder (Receive) • 128259 — Speed, (Receive / Transmit)
• 127250 — Vessel Heading (Receive / Transmit) • 128267 — Water Depth (Receive / Transmit)
• 127251 — Rate of Turn (Receive / Transmit) • 128275 — Distance Log (Receive / Transmit)
540
• 128780 — Linear Actuator Control/Status (receive) • 129811 — AIS Single Slot Binary Message (Receive / Transmit)
• 129025 — Position, Rapid Update (Receive / Transmit) • 129812 — AIS Multi Slot Binary Message (Receive / Transmit)
• 129026 — COG & SOG, Rapid Update (Receive / Transmit) • 130064 — Route and WP Service — Database List (Receive / Transmit)
• 129029 — GNSS Position Data (Receive / Transmit) • 130065 — Route and WP Service — Route List (Receive / Transmit)
• 129033 — Time & Date (Receive / Transmit) • 130066 — Route and WP Service — Route/WP List Attributes (Receive /
• 129038 — AIS Class A Position Report (Receive) (Transmit is available in Transmit)
the First responder profile) • 130067 — Route and WP Service — Route/WP Name & Position (Receive /
• 129039 — AIS Class B Position Report (Receive) Transmit)
• 129040 — AIS Class B Extended Position Report (Receive) • 130068 — Route and WP Service — Route/WP Name (Receive / Transmit)
• 129041 — AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN) Report (Receive) • 130069 — Route and WP Service — XTE Limit & Navigation Method
(Receive / Transmit)
• 129044 — Datum (Receive / Transmit)
• 130070 — Route and WP Service — WP Comment (Receive / Transmit)
• 129283 — Cross Track Error (Receive / Transmit)
• 130072 — Route and WP Service — Database Comment (Receive /
• 129284 — Navigation Data (Receive / Transmit) Transmit)
• 129285 — Navigation — Route / WP Information (Transmit)
• 130074 — Route and WP Service — WP List — WP Name & Position
• 129291 — Set & Drift, Rapid Update (Receive / Transmit) (Receive / Transmit)
• 129301 — Time to/from Mark (Receive) • 130306 — Wind Data (Receive / Transmit)
• 129539 — GNSS DOPs (Receive / Transmit) • 130310 — Environmental Parameters (Receive / Transmit)
• 129540 — GNSS Sats in View (Receive / Transmit) • 130311 — Environmental Parameters (Receive) (Transmit is available in
• 129542 — GNSS Pseudorange Noise Statistics (Receive) the First responder profile)
• 129545 — GNSS RAIM Output (Receive) • 130312 — Temperature (Receive) (Transmit is available in the First
responder profile)
• 129547 — GNSS Pseudorange Error Statistics (Receive)
• 130313 — Humidity (Receive)
• 129550 — GNSS Differential Correction Receiver Interface (Receive)
• 130314 — Actual pressure (Receive)
• 129551 — GNSS Differential Correction Receiver Signal (Receive)
• 130316 — Temperature, Extended Range (Receive)
• 129793 — AIS UTC and Date Report (Receive)
• 129794 — AIS Class A Static and Voyage Related Data (Receive) (Transmit • 130569 — Entertainment — Current File and Status (Receive)
is available in the First responder profile) • 130570 — Entertainment — Library Data File (Receive)
• 129798 — AIS SAR Aircraft Position Report (Receive) • 130571 — Entertainment — Library Data Group (Receive)
• 129801 — AIS Addressed Safety Related Message (Receive) • 130572 — Entertainment — Library Data Search (Receive)
• 129802 — AIS Safety Related Broadcast Message (Receive) • 130573 — Entertainment — Supported Source Data (Receive)
• 129808 — DSC call information (Receive) • 130574 — Entertainment — Supported Zone Data (Receive)
• 129809 — AIS Class B "CS" Static Report, Part A (Receive) • 130576 — Small Craft Status (Receive)
• 129810 — AIS Class B "CS" Static Report, Part B (Receive) • 130577 — Direction Data (Receive / Transmit)
NMEA 2000 PGN support 541
• 130578 — Vessel Speed Components (Receive)
• 130579 — Entertainment — System Configuration (Receive)
• 130580 — Entertainment — System Configuration Status (Receive)
• 130586 — Entertainment — Zone Configuration Status (Receive)
• 130582 — Entertainment — Zone Volume (Receive)
Raymarine® provides field programmability of the Device and System
Instances within PGN 60928 which can be commanded via use of PGN
126208 as required by the latest [NMEA 2000] standard.

542
Appendix C LightHouse 4 software release • Automatic STW calibration (DST810). For details refer to:
p.75 — Automatic STW calibration (DST810)
history
• Sonar improvements to help reduce No transducer found errors.
The list below is a cumulative list of the new features introduced in
subsequent releases of the LightHouse 4 software, since the initial release LightHouse 4 v4.4.87 New features
(v4.0.70; April 2022). (Software release date: March 2023)
This list includes new features only. It does NOT include software
• New Homescreen icon style. For details, refer to:
maintenance items, such as bug fixes or performance improvements.
p.88 — Homescreen app page icons
To download the software, and view the complete list of all software updates,
including new features, bug fixes, and performance improvements, visit: • Added new automatic turning to next waypoint, while following a route.
For details, refer to: p.215 — Automatic turning
LightHouse 4 software download link • New Stop Nav button in top right of Chart app. For details, refer to:
https://www.raymarine.com/en-us/download/lighthouse-4-update-for- p.192 — Chart app onscreen controls
axiom-chartplotters • Added ability to change the size of the zoom box in Fishfinder zoom mode.
For details, refer to: p.316 — Zoom mode
LightHouse 4 v4.5.84 New features
• New 50:50 split view for Fishfinder zoom mode. For details, refer to:
(Software release date: September 2023) p.317 — Zoom mode view
• Added support for Rhodan trolling motors. For details refer to: • Updated Tune frequency control to enable frequency selection in kHz for
p.147 — Trolling motor control single frequency channels. For details, refer to: p.319 — Frequency tuning
• Added Avikus NeuBoat Dock app, for controlling an Avikus NeuBoat • Added support for displaying Fischer Panda NMEA 2000 generator data.
Docking system. For details refer to the separate operation instructions For details, refer to: p.404 — Generators page
document number: 81418.
• Changed the location where image files are stored: For details, refer to:
• Added support for NMEA 2000 Entertainment PGN 130579. p.79 — Taking a screenshot
• Added ability to download software from the internet using • VesselView app renamed Mercury app. For details, refer to:
a wired ethernet network connection. For details refer to: p.413 — Mercury app
p.36 — Updating software over the internet
• Sailing polar database updated, with 70 new polars added. For details,
• Improved network connectivity with YachtSense ™ Link router. refer to: p.289 — Polar laylines
• Added support for RNS-8 PoE network switch diagnostics. For details refer • Fishfinder bottom tracking and intensity improvements for CP370, CP470,
to: p.516 — RNS-8 Diagnostic information and CP570 sonar modules.
• Added Radar context menu drag feature. For details refer to: • Fishfinder gain changes now apply to historical ‘scroll back’ for CP370,
Dragging the context menu CP470, and CP570 sonar modules. To benefit from these improvements,
• Added new data response settings to Dashboard app. For details refer ensure that your CPx70 sonar module is using the latest available CPx70
to: p.411 — Data response settings software.
• Added NMEA 0183 diagnostics menu: For details refer to:
p.517 — NMEA 0183 diagnostics LightHouse 4 v4.3.54 New features
• LightHouse chart store updated to allow direct purchase. For details refer (Software release date: January 2023)
to: p.492 — LightHouse charts • Added support for Axiom 2 Pro displays:
LightHouse 4 software release history 543
 – Axiom 2 Pro lower keypad selection on initial start up. For details, refer – Switch steering angle indicator and alternator voltage. For details, refer
to: p.65 — Axiom® 2 Pro keypad type selection to: p.426 — Steering angle indicator
– Up to 3 user-configurable keys are available on Axiom 2 Pro. For details, New hybrid chart engine for improved performance for LightHouse charts.
refer to: p.70 — Assigning a function to the user configurable key • New automatic detection of batteries on NMEA 2000 network, and
– Axiom 2 Pro displays include an Ambient Light Sensor. For details, refer new battery configuration table and options. For details, refer to:
to: p.81 — Auto brightness p.113 — Battery configuration
– Axiom 2 Pro displays include audio controls. For details, refer to: • New fish type waypoint symbols added. For details refer to:
p.80 — Audio volume control p.158 — Waypoint symbols
– Added new keep network alive option: For details, refer to: • Added support for the YachtSense ™ Link router: p.102 — YachtSense ™ Link
p.110 — Homescreen settings menus
• Added ability to sync MFD with the Raymarine app version 2.0:
– Axiom 2 Pro displays include a pilot keypad status LED. For details, refer p.103 — My data
to: p.143 — Pilot keypad LED status (Axiom® 2 Pro only)
• Sailing polar database updated with 60 new boat models.
• Added support for CAM300 cameras, including image flip controls: For
details, refer to: p.443 — Image flip and mirroring • Internal GNSS (GPS) receiver performance improvements for Axiom+,
Axiom Pro and Axiom XL MFDs.
• New Fishfinder color palettes for RVM transducers: For details, refer to:
p.320 — RealVision™ sonar display settings LightHouse 4 v4.0.85 New features
LightHouse 4 v4.3.42 New features (Software release date: August 2022)
(Software release date: December 2022) New features:
• Mercury integration features: • Mercury VesselView features:
– Added support for Mercury VesselView autopilot control (Autoheading – Support for new VesselView Sport Exhaust mode. For details, refer to:
and Active route). For details, refer to: p.420 — Autopilot control p.426 — Sport exhaust
– Added support for Mercury VesselView Active Trim set up and control. – New VesselView steering angle indicator. For details, refer to:
For details, refer to: p.423 — Active Trim p.426 — Steering angle indicator
– Added support for Mercury VesselView primary display. For details, – New VesselView On Board Diagnostics (OBD) indicator. For details,
refer to: p.417 — Mercury SmartCraft helm grouping refer to: p.428 — On Board Diagnostics (OBD)
• New rudder bar indicator in Chart app: For details, refer to: – New VesselView advanced engine data page. For details, refer to:
p.218 — Rudder bar indicator p.426 — Engine data page
• Added ability to enable Galileo satellite constellation. For details, refer • Sirius Fish Mapping:
to: p.98 — GNSS settings – New Fish mapping chart mode available on SR200 receivers. For details,
refer to: p.255 — Fishing chart mode
LightHouse 4 v4.1.140 New features
– Fish mapping and weather layers available in Fishing chart mode. For
(Software release date: October 2022) details, refer to: p.255 — Fishing intel menu
• Mercury VesselView features: • Sirius Weather features:
– Cruise control. For details, refer to: p.425 — Cruise control – New Sea Surface Temperature (SST) transparency control. For details,
– Troll control. For details, refer to: p.424 — Troll control refer to: p.268 — Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers
544
 – New 10 nm range for weather watchbox. For details, refer to:
p.272 — Weather settings menu
– New legend in weather mode. For details, refer to:
p.263 — Weather mode main menu
• Homescreen
– Support for custom user background images for the startup
screen (splashscreen) and homescreen. For details, refer to:
p.118 — Splashscreen and background images
– Data widget (Dynamic tiles). For details, refer to:
p.95 — Homescreen Dynamic tile
• Chart app
– Added support for Imray electronic charts. For details, refer to:
Third-party raster charts
– New route highlighting feature. For details, refer to:
p.160 — Route highlighting
– Added ability to view historical Navionics SonarChart Live in chart app.
For details, refer to: p.247 — Depth settings menu
– Added Relief shading and SonarChart shading options to Navionics
overlays. For details, refer to: p.244 — Layers settings menu
– Added ability to use Speed Over Ground (SOG) instead of Speed
Through Water (STW) for heading vector: For details, refer to:
p.199 — Vessel details
• Fish detection algorithm improved to support CP100, CP370, CP470 and
CP570 sonar modules. For details, refer to: p.317 — Fish detection
• Added support for multi-zone volume controls for compatible JL Audio
and Rockford Fosgate entertainment systems: For details, refer to:
p.484 — Adjusting multi-zone controls
• Spotify app will be removed when a factory reset is performed. For details,
refer to: p.33 — Spotify app removal
• Radar [Target expansion] setting has been renamed to [Expanded returns].
See: p.356 — Preferences settings menu

LightHouse 4 software release history 545

Appendix D Peripheral product software LightHouse 4 v4.5.84
compatibility Product Minimum software version
• Alpha 7 performance display First release
The tables below identify the minimum software versions required for
(E70649)
peripheral Raymarine products to maintain compatibility with the latest
features and improvements in the LightHouse 4 operating system. • Alpha 9 performance display
(E70650)
Note: • RSW Wired wind transducer First release
It is recommended that you always update devices to the latest available • RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.5.84
versions. • RVM1600 (E70665) sonar module

LightHouse 4 v4.6.42 / v4.6.74 LightHouse 4 v4.4.87

Product Minimum software version
Product New software
version • RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.4.87
• RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.6.74 • RVM1600 (E70665) sonar module
• RVM1600 (E70665) sonar module
LightHouse 4 v4.4.70
• RS150 (E70310) GNSS (GPS) Receiver v1.29 (Required for
LED [Off] and [Find Product Minimum software version
me] settings.) • RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.4.70
• AR200 (E70537) Augmented reality GNSS (GPS) v1.33 (Required for • RVM1600 (E70665) sonar module
and heading sensor. LED [Off] and [Find
me] settings.) • CP470 (E70298) sonar module v22.0.15
• EV-1 (E70096) autopilot sensor core v3.15 (Required for • CP570 (E70258) sonar module
LED [Off] and [Find • p70 (E22166) / p70s (E70328) v3.12
• EV-2 (E70097) autopilot sensor core
me] settings.) pilot controllers
• p70 (E22166) / p70s (E70328) pilot controllers v3.13 (Required to • p70R (E22167) / p70Rs (E70329)
support MFD Wind pilot controllers
• p70R (E22167) / p70Rs (E70329) pilot controllers
vane mode.)
• Evolution™ autopilots EV-1 v3.14
• RMK9 (A80217) keypad v20.0.17 (E70096) sensor
• RMK10 (T70293) keypad • Evolution™ autopilots EV-2
(E70097) sensor

546
 Product Minimum software version
• SeaTalkng ® auxiliary alarm v1.06
buzzer (A80614)
• RMK9 (A80217) keypad v20.0.16
• RMK10 (T70293) keypad

LightHouse 4 v4.3.54
Product Minimum software version
• RMK9 (A80217) keypad v20.0.15
• RMK10 (T70293) keypad
• RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.3.54
• RVM1600 (E70665) sonar module

LightHouse 4 v4.1.140
Product Minimum software version
• RMK9 (A80217) keypad v20.0.15
• RMK10 (T70293) keypad
• RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.1.140

LightHouse 4 v4.0.85
Product Minimum software version
• RMK9 (A80217) keypad v20.0.8
• RMK10 (T70293) keypad
• RVX1000 (E70511) sonar module v4.0.85
• CP100 (E70204) sonar module v21.0.04
• CP200 (E70256) sonar module
• CP370 (E70297) sonar module
• CP470 (E70298) sonar module
• CP570 (E70258) sonar module

Peripheral product software compatibility 547

Appendix E Hardware and software compatibility • Fischer Panda generators (via GP203 with firmware version 2.1.0.18 or
greater):
The lists below identify the LightHouse 4 software version required to
– P8 mini Digital
support the listed hardware and also the hardware’s software version
required to be compatible with the latest features and improvements in the – P9 mini Digital
LightHouse 4 operating system. – P12 mini Digital

Note: – P15 mini Digital

When upgrading your display’s software, it is important to ensure that LightHouse 4 v4.3.54
you also upgrade any networked Raymarine products to their latest
available software versions. The LightHouse 4 software package available • Axiom 2 Pro displays.
on the website also includes the latest software for networked products. • RVM1600 sonar module (E70665).
• CAM300 IP camera (E70660).
LightHouse 4 software download link
LightHouse 4 v4.1.140
https://www.raymarine.com/en-us/download/lighthouse-4-update-for-
• YachtSense ™ Link router (E70640).
axiom-chartplotters
• Raymarine app v2.0.
LightHouse 4 v4.6.74 • Support for DJI™ drone (UAV) removed.
• NeuBoat Dock Basic System, part number: E70699.
LightHouse 4 v4.0.85
LightHouse 4 v4.5.84
• CP100 (E70204) — Bundle v21.0.04 (application v21.0.22 / platform
• Alpha performance displays. v21.0.20).
• RNS-8 PoE network switch. • CP200 (E70256) — Bundle v21.0.04 (application v21.0.22 / platform
• RSW-Wired wind transducer. v21.0.20).
• Rhodan trolling motor (via Rhodan gateway with compatible firmware • CP370 (E70297) — Bundle v21.0.04 (application v21.0.22 / platform
version). v21.0.20).
• CP470 (E70298) — Bundle v21.0.04 (application v21.0.22 / platform
LightHouse 4 v4.4.87 v21.0.20).
• Axiom 2 XL displays. • CP570 (E70258) — Bundle v21.0.04 (application v21.0.22 / platform
• Fischer Panda generators (via Fischer Panda Communication Interface v21.0.20).
FP-CAN to NMEA 2000 (Part number: 0031409), running software version • RVX1000 (E70511) — v4.0.70 (same version number as MFD software).
2.11 or later):
• RMK-9 (A80217) — Bundle v20.0.8 (application v20.0.15, / platform
– Perfect Power (iSeries) v18.0.17).
– Compact Power (excluding ‘Basic line’) • RMK-10 (A80438 / T70293) — Bundle v20.0.8 (application v20.0.15, /
– Hybrid Power platform v18.0.17).
548
Legacy eS and gS Series compatibility with Axiom displays Display Compatibility in mixed systems featuring eS/gS
As Raymarine® continues to develop new features and capabilities for the Series displays
LightHouse™ 4 operating system, the ability to downgrade some Axiom® Axiom® Pro Yes — Software must be downgraded to LightHouse
models to LightHouse™ software version v3.11.42 (for the purposes of allowing (pre-September v3.11.42
mixed networks of Axiom and legacy eS/gS Series displays) has ended. 2022)
Axiom® Pro No — Axiom® Pro displays manufactured after
Note: (post-September August 2022, and beginning with the following
Axiom® Pro displays manufactured after August 2022 can no longer be 2022) serial numbers, are NOT compatible with mixed
downgraded to a version of LightHouse which is compatible with mixed systems featuring eS/gS Series displays:
systems which include legacy eS and gS Series displays. • Axiom® Pro 9 RVX — E70371-1027106
The following table lists Axiom® displays and their compatibility status with • Axiom® Pro 12 RVX — E70372-0923640
legacy eS/gS Series displays:
• Axiom® Pro 16 RVX — E70373-1127908
• Axiom® Pro 9 S — E70481-1026853
Display Compatibility in mixed systems featuring eS/gS • Axiom® Pro 12 S — E70482-0924052
Series displays
• Axiom® Pro 16 S — E70483-1026473
Axiom® Yes — Software must be downgraded to LightHouse
v3.11.42 If you wish to continue using a mixed system of newer Axiom displays
Axiom® + No — NOT compatible with eS/gS systems. The and legacy eS/gS displays, you must ensure that these displays are NOT
LightHouse OS cannot be downgraded connected on the same RayNet or SeaTalkng networks.
Axiom® XL Yes — Software must be downgraded to LightHouse
v3.11.42
Axiom® 2 XL No — NOT compatible with eS/gS systems. The
LightHouse 4 OS cannot be downgraded
Axiom® 2 Pro No — NOT compatible with eS/gS systems. The
LightHouse 4 OS cannot be downgraded

Hardware and software compatibility 549

Appendix F Ethernet (IPv4) networking of Client / Server device Example(s)
Raymarine devices with third-party products Raymarine IPv4 DHCP client • Radar scanner (e.g. Quantum)

Raymarine uses a custom Ethernet (IPv4) networking configuration. Use • Sonar module (e.g. CP470)
the following information to help you understand how Raymarine’s Ethernet • IP camera (e.g. CAM300)
(IPv4) implementation interacts with third-party Ethernet (IPv4) devices on
Raymarine IPv4 DHCP server and • Multifunction display (MFD /
your vessel, such as routers, switches, Access Points (APs) etc.
self-addressing device Chartplotter), running LightHouse
3 or LightHouse 4 (e.g. Axiom)
Important: • Marine Router (e.g. YachtSense
• Third-party networking products such as routers, switches, and Access Link Router)
Points (APs) may work when connected to Raymarine networks, when Third-party IPv4 DHCP client IP camera
configured correctly. However, correct operation is not guaranteed. It’s
important to refer to the instructions provided by the relevant third-party Third-party IPv4 DHCP server • Router
device manufacturer, to ensure that your intended use of a third-party • Switch
device is consistent with the device’s design intent.
• Access Point (AP)
• Raymarine does not warrant that Raymarine products are compatible with
products manufactured by any person or entity other than Raymarine.
• When using third-party products in your Raymarine electronics network, Note:
you should be aware of, and understand, the concepts and limitations The DHCP server maintains a pool of IP addresses and “leases” an address
described in the following Disclaimer: p.25 — Disclaimer to any DHCP-enabled client, when the client device first powers up and
announces its presence on the network. Because the IP addresses are
dynamic (leased) rather than static (permanently assigned), addresses no
Overview longer in use are automatically returned to the DHCP server’s pool, for
• Ethernet (IPv4) networking is a method for interconnecting multiple subsequent reallocation.
electronic devices, allowing many devices to function in a network and
share data using only a single RJ45 or RayNet connection for each device.
It’s also possible to have multiple DHCP servers issuing addresses on an
• In order to function correctly, every Ethernet (IPv4) device (whether IPv4 network, but to avoid addressing conflicts, all DHCP servers must be
Raymarine or third-party) must have a unique IP address allocated to it, and carefully configured to only allocate IP addresses in distinct address ranges.
it must not conflict with that of any other device. The subnet mask must also be carefully configured, to ensure that devices
can correctly communicate with one another.
• IPv4 addresses can be centrally-allocated to devices either automatically,
using a method known as DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), or
manually (i.e. allocated a static IP address). The most common method for
Implementation
allocating IPv4 addresses on vessel electronics networks is DHCP. In this • Raymarine Ethernet (IPv4) devices expect to use a private Raymarine IPv4
configuration, the server device is known as a DHCP server. network, which is designed to be internal to the vessel only. Raymarine
has carefully chosen a specific IP address range (198.18.0.0/21 ) to ensure
that it does not interfere with any external IP address ranges, or other
legacy and real-world addressing constraints (including but not limited
to marina Wi-Fi networks).
550
 Note: Raymarine’s IP address range is for local traffic within the Note: Any Raymarine LightHouse 3 or LightHouse 4 MFDs will
vessel’s private Raymarine network only, and does NOT traverse still self-allocate their own IP address, even if a third-party DHCP
across Raymarine products to external networks, or to the Internet. server is being used to allocate IP addresses to other Raymarine or
non-Raymarine DHCP client devices (Camera, Radar, Sonar etc.) on
the network.
• In a Raymarine Ethernet (IPv4) network, IP addresses are self-allocated
by certain Raymarine equipment in the following range: 198.18.0.32 to
198.18.3.255 (inclusive). You must avoid placing any devices in this 3. Manually configure static IP addresses for your devices. The address
range using manual (static) IP addresses. range 198.18.0.32 to 198.18.3.255 (inclusive) is used by Raymarine
equipment, and any other third-party equipment on the network should
• Whether your network includes only Raymarine Ethernet (IP) devices, or a not be set to a static IP address in this range. It should instead be set
mixture of Raymarine and third-party Ethernet (IPv4) devices, you have 3 elsewhere in the 198.18.0.0/21 range.
options for configuring the Ethernet (IPv4) network and managing the IP
addresses for your devices: Adding third-party devices to your Raymarine Ethernet (IP)
1. Use a Raymarine device as the sole DHCP server to allocate IP network
addresses automatically to all Raymarine and third-party Ethernet
• It is recommended that any third-party products connecting to a Raymarine
(IPv4) devices on the network. For the purposes of simplicity and
Ethernet (IPv4) network (e.g., a third-party IP camera) are configured as
reliability, this is the recommended option for most vessels. The
DHCP clients, so that they automatically get allocated a correct IP address
following Raymarine devices can act as DHCP servers:
within the range used by the Raymarine IPv4 network. If this is not
a. Raymarine multifunction display (MFD) / Chartplotter, running possible, (for example, in the scenario that your third-party IP Camera
LightHouse 3 or LightHouse 4; or: requires a static IP address), you should configure the product to have
a static IP address within the following range: 198.18.0.1 to 198.18.0.31
b. Raymarine YachtSense Link Router
(inclusive).
• Any third-party router in your network should be performing IPv4 Network
Note: If both a Raymarine MFD and YachtSense Link Router are Address Translation (NAT) from the private address to another one on an
present in the same network, the YachtSense Link Router MUST be upstream interface.
configured as the DHCP server for that network. To facilitate this, the
Raymarine MFD's DHCP setting defaults to Automatic as standard. On Configuring a third-party router as DHCP server
power up, if the YachtSense Link is detected in the RayNet system,
any MFDs in the network will disable their own DHCP Server, to In the scenario that you wish to use a third-party DHCP server to allocate the
permit the YachtSense Link to manage the network's IP addresses. IP addresses for your vessel’s IPv4 network, use the following information
Only Raymarine MFDs running LightHouse 4 are compatible with the to help you configure the third-party DHCP server to work with Raymarine
YachtSense Link Router. Additionally, the most recent versions of the Ethernet (IPv4) client devices:
LightHouse 4 and YachtSense Link software must be used. 1. Configure the third-party DHCP server / router to use Raymarine's subnet
details, which are as follows:
2. Use a third-party Ethernet (IPv4) device (such as a router or Access a. Set the DHCP server's IP address to 198.18.0.1
Point) to allocate IP addresses automatically, as a sole DHCP server. b. Set the netmask to /21, i.e. 255.255.248.0
To do this, refer to the Configuring a third-party router as DHCP server
c. Set the DHCP range from 198.18.4.0 to 198.18.7.254 (inclusive). If
section, below.
this is not possible, ensure that the address range is smaller than this
(but within the range of 198.18.4.0 to 198.18.7.254 (inclusive)).
Ethernet (IPv4) networking of Raymarine devices with third-party products 551
 d. The address range 198.18.0.32 to 198.18.3.255 (inclusive) is used
by Raymarine equipment, and therefore you must ensure that any
other third-party equipment on the network is NOT set to a static
IP address in this range.
2. It may be necessary to set the DHCP setting for all of the MFDs on the
vessel to [Off]. However, the default option ([Auto]) will likely work fine in
many cases. If for any reason the third-party DHCP server starts up after
the MFD starts up, the user should manually set the MFD's DHCP switch
to [Off]. This is because, when the MFD starts up, its DHCP [Auto] feature
tries to detect if another DHCP server is already present on the network.
3. In case of failure of the third-party device, the MFDs can be easily
configured to be the DHCP server again, by setting the MFD’s DHCP
setting back to [Auto].

Adding third-party Wi-Fi Access Points / Wi-Fi routers to your

Raymarine Ethernet (IPv4) network
• There is a large volume of multicast IPv4 traffic on the Raymarine Ethernet
(IPv4) network. Many consumer Wi-Fi Access Points / Wi-Fi routers simply
bridge all multicast traffic from the Ethernet interface to the Wi-Fi interface
when there are connected Wi-Fi clients. This will result not only in poor
Wi-Fi performance but also in a reduction of usable Wi-Fi spectrum to other
Wi-Fi users and vessels in the vicinity. If using a third-party Wi-Fi Access
Point or Wi-Fi router, Raymarine recommends that IGMP Snooping is
enabled on the third-party device, and additional checks are performed, in
order to ensure that your device is not bridging any unexpected multicast
traffic to its Wi-Fi interface from the Raymarine Ethernet (IPv4) network.
• Raymarine’s YachtSense Link Router is pre-configured with IGMP Snooping
enabled, and therefore does not bridge internal multicast traffic on the
wired network to the Wi-Fi network. No additional configuration is required
in this respect.

552
Appendix G Android apk compatibility
Axiom and Axiom 2 displays are based on different versions of the Android
operating system.
• Axiom displays are based on Android 6.0 (API 23) ARM7a (32-bit) system.
• Axiom 2 displays are based on Android 11.0 (API 30) ARM64 (64-bit) system.
This means that different versions of apps may be required for each platform.
The list below shows the latest Raymarine approved apps which are
compatible with Axiom and Axiom 2 displays.
App name Axiom Axiom 2 Comments
AnyDesk™ V 7.1.0 V 7.1.0
Bouyweather® V 1.0.2 Not supported New versions
are no longer
supported.
Kinetix™ V 1.0 Not supported Does not work
on Axiom XL
Netflix® V 7.120.0 build 7 V 8.95.0 build 13
35589 50554
NV Charts Not supported V 2.718.200
PredictWind® V 4.9.4.0 V 5.0.1.0
PredictWind® V 6.7.1.4 V 7.0.3.0 Map flickers
Offshore black on Axiom
Spotify® V 8.8.88.397 V 8.8.88.397
TheyR™ V 5.6.2 V 5.6.2
Gribview
Windy™ V 27.3.1 V 40.0.7 Map flickers
black on Axiom

Android apk compatibility 553

Appendix H Glossary Term Meaning
Navigation glossary Cross Track Error The amount of deviation from your intended course,
(XTE) expressed as a distance. In the event that you steer
Common terms and abbreviations used in navigation. off-track, you can create a new course to the target
Term by selecting “Restart XTE” on your pilot controller
Meaning
or multifunction display.
Active navigation Active navigation is the term used when the display
Follow The action whereby the display is placed in active
is performing navigation to a destination point.
navigation following a route.
The destination point can be a ‘Goto’ (to an
GNSS (Global A constellation of Earth orbiting satellites that can
onscreen cursor position or a single waypoint), or
Navigation Satellite be used to plot latitude, longitude, altitude, Course
part of a ‘Follow’ (to a waypoint within a route).
System) Over Ground (COG), and Speed Over Ground (SOG).
AIS (Automatic A tracking system enabling you to receive positional
Goto The action whereby the display is placed in active
Identification information broadcast by other vessels, and to
navigation travelling to a cursor location or a single
System) transmit positional information for your own vessel.
waypoint.
AIS is used to identify, locate and track marine
vessels in the chart and radar applications. Head up (HU / H-up) The chart or radar is orientated so as to show your
current heading directly ahead of your vessel icon
An AIS receiver or transceiver is required to view
at all times. As your vessel changes direction, the
AIS information.
chart or radar image rotates accordingly to reflect
Auto range A mode that ranges the chart application the new bearing.
automatically, to ensure both the vessel and target
In Head-up, the motion mode is fixed to Relative
waypoint are always visible.
motion.
Course Over Ground COG is the actual direction of travel, relative to fixed
Heading (HDG) Compass direction of travel. Heading can be
(COG) land. Vessel heading may differ from COG due to
relative to True north or Magnetic north.
the effects of currents, tide and wind.
Heading can be transmitted from a ship’s compass
COG is transmitted by GNSS (GPS) receivers.
or heading sensor.
Supported data:
Supported data:
• NMEA 2000: PGN 129026
• NMEA 2000: PGN 127237 / 127250
• NMEA 0183: RMC
• NMEA 0183: HDG / HDM / HDT
Course up (CU / The chart or radar is orientated so as to show your
C-up) current course directly ahead of your vessel icon.
The chart will rotate so that your Course Over
Ground (COG) is always upward on the screen.

554
 Term Meaning Term Meaning
Latitude (Lat) A geographic coordinate which indicates the Speed Through The speed of your vessel through the water, also
position of a point on the Earth that is either north Water (STW) known as boat speed. Due to tide and current this
or south of the equator. When provided as a will be different than Speed Over Ground (SOG).
coordinate, the number of degrees is determined
STW is measured by a speed transducer.
in relation to how far (0° to 90°) north or south the
coordinate is from the Earth’s equator — where 90° Supported data:
refers to either the North Pole or South Pole and • NMEA 2000: PGN 128259
0° refers to the equator. One degree of latitude is
approximately equivalent to 60 nautical miles. • NMEA 0183: VHW
Longitude (Lon) A geographic coordinate which indicates the Time To Go (TTG) The time remaining until you reach the destination
position of a point on the Earth that is either east or point.
west of the prime meridian. When provided as a Track A visible trail displayed in the Chart app on a
coordinate, the number of degrees is determined multifunction display, showing the passage you
in relation to how far (0° to 180°) east or west the have taken. The trail consists of a series of track
coordinate is from the prime meridian. points which are created automatically. You can
North up (NU / N-up) The chart or radar image is orientated so that true save the track to create a permanent record of
north is always upward on the screen. As your where you have been. You can also create a new
vessel changes direction, vessel icon (chart) or ship route from a track.
heading line (radar) rotate accordingly to show your
relative position to true north.
Rate of Turn (RoT) RoT is the speed at which your vessel turns in a
given direction, typically when under autopilot
control.
Relative Motion In the Chart and Radar applications, relative motion
(RM) mode fixes your vessel’s position and the chart or
radar image moves relative to your vessel.
In Relative Motion mode you can use the [Boat
position] setting to determine whether the vessel
position is fixed in the Center of the chart display
or has a Partial offset, or Full offset. Selecting the
partial or full offset has the effect of increasing the
view ahead.
Route (RTE) A series of waypoints typically used to assist
with journey planning and navigation. A route is
displayed on screen as a series of waypoints linked
by a line.

Glossary 555
 Term Meaning Sailing glossary
True Motion (TM) True Motion mode fixes the chart position and Common terms and abbreviations used in sailing.
the vessel icon moves across the screen. As the Term Meaning
vessel’s position approaches the edge of the
screen, the chart image is automatically redrawn to Apparent Wind The wind flow observed when in motion, relative
reveal the area ahead of the vessel. to the boat’s heading. Apparent wind is different
from True wind in that it takes into account your
As the vessel’s position approaches the edge of own movement, i.e.: speed and direction of travel.
the display, the image is automatically redrawn to Apparent wind is the raw data that is reported
reveal the area ahead of the vessel. by wind transducers, which can then be used in
conjunction with other data sources to calculate
Note: True wind.
True Motion mode is not available when the Supported data:
orientation is set to “Head-up”. • NMEA 2000: PGN 130306
Waypoint (WPT) A position marked on the screen to indicate a • NMEA 0183: MWV
location to navigate to. Waypoint positions are Apparent Wind The wind angle observed when in motion, relative
defined by Longitude / Latitude coordinates, and Angle (AWA) to the boat’s heading. AWA is a combination of the
can be saved for future use. As well as acting as true angle of the wind and the angle that is felt due
position markers, waypoints are also the building to direction and speed of travel.
blocks used to create routes. Waypoints can be
created and displayed in the Chart, Radar, and Apparent Wind The wind speed observed when in motion. AWS is
Fishfinder apps on a multifunction display. Speed (AWS) a combination of the true speed of the wind and the
speed you are travelling.
Distance to Tack The travel distance remaining until you need to tack.
Distance to Line Distance remaining to the closest point along the
race start line.
Downwind Moving in the direction that the wind is blowing.
Ground Wind The direction of the wind relative to north, as
Direction (GWD) observed on land. This is the actual direction the
wind is blowing.
In addition to Apparent Wind Angle (AWA), Course
Over Ground (COG) from a GNSS receiver is also
required in order to calculate GWD.

556
 Term Meaning Term Meaning
Ground Wind Speed The wind speed observed when stationary, as Sail plan Sail configuration recommendations based on wind
(GWS) observed on land. GWS is the actual speed the conditions.
wind is blowing over land. Sailing close to the wind direction.
Sailing upwind
In addition to Apparent Wind Speed (AWS), Speed
Tack A course change made by a sailing vessel, by
Over Ground (SOG) data from a GNSS receiver is
turning its heading into and through the wind.
also required in order to calculate GWS.
Tacking The zig-zag manoeuvre a sailing vessel makes
Header A wind shift which causes your boat to turn more when travelling upwind.
downwind.
Time To Burn (TTB) The time remaining during race start countdown
Laylines Vector lines showing the course the boat will take before the boat needs to start moving towards the
when sailing at the optimum angle to the wind, on start line at full speed.
either tack.
Time to Tack The amount of time remaining until you need to
Leeway The difference in angle between desired heading tack, if the current course and speed are maintained
and actual course, caused by sideways movement based on the calculated laylines..
of a sailing boat due to the wind.
True Wind The actual wind flow; it is the wind flow you feel, on
Lift A wind shift which allows your boat to turn upwind the water, when stationary. True wind is calculated
and closer to your destination. from Apparent wind data from a wind transducer
Line bias The distance advantage conferred by crossing the and STW (Speed Through Water) from a speed
start line at the favored end (the end which is more transducer.
upwind) of the race start line. The angle of the wind over water, relative to the
True Wind Angle
Polar table A performance profile for a boat, showing the boat (TWA) boat’s bow, observed when stationary.
speed achievable at varying angles to the wind, with
True Wind Direction The direction of the wind relative to north. This is
varying wind speed. In sailing, the Velocity Made
(TWD) the actual direction the wind is blowing.
Good (VMG) principle demonstrates that travelling
in a straight line is not always the quickest route, In addition to Speed Through Water (STW), Heading
and polars enable you to optimize your vessel's is also required to calculate TWD.
performance to its best advantage, by improving True Wind Speed The wind speed observed when stationary, on the
the accuracy of laylines to display how far you (TWS) water. TWS is the actual speed the wind is blowing
need to sail on a current tack to reach a target over water.
waypoint after tacking, and taking wind conditions
into consideration. Velocity Made Good Sailing term related to the component of a sail
(VMG) vessel’s velocity vector that is in the direction of
RSW (Raymarine The Raymarine Smart Wind transducer series. The true wind.
Smart Wind) RSW series of transducers include a built-in attitude
sensor, which is used to provide more accurate Wind shift The amount of variation in True Wind Direction
readings than standard wind transducers. (TWD) over time.

Glossary 557
Appendix I Document change history Document revision
and (Date) Changes
Document revision
and (Date) Changes name changed from [Initial direction] to [1st leg
direction].
81406 Rev 11 • Updated New features list to reflect v4.6.74.
(02–2024) • Added THS to supported NMEA 0183
• Added note to Fuel range ring details. sentences.
Software version:
v4.6.74 • Added additional Fischer Panda generators to • Added details of new target data reference
compatible hardware list for v4.4.70 v4.4.87. mode options in Radar app.
• Added NV charts to supported apk list in • Added details on new [Quick adjust] menu in
appendix. the Chart app.
• Added details of the new SeaTalk NG factory • Added details of the new [Nav marks] waypoint
reset option. symbols.
• Increased AIS target capacity to 200. • Added details of new [Fuel range] ring in Chart
81406 Rev 10 • Updated New features list to reflect v4.6.42. app.
(12–2023) • Added details of the new Generator [Start]/[Stop]
• Added full details for AIS and Radar target
Software version: options.
context menus in Chart app and Radar app
v4.6.42
• Added Mercury [Steering angle] to [Boat data] • Added details of the following new data items:
items and [Pilot data] items. [Next leg TWA] , [Target apparent wind angle],
[Target true wind angle], [Maximum SOG (All
• Added [Maximum SOG (All time)] to [GPS] and time)], [Opp. tack COG] and [Next track leg
[Speed] data categories. bearing].
• Removed UAV chapter and UAV settings details • Renamed [Tack heading] to [Opp. tack heading].
in Chart app chapter.
• Added details of new SkyHook Mercury feature
• Added details of new High speed alarm in to Mercury chapter.
Alarms chapter.
• Updated Android apk compatibility list.
• Added details of new [Always off] and [Find me]
options for position sensor LEDs. • Updated Document change history to reflect
Rev 10 changes.
• Added details of Route broadcast and receipt to
81406 Rev 09 • Updated ‘Software update’ details.
First responder chapter.
(12–2023)
• Added Networking constraints to Getting started
• Added details of new Intercept distance and Software version:
chapter.
time indication in target context menus. v4.5.101
• Added YouTube and YouTube TV chapter.
• Creeping line SAR pattern parameter named
changed from [Creep direction] to [Search • Added YouTube and YouTube TV to available
orientation]. Parallel line SAR pattern parameter MFD apps.

558
 Document revision Document revision
and (Date) Changes and (Date) Changes
• Added apk compatibility table to appendix. • Updated checking for software updates online
to cover wired connections.
• Added distraction disclaimer to entertainment
app chapter. • Added details of connection changes for
YachtSense Link router software v4.20.
• Added Neuboat dock system to hardware
compatibility. • Added IP Address conflict troubleshooting.
• Added IP networking guidance to appendix.
Note: • Updated Hardware compatibility and Product
v4.5.101 was not formally released. The feature software compatibility lists.
was first available in v4.6.42 • Added Alpha display to sidebars and details of
• Added new warnings covering anti virus operations via MFD.
81406 Rev 08
(09–2023) protection and changing display mode in night • Added PGN 130579 (Entertainment) to
Software version: conditions. supported PGN list.
v4.5.84
• Added Peripheral product software compatibility • Added details of the new Wind shift bar.
tables to appendix.
• Added details of Wind vane mode.
• Added New feature introduction lists to
appendix. • Added details of RSW wind transducer
configuration.
• Added LightHouse software compatibility details
to software chapter. • Added new Trolling motor control chapter.

• Added sail plan details to Settings menu details, • Added diagnostic details for RNS-8.
Boat details menu and Alarms Manager. • Added details of NeuBoat Dock app to MFD app
• Added Sail plan feature details. details.

• Added new Sailing features chapter and • Merged First Responder and SAR pattern
reorganized existing Chart app chapters. chapter with the LH3 USCG LightHouse
operating instructions, document number:
• Added sail plan data items to Boat category list. 81405.
• Updated sail performance settings menu • Added details of new context menu drag in
descriptions. Radar app.
• Update Layline details. • Added details of new data response settings to
• Added polar manager details. Dashboard app chapter.

• Updated details for connecting the display to the • Added details of NMEA 2000 and NMEA 0183
internet and moved to Getting started chapter. diagnostics menus.

Document change history 559

 Document revision Document revision
and (Date) Changes and (Date) Changes
• Updated LightHouse charts store details to • Updated Chart app Waypoint goto and route
reflect direct purchase. follow task to include tasks for manual steering
and autopilot steering for each.
• Added note on minimum range for ClearCruise
object detection. • Updated chart app overview paragraphs
re-written and updated to use screenshots
• Added details of DST810 auto STW calibration.
showing LightHouse 4.
• The Laylines and Race Start feature details have
• Expanded details for chart motion, chart
been updated to add clarifications and further
orientation and vessel icon settings in chart app
detail.
chapter.
• Added glossary to appendix.
• The ‘VesselView’ app has been renamed
81406 Rev 07b • Added details of expiring LightHouse chart ‘Mercury’ app.
(07–2023) subscriptions.
Software version • Added details for changing Quantum radar
v4.4.87 internal channel.

81406 Rev 07 • Added details of Fishfinder zoom mode • Added references to Axiom 2 XL displays.
(03–2023) including new 50:50 split view and changing • Added details for ending support for
Software version: zoom box size to the Fishfinder app chapter. downgrading Axiom Pro to v3.11.42.
v4.4.70/v4.4.87
• Added Frequency tuning details to Fishfinder • Added details of new Mode icons on
app chapter. Homescreen.
• Updated cartography selection details in Chart • Updated Chart app chapter Racing mode layline
app chapter. details with new screenshots and rewritten
• Updated Spotify app removal details. details.

• Added details of Generator configuration • Changed Fishfinder RealVision 3D channel

settings. name references to 3D Vision.

• Added details of new Generators dashboard • Removed ‘TVG’ sensitivity control from
page. Fishfinder app.

• Added details of generator data items to data • Added 100 radar targets for Cyclone software
item list. v1.25 or later.

• Updated taking screenshot details • Added details of new ‘Tuned’ and

including changing image save location 50/100/200 kHz sonar channels.
to: \Raymarine\Image files\. • Added details of peripheral product software
• Added details of Auto turn to The Chart app updates required for v4.4.87.
chapter’s navigation section. 81406 Rev 06 • Added references to Axiom 2 MFDs throughout
560
 Document revision Document revision
and (Date) Changes and (Date) Changes
(01–2023) • Updated product documentation to include • Added new RVM color palettes.
Software version: Axiom 2 Pro installation instructions.
v4.3.42/v4.3.54 • Added Axiom 2 Pro buttons to engaging and
• Updated New features list to reflect v4.3.42. disabling autopilot.
• Added Axiom 2 Pro to compatible displays. • Updated UAV support note.
• Added Axiom 2 Pro memory card insertion and • Added power on reset procedure for Axiom 2
removal procedures. Pro.
• Added Note about RCR-2 not being not • Updated note for NMEA 0183 support.
compatible with Axiom 2.
• Added Axiom 2 Pro and CAM300 to hardware
• Added Axiom 2 Pro physical control details. compatibility list.
• Added Axiom 2 Pro keypad selection details. • Updated document change history.
• Added RVM to AHRS calibration. 81406 Rev 05 • Added Mercury autopilot control details.
• Updated assigning user configurable key details (12–2022)
• Added Mercury auto trim details.
to include Axiom 2 Pro and added a list of Software version:
functions that can be assigned. v4.3.42 • Added new rudder bar details to chart app.

• Updated audio volume control to include RCA • Updated software references to v4.3.42.
audio. • Updated new features list to reflect v4.3.42
• Added details of auto brightness. features.

• Added details about Axiom 2 to software update • Added ‘Battery alarms’ and ‘Apps and connected
note. devices’ settings to alarm settings.

• Added details of Axiom 2 GNSS receiver • Dashboard app chapter re-written.

compatibility. • Moved alarms manager details to dedicated
• Added keypad selection and UCK selection to chapter.
this display settings options. • Split document information and software version
• Added 'Keep network awake' option for Axiom details into separate chapters.
2. • Removed battery number selection from start-up
• Added Axiom 2 Pro screen resolutions. wizard boat details.

• Added note regarding NMEA 0183 on Axiom 2. • Updated document change history.

• Added details of Axiom 2 Pro pilot keypad LED • Updated details of factory reset procedure.
status. • Added procedures for exporting and importing
• Added RVM CHIRP sonar app depth range. digital switching configurations.
Document change history 561
 Document revision Document revision
and (Date) Changes and (Date) Changes
• Updated exporting user data and settings 81406 Rev 02 • Updated software references to v4.1.65.
procedures. (06–2022)
• Added VesselView cruise control details.
Software version:
• Added image flip and mirror details to video app. v4.1.65 • Added VesselView troll control details.
• Added details of UAV supported MFDs and • Added VesselView splitscreen app page details.
LightHouse versions.
• Added battery configuration details.
• Added UAV support removal from hardware
compatibility list. • Added details if waypoint symbol selection tabs.
• Split out Fishfinder app’s Sonar display settings • Added YachtSense Link alarms to alarm
into sections for each channel type. manager settings.
• Updated layout and presentation of Fishfinder • Added YachtSense ecosystem chapter.
app’s settings menus. • Added mobile sync option to My data page
81406 Rev 04 Minor revision to fix a formatting error. details.
(09–2022) • Updated screenshots in Homescreen chapter to
Software version: show LightHouse 4 UI.
v4.1.75/v4.1.140
• Added details of diagnostic sonar recording to
81406 Rev 03 • Updated software references to v4.1.75. Fishfinder chapter.
(09–2022)
• Updated Radar modes details to clarify that • Updated RealBathy and SonarChart live details
Software version:
Radar modes are not available on Digital and screenshots.
v4.1.75/v4.1.140
radomes (non-HD).
• Added list of depth and position
• Updated new features list to include logging/recording features.
performance improvements.
81406 Rev 01 First release.
• Updated LightHouse chart details to include (03–2022)
new regions. Software version:
v4.0.70/v4.0.77/v4.0.
82/v4.0.85

Note:
This document (81406) is based on another document (81370), which has a
longer history and includes a full historical list of changes to the LightHouse
3 software that occurred between versions v3.0.40 and v3.16.84. To see
this list, refer to the following document: 81370.
562
Index Alarm
Lost depth alarm ................................................................................ 363
3D Alarm manager ........................................................................................ 88
Waypoints ...........................................................................................316 Alarms
3D Vision Acknowledgement..............................................................................130
Controls ...............................................................................................311 AIS high target ................................................................................... 376
AIS safety messages...........................................................................129
Anchor drag ........................................................................................129
A Apps and connected devices .............................................................129
AX8 camera ........................................................................................129
Account transfer .....................................................................................513
Battery alarms.....................................................................................129
Activate Touchlock .................................................................................. 79
Cross track error (XTE)........................................................................128
active alarm indication............................................................................128
Dangerous ........................................................................................... 45
ActiveCaptain ........................................................................................ 246
Dangerous AIS targets........................................................................128
Adjust Locked heading............................................................................ 79
Dangerous Radar targets....................................................................128
Advance waypoint..................................................................................142
Deep water arrival ..............................................................................129
AIS ......................................................................................................... 244
Digital switching..................................................................................129
Buddy ................................................................................................ 227
DSC.....................................................................................................129
Enhanced AIS targets ........................................................................250
Engine.................................................................................................129
Full data .............................................................................................226
External speaker .................................................................................130
High target alarm ............................................................................... 376
Fishing range ......................................................................................129
Lost EPIRB .........................................................................................225
Generators..........................................................................................129
Lost MOB ...........................................................................................225
Guard zone 1 .......................................................................................128
Lost SART ..........................................................................................225
Guard zone 2 ......................................................................................128
Silent mode.........................................................................102, 227, 344
High speed alarm ...............................................................................132
Target capacity ...........................................................................225, 341
Lost Radar targets...............................................................................128
Target icons ............................................................................... 223, 342
Low fuel ..............................................................................................129
Target list .................................................................................... 227, 341
Minimum sonar depth .........................................................................129
Target options ................................................................................... 227
MOB data type....................................................................................129
Target tracking.................................................................................... 341
Obstruction ........................................................................................ 237
AIS PAD ................................................................................................. 245
Off track ..............................................................................................128
AIS target
Position drift........................................................................................129
Context menu ............................................................................ 194, 329
Sail recommendation ..........................................................................128
AIS targets ............................................................................................. 223
Shallow depth .....................................................................................129
AIS names.................................................................................. 227, 344
Shallow water arrival...........................................................................129
AIS types.................................................................................... 227, 344
Warning ............................................................................................... 45
Blue force .......................................................................................... 376
Water temperature..............................................................................129
Enhanced AIS targets ................................................................ 227, 343
Waypoint arrival ..................................................................................128
Enhanced icons ......................................................................... 224, 342
YachtSense Link router.......................................................................130
Enhanced target status .............................................................. 224, 343
Alarms Alarms
Show .......................................................................................... 227, 343
Digital switching...................................................................................131
Static targets.............................................................................. 227, 344
Alarms manager .....................................................................................128
AIS, Buddy ............................................................................................. 465
 Active alarms ...................................................................................... 127 Multi-zone .......................................................................................... 484
Alarms history ..................................................................................... 127 Multi-zone control .............................................................................. 483
Alarms settings ................................................................................... 127 Opening ............................................................................................. 479
Settings...............................................................................................128 Player controls ................................................................................... 476
Alarms, warnings and information notifications....................................... 45 Reset.................................................................................................. 483
Align wind transducer.............................................................................. 74 Settings.............................................................................................. 482
Aligning the rudder.................................................................................136 Source ...............................................................................................480
Anchoring Zones.................................................................................................480
Anchor drag ....................................................................................... 284 Audio controls ....................................................................................... 476
Chain out ........................................................................................... 284 Audio receiver ....................................................................................... 475
Mark anchor position ......................................................................... 284 Audio sidebar ........................................................................................ 478
Anchoring wizard................................................................................... 283 Augmented Reality ................................................................................ 457
Android apk AIS targets ......................................................................................... 466
Compatibility ...................................................................................... 553 AR200 setup.......................................................................................461
Versions ............................................................................................. 553 Camera installation and setup ........................................................... 458
apk......................................................................................................... 105 Cartography source ........................................................................... 466
App launcher ...................................................................................88, 499 ClearCruise settings .......................................................................... 466
App page icons ....................................................................................... 88 Compass bar............................................................................. 465–466
App pages Compass lock .................................................................................... 469
Creating ............................................................................................... 94 Compass offset .................................................................................. 469
Customizing ......................................................................................... 94 Current reading.................................................................................. 469
Delete .................................................................................................. 94 Deviation............................................................................................ 469
Rename................................................................................................ 94 Flags ......................................................................................... 463–464
Applicable documents............................................................................. 28 Goto flag ............................................................................................ 465
Applications............................................................................................. 88 Overview............................................................................................ 463
Apps ........................................................................................................ 88 Range limit ......................................................................................... 466
LightHouse third-party ......................................................................... 42 Reset calibration ................................................................................ 469
MFD ..................................................................................................... 42 Roll correction.................................................................................... 467
AR200 ................................................................................................... 468 Troubleshooting ................................................................................529
Calibration.......................................................................................... 469 Waypoints .......................................................................................... 466
ARPA Augmented Reality, camera FOV .......................................................... 459
Data source requirements ................................................................. 344 Auto turn................................................................................................. 144
Audio .................................................................................................... 500 Automatic linearization .......................................................................... 470
Speaker volume................................................................................... 80 Automatic turning
Volume ................................................................................................ 79 Limits exceeded..................................................................................216
Audio app ................................................................................92, 475, 480 Autopilot
app controls ....................................................................................... 476 Adjust locked heading ......................................................................... 79
Balance .............................................................................................. 482 Advanced settings .............................................................................. 143
Crossover .......................................................................................... 482 Control ................................................................................................140
Diagnostics mode .............................................................................. 483 Debug ................................................................................................. 144
Fade................................................................................................... 482 Disengage ................................................................................... 141–142
Menu options ..................................................................................... 482 Engage or Disengage .......................................................................... 79
 Engaging..............................................................................................141 Bluetooth keyboard
Pop-ups............................................................................................... 143 Connection .......................................................................................... 63
Reset................................................................................................... 144 Controls ............................................................................................... 62
Shortcuts.............................................................................................. 80 Bluetooth Settings ................................................................................... 63
Sidebar ...............................................................................................142 Boat data ......................................................................... 51, 392, 432, 435
Standby................................................................................................141 Boat details.............................................................................................. 111
Status ..................................................................................................142 Tanks
Autopilot set-up Calibration.................................................................................115–116
Deadband angles ...............................................................................146 Calibration points ............................................................................ 115
Rudder Damping.................................................................................146 Boat length ............................................................................................. 112
Autorouting.............................................................................................162 Boat name .............................................................................................. 112
Boat type ................................................................................................ 112
Bow to GPS ............................................................................................ 112
B Bright sun .............................................................................................. 244
Back up Brightness .................................................................................. 79, 81, 120
Settings.............................................................................................. 105 Buddy, add to list from AR flag .............................................................. 465
User data ........................................................................................... 105 Buoy mode ............................................................................................ 339
Backup ...................................................................................................103
MFD settings...................................................................................... 106
Routes................................................................................................ 106
C
Tracks ................................................................................................ 106 Calibration ............................................................................................. 468
Waypoints .......................................................................................... 106 Automatic STW .................................................................................... 75
Battery Depth ............................................................................................. 71, 313
Configuration ................................................................................ 69, 113 DST810 .......................................................................................... 75–76
Battery configuration ...............................................................................113 iTC-5 .................................................................................................... 73
Battery data .............................................................................50, 392, 432 Linearization ...................................................................................... 468
Bearing alignment ................................................................................. 338 RealVision™ .......................................................................................... 72
Bearing mode.................................................................................. 118, 410 STW ..................................................................................................... 76
BeiDou..................................................................................................... 96 transducer............................................................................................ 73
Bidata page ........................................................................................... 404 Calibration lock....................................................................................... 144
Bird mode .............................................................................................. 339 Calibration sources................................................................................... 71
Blue Force Camera
AIS targets ......................................................................................... 376 Tracking ..................................................................................... 202, 331
Bluetooth Cartography
Audio .......................................................................................... 82, 502 Selection .............................................................................................196
Connection ........................................................................................ 501 Chart............................................................................................... 197, 247
Disabling ............................................................................................ 501 Advanced settings .............................................................................250
Enabling ............................................................................................. 501 Aerial overlay ..................................................................................... 246
pairing speaker ........................................................................... 82, 502 Aerial overlay coverage..................................................................... 246
Settings.............................................................................................. 501 Aerial overlay visibility ....................................................................... 246
Speaker volume.......................................................................... 80, 502 Anchor mode ...................................................................................... 197
Volume ........................................................................................79, 500 Auto find ship.....................................................................................250
Auto range ..........................................................................................198 Tide graph ......................................................................................... 277
Boat position.............................................................................. 198, 249 Tide graphic....................................................................................... 278
Cartographic objects .........................................................................250 Tide station ........................................................................................ 277
Chart orientation .................................................................................198 Tides .................................................................................................. 245
ClearCruise ........................................................................................ 242 Tides mode................................................................................. 197, 276
Controls ..............................................................................................192 True motion ........................................................................................198
Course-up ...........................................................................................198 View & motion settings ...................................................................... 249
Current animation .............................................................................. 276 Weather mode .................................................................................... 197
Current graph .................................................................................... 278 Weather settings................................................................................ 272
Current station ................................................................................... 278 Chart / Radar Sync.................................................................................229
Cursor info boxes ..............................................................................250 Chart app.......................................................................................... 89, 191
Depth settings ................................................................................... 247 Cartography selection ........................................................................196
Field of View (FOV) ............................................................................ 242 Context menu .....................................................................................194
Find nearest....................................................................................... 239 Fishing chart mode ............................................................................255
Fish mapping Fuel range ring.................................................................................. 200
Fishing Recommendations.............................................................259 Laylines..............................................................................................286
Layer identification.........................................................................260 Navigate mode .................................................................................. 253
Sea temp limits................................................................................261 Overview............................................................................................. 191
Fish mapping layers...........................................................................260 Quick adjust ........................................................................................193
Fish mapping mode ....................................................................197, 258 Racing mode......................................................................................286
Fishing mode ...................................................................................... 197 RealBathy............................................................................................221
Head-up ..............................................................................................198 Rudder bar indicator ...........................................................................218
Layer settings .................................................................................... 244 Simulator.............................................................................................192
Layers ................................................................................................ 201 Winds shift bar ................................................................................... 293
My data appearance ...........................................................................251 Chart appearance...................................................................................251
Navigate mode ................................................................................... 197 Chart appObject information
North-up..............................................................................................198 Cursor info boxes .............................................................................. 201
Race start line ....................................................................................300 Chart detail ............................................................................................ 244
Racing mode....................................................................................... 197 Chart motion.......................................................................................... 249
Radar overlay.....................................................................................250 Auto range ......................................................................................... 249
Radar settings ....................................................................................229 Motion modes..................................................................................... 197
Relative motion ...................................................................................198 Relative motion .................................................................................. 249
Safe contour ...................................................................................... 247 True motion ....................................................................................... 249
Search for objects.............................................................................. 239 Chart Object Size .................................................................................. 244
Shallow area ...................................................................................... 247 Chart orientation........................................................................... 249–250
Shallow contour ................................................................................. 247 Course-up ................................................................................. 249–250
Show soundings ................................................................................ 247 Head-up .................................................................................... 249–250
SOG for vectors .................................................................................250 North-up.................................................................................... 249–250
Sync view with other charts ............................................................... 249 Chart racing mode
Tide animation ................................................................................... 276 Distance To Line ................................................................................ 303
Tide animation interval ......................................................................250 Edit Line ............................................................................................. 303
Tide bar.............................................................................................. 278 Line Bias ............................................................................................ 303
 Race Timer......................................................................................... 303 Compass lock ......................................................................... 135, 140, 470
Time To Burn ..................................................................................... 303 Compatible displays ................................................................................. 31
Chart settings Compatible entertainment systems............................................... 475–476
Page settings menu ............................................................................251 Compatible hardware ............................................................................ 548
Chart Store ................................................................................... 204, 492 Compatible software ............................................................................. 546
Chart style ............................................................................................. 244 Connecting
Chart, RayControl ......................................................................................... 496
Modes .................................................................................................196 RayRemote ........................................................................................ 497
Checking rudder drive............................................................................138 RayView ............................................................................................. 497
CHIRP Connection
DownVision™ overview ......................................................................306 NMEA 0183 .........................................................................................125
RealVision™ 3D Connections ............................................................................................ 87
3D Vision........................................................................................308 Bluetooth ........................................................................................... 501
Sonar overview ..................................................................................305 Internet ......................................................................................... 83–85
Technology ........................................................................................305 MFD ...................................................................................................504
Cleaning .................................................................................................. 25 Wi-Fi.............................................................................................. 84–85
ClearCruise YachtSense System ...........................................................................504
Augmented Reality ............................................................................ 459 Contact details....................................................................................... 536
Augmented Reality (AR) ..................................................................... 457 Context menu .........................................................................................194
Object detection ................................................................ 457, 461–462 Context menus ........................................................................................ 44
close hauled indicators..........................................................................402 Controls
Close hauled indicators.........................................................................402 Bluetooth keyboard ............................................................................. 62
Coastal mode ........................................................................................ 339 Chart ...................................................................................................192
COG / SOG filter ............................................................................... 99, 101 Dashboard .........................................................................................390
Collision avoidance Fishfinder ............................................................................................310
Course change .......................................................................... 233, 235 Radar ................................................................................................. 328
Moving target..................................................................................... 232 Uni-controller ........................................................................................61
Predicted Area of Danger zone ..........................................................231 Video app .......................................................................................... 442
Predicted areas of danger ................................................................. 232 Yamaha app........................................................................................ 431
Speed change .......................................................................... 234–235 CPA ....................................................................................................... 348
Stationary target ................................................................................ 232 Crash logs ...................................................................................... 515–516
Color gain ...............................................................................................319 Cruise speed .......................................................................................... 144
Commissioning pre-requisites................................................................135 CSP......................................................................................................... 174
Commissioning steps .............................................................................135 CSP (Commence Search Point) ....................................................... 169, 171
Community edits.................................................................................... 246 Cursor info boxes .................................................................................. 201
Compass Cyclops load cells............................................................................ 56, 397
Alignment............................................................................................ 144 CZone plug and play .............................................................................406
Linearization ............................................................................. 468–469
Lock .................................................................................................... 144
Offset .................................................................................................. 143 D
Restart................................................................................................. 144 Dangerous targets alarm........................................................................231
Compass linearization ............................................................................135 AIS targets ..........................................................................................231
 Ignore static targets .................................................................... 128, 231 Display voltage .............................................................................51, 392
Radar targets ......................................................................................231 Distance....................................................................... 51, 393, 432–433
Show safe distance.............................................................................231 Engine.......................................................................... 51, 393, 432–433
Dashboard Environment................................................................................. 52, 394
Dynamic tile ......................................................................................... 95 Environmental ............................................................................ 432, 434
Dashboard app..........................................91, 390, 400, 402, 406, 411–412 Fresh water tank ..........................................................................55, 396
Advanced settings menu .....................................................................411 Fuel ..................................................................... 52, 393, 432, 434–435
Bidata page ....................................................................................... 404 Fuel (Gasoline) tank .....................................................................55, 396
COG/SOG filter ....................................................................................411 Generator..................................................................................... 55, 397
controls ..............................................................................................390 GNSS (GPS)........................................................................................ 432
Custom RPM red zone .........................................................................411 Grey water tank ...........................................................................55, 396
Customize data ...................................................................................391 Heading ...............................................................................53, 395, 432
Data damping ......................................................................................411 Inside environment ...................................................................... 53, 394
Data items....................................................................................50, 392 Live well tank ...............................................................................55, 396
Data pages .........................................................................................391 Load cells..................................................................................... 56, 397
Data response .....................................................................................411 Navigation............................................................................ 53, 395, 433
Depth response ...................................................................................411 Pilot............................................................................. 54, 395, 432–433
Engine dial ......................................................................................... 398 Speed ......................................................................... 54, 395, 432–433
Engine page....................................................................................... 398 Tanks ...........................................................................................55, 396
Fuel dial ............................................................................................. 403 Time ..................................................................................... 54, 396, 434
Fuel page........................................................................................... 403 Wind..................................................................................... 54, 396, 434
Heading response ...............................................................................411 Data import and export ..........................................................................103
Maximum RPM .....................................................................................411 Data items
Navigation dial ....................................................................................401 Dashboard ...................................................................................50, 392
Navigation page .................................................................................401 Data overlays ........................................................................ 49–50, 392
Race start page......................................................................... 302, 400 Sidebar ........................................................................................50, 392
Rolling road page ..............................................................................402 Data logging ....................................................................................56, 525
RPM Damping ......................................................................................411 Data overlay
RPM settings ........................................................................................411 Data items....................................................................................50, 392
Sailing dial......................................................................... 302, 399–400 Data overlays............................................................................ 49–50, 392
Sailing page ....................................................................................... 399 Data sources ........................................................................................... 69
Single data page................................................................................ 404 Selection .............................................................................................. 69
STW response .....................................................................................411 Datamaster ............................................................................................. 121
Tanks page ........................................................................................ 403 Designation......................................................................................... 121
Wind angle response...........................................................................411 Multiple ................................................................................................ 63
Wind shift bar..................................................................................... 293 Selection .............................................................................................. 63
Wind speed response..........................................................................411 Date format..................................................................................... 117, 409
Data .................................................................................53, 394, 432–433 Day color palette ................................................................................... 244
Battery .................................................................................50, 392, 432 Deadband angles ...................................................................................146
Black water tank ..........................................................................55, 396 Deep contour ........................................................................................ 247
Boat ............................................................................. 51, 392, 432, 435 Deep water color................................................................................... 247
Depth ............................................................................................51, 392 Delete rulers.......................................................................................... 242
Deleting a boat ...................................................................................... 510 Dock-to-dock..........................................................................................162
Demo DockSense app ....................................................................................... 93
Movie ................................................................................................. 108 Dockside wizard ..............................................................................135, 144
Profiles ............................................................................................... 108 Document history ..................................................................................558
Demo movie Documentation
format................................................................................................. 108 Operation instructions ......................................................................... 28
Demo profiles .........................................................................................192 Doppler..................................................................................................230
Density .................................................................................................. 248 Data source requirements ..................................................................351
Depth.............................................................................................432–433 Overview............................................................................................350
Depth calibration ............................................................................... 71, 313 Drive polarity ..........................................................................................145
Depth contour Drive type ........................................................................................136, 143
Options ...............................................................................................219 DSC
Depth contours................................................................. 56, 219, 221, 525 Distress call.........................................................................................132
Depth data....................................................................... 51, 392, 432–433 Notifications ........................................................................................132
Depth data logging..........................................................................56, 525 Target list ............................................................................................ 371
Depth gradient ...................................................................................... 247 Target options .................................................................................... 371
Depth logging..................................................................................56, 525 DSC targets .................................................................................... 223, 371
Depth markers....................................................................................... 378 Dynamic tile................................................................................. 91, 95–96
Depth measurement lost ....................................................................... 363
Depth offset....................................................................................... 71, 313
Depth recording .....................................................................................221 E
Depth soundings Easy Routing...........................................................................................162
Options ...............................................................................................219 Easy View .............................................................................................. 246
Units....................................................................................................218 Economy units ................................................................................. 117, 410
Depth units ..................................................................................... 117, 409 Eject SD card .................................................................................... 79, 103
Diagnostics............................................................................................ 537 Engage / Disengage autopilot................................................................. 79
NMEA 0183 ......................................................................................... 517 Engine
NMEA 2000 ........................................................................................518 Custom RPM red zone .........................................................................411
Product info ................................................................................ 515–516 Fault codes ........................................................................................ 427
Sonar recording ........................................................................ 525–526 Maximum RPM .....................................................................................411
Direct message ..................................................................................... 387 RPM Damping ......................................................................................411
Disable all Sounders................................................................................ 79 Engine connection wizard ...................................................................... 112
Display Engine data ..................................................................... 51, 393, 432–433
Buttons.......................................................................................... 59–60 Engine identification wizard .................................................................... 68
Controls ........................................................................................ 59–60 Engine manufacturer ...............................................................................113
Display brightness .................................................................................... 81 Engine page
Display data.....................................................................................50, 392 Engine dial ......................................................................................... 398
Display mode...................................................................................... 79, 81 Engine quad display ................................................................................113
Display standby ....................................................................................... 59 Engine selection ..................................................................................... 112
Display voltage data .........................................................................51, 392 Entertainment systems .......................................................................... 475
Distance data .................................................................. 51, 393, 432–433 Environment data ............................................................ 52, 394, 432, 434
Distance units ................................................................................. 117, 409 Environment sensors...............................................................................113
eS Series ......................................................................................... 34, 549 SITREP ............................................................................................... 376
Ethernet .................................................................................................550 SRU .....................................................................................................184
Event groups .......................................................................................... 157 Accepting managed search ............................................................185
Export Unit name ...........................................................................................361
Routes................................................................................................ 106 Unit type .............................................................................................361
Settings.............................................................................................. 105 Fish detection.........................................................................................318
Tracks ................................................................................................ 106 Detection sensitivity............................................................................318
User data ........................................................................................... 105 Fish depth labels.................................................................................318
Waypoints .......................................................................................... 106 Fish detection beep ............................................................................318
External storage Fish icons............................................................................................318
Eject SD card ....................................................................................... 79 Fish mapping, See Chart Fish mapping mode
Inserting ................................................................................................ 41 Fishfinder
Removal ......................................................................................... 41–42 A-scope.............................................................................................. 323
Background ........................................................................................321
Boat icon.............................................................................................321
F Bottom colors......................................................................................321
Factory reset ........................................................................... 70, 122, 520 Bottom fill........................................................................................... 323
File browser.................................................................................... 103, 105 Bottom lock........................................................................................ 323
First power up ......................................................................................... 63 Color palette ...................................................................................... 322
First responder .......................................................................................361 Color targets by ..................................................................................321
AIS mode .................................................................................... 361, 375 Color threshold ......................................................................... 322–323
Asset type ...........................................................................................361 Depth lines......................................................................................... 323
Broadcasting a route ......................................................................... 366 Fish depth labels................................................................................ 326
Cancelling sent routes ....................................................................... 368 Fish detection ........................................................................... 325–326
Context menu .................................................................................... 377 Fish detection sensitivity.................................................................... 326
Data logging ...............................................................................361, 364 Fish icons........................................................................................... 326
FID ............................................................................................. 361–362 Invert colors ............................................................................... 321–323
FID checksums .................................................................................. 362 Range lines ........................................................................................ 322
Following received route ................................................................... 368 Scroll speed .............................................................................. 322–323
Messages app ..............................................................................93, 103 Show targets as ..................................................................................321
Messaging app .................................................................................. 385 target colors................................................................................321, 323
MMSI ...................................................................................................361 View mode..........................................................................................321
No Hdg .............................................................................................. 363 View selection buttons ...................................................................... 322
No SOG.............................................................................................. 363 White line ........................................................................................... 323
OneShot TOI settings .........................................................................361 Zoom mode ........................................................................................310
Passphrase .........................................................................................361 Fishfinder app..................................................................................90, 326
Password protection ...........................................................................361 App overview.....................................................................................309
Receiving a route............................................................................... 368 Auto range ..........................................................................................310
Route broadcast ................................................................................ 365 Channels.............................................................................................315
Route receipt ..................................................................................... 365 Controls ..............................................................................................310
SAR divert ...........................................................................................186 Frequency tuning................................................................................319
Sending a route ................................................................................. 366 History.................................................................................................318
 No source ...........................................................................................312 Differential positioning................................................................. 99–100
No transducer .....................................................................................312 Internal receiver............................................................................ 99, 101
Range .................................................................................................310 SBAS ............................................................................................ 99–100
Scroll back ..........................................................................................318 GNSS (GPS) constellations. ..................................................................... 96
Sonar recording ........................................................................ 525–526 GNSS (GPS) data ................................................................................... 432
Tune frequency...................................................................................319 GNSS (GPS) Settings ............................................................................... 98
Waypoints ...........................................................................................315 GNSS constellation selection ................................................................ 100
Zoom mode ........................................................................................316 GNSS/GPS troubleshooting...................................................................522
Zoom view .......................................................................................... 317 GNSS(GPS)
Fishing AOI ............................................................................................ 246 Data ............................................................................................. 53, 394
Fishing range......................................................................................... 248 GNSS(GPS) data .............................................................................. 53, 394
Fixed angles Goto waypoint ........................................................................ 211–212, 299
Downwind angle ................................................................................. 112 GPS....................................................................................................96, 98
Upwind angle...................................................................................... 112 gpx......................................................................................................... 105
FOV layer .............................................................................................. 245 gS Series ......................................................................................... 34, 549
Fuel data................................................................. 52, 393, 432, 434–435 Guard zone alarms ................................................................................350
Fuel manager .........................................................................................103 Guest mode...........................................................................................509
Set-up .................................................................................................104 Guest profiles ......................................................................................... 107
Fuel page Gybe .......................................................................................................145
Fuel dial ............................................................................................. 403
Fuel range ............................................................................................ 200
Fuel tanks H
Fuel ..................................................................................................... 116 Harbor mode ......................................................................................... 339
Fuel (propulsive) ................................................................................. 116 Hard over time........................................................................................145
Not for propulsion............................................................................... 116 Hard-over time ................................................................................135, 137
Fusion.................................................................................................... 476 Heading data...........................................................................53, 395, 432
Height correction................................................................................... 248
High res bathy ....................................................................................... 246
G Homescreen ............................................................................................ 87
Galileo ..................................................................................................... 96 Background image .............................................................................. 88
Generator configuration ..........................................................................113 Dynamic tile .................................................................................. 95–96
Generator data ................................................................................ 55, 397 Mode icons .......................................................................................... 94
Generators Settings menu..................................................................................... 110
Configure .............................................................................................114 Settings menus .................................................................................... 88
GLONASS ................................................................................................ 97 Settings pages ..................................................................................... 43
Glossary Homescreen customization.................................................................... 119
Navigation.......................................................................................... 554 Homescreen pages ................................................................................. 88
Sailing ................................................................................................556
GNSS / GPS ............................................................................................. 87
GNSS (GPS) ............................................................................................. 98 I
COG / SOG filter ........................................................................... 99, 101 Image..................................................................................................... 105
Constellations ................................................................................ 97, 99 Import
 Settings.............................................................................................. 105 Premium.................................................................................... 204, 492
User data ........................................................................................... 105 LightHouse™ charts
Import tank calibration............................................................................ 116 Premium subscription .......................................................................... 87
Import/export..........................................................................................103 LightHouse Charts........................................................................ 204, 492
Initial setup .............................................................................................. 63 Lighthouse third-party apps
Inside environment data.................................................................. 53, 394 Install................................................................................................. 500
Intel LightHouse third-party apps .................................................................. 499
Target list ........................................................................................... 370 Background app ............................................................................... 500
Targets ............................................................................................... 370 Lighthouse_id.txt ................................................................................... 105
Intel target Limitation on use (LOU) ........................................................................... 68
Target options ................................................................................... 370 Limitations on Use ................................................................................... 87
Intel targets............................................................................................ 223 Limitations on Use (LoU).......................................................................... 87
Internet connection ...........................................................................83–84 Linearise transducer ................................................................................ 74
IP address.............................................................................................. 537 Linearization ................................................................................. 468–469
IP address conflict ................................................................................. 532 LiveView ................................................................................................. 157
IP device.................................................................................................123 Load cells ........................................................................................ 56, 397
IP networking.........................................................................................550 Locked heading............................................................................... 141, 143
IRPCS / COLREGS ..................................................................................231 Loran
iTC-5 calibration ...................................................................................... 73 ASF 1 ............................................................................................ 118, 410
ASF 2 ........................................................................................... 118, 410
Chain............................................................................................ 118, 410
J Slave 1 .......................................................................................... 118, 410
JL Audio ................................................................................................ 476 Slave 2 ......................................................................................... 118, 410
Loran TDs ...............................................................................................156

L
Languages......................................................................................... 64, 111
M
Selection .............................................................................................. 111 Magnetic deviation ................................................................................ 469
Lat/Long format ............................................................................... 117, 410 Magnetic interference ........................................................................... 468
Laylines ................................................................................ 286, 292, 299 Main menu............................................................................................... 43
Adjust for tides...................................................................................289 Man Over Board (MOB) ........................................................................... 87
displaying and interpreting ................................................................ 287 Man Overboard (MOB) ............................................................................131
Fixed angles ......................................................................................288 Manual variation .............................................................................. 118, 410
Polar...................................................................................................289 Marine protected areas ......................................................................... 246
system requirements ......................................................................... 287 Measure..................................................................................................241
Wind shifts .........................................................................................292 Memory cards
LightHouse Compatibility ........................................................................................ 39
Downgrade .................................................................................. 34, 549 Menus
LightHouse 4 Pop-over .............................................................................................. 44
Compatible displays ............................................................................. 31 Settings............................................................................................... 110
LightHouse charts ................................................................................. 239 Types ................................................................................................... 43
LightHouse™ charts Mercury ................................................................................... 415–416, 418
 Active Trim ......................................................................................... 423 Context menus..................................................................................... 44
Active Trim sidebar ............................................................................ 423 Main menu ........................................................................................... 43
Alarms.................................................................................................416 MFD apps ................................................................................................ 88
Alternator voltage ...............................................................................416 Audio app ............................................................................................ 92
Autoheading ...................................................................................... 422 Chart app ............................................................................................. 89
Autopilot control ................................................................................420 Dashboard app .....................................................................................91
Autopilot sidebar ...............................................................................420 DockSense app ................................................................................... 93
Autopilot standby............................................................................... 423 Fishfinder app ......................................................................................90
Cruise control .................................................................................... 425 Mercury app...................................................................................91, 414
Enabling cruise control ...................................................................... 425 Messages app ..............................................................................93, 103
Enabling troll control.......................................................................... 425 NeuBoat Dock app .............................................................................. 93
Engaging Autoheading ...................................................................... 422 PDF viewer app ................................................................................... 92
Engaging Route mode ....................................................................... 422 Radar app ............................................................................................ 89
Engine messages................................................................................416 Video app ............................................................................................ 92
Fault codes ........................................................................................ 427 YachtSense app................................................................................... 93
Information messages ........................................................................418 Yamaha app......................................................................................... 92
Notices................................................................................................ 417 Yamaha HDMI app............................................................................... 92
Route mode ....................................................................................... 422 MFD Apps
Sidebar ...............................................................................................418 YouTube ............................................................................................ 472
SkyHook .............................................................................................419 YouTube TV....................................................................................... 472
SkyHook sidebar ................................................................................419 MicroSD
Splitscreen pages ...............................................................................415 Adaptor ................................................................................................ 39
Steering angle indicator......................................................................416 Inserting ......................................................................................... 40–41
Troll control........................................................................................ 424 Removal ......................................................................................... 40–41
Warnings ............................................................................................. 417 Minimum safe depth .................................................................. 65–66, 162
Mercury app ......................................................................................91, 414 Minimum safe height ....................................................................... 66, 162
Sport exhaust..................................................................................... 426 Minimum safe width..........................................................................67, 162
Steering angle indicator..................................................................... 426 Miracast ..................................................................................................123
Message inbox ...................................................................................... 385 Mobile apps...........................................................................................490
Messages Raymarine ...........................................................................................491
Character limit............................................................................385–387 Mobile sync ............................................................................................103
Export ................................................................................................ 386 Motor phasing ........................................................................................145
New broadcast................................................................................... 386 Multifunction display operation
New direct message ..................................................................386–387 Settings page....................................................................................... 49
Received ............................................................................................ 386 Sidebar menu ...................................................................................... 48
Sent.................................................................................................... 386 Multiple data sources (MDS).................................................................... 69
Sort by ............................................................................................... 386 Mute ......................................................................................................480
Messages app ......................................................................... 93, 103, 385 My data.............................................................................................88, 103
Messaging app My profiles .............................................................................................. 107
Transmission type.............................................................................. 385
MFD alarms .......................................................................................... 500
MFD app
N PDF........................................................................................................ 105
Navigating .............................................................................. 211–212, 299 PDF Viewer
Navigation controls .............................................................................................. 488
Glossary ............................................................................................. 554 Opening files ..................................................................................... 487
Navigation data ....................................................................... 53, 395, 433 Overview............................................................................................ 487
Navigation mode ............................................................................. 141, 143 Searching a PDF ................................................................................ 488
Navigation page PDF viewer app ....................................................................................... 92
Navigation dial ....................................................................................401 PGNs .....................................................................................................540
Navionics Pilot data......................................................................... 54, 395, 432–433
SonarChart Live .................................................................................222 Pilot icon.................................................................................................140
Navionics plotter sync ........................................................................... 496 Pilot sidebar............................................................................................140
Networking (IP) Placing a waypoint ......................................................................... 155–156
Overview............................................................................................550 Point camera here ......................................................................... 202, 331
NeuBoat Dock app .................................................................................. 93 point to point ..........................................................................................241
New features .......................................................................... 32, 543–544 Polar table
NMEA 0183 Activate polar......................................................................................291
Baud rate ............................................................................................125 Adjustment................................................................................. 291–292
Exporting Routes ................................................................................381 Copy ..................................................................................................292
Exporting waypoints ...........................................................................381 csv file layout .....................................................................................290
Importing Routes ...............................................................................380 Delete polar .......................................................................................292
Importing waypoints ..........................................................................380 Duplicate............................................................................................292
NMEA 0183 diagnostics.......................................................................... 517 Importing............................................................................................290
NMEA 2000...........................................................................................540 Rename polar ....................................................................................292
NMEA 2000 diagnostics ........................................................................518 Pop-over menus ...................................................................................... 44
Notifications............................................................................................. 45 Position.................................................................................................... 98
Position logging...............................................................................56, 525
Position sensor
O Find me ...............................................................................................123
Object detection.....................................................................................461 Find Me ...............................................................................................123
ClearCruise settings .......................................................................... 462 Position sensor LED
Object information................................................................................. 201 Find Me ...............................................................................................122
Obstruction alarm .................................................................................. 237 Go dark ...............................................................................................122
Parameters......................................................................................... 237 LEDs off ..............................................................................................122
Offboarding ............................................................................................513 Power off ................................................................................................. 79
Offshore mode ...................................................................................... 339 Power steering ....................................................................................... 144
Power swipe ............................................................................................ 59
Power troubleshooting ...........................................................................519
P Powering off ..................................................................................... 58–59
Powering on ............................................................................................ 58
Page settings menu........................................................................326, 412
Premium subscription.............................................................................. 87
Pairing
Pressure units.................................................................................. 117, 410
Quantum radar..................................................................................... 82
Primary MFD ........................................................................................... 121
RMK keypad......................................................................................... 82
Product information ............................................................................... 537 Range rings........................................................................................ 339
Product support..................................................................................... 536 Preferred number........................................................................... 339
Profiles..................................................................................................... 87 Sea..................................................................................................... 353
Sector blanking..................................................................................230
Selecting a scanner ........................................................................... 336
Q Selection ............................................................................................229
Quick adjust menu..................................................................................193 Sensitivity controls ............................................................................. 353
Standby.............................................................................................. 336
Stop transmitting.................................................................................. 79
R Target options ...................................................................................228
Target settings................................................................................... 347
Race start line
Timed transmit ................................................................................... 337
Creation .............................................................................................300
Transmit .............................................................................................229
Delete .................................................................................................301
Radar app ........................................................................................89, 328
Edit......................................................................................................301
AIS targets .......................................................................................... 341
Race start Line
Context menu .................................................................................... 329
creating..............................................................................................300
Dragging context menu ...................................................................... 331
Race start page
Radar Doppler
Sailing dial................................................................................. 302, 400
Color palettes .....................................................................................351
Race Timer
Mode...................................................................................................351
starting ................................................................................................301
Radar PAD ............................................................................................. 245
Radar .....................................................................................229, 244, 346
Radar settings
Antenna size selection....................................................................... 337
Advanced menu................................................................................. 357
Bearing alignment.............................................................................. 338
Antenna size selection....................................................................... 354
Blank sectors ..................................................................................... 352
Beam sharpening............................................................................... 356
Color Gain.......................................................................................... 353
Beam sharpening amount.................................................................. 356
Comparison ....................................................................................... 332
Bearing alignment.............................................................................. 357
Compatible scanners .......................................................................... 331
Blank sector ....................................................................................... 357
Controls ............................................................................................. 328
Boat position...................................................................................... 355
Dual range ................................................................................. 229, 337
Channel shown in this app................................................................. 354
Dual range channel............................................................................229
Color palette ...................................................................................... 355
Features............................................................................................. 332
Dual range ......................................................................................... 354
Gain ................................................................................................... 353
Expanded returns .............................................................................. 356
MARPA .......................................................................................228, 345
Expansion level.................................................................................. 356
Modes ................................................................................................ 338
Installation menu................................................................................ 356
Overlay ..............................................................................................230
Interference rejection ........................................................................ 356
Overlay color palette .........................................................................230
Interference rejection level................................................................ 356
Overlay visibility.................................................................................230
Main Bang Suppression (MBS)........................................................... 357
Overlay without heading....................................................................230
Menu.................................................................................................. 353
Powering off....................................................................................... 336
Motion mode...................................................................................... 355
Rain .................................................................................................... 353
Near Target Enhancement................................................................. 356
Range ................................................................................................230
Orientation ......................................................................................... 355
Range and Bearing ............................................................................ 340
 Page settings menu ........................................................................... 358 True mode ......................................................................................... 347
Parking offset..................................................................................... 357 Vectors .............................................................................................. 347
Preferences menu ............................................................................. 356 Radar targets ......................................................................................... 223
Presentation menu............................................................................. 355 Radar troubleshooting............................................................................521
Radar Rotation Speed........................................................................ 356 Range rings ................................................................................... 244, 339
Range Fusion..................................................................................... 354 RayControl.................................................................................... 490, 496
Range ring labels ............................................................................... 355 Raymarine app
Range ring mode ............................................................................... 355 Guest mode .......................................................................................509
Range rings........................................................................................ 355 RayNet ...................................................................................................550
Reset......................................................................................... 357–358 RayRemote .................................................................................... 490, 497
Rings .................................................................................................. 355 RayView......................................................................................... 490, 497
Scanner.............................................................................................. 354 RealBathy ........................................................................ 56, 221, 247, 525
Sea clutter curve................................................................................ 357 Record depth data................................................................................. 247
Show waypoints................................................................................. 355 Recording sonar ....................................................................................526
Standby.............................................................................................. 354 Recovery mode .....................................................................................520
STC preset ......................................................................................... 357 Reeds almanac ...................................................................................... 239
Timed transmit ................................................................................... 354 Regulatory approvals .............................................................................. 25
Transmission menu............................................................................ 354 Responder
Transmit ............................................................................................. 354 Settings...............................................................................................361
Transmit frequency ............................................................................ 356 Restore ...................................................................................................103
Tune adjust ........................................................................................ 356 Rockford Fosgate .................................................................................. 475
Tune preset ....................................................................................... 357 Rolling road page ..................................................................................402
View & motion menu.......................................................................... 354 Rotating mast........................................................................................... 77
VRM/EBL reference ........................................................................... 356 Route ......................................................................................................159
Wired adapter channel ...................................................................... 357 Add waypoint......................................................................................163
Zero range ......................................................................................... 358 Capacity .............................................................................. 159, 166, 383
Zero rotation position ........................................................................ 357 Color ...................................................................................................164
Radar target Creation ..............................................................................................159
Automatic acquisition ............................................................... 345–346 Delete .................................................................................................164
Cancel target ..................................................................................... 348 Export .................................................................................................164
Cancel targets............................................................................229, 346 Follow ........................................................................... 163, 213–214, 217
Clear trails.......................................................................................... 348 Follow from here.................................................................................163
Context menu .................................................................... 195, 330, 348 Hide/show...........................................................................................164
History................................................................................................ 347 highlighting ........................................................................................ 160
Information......................................................................................... 348 Importing.............................................................................................162
Manual acquisition .....................................................................228, 345 List .............................................................................................. 103, 163
Reference mode ........................................................................ 347–348 New route ...........................................................................................163
Relative mode.................................................................................... 347 Options ...............................................................................................163
Shown CPA ........................................................................................ 348 Rename...............................................................................................164
Symbols ..................................................................................... 228, 344 Reverse...............................................................................................163
Tracking ............................................................................................. 344 Show/Hide ..........................................................................................163
Trails (Wakes) ..................................................................................... 348 Speed .................................................................................................164
 Time ....................................................................................................164 Safe width, minimum .............................................................................. 112
View route plan...................................................................................163 Sail performance .................................................................... 112, 286, 289
Route options .........................................................................................164 Boat type ...........................................................................................289
Routes Downwind angle ................................................................................289
Broadcasting (First responder)........................................................... 366 Fixed Angles ......................................................................................286
Cancelling sent routes ....................................................................... 368 Mirrored TWA ....................................................................................286
Sending (First responder) .................................................................. 366 Polar............................................................................................ 112, 286
Sharing................................................................................................165 Upwind angle.....................................................................................289
RSW Wired Sail plan
Configuration ....................................................................................... 77 Import.................................................................................................295
Rudder Layout ................................................................................................ 294
Damping ............................................................................................. 144 Recommendations ............................................................................. 294
Limit ....................................................................................................145 Template file ...................................................................................... 294
Offset ..................................................................................................145 Sail plan recommendation...................................................................... 112
Reverse reference ..............................................................................145 Sailing.................................................................................................... 293
Rudder bar......................................................................................142, 245 Data page ..........................................................................................296
Rudder bar indicator...............................................................................218 Glossary .............................................................................................556
Rudder Damping ....................................................................................146 Race start line ........................................................................... 299–300
Rudder limit ............................................................................................ 137 Race timer.................................................................................. 299, 301
Ruler .......................................................................................................241 SmartStart ..........................................................................................299
Steer to wind......................................................................................296
Time to burn ......................................................................................299
S Wind vane mode................................................................................296
S-63 Encrypted Charts ..........................................................................206 Sailing dial .............................................................................................402
Base cells...........................................................................................208 Sailing dials ...........................................................................................400
Cell permits........................................................................................208 Sailing page
Chart app settings ............................................................................. 210 Sailing dial.......................................................................................... 399
Cumulative update files .....................................................................209 SAR.........................................................................................................168
Expiry ................................................................................................. 210 Abort ...................................................................................................186
Installation process ............................................................................206 creation................................................................................. 169, 171, 174
Installed charts................................................................................... 210 Divert .......................................................................................... 185–186
MFD activation file ............................................................................. 207 Diverting .............................................................................................186
Purchasing .........................................................................................208 End divert............................................................................................185
Scheme administrator certificate ............................................... 207, 210 Expanding square pattern ................................................................... 171
SSE-06 notification ............................................................................208 Managed broadcast............................................................................182
SSE-22 notification ............................................................................208 pattern ................................................................................................168
Update charts .................................................................................... 210 Polygon search ................................................................................... 178
User permit ........................................................................................ 210 Polygon search pattern....................................................................... 178
User permits file.................................................................................208 Resume ...............................................................................................185
Safe depth, minimum.............................................................................. 112 search controls ...................................................................................185
Safe distance..........................................................................................231 Searches list .......................................................................................188
Safe height, minimum ............................................................................. 112 Sector search pattern .........................................................................169
 SMC instructed divert .........................................................................186 Data 2 .................................................................................................. 46
Trackline search (non-return).............................................................. 176 Data items....................................................................................50, 392
Trackline search (non-return) pattern ................................................. 177 Mercury......................................................................................... 48, 418
Trackline search (return) ..................................................................... 175 Pilot...................................................................................................... 47
Trackline search (return) pattern......................................................... 176 Race start............................................................................................. 47
Un-managed broadcast ..................................................................... 180 Search.................................................................................................. 47
SAR pattern Selection .............................................................................................142
Receipt................................................................................................ 181 Selector................................................................................................ 46
SAR Pattern Trolling ........................................................................... 47, 148, 150–152
Set and Drifts effects ................................................................... 170, 173 Sidebars
Save settings ......................................................................................... 106 Audio ................................................................................................. 478
Save to .................................................................................................. 247 Simulator ................................................................................................192
Saving See also Demo
Product information ............................................................................515 Single data page ................................................................................... 404
SBAS ............................................................................................... 99–100 Sirius......................................................................................................258
SBAS selection .................................................................................97, 100 Subscription ................................................................................261, 272
Screen mirroring.....................................................................................123 Sirius XM ............................................................................................... 246
Screen resolutions.................................................................................. 118 SiriusXM ................................................................................................ 475
Screenshot .............................................................................................. 79 SiriusXM weather .................................................................................. 263
Search and Rescue, See SAR Slew to Cue ................................................................................... 202, 331
Search and Rescue (SAR) patterns......................................................... 174 Software
SeaTalk NG ............................................................................................122 Compatible MFDs .............................................................................. 548
Secure messaging................................................................................. 385 Compatible software.......................................................................... 546
Service Center....................................................................................... 536 Software updates ..............................................................................35–36
Setting controls ....................................................................................... 44 Software version....................................................................................... 31
Settings Sonar
Import.................................................................................................. 107 Channel selection ................................................................................311
Restore ....................................................................................... 105, 107 Depth markers ................................................................................... 378
Settings menu Disable all sounders ............................................................................ 79
Regulatory approvals........................................................................... 25 Gain ....................................................................................................319
Settings pages......................................................................................... 43 History.................................................................................................318
Settings reset .......................................................................................... 70 Intensity ..............................................................................................319
setup.......................................................................................................361 Noise filter...........................................................................................319
Shallow depth shading .......................................................................... 248 Sensitivity controls ..............................................................................319
Shared brightness ................................................................................. 120 Surface filter........................................................................................319
Shortcuts menu ....................................................................................... 78 Sonar logs ............................................................................................. 248
Show contours....................................................................................... 247 Sonar recording...................................................................... 56, 525–526
Sidebar .................................................................................................... 46 SonarChart Live.............................................................. 56, 222, 248, 525
Alpha display ....................................................................................... 47 Tide correction...................................................................................222
Audio ................................................................................................... 48 Speed
Customizing ......................................................................................... 48 Adjust STW .......................................................................................... 75
Data 1 ................................................................................................... 46 Calibration............................................................................................ 75
 Export calibration data......................................................................... 75 Fuel tanks ............................................................................................114
Import calibration data ......................................................................... 75 Gray water tanks..................................................................................114
Reset to default.................................................................................... 75 Live well tanks .....................................................................................114
Set STW to SOG .................................................................................. 75 Tanks page............................................................................................ 403
Speed data ..................................................................... 54, 395, 432–433 Target acquisition
Speed input ............................................................................................ 143 Data source requirements ................................................................. 344
Speed units .................................................................................... 117, 409 Target context menu
Splashscreen customization................................................................... 119 Data reference mode......................................................................... 349
Splashscreen resolution ......................................................................... 118 Target list.......................................................................................229, 346
Sports fishing......................................................................................... 246 Target of Interest (TOI)
Spotify ..................................................................................................... 33 OneShot............................................................................................. 373
SRU Position updates ................................................................................ 374
search controls ...................................................................................185 Received ............................................................................................ 372
Startup wizard ......................................................................................... 64 Repeating .......................................................................................... 373
Status area ............................................................................................. 101 Sent.................................................................................................... 372
Status area icons ................................................................................... 102 Target icons ....................................................................................... 372
STEDs Transmission rate............................................................................... 373
Software updates................................................................................361 Target options ....................................................... 226, 228, 370–371, 374
Steer to Hdg ...........................................................................................142 Target tracking ...................................................................................... 223
Steer to Nav............................................................................................142 AIS ..................................................................................................... 223
Steer to wind .........................................................................................296 DSC.................................................................................................... 223
Stop Radar transmitting ........................................................................... 79 Intel .................................................................................................... 223
Streets & POI ......................................................................................... 245 Radar ................................................................................................. 223
Support forum ....................................................................................... 538 TOI ..................................................................................................... 223
Switching off..................................................................................... 58–59 Targets
Switching on ............................................................................................ 58 Intel .................................................................................................... 370
System checks Targets of Interest ................................................................................. 223
Bearing alignment.............................................................................. 338 Technical support..........................................................................536, 538
System Datum ................................................................................. 118, 410 Temperature units .......................................................................... 117, 409
System time ............................................................................................. 87 Thermal camera
Tracking ..................................................................................... 202, 331
third-party apps
T LightHouse third-party apps .............................................................. 499
Tacking ..................................................................................................298 Third-party apps .................................................................................... 499
Take Screenshot ..................................................................................... 79 Tide correction ...................................................................................... 248
Tank calibration .......................................................................................113 Tide height ............................................................................................ 278
Tank data.........................................................................................55, 396 Tides mode
Tanks .......................................................................................................114 Animation controls............................................................................. 277
Black water tanks.................................................................................114 Displaying graphs ..............................................................................280
Calibration........................................................................................... 115 Time data................................................................................. 54, 396, 434
Fresh water tanks ................................................................................114 Time format ..................................................................................... 117, 410
Fuel (gasoline) tanks ............................................................................114 TOI
 OneShot decay .................................................................................. 373 Sonar ................................................................................................. 523
OneShot decay times ........................................................................ 373
OneShot Delay .................................................................................. 373
Target list ........................................................................................... 375 U
Touchlock ................................................................................................ 79 Units ............................................................................................... 117, 409
Track Unmute..................................................................................................480
Capacity ......................................................................................166, 383 Unpairing
Track with camera ......................................................................... 202, 331 RMK keypad......................................................................................... 82
Tracking Upgrading, software ................................................................................ 35
Thermal Camera ........................................................................ 202, 331 Used for propulsion................................................................................ 116
Tracks .....................................................................................................164 User Configurable key............................................................................. 70
Capacity ..............................................................................................164 User data ................................................................................................103
Creation ..............................................................................................164 Import.................................................................................................. 107
Customize ...........................................................................................165 Restore ............................................................................................... 107
Interval ................................................................................................165 Back up .......................................................................................... 105
List .............................................................................................. 103, 165 User interface
Sharing................................................................................................165 Languages ........................................................................................... 111
Traditional sonar....................................................................................305 User profiles ........................................................................................... 107
Trails clearing ........................................................................................ 348
Trails reset............................................................................................. 348
Training courses .................................................................................... 538 V
Transducer
Variation .......................................................................................... 118, 410
Temperature calibration ............................................................... 72, 313
Vessel hull type ...............................................................................135, 143
Temperature settings.................................................................... 72, 313
Vessel Hull Type ....................................................................................135
Transfer ownership.................................................................................513
Vessel to point........................................................................................241
Trip
VesselView
Counter...............................................................................................103
Autopilot control ................................................................................420
Trip logs..................................................................................................103
Autopilot sidebar ...............................................................................420
Trolling motor .........................................................................................148
Video ...................................................................................................... 441
Alarms.................................................................................................153
Feed selection ................................................................................... 446
Anchor mode ..................................................................................... 150
Renaming feeds................................................................................. 442
Autopilot integration ...........................................................................148
Video Analytics.............................................................................. 461–462
Direct control ......................................................................................148
Video app ................................................................................................ 92
Distance limit.......................................................................................153
Controls ............................................................................................. 442
Hold heading mode ............................................................................ 151
Image flip ........................................................................................... 443
Integration...........................................................................................148
Mirror image ...................................................................................... 443
Manual control ................................................................................... 150
Video app pages .................................................................................... 441
Navigation mode ................................................................................152
Video playback...................................................................................... 105
Wireless fob integration......................................................................148
Video, viewing multiple inputs................................................................ 441
Troubleshooting .....................................................................................515
View route plan ......................................................................................163
Augmented Reality ............................................................................529
Visibility ................................................................................................. 248
IP addresses ...................................................................................... 532
Volume units.................................................................................... 117, 410
W Subscription ................................................................................261, 272
Surface observation stations layer..................................................... 267
Warranty ..........................................................................................25, 536
Surface pressure................................................................................266
Waterline to tdcr .................................................................................... 247
Surface pressure layer.......................................................................268
Waypoint ................................................................................................155
Watchbox ................................................................................... 270–271
capacity...............................................................................................155
Watchbox alerts .................................................................................. 271
Capacity ......................................................................................166, 383
Wave direction............................................................................266, 271
Delete .................................................................................................163
Wave height.......................................................................................266
DSC.....................................................................................................132
Wave Height ....................................................................................... 271
Edit......................................................................................................163
Wave period ..............................................................................266, 272
Goto .................................................................................... 211–212, 299
Weather radar ....................................................................................266
List ......................................................................................................103
Weather radar layer ...........................................................................266
Placement ................................................................................... 315–316
Wind................................................................................................... 270
Remove from route .............................................................................163
Wind arrows....................................................................................... 270
Waypoint at Range and Bearing............................................................ 365
Wind barbs......................................................................................... 270
Waypoint management ..........................................................................156
Wind direction............................................................................266, 270
Waypoint, place from AR flag ................................................................ 465
Wind fields ......................................................................................... 270
Waypoints
Wind Radii.......................................................................................... 270
Delete ................................................................................................. 157
Wind speed........................................................................................ 270
Details.................................................................................................158
Weather Radar layer.............................................................................. 245
Event groups....................................................................................... 157
WeatherMarine zone boundaries .......................................................... 272
Group..................................................................................................156
WeatherWatchbox alerts ....................................................................... 272
Group list ............................................................................................ 157
WeatherWatchbox range....................................................................... 272
List ......................................................................................................156
WeatherWind symbol ............................................................................ 272
LiveView ............................................................................................. 157
Wi-Fi
New group .......................................................................................... 157
Settings......................................................................................... 84–85
Placing a waypoint...................................................................... 155–156
Wind
Sharing................................................................................................165
Align wind transducer .......................................................................... 74
Symbols ..............................................................................................158
Angle adjustment................................................................................. 74
Weather
Data type ............................................................................................145
Settings.............................................................................................. 272
Linearise transducer ............................................................................ 74
Weather layers ...................................................................................... 264
Shift.....................................................................................................145
Weather mode...............................................................................263, 339
Speed adjustment................................................................................ 74
Animated weather .............................................................................265
Wind data ................................................................................ 54, 396, 434
Animated weather layers ...................................................................265
Wind shift............................................................................................... 297
Cities layer ......................................................................................... 267
Wind shift bar ................................................................................245, 293
Cloud tops layer................................................................................. 267
Wind speed units............................................................................. 117, 410
Context menu .................................................................................... 263
Wind transducer
Lightning layer ................................................................................... 267
Configuration ....................................................................................... 77
Reports .............................................................................................. 263
Wind vane mode ...................................................................................296
Sea surface temperature layer ..........................................................268
Tacking ..............................................................................................298
Storm cast..........................................................................................269
Wireless display......................................................................................123
Storm tracks.......................................................................................269
Y Warning indicator............................................................................... 437
Yamaha gateway ................................................................................... 430
YachtSense
Yamaha HDMI ....................................................................................... 430
Off-boat features................................................................................506
Yamaha HDMI app .................................................................................. 92
On-boat features................................................................................504
YouTube ................................................................................................ 472
YachtSense app ...................................................................................... 93
MFD controls ..................................................................................... 472
YachtSense ecosystem .........................................................................504
YouTube TV .......................................................................................... 472
YachtSense Link
IP address conflict.......................................................................... 34, 84
Network connection ...................................................................... 34, 84 Z
Status ................................................................................................. 102
Yahama app Zoom mode
Controls .............................................................................................. 431 Fishfinder ............................................................................................316
Yamaha app ............................................................................ 92, 430–431 Zoom view .......................................................................................... 317
Advanced........................................................................................... 438
data items ........................................................................................... 431
Data page .......................................................................................... 432
Engine instances reset....................................................................... 438
Engine page................................................................................ 431, 435
Engine trim......................................................................................... 437
Fuel flow offset .................................................................................. 439
Gateway reset.................................................................................... 438
Overview............................................................................................ 430
Requirements ..................................................................................... 431
Settings.............................................................................................. 438
Status
Engine warming up ........................................................................ 436
Immobilizer lock ............................................................................. 437
Synchronization.............................................................................. 437
Status indicator .................................................................................. 436
Tanks ................................................................................................. 437
Tanks page ........................................................................................ 434
Transmission ...................................................................................... 436
Trim Calibration ................................................................................. 439
Troll mode.......................................................................................... 438
Warning
Catalyst .......................................................................................... 437
Check engine warning ................................................................... 437
Low oil pressure............................................................................. 437
Low voltage.................................................................................... 437
Overheat ........................................................................................ 437
Steering system ............................................................................. 437
Water in fuel ................................................................................... 437
 Raymarine (UK / EU)
Marine House, Cartwright Drive,
Fareham, Hampshire.
PO15 5RJ.
United Kingdom.

Tel: (+44) (0)1329 246 700

www.raymarine.co.uk

Raymarine (US)
110 Lowell Road,
Hudson, NH 03051.
United States of America.

Tel: (+1) 603-324-7900

www.raymarine.com